ABBOTT ARCHITECT C16000c8000i2000i2000srci8200ci16200

ARCHITECT
System Operations
Manual (i 2000,
i2000SR, c 8000,
ci 8200, c 16000,
ci 16200)
201837-104
Abbott Laboratories 1998, 2007 Abbott Laboratories

Abbott Park, IL 60064 ARCHITECT is a registered trademark
of Abbott Laboratories
Patents Pending
Table of contents
Read me first. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Read me-1

Customer support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-3
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-4
Proprietary statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-5
Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-6
ARCHITECT c System warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-7
ARCHITECT i System warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-8
Abbott warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-9
Agency approvals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-10
Trademark statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-11
System labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-13
System documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-1
Printed documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-2
Organization of the printed operations manual . System documentation-2
Conventions for the printed documentation . . . System documentation-4
Online documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-6
Conventions for the online documentation . . . . System documentation-8
Help window descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-10
Help window toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-12
Help window topic pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-13
Help window navigation pane (online operations manual) . . . . System
documentation-14
Contents tab (online operations manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System
documentation-15
Organization of the online operations manual . . . . . . . . . . . System
documentation-17
Index tab (online operations manual) . . System documentation-18
Search tab (online operations manual) . System documentation-19
Favorites tab (online operations manual)System documentation-20
Procedure map description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-21
Task lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-22
Online documentation use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-24
Tips for using the online documentation . . . . . System documentation-24
Procedures for using the online documentation System documentation-26
Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-1

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Access the online operations manual . . . . . System documentation-27

Access Help? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-28
Display and use the procedure map . . . . . . System documentation-29
Use the table of contents (online operations manual) . . . . . . . . System
documentation-30
Page through the content (online operations manual) . . . . . . . System
documentation-30
Use the index (online operations manual) . System documentation-31
Search for a term (online operations manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System
documentation-32
Perform an advanced search (online operations manual) . . . . . System
documentation-33
Boolean operators description . . . . . . . . System documentation-37
Nested expressions description . . . . . . . System documentation-37
Wildcard expressions description . . . . . System documentation-38
Use the glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-38
Scroll through a topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-39
Display related information . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-39
Redisplay a topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-40
Display a favorite topic (online operations manual) . . . . . . . . . System
documentation-40
Play videos and animations . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-41
Print topics from the online documentationSystem documentation-41
Close the help window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-43
Resize and move the help window . . . . . . . System documentation-43
Add or remove a favorite topic (online operations manual) . . . System
documentation-44
Rename a favorite topic (online operations manual) . . . . . . . . . System
documentation-45
Use or function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
ARCHITECT System overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Primary components of an ARCHITECT System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
ARCHITECT integrated system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
ARCHITECT c 8000 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
ARCHITECT c 16000 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
ARCHITECT i 2000 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
ARCHITECT i 2000SR System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
System control center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Table of contents-2 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
SCC standard components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Network hub and CPU back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
SCC optional components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
ARCHITECT System software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Software interface description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Icons and menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Function bar buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Software navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Snapshot screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Access the Snapshot screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Window - Snapshot screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Log on window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
User logon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Log on (general operator). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Log on (system administrator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Change the system administrator password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Log off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Processing modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Processing module (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
c 8000 processing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
c 16000 processing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Processing module keypad (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Processing center (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Sample hardware components (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Sample carousel (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Sample pipettor and sample probe wash cup (c 8000). . . . . 1-33
Reagent hardware components (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Reagent supply centers (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Reagent pipettors and wash cups (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Onboard solution areas (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Reaction carousel hardware components (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Reaction carousel (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Cuvette segments (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Lamp (c 8000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42

Mixer unit (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Cuvette washer (c 8000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
ICT unit (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
Water bath/waste overflow area (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
Supply and pump center (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Pump center (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Bulk solution supply center (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
Sample and reagent syringe area (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
Processing center (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
Sample hardware components (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
Sample carousel (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
Sample pipettor and sample probe wash cup (c 16000) . . . 1-53
Reagent hardware components (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
Reagent supply centers (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
Reagent pipettors and wash cups (c 16000). . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Onboard solution areas (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
Reaction carousel hardware components (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . 1-58
Reaction carousel (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
Cuvette segments (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
Lamp (c 16000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
Mixer unit (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
Cuvette washer (c 16000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
ICT unit (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63
Water bath/waste overflow area (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
Supply and pump centers (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
Pump centers (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
Bulk solution supply center (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
Sample and reagent syringe area (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69
Optional components (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-70
Processing modules (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
i 2000 processing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
i 2000SR processing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
Processing module keypad (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77
Processing center (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78
Processing center map (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79
Sample hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Sample and STAT pipettors (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81

Sample and STAT syringes (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
Sample and STAT wash stations (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . 1-83
Reagent hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84
Reagent carousel and bar code reader (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . 1-85
Reagent pipettors (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86
Reagent syringes (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87
Reagent wash stations (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-88
Process path hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . 1-89
Load diverter (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
RV access door (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
RV loader and hopper assembly (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . 1-92
STAT diverter (i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92
Vortexers (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-93
Wash zone diverter (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-94
Wash zone manifolds (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-94
Process path drive motor (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-95
Pre-trigger/trigger manifold (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96
CMIA reader (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96
Liquid waste arm (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-97
RV unloader (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-98
Supply and waste center (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-98
Pre-trigger/trigger storage area (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-99
Pre-trigger/trigger tray (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-100
Pre-trigger level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101
Trigger level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-102
Wash buffer storage area (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-103
Wash buffer reservoir (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104
Wash buffer level sensor and wash buffer inlet assembly (i
2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
Wash buffer filter (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106
Solid waste storage area (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107
Waste chute and trap door (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108
Optional components (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109
ARM optional accessory (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109
ARM keypad (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111
ARM connectors (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Sample handlers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-115

RSH - robotic sample handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-115
Priority bay (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-116
Routine bay (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-117
Carrier transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-119
Carrier positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-119
RSH keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-120
SSH - standard sample handler (i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-121
SSH keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-122
LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-123
LAS carousel sample handler keypad (i 2000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-124
Required consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-126
ARCHITECT System consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-126
Sample cups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-126
ARCHITECT c System consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-126
Reagent kits and components (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-127
Reagent labels (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-127
Reagent cartridges (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-128
Calibrators (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-129
ICT module (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-130
ICT calibrators (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-131
ICT cleaning fluid (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-132
Bulk solutions (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-132
ICT reference solution (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133
Alkaline wash (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-134
Acid wash (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-135
Onboard solutions (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-136
Water bath additive (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-137
ARCHITECT i System consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-138
Reagent kits and components (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-138
Reagent labels (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139
Septums and replacement caps (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-140
Single constituent controls (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-141
Multiconstituent controls (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-141
Calibrators (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-142
Bulk solutions (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-143
Pre-trigger solution (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-143

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Trigger solution (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-144

Concentrated wash buffer (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-145
Reaction vessels (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-146
Required accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-147
Sample carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-147
Carrier trays (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-148
LAS sample carousel (i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-148
Reagent segments (c 8000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-149
Reagent cartridge adapters (c 8000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-151
Reagent segments (c 16000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-153
Reagent cartridge adapters (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-154
System statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-156
Sample handler status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-156
RSH status types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-157
SSH status types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-158
LAS carousel sample handler status types (i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159
Processing module status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160
Processing module status types (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161
Processing module status types (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-164
Automatic processing module activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-166
System flush (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-166
System flush (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-167
System prime (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-168
Processing module wash (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-168
Automatic rotation of reagent supply center(s) (c System) . . . . . . . . . 1-168
Installation procedures and special requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
System installation or relocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
System installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
System checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
System relocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
System configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Configuration screen - System settings view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Access the Configuration screen - System settings view . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Procedures - Configuration screen - System settings view . . . . . . . . 2-6
Configuring system settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Configure host interface settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Configure report settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Configure a QC run definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Viewing system settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
View the batch sample ordering type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
View average number of tests per sample setting (multi-module
i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
View the host communication settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
View the automatic report printing setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
View the option for printing flags on reports . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
View the report header text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
View the system low alert setting for reagent kits. . . . . . . . 2-14
View the system language setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
View the screen timeout setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
View the date and time settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
View the sample bar code settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
View the LIS serial port settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
View the LAS serial port settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
View the onboard solution options (c System) . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
View the wash buffer transfer option (i System) . . . . . . . . . 2-18
View the LAS timeout setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
View the STAT protocol percentage (i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
View the option for running controls for onboard reagent kits .
2-20
Changing system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Change the batch sample ordering type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Change the automatic report printing settings . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Change the option for printing flags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Change the report header text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Change the system low alert setting for reagent kits . . . . . 2-24
Change the system language setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Change the screen timeout setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Change the date and time settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Change automatic repositioning for retest setting (RSH) . . 2-28
Change the sample bar code settings for codabar . . . . . . . . 2-28
Change the sample bar code settings for code 39 . . . . . . . . 2-29
Change the sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . 2-30
Change the LIS serial port settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Change the LAS serial port settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Change the onboard solution options (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Change the onboard solution options (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Optimize throughput on a multi-module i System . . . . . . . 2-35
Change the LAS timeout settings and reinitialize
communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Change the STAT protocol percentage (i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Change the option for running controls for onboard reagent kits
2-37
Windows - Configuration screen - System settings view . . . . . . . . 2-38
Configure sample ordering window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Details for sample ordering window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Configure host - release mode window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Details for host - release mode window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Configure reports printing window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Details for reports printing window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Configure reagents - supplies window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Details for reagents - supplies window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Configure password window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Details for password window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Configure system control center window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Details for system control center window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Configure modules window (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Details for modules window (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Configure modules window (i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Details for modules window (i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Configure modules window (i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Details for modules window (i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Configure sample handler window (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Details for sample handler window (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Details for sample handler window (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Configure sample handler window (LAS - standard). . . . . . . . . 2-59
Details for sample handler window (LAS - standard) . . . . . . . . 2-60
Details for sample handler window (LAS - Hitachi) . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Configure bar codes window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Details for bar codes window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Configure serial ports window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Details for serial ports window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Configuration screen - Assay settings view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65

Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view . . . 2-65
Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters
view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view .
2-68
Import assay window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Export assay window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Procedures - Configuration screen - Assay settings view . . . . . . . . 2-70
Configuring Abbott assays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Configure normal and extreme ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Configure patient and QC panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Configure a retest rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Configure result units and decimal places . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Configure the default dilution setting (photometric - c System)
2-76
Enter a calibrator concentration (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Configure a calibration adjustment type and interval
(photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Configure interpretation options (c System and calculated) 2-79
Configure the default dilution setting (i System) . . . . . . . . 2-82
Configuring user-defined assays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Configure a calculated assay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
Configure a photometric assay (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
Configure the SmartWash settings (c System). . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
Configure a user-defined sample diluent (photometric - c
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric - c System) 2-93
Configure a user-defined reagent kit (photometric - c System). .
2-94
Configure a reagent kit for a user-defined sample diluent
(photometric - c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
Viewing assay settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
View assay parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
View assay availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
View the normal and extreme result range settings . . . . . . 2-99
View the patient and QC panel definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
View the assay retest rule settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
View the default dilution setting (photometric - c System)2-101

View the calibrator concentration settings (c System). . . . 2-102
View the default calibration ordering type (photometric - c
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
View the linearity range settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
View the correlation factor and intercept settings (c System) . .
2-104
View the reagent-specific low alert setting (c System) . . . . 2-105
View the last required read setting (photometric - c System) . .
2-105
View the default dilution setting (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
Changing assay configuration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
Change the name of an assay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
Change the availability of an assay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109
Change normal and extreme ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110
Change a patient or QC panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
Delete a patient or QC panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
Add an assay to a retest rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
Remove an assay from a retest rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
Delete a retest rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
Change a linearity range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115
Change the last required read setting (photometric - c System)
2-116
Change the default dilution setting (photometric - c System) .
2-117
Change default calibration type (photometric - c System) 2-118
Change the correlation factor and intercept settings (c System)
2-119
Delete a calibrator set (photometric - c System). . . . . . . . . 2-120
Change the reagent-specific low alert setting (c System). . 2-121
Delete a reagent (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122
Delete a reagent kit (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123
Change the default dilution setting (i System) . . . . . . . . . 2-124
Change interpretation settings (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-125
Change the result units setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
Printing assay parameter reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127
Windows - Configuration screen - Assay settings view . . . . . . . . . 2-127
Configure assay parameters window - General view (i System) . . .
2-129

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Details for assay parameters window - General view (i System) . . . .

2-130
Configure assay parameters window - General view (calculated). . .
2-131
Details for assay parameters window - General view (calculated) . .
2-132
Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition
view (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-133
Details for assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition
Configure assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample
Details for assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample
Configure assay parameters window - General - Validity checks view
(photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-137
Details for assay parameters window - General - Validity checks
Configure assay parameters window - General - ICT view . . . 2-139
Details for assay parameters window - General - ICT view . . . 2-140
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System) .
2-141
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System) .
2-142
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators view
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators view
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Volumes view
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Volumes view
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals view
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals view
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Validity checks
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Validity checks
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c
System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-151

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c

System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152
Configure assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System) . . .
2-153
Details for assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System). . .
2-154
Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System)
2-155
Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1 probe view (c System). 2-156
Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view (c System) . . .
2-157
Add / edit SmartWash window - Cuvette view (c System) . . . 2-158
Details for assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System)
2-158
Configure assay parameters window - Results view. . . . . . . . . 2-159
Configure results parameters window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-160
Details for assay parameters window - Results view . . . . . . . . 2-161
Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view . . . 2-162
Details for assay parameters window - Interpretation view. . . 2-163
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view
2-164
Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view
2-165
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - user-defined
assay view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-165
Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - user-defined
assay view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-166
Configure result units window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-167
Details for result units window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-168
Configure panel definitions window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-169
Details for panel definition window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-169
Configure assay retest rules window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-170
Add / edit assay retest rules window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-171
Select assay window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-172
Details for assay retest rules window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-173
Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-174
Access the Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view. . . . . . . 2-175
Procedures - Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view . . . . . 2-176
Configuring QC - Cal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Configure a new single analyte control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176

Configure a bar code for a single analyte control level. . . 2-178
Configure a new multiconstituent control . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-179
Configure a multiconstituent bar code SID. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180
Configure a Westgard rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-181
Configure a calibrator set (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-182
Viewing QC - Cal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183
View single analyte control settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183
View multiconstituent control settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-184
View multiconstituent bar code SID settings . . . . . . . . . . 2-185
View Westgard rule(s) settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-185
View settings for a calibrator set (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . 2-186
Changing QC - Cal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-186
Add a lot to a single analyte control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-187
Change single analyte control settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-188
Delete a single analyte control level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-189
Change the default dilution for a single analyte control level . .
2-190
Add an assay to a multiconstituent control . . . . . . . . . . . 2-191
Change multiconstituent control settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-193
Add an assay to a multiconstituent bar code SID . . . . . . . 2-194
Change multiconstituent bar code SID settings . . . . . . . . 2-195
Delete a multiconstituent bar code SID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-195
Delete a multiconstituent control level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-196
Change Westgard rule settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-197
Windows - Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view . . . . . . 2-198
Configure single analyte window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-198
Details for single analyte window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-199
Configure multiconstituent control window . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-200
Define data window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-201
Details for multiconstituent control window . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-202
Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window . . . . . . . . . 2-203
Details for multiconstituent bar code SID window. . . . . . . . . 2-204
Configure Westgard window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-205
Details for Westgard window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-206
Configure calibrator set window (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-207
Details for calibrator set window (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-208

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Software installation and backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-209

Utilities screen - Software install view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-209
Access the Utilities screen - Software install view . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-210
Procedure - Utilities screen - Software install view . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-210
View the system software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-210
Utilities screen - Backup software view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-211
Access the Utilities screen - Backup software view . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-212
Procedure - Utilities screen - Backup view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-212
Create a system software backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-212
Windows - Utilities screen - Backup view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-213
Create backup window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-213
Assay file management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-214
Install or delete an assay file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-214
Import an assay file (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-215
Export an assay file (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-216
Maintenance and diagnostic file management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-218
Install or delete a maintenance or diagnostic procedure file . . . . . . . 2-218
Principles of operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
c System principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Photometric method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Photometric technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
End-point assay reactions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Rate assay reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Optical measurements (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Optical system and measurement sequence (c System). . . . . . . . 3-4
Data reduction calculation (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Potentiometric method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Integrated chip technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
ICT measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
ICT reference solution and sample delivery/processing . . . . . . . 3-7
Measurement by the ICT module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Data reduction calculation (potentiometric - c System) . . . . . . 3-12
Assay processing (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Assay processing for a one-reagent protocol (c System) . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Assay processing for a two-reagent protocol (c System) . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Assay processing for a dilution protocol (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Assay processing for an ICT protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
SmartWash feature (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

OSS feature (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Sample interference indices (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Sample interference indices protocols (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Sample interference indices measurement (c System) . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
i System principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
CMIA method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
CMIA technology and reaction sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Optical measurements (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Optical system and measurement sequence (i System). . . . . . . 3-27
Data reduction calculation (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Assay processing (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Assay processing for One step 25 (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Assay processing for Two step 18-4 (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Pretreatment (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Processing for Pretreatment 7 (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Processing for Pretreatment 7-7 (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Processing for Pretreatment 14 (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
STAT assay processing for One step 11 (i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
STAT assay processing for Two step 4-4 (i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Performance characteristics and specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
c System performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
i System performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Specifications and requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
General specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
ARCHITECT System specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
c System processing module specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
i System processing module specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
System capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
SCC onboard data storage capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
c System processing module capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
i System processing module capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Sample handler capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Physical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Weight and force specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
System clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
SCC clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

c System processing module with RSH clearances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
c System processing module with LAS clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
i System processing module with RSH clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
i 2000 processing module with SSH clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
i 2000 processing module with LAS carousel sample handler clearances
4-18
i 2000SR processing module with LAS clearances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Electrical specifications and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
SCC electrical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
c System processing module with sample handler electrical
specifications and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
i System processing module with sample handler electrical
specifications and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Electrical safety parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Optical specifications (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
c System processing module water and liquid waste specifications and
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
i System processing module water and liquid waste requirements. 4-24
External waste pump specifications and requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
External waste pump general specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
External waste pump electrical specifications and requirements . . 4-25
External waste pump clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Environmental specifications and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Computer and interface specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Printer specifications and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Printer general specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Printer electrical specifications and requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Bar code label requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
1D reagent bar code requirements (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
1D reagent bar code label guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
1D reagent bar code label data format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
1D reagent bar code label placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Sample bar code label requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Sample bar code label guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Sample ID (identification) length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Sample bar code label length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Sample bar code label placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

ARM specifications and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
ARM physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
ARM clearance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
ARM electrical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
ARM electrical safety parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
ARM water source requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
ARM environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
System startup, pause, and shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
SCC power off and power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Power on the SCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Power off the SCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Cycle power to the SCC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Processing module and sample handler cycle power, startup, and pause . .
5-6
Power on the processing module and/or sample handler . . . . . . . . 5-7
Power off the processing module and/or sample handler . . . . . . . . 5-9
Cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler . . . 5-12
Start up the processing module and/or sample handler. . . . . . . . . 5-13
Pause the processing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Pause the RSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Pause the sample carousel (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Pause the sample load queue (SSH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Pause the LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
ARM power off and power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Power off the ARM (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Power on and initialize the ARM (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Emergency shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Perform an emergency shutdown on a single module system . . . . 5-21
Perform an emergency shutdown on a multi-module system . . . . 5-22
Long-term shutdown (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Consumable inventory management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Supply status screen and views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Supply status screen - c System view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Access the Supply status screen - c System view . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Access the Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view . . . . . . . 5-29

Windows - Supply status screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Update supplies window - c System view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Update supplies window - i 2000/i 2000SR view. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
ARCHITECT System procedures - consumable inventory management . .
5-31
Verify supply and waste inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
c System procedures - consumable inventory management . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c System) . . . . . . . . 5-33
Prepare 0.5% acid wash solution (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Prepare detergent A (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Prepare 10% detergent B solution (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update
inventory (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
inventory (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Replace onboard solutions in the sample carousel and update inventory
(c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Empty the high-concentration waste bottle (c System) . . . . . . . . . 5-45
i 2000/i 2000SR procedures - consumable inventory management . . . . 5-46
Remove solid waste and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . 5-47
Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Prepare wash buffer (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR)
5-52
Replace concentrated wash buffer on the ARM (i System) . . . . . . . 5-55
Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i
2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System) . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
Reagent inventory management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Reagent status screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Reagent status screen - c System view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Access the Reagent status screen - c System view . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Access the Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view. . . . . . . 5-66
Reagent status screen - View all view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Access the Reagent status screen - View all view . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Descriptions of reagent statuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Windows - Reagent status screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

Details for reagent (Reagent status) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Assign location window (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Find options (Reagent status) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Find options (Reagent status - View all or Reagent history) window
5-74
Reagent history screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Access the Reagent history screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Window - Reagent history screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Details for reagent (history) window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
ARCHITECT System procedures - Reagent inventory management . . 5-79
Verify reagent inventory on a single module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Verify reagent inventory on all modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
Find a specific reagent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
View reagent details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
View reagent history details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
Scan the reagent carousel(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
c System procedures - reagent inventory management . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Load bar coded reagents (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
Loading requirements for the reagent supply centers (c System) . . 5-87
Load sample diluent(s) (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
Load non-bar coded reagents (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
Replace sample diluent(s) (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
Replace non-bar coded reagents (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
Unload bar coded reagents (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
Unload non-bar coded reagents (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
i 2000/i 2000SR procedures - reagent inventory management . . . . . . 5-102
Prepare new reagent bottles (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102
Prepare used reagent bottles (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
Load reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106
Unload reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
Patient and control orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
Automated ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
Host computer download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
Host order query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111
Automated control ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111
Auto retest (patient samples). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Patient order screens and views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113

Patient order screen - Single patient view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
Access the Patient order screen - Single patient view . . . . . . . 5-114
Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
Access the Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view . . . . 5-116
Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116
Access the Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view 5-117
Procedures - Patient order screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118
Create a patient order (single order) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118
Create a patient order (batch, bar coded) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
Create a patient order (batch, non-bar coded) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125
Add a test to a patient order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
Windows - Patient order screen and views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131
Assay options (Patient order) window - manual dilution view 5-131
Assay options (Patient order) window - automated dilution view .
5-132
Details for sample window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133
Details for batch window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133
Control order screen and views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-134
Control order screen - Single analyte view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135
Access the Control order screen - Single analyte view. . . . . . . 5-136
Control order screen - Multiconstituent view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
Access the Control order screen - Multiconstituent view . . . . 5-138
Procedures - Control order screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
Create a control order (single analyte). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
Create a control order (single analyte - i 2000SR LAS) . . . . . . . 5-141
Create a control order (multiconstituent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
Create a control order (multiconstituent - i 2000SR LAS). . . . . 5-146
Windows - Control order screen and views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148
Assay options (Control order) window - manual dilution view . . .
5-149
Assay options (Control order) window - automated dilution view.
5-149
Order status screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-150
Access the Order status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152
Descriptions of test statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152
Descriptions of processing codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-153
Procedures - Order status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
View the status of ordered tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154

Find a specific test order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155
View order or rerun status details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-156
Add a comment to an order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157
Delete a test from a patient order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-158
Windows - Order status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-158
Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window . . . . . . . . . 5-158
Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window - single order
view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-159
Details for order (Order status) window - batch (bar coded) view . .
5-160
Details for order (Order status) window - batch (non-bar coded)
view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-161
Sample status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-162
Access the Sample status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-164
Procedures - Sample status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-165
View sample status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-165
Find a specific sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-166
View sample status details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167
Windows - Sample status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-168
Find options (Sample status) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-168
Sample management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-170
Sample requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-170
Sample cup and/or tube requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-170
Sample volume requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-172
Sample cup volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-172
Primary tube volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-173
Aliquot tube volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-174
Sample gauge label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-174
Onboard sample storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-175
Sample integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-176
Loading samples (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-176
Load samples in sample carriers (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-176
Load samples for routine processing (RSH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-179
Load samples for priority processing (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-181
Load bar coded samples for batch processing (RSH). . . . . . . . . . . 5-183
Load non-bar coded samples for batch processing (RSH). . . . . . . 5-185
Loading samples (sample carousel - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-188

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Load samples and initiate sample processing (sample carousel - c

System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-188
Loading samples (SSH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-191
Load samples in sample carriers (SSH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-192
Load samples for routine processing (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-194
Double load queue lane defaults (i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-196
Load samples for priority processing (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-197
Load bar coded samples for batch processing (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-198
Load non-bar coded samples for batch processing (SSH) . . . . . . . 5-201
Loading samples (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . 5-203
Load samples and the carousel (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000)
5-203
Initiating or resuming sample processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-205
Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH) . . . . . . . . . . 5-206
Initiate or resume sample processing (LAS carousel sample handler - i
2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-207
Sample processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-207
Control sample processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-208
RSH sample processing (ci System, c System, i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . 5-208
Sample carousel sample processing (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-210
SSH sample processing (i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-211
LAS sample handler sample processing (i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-213
Batch processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-215
Unloading samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-215
Unload samples (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-216
Access a sample with tests in process (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-217
Unload samples (sample carousel - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-218
Unload samples (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-219
Unload samples (LAS carousel sample handler) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-220
Patient and QC results review, rerun, and release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-222
Patient results review and release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-222
Results review screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-222
Access the Results review screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-224
Descriptions of patient result flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-225
Procedures - Results review screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-226
View all patient results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-226
Find a specific patient result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-227
View patient result details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-228

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Add a comment to a patient result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-229

View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System)
5-230
Rerun a test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-231
Delete a patient result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-233
Release a patient result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-234
Windows - Results review screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-235
Find options (Results review) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-235
Details for result (Results review) window - calculated view . 5-236
Details for result (Results review) window - data view (c System) . .
5-237
Details for result (Results review) window - photometric - graph
view (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-238
Details for result (Results review) window - sample interference
index view (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-239
Details for result (Results review) window (i System) . . . . . . . 5-240
Rerun options window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-241
Edit result window (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-242
QC result review and release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-242
QC result review screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-243
Access the QC result review screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-245
Descriptions of quality control result flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-245
Procedures - QC result review screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-246
View all control results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-247
Find a specific control result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-247
View control result details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-248
Add a comment to a control result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-249
Release a control result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-250
Windows - QC result review screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-251
Find options (QC result review) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-251
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - data view (c
System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-252
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - photometric -
graph view (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-253
Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i System) . . 5-254
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Calculated view .
5-255
Rerun options (QC result review) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-256
Patient results, QC results, and exceptions rerun review . . . . . . . . . . 5-257

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Rerun status screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-257

Access the Rerun status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-259
Procedures - Rerun status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-260
View the status of tests scheduled for rerun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-260
Delete a test from a rerun order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-261
Patient and QC stored results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-262
Patient stored results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-262
Stored results screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-262
Access the Stored results screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-264
Procedures - Stored results screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-264
View all stored patient results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-265
Find a specific stored patient result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-265
View stored patient results details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-266
Retransmit a stored patient result to the host . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-267
Cancel result transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-268
Delete a stored patient result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-269
Archive stored patient results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-269
Descriptions of archive messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-271
Windows - Stored results screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-271
Find options (Stored results) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-272
Details for result (Stored results) window - calculated view . . 5-273
Details for result (Stored results) window - data view (c System) . .
5-273
Details for result (Stored results) window - photometric - graph view
(c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-274
Details for result (Stored results) window - sample interference
index view (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-275
Details for result (Stored results) window (i System) . . . . . . . . 5-276
Archive results window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-277
Stored QC results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-278
Stored QC results screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-278
Access the Stored QC results screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-280
Procedures - Stored QC results screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-281
View all stored control results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-281
Find a specific stored control result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-282
View stored control result details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-283
Retransmit a stored control result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-284
Archive stored control results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-284

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Windows - Stored QC results screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-286

Find options (Stored QC results) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-286
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - data view (c
System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-287
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - photometric -
graph view (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-288
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i System) . 5-289
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - calculated view.
5-290
Archive QC results window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-291
Exception management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-293
Exception status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-293
Access the Exception status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-295
Procedures - Exception status screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-295
View all exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-296
Find a specific exception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-296
View exception details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-297
Add a comment to an exception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-298
Transmit an exception to the host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-299
Delete an exception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-299
Windows - Exception status screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-300
Find options (Exception status) window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-300
Details for exceptions window - data view (c System) . . . . . . 5-301
Details for exceptions window - photometric - graph view (c
System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-302
Details for exceptions window (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-303
Details for exceptions window - calculated view . . . . . . . . . . 5-304
Details for exceptions window - control view. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-305
Details for exceptions window - calculated control view . . . . 5-306
Details for exceptions window - calibrator view . . . . . . . . . . . 5-307
Quality control analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-309
Westgard rule application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-309
Westgard rule descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-310
Westgard rule run descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-311
Levey-Jennings graph screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-312
Procedures - Levey-Jennings graph screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-314
Create a Levey-Jennings graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-315
Change a Levey-Jennings graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-316

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Display the value for a Levey-Jennings point . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-318

Exclude or include a Levey-Jennings point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-318
View details for a Levey-Jennings point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-319
Add a comment to a Levey-Jennings point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-320
Recalculate Westgard analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-320
Windows - Levey-Jennings graph screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-321
QC selection window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-321
Point detail window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-322
QC summary review screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-323
Procedures - QC summary review screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-325
View QC data summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-326
Find the summary for specific QC data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-326
View QC data details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-327
View an assay control level Levey-Jennings graph . . . . . . . . . 5-328
Windows - QC summary review screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-328
Find options (QC summary review) window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-328
Details for QC summary window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-329
QC reports screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-330
Access the QC reports screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-331
Report printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-333
Print a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-333
Print the Order List report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-336
Print the Levey-Jennings report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-337
Print the QC Analysis report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-337
Print the QC Summary report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-338
Print a Maintenance History report for a specified month. . . . . . . . . 5-339
Print a Maintenance History report for a specific procedure . . . . . . . 5-340
Print a Procedure report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-341
Print the Message History Log report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-342
Print an Assay Parameter report for specified assays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-342
Print an Assay Parameter report for all assays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-343
View a print job in the print queue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-344
Delete a print job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-345
Print a screen image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-345
Windows - Report printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-346
Print options window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-346
Printer window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-347

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Calibration procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Assay calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Calibration guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Mandatory assay calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Optional assay calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Calibration sampling rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Calibration methods (photometric - c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Calibration method (potentiometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Calibration methods (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Calibration types (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Full calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Adjustment calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Blank adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
1-point adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
2-point adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Calibration types (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Adjust calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Full calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Index calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Calibration curve storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Active calibration curve storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Inactive calibration curve storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Failed calibration curve storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Calibration order screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Access the Calibration order screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Procedure - Calibration order screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Create a calibration order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Window - Calibration order screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Assay options (Calibration order) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Calibration review. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Calibration verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Calibration status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Access the Calibration status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Descriptions of calibration statuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Windows - Calibration status screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Find options (Calibration status) window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Calibration curve window - factor, linear, and non-linear assay

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
views (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

Calibration curve window - use cal factor/blank assay view (c
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Calibration curve window - potentiometric assay view (c System) .
6-21
Calibration curve window - adjust assay view (i System) . . . . . 6-22
Calibration curve window - index assay view (i System). . . . . . 6-23
Calibration curve window - full assay view (i System) . . . . . . . 6-24
Calibration history screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Access the Calibration history screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Windows - Calibration history screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Find options (Calibration history) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Archive calibration curves window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Procedures - Calibration review. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
View assay calibration status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
View assay calibration history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Find a specific calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
View calibration curve information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Fail a calibration curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Archive calibration curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Operational precautions and limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
General requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Precautions and requirements for system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Requirements for handling consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Requirements for handling specimens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Limitations of result interpretation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Operator responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Safety icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Hazard symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Biological hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Chemical hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Spill clean-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Waste handling and disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Decontamination procedure requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Electrical hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Mechanical hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Physical hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Service and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Maintenance suggestions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Maintenance screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Access the Maintenance screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Procedures - Maintenance screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
View maintenance procedure information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Perform a maintenance procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Perform concurrent maintenance procedures or other tasks . . . 9-8
Return to a maintenance procedure in process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
View details for a maintenance procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Windows - Maintenance screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Maintenance Perform window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Version details for procedure (maintenance) window . . . . . . . 9-12
Details for maintenance item window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Maintenance log screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Access the Maintenance log screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Procedures - Maintenance log screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Approve the Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Add a comment to a maintenance procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Windows - Maintenance log screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Approve maintenance log window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Details for maintenance log window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Maintenance statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Maintenance categories and procedure descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
c System processing module maintenance categories. . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Daily maintenance description (c System processing module). 9-21
Weekly maintenance description (c System processing module) . . .
9-24
Monthly maintenance description (c System processing module) . .
9-27
Quarterly maintenance description (c System processing module) .
9-28
As-needed maintenance description (c System processing module).
9-35
c 8000 processing module associated maintenance graphics . . . . . 9-42
6024 Check 1 mL Syringes graphics (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
6019 Check ICT Components graphic (c 8000). . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing graphic (c 8000) . . . . . . . 9-46
6026 Check Syringes and Valves graphic (c 8000). . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip graphic (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
c 16000 processing module associated maintenance graphics . . . . 9-52
6024 Check 1 mL Syringes graphics (c 16000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
6019 Check ICT Components graphic (c 16000). . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing graphic (c 16000) . . . . . . 9-56
6026 Check Syringes and Valves graphic (c 16000). . . . . . . . . . 9-57
6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip graphic (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . 9-59
1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60
1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules maintenance categories . . . . . 9-62
Daily maintenance description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules)
9-63
Weekly maintenance description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing
modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
As-needed maintenance description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing
modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules associated maintenance graphics .
9-72
1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72
1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73
1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74
1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75
RSH maintenance categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-76
As-needed maintenance description (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77
RSH associated maintenance graphics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78
6311 RSH Cleaning graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78
SSH maintenance categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79
As-needed maintenance description (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79
LAS carousel sample handler maintenance categories (i 2000). . . . 9-80
As-needed maintenance description (LAS carousel sample handler -
i 2000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
SCC maintenance categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-82

As-needed maintenance description (SCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-82
Component replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-83
c 8000 component replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-83
ARCHITECT c 8000 processing center component replacement . . 9-83
ARCHITECT c 8000 processing center components . . . . . . . . . 9-84
Replace the sample probe (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-85
Replace reagent probes (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-88
Replace the sample probe tubing (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-92
Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-95
Replace the lamp or lamp plate (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-99
Replace a cuvette (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-104
Replace a cuvette segment (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108
Replace the cuvette dry tip (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-111
Replace the mixer (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-114
Replace the ICT module or probe (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-116
Replace the sample carousel clip (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-122
ARCHITECT c 8000 supply and pump components replacement 9-124
ARCHITECT c 8000 supply and pump center components . . 9-125
Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-126
Replace check valves (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-130
Replace the ICT reference solution filter (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . 9-134
Replace the wash solution filter (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-136
Replace wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 8000)
9-139
Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c
8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-148
Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-155
Replace the high-concentration waste bottle (c System optional
component) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-158
Replace the float switch cable (c System optional component) . . . .
9-160
c 16000 component replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-162
ARCHITECT c 16000 processing center component replacement 9-162
ARCHITECT c 16000 processing center components . . . . . . . 9-163
Replace the sample probe (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-164
Replace reagent probes (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-167
Replace the sample probe tubing (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-171

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-174

Replace the lamp or lamp plate (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-178
Replace a cuvette (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-183
Replace a cuvette segment (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-186
Replace the cuvette dry tips (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-189
Replace the mixer (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-192
Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-194
Replace the sample carousel clip (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-200
ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump components replacement . . .
9-202
ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump center components. . 9-203
Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-204
Replace check valves (c 16000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-207
Replace the ICT reference solution filter (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . 9-212
Replace the wash solution filter (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-214
Replace wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 16000)
9-217
16000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-224
Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-231
component) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-234
Replace the float switch cable (c System optional component) . . .
9-236
i 2000/i 2000SR component replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-237
ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR internal components' covers replacement
9-238
ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR internal components' covers . . . . . . 9-238
i 2000/i 2000SR processing center component replacement . . . . . 9-240
Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR)
9-240
Replace sample, reagent, or STAT probe tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR) . .
9-244
Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-248
Replace the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor (i 2000/i
2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-255
Replace the waste arm probe/tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . 9-264
i 2000/i 2000SR supply and waste center component replacement 9-266
Replace the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . .

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
9-267
Replace the buffer level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-269
Replace the buffer filter (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-272
SCC component replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-274
Replace the keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-275
Replace the mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-278
Replace the network hub and cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-281
Replace the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-285
Replace the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-288
Replace the touch-screen monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-291
Troubleshooting and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Approach to troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
System troubleshooting variables (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
System troubleshooting variables (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Reagent troubleshooting variables (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Reagent troubleshooting variables (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Operator troubleshooting variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Environmental troubleshooting variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
System logs screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Access the System logs screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Procedures - System logs screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Review message logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Find a specific message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
View low level error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Delete a temporary message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Windows - System logs screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Find options (System logs) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
General error codes (0001-0999). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Assay specific error codes (1000-1999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-113
Maintenance error codes (2000-2999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-181
Level sense error codes (3000-3999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-230
Bar code reader error codes (4000-4999). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-311
Robotic and sensor error codes (5000-5999). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-333
Optics error codes (6000-6999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-411
Temperature error codes (7000-7999). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-420
Computer hardware error codes (8000-8999). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-440

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Software error codes (9000-9999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-477

Observed problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-547
Processing module observed problems (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-547
1 mL wash solution syringe leaks (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-548
Assay using the Factor calibration mode is disabled after importing the
assay (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-549
Bar coded reagents do not appear on the Reagent status screen after a
reagent scan was performed (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-549
Bubbles in ICT module tubing (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-550
Bubbles in sample/reagent probe tubing (c System) . . . . . . . . . . 10-551
Bubbles in the sample/reagent syringes (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . 10-552
High-concentration waste not aspirated from cuvettes (c System) . . . .
10-552
ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pump syringes leak (c System)
10-552
ICT probe leaks (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-553
Lamp is not on (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-553
Liquid around the top of the cuvettes after washing (c System). 10-554
Mixer is bent or is making an unexpected noise. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-554
No alarm when high-concentration waste is full (c System). . . . 10-555
Non-bar coded reagents not recognized (c System). . . . . . . . . . . 10-555
No water in reagent supply center 1 (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-556
Reagent probe tubing is discolored or contains precipitate (c System).
10-556
Sample/reagent probe is damaged/clogged (c System) . . . . . . . . 10-556
Sample/reagent probe tubing leaks (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-557
Sample/reagent probe leaks or drips (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-557
Sample/reagent solenoid valve leaks (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-558
Sample/reagent syringe leaks (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-558
Samples are loaded in the sample carousel, but are not processed
(c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-559
Solution/dried solution under bulk solution bottles (c System) . 10-559
Wash solution is not being used (level not falling over time) (c System)
10-560
Processing module observed problems (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-560
2050 WZ Aspiration Test failure (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-560
Bar code read failure occurs after instrument has been powered off
(i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-561
Black powder observed in reagent carousel area (i System) . . . . 10-561

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
RV loader jams (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-562

Wash buffer volume did not update (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-562
Sample results observed problems (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-562
A#1 Result flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-563
A#2 Result flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-565
All ICT results have similar values, Na = 140 / K = 4.0 / Cl = 100 mmol/L
(c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-566
Controls out of range (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-567
Depressed concentration - ICT results entire run (c System) . . . 10-568
Depressed concentration - ICT results single assay (c System) . . 10-568
Depressed concentration - K+ results single assay (c System) . . . 10-569
Depressed concentration - photometric results entire run (c System) . .
10-569
Depressed concentration - photometric results single assay (c System) .
10-569
Elevated concentration - ICT results entire run (c System). . . . . 10-570
Elevated concentration - ICT results single assay (c System) . . . 10-570
Elevated concentration - photometric results single assay (c System) . .
10-570
Erratic results, poor precision - ICT results (c System) . . . . . . . . 10-571
Erratic results, poor precision - photometric results (c System) . 10-573
FLEX Result flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-575
PSHH Result flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-575
Sample results observed problems (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-575
Calibration curves stable for less than 30 days - control drift (i System)
10-576
Controls out of range (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-577
Depressed concentration - entire run, direct assay, with decreased RLUs
(i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-578
Depressed concentration - entire run, indirect assay, with increased
RLUs (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-581
Depressed concentration - single point, direct assay, with decreased
RLUs (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-582
Depressed concentration - single point, indirect assay, with increased
RLUs (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-587
Elevated concentration - entire run, direct assay, with increased RLUs
(i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-590
Elevated concentration - entire run, indirect assay, with decreased RLUs
(i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-592
Elevated concentration - single point, direct assay, with increased RLUs

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
(i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-594
Elevated concentration - single point, indirect assay, with decreased
RLUs (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-599
Erratic assay results (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-603
Sample handler observed problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-607
Power to the processing module(s) and sample handler is interrupted
10-607
Sample handler will not go to Running status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-608
Sample is not automatically re-aspirated after adding or rerunning a
test (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-608
Sample tubes in a carrier are scanned, but are not processed . . . 10-609
SCC observed problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-609
"&" character appears as an underline when defining a single analyte
control name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-611
All reagent kits display after performing a search by selecting the R1 or
R2 checkbox on the Find options window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-611
All reagent kits display after performing a search for only kits with the
Extra Bottle status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-612
Bay number and sample carousel position display on the Details for
results windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-612
Bi-directional host communication is not working . . . . . . . . . . 10-612
c System processing module status on Snapshot screen does not go to
Stopped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-613
Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-613
c System processing module status on Snapshot screen is Running, but
tests are not processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-613
C/P information is not printed on the Rerun list report. . . . . . . 10-614
Dr Watson error, on tapisrv.exe (file name in middle of message
window) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-614
Error code column on the Exception status screen does not sort as
expected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-614
Gray screen displays during an archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-614
icwserver.exe error Message "Address space is full" . . . . . . . . . . . 10-615
Intel Active Monitor System Alert! message is displayed . . . . . . 10-615
Internet Explorer Script Error displayed when using the online
documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-616
Keyboard fails to respond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-617
LAS (laboratory automation system) communication - Unable to
communicate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-617

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Maintenance history report prints with 00:00:00 in the Time column .

10-617
Maintenance log contains blank spaces for Daily Maintenance items .
10-617
Many error messages are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-618
Non-system disk or disk error message displays or NTLDR is missing
message displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-618
Order Status report does not print all the codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-618
Progress indicator is blank and the software is not responding . 10-619
QC data does not appear on the Levey-Jennings graph and does not
print on the QC Analysis report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-619
Reagent and calibration curve stability expires when daylight savings
time arrives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-619
Result column does not sort as expected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-620
Results did not display or print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-620
Results or exceptions are deleted or released and the result or exception
is not removed from the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-620
Sample ID is truncated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-620
SCC does not boot to the Snapshot screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-621
Shutdown screen displays during concurrent maintenance . . . 10-621
Shutdown screen displays unexpectedly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-621
Slow screen response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-622
Software Architecture Exception 38 displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-622
Software Architecture Exception 50 displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-622
Tests remain in Pending Transmission status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-623
Tests remain in Running status and the module will not go to Stopped
status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-623
Tests remain in Scheduled status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-623
The message "The location (x) has a bar coded kit. Do you still want to
assign this location?" displays when assigning a location for a non-bar
coded reagent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-624
Touchscreen monitor display is blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-624
Touchscreen monitor fails to respond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-625
Unable to delete results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-625
Unable to find specific patient or QC results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-625
Undefined fields for assay parameters display and print differently . . .
10-625
UPS (uninterruptible power supply) is activated . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-626
Peripheral devices observed problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-626

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
ARCHITECT ARM observed problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-626

A to D timeout (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-628
ARM accessory is not functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-628
ARM accessory is stopped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-629
ARM decontamination mode aborted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-629
ARM message not sent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-630
Buffer quality error indicator - up arrow (high conductivity)
illuminated (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-631
Buffer quality error indicator - down arrow (low conductivity)
illuminated (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-632
Calibration check failure (ARM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-633
Checksum failure (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-633
Communication timeout (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-634
Concentrated wash buffer empty (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-635
Decontamination is in process (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-635
Flood condition (ARM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-636
High outlet pressure indicator illuminates (ARM). . . . . . . . . 10-637
Invalid ARM error code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-638
Invalid ARM status code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-639
Invalid format of ARM message "message string" . . . . . . . . . 10-640
Low inlet pressure indicator illuminates (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . 10-641
Meter handshaking failure (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-642
Motor stall (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-643
SCI (serial communication interface) process timeout (ARM) . . . .
10-644
Sensor cable disconnected (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-644
System flush is in process (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-645
Temperature indicator illuminates (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-646
Water quality error indicator illuminates (ARM). . . . . . . . . . 10-646
Printer observed problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-646
Incomplete comment printed on the Maintenance History Report
10-647
Print window displays behind the Help window . . . . . . . . . 10-647
Print is cut off at the bottom of the page when printing from the
online documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-648
Print on reports is too light to read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-648
Report will not print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-648
Sample report does not print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-649

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Windows printer error displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-649

System diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-650
Diagnostics screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-650
Access the Diagnostics screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-651
Procedures - Diagnostics screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-652
View diagnostic procedure information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-652
Perform a diagnostic procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-653
Windows - Diagnostic screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-655
Diagnostic perform window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-655
Version details for procedure (diagnostics) window . . . . . . . 10-656
Diagnostic categories and procedure descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-657
c System processing module diagnostic categories . . . . . . . . . . . 10-658
Reaction mechanism diagnostics description (c System processing
module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-658
Pipettor diagnostics description (c System processing module) . . . .
10-659
Fluidic/wash diagnostics description (c System processing module)
10-660
Bar code reader diagnostics description (c System processing
module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-661
Module diagnostics description (c System processing module) . . . .
10-662
Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (c System processing
modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-663
Fuse/motor diagnostics description (c System processing module) .
10-663
Optic/temperature diagnostics description (c System processing
module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-664
Carousel diagnostics description (c System processing module) . . .
10-665
Precision diagnostics description (c System processing module) . . .
10-666
i 2000/i 2000SR System processing module diagnostic categories 10-667
Reaction mechanism diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR
processing modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-668
Pipettor diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing
modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-670
Fluidic/wash diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing
modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-671
Syringe/pump diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-674
Bar code reader diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing
modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-674
Module diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing
modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-675
Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (i System processing
modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-677
Fuse/motor diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing
modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-678
Optic/temperature diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR
processing modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-680
Carousel diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing
modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-680
Precision diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing
modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-681
RSH diagnostic categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-684
Bar code reader diagnostics description (RSH). . . . . . . . . . . . 10-684
Module diagnostics description (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-685
Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . 10-687
Fuse/motor diagnostics description (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-687
SSH diagnostic categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-688
Bar code reader diagnostics description (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-688
Module diagnostics description (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-689
Fuse/motor diagnostics description (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-690
LAS carousel sample handler diagnostic categories (i 2000) . . . . 10-691
Bar code reader diagnostics description (LAS carousel sample
handler - i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-691
Module diagnostics description (LAS carousel sample handler -
i 2000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-692
SCC diagnostic categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-693
Miscellaneous corrective action procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-697
Processing module corrective action procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-697
Clean the bar code reader window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-697
Enable or disable the ICT module (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-700
Evaluate the check valve (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-701
Remove the sample carousel (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-706
Reinstall the sample carousel (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-707
Sample handler corrective action procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-708
Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport and carrier

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
positioner(s) (RSH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-708

SCC corrective action procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-710
Reseat cables to the SCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-710
ARM corrective action procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-710
Change the wash buffer transfer option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-711
Flush the ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-711
Calibrate the ARM level sense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-712
LAS corrective action procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-714
Verify LAS communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-714
Printed report examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A-1
Absorbance Data Report (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-3
Assay Parameter Report (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-6
Assay Parameter Report (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-15
Cal Curve Details Report - Potentiometric (c System) . . . . . . . .Appendix A-19
Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-22
Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor/Blank (c System) . . .Appendix A-25
Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-28
Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-31
Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-34
Cal Curve Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-37
Exception Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-39
Exception Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-42
Levey - Jennings Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-44
Maintenance History Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-47
Message History Log Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-49
Order List Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-51
Order Status Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-53
Patient Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-55
Procedure Report, Basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-57
Procedure Report, Columnar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-59
QC Analysis Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-61
QC Result Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-64
QC Results List Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-67
QC Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-69
Reagent Load Error Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-71
Reagent Status Report (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-73
Rerun List Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-75

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Result Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A-77

Results List Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A-80
Sample Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A-82
Sample Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A-84
Temporary Message Log Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A-86
Verification of i System assay claims. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-1
Analytical sensitivity - method 1 (limit of detection) . . . . . . . . Appendix B-3
Analytical sensitivity - method 1 data sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-4
Analytical sensitivity - method 1 data sheet example . . . . . Appendix B-5
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 (limit of quantitation) . . . . . . Appendix B-6
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 data sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-7
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-8
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 data sheet example . . . . . Appendix B-9
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 graph example . . . . . . . . Appendix B-10
Functional sensitivity - method 1 (serial dilution) . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-11
Functional sensitivity - method 1 serial dilution data sheet Appendix B-12
Functional sensitivity - method 1 serial dilution data sheet example . . . .
Appendix B-13
Precision - method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-14
Precision - method 1 data sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-14
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 . . . . . . . Appendix B-16
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 data sheet .Appendix
B-18
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 graph Appendix B-19
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 - data sheet example
Appendix B-20
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 graph example . . . .
Appendix B-21
Reportable range/calibration verification- method 2 . . . . . . . Appendix B-22
B-24
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 2 data sheet example.
Appendix B-26
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 2 graph example . . . .
Appendix B-26
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 3 . . . . . . . Appendix B-28
B-30

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents

Reportable range/calibration verification - method 3 data sheet example .
Appendix B-32
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 3 graph example . . . . .
Appendix B-32
Automated dilution verification - method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-34
Automated dilution verification - method 1 data sheet. . . . Appendix B-35
Automated dilution verification - method 1 data sheet example Appendix
B-35
Methods comparison - method 1 (correlation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-37
Methods comparison - method 1 correlation data sheet . . . Appendix B-38
Methods comparison - method 2 (concordance) . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-39
Methods comparison - method 2 concordance data sheet . Appendix B-40
Methods comparison - method 2 concordance calculation sheet Appendix
B-41
Methods comparison - method 2 concordance calculation sheet example.
Appendix B-41
Analytical specificity - method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-43
Reference range - method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-44
Math models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-1
c System data reduction methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-2
Photometric data reduction methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-2
Absorbance method (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . Appendix C-2
Factor method (photometric - c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-2
Linear method (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-3
Logit-4 method (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-5
Spline method (photometric - c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-6
Use factor and blank method (photometric - c System) . Appendix C-7
Potentiometric data reduction method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-8
Electromotive force measurement (potentiometric - c System) . . . . . . .
Appendix C-9
Slope calculation (potentiometric - c System). . . . . . . . Appendix C-10
Sample measurement (potentiometric - c System) . . . . Appendix C-11
i System data reduction methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-13
Point to point method (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-13
Linear regression method (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-13
4PLC methods (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-15
4PLC with x residual minimization (x-weighted) method (i System) . .

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Appendix C-16
4PLC with y residual minimization (y-weighted) method (i System). .
Appendix C-17
Cutoff assay method (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-17
One-point qualitative (index formula) method (i System) . . .Appendix
C-18
Two-point qualitative (index formula) method (i System) . . .Appendix
C-18
i System adjustment methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-19
Ratio technique method (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-19
Linear transformation method (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-20
Parameter method (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-21
Curve shape method (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-21
List numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-1
Consumable list numbers (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-2
Consumable list numbers (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-3
Accessory kit list numbers (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-4
Accessory kit list numbers (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-7
Accessory kit list number (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-10
Additional accessory list numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-12
Electronic media list numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-13
Manual list numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-14
SCC component list numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-15
Sample handler kit list numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-17
Processing module list numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-18
Descriptions of screen elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-1
Icons and menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-2
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-6
Field descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-15
Overview icon screens and windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-15
Snapshot screen field descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-15
Log on window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-19
Sample status screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-19
Find options (Sample status) window field descriptions Appendix E-21
Orders icon screens and windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-21
Patient order screen - Single patient view field descriptions. .Appendix
E-22

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view field descriptions . . . . . .

Appendix E-24
Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view field descriptions . .
Appendix E-25
Assay options (Patient order) window - Manual dilution view field
descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-26
Assay options (Patient order) window - Automated dilution view field
Details for sample window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-28
Details for batch window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-29
Control order screen - Single analyte view field descriptions Appendix
E-29
Control order screen - Single analyte view field descriptions (i 2000SR
LAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-31
Control order screen - Multiconstituent view field descriptions . . . . . .
Appendix E-32
Control order screen - Multiconstituent view field descriptions (i 2000SR
LAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-33
Assay options (Control order) window - Manual dilution view field
Assay options (Control order) window - Automated dilution view field
Order status screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-35
Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window field descriptions . . .
Appendix E-36
Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window - Single order view
field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-37
Details for order (Order status) window - Batch (bar coded) view field
Details for order (Order status) window - Batch (non-bar coded) view
Results icon screens and windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-41
Results review screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-42
Find options (Results review) window field descriptions Appendix E-43
Details for result (Results review) window - Calculated view field
Details for result (Results review) window - Data view (c System) field
Details for result (Results review) window - Photometric - graph view (c
System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-47
Details for result (Results review) window - Sample interference index

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-48

Details for result (Results review) window (i System) field descriptions
Appendix E-50
Rerun options window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-51
Stored results screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-52
Find options (Stored results) window field descriptions Appendix E-53
Details for result (Stored results) window - Calculated view field
descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-54
Details for result (Stored results) window - Data view (c System) field
Details for result (Stored results) window - Photometric - graph view (c
System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-58
Details for result (Stored results) window - Sample interference index
Details for result (Stored results) window (i System) field descriptions
Appendix E-61
Archive results window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-62
QC-Cal icon screens and windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-63
QC result review screen field descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-65
Find options (QC result review) window field descriptions . .Appendix
E-66
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Data view (c System)
field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-67
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Photometric - graph
Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i System) field
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Calculated view field
Rerun options (QC result review) window field descriptions .Appendix
E-72
Levey-Jennings graph screen field descriptions. . . . . . . Appendix E-73
QC selection window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-74
Point detail window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-75
Calibration order screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-76
Assay options (Calibration order) window field descriptions .Appendix
E-76
Calibration status screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-77
Find options (Calibration status and Calibration history) window field

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Calibration curve window - Linear assay view (c System) field

Calibration curve window - Use cal factor / blank assay view (c System)
Calibration curve window - Potentiometric assay view (c System) field
Calibration curve window - Adjust assay view (i System) field
Calibration curve window - Index assay view (i System) field
Calibration curve window - Full assay view (i System) field descriptions
Appendix E-84
Calibration history screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-85
Archive calibration curves window field descriptions . . Appendix E-85
Stored QC results screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-86
Find options (Stored QC results) window field descriptions . Appendix
E-87
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Data view (c System)
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Photometric - graph
view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-90
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i System) field
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Calculated field
Archive QC results window field descriptions . . . . . . . . Appendix E-93
QC reports screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-94
QC summary review screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . Appendix E-95
Find options (QC summary review) window field descriptions . . . . . . .
Appendix E-95
Details for QC summary window field descriptions . . . . Appendix E-96
Exceptions icon screens and windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-97
Exception status screen field descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-97
Find options (Exception status) window field descriptions . . Appendix
E-98
Details for exceptions window - Data view (c System) field descriptions
Appendix E-99
Details for exceptions window - Photometric - graph view (c System)
Details for exceptions window (i System) field descriptions . Appendix
E-102

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Details for exceptions window - Calculated view field descriptions. . .

Appendix E-103
Details for exceptions window - Control view field descriptions . . . . .
Appendix E-104
Details for exceptions window - Calculated control view field
descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-106
Details for exceptions window - Calibrator view field descriptions . . .
Appendix E-107
Rerun status screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-108
Reagents icon screens and windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-109
Reagent status screen - c System field descriptions . . . Appendix E-110
Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR field descriptions . . . .Appendix
E-111
Reagent status screen - View all view field descriptionsAppendix E-112
Details for reagent (Reagent status) window field descriptions . . . . . .
Appendix E-113
Assign location window (c System) field descriptions. Appendix E-114
Find options (Reagent status) window field descriptions . . . .Appendix
E-115
Find options (Reagent status - View all) window field descriptions . . .
Appendix E-115
Reagent history screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-116
Details for reagent (history) window field descriptions Appendix E-117
Supplies icon screens and windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-118
Supply status screen - c System view field descriptions Appendix E-119
Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view field descriptions.Appendix
E-119
Update supplies window - c System view field descriptions . .Appendix
E-120
Update supplies window - i 2000/i 2000SR view field descriptions . . . .
Appendix E-121
System icon screens and windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-121
Maintenance screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-127
Maintenance Perform window field descriptions . . . . Appendix E-128
Version details for procedure (maintenance) window field descriptions
Appendix E-129
Details for maintenance item window field descriptions . . . .Appendix
E-129
Maintenance log screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-130
Approve maintenance log window field descriptions . Appendix E-130

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Details for maintenance log screen field descriptions . Appendix E-131

Diagnostics screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-131
Diagnostic perform window field descriptions . . . . . . . Appendix E-132
Version details for procedure (diagnostics) window field descriptions .
Appendix E-133
System logs screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-133
Find options (System logs) window field descriptions . Appendix E-134
Configuration screen - System settings view field descriptions . . . . . . .
Appendix E-134
Configure sample ordering window field descriptions. Appendix E-135
Details for sample ordering window field descriptions Appendix E-136
Configure host - release mode window field descriptions . . . Appendix
E-137
Details for host - release mode window field descriptions . . . Appendix
E-139
Configure reports printing window field descriptions . Appendix E-140
Details for reports printing window field descriptions . Appendix E-140
Configure reagents - supplies window field descriptions . . . . Appendix
E-141
Details for reagents - supplies window field descriptions. . . . Appendix
E-143
Configure password window field descriptions . . . . . . Appendix E-144
Details for password window field descriptions . . . . . . Appendix E-144
Configure system control center window field descriptions . Appendix
E-145
Details for system control center window field descriptions . Appendix
E-146
Configure modules window (c System) field descriptions . . . Appendix
E-147
Details for modules window (c System) field descriptions . . . Appendix
E-148
Configure modules window (i 2000) field descriptions Appendix E-148
Details for modules window (i 2000) field descriptionsAppendix E-149
Configure modules window (i 2000SR) field descriptions . . . . Appendix
E-149
Details for modules window (i 2000SR) field descriptions. . . . Appendix
E-150
Configure sample handler window (RSH) field descriptions . Appendix
E-151
Details for sample handler window (RSH) field descriptions . Appendix

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
E-151
Details for sample handler window (SSH) field descriptions .Appendix
E-152
Configure sample handler window (LAS - standard) field descriptions
Appendix E-152
Details for sample handler window (LAS - standard) field descriptions
Appendix E-152
Details for sample handler window (LAS - Hitachi) field descriptions .
Appendix E-153
Configure bar codes window field descriptions . . . . . Appendix E-153
Details for bar codes window field descriptions . . . . . Appendix E-155
Configure serial ports window field descriptions . . . . Appendix E-156
Details for serial ports window field descriptions . . . . Appendix E-157
Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view field
Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view field
Import assay window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-158
Descriptions of import status messages . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-159
Export assay window field descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-160
Descriptions of export status messages . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-161
Configure assay parameters window - General view (i System) field
Details for assay parameters window - General view (i System) field
Configure assay parameters window - General view (calculated) field
Details for assay parameters window - General view (calculated) field
view (photometric - c System) field descriptions. . . . . Appendix E-165
view (photometric - c System) field descriptions. . . . . Appendix E-168
Configure assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view
(photometric - c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-169
Details for assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view
Details for assay parameters window - General - Validity checks view

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Configure assay parameters window - General - ICT view field

Details for assay parameters window - General - ICT view field
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System) field
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System) field
(photometric - c System) field descriptions. . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-179
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Validity checks view
view (photometric - c System) field descriptions . . . . . Appendix E-185
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c System)
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c System)
Configure assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System) field
Details for assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System) field
Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System) field
Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1 probe view (c System) field
Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view (c System) field
Add / edit SmartWash window - Cuvette view (c System) field
Details for assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System) field

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Configure assay parameters window - Results view field descriptions .

Appendix E-193
Configure results parameters window field descriptions . . . .Appendix
E-194
Details for assay parameters window - Results view field descriptions .
Appendix E-195
Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view field
Details for assay parameters window - Interpretation view field
field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-197
field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-197
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - User-defined assay
view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-198
Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - User-defined assay
view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-199
Configure result units window field descriptions . . . . Appendix E-199
Details for result units window field descriptions . . . . Appendix E-200
Configure panel definitions window field descriptions Appendix E-200
Details for panel definition window field descriptions Appendix E-201
Configure assay retest rules window field descriptions Appendix E-201
Add / edit assay retest rules window field descriptions Appendix E-202
Select assay window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-204
Details for assay retest rules window field descriptions Appendix E-204
Configuration screen - QC-Cal settings view field descriptions . . . . . .
Appendix E-205
Configure single analyte window field descriptions . . Appendix E-206
Details for single analyte window field descriptions. . Appendix E-206
Configure multiconstituent control window field descriptions . . . . . .
Appendix E-207
Define data window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-208
Details for multiconstituent control window field descriptions. . . . . .
Appendix E-209
Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window field descriptions. .
Appendix E-210
Details for multiconstituent bar code SID window field descriptions .
Appendix E-211
Configure Westgard window field descriptions . . . . . Appendix E-211

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Details for Westgard window field descriptions . . . . . . Appendix E-211

Configure calibrator set window (c System) field descriptions. . . . . . . .
Appendix E-212
Details for calibrator set window (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . .
Appendix E-212
Utilities screen - Software install view field descriptions . . . . Appendix
E-212
Utilities screen - Backup software view field descriptions . . . Appendix
E-213
Create backup window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-213
Print options window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-213
Printer window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-214

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Read me first
Foreword
Congratulations on the addition of the ARCHITECT System to your

laboratory. The ARCHITECT family of systems incorporates the latest
advancements in laboratory automation, assay technology, and
modularity.
Ease of use
System integration and a common software user interface
provide single sample management and result reporting
capabilities.
Touch screen control allows easy navigation.
An intuitive software user interface reduces training time.
Help?, integrated with the system software, provides
immediate access to information about the currently
displayed screen, window, or error message.
The online operation manual provides the fastest, easiest,
most comprehensive, and most accurate resource for your
informational needs.
Scheduled maintenance procedures display in a To Do list
for automatic tracking and ease of performance.
A Maintenance log, automatically updated after each
procedure is performed, provides current and accurate
maintenance records.
Sample management
Sample carriers accommodate a variety of test tube types.
Sample handlers allow loading of up to
365 (ci System) samples.
215 (c System) samples.
125 (i 2000) samples.
250 (i 4000) samples.
135 (i 2000SR) samples.
Multi-dimensional sampling provides routine, priority,
automated rerun, and reflex processing capabilities.
Clot detection ensures accurate sampling.
Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Read me first-1

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Read me first
With robotic sample handler (RSH)

Indicators provide sample processing status at a glance.
Sample handler design provides continuous sample
access.
Simplified troubleshooting
Direct access to error message help provides probable cause
and corrective action information.
A troubleshooting model provides a practical, systematic
approach to solving problems and implementing solutions.
Read me first topics include:
Customer support, page Read me-3
Intended use, page Read me-4
Proprietary statement, page Read me-5
Disclaimers, page Read me-6
ARCHITECT c System warranty, page Read me-7
ARCHITECT i System warranty, page Read me-8
Abbott warranty, page Read me-9
Agency approvals, page Read me-10
Trademark statement, page Read me-11
System labeling, page Read me-13
Read me first-2 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Read me first Customer support
Customer support
If you have any questions regarding your ARCHITECT System, please
contact your local Abbott Laboratories Diagnostics Division customer
support representative for prompt answers to your inquiries.
United States: 1-877-4ABBOTT (1-877-422-2688)
Canada: 1-800-387-8378 (English speaking customers)
1-800-465-2675 (French speaking customers)
International: Call your local Abbott customer support representative.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Intended use Read me first
Intended use
The Abbott ARCHITECT System is intended for in vitro diagnostic use
only.
The Abbott ARCHITECT System is designed to perform automated:
Chemistry tests, utilizing photometry and potentiometric
technology
Immunoassay tests, utilizing CMIA (chemiluminescent
microparticle assay) detection technology

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Read me first Proprietary statement
Proprietary statement
The ARCHITECT System software programs and system
documentation are protected by copyright. All rights are reserved.
The software and manual were developed solely for use with the
ARCHITECT System and for in vitro diagnostic applications as specified
in the operating instructions.
The information, documents and related graphics published herein
(the "Information") are the sole property of Abbott Laboratories.
Permission to use the Information is granted, provided that
the copyright notice appears on all copies;
use of the Information is for operation of ABBOTT products by
Abbott trained personnel or informational use only;
the Information is not modified in any way; and
no graphics are used separate from accompanying text.
Each person assumes full responsibility and all risks arising from use of
the Information. The Information is presented "AS IS" and may
include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Abbott
Laboratories reserves the right to make additions, deletions, or
modifications to the Information at any time without any prior
notification.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Disclaimers Read me first
Disclaimers
All samples (printouts, graphics, displays, screens, etc.) are for
information and illustration purposes only and shall not be used for
clinical or maintenance evaluations. Data shown in sample printouts
and screens do not reflect actual patient names or test results.
The Information was developed to be used by Abbott Laboratories
trained personnel, by other persons knowledgeable or experienced
with the operation and service of the product identified, or under the
direct supervision and with cooperation from Abbott Laboratories
technical sales or service representatives.
In no event shall Abbott Laboratories or its affiliates be liable for any
damages or losses incurred in connection with or arising from the use
of the Information by persons not fully trained by Abbott
Laboratories. This limitation shall not apply to those persons
knowledgeable or experienced with the operation and service of the
product identified, or under the direct supervision and with
cooperation from Abbott Laboratories technical sales or service
representatives.
No confidential relationship shall be established in the event that any
user of the Information should make any oral, written or electronic
response to Abbott Laboratories (such as feedback, questions,
comments, suggestions, ideas, etc.). Such response and any
information submitted therewith shall be considered
non-confidential, and Abbott shall be free to reproduce, publish or
otherwise use such information for any purposes whatsoever
including, without limitation, the research, development,
manufacture, service, use, or sale of products incorporating such
information. The sender of any information to Abbott is fully
responsible for its content, including its truthfulness and accuracy and
its non-infringement of any other person's proprietary rights.
Abbott Laboratories is not engaged in rendering medical advice or
services.
Updates to the Information may be provided in either paper or
electronic format. Always refer to the latest documents for the most
current information.
Incremental manual updates may cause the master Table of contents
or master Index page numbering to change.
No part of this media may be reproduced, stored, retrieved, or
transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written
permission of Abbott Laboratories.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Read me first ARCHITECT c System warranty
ARCHITECT c System warranty

Abbott Laboratories warrants instruments sold by Abbott Diagnostics
Division to be free from defects in workmanship and materials during
normal use by the original purchaser. This warranty shall continue for
a period of one year, commencing twenty-one (21) days from the date
of shipment to the original purchaser, or until title is transferred from
the original purchaser, whichever occurs first (the "Warranty Period").
If any defects occur during the Warranty period, contact your Abbott
Customer Service Representative immediately, and be prepared to
furnish information including the serial number, the model number,
and pertinent details concerning the defect.
This Warranty does not cover defects or malfunctions which: (1) are
not reported to Abbott during the Warranty Period and within one
week of occurrence; (2) result from chemical decomposition or
corrosion; (3) are caused primarily by failure to comply with any
requirements or instruction contained in the applicable Abbott
Operations Manual; or (4) result from maintenance, repair, or
modification, performed without Abbott's authorization.
Abbott's liability for all matters arising from the supply, installation,
use, repair, and maintenance of the instrument, whether arising under
this Warranty or otherwise, shall be limited solely to the repair or (at
Abbott's sole discretion) replacement of the instrument or of
components thereof. Replaced parts shall become the property of
Abbott Laboratories. In no event shall Abbott be liable for injuries
sustained by third parties, consequential damages, and/or lost profits.
The ICT module Warranty is 15,000 samples or two months
post-installation, whichever occurs first.
The cuvette warranty is one year post-installation.
THE FOREGOING IS THE SOLE WARRANTY MADE BY ABBOTT
LABORATORIES REGARDING THE INSTRUMENT, AND ABBOTT
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS IMPLIED FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
ARCHITECT i System warranty Read me first
ARCHITECT i System warranty

Abbott Laboratories (Abbott) warrants the ARCHITECT i System
(system) when used for its intended purpose by the original purchaser,
excluding items subject to wear and tear which require replacement
during normal use. This warranty shall continue for a period of ninety
(90) days commencing twenty-one (21) days from the date of system
installation, or until title is transferred from the original purchaser,
whichever occurs first (the Warranty Period). The warranty does not
cover the software included in the system, which is subject to the
warranty stated in the Software License Agreement. Other warranty
options may be available through your Abbott representative. The
warranty is country dependent, based on local legal requirements.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Read me first Abbott warranty
Abbott warranty
ABBOTT LABORATORIES MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WITH RESPECT TO THE
INFORMATION. ABBOTT LABORATORIES HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL
REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, CREATED BY LAW, CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE
OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ABBOTT
LABORATORIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
NATURE, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
SPECIAL (INCLUDING LOSS OF PROFIT) CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE EXISTENCE OR USE OF THE INFORMATION, REGARDLESS OF
WHETHER ABBOTT LABORATORIES HAS BEEN ADVISED AS TO THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Agency approvals Read me first
Agency approvals
The ARCHITECT System has been tested and found to comply with
the following agency standards:
UL 61010A-1 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use - Part 1 General
Requirements
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 1010.1 Safety Requirements for Electrical
Equipment for Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use - Part
1 General Requirements
21CFR Part 1040.10: Performance Standards for Light Emitting
Products
IEC 60825-1: Safety of Laser Products (Class I Laser Products)
Directive 2002/96/EC: Waste Electrical and Electronic
Equipment
CE Marking
In Vitro Diagnostic Directive 98/79/EC

Manufacturer Abbott Laboratories
Diagnostic Division
Abbott Park, IL 60064 USA
Authorized Representative in the Abbott
European Community Max-Planck-Ring 2
65205 Wiesbaden
Germany
+49-6122-580

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Read me first Trademark statement
Trademark statement
ARCHITECT, i 2000, i 2000SR, c 8000, ci 8200, Chemiflex, AxSYM,
AEROSET, and MasterCheck are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories.
i 4000, i 6000, i 8000, c 16000, ci 16200, c System, i System,
ARCHITECT ARM, FlexRate, and SmartWash are trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories.
The following references are used throughout this manual to represent
trademarks of Abbott Laboratories.
Reference Trademark
AEROSET AEROSET
ARCHITECT ARCHITECT
ARM ARCHITECT ARM
AxSYM AxSYM
Chemiflex Chemiflex
c 8000 c 8000
c 16000 c 16000
ci 8200 ci 8200
ci 16200 ci 16200
FlexRate FlexRate
i 2000 i 2000
i 2000SR i 2000SR
c System c System
i System i System
MasterCheck MasterCheck
SmartWash SmartWash
All Abbott Laboratories product names and trademarks are owned by

or licensed to Abbott Laboratories, its subsidiaries or affiliates. No use
of any Abbott trademark, trade name, trade dress, or product name
may be made without the prior written authorization of Abbott
Laboratories, except to identify the product or services of Abbott
Laboratories. All other trademarks, brands, product names, and trade
names are the property of their respective companies. All rights
reserved.
Except as permitted above, no license or right, express or implied, is
granted to any person under any patent, trademark, or other
proprietary right of Abbott Laboratories.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Trademark statement Read me first
The following U.S. Patents are relevant to the ARCHITECT c System or

its components.
4,533,457 4,619,739 4,647,362 4,678,755
4,797,192 5,025,389 5,413,770
The following U.S. Patents are relevant to ARCHITECT i Systems or

components.
5,468,646 5,536,049 5,543,524 5,545,739
5,565,570 5,669,819 5,682,662 5,723,795
5,795,784 Des. 397,938 Des. 401,699 Des. 401,697
Des. 401,700 5,783,699 5,856,194 5,859,429
Des. 404,829 Des. 406,901 5,915,282 5,915,583
5,938,120 Des. 413,539 5,965,828 6,022,746
6,063,634 6,150,113 6,153,377 6,162,645
6,413,780 6,562,298 6,588,625
There are other such patents and patent applications in the United
States and worldwide.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Read me first System labeling
System labeling
The symbols in the following table are used on ARCHITECT System
labeling.
Key to symbols used on labeling
Label Description
Authorized Representative in the European
Community
Legal manufacturer
NOTE: A new presentation of the Legal

manufacturer label will be phased into the system
labeling in a future revision.
In vitro Diagnostic Medical Device
Manufacturer
Date of manufacture
Serial number
Alternating current
Class 2 laser radiation
Caution, risk of electrical shock
Electrical and electronic equipment waste
Temperature limitation
Use by/Expiration date
Consult operating instructions
Caution, risk of danger, consult instructions for use

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
System labeling Read me first
Key to symbols used on labeling (continued)

Label Description
Batch code/Lot number
Quantity
Unit
Biological risks
Biohazard
Caution, hot surface
Assay disk
Version
Conventional units
Standard international unit
Sample cups
ICT Cleaning Fluid
ICT Lyophilized Cleaning Solution
Water Bath Additive
Pre-Trigger Solution
Trigger Solution
Concentrated Wash Buffer
Wash buffer

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Read me first System labeling
Key to symbols used on labeling (continued)

Label Description
Reaction vessels
Septum
Replacement caps
Multi-Assay Manual Diluent
Catalog number/List number
Acid Wash
Alkaline Wash
ICT Reference Solution
Detergent A
Detergent B

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
System documentation
Introduction
<F=0>
Documentation for the ARCHITECT System consists of the

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, available in both printed and
online versions, and ARCHITECT System Help.
Please take the time to become familiar with the organization,
features, and use of each. Learning to use the documentation will pay
off in time saved, trouble averted, and more confident operation of
the ARCHITECT System.
System documentation topics include:
Printed documentation, page System documentation-2
Online documentation, page System documentation-6
Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual System documentation-1

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Printed documentation System documentation
Printed documentation
The printed version of the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual
contains complete instructions for using and maintaining the
ARCHITECT System. You will find it a valuable aid as you learn to use
the system and an essential reference.
Printed documentation topics include:
Organization of the printed operations manual, page System
documentation-2
Conventions for the printed documentation, page System
documentation-4
Organization of the printed operations manual

The printed ARCHITECT System Operations Manual is organized as
follows.
Read me first Refer to this section for important
information such as:
Customer support numbers
Intended use of the system
Trademark statements
Warranty details
System documentation Refer to this section for:
Information on content organization
Features of the support
documentation
Use of both the printed and online
operations manual as well as online
help
Section 1 Use this section to identify:
Use or function Basic system components
Fundamentals of the user interface
Operating statuses of the processing
module(s) and sample handler
Section 2 Refer to this section for:
Installation procedures and special Information on locating and placing
requirements the instrument
Installing system and assay software
Configuring the system to meet your
laboratory's specific needs
System documentation-2 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
System documentation Printed documentation
Section 3 Refer to this section for an explanation

Principles of operation of:
The assay technology
How the system translates
measurements into useful data and
reports
Section 4 Refer to this section for details such as:
Performance characteristics and Dimensions of the instrument
specifications System capabilities
Power requirements
Section 5 Use this section to learn how to
Operating instructions perform the various tasks related to
running assays on the system.
Section 6 Use this section to learn how to:
Calibration procedures Run assay calibrations
Review completed calibration results
Section 7 Review this section carefully for
Operational precautions and information about actions or conditions
limitations that can impact the:
Integrity of the ARCHITECT System
Accuracy of patient test results
Section 8 Use this section to become familiar with
Hazards the safety icons both on the instrument
and in the manual that alert you to
potentially hazardous situations.
Service and maintenance Descriptions of all maintenance
procedures
Instructions for performing
scheduled and non-scheduled
maintenance procedures
Step-by-step instructions for
replacing components
Troubleshooting and diagnostics Troubleshooting basics
Information on probable causes and
corrective actions for observed
problems and error codes
Descriptions of all diagnostic
procedures
diagnostic procedures

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Printed documentation System documentation
Appendixes Refer to the appendixes for information

on:
Reports
Assay claim verifications
Math models
List numbers
Screen and window elements
Glossary Refer to this section for definitions of
ARCHITECT System terms.
Index Use this alphabetical listing of subject
matter to find specific information about
the system.
Revision history Refer to this section for a history of
revisions to the operations manual.
Conventions for the printed documentation

Conventions are a set of defined standards and are used to convey
meaning in an expected manner. The conventions used in the
ARCHITECT System printed documentation are intended to facilitate
finding, reading, understanding, and using the available information.
Text conventions
Description Use
Italicized typeface Indicates references to related
information.
Bold typeface Emphasizes key words within
procedures. For example, within the
numbered steps bold typeface is
applied to names of:
Icons and menu items
Buttons
Function keys
Lists and tables and their available
selections
Options and check boxes
Numbers in brackets, for example [1], Reference specific areas of an
[2], and so forth illustration within a procedure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
System documentation Printed documentation
Content conventions
Description Use
Requirements tables at the beginning Provide the information you need to
of each procedure know prior to performing a procedure.
This information varies by procedure
and may include:
Prerequisites for performing the
procedure
Module status required to perform
the procedure
Operator access level required to
perform the procedure
Time required to complete the
procedure
Tools required to perform the
procedure
Replacement parts or supplies that
you must have on hand
Lists of related information topics at the Reference topics that provide
end of procedures, as appropriate information related to the procedure,
which can help in performing the
procedure.
Lists of related procedural topics at the Reference procedures that can be
end of screen and window descriptions, performed from specific screens and
as appropriate windows.
Graphic conventions
Description Use
Safety symbols, see Safety icons, Identify activities that expose you to
page 8-4, and the caution or warning potentially dangerous conditions.
signal word
Important signal word Advise you of precautions you should

take to avoid a negative impact on
system operations or assay results.
Note signal word Highlights information that is relevant to
the current subject matter.
Numerical references on illustrations, Indicate the area described in the table

photographs, and reports that follows.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Online documentation System documentation
Online documentation
The online documentation is designed to provide the fastest, easiest,
and most accurate resource for your informational needs.
The online operations manual (ARCHITECT System Operations
Manual) contains the same content as the printed operations manual,
which includes complete instructions for using and maintaining an
ARCHITECT System. You can access the online operations manual
from the software on the SCC (system control center) and from a
stand-alone computer with the online operations manual installed.
Access to the online operations manual from the system software
Legend:
1. Operations manual menu item: Displays the online operations manual.
2. Online operations manual: Displays the content of the ARCHITECT System
Operations Manual electronically.
Help? (ARCHITECT System Help) is integrated with the system
software on the SCC to provide direct access to information about the
SCC screen, window, or error message currently displayed. Help?
content is a subset of information found in the operations manual.
You can access Help? for:
A screen or window - from the screen or window

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
System documentation Online documentation
An error message - from the error message and the Details for
exception status window
Access to Help? (screen or window)
Legend:
1. Help button: Displays Help? for the current screen or window.
2. Help?: Displays detailed information about the screen or window. Help
content for the screen or window currently displayed includes overview
information, links to descriptions of all fields, and links to procedures you
can perform from the screen or window.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Access to Help? (error message)
Legend:
1. Help button (error message): Displays Help? for the current error message.
2. Help?: Displays detailed information about the error message including
corrective actions required to resolve the issue.
Online documentation topics include:
Conventions for the online documentation, page System
documentation-8
Help window descriptions, page System documentation-10
Procedure map description, page System documentation-21
Tips for using the online documentation, page System
documentation-24
Procedures for using the online documentation, page System
documentation-26
Conventions for the online documentation

Conventions are a set of defined standards and are used to convey
meaning in an expected manner. The conventions used in the

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
ARCHITECT System online documentation are intended to facilitate

finding, reading, understanding, and using the available information.
Text conventions
Description Used
Bold typeface Emphasizes key words within
procedures. For example, within the
numbered steps bold typeface is
applied to names of:
Icons and menu items
Buttons
Function keys
Lists and tables and their available
selections
Options and check boxes
Blue, underlined text Indicates links to related information.
Blue, 3D (three-dimensional) bullets Indicate procedural topics.
Numbers in brackets, for example [1], Reference specific areas of an
[2], and so forth illustration within a procedure.
Content conventions
Description Use
Requirements tables at the beginning Provide the information you need to
of each procedure know prior to performing a procedure.
This information varies by procedure
and may include:
Prerequisites for performing the
procedure
Module status required to perform
the procedure
Operator access level required to
perform the procedure
Time required to complete the
procedure
Tools required to perform the
procedure
Replacement parts or supplies that
you must have on hand
Lists of related information topics at the Reference topics that provide additional
end of procedures, as appropriate information related to procedures.
Lists of related procedural topics at the Reference procedures that can be
end of screen and window descriptions, performed from specific screens and
as appropriate windows.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Graphic conventions
Description Use
Safety symbols see Safety icons, Identify activities that expose you to
page 8-4, and the caution or warning potentially dangerous conditions.
signal word
Important symbol and signal word Advise you of precautions you should
take to avoid a negative impact on
system operations or assay results.
Note symbol and signal word Highlight information that is relevant to

the current subject matter.
Numerical references on illustrations Indicate the area described in the table

and photographs that follows.
Numerical references on reports Indicate the area described in the table
that follows and serve as hypertext
links to that information.
Help window descriptions

The online documentation (ARCHITECT System Operations Manual
and ARCHITECT System Help) is designed for online viewing and use
and displays in a help window, which provides several elements to
help you quickly access desired information and functionality.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Help window example - online operations manual
Legend:
1. Title bar: Displays the name of the help window.
2. Help window toolbar, page System documentation-12: Use the buttons to
display topics in the topic pane, print a topic, or close the help window.
3. Help window navigation pane (online operations manual), page System
documentation-14: Use to find and display topics.
4. Help window topic pane, page System documentation-13: Use to view topic
content and display related information.
5. Help on Help button: Select to display a list of tasks/procedures for using the
online documentation.
6. Minimize button: Select to reduce the help window to a program button
on the taskbar at the bottom of the screen. To display the minimized help
window, select the program button.
Maximize/Restore Down button: Select to enlarge the help window to full
screen size or to restore the help window to its last size and position
before it was maximized.
Exit button: Select to close the help window.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Help window example - Help? (screen or window)
Legend:
1. Title bar: Displays the name of the help window.
2. Toolbar: Use the buttons to display topics in the topic pane, print a topic, or
close the help window.
3. Topic pane: Use to view topic content and display related information.
4. Minimize button: Select to reduce the help window to a program button
on the taskbar at the bottom of the screen. To display the minimized help
window, select the program button.
Maximize/Restore Down button: Select to enlarge the help window to full
screen size or to restore the help window to its last size and position
before it was maximized.
Exit button: Select to close the help window.
Help window toolbar
The toolbar, below the title bar on the help window, contains
command buttons that provide quick access to commonly used
navigational aids as well as the print and close commands.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Previous
(Online operations manual) Select to display the
previous topic listed in the table of contents.
Next
(Online operations manual) Select to display the next
topic listed in the table of contents.
Back
Select to display the last topic you viewed.
Forward
Select to display the next topic in a previously displayed
sequence of topics.
Home
Select to display the procedure map. (Not available for
error codes.)
Print
Select to print the current topic or all topics under a
particular heading.
Glossary
Select to display the glossary.
Close
Select to close the help window.
Help window topic pane
The topic pane, under the toolbar, is the area of the help window
where online content displays. In addition to content, individual

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
topics may contain navigational aids (for example, hypertext and

image maps) and multimedia.
Topic pane example - Help?
Related procedures...
Display related information, page System documentation-39
Play videos and animations, page System documentation-41
Help window navigation pane (online operations manual)
The navigation pane, under the toolbar and to the left of the topic
pane, is the area of the help window that provides the primary
navigational functionality.
NOTE: When only a portion of the topic title is displayed in the

navigation pane, you can click and drag the right border of the pane
to widen it.
It contains four tabs that you can use to find and display information
in the online ARCHITECT System Operations Manual:
Contents tab (online operations manual), page System
documentation-15

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index tab (online operations manual), page System

documentation-18
Search tab (online operations manual), page System
documentation-19
Favorites tab (online operations manual), page System
documentation-20
Navigation pane and tabs
Use the table of contents (online operations manual), page System
documentation-30
Use the index (online operations manual), page System
documentation-31
Search for a term (online operations manual), page System
documentation-32
Add or remove a favorite topic (online operations manual),
page System documentation-44
Contents tab (online operations manual)
The Contents tab is a tab on the navigation pane that displays the
table of contents, which shows how information in the online
ARCHITECT System Operations Manual is organized, see Organization
of the online operations manual, page System documentation-17. Topics

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
identified by a book icon and a plus (+) sign have one or more
subtopics. Topics identified by a page icon have no additional
subtopics.
Contents tab
documentation-30
Page through the content (online operations manual), page System
documentation-30

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Organization of the online operations manual
The online ARCHITECT System Operations Manual is organized as

follows:
Read me first Refer to this section for important
information such as:
Customer support numbers
Intended use of the system
Trademark statements
Warranty details
System documentation Refer to this section for:
Information on content organization
Features of the support
documentation
Use of both the printed and online
operations manual as well as online
help
Section 1 Use this section to identify:
Use or function Basic system components
Fundamentals of the user interface
Operating statuses of the processing
module(s) and sample handler
Installation procedures and special Information on locating and placing
requirements the instrument
Installing system and assay software
Configuring the system to meet your
laboratory's specific needs
Section 3 Refer to this section for an explanation
Principles of operation of:
The assay technology
How the system translates
measurements into useful data and
reports
Section 4 Refer to this section for details such as:
Performance characteristics and Dimensions of the instrument
specifications System capabilities
Power requirements
Section 5 Use this section to learn how to
Operating instructions perform the various tasks related to
running assays on the system.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 6 Use this section to learn how to:

Calibration procedures Run assay calibrations
Review completed calibration results
Section 7 Review this section carefully for
Operational precautions and information about actions or conditions
limitations that can impact the:
Integrity of the ARCHITECT System
Accuracy of patient test results
Section 8 Use this section to become familiar with
Hazards the safety icons both on the instrument
and in the manual that alert you to
potentially hazardous situations.
Service and maintenance Descriptions of all maintenance
procedures
scheduled and non-scheduled
maintenance procedures
Step-by-step instructions for
replacing components
Troubleshooting and diagnostics Troubleshooting basics
Information on probable causes and
corrective actions for observed
problems and error codes
Descriptions of all diagnostic
procedures
diagnostic procedures
Appendixes Refer to the appendixes for information
on:
Reports
Assay claim verifications
Math models
List numbers
Screen and window elements
Revision history Refer to this section for a history of
revisions to the operations manual.
Index tab (online operations manual)
The Index tab is a tab on the navigation pane that displays an

alphabetical list of all index entries in the online ARCHITECT System
Operations Manual. Entries are indexed by subject and relevance, and

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
include terms for all experience levels and informational types from
general to specific.
Index tab
documentation-31
Search tab (online operations manual)
The Search tab is a tab on the navigation pane that allows you to
locate every occurrence (up to 500) of a word or phrase used in the
online ARCHITECT System Operations Manual. You can also limit the
number of results returned by using advanced search capabilities to
refine your search.
NOTE: When only a portion of the topic title is displayed in the

Search tab's navigation pane, you can click and drag either the right
border of the pane or the Title column.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Search tab
documentation-32
Perform an advanced search (online operations manual), page System
documentation-33
Favorites tab (online operations manual)
The Favorites tab is a tab on the navigation pane that displays topics
you have added to your favorites list, which are topics you wish to
access often. The list is saved and is available each time you open the
online ARCHITECT System Operations Manual.
Favorites tab

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Display a favorite topic (online operations manual), page System
documentation-40
Rename a favorite topic (online operations manual), page System
documentation-45
Procedure map description

The procedure map is an online image map that displays categories of
job-related activities and provides links to lists of tasks and procedures.
You can use the procedure map to quickly access step-by-step
instructions for performing your primary job responsibilities.
Procedure map
Legend:
1. Help on Help: Provides access to procedures associated with using the
online documentation.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2. Stored Results: Provides access to procedures associated with

retransmitting, printing, and archiving patient and control results.
3. Quality Control: Provides access to procedures associated with reviewing
Levey-Jennings graph data and printing QC reports.
4. Setup: Provides access to procedures associated with configuring and
viewing system, assay, and QC/Cal settings, installing software and assays,
and printing reports.
5. Troubleshooting: Provides access to procedures associated with emergency
shutdown, reviewing system logs, performing diagnostics, replacing
components, and printing diagnostic reports.
6. Maintenance: Provides access to procedures associated with performing
maintenance, approving maintenance logs, and printing reports.
7. Sample Processing: Provides access to procedures associated with
preparing for operation, ordering tests, loading and processing samples,
reviewing results, and printing reports.
Display and use the procedure map, page System documentation-29
Task lists
Task lists are online topics you access from the procedure map. Each
topic contains an expandable list of tasks related to the selected
procedure map category or job-related activity. Under each task is a list
of links to the associated procedures.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Example of a task list (maintenance)
Legend:
1. Task list item expanded
2. Task list item collapsed

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Online documentation use System documentation
Online documentation use

The online documentation is designed to help you quickly and easily
find the information you need to:
Accomplish a task
Recover from a mistake
Troubleshoot a problem
Optimize task performance
Understand the concepts behind system operation and
performance
Online documentation use topics include:
Tips for using the online documentation, page System
documentation-24
Procedures for using the online documentation, page System
documentation-26
Tips for using the online documentation

The online documentation is designed to provide the fastest, easiest,
and most accurate resource for your informational needs. However,
your understanding of how it works and how to use it will enhance
your satisfaction with the results.
For example, there are a number of ways to retrieve information. To an
extent the fastest and easiest method depends on the online
documentation you are using and the type of information you are
seeking.
The following tables provide tips for using Help? (ARCHITECT System
Help) and the online operations manual (ARCHITECT System
Operations Manual) to find specific types of information.
Using Help?
To... Then...
View a description of the current screen Access Help?, page System
or window documentation-28.
View a list of procedures you can 1. Access Help?, page System
perform from the current screen or documentation-28.
window
2. Scroll through a topic, page System
documentation-39 to view the list of
procedures under Related
procedures.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
System documentation Online documentation use
Using Help? (continued)

To... Then...
Display the steps of a procedure you 1. Access Help?, page System
can perform from the current screen or documentation-28.
window
2. Scroll through a topic, page System
documentation-39, and then select
one of the list items under Related
procedures.
Find the location of a part when 1. Access Help?, page System
performing a maintenance procedure documentation-28, for the
Maintenance Perform window.
2. Display related information,

page System documentation-39, for
associated maintenance graphics.
Find a description of a procedure when 1. Access Help?, page System
performing maintenance and documentation-28, for the
diagnostic procedures Maintenance Perform window.
2. Display related information,

page System documentation-39, for
maintenance categories and
procedure descriptions.
View all procedures related to the Display and use the procedure map,
performance of a particular task page System documentation-29.
Look up a word Use the glossary, page System
documentation-38.
View topics that contain related Display related information,
information page System documentation-39.
View more information about an error Access Help?, page System
code including suggested corrective documentation-28.
actions
Using the online operations manual

To... Then...
Get an overview of the subject matter Use the table of contents (online
found in the online ARCHITECT operations manual), page System
System Operations Manual documentation-30
Step through a sequence of associated Page through the content (online
topics operations manual), page System
documentation-30

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Using the online operations manual (continued)

To... Then...
Find a description of a particular screen Perform one of the following:
or window Use the index (online operations
manual), page System
documentation-31
Search for a term (online operations
documentation-32
View the procedures you can perform Select the blue, underlined text found in
from a particular screen the body of the content or at the end of
the topic under Related procedures.
View all procedures related to the Display and use the procedure map,
performance of a particular task page System documentation-29.
Find and view a particular procedure Perform one of the following:
Use the index (online operations
documentation-31
Search for a term (online operations
documentation-32
Look up a word Use the glossary, page System
documentation-38.
View topics that contain related Display related information,
information page System documentation-39.
Quickly display frequently accessed 1. Add topics to your favorites list. See
topics Add or remove a favorite topic
(online operations manual),
page System documentation-44.
2. Display a favorite topic (online

operations manual), page System
documentation-40.
View more information about an error Search for the error code, see Search
code including suggested corrective for a term (online operations manual),
actions page System documentation-32.
Procedures for using the online documentation

The following procedures provide instructions on how to access and
use the online operations manual (ARCHITECT System Operations
Manual) and Help? (ARCHITECT System Help):
Access the online operations manual, page System
documentation-27
Access Help?, page System documentation-28

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Display and use the procedure map, page System documentation-29

documentation-30
Page through the content (online operations manual), page System
documentation-30
documentation-31
documentation-32
Perform an advanced search (online operations manual),
Use the glossary, page System documentation-38
Scroll through a topic, page System documentation-39
Display related information, page System documentation-39
Redisplay a topic, page System documentation-40
Display a favorite topic (online operations manual), page System
documentation-40
Play videos and animations, page System documentation-41
Print topics from the online documentation, page System
documentation-41
Close the help window, page System documentation-43
Resize and move the help window, page System documentation-43
Rename a favorite topic (online operations manual), page System
documentation-45
Access the online operations manual
Perform this procedure to display the online operations manual

(ARCHITECT System Operations Manual) on either the SCC (system
control center) or a stand-alone computer that has the online
operations manual installed.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
User access level General operator

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To access the online operations manual from the SCC:

Select Overview from the menu bar, and then select Operations
manual.
The online operations manual opens in a help window and displays
the title page in the topic pane.
To access the online operations manual from a stand-alone computer:
Click Start, point to Programs, point to ARCHITECT System
Operations Manual, and then click the (Language) Operations
Manual.
The online operations manual opens in a help window and displays
the title page in the topic pane.
Related information...
Access Help?
Perform this procedure to display Help? (ARCHITECT System Help) on

the SCC (system control center).
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
To access Help?:
Select the help button found in the lower right-hand corner of

the software screen or window.
Help? opens and displays content specific to the current screen or
window.
To access Help? for error code messages, perform one of the following:
Select the help button on the error message.
Select the Error? help button on the Details for
exceptions window.
Help? opens and displays content specific to the current error
message.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Display and use the procedure map
Perform this procedure to view a list of procedures related to the

performance of a particular task and to display the instructions
associated with each procedure.
Prerequisite Access the online operations manual, page System
documentation-27, or Access Help?, page System
documentation-28
Module status Any
To display and use the procedure map:

1. Select the Home button on the toolbar.
The procedure map displays in the topic pane.
2. Select a category on the procedure map to display a list of related

tasks.
The topic content related to your selection displays in the topic
pane with an expandable list of related tasks.
3. Select a task(s) with a right arrow symbol to display a list of

related subtasks or procedures.
The right arrow changes to a down arrow and a list of subtasks
or procedures displays.
NOTE: You can select tasks with a down arrow symbol to

collapse the list.
4. Repeat step 3 until the desired procedure displays, and then

select the procedure.
The procedure content displays in the topic pane.
5. Select the Back button to return to the task list. (optional)
Help window toolbar, page System documentation-12
Procedure map description, page System documentation-21
Task lists, page System documentation-22

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use the table of contents (online operations manual)
Perform this procedure to view a list of topics found in the online

operations manual (ARCHITECT System Operations Manual) and to
display the associated content.
documentation-27
Module status Any
To use the table of contents:

1. Select the Contents tab on the navigation pane.
2. Select the + symbols next to the book icons.
NOTE: You can select the - symbol to collapse the list.
3. Use the scroll bar to the right of the navigation pane to view all
content.
4. Select a topic title.

The topic content displays in the topic pane.
Contents tab (online operations manual), page System
documentation-15
Organization of the online operations manual, page System
documentation-17
Page through the content (online operations manual)
Perform this procedure to step through a sequence of associated topics

much like turning the pages of a book. You can start anywhere in the
table of contents, but a logical starting point is at a heading or
subheading level.
documentation-27
Module status Any
To page through the content:

1. Select the Contents tab on the navigation pane, and then select
a topic title.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2. Select the Next button on the toolbar to display the next topic
listed in the table of contents.
3. Repeat step 2 as often as desired.
4. Select the Previous button to display the previous topic listed in

the table of contents. (optional)
Organization of the online operations manual, page System
documentation-17
Use the index (online operations manual)
Perform this procedure to view a list of index entries and display the
associated content.
documentation-27
Module status Any
To use the index:

1. Select the Index tab on the navigation pane.
2. Type a word or scroll through the list.
3. Select the desired entry, and then select Display.

Or
The Topics Found dialog displays if the selected entry is found in
more than one topic. Highlight the desired topic, and then select
Display.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index tab (online operations manual), page System
documentation-18
Search for a term (online operations manual)
Perform this procedure to conduct a basic search of the ARCHITECT

System Operations Manual for the use of a particular word or phrase.
For example, if you search for the word create every topic that contains
the word create is found.
NOTE: In non-English languages instances of the same word, with and

without accented characters, are found. Exact matches including the
accented and non-accented characters are highlighted. Search results
may be expanded to include word forms of the entry.
The basic rules for formulating search queries are:
Enter the desired word or phrase in either uppercase or lowercase
characters. Searches are not case sensitive.
Enter any combination of letters (a-z) and numbers (0-9). You
cannot search for single letters (a, b, c, and so forth).
Punctuation marks such as a period, colon, semicolon, comma,
and hyphen are ignored.
To target your search and narrow the number of results returned, see
Perform an advanced search (online operations manual), page System
documentation-33.
documentation-27
Module status Any

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To search for a term:

1. Select the Search tab on the navigation pane.
2. Enter the desired word or phrase, or select the down arrow to

choose from previous used search terms.
NOTE: Use quotation marks to specify a literal phrase for

example, sample processing. Without the quotation marks, your
search is equivalent to specifying "sample" AND "processing,"
which finds topics that contain both individual words and not
necessarily the phrase.
3. Select List Topics.

The number of results found and a list of topics that contain the
word or phrase display sorted by rank (number of occurrences in
a topic).
4. Select Title to sort the topic list alphabetically. (optional)
5. Select a topic from the Select Topics to display list, and then
select Display.
documentation-19
Perform an advanced search (online operations manual)
Perform this procedure to target your search and narrow the number
of results returned. Steps are included to perform an advanced search
using:
Boolean operators - qualifiers that enable you to refine a search
by creating a relationship between words
Nested expressions - a combination of operators, one inside
another, that enable you to perform an even more refined search
Wildcard expressions - keyboard characters that enable you to
search for terms without entering a complete entry
Previous results only
Similar word matches

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Topic titles only

documentation-27
Module status Any
To perform an advanced search using boolean operators:

1. Select the Search tab on the navigation pane, and then enter the
desired terms.
2. Place the cursor where you want to use a boolean operator, and
then select the right arrow button to display a list of
operators.
3. Select the boolean operator to add, see Boolean operators

description, page System documentation-37.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add additional operators. (optional)
NOTE: You can type the boolean operator(s) or select the right
arrow button , and then select the operator to add.

a topic).
7. Select the desired topic, and then select Display.

To perform an advanced search using nested expressions:
nested expression, see Nested expressions description, page System
documentation-37.
NOTE: You can type the boolean operator(s) or select the right
arrow button , and then select the operator to add.

a topic).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

To perform an advanced search using a wildcard expression:
characters and wildcard expression, see Wildcard expressions
description, page System documentation-38.

a topic).

To perform an advanced search in previous results only:
word or phrase you want to find.
2. Select the Search previous results check box to search through

the results of your last search in the current help session.

a topic).

NOTE: The Search tab opens with the Search previous results
check box selected if you used this feature last. To search
through all files in the operations manual you must select this
check box to clear it.
To perform an advanced search for similar words:
2. Select the Match similar words check box.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: This search feature adjusts word forms to expand the

context, for example the word create is also found as creating, to
create, created, and so forth.
This feature is not functional for non-English languages.

a topic).

NOTE: The Search tab displays with the Match similar words
check box selected if you used this feature last. You can select
this check box to clear it.
To perform an advanced search in topic titles only:
2. Select the Search titles only check box.

a topic).

NOTE: The Search tab displays with the Search titles only check
box selected if you used this feature last. To search through all
files in the operations manual you must select this check box to
clear it.
documentation-19

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Boolean operators description
Boolean operators (AND, OR, NOT, and NEAR) are qualifiers that
enable you to refine a search by creating a relationship between words.
If you do not specify an operator, AND is used. For example, a search
for system control center is equivalent to a search for system AND control
AND center.
The following table shows how to use each operator.
Using boolean operators
To search for Use Results in
Both words in the same topic processing AND module A list of topics containing both the
words "processing" and "module"
Either word in a topic processing OR module A list of topics containing either the
word "processing" or the word
"module" or both
The first word without the processing NOT module A list of topics containing the word
second word "processing," but not the word
"module"
Both words in the same topic, processing NEAR module A list of topics containing the word
close together "processing" within eight words of
the word "module"
Nested expressions description
Nested expressions are a combination of operators, one inside another,

that enable you to create a highly refined search. The expressions in
parentheses are evaluated first. For example, a search for calibration
NOT (active OR failed) finds topics containing the word calibration
without either of the words active or failed.
Without the parentheses your search is evaluated from left to right
and finds topics containing the word calibration without the word
active, or topics containing the word failed.
You can nest expressions five levels deep. The following example
shows a nested expression using two levels:
calibration AND ((active OR failed) NEAR curve)
This search finds topics containing the word calibration used with the
words active and curve close together, or topics containing the word
calibration with the words failed and curve close together.
Boolean operators description, page System documentation-37

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Wildcard expressions description
Wildcard expressions are keyboard characters used to represent one or

more real characters. You use wildcard expressions to search for terms
without entering a complete entry by:
Using a question mark as a substitute for a single character
Using an asterisk as a substitute for any number of characters
NOTE: The question mark or asterisk cannot be the only
character used.
The following table shows how to use the asterisk wildcard expression.
Using an asterisk wildcard expression
To search for Use Results in
Results that start with specific op* A list of topics that contain the terms "operator,"
characters or numbers "operating," "operation," and so forth.
Results that start and end with 80*86 A list of topics that contain the numbers
specific characters or numbers "80186," "80286," "80386," and so forth.
Results that end with specific *25 A list of topics that contain the numbers "125,"
characters or numbers "1025," "12025," and so forth.
Results that contain specific *15* A list of topics that contain the numbers "15,"
characters or numbers "215," "3015," and so forth.
Use the glossary
Perform this procedure to look up the definition.

documentation-28
Module status Any
To use the glossary:

1. Select the Glossary button on the toolbar.
The glossary displays.
2. Select the desired letter.

An alphabetized list of terms and definitions that start with the
selected letter displays.
3. Use the scroll bar to the right of the topic pane, as required, to
display the desired word.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Help window topic pane, page System documentation-13
Scroll through a topic
Perform this procedure to view all content of a longer topic or to

control which part of the content displays in the help window.
documentation-28
Module status Any
To scroll through a topic:

1. Use the down arrow, in the lower right-hand corner of topics
that have scroll bars, to scroll through the content.
The content scrolls down and the scroll box indicates your
position in the topic.
2. Select the up or down arrow to move a few lines at a time.

(optional)
3. Select an empty space above or below the scroll box to move

several lines at a time. (optional)
4. Drag the scroll box to the desired location. (optional)
Display related information
Perform this procedure to display related information such as a further

explanation, a definition, procedures, and so forth.
documentation-28
Module status Any
To display related information:

1. Select the hypertext (blue, underlined text).
The related information displays in the topic pane.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2. Select the Back button on the toolbar to return to the previously

displayed topic. (optional)
Redisplay a topic
Perform this procedure to display a topic(s) you have viewed in your

current help session.
documentation-28
Module status Any
To redisplay a topic:
1. Select the Back button on the toolbar to display the last topic
you viewed.
2. Select the Forward button to display the next topic in a

previously displayed sequence of topics.
Display a favorite topic (online operations manual)
Perform this procedure to display a topic(s) in your favorites list.

documentation-27
Module status Any
To display a favorite topic:

1. Select the Favorites tab on the navigation pane.
2. Select the desired topic from the Topics list, and then select
Display.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

documentation-20
Play videos and animations
Perform this procedure to display and play video and animation clips.
documentation-28
Module status Any
To play video and animation clips:

1. Select the movie button to the left of images that have
multimedia capabilities.
The video or animation clip loads and begins to play. Three
buttons display below the image. These buttons represent the
standard play , pause , and stop buttons commonly
associated with VCRs and CD-Players.
2. Select the movie button after the video or animation has

played to return to the original view.
Print topics from the online documentation
Perform this procedure to print the currently displayed topic or to

print all topics under a heading.
documentation-28
Module status Any
To print topics from the online documentation:

1. Select the Print button on the toolbar.
The Print Topics window displays with Print the selected topic
option selected if you are using the Contents tab to access topics.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Or
The Print window displays with the General tab selected.
2. Perform steps a and b or step b depending on the window that

displays.
a. From the Print Topics window select OK to print the selected
topic or select Print the selected heading and all subtopics
option, and then select OK.
The Print window displays with the General tab selected.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
b. From the Print window follow these instructions:
Option Instructions
Printer Do not change the selection when printing from the
SCC (system control center).
Print to file Do not select.
Find Printer Do not select.
Page Range Do not change the default selection of All.
Number of copies Select the up arrow to increase the number of
copies. (optional)
Do not select the Collate option.
Print Select to print.
Close the help window
Perform this procedure to close the help window.

documentation-28
Module status Any
To close the help window:

Select the Close button on the toolbar.
The help window closes.
Resize and move the help window
Perform this procedure to change the size and position of the help
window and the width of help window panes. Steps are included to:
Maximize the help window
Resize the navigation and topic panes (online operations
manual)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Change the width or height of the help window

Move the help window
documentation-28
To maximize the help window:

Select the Maximize button in the upper right-hand corner of the
help window.
The help window enlarges to full screen size. You can select the
Restore Down button to return it to its previous size and position.
To resize the navigation and topic panes (online operations manual):
1. Position the pointer on the divider between the two panes.
The pointer changes to a double arrow .
2. Drag the divider right or left.

To change the height or width of the help window:
1. Position the pointer on the top, bottom, left, or right edge of the
help window.
The pointer changes to a double arrow .
2. Drag the edge in the desired direction.

To move the help window:
1. Position the pointer on the title bar.
2. Drag the help window to the desired position.
Add or remove a favorite topic (online operations manual)
Perform this procedure to add a topic(s) to your favorites list for quick
access, or to remove a topic(s) that is no longer needed.
documentation-27
Module status Any
To add a favorite topic:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section HowTo Online documentation use
1. Display the desired topic.
3. Select Add.
The topic title displays in the Topic list.
To remove a favorite topic:
Remove.
The topic title no longer displays in the Topic list.
documentation-20
Rename a favorite topic (online operations manual)
Perform this procedure to rename a favorites topic.

documentation-27
Module status Any
To rename a favorite topic:

Display.
3. Enter the new name in the Current topic data entry box, and
then select Add.
4. Select the old topic name, and then select Remove. (optional)
documentation-20
Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Section HowTo-45

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
Introduction
Use or function
<F=0>
The modular design and integration capabilities of the ARCHITECT

family of analyzers provide a single workstation capable of processing
a variety of assays.
With an intuitive software interface, real-time display of system
statuses, and a "to do" list of scheduled maintenance activities, you
can minimize system interaction and optimize your productivity.
Use or function topics include:
ARCHITECT System overview, page 1-2
Provides a general description of the available ARCHITECT
System configurations.
System control center, page 1-8
Provides a detailed description of the computer system, both
hardware and software, that provides the interface to your
ARCHITECT System.
Processing modules, page 1-25
Provides a detailed description of each processing module
including all related hardware components.
Sample handlers, page 1-115
Provides a detailed description of each sample transport system
including all related hardware components.
Required consumables, page 1-126
Describes the consumables that are required to operate each
system.
Required accessories, page 1-147
Describes the accessories that are required to operate each
system.
System statuses, page 1-156
Lists and describes the various statuses of each system.
Automatic processing module activities, page 1-166
Describes the automatic activities performed by the processing
module(s).
Section 1-1 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
ARCHITECT System overview Section 1
ARCHITECT System overview

The modular design of the ARCHITECT family of analyzers allows
multiple processing modules, which perform all sample processing
activities, to be physically joined to form a single workstation or
system. The processing module(s) determines your system
configuration.
ARCHITECT Systems can be configured to process samples using
potentiometric and photometric methods and/or CMIA
(chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) methods.
System overview topics include:
Primary components of an ARCHITECT System, page 1-2
ARCHITECT integrated system, page 1-2
ARCHITECT c 8000 System, page 1-3
ARCHITECT i 2000 System, page 1-5
ARCHITECT i 2000SR System, page 1-6
Primary components of an ARCHITECT System

Each ARCHITECT System, regardless of type, consists of three primary
components:
System control center, page 1-8 - provides a common user interface
across all ARCHITECT System configurations.
Processing modules, page 1-25 - performs all sample processing
activities from aspiration to final read. The type(s) and
number(s) of processing module(s) determines your system
configuration.
Sample handlers, page 1-115 - transports samples through an
ARCHITECT System. Each system has a single, primary sample
handler regardless of the number of processing modules and
types.
ARCHITECT integrated system

The ARCHITECT integrated system is a fully-automated clinical
chemistry and immunoassay system consisting of a c System and an i
System processing module that form a single workstation.
Integrated systems include:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1 ARCHITECT System overview
ARCHITECT ci 8200 consisting of a c 8000 and an i 2000SR

processing module
ARCHITECT ci 16200 consisting of a c 16000 and an i 2000SR
processing module
Figure 1.1: Primary components of an integrated system
Legend:
1. System control center, page 1-8: Computer system that provides user
control of the processing module(s) and related components through a
centralized interface.
2. Processing module (c System), page 1-25: Diagnostic module that performs
sample processing using potentiometric and photometric methods.
3. Processing modules (i System), page 1-71: Diagnostic module with priority
processing capability that performs sample processing using the CMIA
(chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) method.
4. RSH - robotic sample handler, page 1-115: Transport module that presents
samples to the processing module(s) for analysis and retesting.
ARCHITECT c 8000 System

The ARCHITECT c 8000 System is an open, fully-automated, clinical
chemistry system allowing random and continuous access, and
priority processing.
Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Section 1-3

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.2: Primary components of a c 8000 System
Legend:
1. c 8000 processing module, page 1-25: Diagnostic module that performs
ARCHITECT c 16000 System

The ARCHITECT c 16000 System is an open, fully-automated, clinical
chemistry system allowing random and continuous access, and

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.3: Primary components of a c 16000 System
Legend:
1. c 16000 processing module, page 1-27: Diagnostic module that performs
ARCHITECT i 2000 System

The ARCHITECT i 2000 System is a fully-automated immunoassay
system allowing random and continuous access, and priority
processing. Up to four processing modules can be joined to form a
single workstation.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.4: Primary components of an i 2000 System
Legend:
1. i 2000 processing module, page 1-71: Diagnostic module that performs
sample processing using the CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle
immunoassay) method.
2. SSH - standard sample handler (i 2000), page 1-121: Transport module that
presents samples to the processing module(s) for analysis.
ARCHITECT i 2000SR System

The ARCHITECT i 2000SR System is a fully-automated immunoassay
system allowing random and continuous access as well as priority and
automated retest processing.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.5: Primary components of an i 2000SR System
Legend:
1. i 2000SR processing module, page 1-75: Diagnostic module with priority
processing capability that performs sample processing using the CMIA
(chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) method.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
System control center Section 1
System control center

The SCC (system control center) is a computer system that provides
the software interface to the ARCHITECT System and can provide an
interface to a host computer. From the SCC you can:
Configure the system
Enter patient, control, and calibration orders
Review patient results, control data, and calibration results
Control the processing module(s) and the sample handler
Perform system diagnostics and maintenance procedures
Receive test orders and diagnostic data from a host computer
Transfer test results to a host computer
System control center topics include:
SCC standard components, page 1-8
SCC optional components, page 1-11
ARCHITECT System software, page 1-11
SCC standard components

The following illustration shows the standard components of the SCC
(system control center).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1 System control center
Figure 1.6: SCC standard components
Legend:
1. Touch-screen monitor: Allows you to make onscreen selections by touching
text areas and graphics, icons and menu items, and function bar buttons.
2. CPU (central processing unit): Houses the microprocessor and other
computer components.
NOTE: Upgrades to the computer hardware may change the location of

CPU components.
3. Floppy drive: Used to:
Collect system logs for troubleshooting purposes
Import and export assay files (c System).
4. CD-RW drive: Used to:
Install assay, maintenance, and diagnostic files
Upgrade system software
Archive patient and quality control results
Collect system logs for troubleshooting purposes
5. Keyboard: Used with the mouse and/or touch-screen monitor to enter
information. You can use the keyboard as an alternate means of performing
most functions.
6. Mouse (pointing device): Used with the touch-screen monitor and/or
keyboard to make onscreen selections.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
7. Network hub and CPU back panel, page 1-10 (not shown): Provides the
connection between the SCC and modules for information exchange.
SCC optional components, page 1-11
Network hub and CPU back panel
The network hub is an external device that joins communication lines

and enables the electronic transfer of information between the SCC
(system control center) and processing modules(s). Cables run from
the hub to ethernet connectors on the back of the SCC and processing
module(s).
Additional I/O (input/output) ports and connectors on the back panel
of the CPU (central processing unit) provide connections to other
external devices, such as a keyboard, mouse, printer, and monitor.
Figure 1.7: Network hub and CPU back panel
Legend:
1. CPU (central processing unit - rear view): Provides the I/O (input/output)
ports and connectors for external devices.
NOTE: Upgrades to the computer hardware may change the location of

CPU components.
2. Ethernet connector: Provides the physical connection between the network
hub and the SCC and allows communication between the SCC and the
processing module(s).
3. Ethernet connectors: Provides the physical connection between the network
hub and each module, and allows communication between the processing
module(s) and the SCC.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
4. Scanner and keyboard connector: Provides the connection for the bar code
scanner and keyboard.
5. Mouse connector: Provides the connection for the mouse.
6. Com1 port: Provides the connection for the touch-screen interface.
7. Printer port: Provides the connection for the printer.
8. Video connector: Provides the connection for the monitor.
SCC optional components

Optional components available for the SCC (system control center)
include:
Printer - provides a hard copy of test results and printed reports.
Bar code scanner - provides a convenient means of scanning
sample bar codes to allow positive sample identification.
UPS (uninterruptible power supply) - provides a temporary,
continuous flow of power to the CPU (central processing unit)
during a power failure, allowing you to save data as necessary
and perform a controlled shutdown procedure.
External modem - connects the ARCHITECT System to a
telephone line, which allows communication with Abbott
personnel for training and troubleshooting purposes.
Cart - supports the SCC components.
Speakers - provide audio output.
ARCHITECT System software

ARCHITECT System software is the computer program or set of
computer instructions that interprets system and assay information,
calculates results, and provides the interface for controlling the system
hardware.
System software topics include:
Software interface description, page 1-11
Software navigation, page 1-17
Snapshot screen, page 1-18
Software interface description
The software interface is the portion of the computer program with

which you interact by making selections and entering information.
The interface provided by the ARCHITECT System software is a GUI

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
(graphical user interface), which is a type of display format. A GUI

allows you to initiate commands or make choices by selecting icons,
buttons, items from lists, and so forth. You can use the mouse,
touch-screen monitor, and/or keyboard to make your selections.
The software interface is common among all ARCHITECT Systems.
Figure 1.8: Software interface layout
Legend:
1. Icons: Represent a category of screens. When you select an icon, its color
changes from green to blue and a menu displays below the icon. See Icons
and menus, page Appendix E-2.
2. Menus: Lists the available items for the selected category (icon). When you
select a menu item, the associated screen displays. See Icons and menus,
page Appendix E-2.
3. Screens, page 1-13: Provides access to all related system information and
functions.
4. Buttons, page Appendix E-6: Allow you to perform actions associated with
the active screen and correspond to the function keys on the keyboard.
Some may be unavailable until you make a selection on the screen.
5. Windows, page 1-15: Provides additional details or functions related to the
active screen.
6. Messages, page 1-16 or Prompts, page 1-17: Provides informational or
error messages that allow you to complete a procedure or address the
current situation.
7. Help button: Provides access to context-sensitive help for the active screen,
window, or error message.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Screens
When you select an icon, and then a menu item, the associated screen
displays. This screen is considered the active screen and provides
access to all related system information and functions.
A screen can have different views (information displays) based on
module type and your onscreen selections.
Figure 1.9: Example of a screen
Legend:
1. Icons and menus, page 1-14: Provide access to a menu that lists related
screens.
2. Title bar: Identifies the active screen.
3. Information area: Displays data and allows you to make selections and/or
enter information to perform various functions.
4. Function bar buttons, page 1-14: Allow you to perform actions associated
with the active screen and correspond to the function keys on the keyboard.
Some may be unavailable until you make a selection on the screen.
For descriptions of all elements on a screen or window, see Descriptions
of screen elements, page Appendix E-1.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Icons and menus
Icons and menus are the navigational elements that allow you to
display specific screens. Additionally, icons serve as blinking indicators
to inform you that a condition requires your attention.
Figure 1.10: Example of icons and a menu
Legend:
1. Icons: Represent a category of screens. When you select an icon, its color
changes from green to blue and a menu displays below the icon.
2. Menu: Lists the available items for the selected category (icon). When you
select a menu item, the associated screen displays.
NOTE: Icons can be accessed by the keyboard equivalents shown in

the figure below.
Figure 1.11: Icon keyboard equivalents
Function bar buttons
Function bar buttons are the buttons at the bottom of each screen that
allow you to perform actions or access windows associated with the
screen. They correspond to the function keys on the keyboard. You
can use either the function bar buttons or the keyboard function keys.
The two types of function bar buttons are:
Screen available - have white lettering and are always available
(green background). For example, from the Order status screen
you can always select F3 - Find.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Context available - have yellow lettering and are available (green

background) or unavailable (gray background) based on
selections you make from the screen. For example, from the
Order status screen you can only select the F5 - Details function
key after you select an order.
Figure 1.12: Screen and context function bar buttons
Legend:
1. Screen available function bar buttons: Are always enabled for the active
screen.
2. Unavailable context function bar buttons: Are available after you make a
selection on the screen.
Windows
Windows provide additional information or functions related to the

active screen. You access windows by selecting a button on the screen.
The window displays on top of, or in front of, the screen.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.13: Example of a window
Legend:
1. Title bar: Identifies the active window.
2. Information area: Displays data and allows you to make selections and/or
enter information to perform various functions.
For a description of all elements on a screen or window, see
Descriptions of screen elements, page Appendix E-1.
Messages
Messages provide important information during the course of normal

system operation. They display in front of the currently displayed
screen or window and require an acknowledgement. All interaction
with the user interface is suspended as long as the message displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.14: Example of a message
The type of message is indicated by one of two symbols at the left of

the window.
Caution: Indicates a condition that requires you to take
corrective action as described in the text of the message.
Information: Provides feedback or other useful information.
Prompts
Prompts allow you to continue or cancel the requested operation.

They display in front of the currently displayed screen or window and
require a response. All interaction with the user interface is suspended
as long as the prompt displays.
Figure 1.15: Example of a prompt
Software navigation
The ARCHITECT System software interface is designed to provide

consistent and easy access to system information, software functions,
and context-sensitive help. You can navigate through the screens and
windows by using the mouse (pointing device), touch-screen monitor,
and/or keyboard.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.16: Software navigation
Legend:
1. Select an icon to display a menu that lists related items. See Icons and
menus, page 1-14.
2. Select a menu item from the menu to display that screen. See Icons and
menus, page 1-14.
3. Select a function bar button to perform an action or access a window
associated with the screen.
NOTE: Some function bar buttons may be unavailable until you make a
selection on the screen.
4. Select the help button to access context-sensitive help for the screen,
Snapshot screen
From the Snapshot screen you can view key system information such
as:
Sample handler status, page 1-156 - displays on the sample
handler graphic.
NOTE: The sample handler status graphic is not displayed for an
i 2000SR processing module configured with a LAS (laboratory
automation system).
Processing module status, page 1-160 - displays on the processing
module graphic(s).
Test processing status - displays on the order status button. You
can select this button to display the Order status screen.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Reagent status - displays on the reagent status button. You can

select this button to display the Reagent status screen.
Calibration curve status (c System) - displays on the calibration
status button. You can select this button to display the
Calibration status screen.
Supply and waste status - displays on the supply status button.
You can select this button to display the Supply status screen.
Number of orders pending rerun - displays on the Reruns status
button. You can select this button to display the Rerun status
screen.
Number of exceptions pending review - displays on the
Exceptions status button. You can select this button to display
the Exception status screen.
Additionally, the Printer, LIS, ARM, and LAS status buttons display if
your system is configured with these optional components. A caution
symbol indicates a condition that requires attention.
Figure 1.17: Snapshot screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Snapshot screen field descriptions,

page Appendix E-15.
To display this screen, see Access the Snapshot screen, page 1-20.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Log on (general operator), page 1-22
Log on (system administrator), page 1-23
Change the system administrator password, page 1-23
Log off, page 1-24
Power on the SCC, page 5-3
Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13
Pause the processing module, page 5-14
Pause the RSH, page 5-15
Pause the sample carousel (c System), page 5-16
Pause the sample load queue (SSH), page 5-17
Pause the LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000), page 5-18
Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH), page 5-206
2000), page 5-207
Access the Snapshot screen
Perform this procedure to display the Snapshot screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Snapshot screen:

Select Overview from the menu bar, and then select Snapshot.
The Snapshot screen displays. The information is dependent on your
system configuration and test processing status.
Sample handler status, page 1-156
Processing module status, page 1-160

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Window - Snapshot screen
The window you can access from the Snapshot screen is the Log on
window, page 1-21.
Log on window
From the Log on window you can log on as:

General operator - required to display your operator ID on
printouts and reports
System administrator - required to perform system
configuration, assay configuration, specific diagnostic
procedures, and approve the maintenance log
Figure 1.18: Log on window (system administrator)
For descriptions of these fields, see Log on window field descriptions,

page Appendix E-19.
Log on (general operator), page 1-22
Log on (system administrator), page 1-23
Log off, page 1-24
User logon
User logon is the identifier that controls access to certain SCC (system
control center) functionality. The two types of user logon are:
General operator - required to print the operator ID of the
current user on printouts and reports

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Administrator - required to perform administrator functions

such as configuring settings, performing specific diagnostic
procedures, and approving the maintenance log
Additionally, Abbott Area Customer Support may provide a user name
and temporary password to operators who call for troubleshooting
assistance. This logon authorizes selected functions in addition to
those allowed by the system administrator logon.
Log on (general operator)
Perform this procedure so that your operator ID displays on various

screens and reports.
NOTE: Although you can run the system without logging on, you
must log on if your operator ID is needed on system printouts and
reports.
To log on as a system administrator, see Log on (system administrator),
page 1-23.
Prerequisite Access the Snapshot screen, page 1-20
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To log on (general operator):
1. Select F2 - Log on on the Snapshot screen.

The Log on window displays.
2. Enter your operator ID in the User name data entry box

(maximum of 12 alphanumeric characters).
3. Select Done to log on.

Your operator ID displays in the upper left-hand corner of the
Snapshot screen.
User logon, page 1-21
Log on window, page 1-21

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Log on (system administrator)
Perform this procedure to complete system administrator functions

such as configuring settings, performing specific diagnostic
procedures, and approving the maintenance log.
To log on as a general operator, see Log on (general operator), page 1-22.
To change the administrator password, see Change the system
administrator password, page 1-23.
Module status Any
User access level System administrator
Supplies NA
To log on (system administrator):

2. Enter ADMIN (all capital letters) in the User name data entry box.
3. Enter the system administrator password in the Password field.
4. Select Done to log on.

ADMIN displays in the upper left-hand corner of the Snapshot
screen.
Change the system administrator password
Perform this procedure to configure a new system administrator

password.
Prerequisite Access the Configuration screen - System settings view,
page 2-5
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To change the system administrator password:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
1. Select Password from the System categories list on the

Configuration screen.
2. Select F6 - Configure.
3. The Configure password window displays.
4. Enter the new password in the System administrator password

data entry box.
5. Enter the new password in the System administrator password

confirm data entry box to confirm the new password.
6. Select Done to save your changes.
Configuration screen - System settings view, page 2-4
Configure password window, page 2-47
Log off
Perform this procedure to log off if you are currently logged on to the
system.
Module status Any
User access level Any
Supplies NA
To log off:
2. Press the Delete key on the keyboard to delete the user name.
3. Select Done to log off.
4. Verify that a logon identifier does not display in the upper

left-hand corner of the Snapshot screen.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1 Processing modules
Processing modules
Processing modules perform all sample processing activities from
aspiration to final read.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term processing module is used
generically throughout this documentation to refer to all types.
Processing module topics include:
Processing module (c System), page 1-25
Processing modules (i System), page 1-71
Processing module (c System)

The c System processing modules perform all sample processing
activities from aspiration to final read.
The two types of c System processing modules are:
c 8000 processing module, page 1-25
c 16000 processing module, page 1-27
c 8000 processing module
The c 8000 processing module is a chemistry analyzer that performs

sample processing. It processes up to 800 photometric and 600
potentiometric tests per hour making use of up to 56 - 65 onboard
reagents in two temperature-controlled reagent supply centers.
For the c 8000 processing module, the sample handler configuration is
the robotic sample handler, which automatically positions samples for
retest.
The c 8000 processing module can also be configured with a LAS
(laboratory automation system).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules Section 1
Figure 1.19: c 8000 processing module (front view - RSH)
Legend:
1. Front processing center cover: Provides access to the components that
perform assay processing activities.
2. Processing module keypad (c System), page 1-29: Provides a local user
interface for controlling the processing center.
3. Supply center door: Provides access to the bulk storage supply center.
4. Pump center door: Provides access to the pump center.
5. Card cage door: Provides access to the card cage.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.20: c 8000 processing module (rear view - RSH)
Legend:
1. Rear processing center cover: Provides access to the components that
2. Main power supply: Provides power to the processing module.
3. Water management unit: Provides the water supply connection.
Processing center (c 8000), page 1-31
Sample and reagent syringe area (c 8000), page 1-49
Optional components (c System), page 1-70
c 16000 processing module
The c 16000 processing module is a chemistry analyzer that performs

sample processing. It processes up to 1600 photometric and 600
potentiometric tests per hour making use of up to 56 - 65 onboard
reagents in two temperature-controlled reagent supply centers.
For the c 16000 processing module, the sample handler configuration
is the robotic sample handler, which automatically positions samples
for retest.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
The c 16000 processing module can also be configured with a LAS

Figure 1.21: c 16000 processing module (front view - RSH)
Legend:
2. Processing module keypad (c System), page 1-29: Provides a local user
interface for controlling the processing center.
3. Supply and pump center doors:
Left - Provides access to the sample and reagent syringes.
Middle - Provides access to the sample and reagent syringe and
probe wash pumps.
Right - Provides access to the bulk solution storage supply center and
the wash solution and cuvette wash pumps.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.22: c 16000 processing module (rear view - RSH)
Legend:
2. ICT pump access cover: Provides access to the ICT aspiration and
reference solution pumps.
3. Main power supply: Provides power to the processing module.
4. Water management unit: Provides the water supply connection.
Processing center (c 16000), page 1-50
Sample and reagent syringe area (c 16000), page 1-69
Processing module keypad (c System)
The processing module keypad, located on the right side of the

processing module, is an input device used by the operator to direct
the processing center activities.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.23: Components of the c System processing module keypad
Legend:
1. Run key:
Places the processing module into a Running status and prepares the
module to accept samples.
Restarts the processing center after a Scheduled Pause.
2. Carousel advance key (2): Aligns if necessary, and then advances reagent
supply center 2 by 1/3 turn to aid in loading and unloading reagents. The
LED illuminates when access to the reagent supply center is allowed.
3. Carousel advance key (1): Aligns if necessary, and then advances reagent
supply center 1 by 1/3 turn to aid in loading and unloading reagents. The
LED illuminates when access to the reagent supply center is allowed.
4. Pause key: Places the processing module into a Scheduled Pause status
and stops aspiration of new tests. Tests already in progress continue to
completion.
5. Stop key: Stops all processing module activity, but does not shut down
power to the processing module.
6. L1, L2, L3, L4 keys: Used when performing some diagnostic and
maintenance procedures.
7. Display area: Displays text during some maintenance and diagnostic
procedures.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing center (c 8000)
The processing center is the main activity area of the processing

module. Samples and reagents are dispensed and mixed in a reaction
carousel where assay processing is performed.
Figure 1.24: ARCHITECT c 8000 processing center components
Legend:
1. Sample hardware components (c 8000), page 1-31: Provide sample
aspiration, dispense, and positive identification.
2. Reagent hardware components (c 8000), page 1-34: Provide reagent
3. Reaction carousel hardware components (c 8000), page 1-39: Position the
cuvettes for sample and reagent aspiration, mixing, photometric or
potentiometric analysis, and cuvette washing.
Sample hardware components (c 8000)
Sample hardware components are devices that provide sample


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.25: Sample hardware components (c 8000)
Legend:
1. Sample carousel (c 8000), page 1-32: Used for loading patient samples,
calibrators, and controls.
2. Indicator lights: Used to access and advance the sample carousel. See
Sample carousel and indicator lights (c 8000), page 1-33.
3. Sample bar code reader: Reads the carousel ID and sample ID.
4. Sample pipettor: Aspirates and dispenses samples into cuvettes. See
Sample pipettor and sample probe wash cup (c 8000), page 1-33.
5. Sample probe wash cup: Used to wash remaining fluid from the probe
exterior, interior, and tip. See Sample pipettor and sample probe wash cup
(c 8000), page 1-33.
Sample carousel (c 8000)
The sample carousel is a local sample handler with 32 refrigerated

positions used for loading clinical chemistry patient samples,
calibrators, and controls. Positions 31 and 32 are reserved for onboard
solutions that are used in the SmartWash function and maintenance
procedures.
Samples can be loaded in tubes and sample cups. Patient samples and
controls in tubes can be bar code labeled to provide positive
identification. Bar codes cannot be used for calibrator samples.
Samples on the carousel take priority over those on the RSH (robotic
sample handler) or LAS (laboratory automation system) under normal
operating conditions. In the event of a RSH or LAS failure, the sample
carousel can be used as the primary area for loading clinical chemistry
samples.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.26: Sample carousel and indicator lights (c 8000)
Legend:
1. Sample carousel: Used for loading patient samples, calibrators, and
controls.
2. Sample bar code reader: Reads the carousel ID and bar coded labels on
samples.
3. Sample carousel access indicator (square): Indicates when you can access
the sample carousel and provides a method to pause. When the access
indicator light is:
Off - the sample carousel is moving and cannot be accessed.
Blinking - the access indicator has been pressed and the sample
carousel is in the process of pausing.
On - the sample carousel can be accessed.
4. Sample carousel advance indicator (round): Indicates when you can
advance the sample carousel. When the advance indicator light is:
On - the sample carousel can be advanced.
Off - the advance indicator button has been pressed and the sample
carousel is in the process of advancing a 1/3 rotation or the sample
carousel is closed.
Sample pipettor and sample probe wash cup (c 8000)
The sample pipettor is a device that detects, aspirates, transfers, and

dispenses samples into the cuvettes. It also transfers diluted samples

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
from the cuvette used to make the dilution into the cuvette used for
the reaction. This pipettor assembly includes a fluid sense/pressure
monitoring system that helps to identify errors in aspiration.
The sample probe wash cup is an active wash station that washes any
remaining fluid from the probe exterior, interior, and tip. The sample
probe is washed between samples to eliminate carryover.
Figure 1.27: Sample pipettor and sample probe wash cup (c 8000)
Legend:
1. Sample pipettor: Aspirates and dispenses samples into cuvettes.
2. Sample probe wash cup: Washes remaining fluid from the probe exterior,
interior, and tip.
Reagent hardware components (c 8000)
Reagent hardware components are devices that provide reagent


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.28: Reagent hardware components (c 8000)
Legend:
1. Reagent supply center 1 (R1): Provides refrigerated storage for reagent kits
and diluents. See Reagent supply centers (c 8000), page 1-35.
and onboard solutions. See Reagent supply centers (c 8000), page 1-35.
3. Reagent pipettor 1 and wash cup: Pipettor aspirates and dispenses
reagents into cuvettes. Wash cup washes the probe exterior, interior, and tip.
See Reagent pipettors and wash cups (c 8000), page 1-37.
4. Reagent pipettor 2 and wash cup: Pipettor aspirates and dispenses
reagents into cuvettes. Wash cup washes the probe exterior, interior, and tip.
See Reagent pipettors and wash cups (c 8000), page 1-37.
5. R1 onboard solution area: Holds probe wash solutions for the SmartWash
function and maintenance procedures. See Onboard solution areas (c
8000), page 1-38.
6. R2 onboard solution area: Holds probe wash solutions for the SmartWash
function and maintenance procedures. See Onboard solution areas (c
8000), page 1-38.
7. R1 bar code reader: Reads 2D (two-dimensional) bar code labels on Abbott
pre-packaged reagents or 1D bar code labels on user-defined reagents.
8. R2 bar code reader: Reads 2D bar code labels on Abbott pre-packaged
reagents or 1D bar code labels on user-defined reagents.
Reagent supply centers (c 8000)
Reagent supply centers (R1 and R2) are refrigerated reagent carousels
for onboard storage of:
reagent kits (R1 and R2)
onboard solutions in position D1 (R1 and R2)
sample diluents

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
See Onboard solutions (c System), page 1-136 for more information.

These reagent supply centers and their associated reagent pipettors are
separately controlled to allow reagents to be independently aspirated
and dispensed by each reagent pipettor.
The c 8000 reagent supply center 1 consists of an inner and outer
carousel that are segmented to store a maximum of 56 - 65 reagent
cartridges depending on the configuration of the segments. The
location and capacity of each segment is presented in the following
table.
Segment Description
Outer A A 12 position reagent segment designed for large
cartridges. This segment also has a pipettor calibration
target.
Outer A, B, and C A 12 position reagent segment designed for large cartridges
or a 15 position reagent segment designed for small
cartridges.
Inner D A 20 position reagent segment designed for large
target.
The c 8000 reagent supply center 2 consists of one carousel that is

segmented to store a maximum of 36 - 56 reagent cartridges
depending on the configuration of the segments. The location and
capacity of each segment is presented in the following table.
Segment Description
A A 14 position reagent segment designed for small
target.
B, C, and D A 9 position reagent segment designed for large cartridges
or a 14 position reagent segment designed for small
cartridges.
For more information on available reagent segments, see Reagent

segments (c 8000), page 1-149.
Reagents can be bar code labeled to provide positive identification.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.29: Temperature-controlled reagent supply centers (c 8000)
Legend:
and onboard solutions.
Reagent pipettors and wash cups (c 8000)
Reagent pipettors 1 and 2 are devices that detect, aspirate, transfer,

and dispense reagents into the cuvette. Reagent pipettor 1 also
transfers sample diluents from reagent supply center 1 into a cuvette
to be used for onboard sample dilution.
Reagent pipettor wash cups are active wash stations that wash any
remaining fluid from the probe exterior, interior, and tip.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.30: Reagent pipettors and wash cups (c 8000)
Legend:
1. Reagent pipettor 1: Aspirates and dispenses reagents into cuvettes.
2. Reagent pipettor 1 wash cup: Washes the probe exterior, interior, and tip.
3. Reagent pipettor 2: Aspirates and dispenses reagents into cuvettes.
4. Reagent pipettor 2 wash cup: Washes the probe exterior, interior, and tip.
Onboard solution areas (c 8000)
Reagent onboard solution areas are storage locations for probe wash
solutions, which are used for the SmartWash function and
maintenance procedures. A rack within each area holds two 90 mL
cartridges in positions E1 and E2.
Position D1 in each reagent carousel may also be used for onboard
solution storage when an additional location is necessary.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.31: Onboard solution areas (c 8000)
Legend:
1. Reagent supply center 1 (R1) onboard solution area: Holds probe wash
solutions for the SmartWash function and maintenance procedures.
2. Reagent supply center 2 (R2) onboard solution area: Holds probe wash
solutions for the SmartWash function and maintenance procedures.
Reaction carousel hardware components (c 8000)
Reaction carousel hardware components are devices that position the


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.32: Reaction carousel hardware components (c 8000)
Legend:
1. Reaction carousel (c 8000), page 1-40: Positions the cuvettes for sample
processing.
2. Cuvette segments (c 8000), page 1-41: Hold cuvettes in the reaction
carousel.
3. Lamp (c 8000), page 1-42: Provides the light source for photometric
measurement.
4. Mixer unit (c 8000), page 1-42: Houses the mixers that mix sample with
reagent.
5. Cuvette washer (c 8000), page 1-43: Washes and dries the cuvettes.
6. ICT unit (c 8000), page 1-44: Measures potentiometric assays (electrolytes)
using ICT (integrated chip technology).
7. Water bath/waste overflow area (c 8000), page 1-45: Receives liquid waste
from the pipettors. ICT reference solution cup, and ICT unit.
Reaction carousel (c 8000)
The reaction carousel is a device that:

Accommodates a variety of assay protocols
Consists of 11 cuvette segments
Is surrounded by a 37C water bath
Rotates counter-clockwise to position the cuvettes at the
following locations:
Sample dispense
R1 reagent dispense
R2 reagent dispense
ICT electrolyte aspiration

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Mixing positions (2)

Photometric read position
Diluted sample aspiration
Figure 1.33: Reaction carousel (c 8000)
Cuvette segments (c 8000)
Cuvette segments are racks that sit in the reaction carousel and hold
cuvettes. Each cuvette segment holds 15 cuvettes. With 11 segments,
the reaction carousel can hold 165 cuvettes.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.34: Cuvette segment (c 8000)
Lamp (c 8000)
The lamp is an optical device used to provide the light source for
photometric measurement.
Figure 1.35: Lamp (c 8000)
Mixer unit (c 8000)
The mixer unit is a device that houses two mixers (1 and 2) that mix
the sample and reagent together.
Mixer 1 (left side) mixes the sample (undiluted or diluted) with
reagent 1.
Mixer 2 (right side) mixes the sample/reagent 1 mixture with
reagent 2.
The exterior of each mixer is washed after each mixing operation.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.36: Mixer unit and mixers (c 8000)
Legend:
1. Mixer 1: Mixes the sample with reagent 1.
2. Mixer 2: Mixes the sample/reagent 1 mixture with reagent 2.
Cuvette washer (c 8000)
The cuvette washer is a device with eight nozzles that, from left to
right, perform the following functions before and after each cuvette is
used:
Nozzle 1 - aspirates sample and reagent mixture to waste
Nozzle 2 - dispenses Alkaline Wash to clean the cuvette, and
then aspirates it to waste
Nozzle 3 - dispenses Acid Wash to clean the cuvette, and then
aspirates it to waste
Nozzles 4 and 5 - dispense water to rinse the cuvette, and then
aspirate it to waste
Nozzle 6 - dispenses water into the cuvette for the water blank
measurement, which ensures cuvette integrity
Nozzle 7 - aspirates the remaining water in the cuvette to waste
Nozzle 8 - dries the cuvette

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.37: Cuvette washer (c 8000)
ICT unit (c 8000)
The ICT (integrated chip technology) unit is a device that consists of

the ICT probe and ICT module and is used to perform indirect
potentiometric analysis. The ICT probe aspirates the sample. The ICT
module simultaneously measures Na+, K+, and Cl- using integrated
chip technology.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.38: ICT unit (c 8000)
Legend:
1. ICT probe: Connected to the ICT module in the ICT unit. The ICT probe
aspirates diluted sample from the cuvettes or ICT Reference Solution from
the ICT reference solution cup into the ICT module for processing.
2. ICT module: Located in the ICT unit. The ICT module measures
potentiometric assays (electrolytes) using integrated chip technology.
3. ICT reference solution cup: Located beneath the ICT probe when the ICT
unit is in the home position. ICT reference solution cup contains preheated
reference solution that is aspirated by the ICT probe and measured by the
ICT module. Sensors in the cup confirm the cup fills completely and
sufficient solution is aspirated during measurement.
4. ICT reference solution warming ring: A narrow metal tube located in the
water bath. The ICT reference solution warming ring warms the reference
solution to 37C before the reference solution fills the ICT reference solution
cup.
Water bath/waste overflow area (c 8000)
The water bath/waste overflow area is a waste collection compartment

that receives overflow from the water bath and liquid waste from the
pipettors, ICT reference solution cup, and ICT unit.
Liquid waste from the pipettors and ICT reference solution cup collect
in a low-concentration waste compartment, and then is removed
through the low-concentration waste tubing. Liquid waste from the
ICT unit collects in a high-concentration waste compartment and
then is removed through the high-concentration waste tubing.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.39: Water bath and waste overflow area (c 8000)
Legend:
1. R1 tubing: Delivers excess deionized water from reagent pipettor 1 wash
cup into the low-concentration waste compartment.
2. R2 tubing: Delivers excess deionized water from reagent pipettor 2 wash
cup into the low-concentration waste compartment.
3. Sample tubing: Delivers excess deionized water from the sample pipettor
wash cup into the low-concentration waste compartment.
4. ICT reference solution cup low-concentration waste tubing: Delivers liquid
waste from the ICT reference solution cup into the low-concentration waste
compartment.
5. ICT unit high-concentration waste tubing: Delivers liquid waste from the ICT
unit into the high-concentration waste compartment.
Supply and pump center (c 8000)
The supply and pump center is the storage area for processing module
pumps, bulk solutions, and sample and reagent syringes and drives.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.40: Supply and pump center (c 8000)
Legend:
1. Pump center: Houses the processing module pumps.
2. Bulk solution supply center: Provides onboard storage for ICT Reference
Solution, Alkaline Wash, and Acid Wash.
3. Sample and reagent syringes area: Houses the sample and reagent
syringes and drives.
Pump center (c 8000)
The pump center is the area that houses the processing module
pumps. These pumps provide the pressure needed to aspirate and
dispense liquids into the appropriate components in the processing
center and to the sample and reagent syringes.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.41: Processing module pumps (c 8000)
Legend:
1. ICT reference solution pump: Uses the syringe on the right to deliver ICT
Reference Solution into the ICT reference solution cup. After the reference
solution is measured, the ICT reference solution pump uses the syringe on
the left to drain the cup.
2. Wash solution pump: Delivers diluted alkaline and acid wash solutions to the
cuvette washer to wash cuvettes during daily operation and maintenance
procedures.
3. ICT aspiration pump: Uses the syringe on the right to deliver samples or ICT
Reference Solution into the ICT module for measurement. Once
measurement is complete, the ICT aspiration pump uses the syringe on the
left to aspirate waste from the water bath/waste overflow area to the
high-concentration waster tubing:
4. ICT aspiration valve: Controls the direction of liquid flow while the ICT
aspiration pump operates.
5. Cuvette wash pump: Delivers Reagent Grade Type II water to the cuvette
washer.
6. Probe wash pump: Uses Reagent Grade Type II water to flush the sample
and reagent probes.
7. High-concentration waste pump: Works with the cuvette washer to aspirate
waste from the cuvettes to the optional high-concentration waste bottle or
the drain.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Bulk solution supply center (c 8000)
The bulk solution supply center is an onboard storage area for ICT
Reference Solution, Alkaline Wash, and Acid Wash. The quantity of
each bulk solution is verified by individual weight sensors. The sensor
is tripped when the volume of the solution decreases to approximately
20% remaining.
Figure 1.42: Bulk solution supply center (c 8000)
Legend:
1. ICT reference solution (c System), page 1-133: Aspirated and analyzed by
the ICT module before and after each sample to provide a reference
concentration used to calculate results.
2. Alkaline wash (c System), page 1-134: Used by the cuvette washer to clean
the cuvettes after sample analysis.
3. Acid wash (c System), page 1-135: Used by the cuvette washer to clean the
cuvettes after sample analysis.
Sample and reagent syringe area (c 8000)
The sample and reagent syringe area is the location for the sample and
reagent syringes and drives. Each drive supports a syringe that controls
the aspiration and dispense of samples or reagents.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.43: Sample and reagent syringes (c 8000)
Legend:
1. Sample syringe: Aspirates and dispenses the sample.
2. Reagent syringes 1 and 2: Aspirates and dispenses the reagent.
Processing center (c 16000)

module. Samples and reagents are dispensed and mixed in a reaction
carousel where assay processing is performed.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.44: ARCHITECT c 16000 processing center components
Legend:
1. Sample hardware components: Provide sample aspiration, dispense, and
positive identification.
2. Reagent hardware components: Provide reagent aspiration, dispense, and
positive identification.
3. Reaction carousel hardware components: Position the cuvettes for sample
and reagent aspiration, mixing, photometric or potentiometric analysis, and
cuvette washing.
Sample hardware components (c 16000), page 1-51
Reagent hardware components (c 16000), page 1-54
Reaction carousel hardware components (c 16000), page 1-58
Sample hardware components (c 16000)


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.45: Sample hardware components (c 16000)
Legend:
controls.
2. Indicator lights: Used to access and advance the sample carousel.
3. Sample bar code reader: Reads the carousel ID and sample ID.
5. Sample probe wash cup: Used to wash remaining fluid from the probe
exterior, interior, and tip.
Sample carousel (c 16000), page 1-52
Sample pipettor and sample probe wash cup (c 16000), page 1-53
Sample carousel (c 16000)
The sample carousel is a local sample handler with 32 refrigerated

positions used for loading clinical chemistry patient samples,
calibrators, and controls. Positions 31 and 32 are reserved for onboard
solutions that are used in the SmartWash function and maintenance
procedures.
Samples can be loaded in tubes and sample cups. Patient samples and
controls in tubes can be bar code labeled to provide positive
identification. Bar codes cannot be used for calibrator samples.
Samples on the carousel take priority over those on the RSH (robotic
sample handler) or LAS (laboratory automation system) under normal
operating conditions. In the event of a RSH or LAS failure, the sample
carousel can be used as the primary area for loading clinical chemistry
samples.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.46: Sample carousel and indicator lights (c 16000)
Legend:
controls.
2. Sample bar code reader: Reads the carousel ID and bar coded labels on
samples.
3. Sample carousel access indicator (square): Indicates when you can access
the sample carousel and provides a method to pause. When the access
indicator light is:
Off - the sample carousel is moving and cannot be accessed.
Blinking - the access indicator has been pressed and the sample
carousel is in the process of pausing.
On - the sample carousel can be accessed.
4. Sample carousel advance indicator (round): Indicates when you can
advance the sample carousel. When the advance indicator light is:
On - the sample carousel can be advanced.
Off - the advance indicator button has been pressed and the sample
carousel is in the process of advancing a 1/3 rotation or the sample
carousel is closed.
Sample pipettor and sample probe wash cup (c 16000)
The sample pipettor is a device that detects, aspirates, transfers, and

dispenses samples into the cuvettes. It also transfers diluted samples
from the cuvette used to make the dilution into the cuvette used for
the reaction. This pipettor assembly includes a fluid sense/pressure
monitoring system that helps to identify errors in aspiration.
The sample probe wash cup is an active wash station that washes any
remaining fluid from the probe exterior, interior, and tip. The sample
probe is washed between samples to eliminate carryover.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.47: Sample pipettor and sample probe wash cup (c 16000)
Legend:
2. Sample probe wash cup: Washes remaining fluid from the probe exterior,
interior, and tip.
Reagent hardware components (c 16000)


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.48: Reagent hardware components (c 16000)
Legend:
1. Reagent supply center 1 (R1): Provides refrigerated storage for reagent kits,
diluents, and onboard solutions.
3. Reagent pipettors R1A and R1B and wash cups: Pipettors aspirate and
dispense reagents into cuvettes. Wash cups wash the probe exterior,
interior, and tip.
4. Reagent pipettors R2A and R2B and wash cups: Pipettors aspirate and
dispense reagents into cuvettes. Wash cups wash the probe exterior,
interior, and tip.
5. Reagent bar code readers: Read 2D (two-dimensional) bar code labels on
Abbott pre-packaged reagents or 1D bar code labels on user-defined
reagents.
Reagent supply centers (c 16000), page 1-55
Reagent pipettors and wash cups (c 16000), page 1-57
Reagent supply centers (c 16000)
Reagent supply centers (R1 and R2) are refrigerated reagent carousels
for onboard storage of:
reagent kits
sample diluents
onboard solutions
See Onboard solutions (c System), page 1-136 and Onboard solution areas
(c 16000), page 1-58 for more information.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
These reagent supply centers and their associated reagent pipettors are
separately controlled to allow reagents to be independently aspirated
and dispensed by each reagent pipettor. To improve throughput the c
16000 uses a dual line feature to pair assays for each run. The system
aspirates reagents for the two assays, one assay on a designated A-line
and the other on a designated B-line, in the same cycle.
Both reagent supply centers consists of an inner and outer carousel
that are segmented to store a maximum of 56 - 65 reagent cartridges.
The location and capacity of each segment on the carousel is
presented in the following table.
Carousel Segment Description

Outer Outer A, B, and C A 12 position reagent segment designed for
(A-line) large cartridges or a 15 position reagent
segment for small cartridges. The 12 position
reagent segment A has a pipettor calibration
target.
Inner Inner D A 20 position reagent segment designed for
(B-line) large cartridges. This segment also has a
pipettor calibration target.
The shaded areas in the figure below indicate the location of the
segments used for A-line (Outer) reagents. The unshaded area is the
location for B-line (Inner) reagents.
Figure 1.49: A-line and B-line locations on reagent supply centers
For more information on available reagent segments, see Reagent

segments (c 16000), page 1-153.
Reagents can be bar code labeled to provide positive identification.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.50: Temperature-controlled reagent supply centers (c 16000)
Legend:
1. Reagent supply center 1 (R1): Provides onboard storage for reagent kits,
onboard solutions, and diluents.
2. Reagent supply center 2 (R2): Provides onboard storage for reagent kits
Reagent pipettors and wash cups (c 16000)
Reagent pipettors 1 (A and B) and 2 (A and B) are devices that detect,

aspirate, transfer, and dispense reagents into the cuvette. Reagent
pipettors 1 also transfer sample diluents from reagent supply center 1
into cuvettes to be used for onboard sample dilution.
Reagent pipettor wash cups are active wash stations that wash any
remaining fluid from the probe exterior, interior, and tip.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.51: Reagent pipettors and wash cups (c 16000)
Legend:
1. Reagent pipettors R1A and R1B: Aspirate and dispense reagents into
cuvettes.
2. Reagent pipettor 1 wash cups: Washes the probe exterior, interior, and tip.
3. Reagent pipettors R2A and R2B: Aspirate and dispense reagents into
cuvettes.
4. Reagent pipettor 2 wash cups: Washes the probe exterior, interior, and tip.
Onboard solution areas (c 16000)
Onboard solutions are wash solutions used to clean probes, mixers,

and cuvettes for the SmartWash function and maintenance
procedures.
These solutions are stored in positions 1, 2, and 3 on reagent segments
C and D on both the R1 and R2 reagent supply centers.
Reaction carousel hardware components (c 16000)
Reaction carousel hardware components are devices that position the


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.52: Reaction carousel hardware components (c 16000)
Legend:
1. Reaction carousel: Positions the cuvettes for sample processing.
2. Cuvette segments: Hold cuvettes in the reaction carousel.
3. Lamp: Provides the light source for photometric measurement.
4. Mixer unit: Houses the mixers that mix sample with reagent.
5. Cuvette washer: Washes and dries the cuvettes.
6. ICT unit: Measures potentiometric assays (electrolytes) using ICT
(integrated chip technology).
7. Water bath/waste overflow area: Receives liquid waste from the pipettors.
ICT reference solution cup, and ICT unit.
Reaction carousel (c 16000), page 1-59
Cuvette segments (c 16000), page 1-60
Lamp (c 16000), page 1-61
Mixer unit (c 16000), page 1-61
Cuvette washer (c 16000), page 1-62
ICT unit (c 16000), page 1-63
Water bath/waste overflow area (c 16000), page 1-64
Reaction carousel (c 16000)
The reaction carousel is a device that:

Accommodates a variety of assay protocols
Consists of 15 cuvette segments
Is surrounded by a 37C water bath

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Rotates counter-clockwise to position the cuvettes at the

following locations:
Sample dispense
R1 reagent dispense
R2 reagent dispense
ICT electrolyte aspiration
Mixing positions (2)
Photometric read position
Diluted sample aspiration
Figure 1.53: Reaction carousel (c 16000)
Cuvette segments (c 16000)
Cuvette segments are racks that sit in the reaction carousel and hold
cuvettes. Each cuvette segment holds 11 cuvette pairs (22 cuvettes).
With 15 cuvette segments the reaction carousel contains 165 cuvette
pairs or a total of 330 cuvettes (22 cuvettes x 15 cuvette segments).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.54: Cuvette segment (c 16000)
Lamp (c 16000)
The lamp is an optical device used to provide the light source for
photometric measurement.
Figure 1.55: Lamp (c 16000)
Mixer unit (c 16000)
The mixer unit is a device that houses two mixer pairs (1A, 1B and 2A,
2B) that mix the sample and reagent together.
Mixer 1 pair (left side) mixes the sample (undiluted or diluted)
with reagent 1.
Mixer 2 pair (right side) mixes the sample/reagent 1 mixture
with reagent 2.
The exterior of each mixer is washed after each mixing operation.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.56: Mixer unit and mixers (c 16000)
Legend:
1. Mixer 1: Mixes the sample with reagent 1.
2. Mixer 2: Mixes the sample/reagent 1 mixture with reagent 2.
Cuvette washer (c 16000)
The cuvette washer is a device with eight nozzle pairs that, from left to
right, perform the following functions before and after each cuvette is
used:
Nozzle pair 1 - aspirates sample and reagent mixture to waste
Nozzle pair 2 - dispenses Alkaline Wash to clean the cuvette, and
Nozzle pair 3 - dispenses Acid Wash to clean the cuvette, and
Nozzle pairs 4 and 5 - dispense water to rinse the cuvette, and
then aspirate it to waste
Nozzle pair 6 - dispenses water into the cuvette for the water
blank measurement, which ensures cuvette integrity
Nozzle pair 7 - aspirates the remaining water in the cuvette to
waste
Nozzle pair 8 - dries the cuvette

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.57: Cuvette washer (c 16000)
ICT unit (c 16000)
The ICT (integrated chip technology) unit is a device that consists of

the ICT probe and ICT module and is used to perform indirect
potentiometric analysis. The ICT probe aspirates the sample. The ICT
module simultaneously measures Na+, K+, and Cl- using integrated
chip technology.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.58: ICT unit (c 16000)
Legend:
1. ICT probe: Connected to the ICT module in the ICT unit. The ICT probe
aspirates diluted sample from the cuvettes or ICT Reference Solution from
the ICT reference solution cup into the ICT module for processing.
2. ICT module: Located in the ICT unit. The ICT module measures
potentiometric assays (electrolytes) using integrated chip technology.
3. ICT reference solution cup: Located beneath the ICT probe when the ICT
unit is in the home position. ICT reference solution cup contains preheated
reference solution that is aspirated by the ICT probe and measured by the
ICT module. Sensors in the cup confirm the cup fills completely and
sufficient solution is aspirated during measurement.
4. ICT reference solution warming ring: A narrow metal tube located in the
water bath. The ICT reference solution warming ring warms the reference
solution to 37C before the reference solution fills the ICT reference solution
cup.
Water bath/waste overflow area (c 16000)
The water bath/waste overflow area is a waste collection compartment

that receives overflow from the water bath and liquid waste from the
pipettors, ICT reference solution cup, and ICT unit.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Liquid waste from the pipettors and ICT reference solution cup collect
in a low-concentration waste compartment, and then is removed
through the low-concentration waste tubing. Liquid waste from the
ICT unit collects in a high-concentration waste compartment and
then is removed through the high-concentration waste tubing.
Figure 1.59: Water bath and waste overflow area (c 16000)
Legend:
1. R1 (A and B) tubing: Delivers excess deionized water from reagent pipettors
1 wash cups into the low-concentration waste compartment.
2. Sample tubing: Delivers excess deionized water from the sample pipettor
wash cup into the low-concentration waste compartment.
3. R2A tubing: Delivers excess deionized water from reagent pipettors 2 wash
cups into the low-concentration waste compartment.
4. Alkaline wash solution tubing: Delivers diluted alkaline wash solution from
the wash solution pump into the low-concentration waste compartment.
5. ICT reference solution cup low-concentration waste tubing: Delivers liquid
waste from the ICT reference solution cup into the low-concentration waste
compartment
6. ICT unit high-concentration waste tubing: Delivers liquid waste from the ICT
unit into the high-concentration waste compartment.
7. R2B tubing: Delivers deionized water into the water bath to compensate for
loss of water during normal running.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Supply and pump centers (c 16000)
The supply and pump centers are the storage areas for processing
module pumps, bulk solutions, and sample and reagent syringes and
drives.
Figure 1.60: Supply and pump centers (c 16000)
Legend:
1. Sample and reagent syringes area: Houses the sample and reagent
syringes and drives.
2. Pump center: Houses the processing module pumps.
3. Bulk solution supply center: Provides onboard storage for ICT Reference
Solution, Alkaline Wash, and Acid Wash.
Pump centers (c 16000)
The pump centers are the areas that house the processing module
pumps. These pumps provide the pressure needed to aspirate and
dispense liquids into the appropriate components in the processing
center and to the sample and reagent syringes.
The pump center on the front of the processing module houses the
probe wash, wash solution, and cuvette wash pumps.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.61: c 16000 Pump center (front view)
Legend:
1. Probe wash pumps: Uses Reagent Grade Type II water to flush the sample
and reagent probes.
2. Wash solution pump: Delivers diluted alkaline and acid wash solutions to the
cuvettes during daily operation and maintenance procedures.
3. Cuvette wash pump: Delivers Reagent Grade Type II water to the cuvette
washer.
The pump centers on the back of the processing module house the ICT
and high-concentration waste pumps.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.62: c 16000 Pump centers (rear view)
Legend:
1. ICT aspiration pump: Uses the syringe on the right to deliver samples or ICT
Reference Solution into the ICT module for measurement. Once
measurement is complete, the ICT aspiration pump uses the syringe on the
left to aspirate waste from the water bath/waste overflow area to the
high-concentration waste tubing. The ICT aspiration valve controls the
direction of liquid flow while the ICT aspiration pump operates.
2. ICT reference solution pump: Uses the syringe on the right to deliver ICT
Reference Solution into the ICT reference solution cup. After the reference
solution is measured, the ICT reference solution pump uses the syringe on
the left to drain the cup.
3. High-concentration waste pump: Works with the cuvette washer to aspirate
waste from the cuvettes to the optional high-concentration waste container
or the drain.
Bulk solution supply center (c 16000)
The bulk solution supply center is an onboard storage area for ICT
Reference Solution, Alkaline Wash, and Acid Wash. The quantity of
each bulk solution is verified by individual weight sensors. The sensor
is tripped when the volume of the solution decreases to approximately
20% remaining.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.63: Bulk solution supply center (c 16000)
Legend:
1. ICT reference solution (c System), page 1-133: Aspirated and analyzed by
the ICT module before and after each sample to provide a reference
concentration used to calculate results.
2. Alkaline wash (c System), page 1-134: Used by the cuvette washer to clean
the cuvettes after sample analysis.
3. Acid wash (c System), page 1-135: Used by the cuvette washer to clean the
cuvettes after sample analysis.
Sample and reagent syringe area (c 16000)
The sample and reagent syringe area is the location for the sample and
reagent syringes and drives. Each drive supports a syringe that controls
the aspiration and dispense of samples or reagents.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.64: Sample and reagent syringes (c 16000)
Legend:
1. Sample syringe: Aspirates and dispenses the sample.
2. R1 Reagent syringes (A and B): Aspirate and dispense the reagent.
3. R2 Reagent syringes (A and B): Aspirate and dispense the reagent.
Optional components (c System)

Optional components for the c System processing modules include:
continuous flow of power to the processing module during a
power failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
High-concentration waste bottle - collects the

high-concentration liquid waste from the cuvettes and the ICT
unit.
Processing modules (i System)

The i System processing modules perform all sample processing
activities from aspiration to final read. The two types of i System
processing modules are:
i 2000 processing module, page 1-71
i 2000SR processing module, page 1-75
i 2000 processing module
An i 2000 processing module is an immunoassay analyzer that

performs sample processing. It processes up to 200 CMIA
(chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) tests per hour
making use of up to 25 onboard reagent kits (100 and/or 500 tests) in a
temperature-controlled reagent carousel.
The i 2000 processing module can be configured with either the SSH
(standard sample handler) or LAS (laboratory automation system)
carousel sample handler. The following illustrations show the:
i 2000 processing module (front view - SSH), page 1-72
i 2000 processing module (rear view - SSH), page 1-73
i 2000 processing module (front view - LAS carousel sample handler),
page 1-74
i 2000 processing module (rear view - LAS carousel sample handler),
page 1-75

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.65: i 2000 processing module (front view - SSH)
Legend:
2. Processing module keypad (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-77: Provides a local
user interface for controlling the processing center.
3. Supply and waste center door: Provides access to the bulk storage and solid
waste storage area.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.66: i 2000 processing module (rear view - SSH)
Legend:
2. Rear processing center access panel: Provides access to the processing
center components.
3. Power supply panel: Provides access to the power supply components.
4. Pump bay panel: Provides access to the pumps and vacuum center.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.67: i 2000 processing module (front view - LAS carousel

sample handler)
Legend:
3. Sample pipettor cover: Covers the sample pipettor as it accesses samples
on the LAS track.
waste storage area.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.68: i 2000 processing module (rear view - LAS carousel

sample handler)
Legend:
center components.
4. Pump bay panel: Provides access to the pumps and vacuum system.
Processing center (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-78
Supply and waste center (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-98
Optional components (i System), page 1-109
ARCHITECT i 2000 System, page 1-5
i 2000SR processing module
An i 2000SR processing module is an immunoassay analyzer that

performs sample processing. It processes up to 200 CMIA
(chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) tests per hour

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
making use of up to 25 onboard reagent kits (100 and/or 500 tests) in a

temperature-controlled reagent carousel and provides stat processing.
For the i 2000SR processing module the sample handler configuration
is the robotic sample handler, which automatically positions samples
for retest.
The i 2000SR processing module can also be configured with a LAS
Figure 1.69: i 2000SR processing module (front view - RSH)
Legend:
waste storage area.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.70: i 2000SR processing module (rear view - RSH)
Legend:
center components.
4. Pump bay panel: Provides access to the pumps and vacuum system.
Processing center (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-78
Optional components (i System), page 1-109
ARCHITECT i 2000SR System, page 1-6
Processing module keypad (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The processing module keypad, located on the left side of the

processing module, is an input device used by the operator to direct
the processing center activities.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.71: Components of an i System processing module keypad
Legend:
1. Run key:
Places the processing module into Running status and prepares the
module to accept samples.
Restarts the processing center after a Scheduled Pause.
2. Carousel advance key: Aligns the reagent carousel and advances the
reagent carousel five positions to aid in loading reagents.
3. Access indicator light: Illuminates to indicate that the processing module is
in the Warming or Ready status and you can access the reagent carousel.
4. Stop key: Stops all processing module activity, but does not shut down
power to the processing module.
5. L1, L2, L3, L4 keys: Used when performing some diagnostic and
maintenance procedures.
Processing center (i 2000/i 2000SR)

module. Samples and reagents are dispensed and mixed into the RVs
(reaction vessels) in the process path where assay processing is
performed.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.72: ARCHITECT i System processing center hardware

components
Legend:
1. Sample hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-80: Provide sample
aspiration and dispense.
2. Reagent hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-84: Provide
reagent aspiration and dispense.
3. Process path hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-89: Position
the RVs for sample and reagent aspiration, mixing, washing, and CMIA
processing.
Processing center map (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-79
Processing center map (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Processing center maps are attached to the front and rear processing
center covers on an ARCHITECT i System to assist you in locating
components when you are performing component replacement
procedures or troubleshooting processing module problems. The map
displays a letter and/or number identifier for each component. The i
2000SR processing module has additional components which display

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
on the map in pink (ST, STW, VTXST, STD, STS). These components are
used when processing STAT assay protocols.
Figure 1.73: Processing center map
For a description of each component refer to Sample hardware

components (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-80, Reagent hardware components (i
2000/i 2000SR), page 1-84, or Process path hardware components (i 2000/i
2000SR), page 1-89.
Sample hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR)

aspiration and dispense.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.74: Sample hardware components of the processing center
Legend:
1. Sample and STAT pipettors (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-81 (S and ST):
Aspirate and dispense samples into the RVs (reaction vessels).
2. Sample and STAT syringes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-82 (SS and STS):
Control the aspiration and dispense of samples.
3. Sample and STAT wash stations (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-83 (SW and
STW): Used to wash remaining fluid from the probe interior and tip.
Sample and STAT pipettors (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The sample and STAT pipettors (S and ST, respectively, on the

processing center map) are devices that detect, aspirate, transfer, and
dispense samples into the reaction vessel. The sample pipettor also
transfers pretreated samples into a new reaction vessel after the
appropriate incubation period. These pipettor assemblies include a
fluid sense/pressure monitoring system that helps to identify errors in
aspiration.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.75: Sample and STAT pipettors
Legend:
1. Sample pipettor
2. STAT pipettor
Sample and STAT syringes (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The sample and STAT syringes (SS and STS, respectively, on the
processing center map) are devices that control the aspiration and
dispense of samples.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.76: Example of a sample or STAT syringe
Sample and STAT wash stations (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The sample and STAT wash stations (SW and STW, respectively, on the
processing center map) are passive wash stations where the sample
and STAT probes dispense excess sample and any remaining fluid is
washed from the probe interior and tip.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.77: Example of a sample or STAT wash station
Reagent hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Figure 1.78: Reagent hardware components of the processing module
Legend:
1. Reagent carousel: Provides cooled, temperature-controlled storage for
reagent kits. See Reagent carousel and bar code reader (i 2000/i 2000SR),
page 1-85.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
2. Reagent bar code reader: Reads 2D (two dimensional) bar code labels on
reagent bottles. See Reagent carousel and bar code reader (i 2000/i
2000SR), page 1-85.
3. Reagent pipettors (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-86 (R1 and R2): Aspirate and
dispense reagents into RVs (reaction vessels).
4. Reagent syringes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-87 (R1S and R2S): Aspirate and
dispense reagents.
5. Reagent wash stations (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-88 (R1W and R2W): Wash
any remaining fluid from the probe interior and exterior surfaces.
Reagent carousel and bar code reader (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The reagent carousel is a rotating circular device that:

Holds up to 25 bar coded reagent kits (75 individual bottles) in a
cooled, temperature-controlled environment
Consists of three rings that are color coded to match the color
stripe at the top of the reagent bottle labels
Provides microparticle dispersion by continuously rotating the
microparticle reagent bottles
Rotates to position bottles for reagent aspiration and dispense

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.79: Reagent carousel
Reagent pipettors (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Reagent pipettors (R1 and R2 on the processing center map) are

devices that detect, aspirate, transfer, and dispense reagents into the
RV (reaction vessel). Each pipettor assembly includes a fluid
sense/pressure monitoring system that helps to identify errors in
aspiration.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.80: Reagent pipettor (R1)
Figure 1.81: Reagent pipettor (R2)
Reagent syringes (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The reagent syringes (R1S and R2S on the processing center map) are
devices that control the aspiration and dispense of reagents.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.82: Example of a reagent syringe (R1 or R2)
Reagent wash stations (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The reagent wash stations (R1W and R2W on the processing center
map) are active wash stations that wash any remaining fluid from the
probe interior and exterior surfaces. In addition, a vacuum source dries
the exterior of the probe. The portion of the probe that enters the
reagent bottle is washed and dried in this wash station.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.83: Example of a reagent wash station (R1 or R2)
Process path hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The process path is a covered circular track that provides incubation

temperatures, liquid aspiration, and wash points as necessary for the
assay protocol. The process path advances RVs (reaction vessels) every
18 seconds and positions them at the designated locations to process
the CMIA reaction. For information on the CMIA reaction, see CMIA
technology and reaction sequence, page 3-24.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.84: Process path hardware components
Legend:
1. Load diverter (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-91 (LD): Moves RVs from the inner
track to the outer track of the process path when reaction vessels are
needed for processing.
2. RV access door (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-91 (RVA): Used for diagnostic
purposes only. This door allows access to one position on the outer track.
3. RV loader and hopper assembly (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-92 (RVL):
Provides onboard storage for RVs and transports RVs into the process path.
4. STAT diverter (i 2000SR), page 1-92 (STD): Moves RVs on an i 2000SR
processing module from the inner track to the outer track of the process path
when RVs are needed for STAT processing.
5. Vortexers (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-93 (VTX1, VTX2, VTX3, VTXST): Mix
the reaction mixture to suspend microparticles.
6. Wash zone diverter (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-94 (WZD): Directs RVs to one
of two paths. One path moves RVs through the wash zone where a wash
occurs. The other path moves RVs around the wash zone.
7. Wash zone manifolds (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-94 (WZ1, WZ2): Dispenses
wash buffer, and removes and discards unbound analyte from the reaction
mixture in the RV.
8. Process path drive motor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-95 (PPM): Rotates the
process path disk, which holds RVs in place, and advances the RVs from
position to position.
9. Pre-trigger/trigger manifold (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-96 (PT/T): Dispenses
Pre-Trigger Solution, and then Trigger Solution into the RVs.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
10. CMIA reader (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-96 (CMIA): Measures the
chemiluminescent emission from RVs and outputs data corresponding to the
quantity of emission detected.
11. Liquid waste arm (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-97 (A): Removes liquid from RVs
prior to unloading it to the solid waste container.
12. RV unloader (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-98 (UL): Removes used RVs from the
process path and discards them into the solid waste container after assay
processing.
Load diverter (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The load diverter (LD on the processing center map) is a device that
moves RVs (reaction vessels) from the inner track to the outer track of
the process path when RVs are needed for routine processing.
Figure 1.85: Load diverter
RV access door (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The RV access door (RVA on the processing center map) is an opening

that allows access to one position on the outer track. You use this door
for diagnostic purposes only and should always make sure it is closed
during system operation.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.86: RV access door
RV loader and hopper assembly (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The RV loader and hopper assembly (RVL on the processing center

map) is a device that provides onboard storage for RVs (reaction
vessels) and transports the RVs into the process path.
Figure 1.87: RV loader and hopper assembly
STAT diverter (i 2000SR)
The STAT diverter (STD on the processing center map) is a device that
moves RVs (reaction vessels) from the inner track to the outer track of
the process path when the RVs are needed for STAT processing.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.88: STAT diverter
Vortexers (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The vortexers (VTX1, VTX2, VTX3, and VTXST on the processing

center map) are devices that mix the reaction mixture to suspend
microparticles. The RVs are vortexed in the process path.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.89: Vortexers
Wash zone diverter (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The wash zone diverter (WZD on the processing center map) is a

device that directs RVs (reaction vessels) to one of two paths. One path
moves RVs through the wash zone where a wash occurs. The other
path moves RVs around the wash zone.
Figure 1.90: Wash zone diverter
Wash zone manifolds (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The wash zone manifolds (WZ1 and WZ2 on the processing center
map) are devices that remove and discard unbound analyte from the

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
reaction mixture in an RV (reaction vessel). Each wash zone has four

positions where the following actions occur:
Position 1 - A magnet attracts paramagnetic microparticles to the
wall of the RV and a dispense nozzle dispenses wash buffer into
the RV.
Positions 2 and 3 - A vacuum is applied to the wash zone probes
as they move to the bottom of the RV. In addition, nozzles
dispense wash buffer into the RV. Additional wash/aspiration
cycles occur at these positions.
Position 4 - A wash zone probe aspirates liquid waste from the
RV.
Figure 1.91: Wash zone manifold (WZ1)
Process path drive motor (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The process path drive motor (PPM on the processing center map) is a
device that rotates the process path disk, which holds the RVs
(reaction vessels) in place, and advances the RVs from position to
position.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.92: Process path drive motor (PPM)
Pre-trigger/trigger manifold (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The pre-trigger/trigger manifold (PT/T on the processing center map)

is a device that dispenses Pre-Trigger Solution, and then Trigger
Solution into RVs (reaction vessels).
Figure 1.93: Pre-trigger/trigger manifold (PT/T)
CMIA reader (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The CMIA reader (CMIA on the processing center map) is a device that
measures the chemiluminescent emission from RVs (reaction vessels)
and reports the quantity of emission detected.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.94: CMIA reader (CMIA)
Liquid waste arm (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The liquid waste arm (A on the processing center map) is a device that
removes liquid from RVs (reaction vessels) prior to unloading them to
the solid waste container.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.95: Liquid waste arm (A)
RV unloader (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The RV unloader (UL on the processing center map) is a device that

removes used RVs (reaction vessels) from the process path and discards
them into the solid waste container after assay processing.
Figure 1.96: RV unloader (UL)
Supply and waste center (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The supply and waste center is the onboard storage area for bulk
solutions and solid waste.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.97: Supply and waste center
Legend:
1. Pre-trigger/trigger storage area (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-99: Provides
onboard storage for Pre-Trigger Solution and Trigger Solution.
2. Wash buffer storage area (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-103: Provides onboard
storage for the wash buffer.
3. Solid waste storage area (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-107: Provides storage for
the used RVs (reaction vessels).
Pre-trigger/trigger storage area (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The pre-trigger/trigger storage area is the location in the supply and

waste center that provides onboard storage for the Pre-Trigger Solution
and Trigger Solution, which are necessary for test processing.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.98: Pre-trigger trigger storage area
Legend:
1. Pre-trigger/trigger tray (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-100: Holds the pre-trigger
and trigger bottles.
2. Trigger level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-102: Detects the volume of
remaining trigger solution.
3. Pre-trigger level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-101: Detects the volume of
remaining pre-trigger solution.
Pre-trigger/trigger tray (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The pre-trigger/trigger tray is a platform in the supply and waste

center that holds the Pre-Trigger Solution and Trigger Solution bottles.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.99: Pre-trigger/trigger tray
Legend:
1. Trigger solution (i System), page 1-144: Used to produce the
chemiluminescent reaction that provides the final read.
2. Pre-trigger solution (i System), page 1-143: Used to split the acridinium dye
off the conjugate bound to the microparticle complex. This process prepares
the acridinium dye for the addition of trigger solution.
Pre-trigger level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The pre-trigger level sensor is an assembly with a magnetic float sensor

located in the pre-trigger bottle that indicates when the liquid level is
low. When the sensor trips, approximately 70 mLs of usable solution
remains.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.100: Pre-trigger level sensor
Trigger level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The trigger level sensor is an assembly with a magnetic float sensor

located in the trigger bottle that indicates when the liquid level is low.
When the sensor trips, approximately 70 mLs of usable solution
remains.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.101: Trigger level sensor
Wash buffer storage area (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The wash buffer storage area is the location in the supply and waste
center for onboard storage of wash buffer, which is used in test
processing.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.102: Wash buffer storage area
Legend:
1. Wash buffer reservoir (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-104: Provides onboard
storage for up to 25 liters of wash buffer.
2. Wash buffer level sensor: Draws wash buffer from the reservoir and
measures the remaining volume of wash buffer. See Wash buffer level
sensor and wash buffer inlet assembly (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-105.
3. Wash buffer inlet assembly: Dispenses wash buffer into the reservoir from
the wash buffer preparation container or ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic
Reconstitution Module). See Wash buffer level sensor and wash buffer inlet
assembly (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-105.
4. Wash buffer filter (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-106: Protects the fluidics
components by eliminating particulates.
Wash buffer reservoir (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The wash buffer reservoir is an onboard container in the supply and

waste center that holds up to 25 liters of wash buffer.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.103: Wash buffer reservoir
Wash buffer level sensor and wash buffer inlet assembly (i 2000/i
2000SR)
The wash buffer level sensor, located in the wash buffer reservoir, is an
assembly containing a tube with three magnetic float sensors that
indicate when the wash buffer reservoir is full (top sensor), needs to be
filled by the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module)
accessory (middle sensor), or is empty (lower sensor).
The wash buffer level sensor tube transports wash buffer from the
reservoir during test processing.
The wash buffer inlet assembly tube transports wash buffer into the
reservoir from the wash buffer preparation container or ARM.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.104: Wash buffer level sensor and wash buffer inlet assembly
Wash buffer filter (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The wash buffer filter, located in the wash buffer storage area, is an
assembly containing material used to eliminate particulates that
might damage the fluidics components of the system.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.105: Wash buffer filter
Solid waste storage area (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The solid waste storage area is the location in the supply and waste
center that provides a storage area for the solid waste container that
holds used RVs (reaction vessels). The RVs are directed into the
container by a waste chute.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.106: Solid waste storage area
Waste chute and trap door (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The waste chute is a device in the supply and waste center that
receives used RVs (reaction vessels) by gravity and directs them into
the solid waste container. The trap door holds up to 50 RVs when you
remove the solid waste container during processing.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.107: Waste chute and trap door
Optional components (i System)
Optional components available for an i System processing module

include:
continuous flow of power to the processing module during a
power failure
ARM optional accessory (i System), page 1-109 - dilutes
Concentrated Wash Buffer to the proper concentration and
delivers it to the wash buffer reservoir.
ARM optional accessory (i System)
The ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory is

an optional ARCHITECT i System accessory that automatically dilutes
Concentrated Wash Buffer to the proper concentration and delivers it
to the wash buffer reservoir.
The ARM is connected to a water supply and is loaded with a 10 L
container of concentrated wash buffer. A single motor operating at a
constant speed is geared to drive two pumps at a 9:1 ratio to each
other, pumping the necessary proportions of water and concentrated
wash buffer into a mixing chamber.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Sensors verify that incoming water and outgoing wash buffer meet
predetermined specifications for ion content and temperature. If the
standards are not met, the ARM motor stops automatically.
Figure 1.108: ARM (front view)
Legend:
1. ARM keypad (i System), page 1-111: Provides a local user interface for
controlling the ARM.
2. Tubing assembly: Detects the level of concentrated wash buffer in the 10 L
container and transfers the concentrated wash buffer to the mixing chamber
inside the ARM.
3. Fluidics and electronics bay: Provides access to the pump and circuit
boards.
4. Concentrated wash buffer (10 L container): Concentrated wash buffer
diluted by the ARM and delivered to the processing modules.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.109: ARM (rear view)
ARM connectors (i System), page 1-113
ARM keypad (i System)
The ARM keypad is an input device used by the operator to operate the
ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.110: Components of the ARM keypad
Legend:
1. Start key: Initiates operation. The green indicator below the key illuminates
during operation and flashes when wash buffer is being pumped to the wash
buffer reservoir in the processing module.
2. Decontamination key (used by Abbott service representatives): Initiates the
decontamination procedures.
3. Flush to drain key: Initiates a flush. This key is not functional when your
wash buffer transfer option is set to Automatic.
4. Replace buffer key: Initiates loading of the 10 L container of Concentrated
Wash Buffer. The amber indicator illuminates during this procedure.
5. Stop key: Stops the procedure currently in progress and/or interrupts
communication to the SCC (system control center). The red indicator
illuminates when you press the stop key.
6. Water quality error indicator: Illuminates red if the incoming water does not
meet the NCCLS Type II resistivity standard. When this occurs, transfer of
buffer stops.
7. Buffer quality error indicator: Illuminates red if the diluted buffer mixture is
outside acceptable limits. The up arrow indicates too much water. The down
arrow indicates too little water. When either occurs, the system stops
transfer of buffer.
8. Flood indicator: Illuminates red if liquid is detected in the flood pan. When
this occurs, transfer of buffer stops.
9. Water temperature indicator: Illuminates red if incoming water temperature
is outside the range of 15 - 37C. When this occurs, transfer of buffer stops.
10. Low inlet pressure indicator: Illuminates red if incoming water pressure or
the flow rate is too low. When this occurs, transfer of buffer stops.
11. High outlet pressure indicator: Illuminates red if the outgoing wash buffer
pressure exceeds the pressure limit of the inlet valves. When this occurs,
transfer of buffer stops.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
12. Inventory level indicator: Indicates the volume of buffer remaining in the
container.
3 bars illuminated = full
2 bars illuminated = mid (50%)
1 bar illuminated = low (20%)
No bar illuminated = empty (<2%) The red indicator illuminates and the ARM
stops.
ARM connectors (i System)
Connectors on the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution

Module) accessory are ports that provide the connections for
transporting fluids to and from the ARM and communicating with the
SCC (system control center).
Figure 1.111: Connectors on rear of ARM
1. Diluted wash buffer outlet: Provides the connection that

allows diluted wash buffer to be transferred to the wash
buffer reservoir in the processing module.
2. Decontamination port 1: Provides the connection that
allows a 0.5% sodium hypochlorite solution to be
flushed through the ARM for decontamination.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
3. Water inlet: Provides the connection from the deionized

water system to the ARM.
4. Waste 1 (pressurized) port: Provides pressurized waste

from the internal drip pan located inside the ARM to the
external waste pump or floor drain.
5. Waste 2 (gravity) port: Provides gravity waste from the
internal drip pan, located inside the ARM, to the
external waste pump or floor drain.
6. RS232 port: Provides communication between the ARM
and the SCC.
7. Power switch: Used to cycle the power.
Figure 1.112: Connectors on top of ARM
1. Sensor cable: Provides the connection from the tubing

assembly to the ARM.
2. Concentrated wash buffer inlet: Provides the connection

that allows the concentrated wash buffer to be
transferred to the mixing chamber of the ARM.
3. Decontamination port 2: Provides the connection that
allows the ARM system to be flushed with water to
remove the 0.5% sodium hypochlorite solution.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1 Sample handlers
Sample handlers
The sample handler is a transport system used for loading calibrators,
controls, and patient samples and presenting them to the processing
module(s).
A single primary sample handler transports samples through an
ARCHITECT System regardless of the number of processing modules
and types.
NOTE: Unless otherwise indicated, the term sample handler is used

generically throughout this documentation to refer to all
configurations.
Sample handler topics include:
RSH - robotic sample handler, page 1-115
SSH - standard sample handler (i 2000), page 1-121
LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000), page 1-123
RSH - robotic sample handler

The RSH (robotic sample handler) is a transport system used for
loading calibrators, controls, and patient samples and presenting them
to a c System and/or i 2000SR processing module. The design of the
RSH allows random and continuous access, and sample positioning for
automatic retesting. Two types of bays position samples for either
routine or priority processing.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Sample handlers Section 1
Figure 1.113: Robotic sample handler components
Legend:
1. RSH cover: Provides access to the RSH components.
2. RSH keypad, page 1-120: Provides a local user interface for controlling the
sample handler.
3. RSH bar code reader: Reads the sample and sample carrier ID.
4. Priority bay (RSH), page 1-116: Positions samples for priority processing.
5. Routine bay (RSH), page 1-117: Positions samples for routine processing.
6. Carrier positioner, page 1-119: Positions carriers for sample aspiration.
7. Carrier transport, page 1-119: Transfers sample carriers from the bays to the
carrier positioner and back.
Priority bay (RSH)
The priority bay is a holding area that positions samples for priority
processing. You place samples in sample carriers and load them into
the priority bay. The carrier transport picks up each carrier and moves
it past the bar code reader. The bar code reader identifies the samples,
the carrier transport moves the carriers back to the priority bays, and
then the carrier transport moves the carriers to the appropriate
processing module for sample aspiration.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.114: Priority bay
Legend:
1. Priority bay: Holds carriers and positions samples for priority processing.
2. Status indicator: Indicates the status of sample processing and when you
can access samples:
Indicators off - no samples are loaded in the position.
Green (steady) - samples are loaded, but processing has not begun.
You can access the samples.
Amber (steady) - samples are processing and you cannot access
them.
Green (blinking) - processing is complete and you can access the
samples.
NOTE: If you add or rerun tests for a sample before it is unloaded, the
indicator for the bay or section changes back to amber while the sample is
re-aspirated.
Amber and green (alternating) - bar code scan or other error occurred.
3. Sample carrier: Holds five primary tubes, aliquot tubes, or sample cups,
which you may mix within a sample carrier.
Routine bay (RSH)
The routine bay is a holding area that positions samples for routine
processing. You place samples in sample carriers, load the carriers onto

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
carrier trays, and then slide the trays into a routine bay. The carrier
transport picks up each carrier and moves it past the bar code reader.
The bar code reader identifies the samples, the carrier transport moves
the carriers back to the routine bay, and then the carrier transport
moves the carriers to the appropriate processing module for sample
aspiration.
Figure 1.115: Routine bay
Legend:
1. Status indicator: Indicates the status of sample processing and when you
can access samples:
Indicators off - no samples are loaded in the position.
Green (steady) - samples are loaded, but processing has not begun.
Amber (steady) - samples are processing and you cannot access
them.
Green (blinking) - processing is complete and you can access the
samples.
NOTE: If you add or rerun tests for a sample before it is unloaded, the
indicator for the bay or section changes back to amber while the sample is
re-aspirated.
Amber and green (alternating) - bar code scan or other error occurred.
2. Carrier tray: Holds up to five sample carriers.
3. Bay door: Provides access to the routine bay.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Carrier transport
The carrier transport is a mechanism used to transport sample carriers

from:
A bay on the RSH (robotic sample handler) to the RSH bar code
reader
The RSH bar code reader to a carrier positioner or back to the bay
The carrier positioner back to the bay
Figure 1.116: Carrier transport
Carrier positioner
The carrier positioner is a mechanism on the RSH (robotic sample

handler) that positions sample carriers at the appropriate processing
module sample aspiration position.
Each processing module has a carrier positioner with four positions:
On a c System positions 1 and 2 are designated for sample
carriers from routine bays, position 3 is for sample carriers from
priority bays, and position 4 is not used.
On an i 2000SR positions 1 and 2 are designated for sample
carriers accessed by the routine sample pipettor and positions 3
and 4 are for sample carriers accessed by the STAT sample
pipettor.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.117: Carrier positioner
RSH keypad
The RSH (robotic sample handler) keypad is an input device used by

the operator to control the sample handler.
Figure 1.118: Components of the RSH keypad
Legend:
1. Run key: Resumes or begins the transport of samples that are located in the
bays.
2. Pause key: Pauses the sample handler.
3. Stop key: Stops the sample handler, but does not shut down power to the
sample handler.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
SSH - standard sample handler (i 2000)

The SSH (standard sample handler) is a transport system used for
loading calibrators, controls, and patient samples and presenting them
to an i 2000 processing module(s).
You place samples in sample carriers, and then load them onto the
sample load queue. Bar code readers identify the samples, and then
the sample handler transports the carriers to the processing queue for
sample aspiration. Once aspiration is complete, the processing queue
transports the carriers to the unload queue.
Depending on the number of processing modules, two SSH
configurations are available:
Single lane - provides sample handling for a single processing
module. The maximum capacity is 125 samples (25 sample
carriers, 5 samples per carrier).
Double lane- provides sample handling for multi-module (up to
four processing modules) systems. The maximum capacity is 250
samples (50 sample carriers, 5 samples per carrier).
Figure 1.119: SSH components (single lane)
Legend:
1. Sample load queue (single lane): Transfers the sample carriers to the
sample processing queue.
2. Sample carriers, page 1-147: Hold five primary tubes, aliquot tubes, or
sample cups, which you may mix within a sample carrier.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
3. SSH keypad, page 1-122: Provides a local user interface for controlling the
sample handler.
4. Sample load queue bar code reader: Reads the sample carrier ID, position,
and sample ID.
5. Sample processing queue bar code reader: Reads the sample carrier ID
and position. Does not read the sample ID.
6. Left processing queue access door: Provides access to the sample
processing queue.
7. Right processing queue access door: Provides access to the sample
processing queue.
8. Sample processing queue: Transfers the sample carrier to the sample
pipettor. Once samples are aspirated, the sample carrier is transferred to
another processing module or to the sample unload queue.
9. Sample unload queue (single lane): Provides the location where sample
carriers are unloaded.
Figure 1.120: SSH configuration (double-lane)
Legend:
1. Sample load queue (double lane): Transfers the sample carriers to the
sample processing queue.
2. Sample unload queue (double lane): Provides the location where sample
carriers are unloaded.
SSH keypad
The SSH (standard sample handler) keypad is an input device used by

the operator to control the sample handler.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.121: Components of the SSH keypad
Legend:
1. Run key: Resumes or begins the transport of samples that are located on
the sample load queue.
2. Pause key: Pauses the sample load queue so you can load sample carriers
or perform priority loading.
3. Pause indicator (yellow): Illuminates to indicate that the sample load queue
is paused and ready for loading of sample carriers.
4. Reverse key: Reverses the sample load queue direction for ease of loading
priority sample carriers. Functional only when the pause indicator is
illuminated.
5. Stop key: Stops the sample handler, but does not shut down power to the
sample handler.
6. Active lane indicators (green; active on double load queues only): Indicate
the currently active lane. The lane indicator is used to facilitate priority
loading on multi-module systems.
LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000)

The LAS (laboratory automation system) carousel sample handler is a
transport system used for loading calibrators, controls, and patient
samples and presenting them to an i 2000 processing module that is
integrated with an LAS track system.
In the event of a track failure, the LAS carousel can be used as the
primary area for loading samples. Under normal operating conditions
when both the LAS track and LAS carousel are functional, samples on
the carousel take priority over those on the LAS track.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.122: LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000)
Legend:
1. LAS carousel cover: Provides access to the LAS sample carousel.
2. LAS sample carousel (i 2000), page 1-148: Holds 20 primary tubes, aliquot
tubes, or sample cups, which you may mix within the carousel.
3. LAS carousel sample handler keypad (i 2000), page 1-124: Provides a local
user interface for the control of the LAS carousel.
LAS carousel sample handler keypad (i 2000)
The LAS (laboratory automation system) carousel sample handler

keypad is an input device used by the operator to control the sample
handler.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.123: Components of the LAS carousel sample handler keypad

(i 2000)
Legend:
1. Run key: Resumes or begins the processing of samples located on the LAS
carousel.
2. Pause key: Pauses the LAS carousel after completing aspiration of the
current sample or current group of calibrators.
3. Pause indicator (yellow): Illuminates to indicate that the LAS carousel is
paused and ready for loading or unloading samples.
4. Carousel advance key: Moves the LAS carousel clockwise five positions.
Functional only when the pause indicator is illuminated.
5. Stop key: Stops the LAS carousel, but does not shut down the power to the
carousel.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Required consumables Section 1
Required consumables
Consumables are replenishable items required to run assays on an
ARCHITECT System. It is important to maintain adequate inventory
of these consumables.
Required consumables topics include:
ARCHITECT System consumables, page 1-126
ARCHITECT c System consumables, page 1-126
ARCHITECT i System consumables, page 1-138
ARCHITECT System consumables

Sample cups, page 1-126, are used on every ARCHITECT System.
Sample cups
The sample cup is a 1400 L disposable container that holds patient

samples, calibrators, or controls. Volume graduation lines at 125 L,
500 L, and 1400 L help you fill sample cups, eliminating the need
for precision pipetting.
You can use sample cups in conjunction with sample tubes with bar
code labels to facilitate positive sample identification.
Figure 1.124: Sample cups
ARCHITECT c System consumables

The following consumables are used on an ARCHITECT c System:
Reagent kits and components (c System), page 1-127

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1 Required consumables
Reagent cartridges (c System), page 1-128

Calibrators (c System), page 1-129
ICT module (c System), page 1-130
ICT calibrators (c System), page 1-131
ICT cleaning fluid (c System), page 1-132
Bulk solutions (c System), page 1-132
Onboard solutions (c System), page 1-136
Water bath additive (c System), page 1-137
Reagent kits and components (c System)
Reagent kits are one or more cartridges that contain all the necessary
reagent components for an ARCHITECT c System photometric or
potentiometric assay.
Reagent kits can be stored on board the system in accordance with
assay-specific instructions. For details about onboard storage, see the
reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a
package insert or reagent application sheet).
Figure 1.125: Reagent kits and components
Reagent labels (c System), page 1-127
Reagent labels (c System)
Reagent labels are unique identifiers on Abbott pre-packaged reagents

that contain a 2D (two-dimensional) bar code. Bar code information
includes:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Reagent name
Reagent serial number
Lot number
Cartridge size
Expiration date
Onboard stability time
A reagent supply center indicator (R1 or R2) is at the top of the reagent
label to aid in loading reagents.
Figure 1.126: Reagent labels
Reagent cartridges (c System)
Reagent cartridges are containers used in the reagent supply centers to

hold the reagents used during operation. They may also hold supplies
of diluted wash solutions, diluents, and Water Bath Additive.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.127: Reagent cartridges
Legend:
1. Large, 90 mL cartridge: White or natural.
2. 100 mL cartridge: Brown (only available with some prepackaged reagents
and cannot be ordered separately).
3. 20 mL cartridge: White
4. Small, 55 mL cartridge: White or natural.
5. 20 mL bottle: Brown (only available with some prepackaged reagents and
cannot be ordered separately).
Reagent cartridge adapters (c 8000), page 1-151
Calibrators (c System)
Calibrators are samples that contain known concentrations of analyte.

A variety of calibrators (single and multiconstituent) are used on the
system. See the Abbott Clinical Chemistry package insert or reagent
application sheet to identify the calibrators used for each assay.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.128: Calibrators
ICT module (c System)
The ICT module is an integrated chip located within the ICT unit that
contains the Na+, K+, Cl-, and reference electrodes. The warranty for
the ICT module is 15,000 samples or two months post-installation,
whichever comes first.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.129: ICT module
ICT calibrators (c System)
ICT calibrators (7% bovine serum albumin base) and ICT urine
calibrators (aqueous base) are samples with known values used to
calibrate the ICT module. Each set contains a low and high level.
See the Abbott Clinical Chemistry package insert or reagent
application sheet for information on calibration.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.130: ICT calibrators
ICT cleaning fluid (c System)
ICT Cleaning Fluid is a cleaning agent prepared by the operator and

used during daily maintenance procedures to clean the ICT module.
To prepare ICT cleaning fluid, see Prepare ICT cleaning fluid (c System),
page 9-23.
Figure 1.131: ICT cleaning fluid
Bulk solutions (c System)
Bulk solutions are liquid solutions provided in large quantities that are
used in sample processing. Three bulk solutions are loaded onto
weighted platforms behind the supply center door of the processing
module:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
ICT reference solution (c System), page 1-133

Alkaline wash (c System), page 1-134
Acid wash (c System), page 1-135
NOTE: For specific information on the storage of the bulk solutions,
see the labels on the bulk solution bottles.
Bulk solution supply center (c 8000), page 1-49
Bulk solution supply center (c 16000), page 1-68
ICT reference solution (c System)
ICT Reference Solution (2000 mL bottle) is a mid-concentration

standard. It is aspirated and analyzed by the ICT module before and
after each sample to provide a reference concentration used to
calculate results.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.132: Reference solution
Alkaline wash (c System)
Alkaline Wash (500 mL bottle) is an alkaline wash solution used by the

cuvette washer to clean the cuvettes after sample analysis.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.133: Alkaline wash
Alkaline Wash contains sodium hydroxide (NaOH) and is

classified per applicable EC (European Community)
Directives as: Corrosive (C). For more information see
Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
Acid wash (c System)
Acid Wash (500 mL bottle) is an acidic wash solution used by the

cuvette washer to clean the cuvettes after sample analysis.
A dilution of the acid wash solution may also be used for probe
washing. See Onboard solutions (c System), page 1-136.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.134: Acid wash
Acid Wash contains methyl alcohol and is classified per

applicable EC (European Community) Directives as:
Harmful (Xn). For more information, see Chemical hazards,
page 8-9.
Onboard solutions (c System)
Onboard solutions are detergents used to wash the sample and reagent
probes, mixers, and reaction cuvettes. These solutions are used during
system operation when additional probe or cuvette washes may be
required to prevent assay-to-assay interference (SmartWash feature).
They may also be used during some maintenance procedures.
Onboard solutions include:
0.5% acid wash solution (a 0.5% dilution of Acid Wash bulk
solution)
Detergent A
10% detergent B solution (a 10% dilution of Detergent B)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.135: Onboard solutions
Detergent A contains 2-aminoethanol and is classified per

page 8-9.
Detergent B contains sodium hydroxide and is classified

per applicable EC (European Community) Directives as:
Corrosive (C). For more information, see Chemical hazards,
page 8-9.
Acid Wash contains methyl alcohol and is classified per

page 8-9.
Water bath additive (c System)
Water Bath Additive is an antimicrobial solution used to reduce

microbial contamination in the water bath. A supply of water bath
additive is placed in one of the reagent supply centers for the
automated daily maintenance procedure. During the procedure, the
solution is dispensed into the water bath.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.136: Water bath additive
Water Bath Additive contains

5-Chloro-2-methyl-4-isothiazolin-3-one and
2-Methyl-4-isothiazolin-3-one and is classified per
applicable EC (European Community) Directives as: Irritant
(Xi). For more information, see Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
ARCHITECT i System consumables

The following consumables are used on an ARCHITECT i System:
Reagent kits and components (i System), page 1-138
Septums and replacement caps (i System), page 1-140
Single constituent controls (i System), page 1-141
Multiconstituent controls (i System), page 1-141
Calibrators (i System), page 1-142
Bulk solutions (i System), page 1-143
Reaction vessels (i System), page 1-146
Reagent kits and components (i System)
Reagent kits are two or more bottles that contain all the necessary
reagent components for an ARCHITECT i System assay. Based on the
size, reagent kits include:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
100 test kits

500 test kits
Reagent kits can be stored on board the system in accordance with
assay-specific instructions. For details about onboard storage, see the
assay-specific package insert.
Figure 1.137: Reagent kit and components
Reagent labels (i System), page 1-139
Reagent labels (i System)
Reagent labels are unique identifiers on Abbott pre-packaged reagents

that contain 2D (two-dimensional) bar codes. Bar code information
includes:
Assay name
Reagent serial number
Lot number
Test size (number of tests per kit)
Expiration date
Onboard stability time
Master calibration curve information for assays that use the
2-point adjustment calibration method
Color bands, which match the reagent carousel position, are located at
the top of the reagent label to aid in loading reagents.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.138: Reagent labels
Septums and replacement caps (i System)
Septums are membranes with slits that are used to prevent reagent
evaporation and contamination, and to ensure reagent integrity. You
place septums on all open reagent bottles prior to loading the bottle
into the processing module.
Replacement caps are teal-colored caps used to visually indicate that
reagent bottles have been opened. You place replacement caps on
open reagent bottles with the septums in place when you remove
reagent bottles from the processing module. You can then store the
bottles upright in refrigerated storage off the system.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.139: Septums and replacement caps
Single constituent controls (i System)
Single constituent controls are assay-specific samples that contain

known concentrations of analyte. They are typically labeled L, M, and
H, or Pos and Neg.
Figure 1.140: Single constituent controls
Multiconstituent controls (i System)
Abbott multiconstituent controls are samples that contain multiple

analytes. Two or three levels of control are available to allow
performance monitoring within a clinical range:
Immunoassay-MCC (Liquid) - contains immunoassay markers
(including some cancer assay markers)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Tumor Marker-MCC (Lyophilized) - contains all the cancer

markers available to an ARCHITECT i System
Figure 1.141: Multiconstituent controls
Calibrators (i System)
Calibrators are samples that contain known concentrations of analyte.

Single analyte calibrators are used on an i System. See the
assay-specific package insert to identify the calibrators used for each
assay.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.142: Calibrators
Bulk solutions (i System)
Bulk solutions are liquid solutions provided in large quantities that are
used in sample processing. Three bulk solutions are loaded into the
supply and waste center of an ARCHITECT i System processing
module:
Pre-trigger solution (i System), page 1-143
Trigger solution (i System), page 1-144
Concentrated wash buffer (i System), page 1-145
NOTE: For information specific to storing bulk solutions, see the labels
on the bulk solution bottles.
Pre-trigger solution (i System)
Pre-Trigger Solution is a hydrogen peroxide solution used to split the

acridinium dye off the conjugate bound to the microparticle complex.
This process prepares the acridinium dye for the addition of Trigger
Solution. The pre-trigger bottle is black.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.143: Pre-trigger solution
Trigger solution (i System)
Trigger Solution is a sodium hydroxide solution used to produce the

chemiluminescent reaction that provides the final read. The trigger
bottle is natural.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.144: Trigger solution
Trigger Solution contains sodium hydroxide (NaOH) and is

classified per applicable EC (European Community)
Directives as: Irritant (Xi). For more information, see
Concentrated wash buffer (i System)
Concentrated Wash Buffer is a solution containing phosphate buffered

saline. Wash buffer is used throughout assay processing and is pumped
to the sample and reagent pipetting assemblies and the two wash
zones.
A 25 L reservoir is kept on board the system in the supply and waste
center and can be replenished while the system is running.
Concentrated wash buffer is supplied in a 1 L bottle that must be
diluted prior to use or in a 10 L cubitainer for use with the
ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.145: Concentrated wash buffer (1 L bottle)
Reaction vessels (i System)
RVs (reaction vessels) are disposable containers in which the CMIA

reaction takes place. RVs are stored in bulk in the RV hopper and are
automatically loaded into the process path as needed. The maximum
onboard storage is 1200 RVs. You can add RVs to the hopper at any
time.
Figure 1.146: Reaction vessel

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1 Required accessories
Required accessories
Accessories are components that are required for sample processing on
an ARCHITECT System. It is important to maintain a sufficient supply
of these accessories.
Required accessory topics include:
Sample carriers, page 1-147
Carrier trays (RSH), page 1-148
LAS sample carousel (i 2000), page 1-148
Reagent segments (c 8000), page 1-149
Sample carriers
Sample carriers are racks used on the RSH (robotic sample handler) or
SSH (standard sample handler) to transport patient samples,
calibrators, or controls to the sample pipettor(s). Sample carriers are
bar coded for identification and hold five primary tubes, aliquot tubes,
or sample cups, which you may mix within a sample carrier.
Sample carriers have a sample gauge label to verify the sample volume
in a primary or aliquot tube. See Sample gauge label, page 5-174.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Required accessories Section 1
Figure 1.147: Sample carriers
Carrier trays (RSH)

Carrier trays are accessories used to hold sample carriers for loading on
the RSH (robotic sample handler). Each tray holds up to five sample
carriers.
Figure 1.148: Carrier trays
LAS sample carousel (i 2000)

LAS sample carousels are carousels used on the LAS (laboratory
automation system) carousel sample handler to transport patient
samples, calibrators, or controls to the sample pipettor. LAS sample

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
carousels are bar coded for identification and hold 20 primary tubes,
aliquot tubes, or sample cups, which you may mix within the carousel.
Figure 1.149: LAS sample carousel
Reagent segments (c 8000)

Reagent segments are sections of each reagent supply center that hold
reagents and diluents.
Some segments have a target for pipettor calibration used for aligning
sample or reagent pipettors when necessary.
Reagent segments are configured for reagent supply centers 1 and 2 as
follows:
Reagent supply center 1 consists of three outer segments and one
inner segment.
Reagent supply center 2 consists of four outer segments.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.150: Reagent segments (c 8000)
Legend:
1. R2 segment, 9 position: May be used in segments B, C, or D of reagent
supply center 2.
2. R2 segment, 14 position:
With pipettor calibration target: May be used only in segment A of
reagent supply center 2.
Without pipettor calibration target: May be used in segments B, C, or D
of reagent supply center 2.
3. R1 inner segment, 20 position, with pipettor calibration target: May be used
only in segment D of reagent supply center 1.
4. R1 outer segment, 15 position: May be used in segments A, B, or C of
5. R1 outer segment, 12 position:
With pipettor calibration target: May be used only in segment A of
Without pipettor calibration target: May be used in segments B or C of

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Reagent cartridge adapters (c 8000)

Reagent cartridge adapters are positioners used to ensure correct
alignment of the small (55 mL cartridge), 20 mL (cartridge), and 20 mL
(bottle) reagent cartridges placed in reagent supply centers 1 and 2.
Reagent cartridge adapters come in two sizes and are configured for
the following reagent cartridges:
Small reagent cartridge adapter - used with small (55 mL
cartridge) and 20 mL (cartridge) reagent cartridge
20 mL reagent cartridge adapter - used with the 20 mL (bottle)
reagent cartridge
Figure 1.151: Reagent cartridge adapters (c 8000)
Legend:
1. 20 mL reagent adapter: Used with bottle (20 mL) reagent cartridges
2. Small reagent cartridge adapter: Used with small (55 mL) and (20 mL)
reagent cartridges

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
The following tables show possible configurations of segments,

cartridges, and adapters in R1 and R2 reagent supply centers.
Table 1.1: Reagent supply center 1 (R1) reagent cartridge configurations (c 8000)
Segments Positions Cartridges Adapters
A (outer with 12 positions (25 mm) Large (90 mL cartridge) No
pipettor
calibration target)
Small (55 mL cartridge) Small reagent cartridge adapter
20 mL (cartridge) Small reagent cartridge adapter
20 mL (bottle) 20 mL reagent cartridge adapter
100 mL (cartridge) No
A, B, and C 12 positions (25 mm) Large (90 mL cartridge) No
(outer)
15 positions (17 mm) Small (55 mL cartridge) No
D (inner with 20 positions (25 mm) Large (90 mL cartridge) No
pipettor
calibration target)
Table 1.2: Reagent supply center 2 (R2) reagent cartridge configurations (c 8000)
A (with pipettor 14 positions (17 mm) Small (55 mL cartridge) No
calibration target)
B, C, and D 9 positions (25 mm) Large (90 mL cartridge) No
14 positions (17 mm) Small (55 mL cartridge) No

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Reagent segments (c 16000)

Reagent segments are sections of each reagent supply center that hold
reagents and diluents.
Some segments have a target for pipettor calibration used for aligning
sample or reagent pipettors when necessary.
Reagent supply centers consist of three outer segments and one inner
segment.
Figure 1.152: Reagent segments (c 16000)
Legend:
1. Inner segment, 20 position, with pipettor calibration target: May be used only
in segment D of reagent supply centers 1 and 2.
2. Outer segment, 15 position: May be used in segments A, B, or C of reagent
supply centers 1 and 2.
3. Outer segment, 12 position:
With pipettor calibration target: May be used only in segment A
of reagent supply centers 1 and 2.
Without pipettor calibration target: May be used in segments A,
B or C of reagent supply centers 1 and 2.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Reagent cartridge adapters (c 16000)

Reagent cartridge adapters are positioners used to ensure correct
alignment of the small (55 mL cartridge), 20 mL (cartridge), and 20 mL
(bottle) reagent cartridges placed in reagent supply centers 1 and 2.
Reagent cartridge adapters come in two sizes and are configured for
the following reagent cartridges:
Small reagent cartridge adapter - used with small (55 mL
cartridge) and 20 mL (cartridge) reagent cartridge
20 mL reagent cartridge adapter - used with the 20 mL (bottle)
reagent cartridge
Figure 1.153: Reagent cartridge adapters (c 16000)
Legend:
1. 20 mL reagent adapter: Used with bottle (20 mL) reagent cartridges
2. Small reagent cartridge adapter: Used with small (55 mL) and (20 mL)
reagent cartridges
The following tables show possible configurations of segments,
cartridges, and adapters in R1 and R2 reagent supply centers.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Table 1.3: Reagent cartridge configurations (c 16000)

A (outer with pipettor 12 positions Large (90 mL cartridge) No
calibration target) (25 mm)
B and C (outer) 12 positions Large (90 mL cartridge) No
(25 mm)
15 positions Small (55 mL cartridge) No
(17 mm)
D (inner with pipettor 20 positions Large (90 mL cartridge) No
calibration target) (25 mm)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
System statuses Section 1
System statuses
System status refers to the operational modes of the ARCHITECT
System. Key information displays on the Snapshot screen, providing
an immediate overview of your system.
The processing modules and sample handlers have several status
types. The following diagram illustrates the progression of statuses
from Offline to Running. The transition times are approximate and
may vary between the processing module and sample handler.
Figure 1.154: Processing module and sample handler status sequence
*The Scheduled pause status applies to all processing modules, the RSH
(robotic sample handler) and the LAS (laboratory automation system)
carousel sample handler. For the SSH (standard sample handler) this
status is Load queue paused.
System status topics include:
Sample handler status, page 1-156
Processing module status, page 1-160
Sample handler status

The sample handler graphic on the Snapshot screen indicates the
status of the sample handler. Sample handler status types depend on
your sample handler configuration:
RSH status types, page 1-157
SSH status types, page 1-158
LAS carousel sample handler status types (i 2000), page 1-159

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1 System statuses
Figure 1.155: Sample handler graphic
RSH status types
The RSH (robotic sample handler) has seven possible status types. The
following table provides a description of each.
Table 1.4: RSH status types
Status Indicates
Offline One of the following exists:
Power to the sample handler is off.
Power has been turned on, but communication between the sample handler
and SCC (system control center) has not been re-established.
Communication between the sample handler and the SCC has been lost due
to a software or system error.
Stopped One of the following exists:
Power to the sample handler is on, but F5 - Start-up on the Snapshot screen
has not been selected.
F6 - Stop on the Snapshot screen was selected.
Stop key on the sample handler keypad was selected.
A sample handler diagnostic procedure has completed.
One of the RSH covers was opened while the sample handler was running.
Sample handler detected a fatal error while processing.
Ready One of the following exists:
Startup is complete.
Scheduled pause status is complete.
Running One of the following exists:
F8 - Run on the Snapshot screen was selected.
Run key on the sample handler keypad was selected.
Scheduled pause One of the following exists:
F7 - Pause on the Snapshot screen was selected.
Pause key on the sample handler keypad was selected.
All processing modules are unavailable for sample processing.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Table 1.4: RSH status types (continued)

Status Indicates
Initializing Either the run key, F8 - Run, or F5 - Start-up was selected. This status is a
temporary status during which the system performs the following initialization
functions:
Homes all moving parts on the sample handler
Checks the bar code reader
Once initialization is complete, the status changes to Running or Ready
depending on whether run or startup was selected.
Maintenance A maintenance procedure requiring use of the RSH is in process on a module.
SSH status types
The SSH (standard sample handler) has seven possible status types.
The following table provides a description of each.
Table 1.5: SSH status types
Status Indicates
Power to the sample handler is off.
Power has been turned on, but communication between the sample handler
and SCC (system control center) has not been re-established.
Power to the sample handler is on, but F5 - Start-up on the Snapshot screen
has not been selected.
Stop key on the sample handler keypad was selected.
One of the processing queue access doors was opened while the sample
handler was running.
Ready Startup is complete.
Run key on the sample handler keypad was selected.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Table 1.5: SSH status types (continued)

Status Indicates
Load queue One of the following exists:
paused F7 - Pause on the Snapshot screen was selected.
Pause key on the sample handler keypad was selected.
60 seconds have elapsed without samples being loaded and a run initiated.
The sample unload queue is full.
functions:
Checks the load and processing queue bar code readers
Homes all moving parts on the sample handler
Starts the load and processing queue
Maintenance A maintenance procedure requiring use of the SSH is in process on a module.
LAS carousel sample handler status types (i 2000)
The LAS (laboratory automation system) carousel sample handler has

seven possible status types. The following table provides a description
of each.
Table 1.6: LAS carousel sample handler status types (i 2000)
Status Indicates
Power to the LAS carousel is off.
Power has been turned on, but communication between the LAS carousel and
SCC (system control center) has not been re-established.
Power to the LAS carousel is on, but F5 - Start-up on the Snapshot screen has
not been selected.
Stop key on the LAS carousel sample handler keypad was selected.
The LAS carousel cover was opened while the LAS carousel was running.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Table 1.6: LAS carousel sample handler status types (i 2000) (continued)
Status Indicates
Startup is complete.
All samples on the LAS carousel have completed.
Scheduled pause status is complete.
NOTE: The pause indicator illuminates.

Run key on the LAS carousel sample handler keypad was selected.
F7 - Pause on the Snapshot screen was selected.
Pause key on the LAS carousel sample handler keypad was selected.
functions:
Homes the LAS carousel sample handler
Checks the processing queue bar code reader
Maintenance A maintenance procedure requiring use of the LAS carousel is in process on a
module.
Processing module status

The processing module graphic(s) on the Snapshot screen indicates
the status of the processing module and displays other key system
information.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Figure 1.156: Processing module status
Processing module status types depend on the configuration of your

system. For a description of the various statuses, see:
Processing module status types (c System), page 1-161
Processing module status types (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-164
Processing module status types (c System)
The c System processing modules have nine possible status types. The
following table provides a description of each.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
See c System processing module status and associated tasks, page 1-163,
for a list of tasks that can be performed in each processing module
status.
Table 1.7: c System processing module status types
Status Indicates Prohibited activities
Offline One of the following exists: You cannot run samples on the module.
You cannot load or unload reagents
Power to the processing module is off.
Power has been turned on, but because the reagent supply center is
communication between the processing not aligned correctly.
module and SCC (system control
center) has not been re-established.
Communication between the processing
module and the SCC has been lost due
Stopped One of the following exists: You cannot run samples on the module.
Power to the processing module is on, You cannot load or unload reagents
but F5 - Start-up on the Snapshot because the reagent supply center is
screen has not been selected. not aligned correctly.
F6 - Stop on the Snapshot screen was
selected.
Stop key on the processing module
keypad was selected.
A processing module diagnostic
procedure has completed.
Processing module detected a fatal
error while processing.
Warming Startup is complete, but temperature You cannot run samples on the module.
initialization is not.
Startup is complete (including
temperature initialization).
Scheduled Pause status is complete.
F7 - Pause on the Snapshot screen was
selected.
Supplies ran out.
Processing module detected an error
while processing.
Running One of the following exists: You cannot open the reagent supply
F8 - Run on the Snapshot screen was center covers.
selected.
Run key on the processing module

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Table 1.7: c System processing module status types (continued)

Initializing A temporary status that occurs when the You cannot run samples on the module.
run key, F8 - Run, or F5 - Start-up is You cannot load or unload reagents
selected. because the reagent supply center is
The following initialization functions are not aligned correctly.
performed by the system:
Initialization after F5 - Start-up is
selected:
Homes motors
Initializes the reagent bar code
reader
Initialization after the run key or F8 - Run
is selected:
Checks cover sensors
Scans reagents
Washes probes
Checks inventory
Once initialization is complete, the status
changes to Running or Ready depending
on whether run or startup was selected.
Scanning A temporary status that occurs when F4 - You cannot run samples on the module.
Scan on the Reagent status screen is
selected. Once the scan is complete, the
status changes to Ready.
Maintenance A maintenance procedure is in process on You cannot run samples on the module.
the module.
Table 1.8: c System processing module status and associated tasks

O I W S Re Ru SP S M
Order samples Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes Yes* Yes* No
Initiate a run No No No No Yes No No No No
Load reagents** No No Yes No Yes No No No No
Load samples on sample carousel No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Load bulk solutions (Acid and Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No
Alkaline wash, and ICT reference)
Load onboard solutions Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes* Yes* Yes Yes
* *
Empty waste Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No
*Ordering QC and calibrations is not recommended because the

system cannot calculate the required sample volume unless the
processing module status is Running.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
**Check the keypad before performing the operations.

In the table above the processing module statuses listed across the top
are O (Offline), I (Initializing), W (Warming), S (Stopped), Re (Ready),
Ru (Running), SP (Scheduled Pause), S (Scanning), and M
(Maintenance).
Processing module status types (i 2000/i 2000SR)
The i 2000 and i 2000SR processing modules have nine possible status
types. The following table provides a description of each.
Table 1.9: i 2000 and i 2000SR processing module status types
Offline One of the following exists: You cannot run samples on the module.
You cannot load or unload reagents
Power to the processing module is off.
Power has been turned on, but because the reagent carousel is not
communication between the processing aligned correctly.
module and SCC (system control
center) has not been re-established.
Communication between the processing
module and the SCC has been lost due
Stopped One of the following exists: You cannot run samples on the module.
Power to the processing module is on You cannot load or unload reagents
but F5 - Start-up on the Snapshot because the reagent carousel is not
screen has not been selected. aligned correctly.
F6 - Stop on the Snapshot screen was
selected.
Stop key on the processing module
Processing module diagnostic
procedure has completed.
Processing module detected a fatal
error while processing.
Warming Startup is complete, but temperature You cannot run samples on the module.
initialization is not.
Startup is complete (including
temperature initialization).
Scheduled Pause status is complete.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Table 1.9: i 2000 and i 2000SR processing module status types (continued)
Scheduled pause One of the following exists: You cannot open the processing center
F7 - Pause on the Snapshot screen was covers.
selected.
Supplies ran out.
Processing module detected an error
while processing.
Running One of the following exists: You cannot open the processing center
F8 - Run on the Snapshot screen was covers.
selected.
Run key on the processing module
Initializing A temporary status that occurs when the You cannot run samples on the module.
run key, F8 - Run, or F5 - Start-up is You cannot load or unload reagents
selected. The following initialization because the reagent carousel is not
functions are performed by the system: aligned correctly.
Initialization after F5 - Start-up is You cannot load wash buffer.
selected:
Homes motors
Initializes the reagent bar code
reader
Fills the inner ring in the process path
with RVs (reaction vessels)
Clears RVs from the outer ring of the
process path
Initialization after the run key or F8 - Run
is selected:
Checks door sensors
Scans reagents and starts
microparticle dispersion
Washes probes
Checks inventory
Performs a background read
Once initialization is complete, the status
changes to Running or Ready depending
on whether run or startup was selected.
Scanning A temporary status that occurs when F4 - You cannot run samples on the module.
Scan on the Reagent status screen is
selected. Once the scan is complete, the
status changes to Ready.
Maintenance A maintenance procedure is in process on You cannot run samples on the module.
the module.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Automatic processing module activities Section 1
Automatic processing module activities

Periodically, fluids are pumped through various processing module
components to remove air or bubbles. It is important to ensure that
enough onboard inventory to perform these automatic flushes and
primes is available.
Automatic processing module activity topics include:
System flush (c System), page 1-166
System flush (i System), page 1-167
System prime (i System), page 1-168
Processing module wash (c System), page 1-168
Automatic rotation of reagent supply center(s) (c System), page 1-168
System flush (c System)

A system flush is an automated process used to remove bubbles that
may be present. Periodic flushes are performed at the beginning of a
run on all pipettors by pumping Reagent Grade Type ll water through
the probes into the wash cups. The periodic flushes occur:
When you start up the system after powering on
Every eight hours if the processing module status is Running and
there are no tests in process
NOTE: Performing the 2132 Flush Water Line maintenance
procedure does not reset the clock for the automatic flush.
ICT Reference Solution, Alkaline Wash, and Acid Wash are used to
perform the automatic flushes that occur when you initiate a run after
replacing a bulk solution(s).
Each c 8000 flush requires:
2750 L of reference solution
60 L of alkaline wash solution
40 L of acid wash solution
Each c 16000 flush requires:
2750 L of reference solution
120 L of alkaline wash solution
80 L of acid wash solution

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1 Automatic processing module activities
NOTE: Performing the 2155 Flush Bulk Solution maintenance

procedure does not reset the clock for the automatic flush.
System flush (i System)

A system flush is an automated process used to remove bubbles that
may be present. Periodic flushes are performed on all pipettors by
pumping wash buffer through the pipettor probes into the wash
stations. The wash zones and the pre-trigger/trigger manifold are
flushed by pumping fluid through a bypass valve and into the waste
line.
Wash buffer, Pre-Trigger Solution, and Trigger Solution are used to
perform the automatic flushes that occur:
When you start up the system after powering on
Every eight hours when the processing module status is:
Ready and the processing module covers are closed, or
Running and no tests are in process
NOTE: Performing the 2130 Flush Fluids maintenance procedure

does not reset the clock for the automatic flush.
When you initiate a run after replacing a solution(s)
If the system is idle for an extended period of time, for example over a
weekend (48 hours), you need to ensure there is enough inventory for
all flushes that will take place. Each flush requires:
460 mL of wash buffer (i 2000)
522 mL of wash buffer (i 2000SR)
14 mL of pre-trigger
14 mL of trigger
In a 48 hour period, for example, there are six flushes. Therefore, the
required inventory is:
2.76 L of wash buffer (i 2000)
3.13 L of wash buffer (i 2000SR)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Automatic processing module activities Section 1
84 mL of pre-trigger
84 mL of trigger
System prime (i System)

A prime is the process the system uses to dispense solutions into RVs
(reaction vessels) to ensure the fluidics system is primed. The system
periodically primes to remove air from the wash zone, pre-trigger, and
trigger delivery nozzles. Priming pumps fluid through the delivery
nozzles and into an RV. The RV is then automatically discarded.
Prime occurs automatically when you initiate a run.
Processing module wash (c System)

Processing module wash is the process that cleans hardware
components that come into contact with reagents and samples.
The following table describes the wash solutions used for each
hardware component.
Component Wash
Reagents and Washed with Reagent Grade Type ll water during
sample probes analysis
Additional washes with alkaline, acid, or detergent wash
solutions may be performed if SmartWash is required per
assay setting definition
Washed with Detergent A automatically at regular
intervals
Cuvette segments Washed with Reagent Grade Type ll water and alkaline
and acid wash solutions before and after each use
Mixers Washed with Reagent Grade Type ll water during
analysis
Washed with detergent A automatically at regular
intervals
Automatic rotation of reagent supply center(s) (c System)

Automatic rotation of reagent supply center 2 for the c 8000 and
reagent supply centers 1 and 2 for the c 16000 is a programmed

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1 Automatic processing module activities
rotation used to stabilize the carousel temperature. The reagent supply

center automatically rotates 1/2 turn every 10 minutes when the cover
is closed and the processing module is in Ready or Running (idle)
status.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Installation procedures and special requirements
Section 2
Introduction
<F=0>
To ensure accurate results and maximum performance, your

ARCHITECT System must be properly installed. After the system has
been installed, you must configure it to meet your site's specific
requirements.
Installation procedures and special requirements topics include:
System installation or relocation, page 2-2
Describes the steps for installing or relocating the system.
System configuration, page 2-4
Provides a description of all configuration screens and windows,
and step-by-step instructions for performing configuration
procedures.
Software installation and backup, page 2-209
Provides a description of all software installation and backup
screens and windows, and step-by-step instructions for
performing installation and backup procedures.
Assay file management, page 2-214
Describes how to install new assay files.
Maintenance and diagnostic file management, page 2-218
Describes how to install new maintenance and diagnostic
procedure files.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
System installation or relocation Section 2
System installation or relocation

Installation of the ARCHITECT System is a team effort involving
Abbott customer support and the Abbott field service representative.
System installation or relocation topics include:
System installation, page 2-2
System checkout, page 2-2
System relocation, page 2-3
System installation
Prior to installation the Abbott field service representative ensures the
site is prepared.
The location must meet environmental specifications and electrical
requirements before the system can be installed. For additional
information, see Specifications and requirements, page 4-3.
CAUTION: The Abbott field service representative unpacks,
positions, and installs the ARCHITECT System, and unpacks
the accessory kits that accompany the system. Do not
attempt to unpack or install the ARCHITECT System.
NOTE: Do not position the ARCHITECT System in direct sunlight.

For additional information on items included in the accessory kit, see
Accessory kit list numbers (c 8000), page Appendix D-4, Accessory kit list
numbers (c 16000), page Appendix D-7, or Accessory kit list number (i
System), page Appendix D-10.
During installation, the Abbott field service representative performs
system preparation and checkout.
System checkout
After you position and install the ARCHITECT System, you should
perform the following to ensure that the system operates properly:
Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214
Configuring system settings, page 2-6
Configuring Abbott assays, page 2-70
Configuring user-defined assays, page 2-83
Configuring QC - Cal settings, page 2-176

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 2 System installation or relocation
Order and calibrate assays

Order and run controls
Perform testing specific to your site requirements
System relocation
For information on relocating your ARCHITECT System, contact your
Abbott field service representative.
WARNING: Potential Biohazard. Before the system can be
moved or shipped, decontamination is required. For more
information, see Decontamination procedure requirements,
page 8-13.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
System configuration Section 2
System configuration
Configuration settings define the information the ARCHITECT System
needs to meet your site's specific requirements. You perform system
configuration at installation and may reconfigure the system at any
time, if necessary.
You access windows to configure system, assay, and QC - Cal settings
from the Configuration screen. Access to these windows is controlled
by logon. The system administrator logon allows you to access
configuration windows to change most configurable items. The
general operator logon allows you to:
View configured settings
Configure host-release mode options
Re-initialize communication with the standard LAS sample
handler
For more information on logons, see User logon, page 1-21.
System configuration topics include:
Configuration screen - Assay settings view, page 2-65
Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view, page 2-174
Configuration screen - System settings view

From the System settings view of the Configuration screen the general
operator can access windows to view detailed information for
configured system settings.
The system administrator can access windows to configure these
settings, which include:
Sample ordering
Host - Release mode
Reports - Printing
Reagents - Supplies
Password
System control center
Modules
Sample handler

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 2 System configuration
Sample bar code reader

Serial ports
Figure 2.1: Configuration screen - System settings view
For descriptions of these fields, see Configuration screen - System settings

view field descriptions, page Appendix E-134.
To display this view of the screen, see Access the Configuration screen -
System settings view, page 2-5.
Viewing system settings, page 2-9
Changing system settings, page 2-20
Access the Configuration screen - System settings view
Perform this procedure to display the System settings view of the

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To access the Configuration screen - System settings view:

Select System from the menu bar, and then select Configuration.
The Configuration screen - System settings view displays.
Procedures - Configuration screen - System settings view
Procedures you can perform from the Configuration screen - System

settings view and its related windows are grouped by task:
Viewing system settings, page 2-9
Changing system settings, page 2-20
Configuring system settings
Procedures for configuring system settings include:

Configure host interface settings, page 2-6
Configure report settings, page 2-7
Configure a QC run definition, page 2-8
Configure host interface settings
Perform this procedure to configure the host interface settings for

release mode, communications, and transmitting results to the host.
page 2-5
Module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready (Exceptions are noted)
Supplies NA
To configure host interface settings:

1. Select Host - Release mode from the System categories list on
the Configuration screen.
The Configure host-release mode window displays.
3. Select the desired Bidirectional host option.
NOTE: You can configure this value in any system status.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Turning Bidirectional host off allows you to clear all results

waiting to be sent to the host.
4. Enter the timeout interval (in seconds) in the Host query

timeout data entry box. (optional)
NOTE: You can configure this value in any system status. System
throughput may be degraded if the time interval is greater than
10 seconds.
5. Select the desired Error code number and text option.
6. Select the desired Release and Transmit options for patient and
QC results.
Configure host - release mode window, page 2-40
Configure report settings
Perform this procedure to configure the settings for printing flags on

reports and automatic report printing, and to specify the text to print
in the report header for the Sample Report and Patient Report.
page 2-5
Module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
Supplies NA
To configure report settings:

1. Select Reports - Printing from the System categories list on the
The Configure reports-printing window displays.
3. Select the Off option for the Print flags on reports setting.
(optional)
NOTE: The CNTL (control), EXP (expired), EXPC (expired

calibration curve) (c System only), and EDIT (c System only) flags
print on the sample and patient reports whether the feature is
turned on or off.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
4. Select the On option for the following automatic report printing

settings:
Maintenance - A Procedure report prints after a maintenance
procedure completes, if a report is available. (optional)
Sample - The Sample Report prints after all tests for a sample
complete and the results are released. (optional)
Results list - The Results List Report prints after 24 results
complete and are released or 10 minutes have elapsed.
(optional)
Calibration curve results - A Cal Curve Detail report prints
after a calibration completes. (optional)
5. Enter the desired report header information in the Header for

sample and patient reports data entry boxes. (optional)
Configure reports printing window, page 2-42
Cal Curve Details Report - Potentiometric (c System), page Appendix
A-19
Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c System), page Appendix A-22
Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor/Blank (c System),
page Appendix A-25
Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i System), page Appendix A-28
Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System), page Appendix A-31
Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i System), page Appendix A-34
Patient Report, page Appendix A-55
Procedure Report, Basic, page Appendix A-57
Procedure Report, Columnar, page Appendix A-59
Results List Report, page Appendix A-80
Sample Report, page Appendix A-82
Configure a QC run definition
Perform this procedure to define a run period for the evaluation of

Westgard rules. The run definition should be configured when you

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
enable Westgard rules 2-2s 1R 1M, 2-2s 1R xM, 2-2s xR 1M, 4-1s 1M, or
4-1s xM.
To configure Westgard rules, see Configure a Westgard rule, page 2-181.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To configure a QC run definition:

1. Select System control center from the System categories list on
The Configure system control center window displays.
3. Enter the start time in the QC run definition Start time data
entry box.
4. Enter the number of hours per run in the QC run definition No.
of hours per run data entry box.
Configure system control center window, page 2-48
Viewing system settings
Procedures for viewing system settings include:

View the batch sample ordering type, page 2-10
View average number of tests per sample setting (multi-module i
System), page 2-10
View the host communication settings, page 2-11
View the automatic report printing setting, page 2-12
View the option for printing flags on reports, page 2-13
View the report header text, page 2-13
View the system low alert setting for reagent kits, page 2-14
View the system language setting, page 2-14
View the screen timeout setting, page 2-15

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
View the date and time settings, page 2-15

View the sample bar code settings, page 2-16
View the LIS serial port settings, page 2-17
View the LAS serial port settings, page 2-17
View the onboard solution options (c System), page 2-18
View the wash buffer transfer option (i System), page 2-18
View the LAS timeout setting, page 2-19
View the STAT protocol percentage (i 2000SR), page 2-19
View the option for running controls for onboard reagent kits,
page 2-20
View the batch sample ordering type
Perform this procedure to display the Details for sample ordering

window. From this window you can view the batch sample type. The
type depends on whether the samples for the batch are bar code
labeled.
page 2-5
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the batch sample ordering type:

1. Select Sample ordering from the System categories list on the
2. Select F5 - Details.
The Details for sample ordering window displays.
Details for sample ordering window, page 2-39

System)
Perform this procedure to display the Details for sample ordering

window. From this window you can view the setting for the average

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
number of tests per sample, which is used to optimize the scheduling

of tests for each module.
page 2-5
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the average number of tests per sample:

1. Select Sample ordering from the System categories list on the
The Details for sample ordering window displays.
View the host communication settings
Perform this procedure to display the Details for host - release mode
window. From this window you can view the current settings for host
communication which include the release mode, communication
type, and result reporting to a host computer.
page 2-5
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the host communication settings:

1. Select Host - Release mode from the System categories list on
The Details for host - release mode window displays.
Details for host - release mode window, page 2-41

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
View the automatic report printing setting
Perform this procedure to display the Details for reports printing

window. From this window you can view the current settings for
automatic printing of the Procedure, Sample, Results List, and Cal
Curve Details reports.
page 2-5
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the automatic report printing setting:

The Details for reports printing window displays.
Details for reports printing window, page 2-43
A-19
page Appendix A-25

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
View the option for printing flags on reports

printing flags on Sample and Patient reports.
page 2-5
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the options for printing flags on reports:

View the report header text

window. From this window you can view the current text for the
report header that prints on the Sample and Patient reports.
page 2-5
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the report header text:


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
View the system low alert setting for reagent kits
Perform this procedure to display the Details for reagents - supplies

window. From this window you can view the current level at which
the system low alert notification occurs.
To view the reagent-specific low alert setting, see View the
reagent-specific low alert setting (c System), page 2-105.
page 2-5
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the system low alert setting for reagent kits:

1. Select Reagents - Supplies from the System categories list on
The Details for reagents - supplies window displays.
Details for reagents - supplies window, page 2-46
View the system language setting
Perform this procedure to display the Details for system control center
window. From this window you can view the current setting for the
system language.
page 2-5
Module status Any
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To view the system language setting:

The Details for system control center window displays.
Details for system control center window, page 2-49
View the screen timeout setting
screen timeout.
page 2-5
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the screen timeout setting:

View the date and time settings
window. From this window you can view the current settings for the
system date, date format, time, time zone, and automatic adjustment
for daylight savings time.
page 2-5
Module status Any

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Supplies NA
To view the date and time settings:

View the sample bar code settings
Perform this procedure to display the Details for bar codes window.
From this window you can view the current settings for sample bar
codes.
page 2-5
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the sample bar code settings:

1. Select Sample bar code reader from the System categories list
on the Configuration screen.
The Details for bar codes window displays.
3. Select the Bar code type list button, and then select the desired
bar code type.
Details for bar codes window, page 2-63

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
View the LIS serial port settings
Perform this procedure to display the Details for serial ports window.
From this window you can view the current settings for the system's
communications ports for the LIS (laboratory information system).
page 2-5
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the LIS serial port settings:

1. Select Serial ports from the System categories list on the
The Details for serial ports window displays.
3. Select the Port type list button, and then select LIS.
Details for serial ports window, page 2-65
View the LAS serial port settings
Perform this procedure to display the Details for serial ports window.
From this window you can view the current settings for the system's
communications ports for the LAS (laboratory automation system).
page 2-5
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the LAS serial port settings:

The Details for serial ports window displays.
3. Select the Port type list button, and then select LAS.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
View the onboard solution options (c System)

window. From this window you can view the current position and
cartridge size for onboard solutions.
page 2-5
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the onboard solution options:

The Details for reagent - supplies window displays.
View the wash buffer transfer option (i System)

wash buffer transfer option.
page 2-5
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the wash buffer transfer option:


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
View the LAS timeout setting
Perform this procedure to display the Details for sample handler

window. From this window you can view the current settings for the
LAS (laboratory automation system) sample handler timeout setting.
page 2-5
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the LAS timeout setting:

1. Select Sample handler from the System categories list on the
The Details for sample handler window displays.
Details for sample handler window (LAS - standard), page 2-60
View the STAT protocol percentage (i 2000SR)
Perform this procedure to access the Details for modules window.

From this window you can view the current settings for the percentage
of STAT protocols run on the ARCHITECT i 2000SR System. This option
defines the number of reaction vessel positions allocated for STAT
assay protocols. If this percentage does not reflect the actual number
of STAT protocols run, throughput may be decreased.
page 2-5
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the STAT protocol percentage:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
1. Select Modules from the System categories list on the

The Details for modules window displays.
3. Select the list button, and then select Module 2 if you have an
integrated system.
Details for modules window (i 2000SR), page 2-55
View the option for running controls for onboard reagent kits

window. From this window you can view the current option for
running controls for onboard reagent kits.
page 2-5
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the option for running controls for onboard reagent kits:
Changing system settings
Procedures for changing system settings include:

Change the batch sample ordering type, page 2-21
Change the automatic report printing settings, page 2-22
Change the option for printing flags, page 2-23
Change the report header text, page 2-24

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Change the system low alert setting for reagent kits, page 2-24
Change the system language setting, page 2-25
Change the screen timeout setting, page 2-26
Change the date and time settings, page 2-27
Change automatic repositioning for retest setting (RSH), page 2-28
Change the sample bar code settings for codabar, page 2-28
Change the sample bar code settings for code 39, page 2-29
Change the sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5, page 2-30
Change the LIS serial port settings, page 2-31
Change the LAS serial port settings, page 2-32
Change the onboard solution options (c 8000), page 2-33
Optimize throughput on a multi-module i System, page 2-35
Change the LAS timeout settings and reinitialize communications,
page 2-35
Change the STAT protocol percentage (i 2000SR), page 2-36
Change the option for running controls for onboard reagent kits,
page 2-37
Change the batch sample ordering type
Perform this procedure to change the batch sample ordering type for
bar coded or non-bar coded samples. The batch ordering type
determines the fields that display on the Patient order screen - Batch
view.
page 2-5
No batch orders pending
Supplies NA
To change the batch sample ordering type:

1. Select F6 - Configure on the Configuration screen.
The Configure sample ordering window displays.
2. Select the desired Batch ordering option.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Configure sample ordering window, page 2-39
Change the automatic report printing settings
Perform this procedure to enable or disable automatic printing of the

Procedure, Sample, Results List, and Cal Curve Details reports.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the automatic report printing settings:

The Configure reports printing window displays.
3. Select the desired Automatic report printing option(s) for:

Maintenance - A Procedure report prints after a maintenance
procedure completes, if a report is available.
Sample - The Sample Report prints after all tests for a sample
complete and the results are released.
Results list - The Results List Report prints after 18 results
complete and are released or 10 minutes have elapsed.
Calibration curve results - A Cal Curve Detail report prints
after a calibration completes.
A-19

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

page Appendix A-25
Change the option for printing flags
Perform this procedure to enable or disable the printing of flags on the

Sample and Patient reports.
NOTE: The CNTL (control), EXP (expired), EXPC (expired calibration

curve) (c System only), and EDIT (c System only) flags print on the
sample and patient reports whether the feature is turned on or off.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the options for printing flags:

3. Select the desired Print flags on reports option.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Change the report header text
Perform this procedure to change the text that displays in the report
header on the Sample and Patient reports.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the report header text:

3. Enter the desired report header information in the Header for

sample and patient reports data entry boxes.
NOTE: Each field on the screen represents one line of the report
header (approximately 50 characters per line).
Change the system low alert setting for reagent kits
Perform this procedure to change the level at which the system low
alert notification occurs.
To change the level at which the low alert notification occurs for a
specific reagent, see Change the reagent-specific low alert setting (c
System), page 2-121.
page 2-5
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To change the system low alert setting for reagent kits:

The Configure reagents - supplies window displays.
3. Enter the desired alert level (number of tests left) in the Default
reagent low alert data entry box.
Configure reagents - supplies window, page 2-44
Change the system language setting
Perform this procedure to change the language for the system.
NOTE: Messages in the Temporary message and Message history logs

remain in the language in which they were generated. If you change
the system language to or from Japanese, previously generated
messages may display for some characters.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the system language setting:

3. Select the System language list button, and then select the
desired language.
4. Select Done.
A prompt displays to notify you that the SCC will shut down
and restart to change the language.
5. Select OK to shut down the SCC.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
6. Wait for the SCC to cycle through shutdown.
7. Power on the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-7.
NOTE: If your system is configured with the bar code scanner,

you must modify the keyboard language to match the system
language. See the ARCHITECT Bar Code Scanner User's Guide or
the ARCHITECT and AxSYM Bar Code Scanner User's Guide for
instructions.
Change the screen timeout setting
Perform this procedure to change the setting for the screen timeout.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the screen timeout setting:

3. Enter the desired screen timeout in the Screen timeout data

entry box.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Change the date and time settings
Perform this procedure to change the date and time settings.

page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the date and time settings:

3. Enter the date using the current format in the System date data
entry box.
4. Enter the time in the System time data entry box.

The system time displays in a 24-hour format.
5. Select the desired Date format option.
NOTE: When you edit this field, the new format does not
display in the System date field until you select Done and access
the window again.
6. Select the Time zone list button, and then select the desired
time zone.
7. Select the Automatically adjust clock for daylight savings

check box. (optional)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Change automatic repositioning for retest setting (RSH)
Perform this procedure to change the settings that determine whether

the RSH (robotic sample handler) automatically repositions patient
samples for retest.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change automatic repositioning for retest setting:

The Configure sample handler window displays.
3. Select the desired Retest option.
Configure sample handler window (RSH), page 2-56
Change the sample bar code settings for codabar
Perform this procedure to change the sample bar code settings for
codabar.
To change bar code settings for code 39, see Change the sample bar code
settings for code 39, page 2-29.
To change bar code settings for I 2 of 5, see Change the sample bar code
settings for I 2 of 5, page 2-30.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the sample bar code settings for codabar:


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The Configure bar codes window displays.
3. Select the Bar code type list button, and then select Codabar.
4. Select the desired Bar code type option to either enable or

disable the bar code type.
5. Select the desired Checksums option.
6. Select the Send checksum digits to the SCC check box, if you
enabled Checksums. (optional)
7. Select the Send the start / stop characters to the SCC check
box, if you enabled Checksums. (optional)
Configure bar codes window, page 2-62
Change the sample bar code settings for code 39
Perform this procedure to change the sample bar code settings for
code 39.
To change bar code settings for I 2 of 5, see Change the sample bar code
settings for I 2 of 5, page 2-30.
To change bar code settings for codabar, see Change the sample bar code
settings for codabar, page 2-28.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the sample bar code settings for code 39:



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Change the sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5
Perform this procedure to change the sample bar code settings for I 2
of 5.
To change bar code settings for code 39, Change the sample bar code
settings for code 39, page 2-29.
To change bar code settings for codabar, see Change the sample bar code
settings for codabar, page 2-28.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5:

3. Select the Bar code type list button, and then select I 2 of 5.

7. Enter a value in the Code length #1 data entry box.
8. Enter a value in the Code length #2 data entry box. (optional)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Change the LIS serial port settings
Perform this procedure to change the LIS (laboratory information

system) serial port settings.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the LIS serial port settings:

The Configure serial ports window displays.
3. Select the Port type list button, and then select LIS.
4. Select the Baud rate list button, and then select the desired
value.
5. Select the desired Parity option.
6. Select the desired Data bits option.
7. Select the desired Stop bits option.
8. Select Done.
A confirmation message displays.
9. Select OK to save your changes.

The serial port changes take effect the next time the system
control center power is cycled.
To cycle power to the system control center, see Cycle power to the SCC,
page 5-5.
Configure serial ports window, page 2-64

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Change the LAS serial port settings
Perform this procedure to change the LAS (laboratory automation

system) serial port settings.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the LAS serial port settings:

The Configure serial ports window displays.
3. Select the Port type list button, and then select LAS.
4. Select the Baud rate list button, and then select the desired
value.
5. Select the desired Parity option.
6. Select the desired Data bits option.
7. Select the desired Stop bits option.
8. Select Done.

The serial port changes take effect the next time the system
control center power is cycled.
To cycle power to the system control center, see Cycle power to the SCC,
page 5-5.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Change the onboard solution options (c 8000)
Perform this procedure to change the position and cartridge size for
onboard solutions located in the reagent onboard solutions area.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the onboard solution options:

3. Select the Position (R1 & R2) E1 solution list button, and then
select the desired solution.
NOTE: You cannot select the same solution in more than one
position.
4. Select the Position (R1 & R2) E2 solution list button, and then
select the desired solution.
5. Select the Position (R1) D1 solution list button, and then select
the desired solution.
NOTE: When selected, the same solution name appears for

position (R2) D1 solution.
6. Select the Position (R1) D1 size list button, and then select the
desired cartridge size.
7. Select the Position (R2) D1 size list button, and then select the
desired cartridge size.
Onboard solution areas (c 8000), page 1-38

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Change the onboard solution options (c 16000)
Perform this procedure to change the position and cartridge size for
onboard solutions located in the reagent onboard solutions area.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the onboard solution options:

3. Select the Position (R1 & R2) C1,D1 solution list button, select
the desired solution, and then select the desired cartridge size.
position.
4. Select the Position (R1 & R2) C2,D2 solution list button, select
the desired solution, and then select the desired cartridge size.
position.
5. Select the Position (R1 & R2) C3 solution list button, select the
desired solution, and then select the desired cartridge size.
6. Select the Position (R1 & R2) D3 solution list button, select the
desired solution, and then select the desired cartridge size.
Onboard solution areas (c 16000), page 1-58

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Optimize throughput on a multi-module i System
Perform this procedure to change the configured setting for average

number of tests per sample.
NOTE: If the default setting for Average number of tests per sample
does not reflect actual laboratory conditions, editing this setting can
improve throughput.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To optimize throughput on a multi-module i System:

1. Select F6 - Configure from the Configuration screen.
The Configure sample ordering window displays.
2. Enter the number of tests per sample in the Average number of

tests data entry box.
Change the LAS timeout settings and reinitialize communications
Perform this procedure to change the LAS (laboratory automation

system) timeout settings and reinitialize communications when you
are setting up a standard LAS interface or when one of the following
error codes occurs:
8263 - Invalid recovery type
8359 - Time out exceeded on message sent to LAS
8360 - Maximum number of consecutive LAS message timeouts
and/or LAS <NAK> messages exceeded
8361 - LAS message communication error
8464 - LAS initialization communication failed
page 2-5

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Supplies NA
To change the LAS timeout settings and reinitialize communications:

3. Enter the desired value in the Initialization timeout data entry

box.
4. Enter the desired value in the Response timeout data entry box.
5. Select the Send communications message to LAS checkbox to

send a reinitialize communications message to the LAS.
(optional)
6. Select Done to send a communications message to the LAS.

7. Select OK to save your changes and send a communications

message to the LAS.
Configure sample handler window (LAS - standard), page 2-59
Change the STAT protocol percentage (i 2000SR)
Perform this procedure to change the percentage of STAT protocols for

the ARCHITECT i 2000SR System. This option defines the number of
reaction vessel positions allocated for STAT assay protocols. If this
percentage does not reflect the actual number of STAT protocols run,
throughput may be decreased.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the STAT protocol percentage:


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The Configure modules window displays.
3. Select the Module list button, and then select the i 2000SR
module.
4. Select the desired STAT protocol percentage option.
Configure modules window (i 2000SR), page 2-54
Change the option for running controls for onboard reagent kits
Perform this procedure to change the option for running controls for
onboard reagents.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the option for running controls for onboard reagents:

1. Select Reagents-Supplies from the System categories list on the
The Configure reagents-supplies window displays.
3. Select the desired Run controls for onboard reagents by option

for:
Lot: Run QC on only one kit per lot
Kit: Run QC for every kit in a lot
NOTE: Controls for constituents of calculated assays are

automatically run on one kit on one module (selected by the
system software) regardless of the option selected.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Windows - Configuration screen - System settings view
Windows you can access from the Configuration screen - System

settings view include:
Configure password window, page 2-47
Details for password window, page 2-48
Configure modules window (c System), page 2-50
Details for modules window (c System), page 2-51
Configure modules window (i 2000), page 2-52
Details for modules window (i 2000), page 2-53
Configure modules window (i 2000SR), page 2-54
Details for modules window (i 2000SR), page 2-55
Configure sample handler window (RSH), page 2-56
Details for sample handler window (RSH), page 2-57
Details for sample handler window (SSH), page 2-58
Details for sample handler window (LAS - standard), page 2-60
Details for sample handler window (LAS - Hitachi), page 2-61
Details for bar codes window, page 2-63

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Configure sample ordering window
From the Configure sample ordering window the system administrator

can configure settings for batch ordering, calibration override (c
System), and average tests per sample (multi-module i System).
Figure 2.2: Configure sample ordering window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure sample ordering window

field descriptions, page Appendix E-135.
Optimize throughput on a multi-module i System, page 2-35
Details for sample ordering window
From the Details for sample ordering window you can view the
current settings for batch ordering, calibration expiration override (c
System), and average test(s) per sample (multi-module i System).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.3: Details for sample ordering window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for sample ordering window
View the batch sample ordering type, page 2-10
System), page 2-10
Configure host - release mode window
From the Configure host - release mode window the system

administrator can configure the settings for release mode,
communication type, and result reporting to a host computer.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.4: Configure host - release mode window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure host - release mode window
Configure host interface settings, page 2-6
Cancel result transmission, page 5-268
Details for host - release mode window
From the Details for host - release mode window you can view the
current settings for release mode, communication type, and result
reporting to a host computer.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.5: Details for host - release mode window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for host - release mode window
View the host communication settings, page 2-11
Configure reports printing window
From the Configure reports printing window the system administrator

can configure the settings for printing flags on reports, automatic
report printing, and specify the text to print in the report header.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.6: Configure reports printing window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure reports printing window

Configure report settings, page 2-7
Change the option for printing flags, page 2-23
Change the automatic report printing settings, page 2-22
Change the report header text, page 2-24
Details for reports printing window
From the Details for reports printing window you can view the current
settings for printing flags on reports and automatic report printing,
and the text for the report header.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.7: Details for reports printing window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for reports printing window
View the option for printing flags on reports, page 2-13
View the automatic report printing setting, page 2-12
View the report header text, page 2-13
Configure reagents - supplies window
From the Configure reagents - supplies window the system

administrator can configure the settings for:
Reagent options
Default reagent low alert
Reagent expiration and stability override
Run controls by reagent lot or reagent kit
Supply options
Wash and detergent solutions (c System)
Cartridge size (c System)
Wash buffer transfer (i System)
Pre-Trigger and Trigger stability override (i System)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.8: Configure reagents - supplies window (i System, c 8000)
Figure 2.9: Configure reagents - supplies window (i System, c 16000)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure reagents - supplies window

Change the system low alert setting for reagent kits, page 2-24
Change the wash buffer transfer option, page 10-711

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Change the option for running controls for onboard reagent kits,
page 2-37
Details for reagents - supplies window
From the Details for reagents - supplies window you can view the
current settings for reagent options including:
Default reagent low alert
Reagent expiration and stability override
Run controls by reagent lot or reagent kit
You can also view the current settings for supply options including:
Wash and detergent solution (c System)
Cartridge size (c System)
Wash buffer transfer (i System)
Pre-Trigger and Trigger stability override (i System)
Figure 2.10: Details for reagents - supplies window (i System, c 8000)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.11: Details for reagents - supplies window (i System, c 16000)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for reagents - supplies window
View the system low alert setting for reagent kits, page 2-14
View the onboard solution options (c System), page 2-18
View the wash buffer transfer option (i System), page 2-18
View the option for running controls for onboard reagent kits,
page 2-20
Configure password window
From the Configure password window the system administrator can

configure the system administrator password.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.12: Configure password window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure password window field

descriptions, page Appendix E-144.
Details for password window
From the Details for password window the system administrator can
view the current system administrator password.
Figure 2.13: Details for password window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for password window field
Configure system control center window
From the Configure system control center window the system

administrator can configure the settings for the SCC (system control
center), which include:
System date, date format, time, time zone, and automatic
adjustment for daylight savings time

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Number format for thousands separator

System language
Screen timeout
QC run definition
Beep volume
Figure 2.14: Configure system control center window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure system control center

window field descriptions, page Appendix E-145.
Change the date and time settings, page 2-27
Change the system language setting, page 2-25
Configure a QC run definition, page 2-8
Change the screen timeout setting, page 2-26
Details for system control center window
From the Details for system control center window you can view the
current settings for the SCC (system control center), which include:
System date, date format, time, time zone, and automatic
adjustment for daylight savings time
Number format for thousands separator
System language

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Screen timeout
QC run definition
Beep volume
Figure 2.15: Details for system control center
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for system control center
View the system language setting, page 2-14
View the date and time settings, page 2-15
View the screen timeout setting, page 2-15
Configure modules window (c System)
From the Configure modules window the system administrator can:

Enable / disable the sample saving mode
Configure the module to run with an ICT module
Configure the module to run with the high concentration waste
bottle

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.16: Configure modules window (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure modules window (c System)

Enable or disable the ICT module (c System), page 10-700
Details for modules window (c System)
From the Details for modules window you can view the current
settings for:
Serial number of the processing module
Sample saving mode
You can also view whether the system is configured to run with the
ICT (integrated chip technology) module and / or the
high-concentration waste bottle.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.17: Details for modules window (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for modules window (c

System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-148.
Configure modules window (i 2000)
From the Configure modules window the system administrator can

enter the:
Optics normalization value
Linearity value

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.18: Configure modules window (i 2000)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure modules window (i 2000)

Details for modules window (i 2000)
settings for:
Serial number for the processing module
Optics normalization and linearity values

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.19: Details for modules window (i 2000)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for modules window (i 2000)
Configure modules window (i 2000SR)
From the Configure modules window the system administrator can:

Enter the optics normalization and linearity values
Select the STAT protocol percentage

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.20: Configure modules window (i 2000SR)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure modules window (i 2000SR)

Change the STAT protocol percentage (i 2000SR), page 2-36
Details for modules window (i 2000SR)
settings for:
Serial number of the processing module
Optics normalization and linearity values
STAT protocol percentage

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.21: Details for modules window (i 2000SR)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for modules window (i 2000SR)
View the STAT protocol percentage (i 2000SR), page 2-19
Configure sample handler window (RSH)
From the Configure sample handler window the system administrator

can enable or disable the sample handler to automatically reposition
samples for retest.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.22: Configure sample handler window (RSH)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure sample handler window

(RSH) field descriptions, page Appendix E-151.
Details for sample handler window (RSH)
From the Details for sample handler window you can view the current
settings for:
Sample handler type
Sample handler serial number
Automatic repositioning of samples for retest

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.23: Details for sample handler window (RSH)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for sample handler window
(RSH) field descriptions, page Appendix E-151.
Details for sample handler window (SSH)
settings for the sample handler type and sample handler serial
number.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.24: Details for sample handler window (SSH)
(SSH) field descriptions, page Appendix E-152.
Configure sample handler window (LAS - standard)
From the Configure sample handler window you can:

Edit the value for initialization timeout
Edit the value for response timeout
Send a communication message to the LAS (laboratory
automation system) to re-initialize communication

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.25: Configure sample handler window (LAS - standard)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure sample handler window

(LAS - standard) field descriptions, page Appendix E-152.
Change the LAS timeout settings and reinitialize communications,
page 2-35
Details for sample handler window (LAS - standard)
settings for:
Sample handler type
Carousel serial number
LAS (laboratory automation system) interface type
LAS interface initialization timeout and response time

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.26: Details for sample handler window (LAS - standard)
(LAS - standard) field descriptions, page Appendix E-152.
View the LAS timeout setting, page 2-19
Details for sample handler window (LAS - Hitachi)
settings for:
Sample handler type
Carousel serial number
LAS (laboratory automation system) interface type

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.27: Details for sample handler window (LAS - Hitachi)
(LAS - Hitachi) field descriptions, page Appendix E-153.
Configure bar codes window
From the Configure bar codes window the system administrator can
enable or disable bar code types and, depending on the type, can
configure:
Checksums
Send checksum digits to the SCC (system control center)
Send the start / stop characters to the SCC
Code length #1
Code length #2

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.28: Configure bar codes window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure bar codes window field
Change the sample bar code settings for codabar, page 2-28
Change the sample bar code settings for code 39, page 2-29
Change the sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5, page 2-30
Details for bar codes window
From the Details for bar codes window, depending on the bar code
type selected, you can view the current settings for:
Bar code type
Checksums
Send checksum digits to the SCC (system control center)
Send the start / stop characters to the SCC
Code length #1
Code length #2

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.29: Details for bar codes window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for bar codes window field
View the sample bar code settings, page 2-16
Configure serial ports window
From the Configure serial ports window the system administrator can
configure communication settings for the serial ports.
Figure 2.30: Configure serial ports window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure serial ports window field
Change the LIS serial port settings, page 2-31
Change the LAS serial port settings, page 2-32

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Details for serial ports window
From the Details for serial ports window you can view the current
communication settings for the port types.
Figure 2.31: Details for serial ports window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for serial ports window field
View the LIS serial port settings, page 2-17
View the LAS serial port settings, page 2-17
Configuration screen - Assay settings view

From the Assay settings view of the Configuration screen you can
configure settings associated with assays. The display of this view is
dependent on your selection from the Assay categories list:
Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view,
page 2-65
Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view, page 2-67
Import assay window, page 2-69
Export assay window, page 2-70
Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view
From the Assay settings - Assay parameters view of the Configuration

screen the general operator can access windows to view detailed
information for configured assay settings.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay parameters
CC reagent settings
New assay
Result units
Panel definitions
Retest rules
Figure 2.32: Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters

view
For descriptions of these fields, see Configuration screen - Assay settings -

Assay parameters view field descriptions, page Appendix E-158.
Assay settings - Assay parameters view, page 2-67.
Changing assay configuration settings, page 2-107
Change the result units setting, page 2-126
Printing assay parameter reports, page 2-127

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay

parameters view
Perform this procedure to display the Assay settings - Assay parameters

view of the Configuration screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay Parameters

view:
1. Select System from the menu bar, and then select
Configuration.
2. Select the Assay settings option.

The Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay Parameters
view displays.
page 2-65
Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view
From the Assay settings - New assay view of the Configuration screen
the system administrator can select an assay file type and access
windows to configure. Assay file types include calculated and
photometric.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.33: Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view
For descriptions of these fields, see Configuration screen - Assay settings -

New assay view field descriptions, page Appendix E-158.
Assay settings - New assay view, page 2-68.
Configure a photometric assay (c System), page 2-88
Configure a calculated assay, page 2-84
Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay

view
Perform this procedure to display the Assay settings - New assay view
of the Configuration screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view:

Configuration.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2. Select the Assay settings option.

The Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters
view displays.
3. Select New assay from the Assay categories list.

The Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view
displays.
Import assay window
From the Assay settings view of the Configuration screen the system
administrator can import an assay file from another ARCHITECT c
System.
Figure 2.34: Import assay window
For descriptions of these fields, see Import assay window field

Import an assay file (c System), page 2-215

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Export assay window
From the Assay settings view of the Configuration screen you can
export an assay file to another ARCHITECT c System.
Figure 2.35: Export assay window
For descriptions of these fields, see Export assay window field

Export an assay file (c System), page 2-216
Procedures - Configuration screen - Assay settings view
Procedures you can perform from the Configuration screen - Assay

Viewing assay settings, page 2-97
Changing assay configuration settings, page 2-107
Printing assay parameter reports, page 2-127
Configuring Abbott assays
Procedures for configuring Abbott assay settings include:

Configure normal and extreme ranges, page 2-71

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Configure patient and QC panels, page 2-72

Configure a retest rule, page 2-73
Configure result units and decimal places, page 2-75
Configure the default dilution setting (photometric - c System),
page 2-76
Enter a calibrator concentration (c System), page 2-77
Configure a calibration adjustment type and interval (photometric - c
System), page 2-78
Configure interpretation options (c System and calculated), page 2-79
Configure the default dilution setting (i System), page 2-82
Configure normal and extreme ranges
Perform this procedure to configure normal and extreme result ranges

for an assay.
NOTE: Ranges are evaluated in the order defined.

Prerequisite Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings -
Assay parameters view, page 2-67
Supplies NA
To configure normal and extreme ranges:

1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list on the
Configuration screen, and then select F6 - Configure.
The Configure assay parameters window - General view displays.
The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected.
2. Select the Results option.

The Configure assay parameters window - Results view displays.
3. Select Add.
The Configure results parameters window displays.
4. Select the desired Gender option.
5. Select the Age list button, and then select the desired age format.
NOTE: If you do not enter an age when creating a patient order,

the age is assumed to be 0.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
6. Enter a value in the Minimum and Maximum data entry boxes.
7. Enter a value in the Normal range data entry boxes.
8. Enter a value in the Extreme range data entry boxes. (optional)
9. Select Done to return to the Results view of the Configure assay

parameters window.
Your values display in the Gender and age specific ranges table.
10. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you

selected more than one, and then repeat steps 3 through 9 for
each. (optional)
page 2-65
Configure assay parameters window - Results view, page 2-159
Configure results parameters window, page 2-160
Configure patient and QC panels
Perform this procedure to create a panel(s) that may be used when

ordering patient or control samples.
Supplies NA
To configure patient and QC panels:

1. Select Panel definitions from the Assay categories list on the
The Configure panel definitions window displays.
3. Enter a unique name (maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters)

in the New panel name data entry box.
4. Select the desired Panel type check box(es).
5. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list.
6. Select Add to create the panel.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The panel name displays in the Panels list.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 to add another panel. (optional)
page 2-65
Configure panel definitions window, page 2-169
Configure a retest rule
Perform this procedure to configure a retest rule(s), which provides

automatic patient sample reordering for those samples that meet
specified retest rules on an assay-by-assay basis.
IMPORTANT: If you configure a calculated assay as your retest assay

the system will use existing valid constituent results to perform the
calculation.
Supplies NA
To configure a retest rule:

1. Select Retest rules from the Assay categories list on the
2. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6
- Configure.
The Configure assay retest rules window displays.
3. Select Add rule.

The Add / edit assay retest rules window displays.
4. Enter a name in the Rule name data entry box.
5. Enter the number of replicates in the Replicates data entry box.
NOTE: The system runs the number of replicates entered for all
retest assays.
6. Select the desired Retest indicator option to determine the

retest criteria, result range, or error code.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: If you selected the error code option and one of the
following error codes occurs, the assay is retested.
1005 - Result cannot be calculated, final RLU read is outside
the specification of the lowest calibrator.
1007 - Unable to process test, activated read failure.
1008 - Unable to process test, final read failure.
1051 - Unable to calculate result, absorbance exceeded
optical limits.
1053 - Unable to calculate result, rate reaction linearity
failure.
1054 - Unable to calculate result, Reaction check failure.
1232 - Result cannot be calculated, final RLU read is outside
the specification of the highest calibrator.
1250 - Unable to calculate result, absorbance exceeds highest
calibrator.
1350 - Unable to calculate result, no absorbance reads within
absorbance range.
1351 - Unable to calculate result, insufficient absorbance
reads within absorbance range.
7. Enter a value(s) in the Result range data entry box(es), if

displayed.
To automatically retest all samples when the original results
are within a specific range, enter values in both data entry
boxes.
are less than a specific value, leave the first data entry box
blank and enter the value in the second data entry box.
are greater than a specific value, enter the value in the first
data entry box and leave the second data entry box blank.
8. Select Select assay. (optional)

The Select assay window displays.
a. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list.
b. Deselect the original assay if you do not want to include it as

a retest assay. (optional)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
c. Select Done to return to the Add / edit assay retest rules

window.
The selected assay(s) displays in the Selected retest assays
list.
9. Select the desired Original dilution option for the original assay.
(optional)
10. Select a retest assay from the Selected retest assays list.
(optional)
11. Select the desired Retest dilution option. (optional)
12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 for each retest assay.
13. Select Done to return to the Configure assay retest rules window.
The retest rule displays.
14. Repeat steps 3 through 13 to configure additional rules for this

assay. (optional)

each. (optional)
page 2-65
Configure assay retest rules window, page 2-170
Add / edit assay retest rules window, page 2-171
Select assay window, page 2-172
Configure result units and decimal places
Perform this procedure to configure alternate result units and decimal

places for an assay.
Supplies NA
To configure result units and decimal places:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
1. Select Result units from the Assay categories list on the

- Configure.
The Configure result units window displays.
3. Enter the result units by performing one of the following:

Select the Result units list button, and then select the
desired unit (i System assays).
Enter the unit in the Results units data entry box (c System
assays).
4. Enter the desired value in the Decimal places data entry box.

selected more than one, and then repeat steps 3 and 4 for each.
(optional)
page 2-65
Configure result units window, page 2-167
Configure the default dilution setting (photometric - c System)
Perform this procedure to configure the dilution option to use if a

dilution is not specified when a test is ordered.
Supplies NA
To configure the default dilution setting:

- Configure.
The Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction
definition view displays.
2. Select the Reagent / Sample option.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The Configure assay parameters window - General - Reagent /

Sample view displays.
3. Select the Default dilution option.

selected more than one, and then select a default dilution for
each. (optional)
page 2-65
(photometric - c System), page 2-135
Enter a calibrator concentration (c System)
Perform this procedure to enter a calibrator concentration(s) when

you first configure an assay or when you use a new lot of calibrator.
NOTE: Changing the calibrator concentration(s) will change the assay

calibration status to No Cal. A full calibration must be performed. See
Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17.
Supplies Calibrator value sheet
To enter a calibrator concentration:

- Configure.
2. Select the Calibration option.

The Configure assay parameters window - Calibration -
Calibrators view displays.
3. Enter the concentrations for the new calibrators:

For photometric assays, enter a value in the appropriate
Concentration data entry box.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
For potentiometric assays, enter a value in the Low

concentration and High concentration data entry boxes.

selected more than one, and then enter the concentrations for
each. (optional)
page 2-65
System), page 2-151

System)
Perform this procedure to define the adjustment type and level of a

full calibration curve. You can configure the calibration adjustment to
occur at scheduled intervals or to be ordered at non-scheduled
intervals.
NOTE: If you modify the calibration adjustment type and/or interval

for an Abbott assay an asterisk displays next to the assay number to
indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version.
If you configure a factor calibration method, you cannot configure
adjustment settings.
To specify an adjustment when ordering, see Create a calibration order,
page 6-12.
Supplies NA
To Configure a calibration adjustment type and interval:

- Configure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The Configure assay parameters window - Calibration-
3. Select the Intervals option.

The Configure assay parameters window - Calibration- Intervals
view displays.
4. Select the Adjust type list button, and then select an adjustment
type.
NOTE: If you select the 1-point or 2-point adjustment type, you

must also configure the Adjust level setting.
5. Select the Adjust level list button, if available, and then select
the calibrator level to use for adjustment. (optional)
6. Enter the expiration interval for the adjustment calibration in

the Adjust interval data entry box. (optional)
7. Select the Default ordering type list button, and then select the
desired default ordering type.

selected more than one, and then repeat steps 4 - 7 for each.
(optional)
page 2-65
Configure interpretation options (c System and calculated)
Perform this procedure to include the interpretation with the test

result and to determine whether results are held for review.
Supplies NA
To configure interpretation options:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
- Configure.
2. Select the Interpretation option.

The Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view
displays.
3. Select the Name list button, and then select the desired name for
the interpretation.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: If the desired name is not listed, select User defined and
enter the name.
4. Repeat step 3 to select another interpretation name.
5. Enter a value(s) in the Range data entry box(es).
NOTE: The first Range data entry must be the low-linearity

value. The last Range data entry must be the high-linearity
value.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
6. Select the Results review required check box(es) for the desired
interpretation(s). (optional)

each. (optional)
page 2-65
Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view, page 2-162
Configure the default dilution setting (i System)
Perform this procedure to configure the dilution option to use if a

dilution is not specified when you order a test.
Supplies NA
To configure the default dilution setting:

- Configure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

2. Select the Dilution option.
3. Select the desired Default dilution option.

each. (optional)
page 2-65
Configure assay parameters window - General view (i System),
page 2-129
Configuring user-defined assays
For calculated assays see Configure a calculated assay, page 2-84.

Use the following order to configure c System photometric
user-defined assays.
Table 2.1: Configuring c System user-defined assays
Procedure Description
Configure a calibrator set (c System), Perform this procedure if a calibrator
page 2-182 set is not defined for the assay.
Configure a user-defined reagent Perform this procedure to define the
(photometric - c System), page 2-93 reagent and to link to the procedure to
define the reagent kit if the assay uses
non-bar coded reagents.
Configure a user-defined sample Perform this procedure if the assay
diluent (photometric - c System), uses a non-bar coded sample diluent
page 2-92 not previously configured.
Configure a reagent kit for a Perform this procedure to create a
user-defined sample diluent reagent kit with a unique identifier for a
(photometric - c 16000), page 2-95 non-bar code labeled sample diluent (c
16000).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 2.1: Configuring c System user-defined assays (continued)

Configure a photometric assay (c Perform this procedure to configure the
System), page 2-88 assay parameters. If you followed the
recommended order your calibrator,
reagent, and sample diluent (if
required) information is available.
Configure result units and decimal Perform this procedure to configure
places, page 2-75 result units and number of decimal
places desired.
The following procedures are optional once the user-defined assay is

configured.
Table 2.2: Configuring optional items for user-defined assays
Configure patient and QC panels, Perform this procedure to create a
page 2-72 panel(s) to use when ordering patient
or control samples.
Configure a retest rule, page 2-73 Perform this procedure to configure a
retest rule(s) to provide automatic
patient sample reordering for those
samples that meet specified retest
rules on an assay-by-assay basis.
Prepare reagent bar code labels. See 1D reagent bar code label data
format, page 4-30
To save your configuration information to an alternative location, see

Create a system software backup, page 2-212.
To save assay files to a floppy disk, see Export an assay file (c System),
page 2-216.
Configure a calculated assay
Perform this procedure to create an assay with a mathematical formula

for deriving a calculated (ratio) result.
Prerequisite Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - New
assay view, page 2-68
Supplies NA
To configure a calculated assay:


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The Configure assay parameters window - General view

(calculated) displays.
2. Enter the desired name in the Assay data entry box.
3. Enter the desired assay number in the Number data entry box.
NOTE: The next available assay number displays in the number

field, but may be edited. The user-defined assay number range is
2000-2999. A calculated assay installed from an assay disk has an
assay number ranging from 3000-3099 which cannot be edited.
4. Select the Assay availability list button, and then select the
desired option.
5. Select Select assays.

a. Select the assay(s) to be included in the formula from the
Assays list. The assays are assigned to calculator buttons in
the order you select them.
For example: For an LDL calculation you would select
Cholesterol, HDL, and Triglyceride.
b. Select Done to return to the Configure assay parameters
window - General view (calculated).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The selected assay(s) display in the Selected assays area and

the appropriate ASSAY buttons display above the calculator
keypad.
6. Enter the formula for the calculation by selecting the desired

constituent assay(s) and calculator buttons.
NOTE: You must include all of the selected constituent assay(s)

in the formula.
For example: To enter the formula for an LDL calculation
Cholesterol - HDL - (Triglyceride /5), you would perform the
following steps:
a. Select the ASSAY1 (cholesterol) button , and then select
the minus button .
b. Select the ASSAY2 (HDL) button , and then select the

minus button .
c. Select the open parenthesis button , and then select the

ASSAY3 (Triglyceride) button .
d. Select the divide button , then select 5, and then select

the close parenthesis button .

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The formula for the calculation displays in the Formula data

entry box.
7. Enter a result range for the assay(s) in the Minimum and

Maximum value data entry box(es).
NOTE: If the constituent test result(s) is outside the defined

range, the calculated test becomes an exception and a result is
not reported.
8. Select the Results option to configure ranges.

See Configure normal and extreme ranges, page 2-71.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
9. Select the Interpretation option to configure interpretations.

See Configure interpretation options (c System and calculated),
page 2-79.
10. Select Done to create the calculated assay and return to the
The calculated assay displays in the Assays list.
To configure result units and decimal places for the calculated assay,
see Configure result units and decimal places, page 2-75.
Configure assay parameters window - General view (calculated),
page 2-131
Configure a photometric assay (c System)
Perform this procedure to configure a user-defined photometric assay.

The ARCHITECT System can store 200 c System assay files.
Prerequisite Configure a calibrator set (c System), page 2-182
Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric - c
System), page 2-93
Configure a reagent kit for a user-defined sample
diluent (photometric - c 16000), page 2-95
Configure a user-defined sample diluent (photometric
- c System), page 2-92 (optional)
Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings -
New assay view, page 2-68
Supplies NA
To configure a photometric assay:

1. Select the Photometric option on the Configuration screen, and
then select F6 - Configure.
The Configure assay parameters - General - Reaction definition
view displays.
2. Configure the settings for the General option.

a. Enter the desired name in the Assay data entry box.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
b. Enter the desired assay number in the Number data entry

box.
NOTE: The next available assay number displays in the number

field, but may be edited. The user-defined assay number range is
2000-2999.
c. Select the Assay availability list button, and then select the
desired availability option.
d. Configure the settings for the Reaction definition, Reagent

/ Sample, and Validity checks options.
3. Configure the settings for the Calibration option.

a. Select the Calibration option.
The Configure assay parameters - Calibration - Calibrators
view displays.
b. Select the Calibration method list button, and then select
the desired method.
c. Configure the settings for the Calibrators, Volumes,

Intervals, and Validity checks options.
4. Select the SmartWash option to configure washes. (optional)

See Configure the SmartWash settings (c System), page 2-90.
5. Select the Results option to configure ranges.

See Configure normal and extreme ranges, page 2-71.
6. Select the Interpretation option to configure interpretations.

(optional)
See Configure interpretation options (c System and calculated),
page 2-79.
7. Select Done to create the photometric assay.

The assay now displays in the Assays list.
To configure result units and decimal places for the photometric assay,
see Configure result units and decimal places, page 2-75.
For additional information see the ARCHITECT c System Assay
Application Guide.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

view (photometric - c System), page 2-133
Configure the SmartWash settings (c System)
Perform this procedure to configure SmartWash settings. The

SmartWash feature provides an additional wash for the reagent probes,
sample probe, and cuvette to prevent assay-to-assay interference.
NOTE: Do not configure more than one wash type for each
component. Only one wash solution configured for each component
is used by the system.
Supplies NA
To configure the SmartWash settings:

- Configure.
2. Select the SmartWash option.

The Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view
displays.
3. Select Add.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The Add / edit SmartWash - Rgt 1 probe view displays.
4. Configure the settings for the Rgt 1 probe options. (optional)

a. Select the desired reagent(s) from the Reagents list.
b. Select the Wash list button, and then select the desired wash
type.
c. Enter the volume (20 - 345 L) of the wash type in the

Volume data entry box.
d. Enter the number of replicates in the Replicates data entry

box.
5. Select the Rgt 2 probe option, and then repeat steps 4a through
4d. (optional)
6. Configure settings for the Sample probe options. (optional)

a. Select the Sample probe option.
The Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view
displays.
b. Select the Wash list button, and then select the desired wash
type.
c. Select the desired Sample wash protocol option.
7. Configure the settings for the Cuvette options. (optional)

a. Select the Cuvette option.
The Add / edit SmartWash window - Cuvette view displays.
b. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list.
c. Select the Wash list button, and then select the desired wash
type.
8. Select Done.

The Configure assay parameters window displays.

each. (optional)
11. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen - Assay

settings view.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
page 2-65
Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System),
page 2-155
Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1 probe view (c System),
page 2-156
Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view (c System),
page 2-157
Add / edit SmartWash window - Cuvette view (c System), page 2-158
Configure a user-defined sample diluent (photometric - c System)
Perform this procedure to configure an onboard sample diluent.

Supplies NA
To configure a user-defined sample diluent:

1. Select CC Reagent settings from the Assay categories list on the
2. Select NEW from the Reagents list, and then select F6 -

Configure.
The Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window displays.
3. Enter a unique name for the sample diluent (maximum of 7

alphanumeric characters) in the Reagent name data entry box.
4. Select the Reagent type list button, and then select Sample
diluent.
5. Enter a value in the Reagent low alert data entry box. (optional)

To configure the kit for the sample diluent on the c 8000 processing
module see Configure a user-defined reagent kit (photometric - c System),
page 2-94.
To configure the kits for the sample diluent on the c 16000 processing
module see Configure a reagent kit for a user-defined sample diluent
(photometric - c 16000), page 2-95.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
page 2-65
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - user-defined assay
view, page 2-165
Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric - c System)
Perform this procedure to configure a reagent when using non-bar

coded reagents or reagents not supplied by Abbott Laboratories.
Supplies NA
To configure a user-defined reagent:

1. Select CC reagent settings from the Assay categories list on the
2. Select NEW from the Reagents list, and then select F6 -

Configure.

in the Reagent name data entry box.
NOTE: When you are configuring bar coded reagents not

supplied by Abbott Laboratories, the reagent name must match
the name (including capitalization) encoded in the bar code.
When you are configuring reagents that use 1D (one
dimensional) bar code labels, the reagent name must be identical
to digits 1 - 5 of the bar code. See 1D reagent bar code label data
format, page 4-30.
4. Select the Reagent type list button, and then select R1 only or
R1 and R2.
5. Enter a value in the Reagent low alert data entry box. (optional)
6. Enter a value in the Onboard stability data entry box.

(optional)
7. Configure a user-defined reagent kit (photometric - c System),

page 2-94 for non-bar coded reagents. (optional)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

To configure a non-bar coded sample diluent, see Configure a
user-defined sample diluent (photometric - c System), page 2-92.
To configure the assay parameters, see Configure a photometric assay (c
System), page 2-88.
To load a non-bar coded reagent, see Load non-bar coded reagents (c
System), page 5-91.
To load a 1D (one-dimensional) bar code labeled reagent, see Load bar
coded reagents (c System), page 5-85.
page 2-65
view, page 2-165
Configure a user-defined reagent kit (photometric - c System)
Perform this procedure to create a reagent kit with a unique identifier

for non-bar coded reagents. This identifier allows the system to track
the onboard stability and remaining tests for a kit even if it is moved.
It also allows the system to perform reagent changeover when a
cartridge is empty.
NOTE: You must define at least one reagent kit before you can load
the reagent in the reagent supply centers.
Supplies NA
To configure a user-defined reagent kit:

2. Select the desired reagent from the Reagents list, and then select
F6 - Configure.
The information is dependent on the reagent you selected.
3. Select the Lot number list button, and then perform one of the
following:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Select the desired lot from the list.

Select New lot, and then enter a lot number (maximum of
eight alphanumeric characters) in the Lot number data
entry box.
4. Enter a unique number in the Serial number data entry box.
NOTE: You can define multiple serial numbers for each lot
number to allow you to load multiple kits of the same reagent.
Each kit defined for a single lot number must have a unique
numeric identifier (serial number).
5. Enter a date in the Expiration date data entry box. (optional)
6. Select the R1 cartridge size list button, and then select the
cartridge size.
cartridge size. (optional)
8. Select Add kit to create the kit.

The new kit displays in the Configured kits list.
page 2-65
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view,
page 2-164
Configure a reagent kit for a user-defined sample diluent

(photometric - c 16000)
Perform this procedure to create a reagent kit with a unique identifier

for non-bar coded sample diluent. This identifier allows the system to
track the onboard stability and remaining tests for a kit even if it is
moved. It also allows the system to perform reagent changeover when
a cartridge is empty.
NOTE: You must define two reagent kits for the sample diluent before
you can load the diluent in the reagent supply centers. The c 16000

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
processing module requires sample diluent loaded in both the outer

(segment A, B, or C) and inner (segment D) carousels.
Supplies NA
To configure a user-defined reagent kit:

2. Select the desired diluent from the Reagents list, and then select
F6 - Configure.
3. Select the Lot number list button, and then select New lot from
the list.
4. Enter a lot number (maximum of eight alphanumeric characters)

in the Lot number data entry box.
5. Enter a unique number in the Serial number data entry box to

identify the diluent cartridge for loading in the outer carousel.
NOTE: You can define multiple serial numbers for each lot
number of diluent thereby allowing you to load one cartridge in
the outer (segment A, B, or C) carousel and another in the inner
(segment D) carousel.
cartridge size.

8. Select the Lot number list button, and then select the lot
number created in step 4.
9. Enter a unique number in the Serial number data entry box to

identify the diluent cartridge for loading in the inner carousel.
cartridge size. (optional)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

To assign the location of the sample diluent see Load non-bar coded
reagents (c System), page 5-91.
page 2-65
page 2-164
Viewing assay settings
Procedures for viewing assay settings include:

View assay parameters, page 2-98
View assay availability, page 2-98
View the normal and extreme result range settings, page 2-99
View the patient and QC panel definitions, page 2-100
View the assay retest rule settings, page 2-100
View the default dilution setting (photometric - c System), page 2-101
View the calibrator concentration settings (c System), page 2-102
View the default calibration ordering type (photometric - c System),
page 2-102
View the linearity range settings, page 2-103
View the correlation factor and intercept settings (c System),
page 2-104
View the reagent-specific low alert setting (c System), page 2-105
View the last required read setting (photometric - c System),
page 2-105
View the default dilution setting (i System), page 2-106

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
View assay parameters
Perform this procedure to display the Details for assay parameters

window. From this window you can access and view the assay
parameter settings.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view assay parameters:

The Details for assay parameters - General view displays. The
information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected.
3. Select the appropriate options to view additional parameters.

selected more than one. (optional)
5. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen.

For assay parameter information refer to the manufacturer's
assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent
application sheet).
Windows - Configuration screen - Assay settings view, page 2-127
View assay availability
Perform this procedure to display the General view of the Details for
assay parameters window.
From this window you can view the setting that determines if you can
select the assay name on the order screens.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view assay availability:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The Details for assay parameters window - General view displays.

Details for assay parameters window - General view (i System),
page 2-130
Details for assay parameters window - General - ICT view, page 2-140
View the normal and extreme result range settings
Perform this procedure to display the Results view of the Details for
assay parameters window. From this view you can see the current
normal and extreme result range settings.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the normal and extreme result range settings:

- Details.

The Details for assay parameters window - Results view displays.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Configuration screen - Assay settings view, page 2-65
Details for assay parameters window - Results view, page 2-161
View the patient and QC panel definitions
Perform this procedure to display the Details for panel definition

patient and QC panels.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the patient and QC panel definitions:

1. Select Panel definitions from the Assays categories list on the
The Details for panel definition window displays.
3. Select the desired panel from the Panels list.
page 2-65
Details for panel definition window, page 2-169
View the assay retest rule settings
Perform this procedure to display the Details for assay retest rules
window. From this window you can view the current settings for assay
retest rules.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the assay retest rule settings:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

- Details.
The Details for assay retest rules window displays.
3. Select the desired rule from the Assay retest rules list.

page 2-65
Details for assay retest rules window, page 2-173
View the default dilution setting (photometric - c System)
Perform this procedure to display the General - Reagent / Sample view

of the Details for assay parameters window. From this view you can see
the current setting for the default dilution.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the default dilution setting:

- Details.
The Details for assay parameters window - General - Reaction

The Details for assay parameters window - General - Reagent /
Sample view displays.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
page 2-65
Details for assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view
View the calibrator concentration settings (c System)
Perform this procedure to display the Calibration - Calibrators view of

the Details for assay parameters window. From this view you can see
the current calibrator concentration settings to verify they match the
calibrator lot in use.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the calibrator concentration settings:


The Details for assay parameters window - Calibration -

page 2-65
View the default calibration ordering type (photometric - c System)
Perform this procedure to display the Calibration - Intervals view of

the Details for assay parameters window. From this view you can see

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
the current setting for the default calibration ordering type. This
ordering type is used when you order a calibration.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the default calibration ordering type:

- Details.

The Details for assay parameters window - Calibration -
Calibrators view displays. The information is dependent on the
assay(s) you selected.

The Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals
view displays.

page 2-65
View the linearity range settings
Perform this procedure to display the Results view of the Details for
linearity range settings.
Module status Any

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Supplies NA
To view the linearity range settings:

- Details.

The Details for assay parameters window - Results view displays.

page 2-65
View the correlation factor and intercept settings (c System)
Perform this procedure to display the Details for result units window.
From this window you can view the current settings for correlation
factor and intercept.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the correlation factor and intercept settings:

- Details.
The Details for result units window displays.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
page 2-65
Details for result units window, page 2-168
View the reagent-specific low alert setting (c System)
Perform this procedure to display the Details for reagent (CC reagent
settings) window. From this window you can view the current
reagent-specific low alert settings.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the reagent-specific low alert setting:

F5 - Details.
The Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window displays.
page 2-65
Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view,
page 2-165
Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - user-defined assay
view, page 2-166
View the last required read setting (photometric - c System)
Perform this procedure to display the General - Reaction definition

view of the Details for assay parameters window. From this view you
can see the last required read parameter setting.
Module status Any

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Supplies NA
To view the last required read setting:

The Details for assay parameters - General view displays. The
information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected.


Application Guide.
page 2-65
View the default dilution setting (i System)
Perform this procedure to display the Dilution view of the Details for
setting for the default dilution.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the default dilution setting:

- Details.

The Details for assay parameters window - Dilution view
displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

page 2-65
Details for assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System),
page 2-154.
Changing assay configuration settings
Procedures for changing assay settings include:

Change the name of an assay, page 2-108
Change the availability of an assay, page 2-109
Change normal and extreme ranges, page 2-110
Change a patient or QC panel, page 2-111
Delete a patient or QC panel, page 2-111
Add an assay to a retest rule, page 2-112
Remove an assay from a retest rule, page 2-113
Delete a retest rule, page 2-114
Change a linearity range, page 2-115
Change the last required read setting (photometric - c System),
page 2-116
Change the default dilution setting (photometric - c System),
page 2-117
Change default calibration type (photometric - c System), page 2-118
Change the correlation factor and intercept settings (c System),
page 2-119
Delete a calibrator set (photometric - c System), page 2-120
Change the reagent-specific low alert setting (c System), page 2-121
Delete a reagent (c System), page 2-122
Delete a reagent kit (c System), page 2-123
Change the default dilution setting (i System), page 2-124

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Change interpretation settings (i System), page 2-125

Change the name of an assay
Perform this procedure to change the assay name that displays on all
screens and windows.
No orders pending for the assay being changed
Supplies NA
To change the name of an assay:

- Configure.

in the Assay data entry box.

selected more than one, and enter a unique name for each.
(optional)
page 2-65
page 2-129
Configure assay parameters window - General - ICT view, page 2-139

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Change the availability of an assay
Perform this procedure to change assay availability, which determines

whether an assay(s) is available for ordering on the order screens.
Supplies NA
To change the availability of an assay:

- Configure.
2. Select the Assay availability list button, and then select the
desired assay availability.
Enabled - Indicates the assay is available for ordering.
Disabled - Indicates the assay name does not display on the
patient, control, and calibration order screens.
Patient disabled - Indicates the assay name does not display
on the Patient order screen.

selected more than one, and then enable or disable each.
(optional)
page 2-65
page 2-129

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Change normal and extreme ranges
Perform this procedure to edit normal and extreme ranges.
NOTE: Ranges are evaluated in the order defined.

Supplies NA
To change normal and extreme ranges:

Configuration screen, and then select F6 - Configure.

3. Select the desired range from the Gender and age specific
ranges table, and then select Edit.
The Configure results parameters window displays.
4. Select the Age list button, and then select the desired age format.
5. Enter a value in the Minimum and Maximum data entry boxes.
6. Enter a value in the Normal range data entry boxes.
7. Enter a value in the Extreme range data entry boxes. (optional)
8. Select Done to return to the Results view of the Configure assay

parameters window.
Your edits display in the Gender and age specific ranges table.
9. Select another range, and then repeat steps 3 through 8.

(optional)

each. (optional)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
page 2-65
Change a patient or QC panel
Perform this procedure to add or remove assays from a previously

defined panel or to change the panel type.
Supplies NA
To change a patient or QC panel:

3. Select the desired panel from the Panels list.
4. Select or deselect the Panel type check box(es).
5. Select or deselect an assay(s) from the Assays list.
6. Select Add to add your changes.
page 2-65
Delete a patient or QC panel
Perform this procedure to delete a patient or QC panel when the panel

is no longer in use.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Supplies NA
To delete a patient or QC panel:

3. Select the panel to delete from the Panels list, and then select
Delete.
4. Select OK to delete the panel.

The panel name no longer displays in the Panels list.
page 2-65
Add an assay to a retest rule
Perform this procedure to add an assay(s) to a retest rule(s).

Supplies NA
To add an assay to a retest rule:

2. Select an assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 -

Configure.
3. Select the desired rule from the Assay retest rules list, and then
select Edit rule.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
4. Select Select assay.

a. Select the desired assay(s).
b. Select Done to return to the Add / edit assay retest rules

window.
The selected assay(s) display in the Selected retest assays list.
5. Select an assay from the Selected retest assays list.
6. Select the desired Retest dilution option.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each assay.
9. Repeat steps 3 through 8 to add a retest assay(s) to another rule.

(optional)

each. (optional)
page 2-65
Remove an assay from a retest rule
Perform this procedure to remove an assay from a retest rule(s).

Supplies NA
To remove an assay from a retest rule:


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Configure.
3. Select the desired rule from the Assay retest rules list, and then
select Edit rule.
4. Select Select assay.

a. Deselect the desired assay(s).
b. Select Done to return to the Add / edit assay retest rules

window.
The updated Selected retest assays list displays.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to remove a retest assay(s) from another
rule. (optional)

each. (optional)
page 2-65
Delete a retest rule
Perform this procedure to delete a retest rule(s).

Supplies NA

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To delete a retest rule:

- Configure.
3. Select the desired rule, and then select Delete rule.
4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay, if you

selected more than one, and then repeat step 3 for each.
(optional)
page 2-65
Change a linearity range
Perform this procedure to change the linearity range for an assay(s)

when your laboratory determines the linearity range has changed.
NOTE: If you modify the linearity range for an Abbott assay an

asterisk displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was
modified from the Abbott released version.
Supplies NA
To change a linearity range:

1. Select an assay(s) from the Assays list on the Configuration
screen.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
4. Edit the value in the Low-Linearity data entry box.
NOTE: For i System assays this field can only be edited when the
first default dilution option is configured.
5. Edit the value in the High-Linearity data entry box.
NOTE: For i System assays this field can only be edited when the
first default dilution option is configured. This value cannot be
edited above the assay default high-linearity.

(optional)
page 2-65
Change the last required read setting (photometric - c System)
Perform this procedure to specify the last read that is required for
result calculation. The result calculates as soon as the last defined read
is measured rather than waiting for all 33 reads to complete.
Supplies NA
To change the last required read setting:

3. Select the Last required read data entry box, and then enter the
read time (1-33).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: This read time cannot occur before the last read time
defined for Main, Flex, Blank, Color correction, or Reaction
check.

selected more than one, and then enter the read time for each.
(optional)

Application Guide.
page 2-65
Change the default dilution setting (photometric - c System)
Perform this procedure to select the dilution option to use if a dilution

is not specified when the test is ordered.
To specify a dilution for a specific sample when ordering, see Create a
patient order (single order), page 5-118, Create a control order (single
analyte), page 5-139, or Create a control order (multiconstituent),
page 5-143.
Supplies NA
To change the default dilution setting:

- Configure.

The Configure assay parameters window - Reagent / Sample view
displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

each. (optional)
page 2-65
Change default calibration type (photometric - c System)
Perform this procedure to change the setting for the default

calibration type. This setting is used if the type is not specified when
you order a calibration.
NOTE: The Default calibration type setting is only available if you

have configured an adjustment type.
To specify a calibration type when ordering a calibration, see Create a
calibration order, page 6-12.
Supplies NA
To change the default calibration type:

Configure.


The Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals
view displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
4. Select the Default ordering type list button, and then select the
desired calibration type.

selected more than one, and then select a calibration type for
each. (optional)
page 2-65
Change the correlation factor and intercept settings (c System)
Perform this procedure to edit the correlation factor and intercept

when correlating assay results to another system.
NOTE: If you modify the correlation factor and/or intercept for an

Abbott assay an asterisk displays next to the assay number to indicate
the assay was modified from the Abbott released version.
Supplies NA
To change the correlation factor and intercept settings:

- Configure.
3. Edit the value in the Correlation factor data entry box.
4. Edit the value in the Intercept data entry box.

(optional)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Application Guide.
page 2-65
Delete a calibrator set (photometric - c System)
Perform this procedure to delete a calibrator set when the calibrator is

no longer used.
Prerequisite Access the Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings
view, page 2-175
Supplies NA
To delete a calibrator set:
NOTE: If a calibrator set is defined for use in any assay parameter file,
you must perform step 1 or step 2 prior to deleting the calibrator set.
1. Change the assay to use a different calibrator set. (optional)
a. Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay
parameters view, page 2-67.
b. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then
select F6 - Configure.
c. Select the Calibration option.
d. Select the Calibrator list button, and then select a different
calibrator.
e. Use the previous/next buttons if you selected more than one

assay, and then repeat step 1d for each. (optional)
f. Select Done to save your changes.
2. Delete the assay that uses the calibrator set if the assay file is no
longer needed. See Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214.
(optional)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3. Select Calibrator set from the QC - Cal categories list on the

4. Select the desired calibrator set, and then select F7 - Delete.

5. Select OK to delete the calibrator set.

The calibrator set name no longer displays in the calibrator set
table.
Configure calibrator set window (c System), page 2-207
Change the reagent-specific low alert setting (c System)
Perform this procedure to change the level at which the low alert
notification occurs for a specific reagent.
To change the level at which the system low alert notification occurs,
see Change the system low alert setting for reagent kits, page 2-24.
Supplies NA
To change the reagent-specific low alert setting:

2. Select the desired reagent from the Reagents list on the

4. Enter the desired alert level (number of tests) in the Reagent low
alert data entry box.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
page 2-65
page 2-164
view, page 2-165
Delete a reagent (c System)
Perform this procedure to delete a user-defined reagent when it is no

longer in use.
All reagent kits using the reagent must be deleted. See
Supplies NA
To delete a reagent:
NOTE: If a reagent is defined for use in any assay parameter file, you
must perform step 1 or 2 prior to deleting the reagent.
1. Change the reagent parameter in the assay to use a different
reagent. (optional)
a. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, on the
b. Select F6 - Configure
c. Select the Reagent / Sample option.
The Configure assay parameters window - General - Reagent
/ Sample view displays.
d. Select the Reagent list button, and then select a different
reagent.
e. Use the previous/next buttons if you selected more than one

assay, and then repeat step 1d for each. (optional)
f. Select Done to save your changes.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2. Delete the assay that uses the reagent if the assay file is no longer
needed. See Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214. (optional)

F7 - Delete.
5. Select OK to delete the reagent.
page 2-65
view, page 2-165
Delete a reagent kit (c System)
Perform this procedure to delete a reagent kit when it is no longer in

use.
NOTE: Performing this procedure does not delete the defined reagent.
To delete the reagent and the associated kits, see Delete a reagent (c
Supplies NA
To delete a reagent kit:

2. Select the reagent associated with the kit from the Reagents list,
and then select F6 - Configure.
3. Select the desired kit from the Configured kits list, and then
select Delete kit.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
4. Select Done to delete the kit.
page 2-65
page 2-164
view, page 2-165
Change the default dilution setting (i System)
Perform this procedure to select the dilution option to use if a dilution

is not specified when the test is ordered.
patient order (single order), page 5-118, Create a control order (single
analyte), page 5-139, or Create a control order (multiconstituent),
page 5-143.
Supplies NA
To change the default dilution setting:

- Configure.

each. (optional)
page 2-65

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Configure assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System),

page 2-153
Change interpretation settings (i System)
Perform this procedure to change the settings that determine whether

the interpretation is included with the test result and results are held
for review. The interpretation option is available for specific
ARCHITECT i System assays.
Supplies NA
To change interpretation settings:

1. Select Assay parameters from the Assay categories list on the
2. Select the desired i System assay(s) from the Assay list, and then
3. Select the Interpretation option.

The Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view
displays.
4. Select the Name list button, and then select the desired name for
the interpretation. (optional)
5. Repeat step 4 to select another interpretation name. (optional)
6. Enter the desired value(s) in the Range data entry box(es), if

available. (optional)
NOTE: The first Range data entry must be the low-linearity

value. The last Range data entry must be the high-linearity
value.
7. Select the Results review required checkbox(es) for the desired

interpretation(s). (optional)

each. (optional)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters
view, page 2-67
Change the result units setting
Perform this procedure to change the result units for an assay.
IMPORTANT: When you edit the result concentration unit, all

previous Levey-Jennings and QC summary information is deleted.
Supplies NA
To change the result units setting:

- Configure.
3. Enter the result units by performing one of the following:

Select the Result units list button, and then select the
desired unit (i System assays).
Enter the unit in the Results units data entry box (c System
assays).
NOTE: For c System assays, the system changes the result unit
name displayed but it does not automatically adjust any values.
You must enter the following parameters, if applicable, using the
appropriate conversion factor.
Calibrator concentrations
Gender and age specific ranges (normal and extreme)
Linearity ranges
Interpretation ranges
Control means
Retest rules result ranges

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Constituent assay ranges for calculated assays

selected more than one, and then repeat step 3 for each.
(optional)
page 2-65
Printing assay parameter reports
Procedures for printing reports include:

Print an Assay Parameter report for specified assays, page 5-342
Print an Assay Parameter report for all assays, page 5-343
Windows - Configuration screen - Assay settings view
Windows you can access from the Configuration screen - Assay

page 2-129
Details for assay parameters window - General view (i System),
page 2-130
Configure assay parameters window - General view (calculated),
page 2-131
Details for assay parameters window - General view (calculated),
page 2-132

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Details for assay parameters window - General - ICT view,
page 2-140
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System),
page 2-141
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System),
page 2-142
System), page 2-151
System), page 2-152
Configure assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System),
page 2-153
Details for assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System),
page 2-154
Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System),
page 2-155
Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1 probe view (c System),
page 2-156

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Details for assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System),

page 2-158
Details for assay parameters window - Interpretation view,
page 2-163
page 2-164
Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view,
page 2-165
view, page 2-165
Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - user-defined assay
view, page 2-166
Details for result units window, page 2-168
Details for panel definition window, page 2-169
Details for assay retest rules window, page 2-173
Configure assay parameters window - General view (i System)
From the General view of the Configure assay parameters window the
system administrator can configure general assay settings, such as the
assay name and assay availability.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.36: Configure assay parameters window - General view (i

System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure assay parameters window -

General view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-161.
Details for assay parameters window - General view (i System)
From the General view of the Details for assay parameters window you
can view the current general assay settings, such as:
Assay name, number, and availability
Assay type and pretreatment option
Assay and calibration version

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.37: Details for assay parameters window - General view (i

System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for assay parameters window -
General view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-162.
Configure assay parameters window - General view

(calculated)
system administrator can configure the settings used to calculate the
assay.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.38: Configure assay parameters window - General view

(calculated)

General view (calculated) field descriptions, page Appendix E-163.
Details for assay parameters window - General view

(calculated)
From the General calculated view of the Details for assay parameters
window you can view the current settings used to calculate an assay.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.39: Details for assay parameters window - General view

(calculated)
General view (calculated) field descriptions, page Appendix E-164.
Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction

definition view (photometric - c System)
From the General - Reaction definition view of the Configure assay

parameters window the system administrator can configure:
General assay settings, which include the assay name, number,
type, availability, and version
Reaction definition settings, which include the reaction mode,
wave lengths, read times, and last required read

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.40: Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction


General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System) field
Change the last required read setting (photometric - c System),
page 2-116
Details for assay parameters window - General - Reaction

From the General - Reaction definition view of the Details for assay
parameters window you can view the current:
General assay settings, which include the assay name, number,
type, availability, and version
Reaction definition settings, which include the reaction mode,
wave lengths, read times, and last required read

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.41: Details for assay parameters window - General - Reaction

General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System) field
View the last required read setting (photometric - c System),
page 2-105
Configure assay parameters window - General - Reagent /

Sample view (photometric - c System)
From the General - Reagent / Sample view of the Configure assay

parameters window the system administrator can configure the
settings for reagent(s) and sample, such as:
Reagent and sample diluent definition
Reagent and water volumes
Dilution volumes

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.42: Configure assay parameters window -General - Reagent /


General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-169
Change the default dilution setting (photometric - c System),
page 2-117
Configure the default dilution setting (photometric - c System),
page 2-76
Details for assay parameters window - General - Reagent /

From the General - Reagent / Sample view of the Details for assay
parameters window you can view the current settings for reagent(s)
and sample, such as:
Reagent and sample diluent definition
Reagent and water volumes
Dilution volumes

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.43: Details for assay parameters window - General - Reagent

/ Sample view (photometric - c System)
General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-171.
View the default dilution setting (photometric - c System), page 2-101
Configure assay parameters window - General - Validity checks

view (photometric - c System)
From the General - Validity checks view of the Configure assay

settings for validity checks used in result calculation.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.44: Configure assay parameters window - General - Validity

checks view (photometric - c System)

General - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) field descriptions,
Details for assay parameters window - General - Validity checks

From the General - Validity checks view of the Details for assay
parameters window you can view the current settings for the validity
checks used in result calculation.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.45: Details for assay parameters window - General - Validity

General - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) field descriptions,
Configure assay parameters window - General - ICT view
system administrator can configure general assay settings, such as the
assay name, availability, and reagent used for the assay.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.46: Configure assay parameters window - General - ICT view

General - ICT view field descriptions, page Appendix E-176.
Details for assay parameters window - General - ICT view
From the General view of the Details for assay parameters window you
can view the current general assay settings, such as:
Assay name, number, and availability
Reagent used for the assay

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.47: Details for assay parameters window - General - ICT view
General - ICT view field descriptions, page Appendix E-177.
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration view (i

System)
From the Calibration view of the Configure assay parameters window

the system administrator can configure the setting for calibrator
replicates.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.48: Configure assay parameters window - Calibration view (i

System)

Calibration view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-178.
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration view (i

System)
From the Calibration view of the Details for assay parameters window
you can view the current calibration settings, such as:
Method for calibration, data reduction, and calibration
adjustment
Calibrator replicates
Calibrator names and concentrations

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.49: Details for assay parameters window - Calibration view

(i System)
Calibration view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-178.
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators

From the Calibration - Calibrators view of the Configure assay

settings for the calibration method and calibrator names, replicates,
and concentrations.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.50: Configure assay parameters window - Calibration -

Calibrators view (photometric - c System)

Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System) field descriptions,
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators

From the Calibration - Calibrators view of the Details for assay

parameters window you can view the settings for the calibration
method and calibrator names, replicates, and concentrations.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.51: Details for assay parameters window - Calibration -

Calibrators view (photometric - c System)
Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System) field descriptions,
View the calibrator concentration settings (c System), page 2-102
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Volumes

From the Calibration - Volumes view of the Configure assay

settings for calibrator volumes.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Volumes view (photometric - c System)

Calibration - Volumes view (photometric - c System) field descriptions,
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Volumes

From the Calibration - Volumes view of the Details for assay

parameters window you can view the current settings for calibrator
volumes.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Volumes view (photometric - c System)
Calibration - Volumes view (photometric - c System) field descriptions,
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals

From the Calibration - Intervals view of the Configure assay

settings for calibration type and intervals.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Intervals view (photometric - c System)

Calibration - Intervals view (photometric - c System) field descriptions,
System), page 2-78
Change default calibration type (photometric - c System), page 2-118
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals

From the Calibration - Intervals view of the Details for assay

parameters window you can view the current settings for calibration
type and intervals.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Intervals view (photometric - c System)
Calibration - Intervals view (photometric - c System) field descriptions,
View the default calibration ordering type (photometric - c System),
page 2-102
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Validity

From the Calibration - Validity checks view of the Configure assay

settings for validity checks used to calculate the calibration curve.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Validity checks view (photometric - c System)

Calibration - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) field descriptions,
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Validity

From the Calibration - Validity checks view of the Details for assay
parameters window you can view the current settings for validity
checks used to calculate the calibration curve.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Validity checks view (photometric - c System)
Calibration - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) field descriptions,

System)
From the Calibration view of the Configure assay parameters window

the system administrator can configure the settings for calibration and
index options.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.58: Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT

view (c System)

Calibration - ICT view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-186.

System)
From the Calibration - ICT view of the Details for assay parameters
window you can view the current settings for calibration and index
options.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.59: Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT

view (c System)
Calibration - ICT view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-187.
Configure assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System)
From the Dilution view of the Configure assay parameters window the
system administrator can configure the default dilution for an
ARCHITECT i System assay.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.60: Configure assay parameters window - Dilution view (i

System)

Dilution view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-188.
Details for assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System)
From the Dilution view of the Details for assay parameters window
you can view the current settings for the default dilution and dilution
ranges for an ARCHITECT i System assay.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.61: Details for assay parameters window - Dilution view (i

System)
Dilution view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-189.
View the default dilution setting (i System), page 2-106
Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c

System)
From the SmartWash view of the Configure assay parameters window

the system administrator can configure and delete the SmartWash
settings for the sample probe, reagent probe(s), and the cuvette.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.62: Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view

(c System)

SmartWash view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-190.
Configure the SmartWash settings (c System), page 2-90
Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1 probe view (c System)
From the Rgt 1 and Rgt 2 probe views of the Add / edit SmartWash
window the system administrator can add or edit SmartWash settings,
which include:
Wash type to use on the reagent probe
Wash type volume
Wash type replicates
The SmartWash settings can be configured for both reagent probes.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.63: Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1 probe view (c

System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1
probe view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-190.
Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view (c System)
From the Sample probe view of the Add / edit SmartWash window the
system administrator can add or edit SmartWash settings, which
include the wash type and sample wash protocol used for each assay.
Figure 2.64: Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view (c

System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Add / edit SmartWash window -

Sample probe view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-191.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Add / edit SmartWash window - Cuvette view (c System)
From the Cuvette view of the Add / edit SmartWash window the
system administrator can add or edit the wash type settings used for
each assay.
Figure 2.65: Add / edit SmartWash window - Cuvette view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Add / edit SmartWash window -

Cuvette view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-192.
Details for assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c

System)
From the SmartWash view of the Details for assay parameters window
you can view the current SmartWash settings for the sample probe,
reagent probe(s), and the cuvette.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.66: Details for assay parameters window - SmartWash view

(c System)
SmartWash view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-192.
Configure assay parameters window - Results view
From the Results view of the Configure assay parameters window the
system administrator can:
Configure age and gender specific ranges
Change normal and extreme ranges
Edit or delete ranges
Change a linearity range

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.67: Configure assay parameters window - Results view

Results view field descriptions, page Appendix E-193.
Change a linearity range, page 2-115
Configure results parameters window
From the Configure results parameters window the system

administrator can configure normal and extreme ranges.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.68: Configure results parameters window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure results parameters window

Details for assay parameters window - Results view
From the Results view of the Details for assay parameters window you
can view the current settings for normal and extreme ranges and assay
linearity.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.69: Details for assay parameters window - Results view
Results view field descriptions, page Appendix E-195.
View the normal and extreme result range settings, page 2-99
View the linearity range settings, page 2-103
Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view
From the Interpretation view of the Configure assay parameters

window the system administrator can configure the settings for
interpretation name, range, and the requirement to review the result.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.70: Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation

view

Interpretation view field descriptions, page Appendix E-196.
Configure interpretation options (c System and calculated), page 2-79
Change interpretation settings (i System), page 2-125
Details for assay parameters window - Interpretation view
From the Interpretation view of the Details for assay parameters

window you can view the current settings for interpretation name,
range, and the requirement to review the result.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.71: Details for assay parameters window - Interpretation

view
Interpretation view field descriptions, page Appendix E-196.
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay

view
From the Abbott assay view of the Configure reagent (CC reagent
settings) window the system administrator can configure the number
of tests for the reagent-specific low alert setting.
Figure 2.72: Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott

assay view
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure reagent (CC reagent

settings) window - Abbott assay view field descriptions, page Appendix
E-197.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay

view
From the Abbott assay view of the Details for reagent (CC reagent
settings) window you can view the current settings for the
reagent-specific low alert.
Figure 2.73: Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott
assay view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for reagent (CC reagent
settings) window - Abbott assay view field descriptions, page Appendix
E-197.
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - user-defined

assay view
From the user-defined assay view of the Configure reagent (CC reagent
settings) window the system administrator can configure the settings
for:
Reagent name and type
Reagent low alert and onboard stability
Reagent kit lot number, serial number, expiration date, and
cartridge size
The system administrator can also delete reagent kits and access a
window to add a new kit.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.74: Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window -

user-defined assay view
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure reagent (CC reagent

settings) window - User-defined assay view field descriptions,
Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric - c System), page 2-93
Configure a user-defined sample diluent (photometric - c System),
page 2-92
Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - user-defined

assay view
From the user-defined assay view of the Details for reagent (CC
reagent settings) window you can view the current settings for:
Reagent name and type
Reagent low alert and onboard stability
Reagent kit lot number, serial number, expiration date, and
cartridge size

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.75: Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window -

user-defined assay view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for reagent (CC reagent
settings) window - User-defined assay view field descriptions,
Configure result units window
From the Configure result units window the system administrator can
configure the settings for:
Result units and decimal places
Correlation factor and intercept (c System)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.76: Configure result units window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure result units window field
Configure result units and decimal places, page 2-75
Change the correlation factor and intercept settings (c System),
page 2-119
Details for result units window
From the Details for result units window you can view the current
settings for:
Result units and decimal places
Correlation factor and intercept (c System)
Figure 2.77: Details for result units window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for result units window field

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
View the correlation factor and intercept settings (c System),
page 2-104
Configure panel definitions window
From the Configure panel definitions window the system

administrator can configure patient and QC panels.
Figure 2.78: Configure panel definitions window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure panel definitions window

Configure patient and QC panels, page 2-72
Change a patient or QC panel, page 2-111
Delete a patient or QC panel, page 2-111
Details for panel definition window
From the Details for panel definition window you can view the
current settings for patient and QC panel definitions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.79: Details for panel definition window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for panel definition window
View the patient and QC panel definitions, page 2-100
Configure assay retest rules window
From the Configure assay retest rules window the system

administrator can add, change, or delete retest rules.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.80: Configure assay retest rules window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure assay retest rules window
Add / edit assay retest rules window
From the Add / edit assay retest rules window the system
administrator can add or edit assay retest rules.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.81: Add / edit assay retest rules window
For descriptions of these fields, see Add / edit assay retest rules window
Select assay window
From the Select assay window the system administrator can select or
deselect assay(s) for assay retest rules, multiconstituent controls, and
calculated assays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.82: Select assay window
For descriptions of these fields, see Select assay window field descriptions,
Configure a new multiconstituent control, page 2-179
Add an assay to a multiconstituent control, page 2-191
Details for assay retest rules window
From the Details for assay retest rules window you can view the
current settings for retest rules.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.83: Details for assay retest rules window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for assay retest rules window
View the assay retest rule settings, page 2-100
Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view

From the QC - Cal settings view of the Configuration screen the
general operator can access windows to view detailed information for
configured QC Cal settings.
QC - Single analyte
QC - Multiconstituent
Multiconstituent bar code SID
Westgard rules
Calibrator set

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.84: Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view
For descriptions of these fields, see Configuration screen - QC-Cal settings

QC - Cal settings view, page 2-175.
Viewing QC - Cal settings, page 2-183
Changing QC - Cal settings, page 2-186
Access the Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view
Perform this procedure to display the QC - Cal view of the

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view:

Configuration.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The Configuration screen displays.
2. Select the QC - Cal settings option.

The Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view displays.
Procedures - Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view
Procedures you can perform from the Configuration screen - QC - Cal

Viewing QC - Cal settings, page 2-183
Changing QC - Cal settings, page 2-186
Configuring QC - Cal settings
Procedures for configuring QC - Cal settings include:

Configure a new single analyte control, page 2-176
Configure a bar code for a single analyte control level, page 2-178
Configure a multiconstituent bar code SID, page 2-180
Configure a Westgard rule, page 2-181
Configure a calibrator set (c System), page 2-182
Configure a new single analyte control
Perform this procedure to configure control information for each level

of a new single analyte control set.
NOTE: You cannot configure controls for calculated assays.

view, page 2-175
Supplies NA
To configure a new single analyte control:

- Configure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The Configure single analyte window displays.
2. Select the Lot no. list button, and then select New Lot.
3. Enter the lot number for the control in the Lot no. data entry
box.
4. Enter the expiration date for the control in the Exp. date data
entry box. (optional)
5. Enter values for the following level information in the

appropriate data entry box:
Level name (maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters and
name is case sensitive)
Manufacturer mean (optional)
Manufacturer 1 SD (standard deviation) (optional)
Expected mean
Expected 1 SD (standard deviation)
6. Select the Default dilution list button, and then select the
desired dilution for the control level.
7. Enter the ID for the control level bar code in the Bar code SID
data entry box. (optional)
NOTE: The Bar code SID must be unique for each control level
within a lot.
8. Select the Display order list button, and then select the desired
display order for the control level.
9. Select Add level to add the control.

The control level name displays in the Level list.
10. Select the Level list button, select New Level to add another
level, and then repeat steps 5 through 9. (optional)

each. (optional)
Configure single analyte window, page 2-198

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Configure a bar code for a single analyte control level
Perform this procedure to define a bar code for a single analyte control
level.
NOTE: You cannot configure controls for calculated assays.

view, page 2-175
Supplies NA
To configure a bar code for a single analyte control level:

- Configure.
2. Select the Lot no. list button, and then select the desired lot.
3. Select the Level list button, and then select the desired level.
4. Enter the ID to be used for the control level bar code in the Bar
code SID data entry box.
NOTE: The Bar code SID must be unique for each control level
within a lot.
5. Select the Level list button, select another level, and then enter a
bar code SID. (optional)

each. (optional)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Configure a new multiconstituent control

of a multiconstituent control set.
view, page 2-175
Supplies NA
To configure a new multiconstituent control:

1. Select QC - Multiconstituent from the QC - Cal categories list
2. Select NEW from the Controls list, and then select F6 -

Configure.
The Configure multiconstituent control window displays.
3. Enter the control name in the Control data entry box.
4. Select the Lot number list button, and then select New Lot.
5. Enter the lot number for the control in the Lot number data
entry box.

a. Select the desired assay(s) from the list.
b. Select Done to return to the Configure multiconstituent

control window.
The assay(s) display in the table.
9. Select the assay(s) from the table, and then select Define data.
The Define data window displays.
NOTE: You must define the assay-specific data for each assay
before you can add the level.
a. Enter values for the following level information in the

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Expected mean
b. Select the Default dilution list button, and then select the
NOTE: This button is not available for calculated assay controls.
c. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you

selected more than one, and then repeat steps 9a and 9b for
each. (optional)
d. Select Done to return to the Configure multiconstituent

control window.
The assay-specific data displays in the table.
10. Select Add level to add the level.
11. Select the Level list button, select another level, and then repeat
steps 8 through 10. (optional)
Configure multiconstituent control window, page 2-200
Define data window, page 2-201
Configure a multiconstituent bar code SID
Perform this procedure to assign a bar code SID for a configured

multiconstituent control.
view, page 2-175
Supplies NA
To configure a multiconstituent bar code SID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
1. Select Multiconstituent bar code SID from the QC - Cal

categories list on the Configuration screen, and then select F6 -
Configure.
The Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window displays.
2. Enter the ID to be used for the multiconstituent control level bar

code in the New bar code SID data entry box.
NOTE: The bar code SID must be unique for each control level
within a lot.
3. Select the Control list button, and then select the desired
control.
4. Select the Lot list button, and then select the desired lot.
6. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select
Add.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to configure additional bar code SIDs.

(optional)
Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window, page 2-203
Configure a Westgard rule
Perform this procedure to configure Westgard rules, which are used to

assess quality control results.
view, page 2-175
Supplies NA
To configure a Westgard rule:

1. Select Westgard rules from the QC - Cal categories list on the
- Configure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The Configure Westgard window displays.
3. Select the desired rule from the Rules list.
4. Select the desired Status option.
NOTE: If you selected Westgard rules 2-2s 1R 1M, 2-2s 1R xM,

2-2s xR 1M, 4-1s 1M, or 4-1s xM, you must configure a run
definition.
5. Select the desired Flag type option.
NOTE: Westgard rules configured as a warning do not produce a

flag for patient results. Westgard rules configured as a failure
produce a CNTL flag for a patient result.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 5 to configure another rule for the

displayed assay. (optional)

each. (optional)

To define a run, see Configure a QC run definition, page 2-8.
Configure Westgard window, page 2-205
Westgard rule application, page 5-309
Configure a calibrator set (c System)
Perform this procedure to create a calibrator set.

view, page 2-175
Supplies NA
To configure a calibrator set:

2. Select NEW from the Calibrator sets list, and then select F6 -
Configure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The Configure calibrator set window displays.

in the Calibrator name data entry box.
4. Enter a value (1 - 6) in the Number of levels data entry box.
5. Select Done to create the calibrator set.

To configure the calibrator concentrations, see Enter a calibrator
concentration (c System), page 2-77.
Viewing QC - Cal settings
Procedures for viewing QC - Cal settings include:

View single analyte control settings, page 2-183
View multiconstituent control settings, page 2-184
View multiconstituent bar code SID settings, page 2-185
View Westgard rule(s) settings, page 2-185
View settings for a calibrator set (c System), page 2-186
View single analyte control settings
Perform this procedure to display the Details for single analyte

single analyte controls.
view, page 2-175
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the single analyte control settings:

- Details.
The Details for single analyte window displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Details for single analyte window, page 2-199
View multiconstituent control settings
Perform this procedure to display the Details for multiconstituent

control window. From this window you can view the current
configuration settings for multiconstituent controls.
view, page 2-175
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view multiconstituent control settings:

2. Select the desired control from the Controls table, and then
select F5 - Details.
The Details for multiconstituent control window displays.
3. Select the Lot number list button, and then select the desired
lot.
Details for multiconstituent control window, page 2-202

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
View multiconstituent bar code SID settings
Perform this procedure to display the Details for multiconstituent bar

code SID window. From this window you can view the current settings
for multiconstituent bar code SIDs.
view, page 2-175
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view multiconstituent bar code SID settings:

categories list on the Configuration screen, and then select F5 -
Details.
The Details for multiconstituent bar code SID window displays.
2. Select the desired bar code from the Bar codes list.
Details for multiconstituent bar code SID window, page 2-204
View Westgard rule(s) settings
Perform this procedure to display the Details for Westgard window.

From this window you can view the current settings for Westgard
rules.
view, page 2-175
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view Westgard rule settings:

- Details.
The Details for Westgard window displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Details for Westgard window, page 2-206
View settings for a calibrator set (c System)
Perform this procedure to display the Details for calibrator set window.
From this window you can view the current settings for a calibrator
set.
view, page 2-175
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view settings for a calibrator set:

2. Select the desired calibrator set from the Calibrator sets list, and
then select F5 - Details.
The Details for calibrator set window displays.
Details for calibrator set window (c System), page 2-208
Changing QC - Cal settings
Procedures for changing QC - Cal settings include:

Add a lot to a single analyte control, page 2-187
Change single analyte control settings, page 2-188
Delete a single analyte control level, page 2-189

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Change the default dilution for a single analyte control level,

page 2-190
Change multiconstituent control settings, page 2-193
Add an assay to a multiconstituent bar code SID, page 2-194
Change multiconstituent bar code SID settings, page 2-195
Delete a multiconstituent bar code SID, page 2-195
Delete a multiconstituent control level, page 2-196
Change Westgard rule settings, page 2-197
Add a lot to a single analyte control
Perform this procedure to add a lot to an existing single analyte

control.
view, page 2-175
Supplies NA
To add a lot to a single analyte control:

- Configure.
2. Select the Lot no. list button, and then select New Lot.
3. Enter the lot number for the control in the Lot no. data entry
box.

Expected mean

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
dilution for the control level.
NOTE: The bar code SID must be unique for each control level
within a lot.
8. Select the Display order list button, and then select a display
order for the control level.
9. Select Add level to add the lot.

The lot number displays in the Lot no. list.
10. Select the Level list button, select New Level to add another
level, and then repeat steps 5 through 9. (optional)

each. (optional)
Change single analyte control settings

of a new single analyte control set.
view, page 2-175
Supplies NA
To change single analyte control settings:

- Configure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Expected mean
desired dilution.
6. Select the Display order list button, and then select the desired
order.
steps 4 - 7. (optional)

selected more than one, and then repeat steps 2 - 8 for each.
(optional)
Delete a single analyte control level
Perform this procedure to delete a single analyte control level.

view, page 2-175
Supplies NA
To delete a single analyte control level:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
1. Release, archive, and delete all control results for the control
level. See Release a control result, page 5-250 and then Archive
stored control results, page 5-284.
- Configure.
4. Select the Level list button, and then select the level to delete.
5. Select Delete level.
6. Select the Level list button, select another level, and then select
Delete. (optional)

each. (optional)
Change the default dilution for a single analyte control level
Perform this procedure to change the default dilution for a single

analyte control level.
control order (single analyte), page 5-139.
view, page 2-175
Supplies NA
To change the default dilution for a single analyte control level:

- Configure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
desired dilution.
5. Select the Level list button, and then another level. (optional)

each. (optional)
Add an assay to a multiconstituent control
Perform this procedure to add an assay(s) to the level(s) of a

multiconstituent control.
view, page 2-175
Supplies NA
To add an assay to a multiconstituent control:

2. Select the desired multiconstituent control from the Controls

list, and then select F6 - Configure.
3. Select the Lot number list button, and then select the desired lot
number.

a. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list.
b. Select Done to return to the Configure multiconstituent

control window.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The selected assay(s) display in the table.

6. Select the assay(s) from the table, and then select Define data.
NOTE: You must define the assay-specific data for each assay
before you can add the level.
a. Enter values for the following level information in the
Expected mean

each. (optional)

control window.
7. Select Add level to add the assay to the level.
steps 5 through 7. (optional)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Change multiconstituent control settings
Perform this procedure to change multiconstituent control settings

when you determine that the quality control values for the ranges
have changed.
view, page 2-175
Supplies NA
To change multiconstituent control settings:


number.
5. Select the desired assay(s) from the table, and then select Define
data.
a. Enter the desired values for the following level information
in the appropriate data entry box:
Expected mean

each. (optional)

control window.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
6. Select Add level to add the data to the level.
steps 5 and 6. (optional)
Add an assay to a multiconstituent bar code SID
Perform this procedure to add an assay to a multiconstituent bar code

SID.
view, page 2-175
Supplies NA
To add an assay to a multiconstituent bar code SID:

categories list on the Configuration screen and then select F6 -
Configure.
2. Select the desired bar code SID from the Bar codes list.
NOTE: The bar code SID is unique for each control level within a
lot.
Add.
4. Select another bar code SID from the Bar codes list, and then
repeat step 3. (optional)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Change multiconstituent bar code SID settings
Perform this procedure to change multiconstituent bar code SID

settings.
view, page 2-175
Supplies NA
To change multiconstituent bar code SID settings:

Configure.
NOTE: The bar code SID is unique for each control level within a
lot.
control.
Add.
repeat steps 3 through 6. (optional)
Delete a multiconstituent bar code SID
Perform this procedure to delete a multiconstituent bar code SID.

view, page 2-175

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Supplies NA
To delete a multiconstituent bar code SID:

Configure.
3. Select Delete.
repeat step 3. (optional)
Delete a multiconstituent control level
Perform this procedure to delete a level from a multiconstituent

control set.
view, page 2-175
Supplies NA
To delete a multiconstituent control level:


number.
4. Select the Level list button, and then select the level to delete.
5. Select Delete level.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
step 5. (optional)
NOTE: If there is only one level of a multiconstituent control

configured and you delete the level, the control name is also
deleted.
Change Westgard rule settings
Perform this procedure to change Westgard rule settings, which are

used to assess quality control results.
view, page 2-175
Supplies NA
To change Westgard rule settings:

- Configure.
The Configure Westgard window displays.
4. Select the Status option to enable or disable the rule.
NOTE: If you selected Westgard rules 2-2s 1R 1M, 2-2s 1R xM,

2-2s xR 1M, 4-1s 1M, or 4-1s xM, you must configure a run
definition. See Configure a QC run definition, page 2-8.
5. Select the Flag type option for the rule.
NOTE: Westgard rules configured as a warning do not produce a

flag for patient results. Westgard rules configured as a failure
produce a CNTL flag for patient results.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to configure another rule for the

displayed assay. (optional)

each. (optional)
Windows - Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view
Windows you can access from the Configuration screen - QC - Cal

Details for single analyte window, page 2-199
Details for multiconstituent control window, page 2-202
Details for multiconstituent bar code SID window, page 2-204
Details for Westgard window, page 2-206
Details for calibrator set window (c System), page 2-208
Configure single analyte window
From the Configure single analyte window the system administrator

can configure single analyte control settings, which include:
Control level name, lot number, expiration date, default
dilution, bar code SID (sample identification), and display order
Manufacturer mean and 1 SD (standard deviation)
Expected mean and 1 SD (standard deviation)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.85: Configure single analyte window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure single analyte window field
Configure a new single analyte control, page 2-176
Add a lot to a single analyte control, page 2-187
Change single analyte control settings, page 2-188
Delete a single analyte control level, page 2-189
Change the default dilution for a single analyte control level,
page 2-190
Configure a bar code for a single analyte control level, page 2-178
Details for single analyte window
From the Details for single analyte window you can view the current
settings for single analyte controls, which include:
dilution, bar code SID (sample identification), and display order

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.86: Details for single analyte window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for single analyte window field
View single analyte control settings, page 2-183
Configure multiconstituent control window
From the Configure multiconstituent control window the system

administrator can configure the settings for the control name, level
name, lot number, and expiration date. Also, the system administrator
can access windows to add or delete a level, define data for a level, and
add or delete an assay from a level.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.87: Configure multiconstituent control window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure multiconstituent control

Delete a multiconstituent control level, page 2-196
Define data window
From the Define data window the system administrator can configure
the following settings for multiconstituent controls:
Default dilution

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.88: Define data window
For descriptions of these fields, see Define data window field descriptions,
Details for multiconstituent control window
From the Details for multiconstituent control window you can view
the current settings for multiconstituent controls, which include:
dilution, and display order

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.89: Details for multiconstituent control window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for multiconstituent control

View multiconstituent control settings, page 2-184
Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window
From the Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window, the

system administrator can assign the bar code SID (sample
identification) for a configured multiconstituent control. Also, the
system administrator can add or delete assays from a bar code SID and
delete a bar code SID.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.90: Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure multiconstituent bar code

SID window field descriptions, page Appendix E-210.
Configure a multiconstituent bar code SID, page 2-180
Add an assay to a multiconstituent bar code SID, page 2-194
Change multiconstituent bar code SID settings, page 2-195
Delete a multiconstituent bar code SID, page 2-195
Details for multiconstituent bar code SID window
From the Details for multiconstituent bar code SID window you can
view the current settings for multiconstituent bar code SID (sample
identification), which include control name, lot number, level name
and assays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.91: Details for multiconstituent bar code SID window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for multiconstituent bar code
SID window field descriptions, page Appendix E-211.
View multiconstituent bar code SID settings, page 2-185
Configure Westgard window
From the Configure Westgard window, the system administrator can

select the Westgard rules that are enabled for an assay and determine
whether the failure of the rules is flagged as a Warning or a Failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.92: Configure Westgard window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure Westgard window field

Configure a Westgard rule, page 2-181
Change Westgard rule settings, page 2-197
Details for Westgard window
From the Details for Westgard window you can view the Westgard
rule(s) that are enabled for an assay and whether the failure of the
rule(s) is flagged as a Warning or a Failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 2.93: Details for Westgard window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for Westgard window field
View Westgard rule(s) settings, page 2-185
Configure calibrator set window (c System)
From the Configure calibrator set window the system administrator

can configure the calibrator set name and number of levels.
Figure 2.94: Configure calibrator set window (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure calibrator set window (c

Configure a calibrator set (c System), page 2-182

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Delete a calibrator set (photometric - c System), page 2-120
Details for calibrator set window (c System)
From the Details for calibrator set window you can view the current
settings for the calibrator set name and number of levels.
Figure 2.95: Details for calibrator set window (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for calibrator set window (c
View settings for a calibrator set (c System), page 2-186

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 2 Software installation and backup
Software installation and backup

Your Abbott field service representative must install the software
before you can use your system.
You may need to install certain system software releases. Abbott
Laboratories will notify you when you are to install a new software
release.
Before you install system software, read the information that
accompanies the ARCHITECT System Software CD-ROM.
Software installation and backup topics include:
Utilities screen - Software install view, page 2-209
Utilities screen - Backup software view, page 2-211
Utilities screen - Software install view

From the Software install view of the Utilities screen the general
operator can view the current system software version. The system
administrator can install system software.
Figure 2.96: Utilities screen - Software install view
For descriptions of these fields, see Utilities screen - Software install view

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Software installation and backup Section 2
To display this view of the screen, see Access the Utilities screen -
Software install view, page 2-210.
View the system software version, page 2-210
Access the Utilities screen - Software install view
Perform this procedure to display the Software install view of the

Utilities screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Utilities screen - Software install view:

1. Select System from the menu bar, and then select Utilities.
The Utilities screen - Backup software view displays.
2. Select the Software install option.

The Utilities screen - Software install view displays.
Procedure - Utilities screen - Software install view
The procedure you can perform from the Utilities screen - Software
install view and its related window is:
View the system software version, page 2-210
View the system software version
Perform this procedure to view the version information for the current
system software.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
User access level General operator / system administrator
Supplies NA
To view the system software version:

1. Select System from the menu bar, and then select Utilities.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2. Select the Software install option.

The current software version displays.
Utilities screen - Backup software view

From the Backup view of the Utilities screen you can create a software
backup, access a window to add a comment for the backup, and view
backups that were previously created. If necessary, Abbott service and
support personnel can restore your software from a backup.
Figure 2.97: Utilities screen - Backup software view
For descriptions of these fields, see Utilities screen - Backup software view
To display this view of the screen, see Access the Utilities screen - Backup
software view, page 2-212.
Create a system software backup, page 2-212

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Software installation and backup Section 2
Access the Utilities screen - Backup software view
Perform this procedure to display the Backup software view of the

Utilities screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Utilities screen - Backup software view:

Select System from the menu bar, and then select Utilities.
Create backup window, page 2-213
Procedure - Utilities screen - Backup view
The procedure you can perform from the Utilities screen - Backup view
and its related window is:
Create a system software backup
Perform this procedure in accordance with your laboratory's data

backup schedule and any time you perform module calibration
procedures, edit configuration, add a new assay, or calibrate an assay.
The software backup procedure allows you to transfer ARCHITECT
System information, such as module calibrations, configuration, and
the database, to an alternative location. Backing up system
information protects against data loss.
You can create and save a total of three software backups. Additional
backups replace the existing backups starting with the oldest first.
Prerequisite Access the Utilities screen - Backup software view,
page 2-212
Module status Offline, Stopped, or Ready
Supplies NA
To create a system software backup:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
1. Select F4 - Create backup from the Utilities screen.

The Create backup window displays.
2. Enter a comment (up to 50 characters) in the Comment data

3. Select Done to create the backup.

A progress indicator displays until the process completes.
Windows - Utilities screen - Backup view
Windows you can access from the Utilities screen - Backup view
include:
Create backup window
From the Create backup window you can enter a comment for the
software backup.
Figure 2.98: Create backup window
For descriptions of these fields, see Create backup window field


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay file management Section 2
Assay file management

You need to install assay files when you install a new system and when
new assays become available. Assay installation requires system
administrator logon or higher.
Before you install assay files, read the information that accompanies
the ARCHITECT System Assay CD-ROM.
Assay installation procedures include:
Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214
Import an assay file (c System), page 2-215
Export an assay file (c System), page 2-216
Install or delete an assay file

Perform this SCC (system control center) diagnostic procedure to
install or delete an assay file(s). The ARCHITECT System can store 200
c System assay files.
When deleting a c System photometric assay that is used as a reference
assay, you must perform one of the following:
Change the Use Cal Factor or Reference photometric assay
parameter in the assay file to use a different assay
Delete the assay
Prerequisite Access the Diagnostics screen, page 10-651
User access level System Administrator
Supplies ARCHITECT System Assay CD-ROM
To install or delete an assay file(s):

1. Select the Module 5 (SCC) option on the Diagnostics screen.
2. Select the page down scroll button, and then select the Utilities
tab.
The diagnostic procedures for the Utilities category display.
3. Select 6114 Install / Delete Assays from the DIAGNOSTICS

PROCEDURES list, and then select F5 - Perform.
4. Select OK to perform the procedure.

The Diagnostic perform window displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 2 Assay file management
5. Follow the onscreen instructions to install or delete an assay(s)

file.
NOTE: When handling CD-ROMs, only hold them by their

edges. Avoid getting fingerprints on the CD-ROM surface. If the
CD-ROM comes in contact with moisture the ink can smear or
run.
6. Select Done to return to the Diagnostics screen.
7. Remove the CD-ROM from the drive if you installed an assay

file(s). (optional)
NOTE: If you installed a new version of an existing assay file(s),

see the information that accompanied the ARCHITECT System
Assay CD-ROM for specific calibration and QC requirements.
You may need to calibrate the assay(s) and run all levels of
controls before reporting patient results. See Create a calibration
order, page 6-12, Create a control order (single analyte), page 5-139
or Create a control order (multiconstituent), page 5-143.
Diagnostics screen, page 10-650
Diagnostic perform window, page 10-655
SCC diagnostic categories, page 10-693
Import an assay file (c System)

Perform this procedure to copy an assay file to another ARCHITECT c
System. The ARCHITECT System can store 200 c System assay files.
IMPORTANT: When you copy an assay file from an ARCHITECT c

8000 System to an ARCHITECT c 16000 System (or visa versa), the
sample probe wash protocol and/or wavelength assay parameters may
change. A status message displays to indicate this change during the
import process. For more information see Descriptions of import status
messages, page Appendix E-159. For assay parameter information refer
to the manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package
insert or reagent application sheet).
Supplies Floppy disk with exported assay files

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay file management Section 2
To import an assay file:

1. Select F3 - Import on the Configuration screen.
You are prompted to insert a floppy disk into the floppy drive.
2. Insert a disk into the drive.

The Import assay window displays a list of the files on the disk.
3. Select the desired assay(s), and then select the Import button.
The selected assay files are copied to the system and the Import
assay window displays the status of the imported files.
NOTE: If there is a software version mismatch between the

system you have exported the files from and the system you are
importing the files to, an error message displays and the assays
will not be copied.
IMPORTANT: You MUST confirm all assay parameters are

imported correctly. See Viewing assay settings, page 2-97.
5. Remove the floppy disk from the drive.
page 2-65
Import assay window, page 2-69
Export an assay file (c System)

Perform this procedure to save an assay file from one ARCHITECT c
System onto a floppy disk so you copy it to another c System.
Supplies Floppy disk
To export an assay file:

1. Insert a floppy disk into the floppy drive.
2. Select F4 - Export on the Configuration screen.

The Export assay window displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 2 Assay file management
3. Select the desired assay(s), and then select the Export button.
The selected assay files are copied to the floppy disk, and the
Export assay window displays the status.
5. Remove the floppy disk from the drive.

To copy the file to another system, see Import an assay file (c System),
page 2-215.
page 2-65
Export assay window, page 2-70

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Maintenance and diagnostic file management Section 2
Maintenance and diagnostic file management

You need to install maintenance and diagnostic files when you install
a new system and when new maintenance and diagnostics files
become available. Maintenance and diagnostic file installation
requires system administrator logon or higher.
Before you install these files, read the information that accompanies
the ARCHITECT System Maintenance and Diagnostics CD-ROM.
To install or delete maintenance or diagnostic files, see Install or delete
a maintenance or diagnostic procedure file, page 2-218
Install or delete a maintenance or diagnostic procedure file

Perform this procedure to install or delete a procedure file(s).
User access level System Administrator
Supplies ARCHITECT System Maintenance and Diagnostic
CD-ROM
To install or delete a maintenance or diagnostic procedure file:

1. Select the Module 5 (SCC) option on the Diagnostics screen.
2. Select the page down scroll button, and then select the Utilities
tab.
The diagnostic procedures for the Utilities category display.
3. Select 6115 Install / Delete Procedures from the

DIAGNOSTICS PROCEDURES list, and then select F5 -
Perform.

The Diagnostic perform window displays.
5. Follow the onscreen instructions to install or delete a procedure

file(s).
NOTE: When handling CD-ROMs, only hold them by their

edges. Avoid getting fingerprints on the CD-ROM surface. If the
CD-ROM comes in contact with moisture the ink can smear or
run.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 2 Maintenance and diagnostic file management
7. Remove the CD-ROM from the drive if you installed a procedure

file(s). (optional)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Principles of operation
Section 3
Introduction
<F=0>
An ARCHITECT System uses photometric, potentiometric, and/or

CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) technology to
measure analyte concentrations in samples.
Principles of operation topics include:
c System principles of operation, page 3-2
Provides an overview of the technology, optical measurements,
and protocols used for c System assay processing.
i System principles of operation, page 3-24
Provides an overview of the technology, optical measurements,
and protocols used for i System assay processing.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
c System principles of operation Section 3
c System principles of operation

ARCHITECT c System principles of operation provides an overview of
the photometric and potentiometric assay methods, assay processing,
and the SmartWash feature used for analyte measurement.
Information also includes an overview of sample interference indices
for lipemic, hemolyzed, and icteric samples.
c System principles of operation topics include:
Photometric method, page 3-2
Potentiometric method, page 3-6
Assay processing (c System), page 3-13
SmartWash feature (c System), page 3-19
Sample interference indices (c System), page 3-20
Photometric method
Photometric method is the process used by the c System to measure
sample absorbance for the quantitation of analyte concentration.
Photometric method topics include:
Photometric technology, page 3-2
Optical measurements (c System), page 3-4
Photometric technology
Photometric technology is the measurement of the amount of light a

sample absorbs and involves passing a beam of light through a sample
and measuring the intensity of light that reaches a detector. Beer's Law
establishes the mathematical relationship between the absorbance of
the solution and the concentration of the analyte. The absorbance of
the solution changes as the reaction progresses and measurements are
taken when either all reactant is depleted and the reaction is stable
(end-point assays), or when the reactant reaches a stable rate (rate
assays).
Photometric technology topics include:
End-point assay reactions, page 3-3
Rate assay reactions, page 3-3

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3 c System principles of operation
End-point assay reactions
End-point assay reactions are reactions that are allowed to react until
all reactant is depleted and the absorbance is stable. When the
reaction is complete, the system measures the absorbance readings
used for calibration and calculating results.
For end-point assays, the system calculates the concentration using
the absorbance data obtained during the main read time specified on
the Configure assay parameters window - General Reaction Definition
view.
The following illustration shows a typical end-point assay reaction
curve.
Figure 3.1: Example of an end-point assay reaction curve
Rate assay reactions
Rate assay reactions are reactions that are allowed to reach a stable rate
in which the change in absorbance between readings is constant. The
system performs several readings during this time, calculates
absorbance change per minute (rate), and then uses the rate to
calculate results.
For rate assays, the system uses the linear least squares method to
calculate the change of absorbance per minute ( Abs/min) during the
main read time specified on the Configure assay parameters window -
General Reaction Definition view. The calculation must include at

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
least three photometric points to receive a result without a flag. The

maximum number of photometric points is 33.
The following illustration shows a typical rate assay reaction curve.
Figure 3.2: Example of a down rate assay reaction curve
Optical measurements (c System)
Optical measurement is the process the c System uses to obtain

absorbance readings, and then convert them to assay-specific analyte
concentration units or qualitative interpretations.
Optical measurement topics include:
Optical system and measurement sequence (c System), page 3-4
Data reduction calculation (photometric - c System), page 3-6
Optical system and measurement sequence (c System)
The optics system on the processing module is a direct photometry

system that directs and aligns the light from the source lamp, through
the water bath and reaction cuvette, and then into the optics unit. The
system focuses only light that originates from the source lamp and
simultaneously measures the intensity of 16 different wavelengths.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 3.3: Optical system
Legend:
1. Lamp
2. Heat glass
3. Convex lens
4. Water bath lens
5. Cuvette
6. Shutter
7. Convex lens
8. Mirror
9. Entrance slit
10. Diffraction grating
11. Linear photodiode array
12. Preamp board
13. DAQ (data acquisition board)
14. CPU (central processing unit) board
Measurement occurs as the optical system performs the following:
1. A convex lens focuses light from a tungsten halogen lamp and
passes the light through the reaction cuvette to allow
measurement of absorbance changes as the reaction progresses.
2. A second convex lens focuses the light onto the mirror, which
reflects the light through the slit onto the diffraction grating.
3. The grating breaks up the focused light beam into 16 component

wavelengths (340 to 804 mm) and reflects the light spectrum to
the photodiode array.
4. A photodiode array measures the light intensity at the different

wavelengths.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
5. The preamp board, DAQ board, and CPU board convert and
amplify the signal from the photodiode array, and then
communicate transmittance values to the SCC (system control
center) where data reduction and result calculation occur.
Data reduction calculation (photometric - c System)
Data reduction calculation is the method used to calculate the final

absorbance values and result concentration.
The SCC (system control center) receives the transmittance readings
from the processing module for each cuvette, determines the readings
required to calculate the assay, and then converts these readings to
absorbance values. The system uses readings from one
(monochromatic) or two (bichromatic) wavelengths to calculate assay
results. Most assays are bichromatic.
Number of wavelengths measured at How the absorbance values are

each read point calculated
1 - Monochromatic Uses the reading from a single
wavelength.
2 - Bichromatic Subtracts the readings taken at the
secondary wavelength from the
readings taken at the primary
wavelength and uses the difference as
the absorbance value.
NOTE: The system adjusts the absorbance data readings to 10 mm

light path length values.
The absorbance readings are blank corrected (as specified for each
test), and then converted to concentration units.
Photometric data reduction methods, page Appendix C-2
Potentiometric method
Potentiometry is a detection technology used by the c System to
measure electrical potential in a sample. The c System uses an ICT
(integrated chip technology) module to measure potentiometric assays
(electrolytes).
Potentiometric method topics include:
Integrated chip technology, page 3-7
ICT measurement, page 3-7

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Integrated chip technology
ICT (integrated chip technology) is the method the c System uses to

simultaneously measure sodium, potassium, and chloride. ICT
methodology uses solid state ion-selective electrodes contained in a
single chip (ICT module), which reduces the maintenance required to
perform electrolyte measurements.
Electrode Description
Sodium (Na+) A Crown Ether ionophore incorporated into an ion-selective
plastic membrane.
(It is NOT a glass electrode, and therefore is less affected by
pH changes.)
Potassium (K+) Valinomycin incorporated into an ion-selective plastic
membrane.
Chloride (Cl-) A solid silver chloride (AgCl) disk.
Reference A silver/silver chloride electrode in a potassium chloride
(KCl) gel inner solution, separated from the sample by a
porous ceramic tube.
ICT measurement
ICT measurement is the process the c System uses to obtain millivolt

readings, and then convert them to assay-specific analyte conversion
units. The measurements of ICT Reference Solution and ICT samples
are used to calculate the assay results.
ICT measurement topics include:
ICT reference solution and sample delivery/processing, page 3-7
Measurement by the ICT module, page 3-11
Data reduction calculation (potentiometric - c System), page 3-12
ICT reference solution and sample delivery/processing
ICT Reference Solution and ICT samples are delivered to the ICT
module where measurement takes place.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 3.4: ICT Reference Solution delivery
During processing, the following events occur:

1. The ICT reference solution cup is filled with ICT Reference
Solution.
The syringe on the right side of the ICT reference solution pump
moves ICT Reference Solution from the bottle, through the
warming ring, and into the ICT reference solution cup.
2. The ICT Reference Solution is analyzed.

a. The ICT unit moves down to position the ICT probe in the
ICT reference solution cup.
b. The syringe on the right side of the ICT aspiration pump

aspirates ICT Reference Solution from the cup into the ICT
module.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
c. The ICT module measures the ICT Reference Solution and the
system converts the measurements into millivolt readings
used for reference when calculating sample result
concentrations. See Measurement by the ICT module,
page 3-11.
3. Waste is removed.
High-concentration waste
a. The syringe on the right side of the ICT aspiration pump
moves the ICT Reference Solution from the ICT module to
the high-concentration compartment in the water
bath/waste overflow area.
b. The syringe on the left side of the ICT aspiration pump

aspirates the liquid waste from the high-concentration
compartment in the water bath/waste overflow area.
c. The syringe on the left side of the ICT aspiration pump moves
the liquid waste to the high-concentration waste tubing.
Low-concentration waste
a. The syringe on the left side of the ICT reference solution
pump moves the remaining ICT Reference Solution from the
ICT reference solution cup.
b. The syringe on the left side of the ICT reference solution

pump moves the solution into the low-concentration
c. Gravity causes the liquid waste to drain from the

low-concentration compartment in the water bath/waste
overflow area into the low-concentration waste tubing.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 3.5: ICT sample delivery
During processing, the following events occur:

1. The sample and reagent are dispensed into the cuvette.
a. The sample pipettor dispenses 15 L of sample into the
cuvette.
b. Reagent pipettor 1 dispenses 345 L of ICT sample diluent

into the cuvette.
c. Mixer 1 mixes the sample and diluent.
d. The reaction carousel continues to rotate for a total of 31

movements until the cuvette aligns with the ICT unit.
2. The sample is analyzed.

a. The ICT unit moves out and down to position the ICT probe
in the cuvette.
b. The syringe on the right side of the ICT aspiration pump

aspirates the sample from the cuvette into the ICT module.
c. The ICT module measures the sample and the system

converts the measurements into millivolt readings used
when calculating sample result concentrations. See
Measurement by the ICT module, page 3-11.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3. Waste is removed.
a. The syringe on the right side of the ICT aspiration pump
moves the sample from the ICT module to the
high-concentration compartment in the water bath/waste
overflow area.
b. The syringe on the left side of the ICT aspiration pump

aspirates the liquid waste from the high-concentration
c. The syringe on the left side of the ICT aspiration pump moves
the liquid waste to the high-concentration waste tubing.
Measurement by the ICT module
The ICT module measures:

ICT Reference Solution - (once before and after each serum
sample and twice before and after each urine sample) to provide
a reference concentration used to calculate results
Samples - (patient, QC, and calibrators) to obtain the readings
used to calculate results
The following measurements are captured:
Potential difference between the sample and ICT Reference
Solution for each electrode
Potential of each electrode in contact with ICT Reference
Solution
Potential of each electrode in contact with the sample
In the figure below the internal components of the ICT module are
shown on the right. The direction of the sample flow is indicated by
the arrow.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 3.6: ICT module and internal components
Legend:
1. O-ring
2. Liquid junction ceramic tube
3. Inner solution (KCl gel)
4. Ref electrode
5. Cl- electrode
6. K+ electrode
7. Na+ electrode
Data reduction calculation (potentiometric - c System)

result concentration. For each sample, the system compares the
millivolt readings from the sample to the millivolt readings from the
ICT Reference Solution analyzed immediately after the sample. The
difference in the millivolt readings is used to calculate the assay
results.
Potentiometric data reduction method, page Appendix C-8

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay processing (c System)

Many kinds of assay processing activities take place between sample
aspiration and the final read. Components located around the
reaction carousel perform these activities.
NOTE: The c 16000 assay processing components differ from the c

8000 in order to accommodate the A and B lines. For more
information see Processing center (c 16000), page 1-50.
Figure 3.7: c System assay processing components
Legend:
1. Sample pipettor
2. Sample probe wash cup
3. Reagent pipettor (1) and wash cup
4. Reagent pipettor (2) and wash cup
5. ICT unit
6. Cuvette washer
7. Mixers (2)
8. Mixer wash cups (2)
9. Lamp

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
10. Cuvette segments (11)

The movement of the reaction carousel, the timing of these
movements, and the position of the components allow each reaction
activity to occur at a specified time and location.
During processing, the reaction carousel rotates counter-clockwise
approximately 1/4 turn every 4.5 seconds to position the cuvettes at
each location. Each rotation includes 41 cuvette positions on the c
8000 processing module or 41 cuvette pair positions on the c 16000
processing module. As each rotation occurs the cuvettes pass the
photometric position, where the lamp is located, and the absorbance
is measured in each cuvette.
The following illustration shows key positions on the reaction carousel
where activities occur.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 3.8: Reaction carousel positions
The following information describes the movement and timing used

in all assay protocol types.
Position(s) Description
1 The sample pipettor dispenses sample into the cuvette at
the starting position. The c 16000 sample pipettor
dispenses sample into one cuvette or two separate (paired)
cuvettes.
2 The reaction carousel rotates approximately 1/4 turn (41
cuvettes for the c 8000 processing module or 41 cuvette
pairs for the c 16000 processing module). The cuvette
containing sample is now at the first reagent dispense
position. Reagent pipettor 1 dispenses reagent 1 in the
cuvette.
3 The reaction carousel rotates one cycle (1/4 turn) to this
position at which no activity takes place.
4 The reaction carousel rotates one cycle to the first mixing
position where the mixer unit (mixer 1) mixes the sample
and reagent 1.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Movement from 4 As the reaction carousel rotates from position 4 to position
to 5 5, the cuvette passes the photometric position where the
lamp is located and the photometer measures the
absorbance.
5 A full rotation of the reaction carousel consists of 4 cycles.
For the c 8000 processing module each cycle rotates 41
cuvette positions, therefore a full rotation includes 164
cuvettes (4 x 41 = 164).
For the c 16000 processing module each cycle rotates 41
cuvette pair positions, therefore a full rotation includes
164 cuvette pairs (4 x 41 = 164 pairs).
Since there are a total of 165 cuvettes or cuvette pairs, the
cuvette is now one position behind the starting position.
6 - 135 The reaction carousel continues to rotate and the reaction
mixture incubates. The photometer takes absorbance
readings every time the cuvette passes the photometric
position for a total of 33 read times.
136 - 164 The cuvette washer removes the reaction mixture to waste
and cleans the cuvette with Alkaline Wash, Acid Wash, and
DI water. Then the cuvette washer dispenses DI water into
the cuvette for a water blank measurement to ensure
cuvette integrity. Finally, the cuvette washer aspirates the
water and dries the cuvette.
165 The clean cuvette waits at this position for one cycle before
it begins again at position 1 with a new reaction.
Some assay protocols may also use the following locations.
5 If onboard dilution is required, the sample pipettor aspirates
the diluted sample and dispenses the sample into the new
cuvette that is currently at position 1.
31 For an ICT sample, the ICT probe aspirates the diluted
sample into the ICT unit.
67 If the reaction requires a second reagent, reagent pipettor 2
dispenses reagent 2 into the cuvette.
68 The mixer unit (mixer 2) mixes the second reagent with the
sample and reagent mixture.
The following illustration shows the relationship between the timing

of photometric reads and the dispense of samples and reagents.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 3.9: Photometric timing
Assay processing for a one-reagent protocol (c System), page 3-17
Assay processing for a two-reagent protocol (c System), page 3-18
Assay processing for a dilution protocol (c System), page 3-18
Assay processing for an ICT protocol, page 3-19
Assay processing for a one-reagent protocol (c System)
The following steps describe the c System operation and photometric

reaction that occurs during one-reagent assay processing.
In position 1 the sample pipettor (either from the sample
handler or the sample carousel) aspirates sample, and then
dispenses it into a cuvette.
In position 2 reagent pipettor 1 aspirates reagent, and then
dispenses it into the cuvette.
In position 4 the mixer unit (mixer 1) mixes the sample and
reagent.
In positions 4 - 132 the reaction mixture incubates, and the
photometer takes photometric reads every time the cuvette
passes the photometric position where the lamp is located. The
reaction completes.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
In positions 136 - 164 the cuvette washer removes the reaction

mixture to waste and cleans the cuvette with Alkaline Wash,
Acid Wash, and DI water. Then the cuvette washer dispenses DI
water into the cuvette for a water blank measurement to ensure
cuvette integrity. Finally, the cuvette washer aspirates the water
and dries the cuvette.
Assay processing for a two-reagent protocol (c System)
The following steps describe the c System operation and photometric

reaction that occurs during two-reagent assay processing.
dispenses the first reagent into the cuvette.
reagent.
passes the photometric position where the lamp is located.
dispenses the second reagent into the cuvette.
In position 68 mixer unit (mixer 2) mixes the second reagent
with the sample and reagent mixture.
passes the photometer. The reaction completes.
mixture to waste and cleans the cuvette with Alkaline Wash,
Acid Wash, and DI water. Then the cuvette washer dispenses DI
water into the cuvette for a water blank measurement to ensure
cuvette integrity. Finally, the cuvette washer aspirates the water
and dries the cuvette.
Assay processing for a dilution protocol (c System)
The following steps describe the c System operation that occurs when
the sample is diluted prior to sample processing.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

In position 2 reagent pipettor 1 aspirates sample diluent, and
then dispenses it into the cuvette.
diluent.
In position 5 the sample pipettor aspirates diluted sample, and
then dispenses it into a new cuvette. The sample then follows
the one-reagent or two-reagent assay protocol, as appropriate.
Assay processing for an ICT protocol
The following steps describe the c System operation and

potentiometric reaction for ICT (integrated chip technology) assays.
In position 2 reagent pipettor 1 aspirates ICT sample diluent,
and then dispenses it into the cuvette.
In position 4 the mixer unit (mixer 1) mixes the sample and ICT
sample diluent.
In position 31 the ICT probe aspirates the diluted sample, and
then the ICT module analyzes the sample.
NOTE: The ICT module analyzes the ICT Reference Solution
once before and after each serum sample and twice before and
after each urine sample to provide a reference concentration
used to calculate results.
mixture to waste, cleans the cuvette with Alkaline Wash, Acid
Wash, and DI water. Then the cuvette washer dispenses DI water
into the cuvette for a water blank measurement to ensure cuvette
integrity. Finally, the cuvette washer aspirates the water and dries
the cuvette.
SmartWash feature (c System)

SmartWash is a feature of the c System that provides an additional
wash process, when needed, for reagent probes, sample probes, and
cuvettes. It is used to prevent assay-to-assay interference when specific
combinations of assays are tested.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
If a known combination of assays results in assay-to-assay interference,

you can avoid interference by configuring the combination as a
SmartWash pair. This configuration executes an additional wash
process between measurement of the assays.
NOTE: Abbott reagents are configured with default SmartWash pair

settings.
To prevent consecutive measurement of assays configured as
SmartWash pairs the c System processing module uses the OSS
(optimum sampling sequence) feature, which automatically changes
the sampling sequence.
OSS feature (c System)

The OSS (optimum sampling sequence) feature is an automatic process
that maximizes processing speed and throughput by allowing the
system to rearrange sampling sequence. This rearrangement prevents
consecutive measurement of interfering reagents, and therefore
reduces the number of required washes and unused cuvettes. If it is
not possible to rearrange the sampling sequence, the system
automatically activates SmartWash.
In the following example assays A, B, and C are ordered and
SmartWash is configured between A and B. The elimination of the
wash cycle shows how throughput is improved when the OSS feature
is used.
OSS feature not used OSS feature used
Cycle System operations Cycle System operations

1 Sampling for assay A 1 Sampling for assay B
2 Wash (empty cuvettes) 2 Sampling for assay A
3 Sampling for assay B 3 Sampling for assay C
4 Sampling for assay C
Sample interference indices (c System)

The sample interference indices are sample measurements that allow
estimation of lipids, hemoglobin, and bilirubin present in lipemic,
hemolyzed, and icteric samples, respectively. The estimation is based
on absorbance measurement of:
Turbidity for lipids (lipemia)
Red color for hemoglobin (hemolysis)
Yellow color for bilirubin (icterus)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
c System interference indices topics include:

Sample interference indices protocols (c System), page 3-21
Sample interference indices measurement (c System), page 3-22
Sample interference indices protocols (c System)
The sample interference indices protocols are two different methods

that you can use to measure the lipemia, hemolysis, and icterus for a
sample. Both methods require selection of a reference photometric
assay that the system uses to estimate indices on a sample. You can
select an existing assay for the reference photometric assay (common
test file) or create a new assay that is only used for sample interference
indices measurement (extra test file).
The type of assay file you select determines whether an additional
cuvette is used to measure the indices.
The common test file is a protocol that uses an existing assay file such
as AST or ALT as the reference photometric assay. The system
simultaneously measures indices in the same cuvette as the selected
assay and therefore does not impact system throughput.
When determining whether to use the common test file option,
consider:
Your choice of reference assays is limited to assays that are
measured at different wavelengths than the indices and use a
colorless reagent.
Extra reagent is used if you do not routinely order the reference
assay on most samples because reagent is dispensed for sample
interference indices even though you do not order the reference
assay.
The extra test file is a protocol that uses an assay file for the reference
photometric assay that is defined to use saline as the reagent. The
system measures the indices using saline and therefore does not
impact reagent use. This method uses an earlier read window than the
common test file method therefore providing a faster turnaround time
for reporting results.
When determining whether to use the extra test file, consider that
throughput is lowered because an additional cuvette is required.
Sample interference indices measurement (c System), page 3-22

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample interference indices measurement (c System)
Sample interference indices measurement is the process a c System

uses to measure hemolysis, icterus, and lipemia in a sample once it has
been mixed with the reagent or saline.
Specimens containing interfering substances such as hemolysis,
icterus, and lipemia absorb at different wavelengths as shown in the
following graph.
Figure 3.10: Absorption spectra of NADH and hemolyzed, icteric, and

lipemic samples
NOTE: NADH is the reference absorbance peak.

To measure the three interfering substances, the system measures
absorbance values of four wavelength pairs and, using the appropriate
photometric reads, applies a mathematical calculation to determine
the relative interferent concentration as shown:
Lipemia = M (a01 x A1 + a02 x A2 + a03 x A3 + a04 x A4)
Hemolysis = M (a05 x A1 + a06 x A2 + a07 x A3 + a08 x A4)
Icterus = M (a09 x A1 + a10 x A2 + a11 x A3 + a12 x A4)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Where:
M = M is the correction for the sample
dilution. (reagent volume + sample
volume) / (sample volume).
a01, a02, a03, and a04 = Constants specific to each interferrant
(lipemic) are used by the system to calculate the
a05, a06, a07, and a08 sample interference indices. Constants
(hemolysis) are not user definable.
a09, a10, a11, and a12

(icterus)
Absorbance level measured at = (absorbance primary wavelength -
wavelength pairs absorbance secondary wavelength.)
A1 (500 nm/524 nm)
A2 (572 nm/604 nm)
A3 (628 nm/660 nm)
A4 (524 nm/804 nm)
Sample interference indices protocols (c System), page 3-21

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
i System principles of operation Section 3
i System principles of operation

ARCHITECT i System principles of operation provides an overview of
the CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay)
technology, assay processing, and optical system used for analyte
measurement.
i System principles of operation topics include:
CMIA method, page 3-24
Assay processing (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 3-29
CMIA method
CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) is a detection
method used by an i System to measure and quantify analyte
concentration.
CMIA method topics include:
CMIA technology and reaction sequence, page 3-24
Optical measurements (i System), page 3-27
CMIA technology and reaction sequence
CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) is a technology

used to determine the presence of antigens, antibodies, and analytes
in samples.
The reactants necessary for CMIA technology include:
Paramagnetic microparticles coated with a capture molecule
(antigen, antibody, or viral particle) specific for the analyte being
measured
Acridinium-labeled conjugate
Pre-Trigger Solution and Trigger Solution
The following graphic symbols are used to represent these reactants.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3 i System principles of operation
Figure 3.11: Graphical symbols
Legend:
1. Anti-analyte microparticle with capture molecule
2. Sample analyte measured
3. Acridinium-labeled conjugate
4. Sample analyte not measured
A CMIA reaction sequence is the order of interactions between the
analyte present in the sample and the reactants. A sequence is specific
to the assay protocol.
The following two-step reaction sequence illustrates the basic
principles of a reaction.
1. The R1 pipettor dispenses microparticles (paramagnetic
microparticles coated with capture molecules) into the sample in
the reaction vessel. The vortexer mixes the reaction mixture.
Figure 3.12: Sample and microparticle binding
2. The reaction mixture incubates and the analyte present in the

sample binds to the corresponding capture molecules on the
microparticles forming the immune complex.
3. A magnet attracts the paramagnetic microparticles (bound to the

specific analyte) to a wall of the reaction vessel. The wash zone 1
manifold washes the reaction mixture to remove unbound
materials. Further processing can now take place.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 3.13: Magnet attracting paramagnetic microparticles
4. The R2 pipettor dispenses a chemiluminescent

acridinium-labeled conjugate. The conjugate binds to the
immune complex to complete the reaction mixture.
Figure 3.14: Addition of the acridinium-labeled conjugate
5. The reaction mixture incubates.
6. The wash zone 2 manifold washes the reaction mixture to

remove unbound materials.
7. The pre-trigger nozzle dispenses Pre-Trigger Solution (hydrogen

peroxide) and the CMIA optical system takes a background read.
Pre-trigger performs the following functions:
Creates an acidic environment to prevent early release of
energy (light emission).
Helps to keep microparticles from clumping.
Splits acridinium dye off the conjugate bound to the
microparticle complex. This action prepares the acridinium
dye for the next step.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
8. The trigger nozzle dispenses Trigger Solution (sodium hydroxide)

to the reaction mixture. The acridinium undergoes an oxidative
reaction when exposed to peroxide and an alkaline solution.
This reaction causes the chemiluminescent reaction to occur.
N-methylacridone forms and releases energy (light emission) as
it returns to its ground state.
9. The CMIA optical system measures the chemiluminescent

emission (activated read) over a predefined time period to
quantitate the analyte concentration or to determine qualitative
interpretations for index (cutoff) assays.
Assay processing for One step 25 (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 3-31
Assay processing for Two step 18-4 (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 3-33
STAT assay processing for One step 11 (i 2000SR), page 3-38
STAT assay processing for Two step 4-4 (i 2000SR), page 3-41
Optical measurements (i System)
Optical measurement is the process an i System uses to obtain RLU

(relative light unit) readings, and then convert them to assay-specific
analyte concentration units or qualitative interpretations for index
(cutoff) assays.
Optical measurement topics include:
Optical system and measurement sequence (i System), page 3-27
Data reduction calculation (i System), page 3-29
Optical system and measurement sequence (i System)
The optical system on the processing module is a system that directs

the chemiluminescent emission from the reaction vessel to the CMIA
(chemiluminescent micropartical immunoassay) reader.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 3.15: Optical system
Legend:
1. Photomultiplier tube (PMT)
2. CMIA reader
3. Light pipe
4. Trigger Solution delivery nozzle
5. Reaction vessel
6. Magnet
7. CMIA shutter assembly
Measurement occurs as the optical system performs the following:
1. Closes the shutter around the reaction vessel to seal off ambient
light
2. Turns on the high voltage to the PMT (photomultiplier tube),

takes a background read (Pre-Trigger Solution has already been
dispensed), and transfers the data to the CPU (central processing
unit)
3. Dispenses Trigger Solution into the reaction vessel
NOTE: This solution initiates the chemiluminescent reaction

that results in the emission of photons of light.
4. Uses the light pipe to collect the emitted light and directs it to
the PMT, which is in the CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle
immunoassay) reader
5. Takes the activated read by collecting the emitted photons of

light

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
6. Transfers the count data to the CPU
NOTE: The chemiluminescent light produced during this

reaction is directly or indirectly proportional to the amount of
analyte present in the sample, depending on the type of assay.
7. Sums the signal over a defined time period to yield the RLU
(relative light unit)
8. Turns off the high voltage PMT
9. Opens the shutter
Data reduction calculation (i System)

read in RLUs (relative light units). The calculation is:
Final Read (RLU) = Activated Read - Background
In performing the data reduction calculation the system:
1. Sums the signal measured by the CMIA optical system
2. Verifies that:
Background counts fall within an acceptable range
Activated read profile falls within an acceptable set of ranges
3. Subtracts the background counts from the activated read counts

to calculate the final read and converted it to concentration
units
i System data reduction methods, page Appendix C-13
Assay processing (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Many kinds of assay processing activities take place between sample
aspiration and the final read. The movement of the process path, the
timing of these movements, and the position of the components allow
each reaction activity to occur at a specified time and location.
The following illustration shows the components surrounding the
process path that are used for assay measurements.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 3.16: i System assay processing components
Legend:
1. Reagent pipettor 1 (R1)
2. Reagent wash stations (2) (R1W, R2W)
3. Sample pipettor (S)
4. Sample wash station (SW)
5. Sample carrier
6. STAT pipettor (ST)
7. STAT wash station (STW)
8. RV loader and hopper assembly (RVL)
9. Reagent pipettor 2 (R2)
10. Wash zone manifolds (2) (WZ1, WZ2)
11. Pre-Trigger/Trigger manifold (PT/T)
12. CMIA reader (CMIA)
13. Reagent syringes (2) (R1S, R2S)
14. Sample syringe (SS)
15. STAT syringe (STS)
16. Vortexers (4) (VTX1, VTX2, VTX3, VTXST)
17. Reagent pipetting locations

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
i System technology, known as Chemiflex technology, provides you

with a variety of protocols or assay processing methods. Depending on
the type of protocol, assay processing steps occur at different positions
on the process path.
Assay processing for One step 25 (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 3-31
Assay processing for Two step 18-4 (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 3-33
Pretreatment (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 3-36
STAT assay processing for One step 11 (i 2000SR), page 3-38
STAT assay processing for Two step 4-4 (i 2000SR), page 3-41
Assay processing for One step 25 (i 2000/i 2000SR)
A One step 25 assay protocol is a method of assay processing in which

the sample and all required reagents are added prior to washing the
microparticles. Total processing time for a One step 25 assay is 29
minutes including a 25 minute incubation time. See Pretreatment (i
2000/i 2000SR), page 3-36, for additional processing required by
pretreatment assays.
The following steps describe i System operation and CMIA
(chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) reaction that occurs
during One step 25 assay processing.
Figure 3.17: Process path, positions 1 - 3

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
1. At position 1 the sample pipettor dispenses the sample into the

RV (reaction vessel).
2. At position 2 the R1 pipettor dispenses the microparticles and

acridinium-labeled conjugate.
NOTE: For a delayed one-step assay the R2 pipettor adds the

acridinium-labeled conjugate at position 71 and the vortexer
mixes the reaction mixture at position 72.
3. At position 3 the vortexer mixes the sample, microparticles, and

conjugate.
4. At positions 4 - 86 the reaction mixture incubates for 25

minutes.
5. At positions 87 - 90 the wash zone 2 manifold washes the

reaction mixture in the RV, and then removes unbound
materials.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
6. At position 94 the pre-trigger nozzle dispenses Pre-Trigger

Solution to the reaction mixture, and then mixes using the
vortexer.
7. At position 98 the CMIA optical system takes a background read,

the trigger nozzle dispenses Trigger Solution to the reaction
mixture, and then the CMIA optical system takes an activated
read.
8. At position 100 the liquid waste arm aspirates the liquid waste
from the RV.
9. At position 109 the RV unloader removes the RV, and then

disposes of it in the solid waste container.
Assay processing for Two step 18-4 (i 2000/i 2000SR)
A Two step 18-4 assay protocol is a method of sample processing in

which the sample and some reagents are added prior to washing the
microparticles. The conjugate reagent is added after the microparticles
are washed. Total processing time for a Two step 18-4 assay is 29
minutes including a 22 minute incubation time. For additional
processing steps required by pretreatment assays, see Pretreatment (i
2000/i 2000SR), page 3-36.
The following steps describe the i System operation and CMIA
during Two step 18-4 assay processing.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
1. At position 1 the sample pipettor dispenses the sample into the

2. At position 2 the R1 pipettor dispenses the microparticles.
3. At position 3 the vortexer mixes the sample and microparticles.

minutes.

materials.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 3.22: Process path, positions 71 and 72
6. At position 71 the R2 pipettor dispenses acridinium-labeled

conjugate.
7. At position 72 the vortexer mixes the reaction mixture.

minutes.

materials.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

vortexer.

read.
from the RV.
Pretreatment (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Pretreatment is the performance of additional steps prior to

performing one-step or two-step assay protocols. An i System
automatically performs these steps if pretreatment is required.
Depending on the type of pretreatment processing, incubation times
and number of pretreatment reagents vary. For information on
processing activities for specific pretreatment types, see
Processing for Pretreatment 7 (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 3-37
Processing for Pretreatment 7-7 (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 3-37
Processing for Pretreatment 14 (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 3-38

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Processing for Pretreatment 7 (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Performance of Pretreatment 7 requires an additional 7 minutes.

During pretreatment, the system completes the following steps.
1. At position 1 the sample pipettor dispenses sample in the RV
(reaction vessel).
2. At position 2 the R1 pipettor dispenses the pretreatment reagents

to the sample in the RV.
3. At position 3 the vortexer mixes the sample and pretreatment

reagents.
4. At positions 4 - 24 the reaction mixture incubates for 7 minutes.
5. At position 24 the sample pipettor transfers the pretreated

sample to a new reaction vessel in position 1. The one-step or
two-step assay processing protocol proceeds.
NOTE: For more information on assay-specific pretreatment

processing protocols, see the i System assay-package insert.
Processing for Pretreatment 7-7 (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Performance of Pretreatment 7-7 requires an additional 14 minutes.

(reaction vessel).
2. At position 2 the R1 pipettor dispenses the first pretreatment

reagents to the sample in the RV.

reagents.

sample to a new reaction vessel in position 1.
6. At position 2 the R1 pipettor dispenses the second pretreatment

reagents to the sample in the RV.

reagents.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

sample to a new reaction vessel in position 1. The one-step or
two-step assay processing protocol proceeds.

Processing for Pretreatment 14 (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Performance of Pretreatment 14 requires an additional 14 minutes.

(reaction vessel).
2. At position 2 the R1 pipettor dispenses the pretreatment reagents

to the sample in the RV.

reagents.

sample to a new reaction vessel in position 1, and then the
system re-incubates the mixture for an additional 7 minutes. The
one-step or two-step assay processing protocol proceeds.

STAT assay processing for One step 11 (i 2000SR)
A One step 11 assay protocol, like a One step 25 assay protocol, is a

method of sample processing in which the sample and all required
reagents are added prior to washing the microparticles. A One step 11
assay, however, has a shorter incubation time. Total processing time
for a One step 11 assay is 18 minutes including an 11 minute
incubation time.
The following steps describe the ARCHITECT i 2000SR System
operation and CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay)
reaction that occurs during One step 11 assay processing.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
1. At position 47 the STAT pipettor dispenses the sample into the

2. At position 48 the R2 pipettor dispenses the microparticles and

acridinium-labeled conjugate.
3. At position 49 the vortexer mixes the sample, microparticles,

and conjugate.

minutes.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

materials.

vortexer.

read.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
from the RV.

STAT assay processing for Two step 4-4 (i 2000SR)
A Two step 4-4 assay protocol, like a Two step 18-4 assay protocol, is a
method of sample processing in which the sample and some reagents
are added prior to washing the microparticles. The conjugate reagent
is added after the microparticles are washed. A Two step 4-4 assay,
however, has a shorter incubation time. Total processing time for a
Two step 4-4 assay is 18 minutes including an 8 minute incubation
time.
The following steps describe the i 2000SR System operation and CMIA
during Two step 4-4 assay processing.
1. At position 47 the STAT pipettor dispenses the sample into the

2. At position 48 the R2 pipettor dispenses the microparticles.
3. At position 49 the vortexer mixes the sample and microparticles.

minutes.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

materials.
6. At position 71 the R2 pipettor dispenses acridinium-labeled

conjugate.
7. At position 72 the vortexer mixes the reaction mixture.

minutes.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

materials.

vortexer.

read.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
from the RV.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Performance characteristics and specifications
Section 4
Introduction
<F=0>
Before attempting to operate your system, you may want to familiarize

yourself with its performance characteristics, throughput capabilities
and capacities, specifications, and requirements for samples,
temperature, waste, and clearance.
You may also want to familiarize yourself with the specifications and
requirements for the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution
Module) accessory, if your laboratory has chosen to use this accessory.
Performance characteristics and specifications topics include:
Performance characteristics, page 4-2
Describes the operational mode, detection technique, and
pipetting capabilities of the ARCHITECT System.
Specifications and requirements, page 4-3
Describes the specifications and system capacities for the
ARCHITECT System.
ARM specifications and requirements, page 4-37
Describes the specifications and requirements for the
ARCHITECT ARM accessory.
NOTE: For assay information, see your reagent manufacturer's

documentation, such as the package insert or reagent application
sheet.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Performance characteristics Section 4
Performance characteristics
Performance characteristics include the operational mode, detection
technology, and pipetting capabilities of the system.
Performance characteristics topics include:
c System performance characteristics, page 4-2
i System performance characteristics, page 4-2
c System performance characteristics

Performance characteristics representative of the c System are
Table 4.1: c System performance characteristics
Operational mode Random and continuous access,
priority loading
Detection technology:
Photometric End-point and rate
Potentiometric ICT (integrated chip technology)
ion-selective electrodes
Pipetting capability Robotic precision with clot detection
i System performance characteristics

Performance characteristics representative of an i System are presented
in the following table.
Table 4.2: i System performance characteristics
Operational mode Random and continuous access,
priority loading
Detection technology CMIA (Chemiluminescent Microparticle
Immunoassay)
Emission measurement The CMIA optical assembly measures
the chemiluminescent emission from
the reaction vessel and outputs data
corresponding to the quantity of
emission detected.
Pipetting capability Robotic precision with clot detection

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 4 Specifications and requirements
Specifications and requirements

The system specifications and requirements presented are related to
the proper installation and operation of the ARCHITECT System.
Specifications and requirements topics include:
General specifications, page 4-3
System capacities, page 4-6
Physical specifications, page 4-9
Weight and force specifications, page 4-10
System clearances, page 4-15
Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19
Electrical safety parameters, page 4-22
Optical specifications (c System), page 4-22
Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements, page 4-23
External waste pump specifications and requirements, page 4-24
Environmental specifications and requirements, page 4-26
Computer and interface specifications, page 4-26
Printer specifications and requirements, page 4-27
Bar code label requirements, page 4-28
General specifications
General specifications include information about throughput for each
processing module, sample types that can be used on the ARCHITECT
System, the primary components of the system, and the operator
interface components.
General specifications topics include:
ARCHITECT System specifications, page 4-4
c System processing module specifications, page 4-5
i System processing module specifications, page 4-5

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Specifications and requirements Section 4
ARCHITECT System specifications
General specifications for the ARCHITECT System are presented in the

following table.
Table 4.3: System specifications
Primary components System control center, sample handler,
and processing module
Operator interface System control center touch-screen
monitor, keyboard, and pointing device;
processing module keypad; sample
handler keypad; optional bar code
scanner
Throughput c 8000 stand alone:
Photometric assays only Up to 800 tests per hour
ICT (integrated chip technology) Up to 600 tests per hour
assays only
Photometric and ICT assay mix Up to 1200 tests per hour
Individual assay time 4 - 10 minutes
Warm-up time from cold start Approximately 30 minutes
Throughput c 16000 stand alone:
Photometric assays only Up to 1600 tests per hour
ICT (integrated chip technology) Up to 600 tests per hour
assays only
Photometric and ICT assay mix Up to 1800 tests per hour
Individual assay time 4 - 10 minutes
Warm-up time from cold start Approximately 30 minutes
Throughput i 2000 stand alone:
General Up to 200 tests per hour
Time to first result 29 minutes (non-pretreatment)
36 to 43 minutes (pretreatment)
Throughput i 2000SR stand alone:
General Up to 200 tests per hour
Time to first result 29 minutes (non-pretreatment)
36 to 43 minutes (pretreatment)
18 minutes (STAT protocol)
Sample types Serum, plasma, or other body fluids.
For more information, see the reagent
manufacturer's assay-specific
documentation (such as a package

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 4.3: System specifications (continued)

Sample volume required See the reagent manufacturer's
assay-specific documentation (such as
a package insert or reagent application
sheet).
Sample probe carryover Less than 0.1 ppm
performance
Quality control Levey-Jennings and Westgard rules
Onboard data storage Hard drive
Stored data protection Optional UPS (uninterruptible power
supply)
c System processing module specifications
General specifications for the c System are presented in the following

table.
Table 4.4: c System processing module specifications
Bar code readers (4) Reagent supply centers (2), sample
carousel, and RSH
Dispensing volume:
Sample (Photometric): 2.0 - 35.0 L per test in 0.1 L
increments
Sample (ICT): 15 L per sample
Reagent 20 - 345 L per test in 1 L increments
Temperature:
Onboard reagent refrigerator 2C to 10C
Reaction mixture 36.7C to 37.3C
Sample carousel Minimum of 10C below room
temperature
i System processing module specifications
General specifications for an i System are presented in the following

table.
Table 4.5: i System processing module specifications
Bar code readers:
i 2000 system with SSH (standard Reagent carousel, sample load queue,
sample handler) (3) and sample processing queue
i 2000 with LAS (Laboratory Reagent carousel and sample
Automation System) carousel processing queue
sample handler (2)
i 2000SR with RSH (robotic sample Reagent carousel and RSH
handler) (2)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 4.5: i System processing module specifications (continued)

Dispensing volume:
Sample 2 - 200 L in 1 L increments
Reagent (i 2000/i 2000SR) 5 - 90 L in 1 L increments
Pre-Trigger Solution 100 L per test
Trigger Solution 300 L per test
Temperature:
Onboard reagent refrigerator 2C to 12C
Reaction mixture 36.4C to 37.6C
Average liquid waste output:
i 2000/i 2000SR 5.5 L per hour
System capacities
System capacities include storage information for the SCC (system
control center), processing modules, and sample handlers.
System capacities topics include:
SCC onboard data storage capacities, page 4-6
c System processing module capacities, page 4-7
i System processing module capacities, page 4-8
Sample handler capacities, page 4-8
SCC onboard data storage capacities
Capacities for the SCC (system control center) are presented in the
following table.
Table 4.6: Onboard data storage capacities
Reagent kits 3,000 kits
Message history log 12,000 messages
Temporary messages 200 messages
Printer spool 10 print requests
QC results 35,000 results
Released results:
SCC with Pentium IV 50,000 results
SCC with Pentium II or III 25,000 results
Unreleased results:
Patient 8,000 test orders, tests in process,
and/or exceptions

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 4.6: Onboard data storage capacities (continued)

QC 2,000 test orders, tests in process,
and/or exceptions
Calibrator 1,000 test orders, tests in process,
and/or exceptions
Calibration curves (Inactive) Up to 3 months
Assay files 200 c System assay files
c System processing module capacities
Capacities for the c System processing module are presented in the

following table.
Table 4.7: c System processing module capacities
Bulk solutions:
ICT Reference Solution 2L
Alkaline Wash 500 mL
Acid Wash 500 mL
c 8000 Reagent supply centers:
R1 56 - 65 positions
c 16000 Reagent supply centers:
Reaction carousel
c 8000 165 cuvettes
c 16000 165 cuvette pairs
Reaction cuvettes:
Minimum volume 160 L
Maximum volume for photometric 360 L
reaction
Sample carousel:
Positions used for patient, Carousel positions 1 - 30
calibrators, and control samples
Positions used for wash solutions Carousel positions 31 - 32
High-concentration waste bottle:
Volume 10 L
Weight 22 lbs. (10 kg)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
i System processing module capacities
Capacities for an i System processing modules are presented in the

following table.
Table 4.8: i System processing module capacities
Bulk solutions:
Pre-Trigger Solution 975 mL
Trigger Solution 975 mL
Wash buffer reservoir volume 25 L
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
Wash buffer reservoir weight 55 lbs. (25 kg)
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
Reagent carousel 25* reagent positions available for
loading 100 or 500** test kits
*
Does not include use of reagent kits
with > three reagent bottles
**
i 2000/i 2000SR only
Process path:
i 2000/i 2000SR 112 positions (in both inside and
outside track)
RVs (reaction vessels):
Total volume 1000 L
Maximum reaction mixture volume 400 L
RV hopper:
i 2000/i 2000SR 1200 RVs
Solid waste:
Container capacity (i 2000/i 2000SR) 5 hours of operation at 200 RVs
(reaction vessels) per hour (for a total
of 1,000 RVs)
Waste chute 15 minutes of run time when the waste
capacity(i 2000/i 2000SR only) container is removed during processing
(holds 50 RVs)
Biohazard bag size:
i 2000/i 2000SR 25" X 35" (63.5 cm X 88.9 cm)
Sample handler capacities
Capacities for the sample handlers are presented in the following

table.
Table 4.9: Sample handler capacities
Sample carriers 5 positions per carrier
SSH (standard sample handler) 25 sample carriers per lane

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 4.9: Sample handler capacities (continued)

LAS (Laboratory Automation 20 positions per carousel
System) carousel
Carrier trays 5 sample carriers or 25 positions
RSH (robotic sample handler) 7 sample carriers or 35 positions
priority bay
RSH routine bay 1 carrier tray per bay
6 bays on a c System stand alone
4 bays on an i System stand alone
12 bays on an integrated system
Physical specifications
Physical specifications for the ARCHITECT System are presented in the
following table. Measurements for the processing modules and sample
handlers do not include the SCC (system control center) or any
optional accessories.
Table 4.10: Physical specifications
Module Depth Width Height Weight
SCC 21" 15.5" 22" 55 lbs.
(53.3 cm) (39.4 cm) (55.9 cm) (25 kg)
c 8000 49" 79" 48" 1425 lbs.
processing (124.5 cm) (200.6 cm) (121.9 cm) (646.4 kg)
module and
sample
handler
c 16000 49" 79" 48" 1545 lbs.
processing (124.5 cm) (200.6 cm) (121.9 cm) (701 kg)
module and
sample
handler
i 2000SR 49" 61" 48" 1081 lbs.
module and
sample
handler
ci 8200 49" 127" 48" 2447 lbs.
module and
sample
handler

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 4.10: Physical specifications (continued)

Module Depth Width Height Weight
ci 16200 49" 127" 48" 2679 lbs.
module and
sample
handler
i 2000 44" 68" 48" 1100 lbs.
module and
sample
handler
i 2000 44" 132" 48" 2200 lbs.
modules (2)
and sample
handler
i 2000 44" 176" 48" 3130 lbs.
modules (3)
and sample
handler
i 2000 44" 221" 48" 4060 lbs.
modules (4)
and sample
handler
i 2000 48" 53" 48" 1100 lbs.
module and
LAS carousel
sample
handler
Weight and force specifications

Weight and force specifications are presented in the following tables.
NOTE: Specifications also apply to processing modules with LAS

sample handlers.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 4.1: ci 8200 and ci 16200 footprint
Table 4.11: ARCHITECT ci 8200 weight and force specifications

Total weight 2447 lbs. (1110 kg)
Weight at each foot 1. 407 lbs. (185 kg)
2. 552 lbs. (250 kg)
3. 418 lbs. (190 kg)
4. 305 lbs. (138 kg)
5. 535 lbs. (243 kg)
6. 230 lbs. (104 kg)

Force at each foot 1. 88.48 lbs./sq. in. (6.22 kg/sq. cm)
2. 71.32 lbs./sq. in. (5.01 kg/sq. cm)
3. 133.12 lbs./sq. in. (9.36 kg/sq. cm)
4. 66.30 lbs./sq. in. (4.66 kg/sq. cm)
5. 69.12 lbs./sq. in. (4.86 kg/sq. cm)
6. 73.25 lbs./sq. in. (5.15 kg/sq. cm)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 4.12: ARCHITECT ci 16200 weight and force specifications

2. 700 lbs. (318 kg)
3. 245 lbs. (111 kg)
4. 331 lbs. (150 kg)
5. 422 lbs. (191 kg)
6. 250 lbs. (113 kg)

2. 158.4 lbs./sq. in. (11.14 kg/sq. cm)
3. 78 lbs./sq. in. (5.48 kg/sq. cm)
4. 72 lbs./sq. in. (5.06 kg/sq. cm)
5. 95.5 lbs./sq. in. (6.71 kg/sq. cm)
6. 111.4 lbs./sq. in. (7.83 kg/sq. cm)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 4.2: c 8000 and c 16000 footprint
Table 4.13: ARCHITECT c 8000 weight and force specifications

2. 456 lbs. (207 kg)
3. 339 lbs. (154 kg)
4. 310 lbs. (141 kg)

2. 99.13 lbs./sq. in. (6.97 kg/sq. cm)
3. 73.70 lbs./sq. in. (5.18 kg/sq. cm)
4. 67.39 lbs./sq. in. (4.74 kg/sq. cm)
Table 4.14: ARCHITECT c 16000 weight and force specifications

2. 385 lbs. (175 kg)
3. 310.5 lbs. (140.8 kg)
4. 367.5 lbs. (166.7 kg)

Force at each foot 1. 105 lbs./sq. in. (7.38 kg/sq. cm)
2. 84 lbs./sq. in. (5.91 kg/sq. cm)
3. 68 lbs./sq. in. (4.78 kg/sq. cm)
4. 80 lbs./sq. in. (5.62 kg/sq. cm)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 4.3: i 2000SR footprint
Table 4.15: ARCHITECT i 2000SR weight and force specifications

2. 265 lbs. (120 kg)
3. 195 lbs. (88 kg)
4. 290 lbs. (135 kg)

2. 84.35 lbs./sq. in. (5.93 kg/sq. cm)
3. 62.07 lbs./sq. in. (4.36 kg/sq. cm)
4. 92.31 lbs./sq. in. (6.49 kg/sq. cm)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 4.4: i 2000 footprint
Table 4.16: ARCHITECT i 2000 weight and force specifications

2. 270 lbs. (122 kg)
3. 235 lbs. (107 kg)
4. 306 lbs. (139 kg)

2. 85.99 lbs./sq. in. (6.05 kg/sq. cm)
3. 74.84 lbs./sq. in. (5.26 kg/sq. cm)
4. 97.45 lbs./sq. in. (6.85 kg/sq. cm)
System clearances
System clearances include information about the space required
around the system and processing module(s) so you can safely operate
and service an ARCHITECT System.
System clearance topics include:
SCC clearances, page 4-16
c System processing module with RSH clearances, page 4-16
c System processing module with LAS clearances, page 4-17
i System processing module with RSH clearances, page 4-17
i 2000 processing module with SSH clearances, page 4-18
i 2000 processing module with LAS carousel sample handler
clearances, page 4-18
i 2000SR processing module with LAS clearances, page 4-19

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
SCC clearances
Clearances for the SCC (system control center) are presented in the
following table.
Table 4.17: SCC clearances
Power cord length 6' (1.8 m)
Clearance behind and on either side 6" (15.2 cm)
(for cooling and airflow)
Clearance above monitor 24" (61.0 cm)
(for cooling and airflow)
Clearance in front 34" (86.4 cm)
(for work area)
c System processing module with RSH clearances
Clearances for the c System processing module with RSH (robotic

sample handler) are presented in the following table.
Table 4.18: c System processing module with RSH
(to allow positioning of the module so that it is not
difficult to disconnect the power cord)
Left and right clearances 24" (61.0 cm)
(for access)
Rear clearance:
(for safety access to main circuit breakers, cooling,
airflow, cable and tubing routing, maintenance, and
traffic)
Single module 30" (76.2 cm)
Integrated system (with c System processing 30" (76.2 cm)
module)
Clearance above 20" (50.8 cm)
(to open processing center covers)
Front clearance 34" (86.4 cm)
(to open front doors and to access, remove, and replace
bulk solutions, syringe and pump components)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
c System processing module with LAS clearances
Clearances for the c System processing module with LAS (laboratory

automation system) are presented in the following table.
Table 4.19: c System processing module with LAS
Left clearance 24" (61.0 cm)
(for access)
Right clearance:
(to access the LAS track) Varies per track vendor
Rear clearance: 30" (76.2 cm)
traffic)
bulk solutions, syringe and pump components)
i System processing module with RSH clearances
Clearances for an i System processing module with RSH (robotic

sample handler) are presented in the following table.
Table 4.20: i System processing module with RSH
(to access the sample load and unload queues)
Rear clearance:
traffic)
Integrated system (with c System processing 30" (76.2 cm)
module)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 4.20: i System processing module with RSH (continued)

bulk solutions and waste)
i 2000 processing module with SSH clearances
Clearances for an i 2000 processing module with SSH (standard sample

handler) are presented in the following table.
Table 4.21: i 2000 processing module with SSH
(to access the sample load and unload queues)
Rear clearance:
traffic)
Multi-module 30" (76.2 cm)
i 2000 processing module with LAS carousel sample handler clearances
Clearances for an i 2000 processing module with LAS (laboratory

automation system) carousel sample handler are presented in the
following table.
Table 4.22: i 2000 processing module with LAS carousel sample
handler
Left clearance Varies per track vendor
(to access the LAS track)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 4.22: i 2000 processing module with LAS carousel sample

handler (continued)
Right clearance 24" (61.0 cm)
(for access)
Rear clearance 20" (50.8 cm)
traffic)
i 2000SR processing module with LAS clearances
Clearances for an i 2000SR processing module with LAS (laboratory

automation system) are presented in the following table.
Table 4.23: i 2000SR processing module with LAS
Track side clearance Varies per track vendor
(to access the LAS track)
Non-track side clearance 24" (61.0 cm)
(for access)
traffic)
Electrical specifications and requirements

Electrical specifications and requirements include information about
the circuits, outlet types, and outlet requirements.
Electrical requirements topics include:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
SCC electrical requirements, page 4-20

c System processing module with sample handler electrical
specifications and requirements, page 4-20
i System processing module with sample handler electrical
specifications and requirements, page 4-21
SCC electrical requirements
Electrical requirements for the SCC (system control center) are

Table 4.24: Electrical requirements - SCC
AC power:
Low voltage option Voltage: 90 - 132 VAC
Frequency: 47 - 63 Hz
High voltage option Voltage: 180 - 264 VAC
Frequency: 47 - 63 Hz
Circuit breaker that can be reset:
Low voltage option 14 amp
High voltage option 12 amp
Outlet (one)
North America NEMA 5-15 three prong (120 VAC,
15A)
International IEC 320 M grounded (220 - 240 VAC)
c System processing module with sample handler electrical specifications and

requirements
Electrical specifications and requirements for the c System processing

module with its sample handler are presented in the following table.
Table 4.25: Electrical specifications and requirements - c System
processing module with sample handler
AC power Voltage: 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240
10% VAC (180 - 264 VAC)
Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz (47 - 63 Hz)
North America With UPS - 30 amp
Without UPS - 20 amp
International 16 amp
Outlet (one)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 4.25: Electrical specifications and requirements - c System

processing module with sample handler (continued)
North America With UPS - NEMA L6-30R (250 VAC,
30A, twistlock)
Without UPS - NEMA L6-20R (250
VAC, 20A, twistlock)
International IEC309 (250 VAC, or 220 - 240 VAC,
16A)
Rated power consumption 3000 volt amp (3 kVA) maximum
Estimated heat output 2200 watts (includes SCC)
i System processing module with sample handler electrical specifications and

requirements
Electrical specifications and requirements for an i System processing

module with its sample handler are presented in the following table.
Table 4.26: Electrical specifications and requirements - i System
processing module with sample handler
AC power Voltage: 208, 220, 230, or 240 10%
VAC (180 - 264 VAC)
Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz (47 - 63 Hz)
Circuit breaker that can be reset (i
2000SR):
North America With UPS - 30 amp
Without UPS - 20 amp
Circuit breaker that can be reset (i
2000):
One breaker for each processing
module.
North America 30 amp
Outlet (one, i 2000SR):
North America NEMA L6-20R (250 VAC, 20A,
twistlock)
International IEC 309 (250 VAC or 220-240 VAC,
16A)
Outlet (one, i 2000):
One outlet for each processing module.
North America NEMA L6-30R (250 VAC, 30A,
twistlock)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 4.26: Electrical specifications and requirements - i System

processing module with sample handler (continued)
International IEC 309 (250 VAC or 220-240 VAC,
32A)
Power cord length
i 2000/i 2000SR 15' (4.6 m)
Rated power consumption:
i 2000SR 3000 volt amp (3 kVA) maximum
i 2000 4700 volt amp (4.7 kVA) maximum
Estimated heat output
i 2000/i 2000SR 2500 watts (includes SCC)
Electrical safety parameters

Electrical safety parameters for an ARCHITECT System are presented in
the following table.
Table 4.27: Electrical safety parameters
Installation category II (Overvoltage category)
Pollution degree 2
NOTE: Electrical safety parameters have no bearing on performance.
Optical specifications (c System)

Optical specifications for the c System processing module are
Table 4.28: Optical specifications for the c System processing module
Light source Tungsten-halogen lamp
Detector Silicon photodiode array
Light path length 5 mm
Photometric method Concave diffraction grating
Reaction cuvette Rectangular glass cuvette
c 8000 Wavelengths 16 wavelengths (340, 380, 404, 412, 444, 476, 500,
524, 548, 572, 604, 628, 660, 700, 748, and 804
nm)
c 16000 Wavelengths 16 wavelengths (340, 380, 404, 416, 450, 476, 500,
524, 548, 572, 604, 628, 660, 700, 748, and 804
nm)
Photometric range -0.1 to 3.2 Abs (converted to 10 mm light path
length)
Linearity 2% at 2.0 Abs

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements

Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements include
information about water quality, water consumption, the drain port
location, and drain capacity.
Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements topics include:
requirements, page 4-23
i System processing module water and liquid waste requirements,
page 4-24

requirements
Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements for the

c System processing module are presented in the following table.
Table 4.29: Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements -
c System processing module
c 8000 Deionized water consumption 25 L per hour during normal operation
c 16000 Deionized water 54 L per hour during normal
consumption operation
c 8000 Average liquid waste output 25 L per hour
c 16000 Average liquid waste output 54 L per hour
Water quality (NCCLS Type II):
Maximum microbial contamination < 1000 colony-forming units/mL
Minimum resistivity 1 Meg Ohm - cm @ 25C (77F)
Pressure 15 - 25 psi
IMPORTANT: Do not process
samples on the c System when you
are performing maintenance on your
DI water system. After maintenance
is complete, check the pressure to be
sure it is within specifications.
Drainage port:
You must have a drainage port that
meets the following specifications or
you must use the external waste pump
(optional accessory) if the drain is
located in a sink or otherwise elevated.
Location Within 9.5 ft. (2.9 m) from the rear of
the system
Height 8" (20.3 cm) above floor level

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 4.29: Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements -

c System processing module (continued)
Drainage capacity 300 L per hour
Liquid waste configuration:
Two gravity-fed waste tubes Drain into the drainage port or the
external waste pump
One (c 8000) or two (c 16000) Drains into the high-concentration
high-concentration waste tube(s) waste bottle, drainage port, or the
external waste pump
i System processing module water and liquid waste requirements
Water and liquid waste requirements for an i System processing

module are presented in the following table.
Table 4.30: Water and liquid waste requirements - i System
processing module
Water quality (NCCLS Type II):
Maximum microbial contamination < 1000 colony-forming units/mL
Minimum resistivity 1 Meg Ohm - cm @ 25C (77F)
Liquid waste Gravity flow to drain at floor level or
external pump to sink
External waste pump specifications and requirements

The external waste pump is optional for use with the c System and/or
i System when a floor drain is unavailable and a sink drain is used.
This accessory pumps waste from the processing module(s) to an
elevated drain located in a sink.
External waste pump specifications and requirements topics include:
External waste pump general specifications, page 4-24
External waste pump electrical specifications and requirements,
page 4-25
External waste pump clearances, page 4-25
External waste pump general specifications
Physical specifications for the external waste pump are presented in

the following table.
Table 4.31: External waste pump general specifications
Depth 13" (33 cm)
Width 13" (33 cm)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 4.31: External waste pump general specifications (continued)

Height 13" (33 cm)
Weight 18 lbs. (8 kg)
External waste pump electrical specifications and requirements
Electrical specifications and requirements for the external waste pump

are presented in the following table.
NOTE: You must manually set the voltage selector switch.

Table 4.32: Electrical specifications and requirements - external
waste pump
AC power:
North America Voltage: 115 10% VAC (104 - 126
VAC)
Frequency: 60 Hz (47 - 63 Hz)
International Voltage: 220 10% VAC (207 - 253
VAC)
North America 1.6 amp
International 0.8 amp
Outlet (one):
15A)
External waste pump clearances
Clearances for the external waste pump are presented in the following
table.
Table 4.33: External waste pump clearances
Clearance on either side 5" (12.7 cm)
(for access)
Clearance in front 9" (22.9 cm)
(for access)
Clearance in rear 9" (22.9 cm)
(for access)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Environmental specifications and requirements

Environmental specifications and requirements for the ARCHITECT
System are presented in the following table.
Table 4.34: Environmental specifications and requirements
Heat dissipation (including the
system control center and sample
handler):
c System 7514 BTU/hour
i System 8539 BTU/hour
Noise level Does not exceed 48 dB during normal
operation and peaks at 70 dB for a 10
second period
Temperature, operating 15C to 30C (59F to 86F)
Humidity 10% - 85% (non-condensing) RH
(relative humidity) at 25C (77F)
NOTE: For SCC (system control

center) humidity requirements refer
to the component manufacturers'
information.
Altitude 8500 ft. (2590.7 m)
Placement For indoor use. Do not place in direct
sunlight.
Avoid drafts from heating and
cooling vents.
Computer and interface specifications

Computer and interface specifications for the SCC (system control
center) of an ARCHITECT System are presented in the following table.
Table 4.35: Computer and interface specifications
Processor Minimum: Intel Pentium II; 350 MHz,
640 Mb RAM
Hard drive (2):
C drive Minimum: 10 Gbyte
D drive Minimum: 10 Gbyte
Floppy drive 3.5", 1.44 Mbyte
CD-RW drive:
Minimum read speed 24x
Minimum write speed 8x
Operator interface:
Color monitor Standard VGA connection

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 4.35: Computer and interface specifications (continued)

Touchscreen Resistive overlay, RS-232 connection
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
Keyboard Standard PC-style 101-key system
Pointing device PS-2 interface
Optional external modem:
Speed Minimum 28.8 bps
PC interface Integrated RS-232
Cabling RS-232 25-pin serial cable, RJ-11
phone cord and power adapter cable
Telephone line Direct line (no switchboard interface) is
required. Dedicated line is
recommended, but not required.
Host interface:
Communications mode Bidirectional
Communications device Serial RS-232 port
Baud rate options 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
28800, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bps
Interface reference document ASTM standard (E 1381-91 and
E1394-91)
Processing module interface:
c System Ethernet, 100 BASE-T
i System Ethernet, 10 BASE-T
Printer specifications and requirements

The printer for the SCC (system control center) of the ARCHITECT
System is provided by Abbott Laboratories.
Printer specifications and requirements topics include:
Printer general specifications, page 4-27
Printer electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-28
Printer general specifications
General specifications for the printer are presented in the following

table.
Table 4.36: Printer general specifications
Parallel cable length 6' (1.8 m)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Printer electrical specifications and requirements
Electrical specifications and requirements for the printer are presented

in the following table.
Table 4.37: Electrical specifications and requirements - printer
AC power:
North America Voltage: 110 or 120 10% VAC (90
- 132 VAC)
International Voltage: 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240
10% VAC (180 - 264 VAC)
North America 14 amp
Outlet (one):
15A)
Bar code label requirements

Depending on the type of bar code label, requirements include
information about guidelines, format, Sample ID length, label length,
and placement.
Bar code label requirements topics include:
1D reagent bar code requirements (c System), page 4-28
Sample bar code label requirements, page 4-32
1D reagent bar code requirements (c System)
Review the following information to ensure 1D (one-dimensional)

reagent bar code labels meet the recommended guidelines and are
properly placed on reagent cartridges.
1D reagent bar code label guidelines, page 4-29
1D reagent bar code label data format, page 4-30
1D reagent bar code label placement, page 4-32

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
1D reagent bar code label guidelines
Bar code label guidelines for 1D (one-dimensional) reagent bar code

labels are presented in the following table.
Table 4.38: 1D reagent bar code label guidelines
Component Description
Printer type Printer with a minimum resolution of 300 DPI (dots per
inch). Proper maintenance of the bar code printer is
essential.
NOTE: Laser and ink jet printers with resolution less than
300 DPI may not produce acceptable labels. Dot matrix
printers are not recommended.
Label stock Good quality white label stock. Black ink used for bar codes
must be compatible with the label stock used.
The labels are used in the reagent carousels which have
high humidity and condensation levels. The labels should be
water resistant.
NOTE: The contrast between the bars and the

background label must be the maximum possible.
Contact your bar code label supplier for help in increasing
the contrast. If the use of color on the label is desired, a
color band may be used outside the bar code portion of
the label. For optimal performance, it is recommended
that only black bars be used on a white background for the
bar code portion of the label.
Bar code print Label print quality is an important factor affecting the ability
quality of a bar code reader to correctly decode label information.
Performance can be enhanced by using labels with an ANSI
(American National Standards Institute) grade of A, B, or C.
Although bar code labels with ANSI grades lower than C
can provide valid reads, the number of "no reads" is higher
and the possibility of misreads is increased.
NOTE: ANSI document X3.182-1990, "Bar Code Print

Quality - Guideline," presents a standardized
methodology for measuring and grading bar code print
quality. It is good practice to evaluate all bar code labels
according to this methodology. Contact your bar code
label or print supplier for help in grading your labels.
Commercially available verifier systems are also available
to perform these evaluations.
Symbology Interleaved 2 of 5
Length Maximum length of the printed bar code is 2.17" (55 mm)
Height Minimum height of the printed bar code is 0.36" (9 mm)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 4.38: 1D reagent bar code label guidelines (continued)

Quiet zone The quiet zone is the distance from the left edge of the label
to the first black bar and from the last black bar to the right
edge of the label.
Minimum quiet zone distance: 0.2" (5 mm)
Density Minimum density (narrow bar width) is 12 Mils (0.012" or 0.3
mm)
Ratio (wide to Minimum ratio: 2.5:1
narrow bar) Maximum ratio: 3:1
1D reagent bar code label data format
The 1D (one-dimensional) reagent bar code data format includes 18

digits (17 data digits and one checksum digit). A description of the
data format is presented in the following table.
Table 4.39: 1D reagent bar code label data format
Digit Description
1 to 5 Reagent name: A unique number assigned for each
reagent.
Range: 00000 - 99999
6 Cartridge size: Identifies the reagent cartridge size.
Options are:
1 = 20 mL (bottle)
2 = Not available
3 = 100 mL (cartridge)
5 = Small (55 mL cartridge)
6 = Large (90 mL cartridge)
7 Reagent type: Identifies the reagent type.
Options are:
1 = Reagent 1
2 = Reagent 2

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 4.39: 1D reagent bar code label data format (continued)

Digit Description
8 Expiration date (year): Identifies the year the reagent
expires.
Options are:
3 = 2003
4 = 2004
5 = 2005
6 = 2006
7 = 2007
8 = 2008
9 = 2009
0 = 2010
1 = 2011
2 = 2012
9 to 10 Expiration date: Identifies the day of the year the reagent
expires.
Range: 00 - 52
00 = Expires at the end of the 7th day of the year
52 = Expires at the end of the last day of the year
NOTE: If you enter a value greater than 52, the reagent

expiration is not tracked.
11 to 13 Lot number: Identifies the unique reagent lot number.
Range: 000 - 999
NOTE: The lot number displayed for the reagent is eight

digits and includes the five digit reagent name and this
three digit lot number.
14 to 17 Serial number: Identifies the unique serial number of the
reagent cartridge.
Range: 0000 - 9999
NOTE: Each cartridge for a single lot of reagent must

have a unique numeric identifier.
18 Checksum: The checksum digit calculated for the bar code
data.
The checksum modulus is Mod 10.
NOTE: When you configure the user-defined reagent for the 1D bar
code labeled reagent, the reagent name that you define must be

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
identical to characters 1 to 5 of the bar code. See Configure a

user-defined reagent (photometric - c System), page 2-93.
1D reagent bar code label placement
You should affix the bar code label to the reagent cartridge in a
"ladder" orientation where the printed bars are horizontal.
To ensure the entire label is visible to the bar code reader when the
reagent cartridge is loaded into the reagent supply center, do not place
the bar code label lower than 10 mm from the bottom of the reagent
cartridge. Place bar code labels on reagent cartridges as vertically
straight as possible. If the vertical angle exceeds one degree, the bar
code reader may have difficulty locating the required quiet zones.
Figure 4.5: 1D reagent bar code label placement
Sample bar code label requirements
Review the following information to ensure sample bar code labels

meet the recommended guidelines and are properly placed on sample
tubes.
Sample bar code label guidelines, page 4-33
Sample ID (identification) length, page 4-34
Sample bar code label length, page 4-34
Sample bar code label placement, page 4-35

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample bar code label guidelines
Guidelines for sample bar code labels are presented in the following
table.
Table 4.40: Bar code label guidelines
Printer type Printer with a minimum resolution of 300 DPI (dots per
inch). Proper maintenance of the bar code printer is
essential.
NOTE: Laser and ink jet printers with resolution less than
300 DPI may not produce acceptable labels. Dot matrix
printers are not recommended.
Label stock Good quality white label stock. Black ink used for bar codes
must be compatible with the label stock used.
The printed labels should be clean and dry when they are
presented to the bar code reader.
NOTE: The contrast between the bars and the

background label must be the maximum possible.
Contact your bar code label supplier for help in increasing
the contrast. If the use of color on the label is desired, a
color band may be used outside the bar code portion of
the label. For optimal performance, it is recommended
that only black bars be used on a white background for the
bar code portion of the label.
Bar code print Label print quality is an important factor affecting the ability
quality of a bar code reader to correctly decode label information.
Performance can be enhanced by using labels with an ANSI
(American National Standards Institute) grade of A, B, or C.
Although bar code labels with ANSI grades lower than C
can provide valid reads, the number of "no reads" is higher
and the possibility of misreads is increased.
NOTE: ANSI document X3.182-1990, "Bar Code Print

Quality - Guideline," presents a standardized
methodology for measuring and grading bar code print
quality. It is good practice to evaluate all bar code labels
according to this methodology. Contact your bar code
label or print supplier for help in grading your labels.
Commercially available verifier systems are also available
to perform these evaluations.
Symbology Symbologies allowed on the ARCHITECT System include:
Code 39
Codabar
Interleaved 2 of 5
Code 128 (Subsets A, B, and C)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 4.40: Bar code label guidelines (continued)

Quiet zone The quiet zone is the distance from the left edge of the label
to the first black bar and from the last black bar to the right
edge of the label.
Minimum quiet zone distance: 0.25" (6.35 mm)
Density Minimum density (narrow bar width) is 7.5 Mils (0.0075" or
0.19 mm)
Ratio (wide to Minimum ratio: 2:1
narrow bar) Maximum ratio: 3:1
Sample ID (identification) length
The following factors affect the number of characters that can fit on a
sample bar code label:
Sample bar code label length, page 4-34
Sample bar code label placement, page 4-35
Symbology used
Density
Ratio
Quiet zone
A maximum of 20 characters is allowed on the sample bar code label.
However, the maximum number of readable characters may be less
than 20 for some symbologies due to overall label length, narrow bar
width, and ratio. A minimum of 2 characters is required for samples
loaded on the c System sample carousel when using Code 128
symbology.
IMPORTANT: When the bar code reader scans a bar code label with an
SID containing >20 characters, only the first 20 characters are read.
NOTE: If you print bar code labels (3 of 9, codabar, and I 2 of 5) with

the checksum function enabled, a checksum character is added to the
label. This character is usually added after the last character on the
right and to the left of the stop character. The operator-readable
portion of the label may or may not display this checksum character.
Sample bar code label length
Generally, a 51 mm label fits a 75 mm sample tube and a 76 mm label

fits a 100 mm sample tube.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample bar code label placement
You should affix the bar code label to the sample tube in a "ladder"
orientation where the printed bars are horizontal. Correctly labeled
tube, page 4-35, shows an example of correct label placement.
Incorrectly labeled tubes, page 4-36, shows examples of incorrect label
placement.
To ensure the entire label is visible to the bar code reader when the
tube is loaded into the carousel, do not place the bar code label lower
than 8 mm from the bottom of the sample tube. Place bar code labels
on tubes as vertically straight as possible. If the vertical angle exceeds
five degrees, the bar code reader may have difficulty locating the
required quiet zones and the start/stop characters. The bar code label
should not exceed the top of the tube.
IMPORTANT: The operator is responsible for placing the correct bar

code label on the sample tube to ensure proper sample identification.
Figure 4.6: Correctly labeled tube
Legend:
1. Quiet zones
2. Minimum distance from bottom of sample tube: 8 mm

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 4.7: Incorrectly labeled tubes
Legend:
1. Angled placement
2. Edges peeled loose
3. Clear tape over label
4. Flap extending from label
5. Label extending beyond bottom of tube

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 4 ARM specifications and requirements
ARM specifications and requirements

The ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory is
optional for use with an i System. You may want to familiarize yourself
with the specifications and requirements for the ARM, if your
laboratory has chosen to use this accessory. This information is related
to the proper installation and operation of the ARM to ensure optimal
safety and performance requirements are met.
ARM specifications and requirements topics include:
ARM physical specifications, page 4-37
ARM clearance requirements, page 4-37
ARM electrical requirements, page 4-38
ARM electrical safety parameters, page 4-38
ARM water source requirements, page 4-39
ARM environmental requirements, page 4-39
ARM physical specifications

Physical specifications for the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic
Reconstitution Module) accessory are presented in the following table.
Table 4.41: ARCHITECT ARM accessory physical specifications
Dimensions:
Height 28.3" (71.9 cm)
Width 22.9" (58.2 cm)
Depth 17.8" (45.2 cm)
Weight 69 lbs. (31.3 kg)
ARM clearance requirements

Clearance requirements for the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic
Table 4.42: ARCHITECT ARM accessory clearance requirements
Left clearance 18" (45.7 cm)
(for tubing and fittings)
Right clearance 12" (30.5 cm)
(for tubing and fittings)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
ARM specifications and requirements Section 4
Table 4.42: ARCHITECT ARM accessory clearance requirements

(for access and airflow)
(for panel access)
ARM electrical requirements

Electrical requirements for the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic
Table 4.43: ARCHITECT ARM accessory electrical requirements
Line voltage 90-132 VAC / 180-264 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
The ARM accessory ships with power
cords and fuses for various power
systems.
Power cord type U.S.: NEMA 5-15P or equivalent
Europe: CE E 7/7 or equivalent
Current rating 1.5 amp maximum
Fuses 2 time-lag, Type T, 5x20 mm, 250 V~,
1.0 amp
2 time-lag, Type T, 5x20 mm, 250 V~,
2.0 amp
ARM electrical safety parameters

Electrical safety parameters for the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic
Table 4.44: ARCHITECT ARM accessory electrical safety parameters
Installation category II (Overvoltage category)
Pollution degree 2
NOTE: Electrical safety parameters have no bearing on performance.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 4 ARM specifications and requirements
ARM water source requirements

Water source requirements for the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic
Table 4.45: ARCHITECT ARM accessory water source requirements
Purity NCCLS (National Committee for
Clinical Laboratory Standards)
Reagent Grade Type II water or better
Pressure 8 to 100 psi
Flow rate 102 L/hr (1.7 L/minute) or greater if
pressure exceeds 15 psig (103.425
Kpa)
132 L/hr (2.2 L/minute) or greater if
pressure is 8-15 psig (55.16-103.425
Kpa)
Temperature 15C to 37C (59C - 98.6F)
ARM environmental requirements

Environmental requirements for the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic
Table 4.46: ARCHITECT ARM accessory environmental
requirements
Operating environment: For indoor use only
Temperature 15C to 30C
Humidity 10% to 85% (non-condensing) RH
Storage environment:
Temperature -25C to 65C
Humidity 10% to 85% (non-condensing) RH

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Operating instructions
Section 5
Introduction
<F=0>
The flexibility of the ARCHITECT System accommodates many

laboratory environments and workflows. Operating procedures are
included for all system configurations.
Before attempting to operate the system, you should be familiar with
the hardware components of your system and the fundamental
principles of the software user interface. See Use or function, page 1-1.
Operating instructions topics include:
System startup, pause, and shutdown, page 5-3
Describes how to start up, pause, shut down, cycle power to, and
power off the system and its components.
Consumable inventory management, page 5-24
Provides a description of the Supply status screen and
instructions for performing consumable inventory management
procedures.
Reagent inventory management, page 5-61
Provides descriptions of the Reagent status and Reagent history
screens and instructions for performing reagent inventory
management procedures.
Patient and control orders, page 5-110
Provides instructions for automated ordering of patient and
control samples, descriptions of the Patient order and Control
order screens and instructions for performing patient order and
control order procedures.
Sample management, page 5-170
Describes how to prepare, load, and unload samples, and how to
initiate processing.
Patient and QC results review, rerun, and release, page 5-222
Provides descriptions of the Results review and the QC result
review screens and instructions for rerunning tests and releasing
results.
Patient and QC stored results, page 5-262

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Provides descriptions of the Stored results and the Stored QC

results screens and instructions on how to view and archive
patient and QC results that have been released.
Exception management, page 5-293
Provides a description of the Exception status screen and
instructions for performing exception management procedures.
Quality control analysis, page 5-309
Provides descriptions of Westgard rules, Levey-Jennings graph
and QC reports screens, and instructions on quality control
management.
Report printing, page 5-333
Provides instructions for printing reports and describes the
screens from which you can print each report.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5 System startup, pause, and shutdown
System startup, pause, and shutdown

You may need to start up, pause, shut down, cycle power to, or power
off the system and its components to:
Load samples, reagents, and solutions
Perform maintenance or diagnostic procedures
Replace components
System startup, pause, and shutdown topics include:
SCC power off and power on, page 5-3
Processing module and sample handler cycle power, startup, and
pause, page 5-6
ARM power off and power on, page 5-19
Emergency shutdown, page 5-21
Long-term shutdown (i System), page 5-23
SCC power off and power on

You may need to power off and power on the SCC (system control
center) to store configuration information or when indicated for
component replacement or troubleshooting purposes.
See specific procedures to determine if you must shut down the SCC.
To resume normal operation, you must then Power on the SCC,
page 5-3.
SCC power off and power on procedures include:
Power on the SCC, page 5-3
Power off the SCC, page 5-4
Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5
Power on the SCC
Perform this procedure to apply power to the SCC (system control

center).
Prerequisite Power off the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-9
Module status Offline, Stopped, Warming, or Ready
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
System startup, pause, and shutdown Section 5
To power on the SCC:

1. Verify the processing module power is off before applying power
to the SCC.
NOTE: If the processing module(s) power is on when you power

on the SCC, communication is not properly initialized between
the system components.
2. Press the power switch on the front of the CPU (central

processing unit) to turn on the SCC.
To power on the processing module and/or sample handler, see Power
on the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-7.
Power off the SCC
Perform this procedure to shut down and power off the SCC (system
control center) and to ensure that all data is stored before powering off
the system.
NOTE: The sample handler and processing module(s) are not

functional when the system control center is off. To prevent flooding
when your system is connected to an ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic
Reconstitution Module) accessory, do not shut down the SCC if the
ARM is in the process of filling the wash buffer reservoir.
To cycle power to the SCC, see Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.
Supplies NA
To power off the SCC:

1. Select F3 - Shutdown on the Snapshot screen.
2. Select OK to initiate shutdown.
3. Wait for the information window to display, and then

simultaneously press the CTRL+ALT+DELETE keys on the
keyboard.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The Confirm Exit window displays.
4. Leave the Shutdown Computer option selected, and then select

OK.
5. Wait for the information window to display, and then press and
hold the power switch on the front of the CPU (central
processing unit) to turn off power to the SCC.
NOTE: The SCC may power off immediately, or it may take up to

10 seconds depending on the type of SCC you have.
Cycle power to the SCC
Perform this procedure to cycle power to the SCC (system control

center) to reestablish communication to the system control center, to
store configuration information, or when indicated for
troubleshooting purposes.
NOTE: The sample handler and processing module(s) are not

functional when the system control center is off. To prevent flooding
when your system is connected to an ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic
Reconstitution Module) accessory, do not shut down the SCC if the
ARM is in the process of filling the wash buffer reservoir.
Supplies NA
To cycle power to the SCC:

1. Select F3 - Shutdown on the Snapshot screen.
2. Select OK to confirm the shutdown.

simultaneously press the CTRL+ALT+DELETE keys on the
keyboard.
The Confirm Exit window displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
4. Leave the Shutdown Computer option selected, and then select

OK.
5. Wait for the information window to display, and then press and
hold the power switch on the front of the CPU (central
processing unit) to turn off power to the SCC.
NOTE: The SCC may power off immediately, or it may take up to

10 seconds depending on the type of SCC you have.
6. Turn off the power by:

Moving down the power switch on the lower left rear of the
processing module(s).
7. Press the power switch on the front of the CPU to turn on the
SCC.
8. Wait for the Snapshot screen to display. It may take several

minutes to display.
9. Ensure the processing module(s) has been powered off for five
minutes, and then move the power switch up to turn on power.
To change the status of the processing module from Stopped to Ready,
see Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13.
Processing module and sample handler cycle power, startup,

and pause
It may be necessary for you to remove power to the processing
module(s) and sample handler to perform certain procedures.
Cycling power involves powering off the processing module and
sample handler followed by applying power. Once the power is on,
you must perform a startup to attain a Ready status.
You are required to pause the sample load queue to load samples on
the SSH (standard sample handler), and you must pause the sample
carousel (c System) to load samples in the carousel.
You are required to pause the sample handler and the processing
module to load reagents and solutions, and to perform maintenance
or diagnostic procedures.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Processing module and sample handler cycle power, startup, and

pause procedures include:
Power on the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-7
Power off the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-9
Cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler,
page 5-12
Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13
Pause the processing module, page 5-14
Pause the RSH, page 5-15
Pause the LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000), page 5-18
Power on the processing module and/or sample handler
Perform this procedure to apply power to the processing module

and/or sample handler.
Prerequisite Power on the SCC, page 5-3
Module status Offline
Supplies NA
To power on the processing module and/or sample handler:

1. Ensure that the SCC (system control center) power is on and that
the Snapshot screen displays.
2. Move the power switch on the lower left rear of the processing
module up to the ON/| position to turn on the power.
NOTE: In a single module system, powering on the processing

module also turns on power to the sample handler.
In a multi-module system, powering on the processing module
farthest to the right (when facing the front of the system) powers
on the sample handler.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.1: c 8000 power switch

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.3: i 2000/i 2000SR power switch
To change the status of the processing module and sample handler

from Stopped to Ready, see Start up the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-13.
Power off the processing module and/or sample handler
Perform this procedure to power off the processing module and

sample handler during component replacement and troubleshooting
activities.
To cycle power to the processing module and sample handler, see Cycle
power to the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-12.
To power off the i System for more than two weeks, see Long-term
shutdown (i System), page 5-23.
Prerequisite NA
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To power off the processing module and/or sample handler:

1. Determine which module to power off.
IMPORTANT: To power off all processing modules in a

multi-module system, you must turn the power to each
processing module off.
2. Verify the processing module and/or sample handler are in

Offline, Stopped, Warming, or Ready status. The processing
module MUST be in one of these statuses to ensure that test
processing is not interrupted.
module down to the OFF/O position to turn off the power.
NOTE: In a single module system, powering off the processing

module also turns off power to the sample handler.
In a multi-module system, powering off the processing module
off the sample handler.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.6: i 2000/i 2000SR power switch
Cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler
Perform this procedure to cycle power to the processing module

and/or sample handler when indicated for troubleshooting purposes,
and to reestablish communication to the SCC (system control center).
Prerequisite NA
Supplies NA
To cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler:

1. Determine the module to power off.
2. Verify the processing module and/or sample handler are in

Offline, Stopped, Warming, or Ready status. The processing
module MUST be in one of these statuses to ensure that test
processing is not interrupted.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
module down to turn off the power.
NOTE: In a single module system, powering off the processing

module also turns off power to the sample handler.
In a multi-module system, powering off the processing module
off the sample handler.
4. Ensure that the SCC (system control center) power is on and that
the Snapshot screen displays.
5. Ensure the processing module has been powered off for five
minutes, and then move the power switch up to turn on the
processing module and/or sample handler.
To change the status of the processing module and sample handler
from Stopped to Ready, see Start up the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-13.
Start up the processing module and/or sample handler
Perform this procedure to change the status of the processing module

and/or sample handler from Stopped to Ready to:
Initialize the processing module and/or sample handler
Prepare for sample processing
Prerequisite Power on the SCC, page 5-3
Power on the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-7
Access the Snapshot screen, page 1-20
Module status Stopped
Supplies NA
To start up the processing module and/or sample handler:

1. Select the processing module graphic and/or sample handler
graphic on the Snapshot screen, and then select F5 - Start-up.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: For the i 2000 SSH (standard sample handler), you must
wait for the processing module status to change from Offline to
Stopped before initiating a start up.
2. Verify the status(es) when startup is complete:

Ready or Warming (processing module)
Ready (sample handler)
To initiate a run, see Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH),
page 5-206.
Processing modules, page 1-25
Pause the processing module
Perform this procedure to change the status of the processing module

from Running to Ready to:
Load reagents
Load bulk solutions
Perform maintenance or diagnostic procedures
Perform component replacement
Prerequisite Pause the RSH, page 5-15
Pause the LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000),
page 5-18
Module status Sample handler - All except Running
Processing module - Running
Supplies NA
To pause the processing module:

1. Verify the sample handler is not in the Running status.
NOTE: If you do not pause the sample handler and wait for all
scheduled tests to aspirate before you pause the processing
module, all tests with a status of Scheduled become exceptions
and are not processed.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2. Verify all tests have a status of Pending or Running. See View the
status of ordered tests, page 5-154.
3. Select the desired processing module graphic on the Snapshot

screen, and then select F7 - Pause.
4. Select OK to pause the processing module.
NOTE: If you are pausing a c System processing module, do not

open the R1 and R2 reagent supply center covers until the access
indicators on the processing module keypad illuminate.
If you are pausing an i System processing module, do not open
the module covers until the access indicator on the processing
module keypad illuminates, indicating the status is Ready.
To resume processing module operation, see Initiate or resume sample
processing (RSH and SSH), page 5-206.
To resume processing module operation, see Initiate or resume sample
processing (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000), page 5-207.
Pause the RSH
Perform this procedure to pause the RSH (robotic sample handler) so

you can:
Remove a sample carrier from the priority bay or section when
the amber indicator is illuminated
Remove a carrier tray from a routine bay(s) or section(s) when
the amber indicator is illuminated
You may also perform this procedure to pause the RSH prior to
pausing a processing module(s) so that samples are not transported to
the module(s).
NOTE: When you pause the RSH, the sample handler status
transitions from Running to Scheduled pause. The processing module
completes aspirations for all scheduled tests and the RSH returns the
carriers to their original locations. It may take up to 45 minutes for the
sample handler to complete this process. If you do not initiate a run

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
on the sample handler during that time, the sample handler status
changes to Ready.
To pause the processing module, see Pause the processing module,
page 5-14.
Module status Running
Supplies NA
To pause the RSH:

1. Select the sample handler graphic on the Snapshot screen, and
then select F7 - Pause.
2. Select OK to pause the RSH.

The pause indicator illuminates on the RSH keypad, page 1-120.
To return to Running status, see Initiate or resume sample processing
(RSH and SSH), page 5-206.
Loading samples (RSH), page 5-176
Unload samples (RSH), page 5-216
Pause the sample carousel (c System)
Perform this procedure to pause the sample carousel when the sample
carousel access indicator is not illuminated. In the Paused status, you
can:
Load patient samples, calibrators, or controls for priority
processing
Remove samples when they are no longer needed
NOTE: If a sample is moved while in the Paused status the
following will occur:
If a bar coded sample is moved to a new position on the
sample carousel, original pending orders will be deleted the
next time the carousel is scanned.
If orders are added to a bar coded sample, the original
pending orders are deleted and the orders added will be run.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
If a bar coded sample is moved to a position on the carousel

previously occupied by a non-bar coded sample, any
pending orders for the non-bar coded sample will be deleted
the next time the carousel is scanned.
IMPORTANT: You are responsible for loading the correct sample in

the correct position.
Prerequisite NA
Supplies NA
To pause the sample carousel:

1. Locate the square sample carousel access indicator button next
to the sample carousel.
2. Press and hold the button until the light blinks.

The light blinks to indicate the sample carousel is in the process
of pausing. The pause process completes when the sample probe
wash solutions are no longer required for samples in process.
3. Verify the illuminated sample carousel access indicator is no

longer blinking.
To load samples and return to Running status, see Load samples and
initiate sample processing (sample carousel - c System), page 5-188.
To unload samples, see Unload samples (sample carousel - c System),
page 5-218.
Sample carousel and indicator lights (c 8000), page 1-33
Pause the sample load queue (SSH)
Perform this procedure to change the status of the SSH (standard

sample handler) from Running to Load queue paused so you can:
Load a sample carrier
Priority load a sample carrier
You may also perform this procedure to pause the SSH prior to pausing
a processing module(s) so that samples are not transported to the
module(s).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: When you pause the sample load queue, the sample handler
status transitions from Running to Load queue paused. The sample
load queue stops routing any new carriers, but the processing queue
and unload queue remain active for approximately 20 minutes after
the last carrier is unloaded. If you do not initiate a run on the sample
handler during that time, the sample handler status changes to Ready.
To pause the processing module see, Pause the processing module,
page 5-14.
Supplies NA
To pause the sample load queue:

2. Select OK to pause the SSH.

The pause indicator illuminates on the sample handler keypad.
To return to Running status, see Initiate or resume sample processing
Loading samples (SSH), page 5-191
Pause the LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000)
Perform this procedure to pause the LAS (laboratory automation

system) carousel sample handler so you can:
Priority load a sample or calibrator
Remove samples when they are no longer needed
You may also perform this procedure to pause the LAS carousel sample
handler prior to pausing the processing module.
NOTE: When you pause the LAS carousel sample handler, the sample
handler status transitions from Running to Scheduled pause. The
processing module completes aspirations for the current sample or for
all scheduled calibrators. If you do not initiate a run on the sample
handler during that time, the sample handler status changes to Ready.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To pause the processing module see, Pause the processing module,

page 5-14.
Supplies NA
To pause the LAS carousel sample handler:

2. Select OK to pause the LAS carousel sample handler.

The pause indicator illuminates on the sample handler keypad.
NOTE: If you open the LAS carousel cover before the indicator
illuminates, all tests in process on the carousel become
exceptions and do not complete.
To return to Running status, see Initiate or resume sample processing (LAS
carousel sample handler - i 2000), page 5-207.
Loading samples (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000), page 5-203
Unload samples (LAS carousel sample handler), page 5-220
ARM power off and power on

You may need to power off the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic
Reconstitution Module) accessory to perform troubleshooting, and
then power it back on.
ARM power off and power on procedures include:
Power off the ARM (i System), page 5-20
Power on and initialize the ARM (i System), page 5-20

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Power off the ARM (i System)
Perform this procedure to power off the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic

Reconstitution Module) accessory when indicated for troubleshooting
purposes.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To power off the ARM:

1. Verify the ARM is not transferring buffer.
The green indicator, located under the start key on the ARM
keypad, flashes when wash buffer is pumped to the wash buffer
reservoir in the processing module.
2. Move the power switch, located on the lower left side of the
ARM, down to the "0" position.
ARM optional accessory (i System), page 1-109
Power on and initialize the ARM (i System)
Perform this procedure to power on and initialize the ARCHITECT

ARM (Automated Reconstitution Module) accessory for automated
buffer transfer.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To power on and initialize the ARM accessory:

1. Move the power switch, located on the lower left side of the
ARM, up to the "|" position.
A red indicator illuminates under the stop key on the ARM
keypad.
2. Press the start key on the ARM keypad to initialize the ARM.
A green indicator illuminates under the start key.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Emergency shutdown
When an unusual circumstance indicates that an emergency may
exist, you should turn off power to the ARCHITECT System.
Steps for turning off the power vary slightly based on whether you
have a single or multi-module system, see:
Perform an emergency shutdown on a single module system,
page 5-21
Perform an emergency shutdown on a multi-module system,
page 5-22
If your system is configured with the RSH (robotic sample handler),
you must discard all sample cups and/or tubes on the sample carrier if
a carrier is in the RSH carrier transport when you perform an
emergency shutdown. When you perform an emergency shutdown,
samples and the surrounding area may be contaminated by sample
splashing as the carrier transport motor loses power. See Remove sample
carrier(s) from the carrier transport and carrier positioner(s) (RSH),
page 10-708, for proper recovery information.
Perform an emergency shutdown on a single module system
Perform this procedure to stop the sample handler and processing

module in a single module system.
To perform an emergency shutdown on a single module system:
1. Press the emergency stop button for the processing module.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2. Disconnect the main power cord at its receptacle.
Perform an emergency shutdown on a multi-module system
Perform this procedure to stop the sample handler and processing

module(s) in a multi-module system.
To perform an emergency shutdown on a multi-module system:
1. Perform one or both of the following:
Press the emergency stop button for the processing module
farthest to the right when facing the front of the system.
Power to the processing module and sample handler is
turned off.
And/or
Press the emergency stop button for the desired processing
module(s).
Power to the processing module(s) is turned off.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2. Disconnect the main power cord for the processing module(s) at

its receptacle.
IMPORTANT: To remove power to all processing modules in a

multi-module system, you must disconnect the main power cord
for each processing module.
Long-term shutdown (i System)

Whenever you shut down an ARCHITECT i System for more than
seven days, you must perform diagnostic procedure 2135 Long Term
Shutdown, page 10-675. This diagnostic procedure:
Flushes all pumps and fluid lines with buffer, air, deionized
water, and then air
Removes all RVs
For instructions on how to perform this diagnostic procedure, see
Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653.
An internal decontamination must be performed prior to start up after
a long-term shutdown. Contact your Area Customer Support for more
information.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Consumable inventory management Section 5
Consumable inventory management

Always check consumable inventory before processing samples. Use
the Supply status screen to check inventory.
Consumable inventory management topics include:
Supply status screen and views, page 5-24
ARCHITECT System procedures - consumable inventory management,
page 5-31
c System procedures - consumable inventory management, page 5-32
i 2000/i 2000SR procedures - consumable inventory management,
page 5-46
Supply status screen and views

From the Supply status screen you can view the status of supplies on
board the system and the waste status. The view that displays is
dependent on the processing module configuration of your system.
Supply status screen and views topics include:
Supply status screen - c System view, page 5-24
Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-27
Windows - Supply status screen, page 5-29
Supply status screen - c System view
From the c System view of the Supply status screen you can:
View the volume and percent of bulk solutions
View the volume and percent of onboard solutions in the
reagent supply centers
View the status of onboard solutions in the sample carousel
View the status of liquid waste in the high-concentration waste
bottle
Access a window to update the status(es) of bulk solutions and
onboard solutions
NOTE: The system calculates supply volume and % remaining
information based on tests required for samples that have been
scanned by the sample handler.
The two c System views of the Supply status screen are:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5 Consumable inventory management
c 8000 view
c 16000 view
Figure 5.7: Supply status screen - c 8000 view

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.8: Supply status screen - c 16000 view
For descriptions of these fields, see Supply status screen - c System view
To display these views of the screen, see Access the Supply status screen -
c System view, page 5-27.
Verify supply and waste inventory, page 5-32
Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c System), page 5-33
inventory (c 8000), page 5-39
(c System), page 5-44
Empty the high-concentration waste bottle (c System), page 5-45

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Access the Supply status screen - c System view
Perform this procedure to display the c System view of the Supply

status screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Supply status screen:
NOTE: You may also access this screen from the Snapshot screen by
selecting the supply status button on the c 8000 or c 16000 processing
module graphic.
Select Supplies from the menu bar, and then select Supply status.
The Supply status screen - c System view displays.
Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view
From the i System view of the Supply status screen you can:
View the volume and percent of bulk solutions
View the status of solid waste
View the status of RVs (reaction vessels)
Access a window to update the status(es) of bulk solutions, solid
waste, and RVs
NOTE: The system calculates supply volume and % remaining
information based on tests required for samples that have been
scanned by the sample handler.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.9: Supply status screen - i System view
For descriptions of these fields, see Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR
To display this view of the screen, see Access the Supply status screen - i
2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-29.
Verify supply and waste inventory, page 5-32
Remove solid waste and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-47
Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-49
Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i
2000SR), page 5-52
2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57
Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60
Access the Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view
Perform this procedure to display the i System view of the Supply

status screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Supplies NA
To access the Supply status screen:
selecting the supply status button on the desired i System processing
module graphic.
1. Select Supplies from the menu bar, and then select Supply
status.
The Supply status screen - c System view displays for a
standalone c System or an integrated system.
OR
The Supply status screen - i System view displays for a standalone
or multi-module i System.
2. Select another Module option to display a different view.

(optional)
Windows - Supply status screen
The window you can access from the Supply status screen is:
Update supplies window - c System view, page 5-29
Update supplies window - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-31
Update supplies window - c System view
From the c System view of the Update supplies window you can
update supply information so the system can accurately track onboard
supply inventory.
The two c System views of the Update supplies window are:
c 8000 view
c 16000 view

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.10: Update supplies window - c 8000 view
Figure 5.11: Update supplies window - c 16000 view
For descriptions of these fields, see Update supplies window - c System


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Update supplies window - i 2000/i 2000SR view
From the i System view of the Update supplies window you can update
supply information so the system can accurately track onboard supply
inventory.
Figure 5.12: Update supplies window - i System view
For descriptions of these fields, see Update supplies window - i 2000/i

2000SR view field descriptions, page Appendix E-121.
Remove solid waste and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-47
2000SR), page 5-52
2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57
ARCHITECT System procedures - consumable inventory

management
The procedure that is common to both the c System and i Systems is
Verify supply and waste inventory, page 5-32.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Verify supply and waste inventory
Perform this procedure before initiating sample processing to verify

adequate supply inventory levels or when the supply status button on
the processing module(s) graphic(s) displays a caution icon.
NOTE: The status that displays reflects the inventory that remains
after the system processes the samples that have been scanned by the
sample bar code reader.
You can create orders when inventory levels are insufficient. However,
if inventory is not adequate when you initiate sample processing, tests
become exceptions and are not processed.
Prerequisite Access the Supply status screen - c System view,
page 5-27
Access the Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view,
page 5-29
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To verify supply and waste inventory:

1. Select the desired Module option.
The Supply status screen for the selected module displays.
2. View the inventory of supplies and waste.
c System procedures - consumable inventory management

c System consumable inventory management procedures include:
Prepare 0.5% acid wash solution (c System), page 5-35
Prepare detergent A (c System), page 5-37
Prepare 10% detergent B solution (c System), page 5-38

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replace onboard solutions in the sample carousel and update
inventory (c System), page 5-44
Empty the high-concentration waste bottle (c System), page 5-45
Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c System)
Perform this procedure to replace and update ICT Reference Solution,

Acid Wash, or Alkaline Wash inventory when the bottle is empty or
the solution is expired.
Prerequisite Access the Supply status screen - c System view,
page 5-27
Supplies ICT Reference solution
Alkaline Wash
Acid Wash
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity presents a

chemical-related hazard. See product-specific information
under Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
To replace bulk solutions and update inventory:

1. Verify the new solution is within the expiration date listed on
the label. DO NOT use the solution if the expiration date is
exceeded.
2. Open the supply center door.
3. Remove the used bottle from the weight platform, and then
place the used bottle on the floor in front of the supply center.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
4. Verify the following:

liquid or dried solution has not accumulated on the weight
platform tray
excess solution is not present in the bottles (volume is
decreasing over time)
bottles are not overflowing
If liquid or dried solution has accumulated on the tray, see
Solution/dried solution under bulk solution bottles (c System),
page 10-559.
If excess solution is present or bottles are overfilled, see Wash
solution is not being used (level not falling over time) (c System),
page 10-560.
5. Remove the cap from the new bottle, and then place the bottle
on the floor next to the used bottle.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT pool partially filled bottles of bulk

solutions.
6. Remove the cap and tubing from the used bottle.
7. Insert the tubing into the new bottle, and then press the cap
firmly on the new bottle.
8. Place the new bottle in the correct orientation and the correct
location on the weight platform, ensuring the bottle is securely
seated. The correct bottle orientation is:
Acid and Alkaline wash - bottle cap and opening in front

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
ICT Reference solution - bottle cap and opening in back
IMPORTANT: Results can be adversely affected if you do not

load bulk solutions correctly
9. Discard the used bottle in accordance with the waste disposal

procedures for your laboratory. See Waste handling and disposal,
page 8-12, for additional information.
10. Close the supply center door.
11. Select the Module 1 option on the Supply status screen.

The c System view of the Supply status screen displays.
12. Select F2 - Update supplies.

The Update supplies window displays.
13. Select the appropriate Bulk solutions check box(es).
14. Select Done to update supply inventory.
NOTE: The bulk solution inventory is updated to 100%

remaining. Inaccurate tracking will result if a new bottle is not
used.
Prepare 0.5% acid wash solution (c System)
Perform this procedure to prepare a 0.5% dilution of Acid Wash. Acid

wash is an onboard solution used for washing probes.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies Acid Wash (bulk solution)
Reagent Grade Type II water
Appropriate reagent cartridge
Sample cup

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

To prepare 0.5% acid wash solution:

1. Verify that the concentrated acid wash is within the expiration
date on the bottle label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is
exceeded.
2. Mix 5 mL of acid wash with 995 mL of Reagent Grade Type II

water.
3. Store the diluted solution in a container labeled with the name

(0.5% acid wash) and the expiration date.
NOTE: The expiration date of the prepared 0.5% solution of acid

wash is the same as the concentrated acid wash.
4. Pour 0.5% acid wash into the appropriate container to be loaded

on the processing module.
5. Label the container with the name (0.5% acid wash) and the
expiration date.
NOTE: The stability of the prepared 0.5% acid wash when placed
onboard the reagent supply centers is 30 days.
The stability of the prepared 0.5% acid wash when placed
onboard the sample carousel is one day.
To replace 0.5% acid wash in the reagent supply centers on the c 8000
processing module, see Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply
centers and update inventory (c 8000), page 5-39.
To replace 0.5% acid wash in the reagent supply centers on the c
16000 processing module, see Replace onboard solutions in the reagent
supply centers and update inventory (c 16000), page 5-41.
To replace 0.5% acid wash in the sample carousel, see Replace onboard
solutions in the sample carousel and update inventory (c System),
page 5-44.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Prepare detergent A (c System)
Perform this procedure to prepare Detergent A. This detergent is an

onboard solution used for washing probes and cleaning cuvettes.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies Detergent A
Sample cup

To prepare Detergent A:
1. Verify detergent A is within the expiration date on the bottle
label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is exceeded.
2. Gently invert to ensure a homogeneous solution.
3. Pour detergent A into the appropriate container to be loaded on

board the reagent supply center.
4. Label the container with the name (Detergent A) and expiration

date.
NOTE: The stability of detergent A when placed onboard the

reagent supply centers is the expiration date on the bottle label.
The stability of detergent A when placed on board the sample
carousel is one day.
To replace detergent A on the c 8000 processing module, see Replace
onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c
8000), page 5-39.
To replace detergent A on the c 16000 processing module, see Replace
16000), page 5-41.
To replace detergent A in the sample carousel, see Replace onboard
solutions in the sample carousel and update inventory (c System),
page 5-44.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Prepare 10% detergent B solution (c System)
Perform this procedure to prepare a 10% dilution of Detergent B. This

detergent is an onboard solution used for washing probes.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies Detergent B

To prepare 10% Detergent B solution:

1. Verify detergent B is within the expiration date on the bottle
label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is exceeded.
2. Gently invert 4-5 times to ensure a homogeneous solution.
3. Mix 50 mL of detergent B with 450 mL of Reagent Grade Type II

water.
4. Store the diluted solution in a container labeled with the name

(10% Detergent B) and the expiration date.
NOTE: The stability of the prepared 10% detergent B is 14 days.
5. Pour the 10% detergent B into the appropriate container to be

loaded onboard the reagent supply center.
6. Label the container with the name (10% Detergent B) and the
expiration date.
NOTE: The stability of the prepared 10% detergent B when

placed onboard the reagent supply centers is 14 days.
To replace detergent B on the c 8000 processing module, see Replace
8000), page 5-39.
To replace detergent B on the c 16000 processing module, see Replace
16000), page 5-41.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c
8000)
Perform this procedure to replace and update onboard solution

inventory in the reagent supply centers when the inventory is empty
or the solution is expired. Onboard solutions in the reagent supply
centers may include a 0.5% dilution of acid wash, detergent A, or a
10% dilution of detergent B.
To change the onboard solution locations, see Change the onboard
solution options (c 8000), page 2-33.
Prerequisite Prepare 0.5% acid wash solution (c System), page 5-35
Prepare 10% detergent B solution (c System),
page 5-38
Access the Supply status screen - c System view,
page 5-27
Module status Ready or Scheduled pause
Supplies 0.5% dilution of Acid Wash
Detergent A
10% dilution of Detergent B

To replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update

inventory:
1. Pour the appropriate solution into a reagent cartridge.
NOTE: Onboard solutions located in positions E1 or E2 on the c

8000 processing module must be poured into a large cartridge
(90 mL) only.
2. Label the container with the solution name and the expiration
date.
on board the reagent supply centers is 30 days.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The stability of detergent A when placed on board the reagent

supply centers is the expiration date on the bottle label.
The stability of the prepared 10% detergent B when placed on
board the reagent supply centers is 14 days.
3. Remove air bubbles, if they exist, with a clean applicator stick.
4. Open the processing module cover.
5. Verify the R1 and/or R2 carousel advance key(s) on the

processing module keypad are illuminated before accessing the
reagent supply center.
NOTE: If the module status is Scheduled pause, the keys

illuminate as each reagent supply center becomes available. It
may take up to five minutes after you pause the module for
reagent supply center 2 to become available.
6. Remove and replace the solutions in positions E1 or E2 on the c

8000 processing module by performing the following steps:
(optional)
Remove the empty or expired solution.
Place the fresh solution in the assigned position.
7. Remove and replace the solution in the reagent supply centers

by performing the following steps: (optional)
NOTE: Position D1 in each reagent carousel on the c 8000

processing module is the only position that can be used for
onboard solution storage.
Press the green or orange button on the front portion of the
reagent supply center(s), and then open the cover(s).
CAUTION: Class 2 Laser radiation when open. Avoid eye
exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam.
Press the carousel advance key on the processing module

keypad to advance the reagent supply center to access the
position.
Remove the empty or expired solution and place the fresh
solution in the position.
Close the reagent supply center cover(s) by pushing the
cover(s) down until you hear a click.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
8. Discard the used cartridge in accordance with the waste disposal

9. Close the processing center cover.
10. Select run to resume processing if the module status is Scheduled

pause or perform the following steps to update supplies if the
module status is Ready.
To update supplies:
a. Select F2 - Update supplies.
b. Select the appropriate Reagent supply center check box(es).
c. Select Done to update the supply information.
NOTE: The inventory of the solution indicates that the reagent

cartridge is completely full. The inventory updates with the
actual remaining volume when the solution is accessed during a
run.
Processing module keypad (c System), page 1-29
Supply status screen - c 8000 view, page 5-25
Update supplies window - c 8000 view, page 5-30
Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c
16000)

inventory in the reagent supply centers when the inventory is empty
or the solution is expired. Onboard solutions in the reagent supply
centers may include a 0.5% dilution of acid wash, detergent A, or a
10% dilution of detergent B.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To change the onboard solution locations, see Change the onboard

solution options (c 16000), page 2-34.
Prepare 10% detergent B solution (c System),
page 5-38
page 5-27
Supplies 0.5% dilution of Acid Wash
Detergent A
10% dilution of Detergent B

To replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update

inventory:
1. Pour the appropriate solution into a reagent cartridge.
2. Label the container with the solution name and the expiration
date.
on board the reagent supply centers is 30 days.
The stability of detergent A when placed on board the reagent
supply centers is the expiration date on the bottle label.
The stability of the prepared 10% detergent B when placed on
board the reagent supply centers is 14 days.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

6. Remove and replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply

center(s) by performing the following steps:
a. Open the reagent supply center cover(s).
b. Press the carousel advance key on the processing module

keypad to advance the reagent supply center to access the
position.
c. Remove the empty or expired solution and place the fresh

solution in the position.
d. Close the reagent supply center cover(s).
7. Discard the used cartridge in accordance with the waste disposal

8. Close the processing center cover.
9. Select run to resume processing if the module status is Scheduled

pause or perform the following steps to update supplies if the
To update supplies:
a. Select F2 - Update supplies.
b. Select the appropriate Reagent supply center check box(es).
c. Select Done to update the supply information.
NOTE: The inventory of the solution indicates that the reagent

cartridge is completely full. The inventory updates with the
actual remaining volume when the solution is accessed during a
run.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Supply status screen - c 16000 view, page 5-26

Update supplies window - c 16000 view, page 5-30
Replace onboard solutions in the sample carousel and update inventory (c

System)

inventory in the sample carousel when the sample cup or tube is
empty or the solution is expired. Onboard solutions in the sample
carousel may include 0.5% Acid Wash and Detergent A.
page 5-27
Module status Warming or Ready
Supplies 0.5% Acid Wash
Detergent A
Sample cups or tubes

To replace onboard solutions in the sample carousel and update

inventory:
1. Pour the appropriate onboard solution into a sample cup or
tube.
A minimum of 500 L onboard solution is required.
NOTE: The stability of onboard solutions in the sample carousel

is one day.
3. Press the gray button on the front portion of the sample carousel
cover, and then open the cover.
4. Press the sample carousel advance indicator button (round) to

advance the sample carousel to access the desired position(s).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
5. Remove the empty or expired solution and place the fresh

solution in the carousel as specified:
0.5% acid wash in position 31
Detergent A in position 32
IMPORTANT: You are responsible for loading the correct

solution in the correct position. When you load sample cups or
tubes, ensure that you have pushed them down completely into
the sample carousel and that they are not tilted.
6. Close the sample carousel cover by pushing the cover down until
you hear a click.
7. Discard used sample cups and/or tubes in accordance with the

waste disposal procedures for your laboratory. See Waste handling
and disposal, page 8-12, for additional information.
8. Close the processing module cover.
9. Select F2 - Update supplies.

10. Select the appropriate Sample carousel check box(es).
11. Select Done to update the supply inventory.
Empty the high-concentration waste bottle (c System)
Perform this procedure to empty the high-concentration waste bottle

(optional component) when it reaches capacity.
Prerequisite Check the liquid waste inventory in Supply status
screen
Supplies Absorbent towels

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area

where you may be exposed to potentially infectious
material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.

To empty the high-concentration waste bottle:

1. Disconnect the float switch cable from the waste bottle cap by
unscrewing the locking ring and disconnecting the cable.
2. Place an absorbent towel next to the bottle to catch any spills

from the bottle cap.
3. Unscrew the waste bottle from the cap, and ensure the tubing is
not kinked.
4. Place the cap with the attached tubing on the absorbent towel.
5. Dispose of liquid waste in accordance with the waste disposal

CAUTION: Lifting Hazard. The ARCHITECT c System
high-concentration waste bottle is heavy when full. Use
care when handling the bottle to reduce the risk of injury.
6. Screw the cap onto the waste bottle, and ensure the tubing is not
kinked.
7. Reconnect the float switch cable by inserting the cable and

tightening the locking ring.
NOTE: The Supply status screen updates automatically when

you reconnect the float switch cable.
i 2000/i 2000SR procedures - consumable inventory

management
i System consumable inventory management procedures include:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove solid waste and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR),

page 5-47
Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-51
2000SR), page 5-52
Replace concentrated wash buffer on the ARM (i System), page 5-55
2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57
Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60
Remove solid waste and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Perform this procedure to empty the solid waste container and to

update the waste status. The solid waste container holds used RVs
(reaction vessels).
Prerequisite Access the Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view,
page 5-29
Module status Any
Supplies Biohazard bag

To remove solid waste and update inventory:

1. Open the supply and waste center door.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2. Lift the solid waste container over the stopper on the floor of the
supply and waste center, and then slide the solid waste container
out.
The waste chute closes.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: The closed waste chute holds 50 RVs (reaction vessels).

Therefore, if the processing module is running, you have
approximately 15 minutes to empty the waste container. If the
waste chute is full, the processing module status changes to
Scheduled pause and the used RVs remain on the outer ring of
the process path.
3. Remove the biohazard bag and discard the bag and its contents
in a biohazard trash receptacle.
4. Install a new biohazard bag in the solid waste container.
NOTE: The biohazard bag must fit snugly and be fully opened in
the solid waste container to allow RVs to drop freely into the
container.
5. Slide the solid waste container into the waste area, lift it over the
stopper on the floor, and then push it firmly against the back
wall to ensure the waste chute is open.
6. Select the appropriate Module option on the Supply status

screen, and then select F2 - Update supplies.
7. Select the Solid waste check box.
8. Select Done to update supplies.
Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Perform this procedure to replenish and update RV (reaction vessel)

inventory on the processing module(s). The maximum onboard
storage capacity is 1200 RVs (sufficient inventory for approximately
five hours of continuous operation).
page 5-29
Module status Any
Supplies Reaction vessels

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To replenish RVs and update inventory:

1. Open the RV hopper cover.
2. Add RVs by performing one of the following:

Pour a partial bag of RVs into the RV hopper, estimating the
quantity added.
Pour a full bag of RVs (500) into the RV hopper.
NOTE: Do not overfill the hopper.
3. Close the RV hopper cover.

5. Select the appropriate RVs Added option.

Five hundred is equal to one bag. One thousand is equal to two
bags. Use Other for a partial bag. If you select Other, enter the
estimated number of RVs.
6. Select Done to update RV inventory.
Reaction vessels (i System), page 1-146

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Prepare wash buffer (i System)
Perform this procedure to prepare wash buffer from concentrate. You

can prepare wash buffer ahead of time as long as its expiration date is
not exceeded when in use.
If your system is configured with an ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic
Reconstitution Module) accessory, see Replace concentrated wash buffer
on the ARM (i System), page 5-55.
Prerequisite NA
Module status NA
Supplies Concentrated Wash Buffer (1 L bottle)
10 L wash buffer preparation container
To prepare wash buffer:

1. Verify that the wash buffer is within the expiration date on the
bottle label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is exceeded.
NOTE: The expiration date of the prepared wash buffer is the

expiration date on the wash buffer label.
2. Invert the concentrated wash buffer bottle several times to

ensure a homogeneous solution.
3. Pour the concentrated wash buffer into the preparation

container.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
4. Slowly add Reagent Grade Type II water into the preparation

container until the liquid reaches the 10 L mark.
NOTE: Add the water slowly to avoid foaming. Ensure that the
liquid level is between the two solid lines on the preparation
container.
To load wash buffer, see Replenish wash buffer manually and update
inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Perform this procedure to load wash buffer concentrate into the 25

liter onboard reservoir when your system is not configured with an
ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory or
when the ARM is unavailable. A full reservoir holds sufficient
inventory for approximately five hours of continuous operation.
To replace the concentrated wash buffer container on the ARCHITECT
ARM accessory, see Replace concentrated wash buffer on the ARM (i
System), page 5-55.
Prerequisite Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-51
Access the Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view,
page 5-29
Module status All except Offline, Initializing, and Maintenance
Supplies Prepared wash buffer (room temperature 15C -
37C)
Wash buffer transfer tubing
Lint-free tissue
To replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory:

2. Put the transfer tubing into the wash buffer preparation

container.
3. Attach the wash buffer transfer tubing to the quick disconnect at

the left side of the wash buffer reservoir.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

5. Select the Add buffer check box.
6. Select Done.
An information message displays.
7. Select OK to initiate buffer transfer.

The Supply status screen displays with a Wash buffer status of
FILL IN PROGRESS.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
8. Wait for the fill to complete, and then disconnect the wash
buffer transfer tubing from the quick disconnect on the wash
buffer reservoir.
9. Remove the tubing from the preparation container.
10. Drain any liquid remaining in the transfer tubing into a sink by
raising the tubing above the level of the sink and depressing the
connector in the end of the tubing.
11. Dry the outside of the tubing with a clean soft lint-free tissue,
and then store the tubing in a clean, dry place.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
12. Close the supply and waste center door.
13. Rinse the wash buffer preparation container with Reagent Grade
Type II water.
14. Prepare wash buffer so it is ready the next time you need to load
wash buffer. (optional)
Replace concentrated wash buffer on the ARM (i System)
Perform this procedure to load a Concentrated Wash Buffer container

on the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module)
accessory.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies Concentrated Wash Buffer
To replace concentrated wash buffer on the ARM:

1. Verify that the concentrated wash buffer is within the expiration
date on the box label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is
exceeded.
2. Press the stop key on the ARM keypad.

The red indicator beneath the stop key illuminates.
3. Disconnect the sensor cable [1] from the ARM.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
4. Disconnect the tubing [2].
5. Twist the fitting to loosen the tubing assembly [4] and remove it
from the container.
6. Place the tubing assembly into the tubing assembly holder [3].
7. Remove the empty container from the ARM.
8. Remove the cardboard cutout from the full container and

discard.
9. Position the full container on the ARM so that the cap is close to
the white bracket [5].
10. Remove the cap from the container.
11. Place the tubing assembly into the full container, and then twist
the fitting to tighten.
12. Reconnect the sensor cable [1] and supply tubing quick
disconnect fitting [2] to the ARM console.
13. Press the replace buffer key on the ARM keypad.
NOTE: It is normal for a small amount of wash buffer to drain as

the ARM primes itself before resuming operation.
The stop indicator is no longer illuminated and the following
occurs:
The amber replace buffer indicator illuminates briefly while
the sensor automatically recalibrates to "full."

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The green start indicator illuminates steadily indicating the

ARM is ready for operation.
Buffer is automatically transferred to the buffer reservoir
when the onboard remaining wash buffer is approximately
40%.
14. Discard the empty container.

To initiate wash buffer transfer, see Initiate wash buffer transfer from the
ARM (i System), page 5-60.
ARM connectors (i System), page 1-113
Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Perform this procedure to replace and update Pre-Trigger and Trigger

Solution inventory when the bottle is empty, has reached the onboard
stability expiration date, or is expired.
page 5-29
Supplies Pre-trigger solution
Trigger solution

To replace pre-trigger and/or trigger and update inventory:

1. Verify that the new pre-trigger or trigger is within the expiration
date listed on the label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is
exceeded.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT pool partially filled bottles of pre-trigger

or trigger.
2. Record the installation date in accordance with your current

laboratory procedures.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3. Add the number of days for onboard storage listed on the bottle
label to the installation date.
4. Record this date (onboard expiration date) in accordance with

your current laboratory procedures.
NOTE: This date must not exceed the expiration date of the
solution.
6. Slide the pre-trigger/trigger tray out.
NOTE: Use caution when handling the level sensors. Avoid

bending the tubing connected to the cap. Avoid applying stress
on the wiring and connectors.
7. Move the bottle to be replaced to the bottle exchange position in

the middle of the tray.
8. Place the new bottle in the correct location in the tray, as

indicated by the label on the tray.
IMPORTANT: Results can be adversely affected if you do not

load pre-trigger and trigger correctly.
9. Remove the cap from the new bottle and place it in the cap
storage area at the front of the tray.
10. Remove the cap from the used bottle.

The level sensor assembly is attached to the cap.
11. Place the level sensor and cap into the new bottle.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
12. Place the level sensor into the container with the arrow facing
towards the front.
13. Tighten the cap.

When the level sensor is correctly installed, the electrical
connector is on the right and the tubing is on the left.
IMPORTANT: Results and inventory status can be adversely

affected if you do not align the level sensor correctly.
14. Place the cap from the cap storage area on the used bottle, and
then remove the bottle.
15. Discard the used bottle in accordance with the waste disposal
16. Slide the pre-trigger/trigger tray back into the module.
18. Select the appropriate Module option from the Supply status
19. Select the Pre-Trigger and/or Trigger check box(es).
20. Select Done to update the pre-trigger or trigger inventory.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: The pre-trigger and/or trigger inventory is updated to

100% remaining. Inaccurate tracking will result if a new bottle is
not used.
Pre-trigger solution (i System), page 1-143
Trigger solution (i System), page 1-144
Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System)
Perform this procedure to manually start transfer of buffer from the

ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory to an
i System processing module. This procedure is required when an error
condition occurs during buffer transfer.
page 5-29
Module status All except Offline and Stopped
Supplies NA
To initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM:

1. Verify the ARM is in Ready status (green indicator under the Start
key is illuminated). If not in Ready status, press the Stop key
followed by the Start key on the ARM keypad.

screen, and then select F2 - Update Supplies.
3. Select the Add buffer check box.
4. Select Done.
The updated Supply status screen displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5 Reagent inventory management
Reagent inventory management

Always check reagent inventory before processing samples. Use the
Reagent screens to manage reagent inventory.
Reagent inventory management topics include:
Reagent status screens, page 5-61
Reagent history screen, page 5-75
ARCHITECT System procedures - Reagent inventory management,
page 5-79
c System procedures - reagent inventory management, page 5-84
i 2000/i 2000SR procedures - reagent inventory management,
page 5-102
Reagent status screens

From the Reagent status and Reagent status all screens you can view
the status of reagents on board the system. The view that displays for
the Reagent status screen is dependent on the processing module
configuration of your system.
Reagent status screen and views topics include:
Reagent status screen - c System view, page 5-61
Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-64
Reagent status screen - View all view, page 5-67
Descriptions of reagent statuses, page 5-69
Windows - Reagent status screens, page 5-70
Reagent status screen - c System view
From the c System view of the Reagent status screen you can view
information for reagents loaded on the reagent carousels, such as:
Reagent location
Assay name
Calibration status
Remaining tests
Reagent status
A graphical representation of the reagent carousels indicates the
location of the reagents and their statuses.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Reagent inventory management Section 5
You can also access windows to:

Find a specific reagent
Update the reagent inventory
Print the Reagent Load Error report
Print the Reagent Status report
View detailed reagent information
Assign locations for non-bar coded reagents
Reset volume and stability for non-bar coded reagents
An ellipsis (...) displays when the system cannot display all data on a
screen or a window. View the details window to see all data.
The two c System views of the Reagent status screen are:
c 8000 view
c 16000 view
Figure 5.13: Reagent status screen - c 8000 view

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.14: Reagent status screen - c 16000 view
For descriptions of these fields, see Reagent status screen - c System field
To sort columns on this screen, select the desired column heading. The
information sorts as described in the following table.
Column Sort description

R1, R2 R1 carousel position in ascending
order.
ASSAY Alphanumerically in ascending order.
REMAINING TESTS Numerically is ascending order.
CAL STATUS and REAGENT STATUS See Descriptions of calibration
statuses, page 6-17 and Descriptions
of reagent statuses, page 5-69.
To display this screen, see Access the Reagent status screen - c System view,
page 5-64.
Verify reagent inventory on a single module, page 5-79
Verify reagent inventory on all modules, page 5-80
Find a specific reagent, page 5-81
View reagent details, page 5-82

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Scan the reagent carousel(s), page 5-84

Load bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-85
Load sample diluent(s) (c System), page 5-88
Load non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-91
Replace sample diluent(s) (c System), page 5-93
Replace non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-96
Unload bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-98
Unload non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-100
Print a report, page 5-333
Access the Reagent status screen - c System view
Perform this procedure to display the c System view of the Reagent

status screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Reagent status screen:
selecting the reagent status button on the c 8000 or c 16000
processing module graphic.
Select Reagents from the menu bar, and then select Reagent status.
The Reagent status screen - c 8000 or c 16000 view displays.
Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view
From the i 2000/i 2000SR view of the Reagent status screen you can
view information for reagents loaded on the reagent carousel, such as:
Reagent location
Assay name
Calibration status

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remaining tests
Reagent status
A graphical representation of the reagent carousel indicates the
location of the reagents and their statuses.
Update the reagent inventory
Figure 5.15: Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view
For descriptions of these fields, see Reagent status screen - i 2000/i

2000SR field descriptions, page Appendix E-111.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

P Carousel position in ascending order.
REMAINING TESTS Numerically is ascending order.
To display this screen, see Access the Reagent status screen - i 2000/i
2000SR view, page 5-66.
Prepare new reagent bottles (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-102
Prepare used reagent bottles (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-105
Load reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-106
Unload reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-108
Access the Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view
Perform this procedure to display the i System view of the Reagent

status screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Reagent status screen:
selecting the reagent status button on the desired i System processing
module graphic.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
1. Select Reagents from the menu bar, and then select Reagent
status.
The Reagent status screen - c System view displays for a
standalone c System or an integrated system.
OR
The Reagent status screen - i System view displays for a
standalone or multi-module i System.
2. Select another Module option to display a different view.

(optional)
Reagent status screen - View all view
From the View all view of the Reagent status screen you can see
information for reagents loaded on all modules, such as:
Assay name
Reagent location, lot number, expiration date, and onboard
stability
Reagent and calibration status
Remaining tests

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.16: Reagent status screen - View all view
For descriptions of these fields, see Reagent status screen - View all view

M/P Module, and then carousel position in
ascending order.
ASSAY and REAGENT LOT Numerically in ascending order.
REMAINING TESTS and STABILITY Alphanumerically is ascending order.
EXP. DATE First to last to expire.
To display this screen, see Access the Reagent status screen - View all view,
page 5-69.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Access the Reagent status screen - View all view
Perform this procedure to display the Reagent status screen - View all
view.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Reagent status screen - View all view:

1. Select Reagents from the menu bar, and then select Reagent
status.
The Reagent status screen - c System view displays. This view
displays for a standalone c System and an integrated system.
OR
The Reagent status screen - i System view displays. This view
displays for standalone and multi-module i Systems.
2. Select the View all option.

The Reagent status screen - view all view displays.
Descriptions of reagent statuses
You can use reagent status information to determine the status of each
reagent and if there are problems with the reagent kits loaded on the
system. The system displays one of the following reagent statuses for
each reagent kit. When you select the REAGENT STATUS column
heading, the reagent status sorts in the following order.
Table 5.1: Reagent statuses
Status Description
BC Fail The bar code on the reagent bottle is unreadable.
Undefined The reagent configuration for a 1D bar code is not defined.
See Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric - c
System), page 2-93.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 5.1: Reagent statuses (continued)

Status Description
Load Error c System:
The reagent is loaded in the wrong reagent supply center.
For example, an R1 reagent is loaded in reagent supply
center 2.
c 16000:
The reagent is loaded in the wrong carousel (inner versus
outer) in a reagent supply center. For example, the ICT
diluent is loaded in the R1 Inner (B-line) carousel when it
should be loaded in the R1 Outer (A-line) carousel.
i System:
The reagent kit contains more than three bottles and is
loaded in positions 25 and 1 on the reagent carousel.
Missing Bottle The reagent kit is missing a required bottle.
Extra Bottle The detected bottle(s) is not part of a known reagent kit or
insufficient bottles are loaded to create a kit.
Mismatch One or more detected bottles are not linked to the reagent
(i System) kit.
NOTE: Bottles in a reagent kit are linked together by the

system software when they are scanned for the first time.
The bottles must be kept together and cannot be used for
another reagent kit.
No Assay The reagent is not used by any assay file installed on the
system.
Empty The reagent is empty.
LLS Error A liquid level sense error occurred during aspiration of the
reagent.
Expired The reagent is expired or has exceeded the onboard
stability time.
Low Alert The remaining volume of the reagent is below the
configured number of tests for the low alert notification.
Overridden The operator has overridden a reagent that is expired or has
exceeded the onboard stability time.
Mixing The reagent is mixing during run initialization to disperse the
(i System) microparticles.
OK The reagent is OK.
Windows - Reagent status screens
Windows you can access from the Reagent status screen include:
Details for reagent (Reagent status) window, page 5-71
Assign location window (c System), page 5-72

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Find options (Reagent status) window, page 5-73

Find options (Reagent status - View all or Reagent history) window,
page 5-74
Print options window, page 5-346
Details for reagent (Reagent status) window
From the Details for reagent (Reagent status) window you can view
reagent, assay, and component details for a reagent. This information
allows you to address reagent inventory concerns.
Figure 5.17: Details for reagent (Reagent status) window - c System

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.18: Details for reagent (Reagent status) window - i System
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for reagent (Reagent status)
Assign location window (c System)
From the Assign location window, you can configure a location in the
reagent supply centers for non-bar coded reagents.
You can also unload non-bar coded reagents when inventory is
depleted, expired, or space is needed for a different assay.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.19: Assign location window (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Assign location window (c System)

Find options (Reagent status) window
From the Find options (Reagent status) window you can search for
specific reagent(s) on a single module by entering your search criteria
in one or more fields.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.20: Find options (Reagent status) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Reagent status) window
Find options (Reagent status - View all or Reagent history)

window
From the Find options (Reagent status - View all or Reagent history)
window you can search for specific reagents on all modules by
entering your search criteria in one or more fields.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.21: Find options (Reagent status - view all) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Reagent status - View
all) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-115.
Reagent history screen

From the Reagent history screen you can view historical information
on reagent kits that have been used on the system, such as:
Assay name
Reagent location, lot number, onboard stability, and expiration
date
Reagent and calibration status
Remaining tests
The system stores information for up to 3000 reagent kits.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.22: Reagent history screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Reagent history screen field


M/P Module, and then carousel position in
ascending order.
ASSAY and REAGENT LOT Numerically in ascending order.
REMAINING TESTS and STABILITY Alphanumerically in ascending order.
EXP. DATE First to last to expire.
To display this screen, see Access the Reagent history screen, page 5-77.
View reagent history details, page 5-83

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Access the Reagent history screen
Perform this procedure to display the Reagent history screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Reagent history screen:

Select Reagents from the menu bar, and then select Reagent history.
The Reagent history screen displays.
Window - Reagent history screen
Windows you can access from the Reagent history screen include:
Details for reagent (history) window, page 5-77
page 5-74
Details for reagent (history) window
From the Details for reagent (history) window you can view reagent,
assay, and component details for a reagent. This information provides
a historical perspective that is useful in a troubleshooting scenario.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.23: Details for reagent (history) window - c System
Figure 5.24: Details for reagent (history) window - i System
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for reagent (history) window

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
ARCHITECT System procedures - Reagent inventory

management
Procedures that are common to both the c System and the i System
are:
Verify reagent inventory on a single module

adequate reagent inventory or when the reagent status button on the
processing module graphic displays a caution icon.
To verify reagent inventory on all modules, see Verify reagent inventory
on all modules, page 5-80.
Prerequisite Access the Reagent status screen - c System view,
page 5-64
Access the Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR
view, page 5-66
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To verify reagent inventory on a single module:

1. Select the desired Module option on the Reagent status screen.
(optional)
Reagent information for the selected module displays.
2. View reagent inventory.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To print a Reagent Status report or Reagent Load Error report, see Print
a report, page 5-333.
Reagent Load Error Report, page Appendix A-71
Reagent Status Report (i 2000/i 2000SR), page Appendix A-73
Verify reagent inventory on all modules

adequate reagent inventory or when the reagent status button on the
processing module displays a caution icon.
To view reagent inventory on a single module system, see Verify reagent
inventory on a single module, page 5-79.
page 5-64
view, page 5-66
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To verify reagent inventory on all modules:

1. Select the View all option on the Reagent status screen.
The Reagent status screen - View all view displays.
2. View reagent inventory.

To print a Reagent Status report or Reagent Load Error report, see Print
a report, page 5-333.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Perform this procedure to search for specific reagents by entering

search criteria in one or more fields.
page 5-64
view, page 5-66
Access the Reagent status screen - View all view,
page 5-69
Access the Reagent history screen, page 5-77
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To find a specific reagent:

1. Select the appropriate Module option on the Reagent status
screen.
The reagent inventory for the selected module displays.
2. Select F3 - Find.
The Find options (Reagent status) window displays.
3. Select and/or enter your search conditions. You can narrow the
results returned by entering/selecting more criteria.
NOTE: A wild card search allows you to type a partial entry

followed by an asterisk (*) to begin a search when you do not
know the entire entry. You can use the asterisk (*) wildcard
character in all data entry boxes except position (P).
Example: If you enter 123* in the Reagent lot data entry box, all
reagent lots starting with 123 display. This list could include
12345M100, 12346M100, and 12347M100.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: To display c System reagent(s) for a specific reagent

carousel, you must enter a position in the P data entry box and
select the R1 and/or R2 check box. If you do not enter a position
(P), all reagents display.
4. Select Done to initiate the search.

The Reagent status screen displays with the text "Search results:"
in the title bar.
NOTE: Select the refresh button to display all records. This

button always displays as an active button.
Find options (Reagent status) window, page 5-73
page 5-74
View reagent details
Perform this procedure to display the Details for reagent (Reagent

status) window. From this window you can view detailed information
for reagents.
page 5-64
view, page 5-66
Access the Reagent status screen - View all view,
page 5-69
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view reagent details:

1. Select a Module option on the Reagent status screen.
2. Select the desired reagent(s) from the table or select F2 - Select

all.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The Details for reagent (Reagent status) window displays.
4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each reagent if you

5. Select Done to return to the Reagent status screen.
Details for reagent (Reagent status) window, page 5-71
View reagent history details
Perform this procedure to display the Details for reagent (Reagent

history) window. From this window you can view detailed
information for reagents.
Prerequisite Access the Reagent history screen, page 5-77
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view reagent history details:

1. Select the desired reagent(s) from the table on the Reagent
history screen or select F2 - Select all.
The Details for reagent (Reagent history) window displays.
3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each reagent if you

4. Select Done to return to the Reagent history screen.
Details for reagent (history) window, page 5-77

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Scan the reagent carousel(s)
Perform this procedure to update reagent statuses by scanning the

reagent kits currently on board the reagent supply centers.
page 5-64
view, page 5-66
Supplies NA
To scan the reagent carousels:

1. Select the appropriate Module option.
The Reagent status screen displays.
2. Select F4 - Scan to update reagent inventory.

The updated status displays on the Reagent status screen.
c System procedures - reagent inventory management

c System reagent inventory management procedures include:
Load bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-85
Replace sample diluent(s) (c System), page 5-93
Replace non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-96
Unload bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-98

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Load bar coded reagents (c System)
Perform this procedure to load new bar coded reagents into the
reagent supply centers on the processing module.
NOTE: To ensure correct reagent status tracking, do not move reagents

kits to a processing module controlled by a different SCC (system
control center).
Prerequisite Check reagent inventory
Access the Reagent status screen - c System view,
page 5-64
Supplies Bar coded reagent kits
Adapter, if required


chemical-related hazard. See the assay-specific package
insert or reagent application sheet.
To load bar coded reagents:

1. Verify the expiration date of the reagent. DO NOT use the
reagent if the expiration date is exceeded.
2. Invert the reagent cartridge gently to ensure a homogenous

solution.
3. Remove and discard the cap.



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
7. Press the green or orange button on the front portion of the

reagent supply center cover(s), and then open the cover(s).
exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam. Class 2
Laser radiation when open for the c 8000 processing
module.
8. Press the carousel advance key on the processing module

keypad to advance the reagent supply center to open positions.
9. Load the reagent cartridges into any open positions in the

appropriate R1 and R2 reagent supply centers.
For additional loading information, see Loading requirements for
the reagent supply centers (c System), page 5-87.
NOTE: The 20 mL (cartridge), small (55 mL), and 20 mL (bottle)

reagent cartridges require an adapter.
10. Close the reagent supply center cover(s) by pushing the cover(s)
down until you hear a click.
12. Initiate or resume sample processing, or select F4 - Scan on the

Reagent status screen to update reagent inventory.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: Once you place a new reagent(s) on a processing module

and the bar code reader scans the bar code label, the system
software links individual R1 and R2 cartridges together as a kit. If
the cartridges are not kept together, the reagent status of Missing
bottle or Extra bottle displays.
The system tracks onboard stability only when the reagent kit is
on board the processing module. To update the onboard stability
timer, you must perform a reagent scan every time you load a
reagent kit. For information on reagent onboard stability, see the
assay-specific package insert or reagent application sheet.
Reagent kits and components (c System), page 1-127
Loading requirements for the reagent supply centers (c System)
Loading requirements for the reagent supply centers depend on what

item you are loading, what type of cartridge or bottle you are loading,
and which c System processing module you are loading it on. The
following tables describe the loading requirements:
Table 5.2: Loading requirements for the c 16000 processing module
Item Requirement
R2 reagent cartridge If the R1 reagent cartridge is loaded in (or assigned
to) an A, B, or C segment in the outer carousel, then
the R2 reagent cartridge must be loaded in (or
assigned to) an A, B, or C segment in the outer
carousel of the R2 supply center.
If the R1 reagent cartridge is loaded in (or assigned
to) the D segment in the inner carousel, then the R2
reagent cartridge must be loaded in (or assigned to)
the D segment in the inner carousel of the R2 supply
center.
Sample diluent Must be loaded in both the outer (segment A, B, or C)
and inner (segment D) carousels.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 5.2: Loading requirements for the c 16000 processing module

Item Requirement
ICT sample diluent Must be loaded in an A, B, or C segment in the outer
carousel of the R1 supply center.
New reagent cartridge Must be loaded on the same carousel (inner or outer)
or bottle as the empty reagent cartridge or bottle. Recalibration
of the assay is required when a replacement cartridge
or bottle is placed in a different carousel.
Table 5.3: Loading requirements for a 20mL cartridge, small (55 ml)
cartridge, or 20 mL bottle
Item Requirement
20 mL cartridge or 1. Load the reagent cartridge adapter into the reagent
small (55 ml) cartridge supply center.
2. Insert the cartridge into the adapter and then set the
cartridge completely.
20 mL bottle 1. Insert the 20 mL bottle into the 20mL reagent
cartridge adapter from the bottom of the adapter.
2. Turn the bottle so the bar code label faces outward.
3. Load the bottle and adapter into the reagent supply

center.
4. Ensure the bottle touches the bottom of the reagent

supply center.
Load sample diluent(s) (c System)
Perform this procedure to load sample diluent(s) into reagent supply

center 1 on the processing module.
NOTE: To ensure correct reagent status tracking, do not move reagent

control center).
Prerequisite Configure a user-defined sample diluent (photometric -
c System), page 2-92
Configure a user-defined reagent kit (photometric - c
System), page 2-94
page 5-64
Module status Ready

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Supplies Sample diluent
Reagent cartridge
Adapter, if required
To load sample diluent(s):

1. Select F6 - Assign location on the Reagent status screen.
The Assign location window displays.
2. Select the desired sample diluent from the Reagent kits table.
3. Select the desired Reagent supply center 1 option, and then

enter the desired location in the data entry box.
4. Select Add.
The assigned position displays in the Reagent kits table.
NOTE: For the c 16000 processing module, repeat steps 2 - 4 to

assign a diluent to both the outer (segment A, B, or C) and the
inner (segment D) carousels.
5. Note the displayed R1 cartridge size.
6. Verify the expiration date of the sample diluent. DO NOT use

the sample diluent if the expiration date is exceeded.
7. Pour the sample diluent into the specified reagent cartridge type.
9. Label the container(s) with the name and expiration date.
11. Press the green button on the front portion of the reagent supply
center 1 cover, and then open the cover.
module.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

keypad to advance the reagent supply center to the assigned
location(s).
13. Place the cartridge into the assigned location(s) in reagent supply
center 1.
The 20 mL (cartridge) and small (55 mL) reagent cartridges
require an adapter. When loading a 20 mL (cartridge) or small
(55 mL) reagent cartridge:
a. Load the small reagent cartridge adapter into the reagent
supply center.
b. Insert the cartridge into the adapter, and then seat the
cartridge completely.
14. Close the reagent supply center cover by pushing the cover
16. Select Done on the Assign location window to return to the

Reagent status screen.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Load non-bar coded reagents (c System)
Perform this procedure to load non-bar coded reagents into the

reagent supply centers on the processing module.

kits to a processing module controlled by a different system control
center.
Prerequisite Configure a user-defined sample diluent (photometric -
c System), page 2-92
Configure a user-defined reagent kit (photometric - c
System), page 2-94
page 5-64
Module status Ready
Supplies Reagent kits
Reagent cartridges, if required
Adapters, if required


chemical-related hazard. See the reagent manufacturer's
assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or
reagent application sheet).
To load non-bar coded reagents:

2. Select the desired reagent from the Reagent kits table.

enter the desired location in the data entry box.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
For additional loading information for the c 16000 processing

module, see Loading requirements for the reagent supply centers (c
System), page 5-87.

enter the desired location in the data entry box. (optional)
5. Select Add.
The assigned position(s) displays in the Reagent kits table.


solution.
module.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

location.
13. Load the reagent cartridges into the assigned location in the
appropriate R1 and R2 reagent supply centers.
For additional loading information, see Loading requirements for
the reagent supply centers (c System), page 5-87.
NOTE: The 20 mL (cartridge), small (55 mL), and 20 mL (bottle)

reagent cartridges require an adapter.
16. Select Done on the Assign location window to return to the

Reagent status screen.
Replace sample diluent(s) (c System)
Perform this procedure to replace sample diluents and to reset the

sample diluent volume.

control center).
page 5-64

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Supplies Sample diluents
Reagent cartridge
To replace sample diluent(s):

1. Verify the expiration date of the sample diluent. DO NOT use
the sample diluent if the expiration date is exceeded.
2. Pour the sample diluent into a new reagent cartridge.
4. Label the container with the name and expiration date.


7. Press the green button on the front portion of the reagent supply
center 1 cover, and then open the cover.
module.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

location(s).
9. Remove the empty cartridge and place the new cartridge into the
assigned location in reagent supply center 1.
IMPORTANT: The outside of the cartridge(s) may be wet. Do not

drip condensation into the other reagent cartridges.
10. Close the reagent supply center cover by pushing the cover
12. Select the desired sample diluent from the Reagent status table
on the Reagent status screen, and then select F8 - Reset.
13. Select OK.

The updated remaining tests and reagent status display in the
Reagent status table.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replace non-bar coded reagents (c System)
Perform this procedure to replace non-bar coded reagents and to reset

the reagent volume and onboard stability.

control center).
page 5-64
Supplies Reagents


To replace non-bar coded reagents:


solution.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


module.

location(s).
9. Remove the empty cartridge(s) and place the new cartridge(s)

into the assigned location(s) in the appropriate reagent supply
center.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
12. Select the desired non-bar coded reagent from the Reagent
status table on the Reagent status screen, and then select F8 -
Reset.
13. Select OK.
NOTE: The updated remaining tests and reagent status display in

the Reagent status table. The onboard stability timer restarts. To
update the onboard stability timer you must perform a reset
every time you load a new reagent kit. For information on
reagent onboard stability, see the reagent manufacturer's
application sheet).
Unload bar coded reagents (c System)
Perform this procedure when reagents are depleted or have expired, or

when you need room to add a different assay reagent kit in the reagent
supply center.
page 5-64
Supplies NA


insert or reagent application sheet.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To unload bar coded reagents:




module.

keypad to advance the reagent supply center to provide access to
the reagent(s).
5. Remove the reagent(s).


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

8. Initiate or resume sample processing, or select F4 - Scan on the

Reagent status screen to update the reagent inventory.
NOTE: Onboard stability is tracked only when the reagent kit is

on board the processing module. To update the onboard stability
timer, you must perform a reagent scan every time you unload a
assay-specific package insert or reagent application sheet.
Unload non-bar coded reagents (c System)
Perform this procedure to unload reagents when inventory is depleted

or has expired, or when you need room to add a different assay
reagent kit onto the processing module.
page 5-64
Module status Ready
Supplies NA



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To unload non-bar coded reagents:


module.

keypad to advance the reagent supply center to provide access to
the reagent(s).
4. Remove the reagent(s).



8. Select the desired reagent from the Reagent kits table.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
9. Select Unload.
The assigned position no longer displays in the Reagent kits
table.
10. Select Done to return to the Reagent status screen.
NOTE: Onboard stability is no longer tracked for the removed

reagent(s). To update the onboard stability timer you must
perform an unload procedure every time you unload a reagent
kit. For information on reagent onboard stability, see the reagent
manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package
i 2000/i 2000SR procedures - reagent inventory management

i System reagent inventory management procedures include:
Prepare new reagent bottles (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-102
Prepare used reagent bottles (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-105
Load reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-106
Unload reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-108
Prepare new reagent bottles (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Perform this procedure to prepare new reagent bottles before loading

them on the processing module.
Prerequisite NA
Module status NA
One septum per reagent bottle


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

insert.
To prepare new reagent bottles:

1. Verify the required assay reagent components are present.
IMPORTANT: Do not mix reagent kit components from different

reagent lots. Do not pool reagents.
2. Record the reagent lot numbers.
NOTE: An ARCHITECT i System tracks only the reagent lot

number from the reagent bottle. Record the lot numbers found
on the reagent kit box prior to discarding the box. Also, record
the reagent lot numbers from the reagent bottles.
3. Verify the reagent component is within the expiration date on

the bottle label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is exceeded.
4. Ensure the reagent bottles are not leaking.
5. Invert the microparticle bottle gently 30 times to resuspend

microparticles that may have settled during shipment.
6. Inspect the bottle to ensure microparticles are resuspended. If

microparticles still adhere to the bottle or cap, continue to invert
the bottle until the microparticles have been completely
resuspended.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT use if the microparticles do not

resuspend. Contact your Area Customer Support.
7. Open the reagent bottle and discard the white cap.
8. Check each bottle for bubbles. If bubbles are present, remove

them with a clean applicator stick.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
9. Wear clean gloves to prevent contamination, and then remove a

septum from the bag.
10. Carefully seat the septum onto the top of the bottle. Ensure the
reagent does not contaminate your gloves.
IMPORTANT: You MUST use septums to prevent reagent

evaporation and contamination and to ensure reagent integrity.
Reliability of assay results cannot be guaranteed if septums are
not used as instructed.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Once you have placed a septum on a reagent bottle, do not

invert the bottle as this results in reagent leakage and may
compromise assay results. Reagent bottles with septums installed
must be stored UPRIGHT. Do not remove septums once they
have been installed on reagent bottles.
To load reagents, see Load reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-106.
Prepare used reagent bottles (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Perform this procedure to prepare used reagent bottles before loading

them on the processing module.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Septum as required


insert.
To prepare used reagent bottles:

1. Verify required assay reagent components are present.
IMPORTANT: Do not pool reagents.
2. Verify the reagent component is within the expiration date on

the bottle label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is exceeded.
3. Ensure reagent bottles have been stored upright.
4. Open the reagent bottles and discard the teal-colored

replacement caps.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
5. Ensure reagent bottles have septums.

To load reagents, see Load reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-106.
Load reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Perform this procedure to load reagent bottles into the carousel.

kits to a processing module controlled by a different system control
center.
Do not open the i System processing center cover(s) while the
processing module is in Running status. If you open the cover(s), all
tests in progress become exceptions and results are not reported. The
processing module status changes to Stopped.
Prerequisite Prepare new reagent bottles (i 2000/i 2000SR),
page 5-102
Prepare used reagent bottles (i 2000/i 2000SR),
page 5-105
view, page 5-66
Supplies Reagent kits (new or used)


insert.
To load reagents:
1. Open the front processing center cover and the reagent carousel
cover. See the label on the inside of the reagent carousel to
facilitate reagent loading.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

2. Place the black bottle with the yellow color band securely into
the yellow ring (inner location). Ensure the bottle is not tilted
and the reagent bar code faces the center of the reagent carousel.
NOTE: If the reagent kit has more than three bottles, load the
bottle designated with a #2 in the color band to the left of the
same color-band bottle designated #1.
3. Place the bottle with the pink color band securely into the pink
ring (middle location). Ensure the bottle is not tilted and the
reagent bar code faces the center of the reagent carousel.
4. Place the bottle with the green color band securely in the green
ring (outer location). Ensure the bottle is not tilted and the
reagent bar code faces the center of the reagent carousel.

keypad to advance the reagent carousel and provide access to
additional open positions. (optional)
6. Close the reagent carousel cover and the front processing center
cover.
7. Select F4 - Scan on the Reagent status screen to update reagent

inventory.

software links individual bottles together as a kit. If the bottles
are not kept together, the reagent status of Missing bottle or
Extra bottle displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Onboard stability is tracked only when the reagent kit is on

board the processing module. To update the onboard stability
timer, you must perform a reagent scan every time you load a
Processing module keypad (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-77
Reagent carousel and bar code reader (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-85
Unload reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Perform this procedure when reagents are depleted or expired, or

when you need room to add a different assay reagent kit.

insert.
NOTE: Do not open the ARCHITECT i System processing center

cover(s) while the processing module is in Running status. If you open
the cover(s), all tests in progress become exceptions and results are not
reported. The processing module status changes to Stopped.
Prerequisite Access the Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR
view, page 5-66
Supplies Replacement cap (one for each bottle removed)
To unload reagents:
1. Open the front processing module cover and the reagent
carousel cover.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

keypad to advance the carousel and to provide access to the
reagent(s).
3. Place new teal-colored replacement caps on the bottles, covering

the septums, and remove the bottles from the carousel.
IMPORTANT: Always use replacement caps on used reagent

bottles. Do not use the original bottle caps. Do not invert bottles
with a septum and replacement cap, as this results in reagent
leakage and may compromise assay results. Reagent bottles
MUST be stored in an UPRIGHT position.
Empty reagent kits may be discarded without the teal-colored
replacement cap.
4. Close the reagent carousel cover and front processing module

cover.
5. Select F-4 Scan on the Reagent status screen to update reagent

inventory.

software links individual bottles together as a kit. If the bottles
are not kept together, the reagent status of Missing bottle or
Extra bottle displays.
Onboard stability is tracked only when the reagent kit is on
board the processing module. To update the onboard stability
timer, you must perform a reagent scan every time you unload a
6. Place the bottles UPRIGHT in refrigerated storage according to

instructions in the assay-specific package insert.
NOTE: For reagents stored off the system, it is recommended you

store them in their original trays and boxes to ensure they
remain upright.
Reagent carousel and bar code reader (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-85

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Patient and control orders Section 5
Patient and control orders

Patient and control orders are created automatically or by an operator.
Patient and control orders topics include:
Automated ordering, page 5-110
Patient order screens and views, page 5-113
Control order screen and views, page 5-134
Order status screen, page 5-150
Sample status screen, page 5-162
Automated ordering
Automated patient sample and control ordering is available using host
computer download, host order query, or automated control ordering.
Host computer download, page 5-110
Host order query, page 5-111
Automated control ordering, page 5-111
Auto retest (patient samples), page 5-112
Host computer download
Host computer download is the process of downloading sample orders

from a host computer to the SCC (system control center). Depending
on the type of sample handler:
All sample handlers except an LAS (laboratory automated
system) track - When the bar code reader scans a bar coded
sample and the host has downloaded an order to the SCC, the
system processes the test(s).
LAS track - When the LAS system sends sample information to
the SCC and the host has downloaded an order to the SCC, the
system processes the test(s).
RSH (robotic sample handler) - When the host computer sends a
rerun order for a sample to the SCC and the sample has not been
unloaded from the RSH, the system processes the test(s).
When the host downloads new orders, the Orders icon blinks. You can
view the orders on the Order status screen.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5 Patient and control orders
NOTE: For automated ordering by host computer download, you must

configure your system to communicate with a host computer. See
Configure host interface settings, page 2-6.
Host order query
Host order query is the process of downloading a sample order from a

host computer to the SCC (system control center) after a request from
the SCC. Depending on the type of sample handler:
All sample handlers except an LAS (laboratory automation
system) track - When a bar code reader scans a bar coded sample
(sample identification number not configured as a control) and
an order does not exist on the SCC, the SCC sends a query to the
host computer.
LAS track - When the LAS system sends sample information to
the SCC and an order does not exist, the SCC sends a query to
the host computer.
If the host computer has test requests for that sample it sends them.
When a new order is downloaded the Orders icon blinks. You can view
the order on the Order status screen.
If the host computer has no orders for the sample (or no record of the
sample) you are notified by a message on the System logs screen -
Temporary message log view.
NOTE: For automated ordering by host order query, you must

configure your system to communicate with a host computer with
query. See Configure host interface settings, page 2-6.
If the ARCHITECT System encounters three consecutive host time-out
errors while waiting for a response from the host computer, the system
communications setting "On with query" is turned off and the sample
handler is paused. To continue using the query mode, you must
reconfigure this setting.
NOTE: If the host computer creates rerun orders, you must download
the orders to the SCC. The SCC does not query for rerun orders.
Automated control ordering
Automated control ordering is the process the system uses to

automatically order control tests by associating an SID (sample ID)
with a predefined test(s). When a bar code is scanned and recognized
as a configured control, the system automatically processes the test(s)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
configured for that SID. You can view the order on the Order status
screen.
NOTE: For automated control ordering, you must configure an SID for
the control level. See Configure a bar code for a single analyte control
level, page 2-178 or Configure a multiconstituent bar code SID,
page 2-180.
Auto retest (patient samples)
Auto retest is the process the system uses to automatically generate

rerun orders for patient tests (excluding controls and calibrators). For
each test, the system can generate two automatic rerun orders.
1. The system compares test results to the configured retest rules
starting with the first rule. When a result meets the retest criteria
of a rule, the system generates a rerun order without evaluating
further rules.
You can view the tests scheduled for rerun on the Order status,
Rerun status, and Sample status screens. The R (rerun) code is
assigned to the test.
If your system is configured with an RSH (robotic sample
handler), you can configure the system to automatically
reposition the sample(s) for retest. If your system is not
configured for automatic repositioning, you must reload the
sample(s) to be retested.
If your system is configured with an SSH (standard sample
handler) or LAS (laboratory automation system), you must
reload the sample(s) to perform the auto retest.
If you are using the sample carousel (c System), you must:
Open the sample carousel cover.
Reload the samples, if additional volume is required.
Close the sample carousel cover.
2. The system compares retest results to the configured retest rules.

If a retest result meets the retest criteria of a rule, the system
generates a second rerun order. This rerun order displays and
processes the same as the first.
NOTE: If you manually rerun a test result or test exception, the

system restarts the auto retest process and can generate two
additional automatic rerun orders for each test.
To configure retest rules, see Configure a retest rule, page 2-73.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Patient order screens and views

You use patient order screens and their views to create patient orders.
Patient order screen and views topics include:
Patient order screen - Single patient view, page 5-113
Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view, page 5-115
Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view, page 5-116
Procedures - Patient order screen, page 5-118
Windows - Patient order screen and views, page 5-131
Patient order screen - Single patient view
From the single patient view of the Patient order screen you can create
non-batch patient orders when:
The system is not connected to a host computer
The host computer is inoperable
The LAS (laboratory automation system) track is inoperable
A sample does not have a bar code label
You can also access windows to enter additional patient information
and order assay options.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.25: Patient order screen - single patient view
For descriptions of these fields, see Patient order screen - Single patient
To display this screen, see Access the Patient order screen - Single patient
view, page 5-114.
Create a patient order (single order), page 5-118
Add a test to a patient order, page 5-128
Access the Patient order screen - Single patient view
Perform this procedure to display the single order view of the Patient
order screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Patient order screen - single order view:

Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Patient order.
The Patient order screen - single order view displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view
From the Batch (bar coded) view of the Patient order screen you can
create patient batch orders for bar coded samples.
NOTE: Batch ordering is not available if your system is configured

with an LAS (laboratory automation system) sample handler.
Batch processing is not available for the c System sample carousel.
Batch samples placed on the carousel will not be processed as part of
the batch.
You can also access windows to change the batch name, add a
comment for the batch order, and order assay options.
To change the view to allow you to order a non-bar coded batch, see
Change the batch sample ordering type, page 2-21.
Figure 5.26: Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view
For descriptions of these fields, see Patient order screen - Batch (bar
coded) view field descriptions, page Appendix E-24.
To display this view of the screen, see Access the Patient order screen -
Batch (bar coded) view, page 5-116.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Create a patient order (batch, bar coded), page 5-121
Access the Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view
Perform this procedure to display the batch view of the Patient order
screen.
Prerequisite Batch ordering sample type configured to bar coded
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Patient order screen - batch (bar coded) view:

1. Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Patient order.
The Patient order screen - single order view displays.
2. Select the Batch option.

The Patient order screen - Batch view displays.
Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view
From the Batch (non-bar coded) view of the Patient order screen you
can create patient batch orders for non-bar coded samples.
Change the batch name
Enter a comment for the batch order
Order assay options
NOTE: Batch ordering is not available if your system is configured
with an LAS (laboratory automation system) sample handler.
Batch ordering is not available for the c System sample carousel. Batch
samples placed on the carousel will not be processed as part of the
batch.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To change the view to allow you to order a bar coded batch, see
Figure 5.27: Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view
For descriptions of these fields, see Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar
coded) view field descriptions, page Appendix E-25.
To display this view of the screen, see Access the Patient order screen -
Batch (non-bar coded) view, page 5-117.
Create a patient order (batch, non-bar coded), page 5-125
Access the Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view
Perform this procedure to display the Batch view of the Patient order
screen.
Prerequisite Batch ordering sample type configured to non-bar
coded
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
1. Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Patient order.
2. The Patient order screen - Single patient view displays.
3. Select the Batch option.

The Patient order screen - batch view displays.
Procedures - Patient order screen
Procedures you can perform from the Patient order screen and its
related windows include:
Create a patient order (single order)
Perform this procedure to create a manual patient order.

To create batch orders, see:
Prerequisite Access the Patient order screen - Single patient view,
page 5-114
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To create a patient order (single order):

1. Select the Sampling priority: STAT option on the Patient order
screen to display the "S" (STAT) code for the sample orders and
results. (optional)
2. Select the carrier or carousel button, if displayed.
3. Enter a carrier or carousel ID in the C data entry box, if

displayed.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
4. Enter a position in the P data entry box, if displayed.
NOTE: When using bar coded samples, steps 3 and 4 are not
required. If a carrier and position are entered and the bar code
on the sample is not seen, the system automatically uses the
scanned C/P as the unique ID and the sample is processed as
entered.
5. Enter the SID (sample identification) in the SID data entry box.
NOTE: You can use the bar code scanner, if available, to scan the
SID. When using the bar code scanner, Caps Lock on the
keyboard must be off to prevent an incorrect read of the SID.
IMPORTANT: To ensure tests processed include the correct

information, confirm that your laboratory is not reusing the
same SID prior to completion or deletion of previously pending
orders.
6. Enter a value in the Sample manual dilution factor data entry

box. (optional)
NOTE: Not all assays support manual dilutions. An assay

displays unavailable if you select manual dilution, and the assay
does not support this type of dilution. See the reagent
7. Select the desired panel(s) from the Panels list and/or select an
assay(s) from the Assays list.
NOTE: If you selected the carousel button on a ci 8200 System,

panel names that include ARCHITECT i System assays do not
display.
To order a calculated assay, perform one of the following:
Select only the calculated assay. The system automatically
orders the assays required to complete the calculation but
does not release or report these results.
Select the calculated assay and the desired constituent
assay(s). The system automatically orders the additional
constituent assays required to complete the calculation but
does not release or report the system-ordered constituent
results.
Select the calculated assay and all its constituent assays. The
system releases and reports all results.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
8. Select F2 - Sample details to enter patient information.

(optional)
The Details for sample window displays.
a. Enter patient information in the appropriate data entry
box(es) and/or select the appropriate Gender option.
NOTE: When entering a PID, enter only the details that are
known to be accurate. If the information is not known, leave the
data entry box empty. Never edit information previously
entered. If you edit the PID, the software recognizes the PID as a
different and unique patient.
b. Enter a comment in the Comment data entry box.
c. Select Done to save your changes and return to the Patient

order screen.
9. Select F5 - Assay options to specify assay options. (optional)

The Assay options (Patient order) window - manual dilution
view displays if you entered a manual dilution factor.
OR
The Assay options (Patient order) window - automated dilution
view displays if you did not enter a manual dilution factor.
a. Delete replicate values that are not required, and then enter
the number of replicates for the desired dilution(s) in the
Dilution protocols/Number of replicates data entry box.
NOTE: You cannot run all assays with an automated dilution

protocol. See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific
documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application
sheet).
The system software automatically selects one replicate for the
default dilution protocol.
You cannot order replicates for calculated assays.
IMPORTANT: For ARCHITECT i System assays do not order more

than 10 tests per sample for samples loaded in sample cups.
For c System ICT assays do not order more than 15 tests per
sample for samples loaded in cups and/or tubes.
The total number of tests per sample includes all assays,
replicates, dilutions, and available reagent lots for the order.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
b. Select the Module selection: Manual option, and then select

the appropriate module check box(es) to override the system
module scheduler (multi-module i System).
NOTE: Overriding the system module scheduler may impact

overall throughput.

each. (optional)
d. Select Done to save your changes and return to the Patient

order screen.
10. Select F3 - Add order.

To view orders, see Access the Order status screen, page 5-152.
To print the Order List Report, see Print the Order List report, page 5-336.
NOTE: The minimum sample volume information prints on the Order

List report.
Details for sample window, page 5-133
Assay options (Patient order) window - manual dilution view,
page 5-131
Assay options (Patient order) window - automated dilution view,
page 5-132
Order List Report, page Appendix A-51
Loading samples (sample carousel - c System), page 5-188
Create a patient order (batch, bar coded)
Perform this procedure to order the same test(s) on multiple patient

samples. You can process batch orders on the standard or robotic
sample handlers.
If you have an RSH and/or sample carousel, you may order tests for
priority processing on patient or control samples and load them in the
priority bay or sample carousel while the batch order is processing.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
IMPORTANT: When running a bar coded batch you cannot:

Load calibrators
Load priority samples in the SSH
Leave empty spaces in a carrier
Load batch samples in a carrier with tests in process
NOTE: You cannot add a test(s) to an order within the batch. If you
add a test(s) to an order that is part of a batch order, the additional
test(s) processes instead of the batch test(s). You must order additional
tests separately and load the samples after the batch process is
complete.
To change the view to allow you to order a non-bar coded batch, see
To create a single order for a patient sample, see Create a patient order
(single order), page 5-118.
Prerequisite Batch ordering sample type configured to bar coded
Access the Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded)
view, page 5-116
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To create a patient order (batch, bar coded):

1. Select the Order type: Batch option on the Patient order screen.
The Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view displays.
2. Enter a starting sample ID in the Starting SID data entry box.
3. Enter an ending sample ID in the Ending SID data entry box.
NOTE: Batch processing begins on the sample with the starting

SID and continues until the sample with the ending SID is
processed. All samples in between, regardless of sequence or SID,
are included in the batch process.

box. (optional)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

NOTE: To order a calculated assay, perform one of the following:

results.
6. Select F2 - Batch details to change the batch name or enter a

comment. (optional)
The Details for batch window displays.
a. Enter a new batch name in the Batch name data entry box.

order screen.

OR

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

sheet).



overall throughput.

each. (optional)

order screen.

To print the Order List report, see Print the Order List report, page 5-336.

List report.
Details for batch window, page 5-133
page 5-131
page 5-132

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Batch processing, page 5-215
Create a patient order (batch, non-bar coded)
Perform this procedure to order the same test(s) on multiple patient

samples. You can process batch orders on the RSH (robotic sample
handler) or SSH (standard sample handler).
If you have an RSH and/or sample carousel, you may order tests for
priority processing on patient or control samples and load them in the
priority bay or sample carousel while the batch order is processing.
IMPORTANT: When running a non-bar coded batch you cannot:

Load calibrators
Load priority samples in the SSH
Leave empty spaces in a carrier
NOTE: You cannot add a test(s) to an order within the batch. If you
add a test(s) to an order that is part of a batch order, the additional
test(s) processes instead of the batch test(s). You must order additional
tests separately and load the samples after the batch process is
complete.
To change the view to allow you to order a bar coded batch, see
To create a single order for a patient sample, see Create a patient order
(single order), page 5-118.
Prerequisite Batch ordering sample type configured to non-bar
coded
Access the Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar
coded) view, page 5-117
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To create a patient order (batch, non-bar coded):

1. Select the Order type: Batch option on the Patient order screen.
The Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2. Enter the starting carrier ID in the Starting (C) data entry box.
3. Enter a position in the (P) data entry box.
4. Enter the starting SID (sample identification) in the Starting SID

data entry box (maximum of nine numeric characters).
The SID is assigned sequentially for each batch sample.
5. Enter the total number of samples in the batch order. This

number cannot exceed 5000.
NOTE: Batch processing begins on the sample with the starting

carrier and position and continues until the total number of
samples processed equals the number of samples entered.

box. (optional)

NOTE: To order a calculated assay, perform one of the following:

results.
8. Select F2 - Batch details, to change the batch name or enter a

comment. (optional)
The Details for batch window displays.
a. Enter a new batch name in the Batch name data entry box.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

order screen.

OR

sheet).



overall throughput.

each. (optional)

order screen.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

List report.
page 5-131
page 5-132
Add a test to a patient order
Perform this procedure to add a test(s) to a patient order.
IMPORTANT: If you are adding a calculated assay you must delete

existing constituent assay results for this sample if new constituent
results are desired for the calculation.
NOTE: You cannot add a test(s) to an order within a batch.

If you add a test(s) to an order that is part of a batch order, the
additional test(s) processes instead of the batch test(s).
You must order additional tests separately and load the samples after
the batch process is complete.
Prerequisite Original order status - Pending
Access the Patient order screen - Single patient view,
page 5-114
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To add a test to a patient order:


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: You can use the bar code scanner, if available, to scan the
SID. When using the bar code scanner, the Caps Lock key on the
keyboard must be off to prevent an incorrect read of the SID.
2. Enter the value from the original order in the Sample manual
dilution factor data entry box.
NOTE: If you selected the carousel button on an integrated

system, panel names that include both ARCHITECT c System
and ARCHITECT i System assays or only i System assays do not
display.
results.

OR

sheet).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007



overall throughput.

each. (optional)

order screen.
NOTE: If you have an RSH (robotic sample handler) that is

configured to automatically reposition samples for retest and the
sample is still onboard, a confirmation message displays. Select
Yes to have the system re-aspirate the sample.

List report.
page 5-131
page 5-132

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Windows - Patient order screen and views
Windows you can access from the Patient order screen include:
page 5-131
page 5-132
Assay options (Patient order) window - manual dilution view
From the manual dilution view of the Assay options (Patient order)
window you can:
Enter the desired number of replicates
Override the system module scheduler and select a specific
module for processing an order (multi-module i System)
Figure 5.28: Assay options (Patient order) window - manual dilution

view
For descriptions of these fields, see Assay options (Patient order) window -
Manual dilution view field descriptions, page Appendix E-26.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay options (Patient order) window - automated dilution view
From the automated dilution view of the Assay options (Patient order)
window you can:
Select an automated dilution factor other than the configured
option
Figure 5.29: Assay options (Patient order) window - automated

dilution view
For descriptions of these fields, see Assay options (Patient order) window -
Automated dilution view field descriptions, page Appendix E-27.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Details for sample window
From the Details for sample window you can:

Enter patient information such as patient ID, name, date of
birth, and gender
Enter comments for orders
View previously entered patient information
Figure 5.30: Details for sample window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for sample window field
Details for batch window
From the Details for batch window you can change the batch name
and enter a comment for your batch order.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.31: Details for batch window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for batch window field
Control order screen and views

You use control order screens and their views to create control orders.
Controls have the following characteristics:
Require running, at all levels and for each assay, immediately
after calibration to verify the newly-stored calibration curve on a
specific processing module.
Are run routinely to check a previously-stored active curve and
to monitor system/assay performance.
For recommendations on routine control test frequency, see the
IMPORTANT: Patient results can be compromised if you do not run

controls and evaluate the results according to the reagent
manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert
or reagent application sheet).
Control order screen and views topics include:
Control order screen - Single analyte view, page 5-135
Control order screen - Multiconstituent view, page 5-137
Procedures - Control order screen, page 5-139
Windows - Control order screen and views, page 5-148

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Control order screen - Single analyte view
From the Single analyte view of the Control order screen you can
create a control order when:
The system is not configured to run bar coded control samples
The control sample does not have a bar code label
The control sample has a SID bar code label not currently
configured on the system
You can also access a window to order assay options.
Figure 5.32: Control order screen - Single analyte view
For descriptions of these fields, see Control order screen - Single analyte

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.33: Control order screen - Single analyte view (i 2000SR LAS)
For descriptions of these fields, see Control order screen - Single analyte
view field descriptions (i 2000SR LAS), page Appendix E-31.
To display this view of the screen, see Access the Control order screen -
Single analyte view, page 5-136.
Create a control order (single analyte), page 5-139
Create a control order (single analyte - i 2000SR LAS), page 5-141
Access the Control order screen - Single analyte view
Perform this procedure to display the Single analyte view of the

Control order screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Control order screen - Single analyte view:

1. Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Control order.
The Control order screen - Multiconstituent view displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2. Select the Order type: Single analyte option.

The Control order screen - Single analyte view displays.
Control order screen - Multiconstituent view
From the Multiconstituent view of the Control order screen you can
create a control order when:
The system is not configured to run bar coded control samples
The control sample does not have a bar code label
The control sample has a SID bar code label not currently
configured on the system
You can also access a window to order assay options.
Figure 5.34: Control order screen - Multiconstituent view
For descriptions of these fields, see Control order screen - Multiconstituent


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.35: Control order screen - Multiconstituent view (i 2000SR

LAS)
For descriptions of these fields, see Control order screen - Multiconstituent

view field descriptions (i 2000SR LAS), page Appendix E-33.
To display this view of the screen, see Access the Control order screen -
Multiconstituent view, page 5-138.
Create a control order (multiconstituent), page 5-143
Create a control order (multiconstituent - i 2000SR LAS), page 5-146
Access the Control order screen - Multiconstituent view
Perform this procedure to display the Multiconstituent view of the

Control order screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Control order screen - Multiconstituent view:

Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Control order.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The Control order screen - Multiconstituent view displays.
Procedures - Control order screen
Procedures you can perform from the Control order screen and its
Create a control order (single analyte - i 2000SR LAS), page 5-141
Create a control order (multiconstituent - i 2000SR LAS), page 5-146
Create a control order (single analyte)
Perform this procedure to create an order for a single analyte control

when a host computer is not available or single analyte controls are
not configured to use a bar code SID (sample identification).
NOTE: You must configure controls in the system before you can
perform this procedure. See Configure a new single analyte control,
page 2-176.
Prerequisite Access the Control order screen - Single analyte view,
page 5-136
Module status Any. If the processing module(s) is not in Running
status, the volume printed on the Order List report is for
one control per module.
Supplies NA
To create a control order (single analyte):

1. Select the Sampling priority: STAT option on the Control order
screen to display the "S" (STAT) code for the sample order and
results. (optional)
2. Select the carrier or carousel button.

displayed.
4. Enter a position in the P data entry box.

box. (optional)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

6. Select the desired assay from the Assays list.
8. Select the desired Levels check box(es).
NOTE: All control levels selected must fit in one carrier/carousel.

The Assay options (Control order) window - manual dilution
OR
The Assay options (Control order) window - automated dilution

sheet) for limitations on automated dilutions.



overall throughput.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
c. Use the previous/next buttons to display each level if you

each. (optional)
d. Select Done to save your changes and return to the Control

order screen.


List report.
Assay options (Control order) window - manual dilution view,
page 5-149
Assay options (Control order) window - automated dilution view,
page 5-149
Create a control order (single analyte - i 2000SR LAS)
Perform this procedure to create an order for a single analyte control

when a host computer is not available or single analyte controls are
not configured to use a bar code SID (sample identification), or a bar
code SID not currently configured will be used for the control order.
perform this procedure. See Configure a new single analyte control,
page 2-176.
Prerequisite Access the Control order screen - Single analyte view,
page 5-136

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Supplies NA
To create a control order (single analyte - i 2000SR LAS):

results. (optional)
IMPORTANT: To ensure tests processed include the correct

information, confirm that your laboratory is not reusing the
same SID prior to completion or deletion of previously pending
orders.

box. (optional)

4. Select the desired assay from the Assays list.
6. Select the desired Levels check box(es).

OR

sheet) for limitations on automated dilutions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


b. Select Done to save your changes and return to the Control

order screen.


List report.
page 5-149
page 5-149
Create a control order (multiconstituent)
Perform this procedure to create an order for a multiconstituent

control when a host computer is not available or multiconstituent
controls are not configured to use a bar code SID (sample
identification).
perform this procedure. See Configure a new multiconstituent control,
page 2-179.
Prerequisite Access the Control order screen - Multiconstituent view,
page 5-138

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Supplies NA
To create a control order (multiconstituent):

results. (optional)
2. Select the carrier or carousel button.

displayed.
4. Enter a position in the P data entry box.

box. (optional)

control.
8. Select the desired Levels option.
9. Select the desired panel(s) from the Panels list and/or select the
NOTE: If you select the carousel button, only the c System assays
display for panels that include both c System and i System
assays.
results.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
10. Select F5 - Assay options to specify assay options.

OR

sheet).



overall throughput.

selected more than one, and then repeat steps 10a and 10b
for each. (optional)
d. Select Done to save your changes and return to the Control

order screen.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

List report.
page 5-149
page 5-149
Create a control order (multiconstituent - i 2000SR LAS)
Perform this procedure to create an order for a multiconstituent

control when a host computer is not available or multiconstituent
controls are not configured to use a bar code SID (sample
identification), or a bar code SID not currently configured will be used
for the control order.
perform this procedure. See Configure a new multiconstituent control,
page 2-179.
Prerequisite Access the Control order screen - Multiconstituent view,
page 5-138
Supplies NA
To create a control order (multiconstituent - i 2000SR LAS):

results. (optional)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

box. (optional)

control.
6. Select the desired Levels option.
7. Select the desired panel(s) from the Panels list and/or select the
results.
8. Select F5 - Assay options to specify assay options.

OR

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

sheet).

b. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you

each. (optional)
c. Select Done to save your changes and return to the Control

order screen.


List report.
page 5-149
page 5-149
Windows - Control order screen and views
Windows you can access from the Control order screen include:
page 5-149

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

page 5-149
Assay options (Control order) window - manual dilution view
From the manual dilution view of the Assay options (Control order)
window you can:
Figure 5.36: Assay options (Control order) window - manual dilution

view
For descriptions of these fields, see Assay options (Control order) window
- Manual dilution view field descriptions, page Appendix E-34.
Assay options (Control order) window - automated dilution

view
From the automated dilution view of the Assay options (Control

order) window you can:
Select an automated dilution factor other than the configured
option

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.37: Assay options (Control order) window - automated

dilution view
For descriptions of these fields, see Assay options (Control order) window
- Automated dilution view field descriptions, page Appendix E-35.
Order status screen

From the Order status screen you can view information for patient,
control, calibration, and rerun test orders, which includes:
Sample location, identified by sample carrier ID/position,
carousel ID/position, or LAS
Sample name and identification number
Assay name, status, and time of completion
Processing codes
You can also delete a test from an order and access windows to:
Find information for specific tests based on specified search
criteria
Print the Order List report and Order Status report
View detailed test information
Add a comment to an order

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.38: Order status screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Order status screen field descriptions,
page Appendix E-35.

C/P Alphanumerically in the following order:
Carrier/position
CRSL (carousel)/position
LAS
LAS carousel/position
WTR (water)/0
No carrier or carousel/position
SID, NAME, and ASSAY Alphanumerically in ascending order. If
you did not enter a patient name, the
test(s) with a blank name field displays
last when the column sorts.
TIME First to last to complete.
STATUS and CODE See Descriptions of test statuses,
page 5-152 and Descriptions of
processing codes, page 5-153.
To display this screen, see Access the Order status screen, page 5-152.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
View the status of ordered tests, page 5-154
Find a specific test order, page 5-155
Print the Order List report, page 5-336
View order or rerun status details, page 5-156
Add a comment to an order, page 5-157
Delete a test from a patient order, page 5-158
Access the Order status screen
Perform this procedure to display the Order status screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Order status screen:
selecting the order status button on the processing module graphic.
Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Order status.
The Order status screen displays.
Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-152
Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153
Descriptions of test statuses
You can use test status information to determine the progress of an

ordered test or to manage patient and control results. The system
tracks one of the following test statuses for each ordered or completed

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
test. When you select the STATUS column heading, the status sorts in
the following order.
Table 5.4: Test statuses
Status Description
Pending The test was ordered but the sample has not been scanned
by the bar code reader.
Scheduled The test was assigned to a processing module when the
sample was scanned by the bar code reader, but aspiration
has not occurred.
Running The aspiration for the test has occurred and the test is being
processed.
In Process Batch order - the sample labeled with the starting SID of
a batch order was scanned by the bar code reader.
Calculated test - the tests required to calculate the result
of a calculated test are being processed.
Exception The test did not complete successfully due to an error.
*Complete The test is complete.
*Pending The test is complete but is waiting to be transmitted to the
Transmission host.
*Archived The test was archived (copied) to a CD.
*Pending Collation The test is complete, but the system is waiting for one of the
following to occur prior to transmitting to the host:
all tests associated with the SID to complete
all tests associated with the SID on a particular
processing module to complete
* Indicates you can use the find option in the Stored results screen to
locate these statuses.
Descriptions of processing codes
You use processing code information to determine how a sample(s)

was processed. The system displays one or more of the following
processing codes, when applicable, for an ordered test or test result.
When you select the CODE column heading, the codes sort in the
following order.
Table 5.5: Processing codes
Code Description
S The sample is ordered as a STAT.
D The test is an automated dilution with a dilution factor >1, or
an automated dilution that is not the first configured dilution.
M The sample is manually diluted.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 5.5: Processing codes (continued)

Code Description
R The test is a rerun.
* The test is an original result for a rerun.
B The test is part of a batch order.
C The test has a comment.
Procedures - Order status screen
Procedures you can perform from the Order status screen and its
View the status of ordered tests, page 5-154
Delete a test from a patient order, page 5-158
View the status of ordered tests
Perform this procedure to access the Order status screen. From this
screen you can check the status of patient, control, calibration, and
rerun test orders.
To find specific test orders, see Find a specific test order, page 5-155.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the status of ordered tests:
selecting the order status button on the processing module graphic.
Select Orders on the menu bar, and then select Order status.
The Order status screen displays.
An ellipsis (...) displays when the system cannot display all the data on
a screen or window. View the details window to see all of the data.
Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is
maximum character length.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: Select the refresh button to display all records. This button
always displays as an active button.
Find a specific test order
Perform this procedure to search for a specific test order(s) by entering

Prerequisite Access the Order status screen, page 5-152, or Access
the Rerun status screen, page 5-259
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To find a specific test order:

1. Select F3 - Find on the Order or Rerun status screen.
The Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window displays.

Example: If you enter 123* in the SID data entry box, all results
starting with 123 display. This list could include 12345, 12346,
and 12347.

The Order or Rerun status screen displays with the text "Search
results:" in the title bar.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Rerun status screen, page 5-257
Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window, page 5-158
View order or rerun status details
Perform this procedure to display the Details for order (Order

status/Rerun status) window. From this window you can view details
for orders and add comments.
Prerequisite Access the Order status screen, page 5-152,or Access
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view order or rerun status details:

1. Select the desired orders from the table on the Order or Rerun
status screen, or select F2 - Select all.
The Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window
displays.
3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each order if you

4. Select Done to return to the Order status or Rerun status screen.
view, page 5-159
Details for order (Order status) window - batch (bar coded) view,
page 5-160
Details for order (Order status) window - batch (non-bar coded) view,
page 5-161

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Add a comment to an order
Perform this procedure to add a comment to an order.

Prerequisite Access the Order status screen, page 5-152 or Access
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To add a comment to an order:

1. Select the desired order(s) from the table on the Order or Rerun
status screen, or select F2 - Select All.
The Details for order window displays.
3. Enter a comment in the Comment data entry box.
NOTE: For batch orders, if the batch status is In process, you

cannot enter a comment for the batch order. You must enter a
comment when the batch order is created or the batch status is
pending.
4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each order if you

selected more than one, and then enter a comment for each.
(optional)
view, page 5-159
page 5-160
page 5-161

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Delete a test from a patient order
Perform this procedure to delete a test(s) that no longer needs to be

processed.
Prerequisite Access the Order status screen, page 5-152
Test status - Pending, In process
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To delete a test from a patient order:

1. Select the desired test(s) from the table on the Order status
screen, or select F2 - Select all.
2. Select F6 - Delete.
NOTE: If you delete a batch order, tests with a status of Running

or Scheduled continue processing. Additional tests for the order
do not process.
3. Select OK to delete the test(s).
Windows - Order status screen
Windows you can access from the Order status screen include:
Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window, page 5-158
view, page 5-159
page 5-160
page 5-161
Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window
From the Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window you can
search for specific test orders.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.39: Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Order status/Rerun

status) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-36.
Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window - single

order view
From the single order view of the Details for order (Order status/Rerun
status) window you can view detailed information for orders and add
comments.
NOTE: The title of this window is Details... when you access it from
the Sample status screen. Some data fields may not display all data if
the data you entered is maximum character length.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.40: Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window -

single order view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for order (Order status/Rerun
status) window - Single order view field descriptions, page Appendix E-37.
View sample status details, page 5-167
Details for order (Order status) window - batch (bar coded) view
From the batch (bar coded) view of the Details for order (Order status)
window you can view information for bar coded batch orders and add
comments.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.41: Details for order (Order status) window - batch (bar
coded) view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for order (Order status)
window - Batch (bar coded) view field descriptions, page Appendix E-39.
Details for order (Order status) window - batch (non-bar coded)

view
From the batch (non-bar coded) view of the Details for order (Order
status) window you can view information for non-bar coded batch
orders and add comments.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.42: Details for order (Order status) window - batch (non-bar
coded) view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for order (Order status)
window - Batch (non-bar coded) view field descriptions, page Appendix
E-40.
Sample status screen

From the Sample status screen you can view information for patient,
control, calibration orders, unreleased patient and control results, and
exceptions, which includes:
Sample location, identified by carrier ID/position, bay, carousel
ID/position, or LAS
Assay name and processing code
Test status and time to completion or result, date and time of
completion, and (where applicable) interpretation
You can also suspend processing on a sample, release a result, and
access windows to:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Find information for specific samples based on specified search

criteria
Print the Sample Status report
View detailed test information
Add a comment to an order or result
Rerun a test
Figure 5.43: Sample status screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Sample status screen field descriptions,
page Appendix E-19.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
When accessing the Sample status screen, the information sorts by

SID. To sort columns on this screen, select the desired column
heading. The information sorts as described in the following table.

SID and NAME Alphanumerically in ascending order.
C/P and BAY Alphanumerically in the following order:
Carrier/position and bay
LAS
WTR (water)/0
ASSAY and CODES These columns do not sort.
STATUS/RESULT See Descriptions of test statuses,
To display this screen, see Access the Sample status screen, page 5-164.
View sample status, page 5-165
Find a specific sample, page 5-166
Access a sample with tests in process (RSH), page 5-217
View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System),
page 5-230
Rerun a test, page 5-231
Release a patient result, page 5-234
Access the Sample status screen
Perform this procedure to display the Sample status screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To access the Sample status screen:

Select Overview from the menu bar, and then select Sample status.
The Sample status screen displays.
Procedures - Sample status screen
Procedures you can perform from the Sample status screen and its
View sample status, page 5-165
page 5-230
View sample status
Perform this procedure to access the Sample status screen.

Prerequisite Access the Sample status screen, page 5-164
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view sample status:

Select the desired sample from the SID Name column on the Sample
status screen.
The tests and codes display in the ASSAY and CODES column. The
results and status display in the STATUS/RESULT column.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Find a specific sample
Perform this procedure to search for a specific sample(s) by entering

Module status Any
Supplies NA
To find a specific sample:

1. Select F3 - Find on the Sample status screen.
The Find options (Sample status) window displays.

character in all data entry box(es) except position (P).
and 12347.

The Sample status screen displays with the text "Search results:"
in the title bar.

Find options (Sample status) window, page 5-168

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
View sample status details
Perform this procedure to display the Details... window. From this

window you can view detailed information for orders, exceptions, and
patient and QC results.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view sample status details:

1. Select the desired sample from the SID Name column on the
Sample status screen, and then select the desired assay(s) from
the ASSAY and CODES column.
The Details... window displays. Information is dependent on the
assay(s) you selected.

4. Select Done to return to the Sample status screen.
view, page 5-159
page 5-160
page 5-161
Details for exceptions window - data view (c System), page 5-301
Details for exceptions window - photometric - graph view (c System),
page 5-302
Details for exceptions window (i System), page 5-303
Details for exceptions window - calculated view, page 5-304
Details for exceptions window - control view, page 5-305
Details for exceptions window - calibrator view, page 5-307
Find options (Results review) window, page 5-235

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Details for result (Results review) window - calculated view,

page 5-236
Details for result (Results review) window - data view (c System),
page 5-237
Details for result (Results review) window - photometric - graph view (c
System), page 5-238
Details for result (Results review) window - sample interference index
view (c System), page 5-239
Details for result (Results review) window (i System), page 5-240
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - data view (c System),
page 5-252
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - photometric - graph
Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i System),
page 5-254
Windows - Sample status screen
The windows you can access from the Sample status screen are:
Rerun options window, page 5-241
Find options (Sample status) window
From the Find options (Sample status) window you can search for
specific samples by entering your search criteria in one or more fields.
Figure 5.44: Find options (Sample status) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Sample status) window

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management Section 5
Sample management
Sample management consists of the activities associated with
preparing and loading samples, initiating processing, and unloading
samples.
Sample management topics include:
Sample requirements, page 5-170
Initiating or resuming sample processing, page 5-205
Sample processing, page 5-207
Unloading samples, page 5-215
Sample requirements
Before you load samples onto the system, be sure you are familiar with
the following:
Sample cup and/or tube requirements, page 5-170
Sample volume requirements, page 5-172
Sample integrity, page 5-176
Sample cup and/or tube requirements
The following sample cups and/or tubes are acceptable for use on the
ARCHITECT System:
ARCHITECT System sample cups (see Sample cup, page 5-171)
ARCHITECT System sample cups used in conjunction with
sample tubes
Aliquot and primary sample tubes (see Aliquot and primary sample
tube specifications, page 5-171)
For information on sample volume, see Sample volume requirements,
page 5-172.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5 Sample management
Figure 5.45: Sample cup
Figure 5.46: Aliquot and primary sample tube specifications
Measurement Nominal Extreme limits

1. Height 75 mm - 100 mm 72 mm - 102 mm
2. Outside diameter 10 mm - 16 mm 8.25 mm - 16.1 mm
3. Inside diameter NA 7.75 mm minimum
NOTE: The sample cup, when used with sample tubes, shall be no
greater than:
6 mm in height above the maximum tube specification of 102
mm for systems with the RSH (robotic sample handler)
12 mm in height above the maximum tube specification of 102
mm for systems with the SSH (standard sample handler)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: Use of serum filters in sample tubes is acceptable if the opening

(inside diameter) and the height of the filter meets the sample tube
specifications.
Sample volume requirements
Sample volume requirement depend on the sample vessel type, the

onboard sample storage conditions, and the assay(s) ordered.
For sample cup and tube volume requirements, and the use of the
sample gauge label, see:
Sample cup volumes, page 5-172
Primary tube volumes, page 5-173
Aliquot tube volumes, page 5-174
Sample gauge label, page 5-174
For information on onboard sample storage conditions and the effect
on sample evaporation, see Onboard sample storage, page 5-175.
For assay-specific sample volume requirements, see the reagent
Sample cup volumes
The ARCHITECT System calculates the minimum sample cup volume

required to test a sample as follows:
c System (with sample saving mode on - recommended):
50 L (sample cup dead volume) + 8 L (over-aspiration volume)
+ combined sample volume of the ordered assays and replicates
NOTE: For each assay that requires an onboard dilution or has a

sample volume greater than 15 L, an additional 8 L
over-aspiration volume is added for the sample probe wash that
occurs.
c System (with sample saving mode off):
50 L (sample cup dead volume) + combined sample volume of
the ordered assays and replicates + over-aspiration volume (equal
to 20% of the sample volume + 4 L for each ordered assay and
replicate)
i System:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
50 L (sample cup dead volume) + combined sample volume of

the ordered assays and replicates
This volume is printed on the Order List report as "Minimum sample
cup volume required:."
NOTE: The minimum sample cup volume for controls and calibrators
is valid for the reagent inventory on the processing module(s) in
Running status at the time you order the sample.
If the processing module(s) is not in Running status, the indicated
volume is for one calibration/control per module.
If the minimum sample cup volume is less than 150 L, you must
priority load the sample to avoid concentration effects due to sample
evaporation. If you do not priority load the sample, a minimum
volume of 150 L is required.
IMPORTANT: If you do not use adequate sample volume, reliability of

assay results cannot be guaranteed.
To ensure accurate liquid level detection, do not fill the sample cups
above the 1400 L mark.
For sample volume information, see the reagent manufacturer's
application sheet).
IMPORTANT: If you load samples on the RSH (robotic sample

handler) and the RSH is configured to automatically reposition
samples for retest, you must ensure there is adequate sample volume
to allow for retests.
For information on sample volume requirements for primary or
aliquot tubes, see Primary tube volumes, page 5-173 or Aliquot tube
volumes, page 5-174.
Primary tube volumes
When using primary tubes, remove any tube closures and verify at
least 8 mm of sample is available above the clot, gel separator, or
plasma/red cell interface to avoid contamination of the sample during
aspiration.
Use the sample gauge label to verify adequate sample volume. See
Sample gauge label, page 5-174.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

application sheet).

For information on sample volume requirements for aliquot tubes or
sample cups, see Aliquot tube volumes, page 5-174, or Sample cup
Aliquot tube volumes
When using aliquot tubes, remove any tube closures and verify
adequate sample is present in the tube.
Use the sample gauge label to verify at least 8 mm of sample is present
in the tube. See Sample gauge label, page 5-174.

application sheet).

For information on sample volume requirements for primary tubes or
sample cups, see Primary tube volumes, page 5-173, or Sample cup
Sample gauge label
You use the sample gauge (1 on the following illustration) to verify at

least 8 mm of sample is present above the clot, gel separator, or
plasma/red cell interface when using primary tubes.
You also use the gauge to verify at least 8 mm of sample is present in
an aliquot tube.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.47: Sample gauge on a sample carrier
Figure 5.48: Sample gauge on an LAS sample carousel (i 2000)
Onboard sample storage
The ARCHITECT System requires a minimum of 150 L for routine

testing of controls and patient samples. This recommendation
supports onboard sample storage for three hours under average
laboratory conditions without observable concentration effects due to
sample evaporation. Reliability of assay results cannot be guaranteed if
this recommendation is not followed.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The following table describes the approximate amount of time

required to decrease the weight of various starting sample volumes by
5% when measured in sample cups under different environmental
conditions.
The high and low temperatures (30C and 15C) were tested with low
humidity. An environment of 25C and 45% RH (relative humidity) is
considered representative of average laboratory conditions.
"Onboard"
15C 15% RH 25C 45% RH 30C 15% RH
time (Hrs)
1 60 L 60 L 100 L
2 70 L 80 L 180 L
3 100 L 120 L 280 L
4 130 L 160 L 365 L
5 160 L 200 L 450 L
Sample integrity
For detailed specimen collection, preparation, and storage

information, see Requirements for handling specimens, page 7-8, and the
Loading samples (RSH)

Calibrators, controls, and patient samples are loaded on the RSH
(robotic sample handler) for routine, priority, or batch processing.
Loading samples (RSH) procedures include:
Load samples in sample carriers (RSH), page 5-176
Load samples for routine processing (RSH), page 5-179
Load samples for priority processing (RSH), page 5-181
Load bar coded samples for batch processing (RSH), page 5-183
Load non-bar coded samples for batch processing (RSH), page 5-185
Load samples in sample carriers (RSH)
Perform this procedure to load samples in sample carriers.

To load samples in the sample carousel, see Load samples and initiate
sample processing (sample carousel - c System), page 5-188.
Prerequisite NA
Module status NA

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Supplies Samples
Sample carriers

To load samples in sample carriers:

1. Verify the calibrators and controls, if loading, are within the
expiration date on the bottle label. DO NOT use the calibrators
or controls if the expiration date is exceeded.
2. Determine the minimum sample volume required in the sample

cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172.
3. Verify adequate sample volume above the separation point in a

primary tube by using the sample gauge label (1 on the following
illustration).
a. Hold the primary tube so that the separation point is level
with the bottom of the sample gauge label.
b. Verify the amount of sample above the separation point is at

least equivalent to the sample gauge label. This volume is
adequate for one test.
4. Verify adequate sample volume in an aliquot tube by using the

sample gauge label (1 on the illustration).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
a. Hold the bottom of the aliquot tube level with the bottom of
the sample gauge label.
b. Verify the amount of sample in the aliquot tube is at least

equivalent to the sample gauge label. This volume is
5. Print the Order List report to ensure that you load the samples in
the correct C/P (carrier/position). See Print the Order List report,
page 5-336.
IMPORTANT: You are responsible for loading the correct sample

in the correct position.
NOTE: This step is optional when using bar code labels on

samples for positive ID.
6. Place the sample in the sample carrier so that the bar code, if
used, is visible in the sample bar code label window (1 on the
following illustration) and the bar code fills the width of the
window.
IMPORTANT: When you load sample cups and/or tubes, ensure

that you have pushed them completely down into the sample
carriers and that they are not tilted.
Avoid splashing outside of the sample cups and/or tubes.
To load sample carriers, see Load samples for routine processing (RSH),
page 5-179, or Load samples for priority processing (RSH), page 5-181.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Load samples for routine processing (RSH)
Perform this procedure to load samples in the routine bays of the RSH
(robotic sample handler).
NOTE: Before loading samples, ensure you are familiar with the
components of the RSH. See RSH - robotic sample handler, page 1-115.
To load samples in the priority bay, see Load samples for priority
processing (RSH), page 5-181.
Prerequisite Load samples in sample carriers (RSH), page 5-176
Module status Ready or Running
Supplies Carrier trays

IMPORTANT: When transporting and loading sample carriers and

carrier trays, avoid splashing sample outside of the sample cups and/or
tubes.
To load samples for routine processing:
1. Position the sample carrier(s) so that the carrier ID label(s) is at
the front of the tray where the handle is located.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2. Verify the sample carrier(s) sits flush with the bottom of the tray.
3. Verify the indicators below the desired bay are both off, which
indicates the bay is available.
4. Place the carrier tray in front of the bay and align the tray with
the alignment guides.
5. Push the carrier tray into the bay until the green indicator
illuminates.
To initiate sample processing, see Initiate or resume sample processing


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

RSH sample processing (ci System, c System, i 2000SR), page 5-208
Load samples for priority processing (RSH)
Perform this procedure to load samples in the priority bay of the RSH
(robotic sample handler). Samples that are loaded in the priority bay
are pipetted before samples that are loaded in the routine bays. Batch
processing is not available in the RSH priority bay.
IMPORTANT: Verify calibrator(s) order status is Scheduled before you

load controls in the priority bay to ensure the system does not process
controls before the calibration completes.
To view the calibrator order status, see Access the Order status screen,
page 5-152.
To load samples in the routine bay(s), see Load samples for routine
processing (RSH), page 5-179.
Supplies NA
WARNING: Potential Biohazard. Identifies an activity or

area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious
IMPORTANT: When transporting or loading sample carriers and

tubes.
To load samples for priority processing:
1. Verify the indicators below the desired section are off, which
indicates the section is available.
2. Position the sample carrier so that the carrier ID label is at the

front of the RSH.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3. Load the carrier into the priority section by pushing it in until

the indicator illuminates.
NOTE: You must physically place the carriers with calibrators in

the sections in sequential order. Carriers are processed in the
order they are placed on the sample handler, not by the position
number.
The indicator illuminates green when the processing module
status is Running.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Load bar coded samples for batch processing (RSH)
Perform this procedure to load bar coded samples for batch processing
in the RSH (robotic sample handler). Batch processing is not available
in the RSH priority bay.
To load non-bar coded samples for batch processing, see Load non-bar
coded samples for batch processing (RSH), page 5-185.
Supplies Carrier trays with sample carriers loaded with samples


tubes.
NOTE: When you load samples for batch processing, DO NOT load
calibrators or controls within the batch. Also, do not leave an empty
space(s) between samples as it will be identified as an invalid sample
with error message 0120.
To load bar coded samples for batch processing:
1. Locate the sample carrier that contains the sample with the
starting SID (sample identification) that was entered in the batch
order.
2. Position the carrier so the carrier ID label is located at the front

of the tray where the handle is located.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3. Load the carrier into the farthest position on the left side of the
tray.
4. Load additional carriers, from left to right, until the tray is full or
all samples are loaded.
5. Verify the carrier(s) sits flush with the bottom of the tray(s).
6. Repeat with additional trays (when more than one is needed)

until all samples are loaded.
7. Ensure the sample with the ending SID is loaded at the end of all
samples in the batch.
8. Verify the indicators below the routine bay farthest to the left are
both off, which indicates the bay is available.
9. Place the carrier tray with the starting SID sample in front of the
bay farthest to the left and align the tray with the alignment
guides.
illuminates.
using the next bay to the right, until all samples are loaded.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Load non-bar coded samples for batch processing (RSH)
Perform this procedure to load non-bar coded samples for batch

processing in the RSH (robotic sample handler). Batch processing is
not available in the RSH priority bay.
To load bar coded samples for batch processing, see Load bar coded
samples for batch processing (RSH), page 5-183.
Prerequisite Load samples in sample carriers (RSH), page 5-176.
Supplies Carrier trays with sample carriers loaded with samples

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


tubes.
NOTE: When you load samples for batch processing, DO NOT:

Load calibrators or controls within the batch
Leave empty spaces between samples as they will be included in
the total number of samples
To load non-bar coded samples for batch processing:
starting carrier and position entered in the batch order.
2. Position the carrier so the carrier ID label is located at the front

of the tray where the handle is located.
3. Load the carrier into the farthest position on the left side of the
tray.
4. Load additional carriers, from left to right, until the tray is full or
all samples are loaded.
5. Verify the carrier(s) sits flush with the bottom of the tray(s).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

until all samples are loaded.
7. Ensure the number of samples loaded matches the number of

samples in the order.
8. Verify the indicators below the routine bay farthest to the left are
both off, which indicates the bay is available.
9. Place the carrier tray with the starting carrier and position in
front of the bay farthest to the left and align the tray with the
alignment guides.
illuminates.
using the next bay to the right, until all samples are loaded.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Loading samples (sample carousel - c System)

You can load samples in the sample carousel for priority processing or
when the RSH (robotic sample handler) is unavailable.
Loading samples procedures include:
Load samples and initiate sample processing (sample carousel - c
System), page 5-188
Load samples and initiate sample processing (sample carousel - c System)
Perform this procedure to load patient samples, controls, and

calibrators in the sample carousel. Samples loaded on the sample
carousel are given priority over samples loaded on the RSH (robotic
sample handler).
sample carousel. See Sample carousel (c 8000), page 1-32 or Sample
carousel (c 16000), page 1-52.
Prerequisite NA
Supplies NA

To load samples and initiate sample processing:

2. Verify that the sample carousel access indicator button

(square), next to the carousel, is illuminated. If the indicator
button is not illuminated, see Pause the sample carousel (c System),
page 5-16.
cover, and then open the cover.
Sample aspiration is paused for the RSH and the sample carousel.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

expiration on the bottle label. DO NOT use the calibrators or
controls if the expiration date is exceeded.


illustration).


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


the correct C/P (carousel/position). See Print the Order List report,
page 5-336.


10. Place the sample in the sample carousel so that the bar code, if
used, is positioned to the outside of the carousel.

carousel and that they are not tilted.
Avoid splashing outside of the sample cup and/or tube.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
11. Close the sample carousel cover to initiate sample processing by

pushing the cover down until you hear a click.
NOTE: If the processing module is running, sample aspiration

resumes once you close the sample carousel cover.
Sample carousel sample processing (c System), page 5-210
Loading samples (SSH)

Calibrators, controls, and patient samples are loaded on the SSH
(standard sample handler) for routine, priority, or batch processing.
Loading samples (SSH) topics include:
Load samples in sample carriers (SSH), page 5-192

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Load samples for routine processing (SSH), page 5-194

Load samples for priority processing (SSH), page 5-197
Load bar coded samples for batch processing (SSH), page 5-198
Load non-bar coded samples for batch processing (SSH), page 5-201
Load samples in sample carriers (SSH)
Perform this procedure to load samples in sample carriers.

Prerequisite NA
Module status NA
Supplies Samples
Sample carriers

To load samples in sample carriers:



illustration).


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


the correct C/P (carrier/position). See Print the Order List report,
page 5-336.

NOTE: This step is optional when using bar code labels on

samples for positive ID.
6. Place the sample in the sample carrier so that the bar code, if
used, is visible in the sample bar code label window and the bar
code fills the width of the window.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

carriers and that they are not tilted.
Avoid splashing outside of the sample cups and/or tubes.
To load sample carriers, see Load samples for routine processing (SSH),
page 5-194, or Load samples for priority processing (SSH), page 5-197.
SSH sample processing (i 2000), page 5-211
Load samples for routine processing (SSH)
Perform this procedure to load samples in the sample load queue of

either a single-lane or double-lane SSH (standard sample handler).
To priority load samples, see Load samples for priority processing (SSH),
page 5-197.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
components of the SSH. See SSH - standard sample handler (i 2000),
page 1-121.
Prerequisite Load samples in sample carriers (SSH), page 5-192
Module status Ready or Load queue paused
Supplies Carriers loaded with samples

IMPORTANT: When transporting sample carriers, avoid splashing

sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes.
To load samples for routine processing:
1. Verify the pause indicator on the sample handler keypad is
illuminated. If the indicator is not illuminated, see Pause the
sample load queue (SSH), page 5-17.
2. Position the sample carrier so that the Abbott is visible from

the front of the processing module.
3. Place the sample carrier in the sample load queue by aligning the
rail guides over the rails.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: For multi-module i Systems, you first determine the

active lane of the sample load queue, which is identified by the
green indicator on the sample handler keypad. Then, you place
the sample carrier in the appropriate lane, see Double load queue
lane defaults (i 2000), page 5-196.
Double load queue lane defaults (i 2000)
For multi-module i Systems, the inside lane is the default active lane.
Some events cause the outside lane to become the active lane. The
following table shows the active lane defaults for the double load
queue.
Table 5.6: Double load queue lane defaults
Event Active lane
Run key is selected and the status is Inside
Ready.
Inside lane is empty. Outside
Twenty-five carriers have been Outside
transferred from the inside lane to the
processing queue.
Twenty-five carriers have been Inside
transferred from the outside lane to the
processing queue.
Processing queue access door is Inside
opened while the sample handler is
running. The sample handler status
changes to Stopped.
NOTE: Positive sample identification

cannot be guaranteed when the
processing queue access door is
opened. All results for samples on
the processing queue become
exceptions.
Stop key on the sample handler keypad Inside
is pressed, and then startup and the
run key are pressed.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 5.6: Double load queue lane defaults (continued)

Event Active lane
Run key is selected when the module Inside
status is Load queue paused (not
requested by the operator).
Run key is selected when the module Lane that was active when the sample
status is Load queue paused handler was paused.
(requested by the operator).
Load samples for priority processing (SSH)
Perform this procedure to priority load sample carriers in the sample

load queue of either a single-lane or double-lane SSH (standard sample
handler). Samples that are priority loaded are pipetted first.
To load sample carriers that do not need to be priority loaded, see Load
samples for routine processing (SSH), page 5-194.
page 1-121.
Supplies Carriers loaded with samples


To priority load sample carriers:
1. Verify that the pause indicator on the sample handler keypad is
2. Press the reverse key on the sample handler keypad.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
4. Place the sample carrier in front of the carriers currently loaded

in the sample load queue by aligning the rail guides over the
rails.
NOTE: For multi-module i Systems, place the sample carrier in

the active lane of the sample load queue, which is identified by
the green indicator on the sample handler keypad. For more
information on the active lane, see Double load queue lane defaults
(i 2000), page 5-196.
Load bar coded samples for batch processing (SSH)
Perform this procedure to load bar coded samples for batch processing
in the sample load queue of either a single-lane or double-lane SSH
(standard sample handler).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To load non-bar coded samples for batch processing, see Load non-bar
coded samples for batch processing (SSH), page 5-201.
page 1-121.
Supplies Carriers loaded with bar coded samples


NOTE: When you load samples for batch processing DO NOT load
calibrators or controls within the batch. Also, do not leave an empty
space(s) between samples as it will be identified as an invalid sample
with error message 0120.
To load bar coded samples for batch processing:
2. Locate the sample carrier with the starting SID (sample

identification) that was entered in the batch order.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

5. Load additional carriers behind the first carrier until all samples
are loaded.
6. Ensure you loaded the sample with the ending SID at the end of
the batch.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Load non-bar coded samples for batch processing (SSH)
Perform this procedure to load non-bar coded samples for batch

processing in the sample load queue of either a single-lane or
double-lane SSH (standard sample handler).
To load bar coded samples for batch processing, see Load bar coded
samples for batch processing (SSH), page 5-198.
page 1-121.
Supplies Carriers loaded with non-bar coded samples


NOTE: When you load samples for batch processing, DO NOT:

Load calibrators or controls within the batch
Leave empty spaces between samples as they will be included in
the total number of samples
To load non-bar coded samples for batch processing:
starting carrier and position that was entered in the batch order.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

5. Load additional carriers behind the first carrier until all samples
are loaded.
6. Ensure the number of samples you loaded matches the number

of samples in the batch order.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Loading samples (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000)

Calibrators, controls, and patient samples are loaded on the LAS
(laboratory automation system) carousel sample handler for routine or
Loading samples (LAS carousel sample handler) procedures include:
Load samples and the carousel (LAS carousel sample handler - i
2000), page 5-203
Load samples and the carousel (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000)
Perform this procedure to load samples into the LAS (laboratory

automation system) sample carousel and to load the carousel onto the
carousel platform.
components of the LAS carousel sample handler. See LAS carousel
sample handler (i 2000), page 1-123.
You can load patient samples, controls, and calibrators on the LAS
sample carousel and they are given priority over samples loaded on
the LAS track.
NOTE: Calibrators can only be run on the LAS sample carousel.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Ready
Supplies Samples
LAS sample carousel

To load samples and the carousel:



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

illustration).




the correct C/P (carousel/position). See Print the Order List report,
page 5-336.

6. Place the sample in the LAS sample carousel so that the bar code,
if used, is positioned to the outside of the carousel.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

that you have pushed them completely down into the carousel
and that they are not tilted.
When transporting the LAS sample carousel avoid splashing

illuminated. If the indicator is not illuminated, see Pause the LAS
carousel sample handler (i 2000), page 5-18.
8. Open the carousel cover on the sample handler and place the
carousel on the carousel platform.
9. Align the flat edge on the bottom of the carousel with the flat
edge of the platform.
NOTE: When the carousel is correctly aligned on the platform,

position 3 is at the front of the module and you cannot easily
turn the carousel.
10. Close the carousel cover.

(LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000), page 5-207.
LAS sample handler sample processing (i 2000), page 5-213
Initiating or resuming sample processing

You must initiate or resume sample processing when:
Orders have been created and samples have been loaded
The processing module and/or sample handler have been paused
Procedures include:
Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH), page 5-206
2000), page 5-207

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH)
Perform this procedure to process a run after ordering and loading

samples or to resume sample processing after the module and/or
sample handler have been paused.
Prerequisite Verify supply and waste inventory, page 5-32
Module status Processing module - Ready or Scheduled pause
Sample handler - Ready, Scheduled pause (RSH), or
Load queue paused (SSH)
Supplies NA
To initiate or resume sample processing:

1. Initialize the processing module, if the status is not Running, by
performing one of the following:
Press the run key on each processing module keypad.
Select the appropriate processing module graphic(s) on the
Snapshot screen, and then select F8 - Run.
2. Initialize the sample handler, if the status is not Running, by

Press the run key on the sample handler keypad.
Select the sample handler graphic on the Snapshot screen,
and then select F8 - Run.
IMPORTANT: Do not open the processing queue access door(s)

to remove or add samples. Positive sample identification cannot
be guaranteed when a processing queue access door is opened.
The sample processing queue bar code reader does not verify the
sample tube bar code labels read by the load queue bar code
reader. If an access door(s) is opened, all tests on samples on the
processing queue become exceptions. In addition, all sample
carriers on the processing queue are transferred to the sample
unload queue.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

RSH keypad, page 1-120
SSH keypad, page 1-122
Initiate or resume sample processing (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000)
Perform this procedure to initialize the processing module to Running

status so you can process samples that are on the LAS (laboratory
automation system) track.
IMPORTANT: The sample pipettor cover must be installed prior to

initiating sample processing. See i 2000 processing module, page 1-71.
Prerequisite Verify supply and waste inventory, page 5-32
Module status Processing module - Ready or Scheduled pause
Supplies NA
To initiate or resume sample processing:

Initialize the processing module by performing one of the following:
Press the run key on each processing module keypad.
Select the appropriate processing module graphic(s) on the
Snapshot screen, and then select F8 - Run.
Once the processing module is in Running status, the i 2000 is ready
to process samples presented at the LAS pipettor position.
IMPORTANT: Do not open the LAS sample carousel cover without

pausing the carousel. If you open the cover when the carousel is in
Running status, all tests in process become exceptions.
Sample processing
Many kinds of sample processing activities take place between the
time you load a sample(s) and when the sample(s) is aspirated. The
progression of samples through the ARCHITECT System differs
depending on your system configuration.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample processing topics include:

Control sample processing, page 5-208
Sample carousel sample processing (c System), page 5-210
LAS sample handler sample processing (i 2000), page 5-213
Control sample processing
When multiple reagent kits are loaded on the system and the
sampling process for a control order is ready to begin, the system
determines which reagent kits to use depending on the configuration
of your system. If your system is configured to run controls by:
Lot (default) - QC will run only on one kit per lot per module
Kit - QC will run on every kit per module
Controls for constituents of calculated assays are automatically run on
one kit on one module (selected by the system software) regardless of
the system configuration.
To change the current control run configuration see Change the option
for running controls for onboard reagent kits, page 2-37.
RSH sample processing (ci System, c System, i 2000SR)
After you load a sample(s) the sample handler moves the sample(s) to
the aspiration location. The prioritization of samples on systems with
an RSH (robotic sample handler) differs depending on your processing
module configuration:
On all ARCHITECT Systems:
Carriers in the priority bay are processed first in the order
they were inserted.
Carrier trays in routine bays are then processed in the order
they were inserted.
On an ARCHITECT integrated or c System, samples on the c
System sample carousel take priority over the samples on the
RSH.
On an ARCHITECT integrated or i 2000SR System, samples with
both STAT and routine immunoassays are routed to the STAT
pipettor first.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
On an ARCHITECT integrated system samples with both clinical

chemistry assay orders and immunoassay orders are routed to
the first available module. If both processing modules are
available, the system routes the orders to the c System first.
Figure 5.49: RSH sample processing
After you load samples onto the RSH and initiate a run:
1. The RSH carrier transport moves to the first carrier as determined
by software prioritization, and then picks up a carrier. The RSH
indicators turn amber to indicate the carriers are being accessed
by the carrier transport.
2. The carrier transport moves the carrier to the RSH bar code
reader where the carrier ID and sample ID(s) are read, and then
the carrier returns to its original location.
3. The system software determines if an order is present on the SCC

for each sample on the carrier. If there are no orders and your
system is configured for host query, a query is sent to the host.
4. The carrier is moved to an available position on the carrier

positioner if an order exists or a query returns a test order(s). If a
location is not available on the positioner, the carrier remains at
the bay until a positioner pocket becomes available.
NOTE: Each processing module has a carrier positioner with four

positions:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
On a c System positions 1 and 2 are designated for sample

carriers from routine bays, position 3 is for sample carriers
from priority bays, and position 4 is not used.
On an i 2000SR positions 1 and 2 are designated for sample
carriers accessed by the routine sample pipettor and
positions 3 and 4 are for sample carriers accessed by the
STAT sample pipettor.
5. The appropriate processing module sample pipettor aspirates the

sample.
6. The carrier transport picks up the carrier and moves it to the

next module or aspiration location, if necessary, and then moves
it back to the routine bay or priority bay section.
7. The RSH indicators blink green when all samples within the
routine or priority bay section are aspirated.
If your system is configured to automatically reposition samples
for reruns, the indicators remain amber until all reruns are
aspirated.
If you add or rerun tests for a sample before it is unloaded, the
indicators for the bay or section change back to amber while the
sample is re-aspirated.
Sample carousel sample processing (c System)
After you load a sample(s), the RSH (robotic sample handler) or LAS
(laboratory automation system) moves the sample(s) to the aspiration
location. Samples on the c System sample carousel take priority over
the samples on the RSH or LAS.
After you load samples onto the sample carousel and initiate a run:
1. Each position is scanned sequentially.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

for each patient and control sample on the carousel. If there are
no orders and your system is configured for host query, a query
is sent to the host. If an order has not been entered into the host
system, the sample carousel moves to the next position.
3. If an order exists, the sample is aspirated before moving to the

next carousel position.
4. Once all samples on the carousel are aspirated, samples on the

RSH or LAS are processed.
SSH sample processing (i 2000)
the aspiration location. The progression of samples on systems with
an SSH (standard sample handler) differs depending on the number of
processing modules in your ARCHITECT i System configuration:
Systems with one processing module have a single lane load and
unload queue.
Systems with more than one processing module have a double
lane load and unload queue.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.50: SSH sample processing
After you load samples onto the SSH and initiate a run:
1. The sample load queue moves the carriers to the sample load
queue bar code reader. If your system is configured with a double
lane load queue, the carriers on the active lane are moved first.
2. The sample load queue bar code reader reads the following bar
code labels:
Sample carrier ID
Sample carrier position
Sample tube bar code ID
3. The carriers are moved onto the processing queue.
4. The processing queue bar code reader reads the following bar
code labels:
Sample carrier ID
Sample carrier position

for each sample on the carrier. If there are no orders and your
system is configured for host query, a query is sent to the host. If
an order has not been entered into the host system, the carrier is
moved to the sample unload queue.
6. The first sample with a test order is aspirated, or moved to

another module for processing.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: If your system is configured with more than one

processing module, the system software determines which
module processes the sample.
7. The bar code reader reads the next position.
8. The next sample is aspirated or moved to another module to be

processed. This continues until all samples on the carrier are
aspirated.
9. When sample processing is complete, the sample carrier is

moved to the sample unload queue. If your system is configured
with a double lane unload queue, carriers are moved from the
left lane to the right lane as the queue fills.
Double load queue lane defaults (i 2000), page 5-196
LAS sample handler sample processing (i 2000)
the aspiration location. The progression of samples on the LAS
(laboratory automation system) depends on whether samples are
present on the LAS sample carousel.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.51: LAS sample handler sample processing
After you load samples onto the LAS sample carousel and initiate a
run:
1. The processing queue bar code reader reads the sample carousel
ID. Samples placed on the LAS sample carousel take priority over
samples on the LAS track.
2. If calibration orders are present on the carousel the positions are

scanned to determine if there are patient or control bar code
labeled samples present.
3. Calibrators are aspirated by the sample pipettor.
4. Each patient and control sample is scanned sequentially.

for each patient and control sample on the carousel. If there are
no orders and your system is configured for host query, a query
is sent to the host. If an order has not been entered into the host
system, the carousel moves the next sample to the aspiration
location.
6. If orders exist, the sample is aspirated before moving to the next

carousel position.
7. Once all samples on the carousel are aspirated samples on the

track are processed. When a sample is present on the track at the
LAS pipettor position, the sample bar code is read by the
processing queue bar code reader.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

for each patient and control sample on the LAS track. If there are
no orders, a query is sent to the host. If an order has not been
entered into the host system, the next sample is moved into
position.
9. If an order exists, the sample is aspirated.
Batch processing
After you load samples the sample handler moves the samples to the
NOTE: Batch processing is not available on the sample carousel (c

System) or the RSH priority bays.
For bar code labeled batch orders, the starting SID (sample ID)
identifies the beginning of the batch run and the ending SID the end
of the run. All bar coded samples loaded in between, regardless of SID
or sequence, are processed as part of the batch. The batch is
terminated when the ending SID is scanned.
For non-bar code labeled batch orders, the starting carrier/position
identifies the beginning of the batch run. All non-bar coded samples
after the starting carrier/position are processed as part of the batch
until the total number of samples equals the number entered.
The only samples that may temporarily interrupt batch processing are
patient or control samples loaded in the sample carousel (c System) or
priority bay on the RSH (robotic sample handler). When loaded on
any other sample handler, any samples loaded within the batch
Unloading samples
To maintain continuous processing you should unload samples on a
routine basis.
Procedures include:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Unload samples (RSH), page 5-216

Unload samples (sample carousel - c System), page 5-218
Unload samples (SSH), page 5-219
Unload samples (LAS carousel sample handler), page 5-220
Unload samples (RSH)
Perform this procedure to unload samples from the priority and/or

routine bay(s) of the RSH (robotic sample handler) when they are no
longer needed on the system.
NOTE: Review the Exception status and Rerun status screens to

determine if the sample(s) is still needed on the system. See Access the
Exception status screen, page 5-295, or Access the Rerun status screen,
page 5-259.
Prerequisite Bay/section indicator:
blinking green
solid green
alternating green/amber
Module status Any
Supplies NA

IMPORTANT: When unloading and transporting sample carriers and

carrier trays, do not splash sample outside of the sample cups and/or
tubes.
To unload samples:
1. Remove the sample carrier or carrier tray by performing one of
the following:
Lift the sample carrier out of the section when unloading
from the priority bay.
Grasp the carrier tray handle, and then lift up and pull the
carrier tray out when unloading from the routine bay.
2. Remove the samples from the sample carrier.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3. Dispose of sample cups in a biohazardous waste container.
4. Store remaining samples according to laboratory guidelines.
Access a sample with tests in process (RSH)
Perform this procedure to suspend a bay on the RSH (robotic sample

handler) when you need to immediately access a sample that is being
processed.
NOTE: When you suspend processing for a section and/or bay, the
processing module stops aspirations on all samples associated with
that location. Any scheduled tests not aspirated become exceptions
and are not processed.
Supplies NA
To access a sample with tests in process:

1. Select F3 - Find on the Sample status screen to locate the sample
to be accessed.
The Find options (Sample status) window displays.
a. Enter the sample name, sample ID, and/or patient ID in the
appropriate data entry boxes.
b. Select Done to initiate the search.

The Sample status screen displays with the text "Search
2. Select the sample from the SID Name column, and then select
F6 - Suspend.
3. Select OK to suspend processing.

The RSH returns the carrier(s) to its original location.
4. Unload samples (RSH), page 5-216.

To reload the sample(s), see Load samples for routine processing (RSH),
page 5-179, or Load samples for priority processing (RSH), page 5-181.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Unload samples (sample carousel - c System)
Perform this procedure to unload samples from the sample carousel

when they are no longer needed on the system.
NOTE: Review the Exception status and Rerun status screens to

determine if the sample(s) is still needed on the system. See Access the
Exception status screen, page 5-295, or Access the Rerun status screen,
page 5-259.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA

IMPORTANT: When unloading and transporting samples, do not

splash sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes.
To unload samples:
2. Verify that the sample carousel access indicator button

(square), next to the carousel, is illuminated. If the indicator
button is not illuminated, see Pause the sample carousel (c System),
page 5-16.
cover to open.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

5. Remove the samples from the carousel.
7. Store remaining samples according to your laboratory guidelines.
8. Close the sample carousel cover by pushing the cover down until
you hear a click.
NOTE: Sample processing does not resume unless the sample

carousel cover is closed.
Unload samples (SSH)
Perform this procedure to unload sample carriers and samples when

the SSH (standard sample handler) unload queue is full or the samples
are no longer needed on the system.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Supplies NA

IMPORTANT: When unloading and transporting sample carriers, do

not splash sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes.
To unload samples:
1. Lift the sample carrier carefully out of the sample unload queue.
2. Remove the samples from the sample carrier.
Unload samples (LAS carousel sample handler)
Perform this procedure to unload an LAS (laboratory automation

system) carousel sample handler and samples when the samples are no
Prerequisite NA
Supplies NA

IMPORTANT: When unloading and transporting samples, do not

splash sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes.
To unload samples:
1. Open the LAS carousel cover, and then carefully lift the LAS
carousel straight up from the LAS carousel platform.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: You may remove samples from the LAS sample carousel
without removing the carousel from the sample handler. Press
the carousel advance key on the sample handler keypad to
advance the LAS sample carousel to provide access to all
positions.
2. Remove the samples from the sample carousel.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Patient and QC results review, rerun, and release Section 5
Patient and QC results review, rerun, and

release
Once patient and QC sample processing are complete, you can view
the results to determine whether to release them or rerun the tests.
Patient and QC results review, rerun, and release topics include:
Patient results review and release, page 5-222
QC result review and release, page 5-242
Patient results, QC results, and exceptions rerun review, page 5-257
Patient results review and release

Review patient results to determine whether to rerun the tests, release,
or delete them.
Patient results review and release topics include:
Results review screen, page 5-222
Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225
Procedures - Results review screen, page 5-226
Windows - Results review screen, page 5-235
Results review screen
From the Results review screen you can view information for
unreleased patient results, which includes:
Assay name and result
Flags and codes
You can also release or delete a result and access windows to:
criteria
Print the Absorbance Data report, Patient report, Result Details
report, Results List report, and Sample report
View detailed result information
Add a comment to a result

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5 Patient and QC results review, rerun, and release
Rerun a test
For results that have been released, see Stored results screen, page 5-262.
Figure 5.52: Results review screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Results review screen field


SID and NAME Alphanumerically in ascending order.
Carrier/position
LAS
SID, NAME, and ASSAY Alphanumerically in ascending order.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

RESULT Based on interpretation.
FLAG and CODE See Descriptions of patient result flags,
To display this screen, see Access the Results review screen, page 5-224.
View all patient results, page 5-226
Find a specific patient result, page 5-227
View patient result details, page 5-228
Add a comment to a patient result, page 5-229
page 5-230
Delete a patient result, page 5-233
Access the Results review screen
Perform this procedure to display the Results review screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Results review screen:

Select Results from the menu bar, and then select Results review.
The Results review screen displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Descriptions of patient result flags
Flags provide additional information about a result and indicate that

you may need to review the result. When a patient result has a flag,
the information displays in red on the Results review and Stored
results screens. The system displays one or more of the following result
flags, when applicable, for a test result. When you select the FLAG
column heading, the flags sort in the following order.
Table 5.7: Patient result flags
Flag Description
EDIT The result was manually edited by the operator and was not
(c System) calculated by the system.
EXP* The result was measured using expired reagents,

Pre-Trigger or Trigger Solutions.
EXPC* The result was calculated using an expired calibration
curve.
(c System)
A#1 The result was calculated using the only read, out of all
(c System) reads in the main read window, with measured absorbance
within the defined absorbance range. This condition can
occur when the result concentration is high or the sample is
lipemic. See Sample results observed problems (c System),
page 10-562.
A#2 The result was calculated using only two reads, out of all
(c System) reads in the main or flex read window, with measured
absorbance within the defined absorbance range. This
condition can occur when the result concentration is high or
the sample is lipemic. See Sample results observed
problems (c System), page 10-562.
CNTL* The result was calculated after the quality control failed for
the same control name and control level.
The flag continues to appear on subsequent results until the
failed quality control result is rerun and the result is within
acceptable limits.
NOTE: Only Westgard rules configured as a failure

produce a CNTL flag for a patient result.
< or > The result is outside the dynamic or linear range.
FLEX The result was calculated using the read data measured
(c System) during the flex read time. See Sample results observed
problems (c System), page 10-562.
LL or HH** The result is outside the defined extreme range.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 5.7: Patient result flags (continued)

Flag Description
PSHH The result may be affected by the ICT sample that was
(c System ICT measured immediately prior to this sample because the
assays) result of the previous sample was above the extreme range.
Rerun the sample to verify that there was no affect. See
Sample results observed problems (c System),
page 10-562.
LOW or HIGH** The result is outside the defined normal range.
* Indicates these flags carry over from a constituent result to a

calculated result.
** Indicates a result is rounded to the reporting number of decimals for
an assay, and then compared against the range.
Procedures - Results review screen
Procedures you can perform from the Results review screen and its
View all patient results, page 5-226
page 5-230
Delete a patient result, page 5-233
View all patient results
Perform this procedure to display the Results review screen. From this
screen you can view information on unreleased patient results.
To view information for released patient results, see View all stored
patient results, page 5-265.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Supplies NA
To view all patient results:

Select Results on the menu bar, and then select Results review.
The Results review screen displays.
Find a specific patient result
Perform this procedure to search for specific unreleased patient results

by entering your search criteria in one or more fields.
Prerequisite Access the Results review screen, page 5-224
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To find a specific patient result:

1. Select F3 - Find on the Results review screen.
The Find options (Results review) window displays.
NOTE: Do not enter multiple dates when searching for a specific

time interval.
A wild card search allows you to type a partial entry followed by
an asterisk (*) to begin a search when you do not know the entire
entry. You can use the asterisk (*) wildcard character in all fields
except position (P).
and 12347.

The Results review screen displays with the text "Search results:"
in the title bar.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

View patient result details
Perform this procedure to display the Details for result window. From
this window you can view details for unreleased patient results and
add comments.
To view the assay reaction graph and absorbance data for patient
results, see View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c
To view details for released patient results, see View stored patient results
details, page 5-266.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view patient result details:

1. Select the desired result(s) from the table on the Results review
The Details for result (Results review) window displays.
3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each result if you

4. Select Done to return to the Results review screen.
page 5-236

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

page 5-237
System), page 5-238
Add a comment to a patient result
Perform this procedure to add a comment to an unreleased patient

result(s).
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To add a comment to a patient result:

1. Select the desired result(s) from the table on the Results review
The Details for result (Results review) window displays.

(optional)
page 5-236
page 5-237

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c

System)
Perform this procedure to view the reaction graph and absorbance

data for a result.
Access the Results review screen, page 5-224
Access the Stored results screen, page 5-264
Access the QC result review screen, page 5-245
Access the Stored QC results screen, page 5-280
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result:

1. Select the desired photometric assay result(s) on the appropriate
The Details for result window - photometric - data view displays.
3. Select the graph button.

The Details for result window - photometric - graph view
displays.
4. Enter the desired range in the Y axis scale data entry boxes, and
then select Rescale to change the absorbance scale. (optional)
An updated view of the reaction graph displays.
5. Select Done to return to the previous screen.

Your changes to the Y axis scale are not saved.
Stored results screen, page 5-262
QC result review screen, page 5-243
Stored QC results screen, page 5-278

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

page 5-237
System), page 5-238
page 5-252
Details for result (Stored results) window - data view (c System),
page 5-273
Details for result (Stored results) window - photometric - graph view (c
System), page 5-274
System), page 5-287
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - photometric - graph
Rerun a test
Perform this procedure to rerun a patient test, control test, or an

exception. If additional tests are required, you must create a new order.
See Add a test to a patient order, page 5-128.
Access the QC result review screen, page 5-245
Access the Exception status screen, page 5-295
Module status Any
Supplies NA
IMPORTANT: If you are rerunning a calculated assay for a patient

sample, you must perform one of the following:
Delete any pending constituent orders for the sample, and then
create a new order for the calculated assay.
OR
Delete existing valid constituent results for this sample if new
constituent results are desired for the calculation.
Delete results for manually ordered constituents from either
the Results review or Stored results screen.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Delete results for constituents automatically ordered by the

system from the Results review, Stored results, or Exception
status screen.
To rerun a test:
1. Retrieve the original sample and verify:
Volume is sufficient. See Sample volume requirements,
page 5-172.
Sample integrity is acceptable. See Sample integrity,
page 5-176.
2. Return the sample to its position.
3. Select the desired test(s) on the appropriate screen.
NOTE: You cannot rerun calibrator exceptions or calculated

assay controls.
4. Select one of the following:

F6 - Rerun from the Results review, QC result review, or
Exception status screen.
F7 - Rerun from the Sample status screen.
The Rerun options window displays.
5. Specify the desired rerun options. (optional)

a. Select the carrier or carousel button, and then enter a carrier
or carousel ID in the C data entry box, if displayed.
b. Enter a position in the P data entry box.
NOTE: Steps 5a and 5b are not required if using a bar coded

sample.
c. Delete replicate values that are not required, and then enter
Dilution protocols/number of replicates data entry box.

sheet).
d. Select the Module selection: Manual option, and then select


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

overall throughput.
e. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you

selected more than one, and then repeat steps 5a through 5d
for each. (optional)
6. Select Done to save your changes and schedule the rerun.

You can view the tests scheduled for rerun on the Order status,
Rerun status, and Sample status screens. The R (rerun) code is
assigned to the test(s).
NOTE: If the sample is still onboard the RSH (robotic sample

samples for retest, the system repositions and re-aspirates the
sample automatically.
Exception status screen, page 5-293
Rerun options (QC result review) window, page 5-256
Delete a patient result
Perform this procedure to delete a patient result(s) that does not meet
release requirements.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To delete a patient result:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
1. Select the desired patient result(s) from the table on the Results
review screen, or select F2 - Select all.
3. Select OK to delete the result(s).
Release a patient result
Perform this procedure to release a patient result(s) that has been

reviewed.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To release a patient result:

1. Select the desired patient result(s) or select F2 - Select all.
2. Select F8 - Release to release the result(s).
NOTE: The F8 - Release button is not available if any of the

selected items on the Sample status screen are exceptions (red
text) or released results (blue text). Deselect the exceptions
and/or released results to make the button available.
You can view result information on the Stored results screen. If
your system interfaces with a host computer, the results transmit
to the host and the number of tests pending transmission
display on the LIS status button on the Snapshot screen.
To cancel a result transmission, see Cancel result transmission,
page 5-268.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Windows - Results review screen
Windows you can access from the Results review screen include:
page 5-236
page 5-237
Details for result (Results review) window - photometric - graph view
Edit result window (c System), page 5-242
Find options (Results review) window
From the Find options (Results review) window you can search for
specific unreleased patient results by entering your search criteria in
one or more fields.
For patient results that have been released, see Find options (Stored
results) window, page 5-272.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.53: Find options (Results review) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Results review) window
Details for result (Results review) window - calculated view
From the calculated view of the Details for result (Results review)
window you can view detailed information for unreleased calculated
patient results and add comments.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.54: Details for result (Results review) window - calculated

view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for result (Results review)
window - Calculated view field descriptions, page Appendix E-44.
Details for result (Results review) window - data view (c

System)
From the data view of the Details for result (Results review) window
you can view detailed information for unreleased patient results and
add comments. The information that displays depends on the assay
type (photometric or potentiometric) for the result selected.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.55: Details for result (Results review) window - data view (c
System)
window - Data view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-45.
page 5-230
Details for result (Results review) window - photometric - graph

view (c System)
From the photometric - graph view of the Details for result (Results
review) window you can view the assay reaction graph and associated
absorbance data for unreleased patient results.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.56: Details for result (Results review) window - photometric

- graph view (c System)
window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-47.
page 5-230
Details for result (Results review) window - sample interference

index view (c System)
From the sample interference index view of the Details for result
(Results review) window you can view detailed information for patient
results and add comments.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.57: Details for result (Results review) window - sample

interference index view (c System)
window - Sample interference index view (c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-48.
Details for result (Results review) window (i System)
From the Details for result (Results review) window (i System) you can
view detailed information for unreleased patient results and add
comments.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.58: Details for result (Results review) window (i System)
window (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-50.
Rerun options window
From the Rerun options window you can order a rerun for a patient
test and change the following:
Carrier ID and position or the carousel position
Automated dilution factor
Number of replicates
Module for processing the test (multi-module i System)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.59: Rerun options window
For descriptions of these fields, see Rerun options window field

Edit result window (c System)
From the Edit result window the system administrator can edit an
assay result.
Figure 5.60: Edit result window (c System)
QC result review and release

Review control results to determine whether to rerun the tests, release,
or delete them.
QC result review and release topics include:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 5-245

Procedures - QC result review screen, page 5-246
Windows - QC result review screen, page 5-251
QC result review screen
From the QC result review screen you can view information for
unreleased control results, which includes:
Sample location, identified by sample carrier ID/position, sample
Control name, level, and identification number
Flags
You can also release a control result and access windows to:
criteria
Print the Absorbance Data report, QC Result Details report, and
the QC Results List report
View detailed control result information
Add a comment to a control result
Rerun a test
For control results that have been released, see Stored QC results screen,
page 5-278.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.61: QC result review screen
For descriptions of these fields, see QC result review screen field


Carrier/position
LAS
M Numerically in ascending order.
SID, CONTROL NAME, LEVEL, and Alphanumerically in ascending order.
ASSAY
RESULT This column does not sort.
FLAG See Descriptions of quality control
result flags, page 5-245.
To display this screen, see Access the QC result review screen, page 5-245.
View all control results, page 5-247

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Find a specific control result, page 5-247

View control result details, page 5-248
Add a comment to a control result, page 5-249
page 5-230
Release a control result, page 5-250
Access the QC result review screen
Perform this procedure to display the QC result review screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the QC result review screen:

Select QC - Cal from the menu bar, and then select QC result review.
The QC result review screen displays.
Descriptions of quality control result flags
Flags provide additional information about a quality control result

and indicate that you may need to review the result. When a control
result has a flag, the information displays in red on the QC result
review, Stored QC results, and QC summary review screens. The
system displays one or more of the following quality control result

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
flags, when applicable, for a quality control result. When you select
the FLAG column header, the flags sort in the following order.
Table 5.8: Quality control result flags
Flag Description
Westgard rule The quality control result failed one or more Westgard rules.
Each failed rule displays. See Westgard rule descriptions,
page 5-310.
EXP The quality control result was measured using expired
reagents, Pre-Trigger, or Trigger Solutions.
EXPC (c System) The quality control result was calculated using an expired
calibration curve.
A#1 (c System) The quality control result was calculated using the only
read, out of all reads in the main read window, with
measured absorbance within the defined absorbance
range. See Sample results observed problems (c System),
page 10-562.
A#2 (c System) The quality control result was calculated using only two
reads, out of all reads in the main or flex read window, with
measured absorbance within the defined absorbance
range. See Sample results observed problems (c System),
page 10-562.
< or > The quality control result is outside the dynamic or linear
range.
FLEX (c System) The quality control result was calculated using the read data
measured during the flex read time. See Sample results
observed problems (c System), page 10-562.
PSHH (c System The quality control result may be affected by the ICT sample
ICT assays) that was measured immediately prior to this sample
because the result of the previous sample was above the
extreme range. Rerun the sample to verify that there was no
affect. See Sample results observed problems (c System),
page 10-562.
Procedures - QC result review screen
Procedures you can perform from the QC result review screen and its
View all control results, page 5-247
page 5-230

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Release a control result, page 5-250
View all control results
Perform this procedure to display the QC result review screen. From

this screen you can view information on unreleased control results.
To view information for released control results, see View all stored
control results, page 5-281.
To view a summary of statistical data for controls, see View QC data
summary, page 5-326.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view all control results:

Select QC-Cal icon from the menu bar, and then select QC result
review.
The QC result review screen displays.
Westgard rule descriptions, page 5-310
Find a specific control result
Perform this procedure to search for specific unreleased control results

by entering your search criteria in one or more fields.
Prerequisite Access the QC result review screen, page 5-245
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To find a specific control result:

1. Select F3 - Find on the QC result review screen.
The Find options (QC result review) window displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

time interval.
except position (p).
and 12347.

The QC result review screen displays with the text "Search

Find options (QC result review) window, page 5-251
View control result details
Perform this procedure to display the Details for QC result window.

From this window you can view details for unreleased control results
and add comments.
To view the assay reaction graph and absorbance data for control
To view details for released control results, see View stored control result
Module status Any
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To view control result details:

1. Select the desired result(s) from the table on the QC result review
The Details for QC result (QC result review) window displays.
NOTE: A code C may display for a Levey-Jennings point

comment and a QC result details comment.

4. Select Done to return to the QC result review screen.
page 5-252
page 5-254
Add a comment to a control result
Perform this procedure to add a comment to an unreleased control

result(s).
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To add a comment to a control result:

1. Select the desired result(s) from the table on the QC result review
The Details for QC result (QC result review) window displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(optional)
page 5-252
page 5-254
Release a control result
Perform this procedure to release a control result(s) that has been

reviewed.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To release a control result:

1. Select the desired control result(s) from the table on the QC
result review screen, or select F2 - Select all.
2. Select F8 - Release to release the result(s).

You can view result information on the Stored QC results screen
and the Levey-Jennings graph screen. If your system interfaces
with a host computer and is configured for transmitting
approved QC results to the host, the results transmit to the host
and the number of tests pending transmission display on the LIS
(laboratory information system) status button on the Snapshot
screen.
To cancel result transmission, see Cancel result transmission,
page 5-268.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Stored QC results, page 5-278
Windows - QC result review screen
Windows you can access from the QC result review screen include:
Find options (QC result review) window, page 5-251
System), page 5-252
page 5-254
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Calculated view,
page 5-255
Rerun options (QC result review) window, page 5-256
Find options (QC result review) window
From the Find options (QC result review) window you can search for
specific unreleased control results by entering your search criteria in
one or more fields.
For control results that have been released, see Find options (Stored QC
results) window, page 5-286.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.62: Find options (QC result review) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (QC result review)

System)
From the data view of the Details for QC result (QC result review)
window you can view detailed information for unreleased control
results and add comments. The information that displays depends on
the assay type (photometric or potentiometric) for the result selected.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.63: Details for QC result (QC result review) window - data
view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for QC result (QC result
review) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix
E-67.
page 5-230
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - photometric -

graph view (c System)
From the photometric - graph view of the Details for QC result (QC
result review) window you can view the assay reaction graph and
associated absorbance data for unreleased control results.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.64: Details for QC result (QC result review) window -

photometric - graph view (c System)
review) window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-68.
page 5-230
Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i System)
From the i System view of the Details for QC result (QC result review)
window you can view detailed information for unreleased control
results and add comments.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.65: Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i

System)
review) window (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-70.
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Calculated

view
From the calculated view of the Details for QC result (QC result
review) window you can view detailed information for unreleased
control results and add comments.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.66: Details for QC result (QC result review) window -

Calculated view
review) window - Calculated view field descriptions, page Appendix E-71.
Rerun options (QC result review) window
From the Rerun options (QC result review) window you can order a
rerun for a control test and change the following:
Carrier ID and position or the carousel position
Automated dilution factor
Number of replicates
Module for processing the test (multi-module i System)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.67: Rerun options (QC result review) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Rerun options (QC result review)
Patient results, QC results, and exceptions rerun review

A rerun is a test order created by the operator or automatically by the
system. You use the Rerun status screen to review and manage patient
results, QC results, and exceptions that are scheduled for rerun.
Patient, QC, and exception rerun review topics include:
Procedures - Rerun status screen, page 5-260
Rerun status screen
From the Rerun status screen you can view information for the tests
scheduled for rerun and delete a rerun. These tests are ordered by the
operator or created automatically by the system and display until the
rerun is complete.
NOTE: Tests scheduled for rerun also display on the Order status and
Sample status screens.
Information includes:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay name, status, and time of completion

Processing codes
Find information for specific reruns based on specified search
criteria
Print the Rerun list report
View detailed rerun information
Add a comment to a rerun
Delete a test scheduled for rerun
Figure 5.68: Rerun status screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Rerun status screen field descriptions,

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Carrier/position
LAS
TIME Last to first to complete.
STATUS and CODE See Descriptions of test statuses,
To display this screen, see Access the Rerun status screen, page 5-259.
View the status of tests scheduled for rerun, page 5-260
Delete a test from a rerun order, page 5-261
Access the Rerun status screen
Perform this procedure to display the Rerun status screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Rerun status screen:
selecting the Reruns status button.
Select Exceptions from the menu bar, and then select Rerun status.
The Rerun status screen displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Procedures - Rerun status screen
Procedures you can perform from the Rerun status screen and its
View the status of tests scheduled for rerun, page 5-260
Delete a test from a rerun order, page 5-261
View the status of tests scheduled for rerun
Perform this procedure to access the Rerun status screen. From this
screen you can view information for the tests scheduled for rerun and
delete a rerun. These tests are ordered by the operator or created
automatically by the system and display until the rerun is complete.
NOTE: Tests scheduled for rerun also display on the Order status and
Sample status screens.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the status of tests scheduled for rerun:
selecting the Reruns status button.
Select Exceptions from the menu bar, and then select Rerun status.
The Rerun status screen displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Delete a test from a rerun order
Perform this procedure to delete a test(s) that no longer needs to be

rerun.
Prerequisite Access the Rerun status screen, page 5-259
Rerun order status - Pending
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To delete a test from a rerun order:

1. Select the desired test(s) from the table on the Rerun status
3. Select OK to delete the test(s).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Patient and QC stored results Section 5
Patient and QC stored results

This subsection describes how to view and archive patient and QC
results that have been released.
Patient and QC stored results topics include:
Patient stored results, page 5-262
Stored QC results, page 5-278
Patient stored results

Patient results that have been released remain in stored results until
you archive or delete them, or system capacity is reached. See System
capacities, page 4-6.
Patient stored results topics include:
Procedures - Stored results screen, page 5-264
Windows - Stored results screen, page 5-271
Stored results screen
From the Stored results screen you can view information for released
patient results, which includes:
Flags and codes
You can also retransmit, archive, or delete a stored result and access
windows to:
Find information for specific stored results based on specified
search criteria
Print the Absorbance Data report, Patient report, Result Details
report, Results List report, and the Sample report
View detailed information for stored results

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5 Patient and QC stored results
For results that have not been released, see Results review screen,
page 5-222.
Figure 5.69: Stored results screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Stored results screen field descriptions,
page Appendix E-52.

Carrier/position
LAS
RESULT Based on interpretation.
FLAG and CODE See Descriptions of patient result flags,
To display this screen, see Access the Stored results screen, page 5-264.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
View all stored patient results, page 5-265
Find a specific stored patient result, page 5-265
View stored patient results details, page 5-266
page 5-230
Retransmit a stored patient result to the host, page 5-267
Delete a stored patient result, page 5-269
Archive stored patient results, page 5-269
Access the Stored results screen
Perform this procedure to display the Stored results screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Stored results screen:

Select Results from the menu bar, and then select Stored results.
The Stored results screen displays.
Procedures - Stored results screen
Procedures you can perform from the Stored results screen and its
View all stored patient results, page 5-265
Retransmit a stored patient result to the host, page 5-267

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Delete a stored patient result, page 5-269
View all stored patient results
Perform this procedure to display the Stored results screen. From this
screen you can view information on released patient results.
To view information for unreleased patient results, see View all patient
results, page 5-226.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view all stored patient results:

Select Results on the menu bar, and then select Stored results.
The Stored results screen displays.
Find a specific stored patient result
Perform this procedure to search for specific released patient results by

Prerequisite Access the Stored results screen, page 5-264
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To find a specific stored patient result:

1. Select F3 - Find on the Stored results screen.
The Find options (Stored results) window displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

time interval.
except position (P).
and 12347.

The Stored results screen displays with the text "Search results:"
in the title bar.

Find options (Stored results) window, page 5-272
View stored patient results details
Perform this procedure to display the Stored results screen. From this
screen you can view details for released patient results.
To view the assay reaction graph and absorbance data for patient
To view details for unreleased patient results, see View patient result
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view stored patient results details:

1. Select the desired result(s) from the table on the Stored results

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The Details for result (Stored results) window displays.

4. Select Done to return to the Stored results screen.
Details for result (Stored results) window - calculated view, page 5-273
page 5-273
System), page 5-274
Details for result (Stored results) window - sample interference index
Details for result (Stored results) window (i System), page 5-276
Retransmit a stored patient result to the host
Perform this procedure to retransmit a released patient result(s) to the

host.
Must be configured for bidirectional host
communications, see Configure host interface settings,
page 2-6
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To retransmit a stored patient result to the host:

1. Select the desired patient result(s) from the table on the Stored
results screen, or select F2 - Select all.
2. Select F6 - Transmit to Host.

3. Select OK to transmit the result(s).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To cancel a transmission to the host computer, see Cancel result

transmission, page 5-268.
Cancel result transmission
Perform this procedure to clear all results that are pending

transmission to the host.
page 2-5
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To cancel result transmission:

1. Select Host-Release mode from the System categories list on
The Configure host - release mode window displays.
3. Select the Bidirectional host: Off option, and then select Done.
A message displays when you have results that are pending
transmission to the host.
4. Select OK to cancel result transmission.
NOTE: If you select Cancel to leave the Bidirectional host on, the
results pending transmission remain until transmission is
successful.
Results with a status of Pending Transmission go to a status of
complete. Error message 8465, Host transmission canceled by
the user is logged in the Message History log.
NOTE: To resume host communication, you must reset the

bidirectional host option.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Delete a stored patient result
Perform this procedure to delete a released patient result(s) that is no

Result is not pending transmission or pending collation
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To delete a stored patient result:

NOTE: Results with a status of pending transmission or pending

collation cannot be deleted. Wait until the results have been
transmitted or all results have been released before deleting
them.
3. Select OK to delete the result(s).
Archive stored patient results
Perform this procedure to store released patient results on a CD to

create a backup for long-term storage.
NOTE: The results are archived in a delimited ASCII format so you can
import them into a spreadsheet. You cannot use the ARCHITECT
System to retrieve the information.
Supplies CD-R (compact disk recordable) or
Unformatted CD-RW (compact disk
Recordable/ReWritable)
To archive stored patient results:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
1. Disable the screen timeout if the database is full and you are
archiving a large amount of data. See Change the screen timeout
setting, page 2-26. (optional)
2. Insert a CD-R or CD-RW into the CD drive.
NOTE: If an archive message displays, see Descriptions of archive

messages, page 5-271.
NOTE: You can also select F3 - Find to search for and select
results. See Find a specific stored patient result, page 5-265.
4. Select F8 - Archive.
The Archive results window displays.
5. Verify the CD drive read indicator light is off.
6. Deselect Delete records after archive check box. (optional)
NOTE: If you choose to delete results, results with a status of

Pending transmission or Pending collation are not deleted.
7. Select Done to archive the results.
NOTE: An archive routinely takes less than four minutes, but

with a full database it may take longer. You can cancel an archive
when the system is collecting archive data and creating a
temporary archive data file. A progress indicator displays with a
Cancel button. You can cancel an archive prior to it being 50%
complete.
Do not navigate to a different screen or window until the "0519
Data Archive Complete" message displays.
8. Select the refresh button, if available.
Archive results window, page 5-277

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Descriptions of archive messages
The following table lists the archive messages and their meanings.
Table 5.9: Descriptions of archive messages
Message Description
Insufficient disk space for archive The disk does not have enough space
to archive the requested record. See
error code 0180.
NOTE: A minimum of 40 megabytes

of disk space is required to initiate an
archive.
No disk or incorrect disk type detected You did not place a disk in the CD
drive.
You used an incorrect disk type.
You inserted the disk upside down.
The archive disk is not a
Recordable/ReWritable disk.
See error code 0181.
No CD drive is detected A CD-RW drive is not installed on the
SCC.
A cabling problem exists on the CD
drive.
The CD drive had a hardware failure.
See error code 0182.
CD drive is initializing You selected the Done button before
initialization is complete. See error
code 0183.
The disk is read-only The archive disk is not a
Recordable/ReWritable disk. See error
code 0184.
NOTE: A CD that has been

previously used to write information
other than archive information
cannot be used to archive additional
information.
Busy The CD is in the process of reading,
writing, or initializing. See error code
0185.
Windows - Stored results screen
Windows you can access from the Stored results screen include:
Find options (Stored results) window, page 5-272

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Details for result (Stored results) window - calculated view,

page 5-273
page 5-273
System), page 5-274
Details for result (Stored results) window - sample interference index
Details for result (Stored results) window (i System), page 5-276
Archive results window, page 5-277
Find options (Stored results) window
From the Find options (Stored results) window you can search for
specific released patient results by entering your search criteria in one
or more fields.
For patient results that have not been released, see Find options (Results
review) window, page 5-235.
Figure 5.70: Find options (Stored results) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Stored results) window

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Details for result (Stored results) window - calculated view
From the calculated view of the Details for result (Stored results)
window you can view detailed information for released patient results.
NOTE: Some data fields may not display all data if the data you
entered is maximum character length.
Figure 5.71: Details for result (Stored results) window - calculated

view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for result (Stored results)
window - Calculated view field descriptions, page Appendix E-54.
Details for result (Stored results) window - data view (c System)
From the data view of the Details for result (Stored results) window
you can view detailed information for released patient results. The
information that displays depends on the assay type (photometric or
potentiometric) for the result selected.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.72: Details for result (Stored results) window - data view (c
System)
window - Data view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-56.
page 5-230
Details for result (Stored results) window - photometric - graph

view (c System)
From the photometric - graph view of the Details for result (Stored
results) window you can view the assay reaction graph and associated
absorbance data for released patient results.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.73: Details for result (Stored results) window - photometric -

graph view (c System)
window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-58.
page 5-230
Details for result (Stored results) window - sample interference

index view (c System)
From the sample interference index view of the Details for result
(Stored results) window you can view detailed information for released
patient results.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.74: Details for result (Stored results) window - sample

interference index view (c System)
window - Sample interference index view (c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-59.
Details for result (Stored results) window (i System)
From the Details for result (Stored results) window (i System) you can
view detailed information for released patient results.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.75: Details for result (Stored results) window (i System)
window (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-61.
Archive results window
From the Archive results window you can archive released patient
results to a CD.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.76: Archive results window
For descriptions of these fields, see Archive results window field

Stored QC results
QC results that have been released remain in stored results until you
archive and delete them.
Stored QC results topics include:
Procedures - Stored QC results screen, page 5-281
Windows - Stored QC results screen, page 5-286
Stored QC results screen
From the Stored QC results screen you can view information for
released control results, which includes:
Control name, level, and identification number
Flags

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
You can also retransmit or archive a stored control result and access
windows to:
criteria
Print the Absorbance Data report, QC Result Details report, and
QC Results List report
View detailed stored control result information
For control results that have not been released, see QC result review
screen, page 5-243.
Figure 5.77: Stored QC results screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Stored QC results screen field


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Carrier/position
LAS
SID, CONTROL NAME, LEVEL, and Alphanumerically in ascending order.
ASSAY
RESULT This column does not sort.
FLAG See Descriptions of quality control
To display this screen, see Access the Stored QC results screen,

page 5-280.
View all stored control results, page 5-281
Find a specific stored control result, page 5-282
View stored control result details, page 5-283
page 5-230
Retransmit a stored control result, page 5-284
Archive stored control results, page 5-284
Access the Stored QC results screen
Perform this procedure to display the Stored QC results screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Stored QC results screen:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Select QC - Cal from the menu bar, and then select Stored QC results.
The Stored QC results screen displays.
Procedures - Stored QC results screen
Procedures you can perform from the Stored QC results screen and its
View all stored control results, page 5-281
page 5-230
Retransmit a stored control result, page 5-284
View all stored control results
Perform this procedure to display the Stored QC results screen. From

this screen you can view information for released control results.
To view information for unreleased control results, see View all control
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view all stored control results:

Select QC - Cal icon from the menu bar, and then select Stored QC
results.
The Stored QC results screen displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Find a specific stored control result
Perform this procedure to search for specific released control results by

Prerequisite Access the Stored QC results screen, page 5-280
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To find a specific stored control result:

1. Select F3 - Find on the Stored QC results screen.
The Find options (Stored QC results) window displays.

time interval.
except position (p).
and 12347.

The Stored QC results screen displays with the text "Search

Find options (Stored QC results) window, page 5-286

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
View stored control result details
Perform this procedure to display the Details for QC result (Stored QC

results) window. From this screen you can view details for released
control results and add comments.
To view the assay reaction graph and absorbance data for control
To view details for unreleased control results, see View control result
page 2-6
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view stored control result details:

1. Select the desired result(s) from the table on the Stored QC
The Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window displays.

4. Select Done to return to the Stored QC results screen.
System), page 5-287
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i System),
page 5-289

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Retransmit a stored control result
Perform this procedure to retransmit a released control result(s) to the

host.
page 2-6.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To retransmit a stored control result to the host:

1. Select the desired control result(s) from the table on the Stored
QC results screen, or select F2 - Select all.
2. Select F6 - Transmit to Host.

3. Select OK to transmit the result(s).

To cancel a transmission to the host computer, see Cancel result
transmission, page 5-268.
Archive stored control results
Perform this procedure to store released control results on a CD to

create a backup for long-term storage.
NOTE: The results are archived in a delimited ASCII format so you can
import them into a spreadsheet. You cannot use the ARCHITECT
System to retrieve the information.
Unformatted CD-RW (compact disk read/write)
To archive stored control results:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

3. Select the desired control results from the table on the Stored QC
results. See Find a specific stored control result, page 5-282.
4. Select F8-Archive.
The Archive QC results window displays.
6. Deselect Delete records after archive check box. (optional)
NOTE: If you delete QC results, the result values continue to be

used in the cumulative module or system data. However, deleted
QC results are deleted from the current Westgard analysis. Before
deleting QC results, verify that all results you do not want
included in the cumulative data have been excluded. See Exclude
or include a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-318. Once the archive is
complete and the QC results have been deleted, you cannot
access the result to exclude it.
If you choose to delete results, results with a status of Pending
transmission or Pending collation are not deleted.
7. Select Done to archive the results.

complete. Do not navigate to a different screen or window until
the "0519 Data Archive Complete" message displays.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Archive QC results window, page 5-291
Windows - Stored QC results screen
Windows you can access from the Stored QC results screen include:
Find options (Stored QC results) window, page 5-286
System), page 5-287
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i System),
page 5-289
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - calculated view,
page 5-290
Archive QC results window, page 5-291
Find options (Stored QC results) window
From the Find options (Stored QC results) window you can search for
specific released control results by entering your search criteria in one
or more fields. The information that displays depends on the assay
type (photometric or potentiometric) for the result selected.
For unreleased control results, see Find options (QC result review)
window, page 5-251.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.78: Find options (Stored QC results) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Stored QC results)


System)
From the data view of the Details for QC result (Stored QC results)
window you can view detailed information for released control results.
The information that displays depends on the assay type (photometric
or potentiometric) for the result selected.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.79: Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - data

view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for QC result (Stored QC

results) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix
E-88.
page 5-230
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - photometric

- graph view (c System)
From the photometric - graph view of the Details for QC result (Stored
QC results) window you can view the assay reaction graph and
associated absorbance data for released control results.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.80: Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window -

photometric - graph view (c System)

results) window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-90.
page 5-230
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i System)
From the i System view of the Details for QC result (Stored QC results)
window you can view detailed information for released control results.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.81: Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i

System)

results) window (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-91.
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - calculated

view
From the calculated view of the Details for QC result (Stored QC

results) window you can view detailed information for released
control results.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.82: Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window -

calculated view

results) window - Calculated field descriptions, page Appendix E-92.
Archive QC results window
From the Archive QC results window you can archive released control
results to a CD.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.83: Archive QC results window
For descriptions of these fields, see Archive QC results window field


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5 Exception management
Exception management
An exception is a test order that failed to complete. Results are not
reported and operator intervention is required. You use the Exception
status screen to review and manage exceptions.
When an exception(s) occurs:
The Exceptions status button displays on the Snapshot screen
and indicates the number of exceptions. You can select this
button to display the Exception status screen.
The Exceptions icon on the menu bar blinks to indicate new
exceptions exist. You can select this icon, and then Exception
status, to display the Exception status screen.
The exception management topic includes the Exception status screen,
page 5-293.
Exception status screen

From the Exception status screen you can view information for
patient, control, and calibration exceptions, which includes:
Assay name
Error code
Module identifier
You can also transmit an exception to the host, delete an exception,
and access windows to:
Find information for specific exceptions based on specified
search criteria
Print the Exception Details, Exception Status, and Absorbance
Data reports
View detailed information for exceptions
View probable causes and corrective actions for the error code
Add a comment to an exception
Rerun an exception

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Exception management Section 5
Figure 5.84: Exception status screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Exception status screen field


Carrier/position
LAS
WTR (water)/0
ERROR CODE Numerically in ascending order.
To display this screen, see Access the Exception status screen, page 5-295.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
View all exceptions, page 5-296
Find a specific exception, page 5-296
View exception details, page 5-297
Add a comment to an exception, page 5-298
page 5-230
Transmit an exception to the host, page 5-299
Delete an exception, page 5-299
Access the Exception status screen
Perform this procedure to display the Exception status screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Exception status screen:
selecting the Exceptions status button.
Select Exceptions from the menu bar, and then select Exception
status.
The Exception status screen displays.
Procedures - Exception status screen
Procedures you can perform from the Exception status screen include:
View all exceptions, page 5-296

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Transmit an exception to the host, page 5-299
Delete an exception, page 5-299
View all exceptions
Perform this procedure to display the Exception status screen. From

this screen you can view a list of all tests that have failed to complete.
To find specific exceptions, see Find a specific exception, page 5-296.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
selecting the Exceptions status button.
To view all exceptions:
Select Exceptions from the menu bar, and then select Exception
status.
The Exception status screen displays.
Find a specific exception
Perform this procedure to search for a specific exception(s) by entering

your search criteria in one or more fields.
Prerequisite Access the Exception status screen, page 5-295
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To find a specific exception:

1. Select F3 - Find on the Exception status screen.
The Find options (Exception status) window displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Example: If you enter 123* in the Error code data entry box, all
orders with an error code starting with 123 display.

The Exception status screen displays with the text "Search

Find options (Exception status) window, page 5-300
View exception details
Perform this procedure to display the Details for exceptions window.

From this window you can view detailed information for exceptions
that you can use in troubleshooting.
Prerequisite Exception status screen, page 5-293
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view exception details:

1. Select the desired exception(s) from the table on the Exception
The Details for exceptions window displays.
3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each exception if you

4. Select Done to return to the Exception status screen.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
page 5-302
Add a comment to an exception
Perform this procedure to add a comment to an exception(s).

Module status Any
Supplies NA
To add a comment to an exception:

The Details for exceptions window displays.
4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each exception if you

(optional)
page 5-302

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Transmit an exception to the host
Perform this procedure to transmit an exception(s) to the host when

exceptions are managed on a host system.
page 2-6
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To transmit an exception to the host:

2. Select F8 - Transmit to Host to transmit the exceptions.

Once the transmission completes, the exception(s) no longer
displays on the Exception status screen.
To cancel the exception transmission, see Cancel result transmission,
page 5-268.
Delete an exception
Perform this procedure to delete an exception(s) that is no longer

needed for troubleshooting.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To delete an exception:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3. Select OK to delete the exception(s).
NOTE: Exceptions that are pending transmission or pending

collation are not deleted until transmission completes.
Windows - Exception status screen
Windows you can access from the Exception status screen include:
Find options (Exception status) window, page 5-300
page 5-302
Details for exceptions window - calculated control view, page 5-306
Find options (Exception status) window
From the Find options (Exception status) window you can search for
specific exceptions by entering your search criteria in one or more
fields.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.85: Find options (Exception status) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Exception status)

Details for exceptions window - data view (c System)
From the data view of the Details for exceptions window you can view
detailed information for exceptions and add comments. The
information that displays depends on the assay type (photometric,
potentiometric, or sample interference index) for the exception
selected.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.86: Details for exceptions window - data view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for exceptions window - Data
view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-99.
page 5-230
Details for exceptions window - photometric - graph view (c

System)
From the photometric - graph view of the Details for exceptions

window you can view the assay reaction graph and associated
absorbance data for results. This view is not available for tests that are
unable to complete all photometric measurements.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.87: Details for exceptions window - photometric - graph view

(c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for exceptions window -

Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix
E-100.
page 5-230
Details for exceptions window (i System)
From the Details for exceptions window you can view detailed
information for exceptions and add comments.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.88: Details for exceptions window (i System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for exceptions window (i

Details for exceptions window - calculated view
From the calculated view of the Details for exceptions window you
can view detailed information for exceptions and add comments.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.89: Details for exceptions window - calculated view

Calculated view field descriptions, page Appendix E-103.
Details for exceptions window - control view
From the control view of the Details for exceptions window you can
view detailed information for exceptions and add comments.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.90: Details for exceptions window - control view

Control view field descriptions, page Appendix E-104.
Details for exceptions window - calculated control view
From the calculated control view of the Details for exceptions window
you can view detailed information for exceptions and add comments.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.91: Details for exceptions window - calculated control view

Calculated control view field descriptions, page Appendix E-106.
Details for exceptions window - calibrator view
From the calibrator view of the Details for exceptions window you can
view detailed information for exceptions and add comments.
the Sample status window. Some data fields may not display all data if

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.92: Details for exceptions window - calibrator view

Calibrator view field descriptions, page Appendix E-107.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5 Quality control analysis
Quality control analysis

Quality control analysis is the process of monitoring control activity.
The ARCHITECT System allows you to monitor control activity using
standard Levey-Jennings graphs, Westgard rules, and QC data
summaries. Control data includes both unreleased and released
results.
To help ensure quality results and maintain optimal system
performance:
Carefully follow all directions in the Operations Manual and the
Never use expired or contaminated consumables.
Perform maintenance checks and calibration procedures as
recommended. See Maintenance, page 9-2.
IMPORTANT: The system evaluates controls on an assay per control
lot basis. If a control fails on one or multiple reagent kits, the control
failure on the kit(s) does not prevent the kit(s) from being used. You
need to evaluate and resolve any control issues before running patient
samples.
The quality control management topics include:
Levey-Jennings graph screen, page 5-312
QC summary review screen, page 5-323
QC reports screen, page 5-330
Westgard rule application

When Westgard rules are configured, the ARCHITECT System
compares a control result against the expected mean and standard
deviation for the control level. Previous results for the same assay are
considered.
For information on configuring Westgard rules, see Configure a
Westgard rule, page 2-181.
For information on each of the rules, see Westgard rule descriptions,
page 5-310.
For information on run definitions, see Westgard rule run descriptions,
page 5-311.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Quality control analysis Section 5
Westgard rule descriptions
Westgard rules configured as a failure for an assay(s) produce a CNTL

(control) flag for each patient result associated with the assay(s). The
following table lists the Westgard rules in the order they are applied
and provides a description of each.
Table 5.10: Westgard rule descriptions
Westgard rule Description
1-3s Control rule to test whether a control measurement exceeds
the control limits of x + 3SD or x - 3SD.
2-2s 1R 1M Control rule to test whether two consecutive control
measurements for the same control material within the
same run exceed the same control limit of either x + 2SD or
x - 2SD. Both results must fall on the same side of the
mean.
2-2s 1R xM Control rule to test whether two consecutive control
measurements across control materials within the same run
exceed the same control limit of either x + 2SD or x - 2SD.
Both results must fall on the same side of the mean. The
two control results must have different control level names.
2-2s xR 1M Control rule to test whether two consecutive control
measurements for the same control material across two
different runs exceed the same control limit of either x +
2SD or x - 2SD. Both results must fall on the same side of
the mean. The previous consecutive control result can be
obtained during any previous run.
R-4s Control rule to test whether the range, or difference,
between control measurements run within 30 minutes of
each other exceeds 4SD. The two control results need not
be consecutive. The current control result is compared
against each control result, which is older than the current
result, by 30 minutes or less. Each result must be greater
than 2SD, but in opposite directions.
4-1s 1M Control rule to test whether four consecutive control
measurements for the same control material exceed the
same control limit of either x + 1SD or x - 1SD. All four
control results must fall on the same side of the mean. The
previous control results can be obtained during any run.
4-1s xM Control rule to test whether four consecutive control
measurements across control materials exceed the same
control limit of either x + 1SD or x - 1SD. All four results
must fall on the same side of the mean. The previous control
results can be obtained during any run. (For this rule, both
control results with the same or different control level names
are considered.)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 5.10: Westgard rule descriptions (continued)

Westgard rule Description
10-x 1M Control rule to test whether 10 consecutive control
measurements for the same control material fall on the
same side of the mean. If a result falls on the mean, the rule
does not fail. The previous control results can be obtained
during any run.
10-x xM Control rule to test whether 10 consecutive control
measurements across control materials fall on the same
side of the mean. If a result falls on the mean, the rule does
not fail. The previous control results can be obtained during
any run. (For this rule, both control results with the same or
different control level names are considered.)
1-2s Control rule to test whether a control measurement exceeds
the control limits of x + 2SD or x - 2SD.
NOTE: To evaluate 1M (one material) rules, the system considers

previous control results with the same control name, control level
name, and control lot number.
To evaluate xM (across materials) rules, the system considers previous
control results with the same control name and control lot number
but different control level names.
Westgard rule run descriptions
The following table describes Westgard rules run definitions. For

information on configuring Run definitions, see Configure system
control center window, page 2-48.
Table 5.11: Westgard rules run definitions
Run definitions Description
First Run Start The system allows the user to define what a run is on a
Hour system-wide basis. Run is defined by specifying a start time
(which hour) and a time period (how many hours per run).
This is the time based run mode. The start hour is an
integer between 0 and 23. The "Run Period" is used for
Westgard rules 2-2s 1R 1M, 2-2s 1R xM, 2-2s xR 1M, 4-1s
1M, 4-1s xM.
Run Period Length The length of the "Run Period" in hours. The next Run
Period begins Run Period Length hours after the current
Run Period started. The run period is an integer between 1
and 24. If the 1 day period (24 hours) cannot be divided into
equal time runs, the last run shall have the remaining hours.
The Run Period is used for Westgard rules 2-2s 1R 1M,
2-2s 1R xM, 2-2s xR 1M, 4-1s 1M, 4-1s xM.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Levey-Jennings graph screen

From the Levey-Jennings graph screen you can view graphs and
statistical data that reflect the criteria you specified on the QC
selection window. A maximum of six Levey-Jennings graphs, three per
page, displays.
Change the criteria for the graph and data
Include or exclude points from a graph
View details for a selected point
Print the Levey-Jennings report
Figure 5.93: Levey-Jennings graph screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Levey-Jennings graph screen field


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
An explanation of the graph and statistical data elements on the

Levey-Jennings graph screen follows.
Table 5.12: Graph elements
Item Description
MEAN Represented by the center line of the graph and indicates
the expected control mean.
+ and - 1 SD Represented by the first line above and below the mean
(standard (green area).
deviation)
+ and - 2 SD Represented by the second line above and below the mean
(yellow area).
+ and - 3 SD Represented by the third line above and below the mean
(red area).
Cursor (yellow Indicates the selected point. Use the Point cursor controls to
box) move the cursor from one point to the next.
Points Represent control results and are graphed in the order of
completion.
Normal (black) Points that fall within the defined control range and do not
fail configured Westgard rules.
Westgard Points that caused a warning condition based on the
warnings Westgard analysis.
(yellow)
Westgard Points that failed Westgard analysis.
failures (red)
Out of range Bar that indicates a control result that is outside of the
(blue) control range.
Excluded Points that have been excluded from the data calculation.
(white)
Table 5.13: Levey-Jennings graph statistical data elements

Statistic fields Description
MEAN The expected mean value as configured.
SD The expected standard deviation value as configured.
LEVEL The control level name you selected.
N The number of control points for the selected
level/lot/assay/module.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 5.13: Levey-Jennings graph statistical data elements

COMPARISON The mean used to compare to the expected control mean.
MEAN Information that displays is determined by your selections
on the QC selection window.
Options are:
None - no comparison displayed
Manufacturers - mean as configured
Module cumulative - calculated for the selected
assay/level/lot for the selected module
System cumulative - calculated value for the selected
assay/level/lot for all modules
COMPARISON SD The SD (standard deviation) used to compare to the
expected control SD. Information that displays is determined
by your selections on the QC selection window.
Options are:
None - no comparison displayed
Manufacturers - SD as configured
Module cumulative - calculated for the selected
assay/level/lot for the selected module
System cumulative - calculated value for the selected
assay/level/lot for all modules
VISIBLE DATE The date range of the displayed points. As you navigate
RANGE through the graph, the VISIBLE DATE RANGE changes to
reflect the points you are viewing.
To display this screen, see Create a Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-315.
Display the value for a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-318
Change a Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-316
View details for a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-319
Add a comment to a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-320
Exclude or include a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-318
Recalculate Westgard analysis, page 5-320
Print the Levey-Jennings report, page 5-337
Procedures - Levey-Jennings graph screen
Procedures you can perform from the Levey-Jennings graph screen

include:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Create a Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-315

Display the value for a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-318
View details for a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-319
Create a Levey-Jennings graph
Perform this procedure to create Levey-Jennings graphs that you can

use to monitor control activity.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To create a Levey-Jennings graph:

1. Select QC - Cal from the menu bar, and then select
Levey-Jennings graph.
The Levey-Jennings graph screen displays in the background
with the QC selection window as the active window.
NOTE: Select module 5 for calculated results.

The control information for the selected module displays.
3. Enter a date range in the Date range for calculation data entry
box.
NOTE: The default range includes one month prior to the

current date.
4. Select the desired Comparison type option:

None - Does not use a comparison method
Manufacturers - Compares the expected mean and SD
(standard deviation) to the manufacturers mean and SD
configured for the control

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Module cumulative - Compares the expected mean and SD

to the cumulative mean and SD of the processing module
selected in step 2
System cumulative - Compares the expected mean and SD
to the cumulative mean and SD of all modules for a
multi-module system
5. Select the desired assay from the Assay list.
6. Select the desired control name from the Control name list.
7. Select the desired control lot number from the Control lot list.
8. Deselect the desired Control level check boxes. (optional)
NOTE: The default setting is all control level check boxes

selected.
9. Select Done to create the graph.

To view detailed information for a single control result, see View details
for a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-319.
To change the criteria for your graph, see Change a Levey-Jennings
graph, page 5-316.
QC selection window, page 5-321
Change a Levey-Jennings graph
Perform this procedure to redefine the criteria for a Levey-Jennings

graph.
Prerequisite Create a Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-315
View an assay control level Levey-Jennings graph,
page 5-328
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To change a Levey-Jennings graph:

1. Select F2 - QC selection on the Levey-Jennings graph screen.
The QC selection window displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

3. Enter a date range in the Date range for calculation data entry
box.

current date.
4. Select the desired Comparison type option:

None - Does not use a comparison method
Manufacturers - Compares the expected mean and SD
(standard deviation) to the manufacturers mean and SD
configured for the control
Module cumulative - Compares the expected mean and SD
to the cumulative mean and SD of the processing module
selected in step 2
System cumulative - Compares the expected mean and SD
to the cumulative mean and SD of all modules for a
multi-module system
5. Select the desired assay from the Assay list.
6. Select the desired control name from the Control name list.
7. Select the desired control lot number from the Control lot list.
8. Deselect the desired Control level check boxes. (optional)
NOTE: The default setting is all control level check boxes

selected.

The updated Levey-Jennings graph screen displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Display the value for a Levey-Jennings point
Perform this procedure to display the result value and date for a
specific point(s) on the Levey-Jennings graph screen.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To display the value for a Levey-Jennings point:

1. Select the desired point from the graph on the Levey-Jennings
graph screen.
The point value and date display in the lower right corner of the
screen.
2. Use the Point scroll buttons to select another point. (optional)
Exclude or include a Levey-Jennings point
Perform this procedure to exclude a point or include a previously

excluded point from the comparison mean and standard deviation.
To recalculate Westgard rules, see Recalculate Westgard analysis,
page 5-320.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To exclude or include a Levey-Jennings point:

graph screen, and then select F5 - Details.
The Point detail window displays.
2. Select the desired Include/exclude option.
NOTE: You must enter a comment to include or exclude a point.

Both the QC result comment and the Levey-Jennings point
comment print on the QC Result Details report.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
4. Select the Westgard re-evaluation check box to recalculate the

Westgard analysis. (optional)

Point detail window, page 5-322
View details for a Levey-Jennings point
Perform this procedure to display the Point detail window. From this
window you can view detailed information for a control result.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view details for a Levey-Jennings point:

Select the desired point from the graph on the Levey-Jennings graph
screen, and then select F5 - Details.
To exclude a point on the Levey-Jennings graph, see Exclude or include
a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-318.
To add a comment, see Add a comment to a Levey-Jennings point,
page 5-320.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Add a comment to a Levey-Jennings point
Perform this procedure to add a comment to a control point on a

Levey-Jennings graph.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To add a comment to a Levey-Jennings point:

1. Select the desired Levey-Jennings point, and then select F5 -
Details.
NOTE: Both the QC result comment and the Levey-Jennings

point comment print on the QC Result Details report.
Recalculate Westgard analysis
Perform this procedure to recalculate Westgard analysis after:

Including or excluding a point
Changing the configured expected mean and/or SD (standard
deviation) settings
The analysis is repeated for all rules except 1-3s or 1-2s.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To recalculate Westgard analysis:

graph screen, and then select F5 - Details.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2. Select the desired Include/exclude option. (optional)
3. Select the Westgard re-evaluation check box.

Windows - Levey-Jennings graph screen
Windows you can access from the Levey-Jennings graph screen

include:
QC selection window
From the QC selection window you specify the criteria used to create
Levey-Jennings graphs and statistical data.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.94: QC selection window
For descriptions of these fields, see QC selection window field

Create a Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-315
Point detail window
From the Point detail window you can view detailed information for a
point on the Levey-Jennings graph screen. You can also:
Include or exclude a point
Recalculate the Westgard analysis
Add a comment

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.95: Point detail window
For descriptions of these fields, see Point detail window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-75.
QC summary review screen

From the QC summary review screen you can view statistical data for
all assay control levels, which includes:
Assay name
Control name, lot number, and level
Number of control points
Actual mean, SD, and %CV
Expected mean and SD
Find information for specific assay controls based on specified
search criteria
Print the QC Analysis, QC Summary, and Levey-Jennings reports
View detailed QC data

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
View the Levey-Jennings graphs for a selected assay control level
Figure 5.96: QC summary review screen
For descriptions of these fields, see QC summary review screen field


CONTROL NAME/LOT Alphanumerically in ascending order.
Level Alphanumerically in ascending order.
N Numerically in descending order.
ACTUAL MEAN These columns do not sort.
ACTUAL SD
% CV
EXPECTED MEAN
EXPECTED SD

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table 5.14: QC summary review statistical data elements

N The number of control points for the
level/lot/assay/module used in the calculation.
ACTUAL MEAN The mean calculated for the level/lot/assay for a
processing module and specified date range.
ACTUAL SD The SD calculated for the level/lot/assay for a
processing module and specified date range.
% CV The percent coefficient of variation calculated for the
level/lot/assay for a processing module and specified
date range.
EXPECTED MEAN The expected mean configured for the control level.
EXPECTED SD The expected SD configured for the control level.
When a control result has a flag, the QC summary information

displays in red on this screen. Once a control result completes without
a flag, the information displays in black. See Descriptions of quality
control result flags, page 5-245.
To display this screen, see View QC data summary, page 5-326.
Find the summary for specific QC data, page 5-326
View QC data details, page 5-327
View an assay control level Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-328
Print the QC Analysis report, page 5-337
Print the QC Summary report, page 5-338
Procedures - QC summary review screen
Procedures you can perform from the QC summary review screen

include:
View QC data summary, page 5-326
View an assay control level Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-328

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
View QC data summary
Perform this procedure to display the QC summary review screen.

From this screen you can view a summary of control data.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view QC data summary:

1. Select the QC-Cal icon from the menu bar and then select QC
summary.
The QC summary review screen displays.
2. Select the desired Module option. (optional)

3. Enter a date range in the Date range: data entry box and then
select the update button to update the data. (optional)

current date.
Find the summary for specific QC data
Perform this procedure to search for specific QC data by entering your

Prerequisite View QC data summary, page 5-326
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To find the summary for specific QC data:

1. Select F3-Find on the QC summary review screen.
The Find options (QC summary review) window displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

orders with an error code starting with 123 display.

The QC summary review screen displays with the text "Search results:"
in the title bar.
NOTE: Select the refresh button to display all records. This button
always displays as an active button.
Find options (QC summary review) window, page 5-328
View QC data details
Perform this procedure to display the Details for QC summary

window. From this window you can view QC data details for a selected
assay control level.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view QC data details:

1. Select the desired assay control level(s) from the table on the QC
summary review screen, or select F2 - Select all.
The Details for QC summary window displays.
3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay control

level if you selected more than one. (optional)
4. Select Done to return to the QC summary review screen.
Details for QC summary window, page 5-329

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
View an assay control level Levey-Jennings graph
Perform this procedure to display the Levey-Jennings graph screen.

From this screen you can view the Levey-Jennings graph for a selected
assay control level.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view an assay control level Levey-Jennings graph:

1. Select the control level(s) for an assay from the table on the QC
summary review screen.
NOTE: The F7 - Graph button is not available if more than one

assay control lot is selected on the QC summary review screen.
2. Select F7 - Graph.
The Levey-Jennings graph screen displays.
3. Select F3 - QC summary to return to the QC summary review

screen. (optional)
To redefine the criteria for the Levey-Jennings graph, see Change a
Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-316.
Windows - QC summary review screen
Windows you can access from the QC summary review screen include:
Find options (QC summary review) window, page 5-328
Details for QC summary window, page 5-329
Find options (QC summary review) window
From the Find options (QC summary review) window you can search
for specific control data by entering your search criteria in one or more
fields.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.97: Find options (QC summary review) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (QC summary review)
Details for QC summary window
From the Details for QC summary window you can view QC data
details for the selected control level, which includes:
Expected and Manufacturer mean and SD
Actual (processing module specific) and System (all processing
modules in an i System) data for a date range
Module cumulative (processing module specific) and System
cumulative (all processing modules in an i System) data

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.98: Details for QC summary window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for QC summary window field
QC reports screen
From the QC reports screen you can specify the information to
include in the QC Analysis, QC Summary, and Levey-Jennings reports,
and print the reports. This information includes:
Module
Assay
Date range

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 5.99: QC reports screen
For descriptions of these fields, see QC reports screen field descriptions,

page Appendix E-94.
To display this screen, see Access the QC reports screen, page 5-331.
Access the QC reports screen
Perform this procedure to display the QC reports screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the QC reports screen:

Select QC - Cal from the menu bar, and then select QC reports.
The QC reports screen displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To print the Levey-Jennings report, see Print the Levey-Jennings report,

page 5-337.
To print the QC Analysis report, see Print the QC Analysis report,
page 5-337.
To print the QC Summary report, see Print the QC Summary report,
page 5-338.
Levey - Jennings Report, page Appendix A-44
QC Analysis Report, page Appendix A-61
QC Summary Report, page Appendix A-69

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5 Report printing
Report printing
You can print screen images and reports generated by the ARCHITECT
System. Your system may be configured to print some reports
automatically. For example, the Procedure, Cal Curve Details, Sample,
and Results List reports print upon completion of the related activity.
Report printing procedures and topic include:
Print the Order List report, page 5-336
Print a Maintenance History report for a specified month, page 5-339
Print a Maintenance History report for a specific procedure,
page 5-340
Print a Procedure report, page 5-341
Print the Message History Log report, page 5-342
View a print job in the print queue, page 5-344
Delete a print job, page 5-345
Print a screen image, page 5-345
Windows - Report printing, page 5-346
Print a report
Perform this procedure to print a report. Reports are available from
related screens. For example, you can print the Patient report from
both the Results review and Stored results screens. You can print the
Order List report from the Order status screen. Report availability is
listed in the following table.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Report printing Section 5
NOTE: Your system may be configured to print some reports

automatically. For more information see Configure report settings,
page 2-7.
To print the... Access the...

Absorbance Data Report (c System), Results review screen
page Appendix A-3 Stored results screen
QC result review screen
Stored QC results screen
Exception status screen
Assay Parameter Report (c System), Configuration screen
page Appendix A-6
Assay Parameter Report (i System),
page Appendix A-15
Cal Curve Details Report - Calibration status screen
Potentiometric (c System), Calibration history screen
page Appendix A-19
Cal Curve Details Report - Linear
(c System), page Appendix A-22
Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal
Factor/Blank (c System),
page Appendix A-25
Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust
(i System), page Appendix A-28
Cal Curve Details Report - Full
Cal Curve Details Report - Index
Cal Curve Summary Report, Calibration status screen
page Appendix A-37 Calibration history screen
Exception Details Report, Exception status screen
page Appendix A-39
Exception Status Report,
page Appendix A-42
Levey - Jennings Report, Levey-Jennings graph screen
page Appendix A-44 QC reports screen
QC summary review screen
Maintenance History Report, Maintenance log screen
page Appendix A-47
Message History Log Report, System logs screen
page Appendix A-49

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To print the... Access the...

Order List Report, page Appendix A-51 Order status screen
Order Status Report, page Appendix
A-53
Patient Report, page Appendix A-55 Results review screen
Procedure Report, Basic, Maintenance screen
page Appendix A-57 Diagnostics screen
Procedure Report, Columnar,
page Appendix A-59
QC Analysis Report, page Appendix QC reports screen
A-61 QC summary review screen
QC Summary Report, page Appendix
A-69
QC Result Details Report, QC result review screen
page Appendix A-64 Stored QC results screen
QC Results List Report, page Appendix
A-67
Reagent Load Error Report, Reagent status screen
page Appendix A-71
Rerun List Report, page Appendix A-75 Rerun status screen
Result Details Report, page Appendix Results review screen
A-77 Stored results screen
Results List Report, page Appendix
A-80
Sample Report, page Appendix A-82 Results review screen
Sample Status Report, page Appendix Sample status screen
A-84
Temporary Message Log Report, System logs screen
page Appendix A-86
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To print a report:
1. Select the item(s) to include in the report. (optional)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: Items print in the order you select them with the
exception of the Sample report. Sample reports are printed in
order of SID. If you do not select a specific item(s), all items
print.
2. Select F4 - Print.
The Print options window displays.
3. Select the desired Print selection option.
4. Select the desired report from the Reports available list.
5. Enter the number of copies in the Number of copies data entry

box.
6. Select Done to print the report.
Printed report examples, page Appendix A-1
Print the Order List report

Perform this procedure to print an Order List report to assist you in
placing a sufficient amount of sample in the assigned position.
Prerequisite Access the Order status screen, page 5-152
Module status Any, however, if the processing module is not in
Running status the volume printed on the Order List
report is for one calibration/control per module and does
not account for multiple reagent lots and kits on a
module.
Supplies NA
To print an Order List report:

1. Select F4 - Print on the Order status screen.
2. Select the Order List report option.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Print the Levey-Jennings report

Perform this procedure to print a Levey-Jennings report for a selected
control.
Prerequisite Access the QC reports screen, page 5-331
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To print a Levey-Jennings report for a selected control:

1. Select the desired Module option or for a multi-module i System
the desired check box(es) on the QC reports screen.
2. Enter the starting and ending dates in the Date from and to data
entry boxes.
3. Select the desired control(s) from the Controls list.

box.
Print the QC Analysis report

Perform this procedure to print a QC Analysis report for a selected
control.
Module status Any

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Supplies NA
To print a QC Analysis report for a selected control:

entry boxes.

box.
Print the QC Summary report

Perform this procedure to print a QC Summary report for a selected
control.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To print a QC Summary report for a selected control:


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
entry boxes. (optional)

box.
Print a Maintenance History report for a specified month

Perform this procedure to print a Maintenance History report that
includes the maintenance procedures (scheduled and/or performed)
for a specified month.
To print a report for all procedures, see Print a Maintenance History
report for a specific procedure, page 5-340.
Prerequisite Access the Maintenance log screen, page 9-16
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To print a Maintenance History report for a specified month:

1. Select the desired Module option on the Maintenance log
screen.
2. Use the previous/next buttons to display the desired month.

(optional)
4. Ensure the All items option is selected.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
5. Select Done to print the Maintenance History report for the

selected month.
NOTE: For procedures that were scheduled but not performed,

00.00.00 prints in the time column.
Maintenance log screen, page 9-14
Maintenance History Report, page Appendix A-47
Print a Maintenance History report for a specific procedure

Perform this procedure to print a Maintenance History report for a
specific procedure for a specific month (scheduled and/or performed)
stored on the system. The system stores procedures for the last three
months.
To print a report for a selected month, see Print a Maintenance History
report for a specified month, page 5-339.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To print a Maintenance History report for all procedures:

1. Select the desired Module option on the Maintenance log
screen.
2. Select the desired procedure.
4. Select the Selected items option.
5. Select Done to print the Maintenance History report.
NOTE: For procedures that were scheduled but not performed,

00:00:00 prints in the time column.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Print a Procedure report

Perform this procedure to:
Print a Procedure report if your system is not configured to
automatically print one after a maintenance procedure is
performed
Print a Procedure report after a diagnostic procedure is
performed
Reprint a Procedure report
For information on enabling automatic report printing, see Change the
automatic report printing settings, page 2-22.
Prerequisite Access the Maintenance screen, page 9-4, or Access
the Diagnostics screen, page 10-651
Module status Stopped, Warming, Ready, or Maintenance
Supplies NA
To print a Procedure report:

2. Select the desired tab to display the maintenance or diagnostic

procedures for that category.
3. Select a procedure from the MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES or

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES list. (optional)
NOTE: If you do not select a specific procedure, all available

reports print for all performed procedures in the selected
category.
To print a Procedure report for a procedure currently in process,
you must return to the Maintenance perform window. See Return
to a maintenance procedure in process, page 9-9.
The Print Options window displays.

box.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Maintenance screen, page 9-3
Print the Message History Log report

Perform this procedure to print the Message History Log report.
Prerequisite Access the System logs screen, page 10-12
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To print the Message History Log report:

1. Select the Log selection list button on the System logs screen,
and then select Message history log.
2. Select the item(s) to include in the report. (optional)
NOTE: Items print in the order you select them. If you do not
select a specific item(s), all items print.

box.
System logs screen, page 10-11
Print an Assay Parameter report for specified assays

Perform this procedure to print an Assay Parameter report for selected
assays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To print an Assay Parameter report for all assays, see Print an Assay
Parameter report for all assays, page 5-343.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To print an Assay Parameter report for specified assays:

1. Select the assay(s) to include in the report from the Assays list on
NOTE: The Assay Parameter report prints in the order you select
the assays.

box.
page 2-65
Assay Parameter Report (c System), page Appendix A-6
Assay Parameter Report (i System), page Appendix A-15
Print an Assay Parameter report for all assays

Perform this procedure to print an Assay Parameter report for all
assays.
To print an Assay Parameter Report for selected assays, see Print an
Assay Parameter report for specified assays, page 5-342.
Module status Any
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To print an Assay Parameter report for all assays:

1. Select F2 - Print on the Configuration screen.

box.
page 2-65
View a print job in the print queue

Perform this procedure to view the status of a print request that is in
the print queue.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view a print job in the print queue:

1. Select the Printer button on the Snapshot screen.
The Printer window displays.
2. View the status of the desired print job in the Printer queue list.
3. Select Done to return to the Snapshot screen.
Printer window, page 5-347

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Delete a print job

Perform this procedure to delete a report that is printing or waiting to
be printed.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To delete a print job:

1. Select the Printer button on the Snapshot screen.
The Printer window displays.
2. Select the desired print job from the Printer queue list.
3. Select Delete to delete the print job.
NOTE: When deleting a print request with a status of printing,

wait until the printer starts printing the report before selecting
Delete.
4. Select Done to return to the Snapshot screen.
Print a screen image

Perform this procedure to print a screen image to preserve graphical or
troubleshooting information such as:
The Maintenance log
A Levey-Jennings graph
An alert and/or information message
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To print a screen image:

Access the desired screen image, and then simultaneously press the
ALT+Print Screen keys on the keyboard.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The screen image prints.
NOTE: General printing errors can occur when you attempt to print
multiple screen images. Do not attempt to print more than three
screen images at one time or to print a screen image while printing
reports.
Windows - Report printing

Windows you can access include:
Print options window
From the Print options window you can choose the report to print,
specify the data to include, and enter the number of copies.
Figure 5.100: Print options window
For descriptions of these fields, see Print options window field

Print a Maintenance History report for a specific procedure, page 5-340

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Print the Message History Log report, page 5-342

Printer window
From the Printer window you can check the printer status and delete a
print job.
Figure 5.101: Printer window
For descriptions of these fields, see Printer window field descriptions,

View a print job in the print queue, page 5-344
Delete a print job, page 5-345

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Calibration procedures
Section 6
Introduction
<F=0>
Prior to running patient and control samples you must calibrate your
assay(s).
Before attempting to calibrate the system you should be familiar with
the hardware components of your system and the fundamental
principles of the software user interface. See Use or function, page 1-1.
Calibration topics include:
Assay calibration, page 6-2
Provides descriptions of calibration methods and types and
descriptions of the Calibration order screen with instructions for
performing calibration order procedures.
Calibration review, page 6-15
Provides descriptions of the Calibration status and Calibration
history screens with instructions for viewing and archiving
calibration curves.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay calibration Section 6
Assay calibration
Calibration is analyzing samples of known concentrations, recording
the instrument response value(s), and plotting the measured value(s)
against the known concentration to create a curve for evaluating
unknown samples.
Assay calibration topics include:
Calibration guidelines, page 6-2
Calibration sampling rules, page 6-3
Calibration methods (photometric - c System), page 6-3
Calibration method (potentiometric - c System), page 6-4
Calibration methods (i System), page 6-4
Calibration types (c System), page 6-5
Calibration types (i System), page 6-8
Calibration curve storage, page 6-9
Calibration order screen, page 6-10
Calibration guidelines
After you install an assay(s) that requires a calibration, you must
generate an active calibration curve. You do not need to recalibrate
assays every time they are run; however, certain variables make
recalibration necessary.
For more information, see:
Mandatory assay calibration, page 6-2
Optional assay calibration, page 6-3
NOTE: It is recommended that you run all levels of appropriate
controls whenever you calibrate an assay.
Mandatory assay calibration
You must perform a calibration when:

A new reagent lot number is used
Documentation accompanying a new version of an existing
assay file states calibration is required
A new assay file that requires a calibration is installed
The calibration curve has expired (c System)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 6 Assay calibration
Optional assay calibration
You may need to perform a calibration when:

Assay control values are out of specification. For specific
information regarding quality control, see the reagent
Certain system maintenance/component replacement
procedures are performed.
Certain errors occur. To determine whether recalibration is
necessary when an error occurs, see assay-specific error codes.
Calibration sampling rules

When multiple reagent lots for an assay are loaded on the system and
the sampling process for a calibration order is ready to begin, the
system determines the lots to calibrate using the following rules.
For the ARCHITECT System:
If all reagent lots for the assay do not currently have a calibration
status of Active, the system calibrates all reagent lots loaded on
the system.
If all reagent lots for the assay currently have a calibration status
of Active, the system recalibrates all reagent lots loaded on the
system.
If some reagent lots for the assay have a calibration status of
Active and some do not, the system calibrates only the reagent
lots loaded on the system without an active calibration.
For the c 16000 the calibration status is specific to one line. If a reagent
with an Active calibration status is moved from one line (A or B line)
to the other and then scanned, the calibration status for the reagent in
its current location is No Cal. To avoid recalibration:
do not move reagents from one line to another
do not load on a different line when replacing reagents
Calibration methods (photometric - c System)

The c System calibration methods are methods used to measure
absorbance values and to plot a calibration curve or cutoff value. One
of six different mathematical methods is used to calculate results:
Absorbance method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-2

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Factor method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-2

Linear method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-3
Logit-4 method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-5
Spline method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-6
Use factor and blank method (photometric - c System),
page Appendix C-7
c System calibration methods are assay-specific and are defined in the
assay parameter file. You define the calibration method for
non-Abbott assays on the Configure assay parameters window -
Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System), page 2-143.
Calibration method (potentiometric - c System)

A potentiometric calibration method is the method used for
calculating ICT assays (electrolytes). Either serum or urine calibrators
are used. Serum calibrators are a protein-based material with known
concentrations of sodium (Na+), potassium (K+), and chloride (Cl-).
Urine calibrators are aqueous-based and span a greater range of
concentration.
There are three components to the potentiometric method:
Electromotive force measurement (potentiometric - c System),
page Appendix C-9
Slope calculation (potentiometric - c System), page Appendix C-10
Sample measurement (potentiometric - c System), page Appendix
C-11
The mV (millivolts) measured by each electrode in the ICT module are
plotted against the known concentration of electrolyte in the
calibrator. The slope of the calibration is expressed as a percentage of
the ideal slope. Electrolyte determinations are made at 37C; therefore,
the ideal slope of the electrode is 100% (62mV/decade).
NOTE: The potentiometric calibration method is assay-specific and is

defined in the assay parameter file.
Calibration methods (i System)

Calibration methods are data reduction methods used by ARCHITECT
i Systems to measure RLU (relative light unit) values and to plot a
calibration curve or cutoff value. One of four different mathematical
methods is used to calculate results:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Point to point method (i System), page Appendix C-13

Linear regression method (i System), page Appendix C-13
4PLC methods (i System), page Appendix C-15
Cutoff assay method (i System), page Appendix C-17
i System calibration methods are assay-specific and are defined in the
assay parameter file. You can view the method on the Details for assay
parameters window - Calibration view (i System), page 2-142.
For more information on the mathematical methods, See i System data
reduction methods, page Appendix C-13.
Calibration types (c System)

Calibration types pertain to photometric assays only and indicate
whether a calibration curve is created or adjusted.
Two calibration types are available:
Full calibration, page 6-5
Adjustment calibration, page 6-5
NOTE: See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation
(such as a package insert or reagent application sheet) for information
on required calibration types.
Full calibration
A full calibration is the measurement of a reagent blank and all data

points specified for an assay plotted against known concentrations to
create a curve for evaluating unknown samples. The system software
analyzes the data points on the Calibration - calibrators view of the
Configure assay parameters window to generate the new calibration
curve.
NOTE: A full calibration is required to update the full calibration

interval.
Adjustment calibration
An adjustment calibration is a new measurement of a blank and/or

specific point(s) of a full calibration curve. For the 1-point and 2-point
adjustment options the system software calculates a ratio comparing
the new measurements to previously measured absorbances, adjusts all
other calibrators using the calculated ratio, and then generates a new
calibration curve.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The following adjustment options are available on the Configure assay

parameters window:
None
Blank adjustment, page 6-6
1-point adjustment, page 6-6
2-point adjustment, page 6-7
NOTE: You can perform either a full calibration or the designated
adjustment calibration to update the adjustment calibration interval.
Blank adjustment
In a blank adjustment, the system reanalyzes the reagent blank only.

The following table shows the process for adjusting the calibration
curve with the new reagent blank data.
Step Description
1 The system performs the new measurement for the reagent
blank.
2 The value of the reagent blank absorbance obtained in the
new measurement replaces the value obtained in the
previous measurement.
3 The curve adjusts up or down, based on the change in the
reagent blank.
1-point adjustment
In a 1-point adjustment the system reanalyzes a single calibrator. The

calibrator used is defined on the Configure assay parameters window -
Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System), page 2-143. The

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
following table shows the procedure for adjusting the calibration

curve with the new calibrator data.
Step Description
1 The system performs the new measurement for the
calibrator.
2 A ratio calculates comparing the new and previous
absorbance data.
3 All other calibrators (except the reagent blank) adjust using

the calculated ratio.
4 A new calibration curve generates using the data points
after adjustment.
2-point adjustment
In a 2-point adjustment the system reanalyzes both the reagent blank

and a single calibrator. The calibrator used is defined on the Configure
assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c
System), page 2-143. The following table shows the procedure for
adjusting the calibration curve with the new calibrator data.
Step Description
1 The system performs the new measurement for the reagent
blank and the calibrator.
2 The value of the reagent blank absorbance obtained in the
new measurement replaces the value obtained in the
previous measurement.
3 The curve adjusts up or down based on the change in the
reagent blank.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Step Description
4 A ratio calculates comparing the new and previous
absorbance data.
5 All other calibrators (except the reagent blank) adjust using

the calculated ratio.
6 A new calibration curve generates using the data points
after adjustment.
Calibration types (i System)

The calibration type indicates whether a new calibration curve is
created, a master reference curve is adjusted, or a cutoff value is
created for i System assays on a processing module. The type is defined
in the assay parameter file and is assay-specific.
The calibration types are as follows:
Adjust calibration, page 6-8
Full calibration, page 6-9
Index calibration, page 6-9
NOTE: Calibration type is assay-specific. For a detailed description of
the assay calibrator(s) and calibration type for each assay, see the
ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert.
Adjust calibration
A calibration adjustment is a new measurement of 2 points of a master

reference curve specified for an assay. This 2-point calibration
generates a processing module-specific calibration curve for
quantitative assays by adjusting the master calibration data.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
A 2-point calibration adjustment assay has master calibration data

encoded within the 2D bar code on the microparticle bottle label.
After you load a reagent kit on a processing module, the system
performs a scan and stores master calibration data in the system
software. The data stored is specific for the assay but must be adjusted
to fit the specific processing module. Therefore, the operator must run
two calibrators.
Full calibration
A full calibration is the measurement of 6 points specified for a

quantitative assay plotted against known concentrations to generate a
processing module-specific calibration curve for evaluating unknown
samples.
Index calibration
An index calibration is the measurement of 1 point or 2 points

specified for a qualitative assay and generates a processing
module-specific index (cutoff).
The system software uses the index value to generate all cutoff values
defined for an index or screening assay.
Calibration curve storage

The ARCHITECT System stores active, inactive, and failed calibration
curves.
For more information on curve storage, see:
Active calibration curve storage, page 6-9
Inactive calibration curve storage, page 6-10
Failed calibration curve storage, page 6-10
For more information on calibration curve statuses, see Descriptions of
calibration statuses, page 6-17.
Active calibration curve storage
The system stores active curves as follows:

Stores the processing module-specific calibration as the active
curve for that reagent lot
Replaces the previous calibration curve, which becomes inactive

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Automatically defaults to the active curve for the onboard

reagent lot
Stores one active curve for up to four different reagent lots for
each assay on a processing module
Replaces the oldest active curve if a fifth reagent lot calibrates
successfully
NOTE: You may manually fail an active calibration curve by
selecting the Fail Curve button on the Calibration curve window.
Inactive calibration curve storage
The system stores the previous curve as inactive when a new

calibration curve is generated for the reagent lot. Inactive curves are
stored for up to 3 months.
Failed calibration curve storage
The system stores a failed calibration curve until an active curve or

another failed curve is generated for the reagent lot.
For details on how to resolve errors for failed curves, see assay-specific
error codes.
Calibration order screen

From the Calibration order screen you can order assay calibrations and
access a window to specify calibration options.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 6.1: Calibration order screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration order screen field

To display this screen, see Access the Calibration order screen, page 6-11.
Create a calibration order, page 6-12
Access the Calibration order screen
Perform this procedure to display the Calibration order screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Calibration order screen:

Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Calibration order.
The Calibration order screen displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Procedure - Calibration order screen
The procedure you can perform from the Calibration order screen is:
Create a calibration order
Perform this procedure to order a calibration when one or more assays

require a new calibration.
Prerequisite Enter a calibrator concentration (c System), page 2-77
Access the Calibration order screen, page 6-11
Module status Any
Supplies Consecutively numbered carriers
To create a calibration order:

1. Select the carrier or carousel button on the Calibration order
screen, if displayed.
NOTE: When you select multiple assays, the software

automatically assigns the calibrators in sequential carriers and/or
positions:
If you select carrier, the system does not increment to more
than five sequential carriers.
If you select carousel, the system does not increment beyond
the last position in the sample carousel.
2. Enter a carrier ID or carousel ID (LAS carousel sample handler) in

the C data entry box, if displayed.
3. Enter a position in the P data entry box, if displayed.
5. Select F5 - Assay options to specify calibration options.

(optional)
The Assay options (Calibration order) window displays.
a. Enter a calibrator lot number in the Lot data entry box, and
then enter a date in the Expiration date data entry box.
(optional)
NOTE: The data entry box(es) display the last calibrator lot
number and expiration date entered.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
This information displays on the Calibration curve window and

in the Cal Curve Details report.
b. Select the Calibration type list button, if displayed, and then

select the calibration type (c System). (optional)
c. Select the Manual option, and then select the desired

Module selection check box (multi-module i System).
(optional)
d. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you

selected more than one, and then repeat Steps 5a - 5c for
each. (optional)
e. Select Done to save your changes and/or return to the

Calibration order screen.
6. Select F2 - Add order to add the calibration order.

Orders can be viewed from the Order status screen.
To load samples, see Loading samples (RSH), page 5-176, Loading
samples (sample carousel - c System), page 5-188, Loading samples (SSH),
page 5-191, or Loading samples (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000),
page 5-203.
Assay options (Calibration order) window, page 6-13
Window - Calibration order screen
The window you can access from the Calibration order screen is the
Assay options (Calibration order) window, page 6-13.
Assay options (Calibration order) window
From the Assay options (Calibration order) window you can:

Enter a calibrator lot number and expiration date. This
information displays on the Calibration curve window and in
the Cal Curve Details report.
Change the type of calibration to run (c System).
Specify the processing module to use (multi-module i System).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 6.2: Assay options (Calibration order) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Assay options (Calibration order)


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 6 Calibration review
Calibration review
The assay calibration run must pass calibration verification before the
system stores the calibration. The status of each calibration displays on
the Calibration status and/or Calibration history screens.
Calibration review topics include:
Calibration verification, page 6-15
Calibration status screen, page 6-15
Calibration history screen, page 6-25
Calibration verification
After you process calibrators, the system verifies the results by
comparing them to the assay-specific calibration parameter
specifications. If the results of a calibration fall within the specified
range for that assay, the new calibration curve replaces any previous
calibration curve and the previous calibration curve status changes to
inactive. If the results of a calibration do not fall within the specified
range, then the new calibration curve is assigned a status of failed; if
there is an existing calibration curve for that assay, it is not replaced.
The assigned status of a calibration displays on the Calibration status
and/or Calibration history screens and includes:
Active - the values fall within the specifications. The system
software calculates patient and control test results from this
curve.
Failed - the values fall outside of the specifications. If an active
curve exists for a reagent lot, the system software calculates
patient and control test results from the existing active curve.
Inactive - this is an older, previously active curve that has been
superseded by a more recent calibration. An inactive curve status
displays only on the Calibration history screen.
Calibration status screen

From the Calibration status screen you can view a summary list of the
calibration statuses for each assay and reagent lot currently loaded on
the system.
Find information for specific calibrations based on specified
search criteria

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Calibration review Section 6
View detailed calibration curve information

Fail a calibration curve
Override an expired calibration curve (c System)
Print the Cal Curve Summary and Cal Curve Details reports
To view information about previously performed calibrations, see
Calibration history screen, page 6-25.
Figure 6.3: Calibration status screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration status screen field


ASSAY and REAGENT LOT Alphanumerically in ascending order.
CAL DATE / TIME and EXP DATE / Chronologically in descending order.
TIME
CAL STATUS See Descriptions of calibration
statuses, page 6-17.
To display this screen, see Access the Calibration status screen, page 6-17.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
View assay calibration status, page 6-29
Find a specific calibration, page 6-30
View calibration curve information, page 6-31
Fail a calibration curve, page 6-32
Access the Calibration status screen
Perform this procedure to display the Calibration status screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Calibration status screen:
selecting the Calibration status button on the c 8000 processing
module graphic.
Select QC-Cal from the menu bar, and then select Calibration status.
The Calibration status screen displays.
Descriptions of calibration statuses
You can use calibration status information to determine the status of

each calibration curve. The system displays one of the following

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
calibration statuses for each calibration curve. The table below

displays the calibration statuses in the order in which they sort.
Table 6.1: Calibration statuses
Status Description
Failed One of the following occurred:
The calibration failed curve validity checks.
The calibration did not complete successfully due to a
hardware error.
The user manually failed the calibration.
Expired (c System The full or adjustment interval has been exceeded.
only)
No Cal One of the following occurred:
The reagent lot was never calibrated.
A parameter in a c System assay file was edited, which
caused the system to delete the calibration curve.
For the c 16000 the calibration status is specific to one
line. This status occurs if a reagent with an Active
calibration status is moved from one line (A or B) to the
other and scanned.
Overridden (c The operator has overridden an expired calibration.
System only)
In Process The calibration is currently in process.
Active The calibration completed successfully and, for c System
assays, the calibration is not expired.
Inactive A previously active curve which was replaced by a new
active curve. Inactive calibration curves display only on the
Calibration history screen.
Windows - Calibration status screen
Windows and views of windows that you can access from the
Calibration status screen include:
Find options (Calibration status) window, page 6-19
Calibration curve window - factor, linear, and non-linear assay views
Calibration curve window - use cal factor/blank assay view (c System),
page 6-20
Calibration curve window - potentiometric assay view (c System),
page 6-21
Calibration curve window - adjust assay view (i System), page 6-22
Calibration curve window - index assay view (i System), page 6-23

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Calibration curve window - full assay view (i System), page 6-24
Find options (Calibration status) window
From the Find options (Calibration status) window you can search for
specific calibration records.
Figure 6.4: Find options (Calibration status) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Calibration status and
Calibration history) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-77.
Calibration curve window - factor, linear, and non-linear assay

views (c System)
From the factor, linear, and non-linear assay views of the Calibration
curve window you can view information such as:
Calibrator name and concentration
Calibrator lot number and expiration date, if entered
Calibrator absorbance for all replicates and the calibration
factor(s)
Corrected mean absorbance value
Calibration curve graph (linear and non-linear views only)
You can also manually fail a curve(s) or override the curve expiration
date.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 6.5: Calibration curve window - Linear assay view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration curve window - Linear

assay view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-78.
Calibration curve window - use cal factor/blank assay view (c

System)
From the use cal factor/blank assay view of the Calibration curve
window you can view information from the reference assay such as:
Reference assay name
Calibrator absorbance for all replicates and the calibration
factor(s)
Corrected mean absorbance value

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 6.6: Calibration curve window - Use cal factor / blank view (c
System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration curve window - Use cal
factor / blank assay view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix
E-79.
Calibration curve window - potentiometric assay view (c

System)
From the potentiometric assay view of the Calibration curve window

you can view information such as:
Calibrator mV (millivolt) response for all replicates and the
calibration slope
Calibration curve graph
You can also manually fail a curve(s) or override the curve expiration
date.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 6.7: Calibration curve window - Potentiometric assay view (c

System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration curve window -

Potentiometric assay view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix
E-80.
Calibration curve window - adjust assay view (i System)
From the adjust assay view of the Calibration curve window you can
view information such as:
Calibrator name
Calibrator RLU (relative light units) response for all replicates,
mean RLU, and the calibration adjustment ratio(s)
Reference calibrator concentration, RLU response, and the fit
curve RLU response for each calibrator
You can also manually fail a curve(s).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 6.8: Calibration curve window - Adjust assay view (i System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration curve window - Adjust

assay view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-81.
Calibration curve window - index assay view (i System)
From the index assay view of the Calibration curve window you can
Calibrator name
mean RLU, and cutoff value

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 6.9: Calibration curve window - Index assay view (i System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration curve window - Index

assay view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-83.
Calibration curve window - full assay view (i System)
From the full assay view of the Calibration curve window you can
mean RLU, and the fit curve RLU response for each calibrator

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 6.10: Calibration curve window - Full assay view (i System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration curve window - Full assay
view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-84.
Calibration history screen

From the Calibration history screen you can view a summary list of
the calibration statuses for current and previously performed
calibrations.
Find information for specific calibrations based on specified
search criteria
View detailed calibration curve information
Override an expired calibration curve (c System)
Print the Cal Curve Summary and Cal Curve Details reports
Archive calibration curve information

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 6.11: Calibration history screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration history screen field


ASSAY and REAGENT LOT Alphanumerically in ascending order.
CAL DATE / TIME and EXP DATE / Chronologically in descending order.
TIME
CAL STATUS See Descriptions of calibration
To display this screen, see Access the Calibration history screen,

page 6-27.
View assay calibration history, page 6-30

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Archive calibration curves, page 6-33
Access the Calibration history screen
Perform this procedure to display the Calibration history screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Calibration history screen:

Select QC-Cal from the menu bar, and then select Calibration
history.
The Calibration history screen displays.
Windows - Calibration history screen
Windows and views of windows that you can access from the
Calibration history screen include:
Find options (Calibration history) window, page 6-27
page 6-20
page 6-21
Archive calibration curves window, page 6-28
Find options (Calibration history) window
From the Find options (Calibration history) window you can search
for specific calibration records.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 6.12: Find options (Calibration history) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Calibration status and
Calibration history) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-77.
Archive calibration curves window
From the Archive calibration curves window you can archive

calibration curves to a CD.
Figure 6.13: Archive calibration curves window
For descriptions of these fields, see Archive calibration curves window


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Procedures - Calibration review

Procedures you can perform from the Calibration status and/or
Calibration history screen and its related windows include:
View assay calibration status, page 6-29
View assay calibration history, page 6-30
View assay calibration status
Perform this procedure to display the Calibration status screen. From

this screen you can view a summary list of the calibration statuses for
each assay and reagent lot currently loaded on the system.
To find specific calibrations, see Find a specific calibration, page 6-30.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view assay calibration status:
selecting the CAL STATUS button on the c 8000 processing module
graphic.
Select QC-Cal from the menu bar, and then select Calibration status.
The Calibration status screen displays.
Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
View assay calibration history
Perform this procedure to display the Calibration history screen. From

this screen you can view a summary list of the calibration statuses for
current and previously performed calibrations.
To find specific calibrations, see Find a specific calibration, page 6-30.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view assay calibration history:

Select QC-Cal from the menu bar, and then select Calibration
history.
The Calibration history screen displays.
Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17
Find a specific calibration
Perform this procedure to search for a specific calibration by entering

your search criteria in one or more fields.
Prerequisite Access the Calibration status screen, page 6-17
Access the Calibration history screen, page 6-27
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To find a specific calibration:

1. Select F3 - Find on the Calibration status or Calibration history
screen.
The Find options (Calibration status or Calibration history)
window displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: A wildcard search allows you to type a partial entry

Example: If you enter 123* in the Reagent lot data entry box, all
the reagent lots starting with 123 display. This list could include
12345M100, 12346M100, or 12347M100.

The Calibration status or Calibration history screen displays with
the text "Search results:" in the title bar.
NOTE: Select the refresh button to display all records.
Find options (Calibration status) window, page 6-19
Find options (Calibration history) window, page 6-27
View calibration curve information
Perform this procedure to display the Calibration curve window. From

this window you can view detailed information for a calibration
curve(s) such as:
Calibrator name, concentration, lot number, and expiration date
Calibrator curve data
Calibration curve graph (c System - assay dependent)
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view calibration curve information:

1. Select the desired calibration(s) from the table on the Calibration
status or Calibration history screen, or select F2- Select all.
The Calibration curve window displays. The view is dependent
on the calibration(s) you selected.
3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each calibration if you


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
4. Select Done to return to the Calibration status or Calibration

history screen.
page 6-20
page 6-21
Perform this procedure to fail an active calibration curve so that

subsequent control or patient orders are not calculated from the curve.
Supplies NA
To fail a calibration curve:

1. Select the desired calibration(s) from the table on the Calibration
status or Calibration history screen.
The Calibration curve window displays.
3. Select Fail Curve.

4. Select OK to fail the calibration curve.
5. Use the previous/next buttons to display each calibration if you

(optional)
6. Select Done to return to the Calibration status or Calibration

history screen.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
page 6-20
page 6-21
Archive calibration curves
Perform this procedure to store calibration curves on a CD to create a

backup for long-term storage.
NOTE: The calibration curves are archived in a delimited ASCII format

so you can import them into a spreadsheet. You cannot use the
ARCHITECT System to retrieve the information.
Prerequisite Access the Calibration history screen, page 6-27
Unformatted CD-RW (compact disk
Recordable/ReWritable)
To archive calibration curves:


3. Select the desired calibration curves from the table on the

Calibration history screen, or select F2 - Select all.
calibration curves. See Find a specific calibration, page 6-30.
4. Select F8 - Archive.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The Archive calibration curves window displays.
6. Deselect Delete inactive curves after archive check box.

(optional)
NOTE: If you choose to delete calibration curves, curves with a

status of Active are not deleted.
7. Select Done to archive the calibration curves.

complete.
Do not navigate to a different screen or window until the "0519
Data Archive Complete" message displays.
Archive calibration curves window, page 6-28

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Operational precautions and limitations
Section 7
Introduction
<F=0>
Operational requirements, precautions, and limitations are provided

to ensure operator safety and accurate assay results. Not following
these requirements or taking these precautions can impact system and
assay performance and may cause damage to the system or adversely
affect assay results.
Operational precautions and limitations topics include:
General requirements, page 7-2
Lists the requirements for system environment, maintenance,
and troubleshooting to ensure proper system performance.
Precautions and requirements for system operation, page 7-3
Lists the precautions you should take and the requirements you
should follow before and during system operation.
Requirements for handling consumables, page 7-5
Lists the requirements for storing and using consumables such as
reagents, calibrators, controls, bulk solutions, and onboard
solutions.
Requirements for handling specimens, page 7-8
Lists the requirements for collecting, preparing, and storing
specimens.
Limitations of result interpretation, page 7-10
Discusses the other factors you should consider when
interpreting patient test results.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
General requirements Section 7
General requirements
You MUST follow these general ARCHITECT System requirements to
help ensure proper system performance:
Contact your Abbott representative to install your ARCHITECT
System.
Ensure the system is out of direct sunlight, heat and drafts, and
away from any heat generating device. Exposure to heat and
drafts can interfere with the ability of the system to maintain an
operating temperature that is within the acceptable range.
Maintain the required space on all sides of the system. For more
information about space requirements, see System clearances,
page 4-15. This space buffer is essential for:
Adequate cooling of electrical components
Accurate temperature control of the processing center
Easy access for maintenance
Easy access for disconnecting the power cord when required
Leave the system power on continuously unless instructed
otherwise in a maintenance or troubleshooting procedure, or
unless an emergency situation occurs.
Perform maintenance procedures as recommended in Section 9,
Service and maintenance.
Do not attempt any maintenance or repairs that are not specified
in documentation provided by Abbott Laboratories.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 7 Precautions and requirements for system operation
Precautions and requirements for system

operation
You MUST take these precautions and follow these requirements when
operating the ARCHITECT System. Failure to do so may cause damage
to the system and may adversely affect test results.
Precautions before operation
Before you begin operating the system, you should:

Read this manual thoroughly to understand full functionality of
the system and associated hazards.
Read the sections of the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific
sheet) that are associated with:
Warnings and precautions
Safety precautions
Handling precautions
Requirements before operation
Before you begin operating the system, you should:

Verify that supplies are loaded.
Load c System reagents into the appropriate section of the
Load i System reagents, with septums installed, in the
appropriate section of the reagent carousel.
IMPORTANT: You must use septums to prevent reagent
evaporation and to ensure reagent integrity. Reliability of assay
results cannot be guaranteed if you do not use septums as
instructed in this manual and the assay-specific package insert.
Once you have placed a septum on a reagent bottle, do not
invert the bottle. Inverting the bottle results in reagent leakage
and may compromise assay results. Do not remove septums once
they have been installed on reagent bottles.
Verify the c System ICT module is installed before running
potentiometric assays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Precautions and requirements for system operation Section 7
Precautions during operation
While operating the system, take the following precautions:

Keep all processing module and sample handler doors closed and
covers in place unless instructed otherwise in a maintenance or
troubleshooting procedure.
Do not disconnect any electrical connection while the power is
on.
Shutdown the system control center if the main power source is
interrupted. You have a maximum of ten minutes to perform the
shutdown before losing backup power from the UPS
(uninterruptible power supply). See Power off the SCC, page 5-4.
Respond to system notifications relating to waste levels during
processing. Dispose of all liquid waste according to local, state,
and federal regulations.
Stop the RSH (robotic sample handler) before losing power from
the UPS (uninterruptible power supply) if the main power source
to the processing module(s) is interrupted. Stop the RSH by
Press the stop key on the sample handler keypad.
Select the sample handler graphic on the Snapshot screen,
and then select F6 - Stop.
Discard all sample cups and/or tubes on the sample carrier if a
carrier is in the RSH carrier transport when you perform an
emergency shutdown. Samples and the surrounding area may be
contaminated by sample splashing as the RSH carrier transport
motor loses power. See Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier
transport and carrier positioner(s) (RSH), page 10-708, for proper
recovery information.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 7 Requirements for handling consumables
Requirements for handling consumables

You MUST follow these requirements when handling consumables to
help ensure your safety and accurate assay results. See the
or reagent application sheet), the specific product label, or the
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for detailed information. For a
description of the hazard symbols, see Hazard symbols, page 8-6.
Requirements for storage
Follow these requirements for storing cuvettes, reaction vessels,

sample cups, and reagent cartridges:
Keep all consumables clean and free of dust.
Store all consumables in their original containers so that you can
obtain information such as expiration dates and lot numbers if
necessary.
Follow these requirements for storing reagents, calibrators, controls,
bulk solutions, and onboard solutions:
Store reagents, calibrators, and controls according to directions
in the manufacturer's documentation (such as a package insert
Store bulk solutions and onboard solutions as instructed on their
labels or in the product's documentation (such as a package
Store i System reagents off the system in an UPRIGHT position
according to the directions in the assay-specific package insert.
Contact your Abbott Customer Support if you receive reagents,
calibrators, controls, bulk solutions, or onboard solutions that are in a
condition contrary to the product's documentation (such as a package
insert or reagent application sheet) or label recommendation, or that
are damaged.
Requirements for use
Follow these requirements for using reaction vessels, sample cups, and
reagent cartridges:
Do not reuse or substitute. Abbott Laboratories cannot accept
responsibility for system performance and assay results when
consumables are reused or have been manufactured by anyone
other than Abbott Laboratories.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Requirements for handling consumables Section 7
Use caution when handling to prevent contamination and

operator exposure.
Use within their specified dating periods.
Consider all used reaction vessels, sample cups, and reagent
cartridges as potentially infectious. Follow appropriate
procedures for handling.
Follow these requirements for using reagents, calibrators, controls,
bulk solutions, and onboard solutions:
Do not substitute. Abbott Laboratories manufactures substances
and components to rigidly controlled quality standards.
Substitution of materials may affect ARCHITECT System
performance, assay results, safety, and equipment life.
Avoid excessive mixing or shaking of liquids to minimize
formation of foam and bubbles.
Do not pipette by mouth.
Do not smoke, eat, drink, apply cosmetics, or handle contact
lenses in areas where specimens, reagents, calibrators, controls,
bulk solutions, or onboard solutions are handled.
Use caution when handling reagents, calibrators, controls, bulk
solutions, and onboard solutions to prevent contamination and
operator exposure.
Wear clean gloves to avoid contamination and operator
exposure when placing an uncapped reagent bottle or cartridge
on the processing module.
Wear clean gloves to avoid contamination and operator
exposure when placing a septum on an uncapped i System
reagent bottle or when handling a c System reagent cartridge.
Do not invert the i System reagent bottle once you have placed a
septum on it. Inverting the bottle results in reagent leakage and
may compromise assay results.
IMPORTANT: You must use septums to prevent reagent
evaporation and contamination and to ensure reagent integrity.
Reliability of assay results cannot be guaranteed if you do not use
septums as instructed in this manual and the assay-specific
package insert. Do not remove septums once they have been
installed on reagent bottles.
Verify that all necessary assay components are present in the kit
when loading new reagents.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 7 Requirements for handling consumables
Verify the lot number and expiration date of each reagent kit
component before you load the components in the reagent
supply centers.
Do not use reagents, calibrators, controls, bulk solutions, and
onboard solutions beyond their expiration dates.
Do not use reagents on board the system beyond the maximum
number of cumulative days as stated in the reagent
Verify that bulk solutions and onboard solutions are loaded in
the appropriate positions to ensure that results are not adversely
affected.
Do not mix reagents, calibrators, controls, or c System bulk and
onboard solutions within a lot or between lots.
Do not mix reagents, calibrators, controls, or Pre-Trigger
Solution and Trigger Solution within a lot or between lots.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Requirements for handling specimens Section 7
Requirements for handling specimens

See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a
package insert or reagent application sheet) for detailed, assay-specific
information about specimen collection, preparation, and storage.
Consider all clinical specimens, reagents, controls, and calibrators that
contain human-sourced materials as potentially infectious. Consider
all system surfaces or components that have come in contact with
human-sourced materials as potentially infectious. Refer to Biological
hazards, page 8-7 for additional information.
WARNING: Potential Biohazard. Identifies an activity or
area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious
material.
Requirements for collection
Follow these requirements for collecting specimens:

Follow all usual precautions for collecting blood by venipuncture
to avoid specimen hemolysis.
See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation
(such as a package insert or reagent application sheet) for the
appropriate specimen type for each assay.
NOTE: Only human specimens have been tested and approved
for analysis on the ARCHITECT System. Performance has not
been established using cadaver specimens or body fluids other
than those specified in the Abbott product assay-specific
sheet).
Verify the correct specimen type(s) is used. The ARCHITECT
System does not verify specimen type.
Requirements for preparation and storage
Follow these requirements for preparing and storing specimens:

Ensure that serum specimens collected in tubes containing a gel
separator have 8 mm of serum above the gel to avoid
contamination of the specimen during pipetting.
Inspect all samples for bubbles. Remove bubbles with a clean
applicator stick prior to analysis. Use a new applicator stick for
each sample to prevent cross contamination.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 7 Requirements for handling specimens
Verify serum and plasma specimens are free of fibrin, red blood
cells, or other particulate matter.
Ensure that complete clot formation in serum specimens has
taken place prior to centrifugation. Some specimens, especially
those from patients receiving anticoagulant or thrombolytic
therapy may exhibit increased clotting times. If the specimen is
centrifuged before a complete clot forms, the presence of fibrin
may cause erroneous results.
See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation
(such as a package insert or reagent application sheet) for sample
volume information.
Separate the serum or plasma from the clot, serum separator, or
red blood cells prior to freezing.
Mix and centrifuge patient samples after any freeze/thaw cycle
or to remove red blood cells or particulate matter. See the reagent
insert or reagent application sheet) for limitations and
interfering substances.
Avoid multiple freeze-thaw cycles. After you thaw a specimen,
you MUST mix it thoroughly by low speed vortexing or by
gently inverting it to ensure consistency in the results.
Remove closures from specimen tubes prior to loading them on
the sample handler.
Minimize evaporation effects after you load samples on the
system by processing them within the number of hours specified
in the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation
(such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). For
detailed information on evaporation effects, see Sample volume
requirements, page 5-172.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Limitations of result interpretation Section 7
Limitations of result interpretation

Assay results MUST be used with other clinical data, for example,
symptoms, other test results, patient history, clinical impressions,
information available from clinical evaluation, and other diagnostic
procedures. All data MUST be considered for patient care
management.
If assay results are inconsistent with clinical evidence, additional
testing is suggested to confirm the result.
The ARCHITECT System has been validated for its intended use.
However, errors can occur due to potential operator errors and
ARCHITECT System technology limitations.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Section 8
Introduction
Hazards
<F=0>
Attention to hazard and safety information minimizes the potential of

harm to personnel and damage to the laboratory environment.
Hazard and safety topics include:
Operator responsibility, page 8-3
Provides guidance on using the ARCHITECT System as designed.
Safety icons, page 8-4
Provides an illustration of each safety symbol and sample text
associated with the symbol.
Hazard symbols, page 8-6
Provides an illustration of each hazard symbol and a description
along with its standard abbreviation.
Biological hazards, page 8-7
Provides an overview of the biological hazards you may be
exposed to and the precautions you should take to minimize
exposure.
Chemical hazards, page 8-9
Provides an overview of the chemical hazards you may be
exposed to and the precautions you should take to minimize
exposure.
Spill clean-up, page 8-11
Provides guidelines for cleaning spills in accordance with
established biosafety practices.
Waste handling and disposal, page 8-12
Identifies the responsibilities for appropriate waste disposal.
Decontamination procedure requirements, page 8-13
Provides information on decontaminating an ARCHITECT
System and links to specific decontamination procedures.
Electrical hazards, page 8-15
Provides an overview of precautions you should take to avoid
personal injury or damage to the system from the electrical
components.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Section 8
Mechanical hazards, page 8-17

Provides an overview of the precautions you should take to
avoid personal injury or damage to the system from the
mechanical components.
Physical hazards, page 8-19
Provides an overview of the precautions you should take to
avoid physical injury when operating or moving the system.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Section 8 Operator responsibility
Operator responsibility
You are responsible for using the ARCHITECT System only as
designed. Operators must be trained before being allowed to operate
the system. Failure to follow safe use instructions could cause injury to
you, damage to the system, or adversely affect assay results. See
Operational precautions and limitations, page 7-1.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Safety icons Section 8
Safety icons
Safety icons are used in ARCHITECT System documentation and on
ARCHITECT Systems to identify potentially dangerous conditions. You
MUST recognize these icons and understand the type and degree of
potential hazard.
The following icons may be used with text or in lieu of text. If text
accompanies the icon, it describes the nature of the hazard and is
labeled with WARNING or CAUTION.
WARNING is defined as a physical, mechanical, or procedural
condition that could result in moderate to serious personal injury.
CAUTION is defined as a condition that could result in minor injury
or interfere with proper functioning of the system.
Table 8.1: Safety icons and descriptions
Icon Description
WARNING: Potential Biohazard
Identifies an activity or area where you
may be exposed to potentially
infectious material. For more
information, see Biological hazards,
page 8-7.
WARNING: Potential Biohazard
may be exposed to potentially
infectious material. For more
information, see Biological hazards,
page 8-7.
WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard
Indicates the possibility of electrical
shock if procedural or engineering
controls are not observed. For more
information, see Electrical hazards,
page 8-15.
CAUTION: Class 2 Laser radiation
when open. Avoid eye exposure to
light. Do not stare into the beam.
Warns against direct viewing of the
beam or reflections from the beam. For
more information, see Laser light,
page 8-19.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Section 8 Safety icons
Table 8.1: Safety icons and descriptions (continued)

Icon Description
WARNING: Hot Surface
may be exposed to hot surfaces. For
more information, see Hot objects,
page 8-21.
WARNING: Probe Stick Hazard
may be exposed to probes. For more
information, see Probes and sharps,
page 8-19.
Identifies an activity that may present a
safety-related hazard and advises you
to consult the associated caution or
warning instructions provided.
Examples include:
CAUTION: Lifting Hazard
Identifies an activity where you may be
required to lift or move a heavy object.
For more information, see Heavy
objects, page 8-21.
CAUTION: Moving Parts
may be exposed to moving parts. For
more information, see Mechanical
hazards, page 8-17.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard
may be exposed to hazardous
chemicals. For more information, see

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Hazard symbols Section 8
Hazard symbols
ARCHITECT System product labeling may include one or more of the
following hazard symbols. These symbols convey properties of the
chemical or chemical mixture, and notify you that you should take
precautions when working with the material. Always consult the
specific package insert or MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheet) for further
information.
Table 8.2: Hazard symbols and descriptions
Symbol Description with standard abbreviation
This symbol indicates that some component(s) of the
product has irritant (Xi) properties.

product has harmful (Xn) properties.

product has corrosive (C) properties.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Section 8 Biological hazards
Biological hazards
When performing the following activities you may be exposed to
potentially infectious materials:
Handling samples, reagents, calibrators, and controls
Cleaning spills
Handling and disposing of waste
Moving the system
Performing maintenance procedures
Performing cleaning or decontamination procedures
Performing component replacement procedures
The following information is presented to help you minimize the
impact of this exposure.
Precautions
You should consider all clinical samples, reagents, calibrators,

controls, and used RVs (reaction vessels) that contain human-sourced
material as potentially infectious. You should consider all system
surfaces or components that have come in contact with
human-sourced material as potentially infectious. No known test
method can offer complete assurance that products derived from
human-sourced material will not transmit infection. Therefore, all
products derived from human-sourced materials and system
components exposed to human-sourced materials should be
considered potentially infectious.
It is recommended that you handle all potentially infectious materials
in accordance with the OSHA Standard on Bloodborne Pathogens1. You
should use Biosafety Level 22 or appropriate biosafety practices3,4 for
materials that contain or are suspected of containing infectious
agents. Precautions include, but are not limited to the following:
Wear gloves, lab coats, and protective eye wear when handling
human-sourced material or contaminated system components.
Do not pipette by mouth.
Do not eat, drink, smoke, apply cosmetics, or handle contact
lenses when handling human-sourced material or contaminated
system components.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Biological hazards Section 8
Clean spills of potentially infectious materials and contaminated

system components with a detergent followed by an appropriate
disinfectant, such as 0.1% sodium hypochlorite or other suitable
disinfectant.
NOTE: For information on diluting sodium hypochlorite, see
Decontamination procedure requirements, page 8-13.
Decontaminate and dispose of all samples, reagents, and other
potentially contaminated materials in accordance with local,
state, and federal regulations.
If you are exposed to biohazardous or potentially infectious materials,
you should seek medical attention immediately and take steps to
cleanse the affected area:
Eyes - Rinse with water for 15 minutes.
Mouth - Rinse with water.
Skin - Wash the affected area with soap and water.
Puncture wound - Allow to bleed freely. Wash the affected area
with soap and water.
1. US Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health
Administration, 29 CFR Part 1910.1030, Occupational Exposure to
Bloodborne Pathogens.
2. US Department of Health and Human Services. Biosafety in
Microbiological and Biomedical Laboratories, Fourth Edition.
Washington, DC: US Government Printing Office, May 1999.
3. World Health Organization. Laboratory Biosafety Manual. Geneva:
World Health Organization, 2004.
4. Sewell DL, Bove KE, Callihan DR, et al. Protection of Laboratory
Workers from Occupationally Acquired Infections: Approved Guideline -
Third Edition. NCCLS Document M29-A3. Wayne, PA: Clinical and
Laboratory Standards Institute, 2005.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Section 8 Chemical hazards
Chemical hazards
You may be exposed to hazardous chemicals when handling reagents,
calibrators, controls, bulk solutions, or onboard solutions.
Your exposure to hazardous chemicals is minimized by following
instructions provided in the assay-specific documentation (such as a
package insert or reagent application sheet) and on product-specific
labels, and product-specific MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets).
Precautions
In general, observe the following precautions when handling

chemicals:
Consult MSDS for safe use instructions and precautions.
Avoid contact with skin and eyes. If contact with material is
anticipated, wear impervious gloves, protective eye wear, and
clothing.
Maintain good housekeeping. Do not eat, drink, or store food
and beverages in areas where chemicals are used.
Seek medical attention if irritation or signs of toxicity occur after
exposure.
Some products may contain sodium azide. Observe the following
precautions when using products that contain sodium azide:
Do not autoclave products containing sodium azide.
Flush drains thoroughly with water after disposing of solutions
containing sodium azide to prevent metal azides from forming
on lead or copper pipes in laboratory plumbing. These azides can
explode upon percussion, such as hammering.
To remove contamination from old drains suspected of azide
accumulation, the U.S. National Institute of Occupational Safety
and Health recommends the following procedure:
a. Siphon liquid from the trap using a rubber or plastic hose.
b. Fill the trap with 10% sodium hydroxide solution.
c. Allow the solution to stand in the trap for 16 hours.
d. Flush the trap thoroughly with water.

Hazard symbols that appear on ARCHITECT System product labeling
are accompanied by risk (R) and safety (S) numbers and represent risk
and safety phrases defined by European Community Directives. The

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Chemical hazards Section 8
risk and safety phrases describe precautions you should use when
working with a particular chemical or chemical mixture.
For all (R) and (S) numbers that appear on product labeling, refer to
the corresponding phrases in the assay-specific inserts. Other
country-specific warning and precautions may be included on the
labeling.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Section 8 Spill clean-up
Spill clean-up
Clean spills in accordance with established biosafety practices and
follow instruction in the MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets). In
general, safe work practices for cleaning spills include:
1. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment, such as gloves,
eye wear, and lab coat.
2. Absorb the spill with absorbent material.
3. Wipe the spill area with detergent solution.
4. Wipe the area clean with an appropriate disinfectant such as

0.1% sodium hypochlorite.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Waste handling and disposal Section 8
Waste handling and disposal

Each facility is responsible for labeling all waste containers and
characterizing its waste stream to ensure waste is disposed of in
accordance with the appropriate local, state, and federal regulations.
Reagents, calibrators, and controls may contain thimersol or mercury
and may be considered hazardous per applicable environmental
regulatory agencies. See the manufacturer's assay-specific
documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet),
the product-specific label, or the product-specific MSDS (Material
Safety Data Sheet). Check with your local sanitary district to
determine limits for mercury in wastewater.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Section 8 Decontamination procedure requirements
Decontamination procedure requirements

Always wear appropriate personal protective equipment (such as
gloves, eye wear, and lab coat) while performing decontamination
activities.
Prior to servicing the ARCHITECT System you must:
Decontaminate the exterior surfaces
Clean and decontaminate probes, if present
Remove all samples, reagents, controls, calibrators, and liquid
consumables
Prior to shipment or relocation of the ARCHITECT System you must:
Decontaminate the exterior surfaces
Remove all samples, reagents, controls, calibrators, and liquid
consumables
IMPORTANT: If you must ship the system to a new location, contact
your Abbott field service representative for assistance. The Abbott field
service representative will prepare the decontaminated system for
shipment and install it at the new destination.
The following components of the ARCHITECT System require
decontamination.
Component Reference
Sample carrier For information about decontaminating
the sample carrier, see 6038 External
Decontamination, page 9-82.
System control center For information about decontaminating
the system control center, see 6038
External Decontamination, page 9-82.
Processing module external surfaces For information about decontaminating
the processing module, see 6038
Probes (c System) For information about decontaminating
probes, see 6023 Clean
Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Supply and waste center (i System) For information about decontaminating
the supply and waste center, see 6038
ARCHITECT System / ARCHITECT For information about decontaminating
ARM surfaces (i System) system surfaces, see 6038 External

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Decontamination procedure requirements Section 8
Component Reference
RSH (robotic sample handler) For information about decontaminating
the RSH, see 6311 RSH Cleaning,
page 9-77.
SSH (standard sample handler) For information about decontaminating
the SSH, see 6010 Load Queue
Cleaning, page 9-79, 6017 Unload
Queue Cleaning, page 9-80, and 6020
Processing Queue Cleaning,
page 9-80.
LAS (laboratory automation system) For information about decontaminating
carousel sample handler the LAS Carousel, see 6022 LAS
Carousel Cleaning, page 9-81.
High-concentration waste bottle For information about decontaminating
(c System) system surfaces, see 6038 External
Decontamination procedures may require the use of diluted sodium

hypochlorite. To calculate the parts of water required to mix with one
part of manufacturer-supplied sodium hypochlorite solution, use the
following formula:
Where:
A = % of sodium hypochlorite solution desired
B = % of sodium hypochlorite (active or available chlorine)
in manufactured-supplied solution
X = number of parts of water required to mix with one part of
manufacturer-supplied sodium hypochlorite (active or
available chlorine) solution
NOTE: The stability of the working solution is 30 days after

preparation.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Section 8 Electrical hazards
Electrical hazards
The ARCHITECT System does not pose uncommon electrical hazards
to operators if it is installed and operated without alteration, and is
connected to a power source that meets required specifications. See
Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19.
Basic electrical hazard awareness is essential to the safe operation of
any system. Only qualified personnel should perform electrical
servicing.
Elements of electrical safety include, but are not limited to the
following:
Inspect electrical cabling into and on the ARCHITECT System for
signs of wear and damage.
Use only approved power cords and electrical accessories, such as
those supplied with the system, to protect against electric shock.
Use a properly grounded electrical outlet of correct voltage and
current handling capability.
Determine and correct the cause of a blown fuse or thrown
circuit breaker before attempting to resume operation of the
system.
Do not disconnect any electrical connection or service any
electrical or internal components while the power is on.
Unplug the ARCHITECT ARM accessory before cleaning,
servicing, or performing system maintenance.
Disconnect the power cord from the UPS (uninterruptible power
supply) before servicing.
Disconnect the processing module power cord before cleaning
major liquid spills.
Keep liquids away from all connectors of electrical or
communication components.
Do not touch any switches or outlets with wet hands.
Keep the floor dry and clean under and around the ARCHITECT
System.
Use a ground fault circuit interrupter when working in a wet
environment.
Avoid spilling fluids in the electronics bay when using the
ARCHITECT ARM accessory.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Electrical hazards Section 8
Clean spilled fluids immediately.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Section 8 Mechanical hazards
Mechanical hazards
The ARCHITECT System is an automated system that operates under
computer control. As with most automated equipment, there is
potential for injury and bodily harm from moving mechanical
components whenever the system is in operation.
The ARCHITECT System minimizes mechanical hazards by providing
guards to protect against accidental contact with moving components,
and encoding the software with safety features.
The ARCHITECT System requires that you accurately position all
samples, reagents, calibrators, controls, and cups and/or tubes on the
system. It is very important that you correctly position sample cups
and/or tubes, reaction vessels, and reagent containers before initiating
any operation.
Although the ARCHITECT System is equipped with safety features to
stop the lowering of the probes, it is NEVER acceptable for you to
reach into the processing module's working area when the system is in
operating mode. Should your intervention be necessary during a run,
you should interrupt the run according to instructions defined in
Section 5, Operating instructions.
During operation of the ARCHITECT System, you are potentially
exposed to the following moving mechanical components:
Sample and reagent arm(s)
Pipettor(s) and probe(s)
Sample handler
RV load assembly
Wash aspiration probe(s)
Sample carousel
Reagent supply center(s)
Reaction carousel
Mixer unit
Cuvette washer
ICT unit/probe
Basic elements of mechanical safety include, but are not limited to:
Never bypass or override a safety device.
Keep all protective covers and barriers in place.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Mechanical hazards Section 8
Never perform manual tasks on the work surface of the system.

Never allow any part of your body to enter a range of mechanical
movement during system operation.
Do not open the covers to the reagent supply center(s) and the
c System sample carousel when the access indicator lights are not
illuminated. If you open the covers when access is not indicated,
the mechanical components do not stop moving immediately
because the system attempts to return the components to their
home positions.
Do not wear articles of clothing or accessories that could catch
on the system.
Keep pockets free of items that could fall into the system.
Use caution when performing adjustment, maintenance,
cleaning, or repair procedures.
Use caution when loading sample carriers into the sample
handler.
Use caution when loading the sample carousel on the c System
processing module.
Use caution when loading the LAS sample carousel on the i 2000
processing module.
Use caution when loading reagents into the reagent supply
center(s).
Do not operate the ARCHITECT ARM accessory with the service
doors open.
Be aware that in the event of a system malfunction or an
unexpected sequence of movements, reflex actions could occur,
causing injury.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Section 8 Physical hazards
Physical hazards
Safe practices should be observed to avoid injury when exposed to the
following potential physical hazards.
Probes and sharps
Probes are sharp and potentially contaminated with infectious

material. Avoid contact with the tips of probes. Although the
ARCHITECT System is equipped with machine guarding features to
stop the lowering of the probes, you should never reach into the
processing module while it is operating.
When handling the external waste pump (c System optional
accessory), use proper personal protective equipment. Avoid contact
with the sharp metal edge of the pump.
The cuvette pair leaf springs (c 16000) are very sharp; handle
cautiously to prevent injury.
In general, minimize use of sharps and glassware. Use mechanical
means to remove contaminated broken glassware. Dispose of sharps in
an appropriately labeled, puncture-resistant, and leakproof container
before treatment and disposal.
Laser light
CAUTION: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of

procedures other than those specified herein may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
The bar code readers of the sample handler, c System carousel, and c
8000 reagent carousels use a low power, visible laser diode and emit
laser light. Because of normal human aversion response such as
blinking, eye movement, and so forth, these lasers normally do not
present a hazard to eyes.
Although momentary exposure to a CDRH Class 2 laser is not known
to be harmful, failure to follow proper procedures may result in a
potentially hazardous condition.
Do not look into the aperture
Do not remove the bar code reader covers or bypass interlocks
Do not stare directly into the beam
Do not place any optics into the beam

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Physical hazards Section 8
Only Abbott field service representatives should service the laser. The
protective covers should only be removed by trained operators or
Abbott field service representatives.
The following laser caution labels are affixed to the ARCHITECT
System:
Figure 8.1: Manufacturer laser certification label
c System - affixed on the side wall of the processing module to

the right of reagent supply center 1 (R1).
i 2000/i 2000SR - affixed on the underside of the rear processing
center cover.
Figure 8.2: System laser caution label
c 8000 - affixed on the covers for the reagent supply centers (R1
and R2) and the sample carousel.
c 16000 - affixed on the sample carousel
i System - affixed on the cover of the reagent carousel.
RSH (robotic sample handler) - affixed near the bar code reader
under the cover on the left side.
SSH (standard sample handler) - affixed on the cover under the
left processing queue access door.
Do not remove, damage, or obliterate any of the laser warning labels.
If any of them become illegible, notify your Abbott field service
representative to have them replaced.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Section 8 Physical hazards
Heavy objects
The c System high-concentration waste bottle is heavy when full. Use

The i System wash buffer reservoir is heavy and bulky when full.
Perform 2185 Wash Buffer Unload, page 9-70 to empty the wash buffer
reservoir prior to removing it from the system.
Use proper lifting techniques when handling full bottles or containers
of the following:
c System high-concentration waste bottle
i 2000/i 2000SR wash buffer reservoir
The system is heavy and has unsupported sections of the shell. Ensure
that you have adequate help before attempting to move the system.
Push only on solid sections of the housing; do not exert pressure on
unsupported sections of the shell.
Use proper lifting techniques when moving the ARCHITECT ARM
accessory.
Hot objects
The lamp and lamp housing may be hot. Before replacing the lamp,
turn off the power, and then allow the lamp and lamp housing to
cool. Use temperature-resistant gloves if necessary.
Trip hazards
The ARCHITECT System is equipped with power cords and various

computer connectors. To avoid a tripping hazard, ensure cords in high
traffic areas are properly stowed.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Service and maintenance
Section 9
Introduction
<F=0>
Proper service and maintenance of your ARCHITECT System is one of

the most important aspects of a complete quality assurance program.
A thorough service and maintenance program:
Minimizes down time
Maintains records for inspection and accreditation
Maintains optimal system operation to provide optimal test
results
Service and maintenance topics include:
Maintenance, page 9-2
Provides a description of all maintenance procedures, the
software screens and windows associated with maintenance
activities, associated graphics for some maintenance procedures,
and step-by-step instructions for performing related procedures.
Component replacement, page 9-83
Provides step-by-step instructions and graphics for replacing
system components.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Maintenance Section 9
Maintenance
The ARCHITECT System software provides a user-friendly interface for
performing and tracking your maintenance activities.
The Maintenance screen displays procedures that are scheduled to be
performed. Once you initiate a procedure, step-by-step instructions
walk you through its completion.
Performance of a procedure is tracked in the online Maintenance log.
Maintenance topics include:
Maintenance suggestions, page 9-2
Maintenance statuses, page 9-20
Maintenance categories and procedure descriptions, page 9-20
Maintenance suggestions
Proper maintenance of your ARCHITECT System is important. These
suggestions, which are especially useful for integrated and
multi-module systems, are provided to help you determine efficient
strategies for performing maintenance procedures and reducing
downtime.
When scheduling and performing maintenance procedures:
Schedule maintenance procedures during times of slower
workflow.
Verify adequate supplies are on board the system, or available to
load, prior to initiating a maintenance procedure.
Perform procedures within the weekly, monthly, and quarterly
maintenance categories on different shifts or days. To avoid
having these procedures scheduled for the same day, perform
some of them early to stagger the schedule.
NOTE: You must complete all maintenance procedures on or
before the day they are due.
Use the additional graphics provided in the online help to assist
you with performing maintenance procedures. Access Help? by
selecting the help button on the Maintenance perform window,
and then select one of the following hypertext links to view a list
of available graphics:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 9 Maintenance
c 8000 processing module associated maintenance graphics,

page 9-42
page 9-52
i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules associated maintenance
graphics, page 9-72
RSH associated maintenance graphics, page 9-78
NOTE: Not all maintenance procedures have additional

graphics.
Maintenance screen
From the Maintenance screen you can view information for
maintenance procedures and initiate a procedure. You can also access
windows to view version and detail information for each procedure,
and print the Procedure report.
The procedures display by module and by maintenance category:
The To do tab displays procedures that are scheduled to be
performed on a module from the Daily, Weekly, Monthly, and
Quarterly maintenance categories. Circles that precede the
procedure name are color-coded to match the appropriate
maintenance category.
The Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Quarterly, and As needed tabs
display the non-scheduled procedures for a module and also
show the:
LAST PERFORMED: date and time a procedure was last
performed
OPERATOR ID: ID of the operator who last performed the
procedure
The In process tab displays any procedure currently in process on
the selected module and also shows the:
PROCEDURE STATUS: Current status of the procedure in
process
TIME STARTED: time the procedure was started

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 9.1: Maintenance screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Maintenance screen field descriptions,

To display this screen, see Access the Maintenance screen, page 9-4.
View maintenance procedure information, page 9-5
Perform a maintenance procedure, page 9-6
Perform concurrent maintenance procedures or other tasks, page 9-8
Return to a maintenance procedure in process, page 9-9
View details for a maintenance procedure, page 9-10
Access the Maintenance log screen, page 9-16
Access the Maintenance screen
Perform this procedure to display the Maintenance screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To access the Maintenance screen:

Select System from the menu bar, and then select Maintenance.
The Maintenance screen displays with the To do tab selected.
Procedures - Maintenance screen
Procedures you can perform from the Maintenance screen and its
Perform a maintenance procedure, page 9-6
Return to a maintenance procedure in process, page 9-9
View details for a maintenance procedure, page 9-10
View maintenance procedure information
Perform this procedure to display the Version details for procedure

(maintenance) window. From this window, you can view information
for a maintenance procedure prior to performing it. This information
includes the version number, required module status, and required
user access level.
Prerequisite Access the Maintenance screen, page 9-4
Module status All except Maintenance
Supplies NA
To view maintenance procedure information:

1. Select the desired Module option on the Maintenance screen.
The scheduled maintenance procedures for the selected module
display on the To do tab.
2. Select the Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Quarterly, or As needed

tab. (optional)
The non-scheduled maintenance procedures for the selected
category display.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3. Select the desired procedure from the MAINTENANCE

PROCEDURES box, and then select F6 - Version.
The Version details for procedure (maintenance) window
displays.
Version details for procedure (maintenance) window, page 9-12
Perform a maintenance procedure
Perform this procedure to do scheduled or non-scheduled

maintenance on your ARCHITECT System.
CAUTION: Moving Parts. Maintenance procedures may
expose operators to moving parts that can potentially cause
personal injury. Untrained operators should not perform
these procedures.
Prerequisite(s) Access the Maintenance screen, page 9-4

Module status Procedure dependent
User access level Procedure dependent
Supplies Procedure dependent
To perform a maintenance procedure:


tab. (optional)
category display.

PROCEDURES box, and then select F5 - Perform.

The Maintenance Perform window displays. A description of the
procedure displays in the INSTRUCTIONS box.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
5. Select Proceed, and then follow the instructions in the

INSTRUCTIONS box.
You are prompted to enter information if the procedure requires
additional data.
6. Enter the required information in the User input data entry box,
and then select Continue.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: You can select the Close window button at anytime to

close the Maintenance Perform window to perform a
maintenance procedure on another module or access other
screens and windows. See Perform concurrent maintenance
procedures or other tasks, page 9-8.
7. Select Activity to view the progress of the procedure. (optional)

The activity of the module displays in the Activity list. To return
to the Result list, select Results.
8. Select Print to print the Procedure report. (optional)
9. Select Done to return to the Maintenance screen.
Maintenance Perform window, page 9-11
Perform concurrent maintenance procedures or other tasks
Perform this procedure to close the Maintenance Perform window

when a maintenance procedure is in process. This allows you to

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
perform a maintenance procedure on another module or to access

other screens and windows.
Prerequisite(s) Perform a maintenance procedure, page 9-6
Module status Maintenance
Supplies NA
To perform concurrent maintenance procedures or other tasks:

1. Select Close window on the Maintenance perform window.
The Maintenance screen displays with the In process tab
selected.
2. Select the desired Module option to perform another

maintenance procedure.
Or
Access any other screen to perform another task.
To return to an in-process maintenance procedure when user input is
required or to complete the procedure, see Return to a maintenance
procedure in process, page 9-9.
Return to a maintenance procedure in process
Perform this procedure to return to the Maintenance Perform window

of an in-process maintenance procedure. You must return to this
window to provide user input, when required, or to complete the
procedure.
Module status Maintenance
Supplies NA
To return to a maintenance procedure in process:

The procedure displays on the In process tab.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2. Select the procedure from the MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

box, and then select F5 - Continue.
The Maintenance Perform window for the selected in-process
procedure displays.
3. Follow the instructions in the INSTRUCTIONS box.
View details for a maintenance procedure
Perform this procedure to display the Details for maintenance item

window. From this window you can view information for a
maintenance procedure that has been performed. This information
includes the:
Date the procedure was performed
Procedure version used
ID of the operator who performed the procedure
Status of the procedure
Module status All except Maintenance
Supplies NA
To view details for a maintenance procedure:


tab. (optional)
category display.

PROCEDURES box, and then select F7 - Details.
The Details for maintenance item window displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Details for maintenance item window, page 9-13
Windows - Maintenance screen
Windows you can access from the Maintenance screen include:

Version details for procedure (maintenance) window, page 9-12
Details for maintenance item window, page 9-13
Maintenance Perform window
From the Maintenance Perform window you can view information

about an initiated procedure such as:
Procedure category and name
ID of the operator logged on to the system
Status of the procedure
Description of the procedure
NOTE: The display of the Maintenance Perform window is
dependent on the selected module, category, and procedure.
You can then proceed with the procedure, close the window to
perform a maintenance procedure on another module or access other
screens and windows, or quit the procedure.
For descriptions of maintenance procedures, see Maintenance categories
and procedure descriptions, page 9-20.
To view an associated maintenance graphic, see:
page 9-42
page 9-52
i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules associated maintenance graphics,
page 9-72.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 9.2: Maintenance Perform window
For descriptions of these fields, see Maintenance Perform window field

Version details for procedure (maintenance) window
From the Version details for procedure (maintenance) window you can
view information for maintenance procedures including version
number, required module status, and required user access level.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 9.3: Version details for procedure (maintenance) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Version details for procedure

(maintenance) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-129.
Details for maintenance item window
From the Details for maintenance item window you can view detailed
information for maintenance procedures.
If the procedure has been performed, this information includes the:
Version of the procedure
Date
ID of the operator logged on to the system
Status of the procedure when last performed
NOTE: If a procedure has not been performed or you selected a
procedure from the To do tab, only the procedure name displays.
All other fields are blank.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 9.4: Details for maintenance item window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for maintenance item window
View details for a maintenance procedure, page 9-10.
Maintenance log screen

From the Maintenance log screen you can view information about
procedures that have been performed. The system stores up to three
months of data.
Print the Maintenance History report
Approve the Maintenance log
View additional details for procedures
Add a comment to a procedure

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 9.5: Maintenance log screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Maintenance log screen field

An explanation of the descriptive elements of the Maintenance log
follows:
Item Description
Colored circles Are color-coded to match the appropriate maintenance
category tab.
Colored squares Are color-coded to match the appropriate maintenance
category tab.
Solid Indicate procedures that have been performed and have a
(Completed) status of Completed. If the procedure is performed more
than once a day, the status of the last performed procedure
displays.
Shaded (Not Indicate procedures that are scheduled, are pending, did
completed) not complete successfully, or were not performed when
scheduled. If the procedure is performed more than once a
day, the status of the last performed procedure displays.
Cursor Indicates the selected field in the procedure row and date
column. Use the directional arrows to move the cursor from
one procedure to the next and from one day to the next.
* Indicates a comment was entered for the procedure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Item Description
2-9 Indicates the procedure was performed X times on that day.
> Indicates the procedure was performed more than nine
times on that day.
To display this screen, see Access the Maintenance log screen, page 9-16.
Approve the Maintenance log, page 9-17
Add a comment to a maintenance procedure, page 9-17
Print a Maintenance History report for a specific procedure, page 5-340
Access the Maintenance log screen
Perform this procedure to display the Maintenance log screen.

Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Maintenance log screen:

2. Select F2 - Maint. Log.

The Maintenance log screen for the selected module displays.
Procedures - Maintenance log screen
Procedures you can perform from the Maintenance log screen and its

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Print a Maintenance History report for a specific procedure,

page 5-340
Approve the Maintenance log
Perform this procedure to approve the monthly Maintenance log.
NOTE: The Maintenance log cannot be approved until the first day of
the next month.
Module status NA
Supplies NA
To approve the maintenance log:

1. Use the previous/next buttons on the Maintenance log screen
to display the desired month.
2. Select F4 - Approve.
The Approve maintenance log window for the selected month
displays.
3. Select the Approve log check box.
4. Select Done to approve the Maintenance log.

The status of the monthly maintenance log changes from
unapproved to approved, and displays the Operator ID, date,
and time of approval.
Approve maintenance log window, page 9-18
Add a comment to a maintenance procedure
Perform this procedure to add a comment to a procedure listed in the

Maintenance log. Comments are particularly useful when used to
document why a procedure could not be completed when scheduled
or why an as-needed procedure was performed.
Module status Any
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To add a comment to a maintenance procedure:

1. Use the previous/next buttons on the Maintenance log screen
to select the desired month.
2. Use the up/down arrows to select the desired maintenance

procedure.
3. Use the left/right arrows to select the desired date.
The Details for maintenance log window for the selected
procedure and date displays.
Details for maintenance log window, page 9-19
Maintenance statuses, page 9-20
Windows - Maintenance log screen
Windows you can access from the Maintenance log screen include:
Approve maintenance log window, page 9-18
Details for maintenance log window, page 9-19
Approve maintenance log window
From the Approve maintenance log window the system administrator

can approve the Maintenance log.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 9.6: Approve maintenance log window
For descriptions of these fields, see Approve maintenance log window

Details for maintenance log window
From the Details for maintenance log window you can view detailed
information for a maintenance procedure (by date performed) and add
a comment.
NOTE: The data displayed is from the last time the procedure was
performed on the selected date.
Figure 9.7: Details for maintenance log window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for maintenance log screen

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Maintenance statuses
You can use maintenance status information to determine the status
of each maintenance procedure.
Table 9.1: Maintenance statuses
Status Description
Scheduled A procedure is scheduled on a future date.
Pending A procedure is scheduled on the current date.
Completed The procedure is complete and for procedures that produce
results, all results passed.
User Canceled You selected Quit prior to the procedure completing.
Failed The procedure produced an error or a failed result.
Blank The procedure has not been performed.
Running The procedure is in process.
Waiting user The procedure in process requires user input.
response
Stopped with The procedure is complete but errors occurred during
errors execution.
Maintenance categories and procedure descriptions

Maintenance procedures are grouped by module type and then by
category. Each category is represented by a tab on the Maintenance
screen.
The To do tab displays the currently scheduled Daily, Weekly,
Monthly, and Quarterly procedures for the selected module.
The Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Quarterly, and As needed tabs display all
procedures for the selected module. You can perform any of the listed
procedures even if they are not currently scheduled.
The In process tab displays any procedure currently in process on the
selected module.
Maintenance categories/procedures by module type include:
Processing module - the type of processing module determines
the categories and related procedures that are available.
c System processing module maintenance categories, page 9-21
page 9-42

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

page 9-52
i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules maintenance categories,
page 9-62
i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules associated maintenance
graphics, page 9-72
Sample handler - the type of sample handler determines the
categories and related procedures that are available.
RSH maintenance categories, page 9-76
RSH associated maintenance graphics, page 9-78
SSH maintenance categories, page 9-79
LAS carousel sample handler maintenance categories (i 2000),
page 9-80
SCC maintenance categories, page 9-82
c System processing module maintenance categories
Maintenance procedures for the c System processing module are

grouped by category (tab) on the Maintenance screen. Procedures are
available for the following categories:
Daily maintenance description (c System processing module),
page 9-21
Weekly maintenance description (c System processing module),
page 9-24
Monthly maintenance description (c System processing module),
page 9-27
Quarterly maintenance description (c System processing module),
page 9-28
As-needed maintenance description (c System processing module),
page 9-35
Daily maintenance description (c System processing module)
Daily maintenance is required on the processing module only. Perform

these procedures daily:
6024 Check 1mL Syringes, page 9-22
6028 Check DI Water Purity, page 9-22
6070 Daily Maintenance, page 9-22

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To perform a maintenance procedure, see Perform a maintenance

procedure, page 9-6.
6024 Check 1mL Syringes
Perform this daily maintenance procedure to ensure:

The pump syringe connections on the wash solution pump do
not leak
The syringe plunger interiors do not show evidence of leakage
For the location of the wash solution pump see ARCHITECT c 8000
supply and pump center components, page 9-125 or ARCHITECT c 16000
supply and pump center components, page 9-203.
Estimated time Materials needed Required module status

2 minutes None Stopped, Warming, or
Ready
6028 Check DI Water Purity
Perform this daily maintenance procedure to check the required

purity of the water supply to facilitate accurate patient results.

Ready
6070 Daily Maintenance


chemical-related hazard. See Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
Perform this daily maintenance procedure to:

Change water in bath
Add Water Bath Additive
Wash ICT probe with ICT Cleaning Fluid and ICT Reference
Solution

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Drain and fill ICT reference cup

For preparation instructions see Prepare ICT cleaning fluid (c System),
page 9-23.

15 minutes ICT Cleaning Fluid Warming or Ready
ICT sample diluent
Water Bath Additive
Prepare ICT cleaning fluid (c System)
Perform this procedure to prepare a working solution of ICT Cleaning

Fluid. The prepared ICT cleaning fluid is used in the 6070 Daily
Maintenance procedure.
Prerequisite NA
Module status NA
User access level NA
Supplies ICT Lyophilized Cleaning Solution
ICT Cleaning Fluid
Pipette
To prepare ICT cleaning fluid:

1. Hold the ICT Lyophilized Cleaning Solution bottle right side up
and tap on a flat surface before opening to remove excess
material from the cap.
2. Remove the cap.
3. Add 12 mL of ICT cleaning fluid to the ICT lyophilized cleaning

solution bottle.
4. Replace the cap and mix by gentle inversion. Document the date
of preparation.
NOTE: The prepared, capped ICT cleaning fluid is stable for 14

days when stored at 2C to 8C, but no longer than the
expiration date.
Prepare water bath additive (c System)
Perform this procedure to prepare Water Bath Additive. The prepared

additive is dispensed into the water bath during the 6070 Daily

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Maintenance procedure to prevent and control microbial

contamination.
Prerequisite NA
System status Any
Supplies Water bath additive

To prepare water bath additive:

1. Verify water bath additive is within the expiration date on the
bottle label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is exceeded.
2. Gently invert to ensure a homogeneous solution.
3. Pour water bath additive into the appropriate container.
4. Label the container with the name (water bath additive) and
expiration date. Review the container label for additional
information.
Weekly maintenance description (c System processing

module)
Weekly maintenance for the c System is required on the processing

module only. Perform these procedures weekly:
6019 Check ICT Components, page 9-24
6021 Clean Mixers, page 9-25
6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25
6056 Clean Cuvettes with Detergent, page 9-26
6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing, page 9-26
6019 Check ICT Components


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to ensure:

The ICT probe does not drip
No bubbles are in the ICT tubing
The pump syringe connections on the ICT aspiration pump and
the ICT reference solution pump do not leak
To view the associated graphic, see 6019 Check ICT Components graphic
(c 8000), page 9-44 or 6019 Check ICT Components graphic (c 16000),
page 9-54.

2 minutes None Warming or Ready
6021 Clean Mixers

Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to ensure mixers are free

of protein buildup.

3 minutes 70% isopropyl Stopped, Warming, or
alcohol Ready
Cotton swabs
DI water
6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes

WARNING: Probe Stick Hazard. Probe Sharps Hazard. This

is an activity or area where you may be exposed to probes.
See Probes and sharps, page 8-19.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to ensure:

The exterior of the sample and reagent probes are free of protein
buildup.
The probes are not damaged, leaking, or dripping.
5 minutes Detergent A Stopped, Warming, or
Cotton swabs Ready
Reagent Grade
Type II water
Nozzle cleaning
wire (optional)
6056 Clean Cuvettes with Detergent

Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to ensure cuvettes are free

of protein buildup and reagent residue.

25 minutes Detergent A Warming or Ready
6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing

Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to ensure the

high-concentration waste pump tubing is free of blockage.
To view the associated graphic, see 6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing
graphic (c 8000), page 9-46 or 6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing
graphic (c 16000), page 9-56.

Ready

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Monthly maintenance description (c System processing

module)
Monthly maintenance for the c System is required on the processing

module only. Perform these procedures monthly:
6016 Check Dispense Components, page 9-27
6018 Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles, page 9-27
6026 Check Syringes and Valves, page 9-28
6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip, page 9-28
6016 Check Dispense Components


Perform this monthly maintenance procedure to ensure:

Air bubbles are not being introduced into the sample and/or
reagent syringes or the sample and/or reagent tubing
Probe and grounding wire screws are tight
Reagent probe tubing is not discolored
2 minutes Large slotted Stopped, Warming, or
screwdriver Ready
6018 Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Perform this monthly maintenance procedure to ensure nozzles are

clean and clear of debris to facilitate optimal operation.

5 minutes Nozzle cleaning wire Stopped, Warming, or
Ready
6026 Check Syringes and Valves
Perform this monthly maintenance procedure to ensure the syringes,

solenoid valves and their connections do not leak.
To view the associated graphic(s), see 6026 Check Syringes and Valves
graphic (c 8000), page 9-47 or 6026 Check Syringes and Valves graphic (c
16000), page 9-57.

Ready
6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip
Perform this monthly maintenance procedure to ensure ICT aspiration

drain tip is free of debris and salt buildup.
To view the associated graphic, see 6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip graphic (c
8000), page 9-48 or 6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip graphic (c 16000),
page 9-58.

3 minutes Lint-free tissue Stopped, Warming, or
DI water Ready
Quarterly maintenance description (c System processing

module)
Quarterly maintenance for the c System is required on the processing

module only. Perform these procedures quarterly:
1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29
6011 Clean Reagent Supply Centers, page 9-29
6013 Clean Sample Carousel/Area, page 9-30
6301 Sample Syringe Maintenance, page 9-30
6302 Wash Syringe Maintenance, page 9-31

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
6303 Reagent Syringe Maintenance, page 9-32

6304 Change 1 mL Syringes, page 9-32
6305 Change ICT Asp Check Valve, page 9-33
6306 Check ICT Ref Check Valves, page 9-33
6307 Check/Clean HC Waste Sensor, page 9-34
1003 Change Lamp

WARNING: Hot Surface. This is an activity or area where
you may be exposed to hot surfaces. See Hot objects,
page 8-21.
Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to change the lamp.

For graphics associated with this quarterly maintenance procedure, see
component replacement procedure Replace the lamp or lamp plate (c
8000), page 9-99 or Replace the lamp or lamp plate (c 16000), page 9-178.

15 minutes Lamp Stopped, Warming, or
Slotted screwdriver Ready
NOTE: Time does not
include lamp warm up Phillips screwdriver
(30 minutes) Gloves
Lint-free tissue
(optional)
Ethanol (optional)
6011 Clean Reagent Supply Centers

Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to ensure reagent

supply centers are free of debris and deposits.

3 minutes Lint-free tissue Warming or Ready

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
6013 Clean Sample Carousel/Area

Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to ensure sample

carousel and carousel assembly are free of debris and dust.

0.1% sodium Ready
hypochlorite
Reagent Grade
Type II water

6301 Sample Syringe Maintenance


Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to replace sample

syringe o-rings and seal tips 1 and 2.
component replacement procedure Replace sample or reagent syringe
o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 8000), page 9-148 or Replace sample or
reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 16000), page 9-224.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines,

page 9-38, to prepare for operation on completion of sample syringe
maintenance.

10 minutes Phillips screwdriver Stopped, Warming, or
10 mm wrench
Cotton swabs
Absorbent towel
O-rings and seal
tips 1 and 2
6302 Wash Syringe Maintenance


Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to replace wash

solution syringe o-rings and seal tips 1 and 2.
component replacement procedure Replace wash solution syringe o-ring
and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 8000), page 9-139 or Replace wash solution syringe
o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 16000), page 9-217.
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2155 Flush Bulk Solutions,
page 9-39, to prepare for operation on completion of wash solution
syringe maintenance.

10 mm wrench
Cotton swabs
Absorbent towel
O-rings and seal
tips 1 and 2

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
6303 Reagent Syringe Maintenance


Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to replace reagent

syringe o-rings and seal tips 1 and 2.
component replacement procedure Replace sample or reagent syringe
o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 8000), page 9-148 or Replace sample or
reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 16000), page 9-224.
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines,
page 9-38, to prepare for operation on completion of reagent syringe
maintenance.

10 mm wrench
Cotton swabs
Absorbent towel
O-rings and seal
tips 1 and 2
6304 Change 1 mL Syringes


Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to replace 1 mL

syringes on:
ICT reference pump

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Wash solution pump

ICT aspiration pump
component replacement procedure Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 8000),
page 9-126 or Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 16000), page 9-204.
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6063 Flush ICT Module,
page 9-41, to prepare for operation on completion of changing 1 mL
syringes for ICT reference and ICT aspiration pumps.
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2155 Flush Bulk Solutions,
page 9-39, to prepare for operation on completion of changing 1 mL
syringes for the wash solution pump.

15 minutes Absorbent towel Stopped, Warming, or
1 mL syringes Ready
6305 Change ICT Asp Check Valve

Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to replace ICT

aspiration check valve.
component replacement procedure Replace check valves (c 8000),
page 9-130 or Replace check valves (c 16000), page 9-207.
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6063 Flush ICT Module,
page 9-41, to prepare for operation on completion of changing the
ICT aspiration check valve.

ICT aspiration pump Ready
check valve
6306 Check ICT Ref Check Valves


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to evaluate ICT

reference solution check valves and ensure they are functioning. For
graphics associated with evaluation instructions, see Evaluate the check
valve (c System), page 10-701.

3 minutes Clamp or large Stopped, Warming, or
hemostats Ready
Absorbent towel
Beaker large
enough to
accommodate 1 mL
syringes with check
valves
DI water
6307 Check/Clean HC Waste Sensor


Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to:

Check the high-concentration waste sensor
Clean high-concentration waste sensor with a diluted bleach
solution
Beaker large Ready
enough to
accommodate
high-concentration
waste sensor
0.5% sodium
hypochlorite


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
As-needed maintenance description (c System processing

module)
Perform these recommended as-needed maintenance procedures on

the c System during troubleshooting/diagnostics or during routine
operation when problems are observed:
1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-35
1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36
2129 Add Water Bath Additive, page 9-38
2131 Flush ICT Cup, page 9-38
2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38
2134 Change Water Bath, page 9-38
2155 Flush Bulk Solutions, page 9-39
3525 Temperature Status, page 9-39
3526 Check Water Bath Temperature, page 9-40
6052 Wash Cuvettes, page 9-40
6053 Probe Water Wash, page 9-40
6054 Probe Acid Wash, page 9-40
6055 Detergent B Probe Wash, page 9-41
6062 Wash ICT with Cleaning Fluid, page 9-41
6063 Flush ICT Module, page 9-41
6309 Change ICT Module, page 9-42
6310 Clean cuvettes - manually, page 9-42
1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to set sample probe

positioning for all positions where aspirating and dispensing occurs.
For the associated graphic, see 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic
(c 8000), page 9-49 or 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic (c
16000), page 9-59.

12 minutes Cuvette segment Stopped, Warming, or
alignment tool Ready
Tap water or saline
Lint-free tissue
Additional materials
vary depending on
sample handler
configuration.
Carrier calibration
tool (RSH)
Pipettor calibration
tool (LAS)
SH bar code tool
(LAS)
1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration


Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to set R1 probe

positioning for all positions where aspirating and dispensing reagents
with the R1 pipettor occurs.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
For the associated graphic, see 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c

8000), page 9-50 or 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 16000),
page 9-60.

7 minutes R1 outer segment, Stopped, Warming, or
12 position, with Ready
pipettor calibration
target
Cuvette segment
alignment tool
Water
Lint-free tissue


Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to set R2 probe

positioning for all positions where aspirating and dispensing reagents
with the R2 pipettor occurs.
For the associated graphic, see 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c
8000), page 9-51 or 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 16000),
page 9-61.

6 minutes R1 outer segment, Stopped, Warming, or
12 position, with Ready
pipettor calibration
target
Cuvette segment
alignment tool
Water
Lint-free tissue

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2129 Add Water Bath Additive

Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to add Water Bath

Additive to the water bath to prevent and control microbial
contamination. Review the container label for additional information.

5 minutes Water Bath Additive Warming or Ready
2131 Flush ICT Cup
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to:

Drain ICT Reference Solution from the ICT reference solution
cup
Refill the ICT reference solution warming ring from the ICT
reference solution bottle
2132 Flush Water Lines
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to verify water is being

flushed through the wash station tubing, sample probe tubing, R1 and
R2 pipettor tubing, and R1 and R2 reagent supply centers.

2134 Change Water Bath


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to drain water from

water bath and then refill bath with water. Review the container label
for additional information.

5 minutes Water Bath Additive Warming or Ready
2155 Flush Bulk Solutions

Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to verify the following

bulk solution tubings are free of air bubbles:
Alkaline Wash
Acid Wash
3525 Temperature Status
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to check the

temperature status of the processing module under the following
conditions:
Taking temperature measurements required by your laboratory
Troubleshooting certain error codes
Starting up the system after a long-term shutdown
The system checks and displays the temperature status of the
following processing module components:
Water bath
Reagent supply centers 1 and 2
Sample carousel
Instrument interior
Ready

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3526 Check Water Bath Temperature

Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to measure the

temperature of the processing module water bath and compare the
reading to an external thermometer for accuracy.

5 minutes Thermometer (reading Stopped, Warming, or
accuracy 0.5C at Ready
37C)
6052 Wash Cuvettes
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to wash all cuvettes

with Alkaline Wash, Acid Wash, and water.

6053 Probe Water Wash
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to wash the probes on

the sample pipettor, R1 reagent pipettor, and R2 reagent pipettor with
water.

6054 Probe Acid Wash



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
a 0.5% dilution of acid wash solution. See Prepare 0.5% acid wash
solution (c System), page 5-35.

5 minutes 0.5% acid wash Warming or Ready
6055 Detergent B Probe Wash


a 10% dilution of detergent B. For preparation instructions, see Prepare
10% detergent B solution (c System), page 5-38.

5 minutes 10% detergent B Warming or Ready
6062 Wash ICT with Cleaning Fluid

Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to wash the ICT probe

with cleaning fluid to ensure the ICT probe is free of protein buildup.
For preparation instructions, see Prepare ICT cleaning fluid (c System),
page 9-23.

3 minutes ICT Cleaning Fluid Warming or Ready
6063 Flush ICT Module
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to flush the ICT

module with ICT Reference Solution.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
6309 Change ICT Module
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to replace the ICT

module.
For graphics associated with this as-needed maintenance procedure,
see component replacement procedure Replace the ICT module or probe
(c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000),
page 9-194.

10 minutes ICT module Stopped, Warming, or
Ready
6310 Clean cuvettes - manually

Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to manually clean the

cuvettes in the reaction carousel.

5 minutes Slotted screwdriver Stopped, Warming, or
Detergent A Ready
Cotton swabs
Reagent Grade
Type II water
Gloves
Clean, residue-free
container to
submerge cuvette
segment
c 8000 processing module associated maintenance graphics
Maintenance procedure instructions are located in the

INSTRUCTIONS box on the Maintenance Perform window.
Occasionally graphics are required to illustrate a procedure, but they
cannot display in the INSTRUCTIONS box.
The following graphics are associated with c 8000 processing module
maintenance:
Daily maintenance

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
6024 Check 1 mL Syringes graphics (c 8000), page 9-43

Weekly maintenance
6019 Check ICT Components graphic (c 8000), page 9-44
6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing graphic (c 8000),
page 9-46
Monthly maintenance
6026 Check Syringes and Valves graphic (c 8000), page 9-47
6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip graphic (c 8000), page 9-48
As-needed maintenance
1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 8000), page 9-49
1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 8000), page 9-50
6024 Check 1 mL Syringes graphics (c 8000)
View these daily maintenance procedure graphics to:

Locate the wash solution pump 1 mL syringes
Inspect the connections and interior of the 1 mL syringe for
leaks
Legend:
1. 1 mL syringes for wash solution pump

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Legend:
1. Connections
2. Syringe plunger interior
6019 Check ICT Components graphic (c 8000)
View this weekly maintenance procedure graphic to:

Check ICT tubing for bubbles
Inspect the connections and interior of the ICT 1 mL syringes for
leaks

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Legend:
1. ICT tubing
Legend:
1. 1 mL syringes for ICT reference pump
2. 1 mL syringes for ICT aspiration pump

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Legend:
1. Connections
6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing graphic (c 8000)
View this weekly maintenance procedure graphic to ensure the


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Legend:
1. Input tubing from cuvette washer
2. Output tubing to the high-concentrated waste T fitting
3. High-concentrated waste T fitting
6026 Check Syringes and Valves graphic (c 8000)
View this monthly maintenance procedure graphic(s) to ensure the

syringe, solenoid valves, and their connections do not leak.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Legend:
1. Syringes
2. Solenoid valves
Legend:
1. Solenoid valve connections
6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip graphic (c 8000)
View this monthly maintenance procedure graphic(s) to locate the ICT

drain tip.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 8000)
View this as-needed maintenance graphic to clean the appropriate

calibration targets.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Legend:
1. Sample wash cup calibration target (to the right of the wash cup)
2. Sample carousel calibration target
3. Carrier calibration tool target
4. Cuvette segment alignment tool target
1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 8000)


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Legend:
1. R1 wash cup calibration target (to the right of the wash cup)
3. R1 reagent supply center inner segment calibration target
4. R1 reagent supply center outer segment calibration target


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Legend:
1. R2 wash cup calibration target (to the right of the wash cup)
2. R2 reagent supply center segment calibration target
c 16000 processing module associated maintenance graphics

The following graphics are associated with c 16000 processing module
maintenance:
Daily maintenance
6024 Check 1 mL Syringes graphics (c 16000), page 9-53
Weekly maintenance
6019 Check ICT Components graphic (c 16000), page 9-54
6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing graphic (c 16000),
page 9-56

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Monthly maintenance
6026 Check Syringes and Valves graphic (c 16000), page 9-57
6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip graphic (c 16000), page 9-58
As-needed maintenance
1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 16000), page 9-59
6024 Check 1 mL Syringes graphics (c 16000)
View these daily maintenance procedure graphics to:

Locate the wash solution pump 1 mL syringes
Inspect the connections and interior of the 1 mL syringe for
leaks
Figure 9.8: Supply and pump center (front view)
Legend:
1. 1 mL syringes for wash solution pump

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Legend:
1. Connections
6019 Check ICT Components graphic (c 16000)
View this weekly maintenance procedure graphic to:

Check ICT tubing for bubbles
Inspect the connections and interior of the ICT 1 mL syringes for
leaks

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Legend:
1. ICT tubing
Figure 9.9: Pump center (rear view)
Legend:
1. 1 mL syringes for ICT aspiration pump
2. 1 mL syringes for ICT reference pump

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Legend:
1. Connections
6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing graphic (c 16000)
View this weekly maintenance procedure graphic to ensure the


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Legend:
1. Input tubing from cuvette washer
2. Output tubing to the high-concentrated waste
6026 Check Syringes and Valves graphic (c 16000)
View this monthly maintenance procedure graphic(s) to ensure the

syringe, solenoid valves, and their connections do not leak.
Legend:
1. Syringes
2. Solenoid valves

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Legend:
1. Solenoid valve connections
6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip graphic (c 16000)
View this monthly maintenance procedure graphic(s) to locate the ICT

drain tip.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 16000)


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Legend:
2. Sample carousel calibration target
4. Sample wash cup calibration target (to the right of the wash cup)


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Legend:
1. R1 wash cup calibration targets


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Legend:
3. R2 wash cup calibration targets
i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules maintenance categories
Maintenance procedures for an i System processing module(s) are

grouped by category (tab) on the Maintenance screen. Procedures are
available in the following categories:
Daily maintenance description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules),
page 9-63
modules), page 9-63
modules), page 9-65

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Daily maintenance description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing

modules)
Daily maintenance is required on the processing module only. Perform

the 6041 Daily maintenance procedure daily.
To perform this maintenance procedure, see Perform a maintenance
6041 Daily Maintenance

Perform this daily maintenance procedure to:

Clean and condition the sample pipettor probe
Clean the probes, temperature tubing and sensors, and vacuum
vessels in wash zone 1 and 2
Mix the microparticle bottles on the reagent carousel
21 minutes Maintenance Warming or Ready
cleaning bottle
ARCHITECT Probe
Conditioning
Solution
0.5% sodium
hypochlorite


modules)
Weekly maintenance for an ARCHITECT i System is required on the

processing module only. Perform these procedures weekly:
6012 Air Filter Cleaning, page 9-64
6014 Pipettor Probe Cleaning, page 9-64
6015 WZ Probe Cleaning - Manual, page 9-64

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

6012 Air Filter Cleaning
Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to manually remove dust

build-up from the air filters. Since the filter must be reinstalled dry, it
is recommended you rotate between two filters to improve efficiency.

10 minutes Air filters Stopped, Warming, or
Tap water Ready
6014 Pipettor Probe Cleaning


Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to clean the outside of

the pipettor probes to remove salt buildup.

5 minutes Wash bottle with Warming or Ready
deionized water
Cotton swabs
6015 WZ Probe Cleaning - Manual



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to clean the outside of

the wash zone probes and wash manifold to remove salt buildup.

10 minutes Wash bottle with Stopped, Warming, or
deionized water Ready
Cotton swabs

modules)
Perform the recommended as-needed maintenance procedures on an i

System during troubleshooting/diagnostics or during routine
operation when problems are observed. Perform these procedures as
needed:
1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing module),
page 9-68
2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69
2133 Air Flush, page 9-69
2151 Prime Wash Zones, page 9-69
2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70
2185 Wash Buffer Unload, page 9-70
3520 Temperature Status, page 9-70
3530 Temperature Check - Manual, page 9-71
6043 WZ Probe Cleaning - Bleach, page 9-71
1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


Set sample probe positioning for all positions required for
aspirating and dispensing specimens during processing
Determine probe straightness
Move the sample and STAT pipettor probes over the LAS track
allowing you to observe probe positioning (i 2000SR LAS)
For the associated graphic, see 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic,
page 9-72.

Deionized water Ready
vary depending on
sample handler
configuration.
RSH/SSH:
Sample carrier
Carrier calibration
tool
i 2000 LAS:
LAS sample
carousel
LAS carousel
calibration tool
i 2000SR LAS:
tool
SH bar code tool


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


Set R1 probe positioning for all positions required for aspirating
and dispensing reagents with the R1 pipettor during processing
For the associated graphic, see 1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic,
page 9-73.

7 minutes Cotton swab Stopped, Warming, or



Set R2 probe positioning for all positions required for aspirating
and dispensing reagents with the R2 pipettor during processing
For the associated graphic, see 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration graphic,
page 9-74.

7 minutes Cotton swab Stopped, Warming, or

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing module)



Set STAT probe positioning for all positions required for
aspirating and dispensing reagents with the STAT pipettor during
processing
Move the sample and STAT pipettor probes over the LAS track
allowing you to observe probe positioning (i 2000SR LAS)
For the associated graphic, see 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration graphic,
page 9-75.

vary depending on
sample handler
configuration.
RSH:
Sample carrier
Carrier calibration
tool
i 2000SR LAS:
tool
SH bar code tool

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2130 Flush Fluids

Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to flush wash buffer,

Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions.
NOTE: To flush wash buffer, inventory status must be greater than

50%. To verify sufficient wash buffer, see Verify supply and waste
inventory, page 5-32.

NOTE: Performing this

procedure does not
reset the clock for the
automatic flush.
2133 Air Flush
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to flush the wash

buffer, trigger, and pre-trigger lines with air.

7 minutes Wash buffer transfer Warming or Ready
tubing
Wash buffer
reservoir (empty)
2151 Prime Wash Zones
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to prime the wash

zones by dispensing 100 L wash buffer into three RVs in both wash
zone 1 and wash zone 2.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to prime Pre-Trigger

and Trigger Solutions by dispensing 300 L pre-trigger and 100 L
trigger into two RVs at the pre-trigger/trigger manifold.

2185 Wash Buffer Unload
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to unload wash buffer

from a processing module to an external container.

8 minutes Wash buffer transfer Stopped, Warming, or
tubing Ready
Wash buffer
reservoir (empty)
3520 Temperature Status
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to check the

temperature status of the system under the following conditions:
Taking temperature measurements required by your laboratory
Troubleshooting certain error codes
Starting up the system after a long term shutdown
Temperature status of the following system components is checked
and displayed:
Processing path
Pre-Trigger Solution
Trigger Solution
Wash zones
Reagent cooler
1 minute None Stopped, Warming, or
Ready

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3530 Temperature Check - Manual
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to measure the

temperature of the system when your laboratory requires external
temperature measurement.
RVs containing wash buffer are equilibrated in each of the six (6)
process path zones during this procedure. In addition, tap water in the
WZ probe maintenance water bottle is placed in the reagent cooler.
When instructed, insert a thermometer probe to measure the
temperature.

5 minutes External Stopped, Warming, or
thermometer Ready
WZ probe
maintenance water
bottle
NOTE: An external
thermometer must
be purchased
separately to
perform the
temperature check.
6043 WZ Probe Cleaning - Bleach
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to clean the inside and

outside of the probes in wash zones 1 and 2 with sodium
hypochlorite.

35 minutes WZ probe Stopped, Warming, or
maintenance water Ready
bottle
Maintenance
cleaning bottle
Tap water or saline
0.25% sodium
hypochlorite

Decontamination procedure requirements, page 8-13

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules associated maintenance graphics

The following graphics are associated with i System processing module
maintenance:
1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic, page 9-72
1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic, page 9-73
1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration graphic, page 9-74
1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration graphic, page 9-75
1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Legend:
1. Calibration target, position 1
3. Sample wash station calibration target
1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Legend:
1. R1 wash station calibration target
3. Reagent carousel targets
1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration graphic


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Legend:
1. R2 wash station calibration target
3. Reagent carousel targets (For i 2000, only the inner target is cleaned.)
4. Calibration target, position 48 (i 2000SR)
1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration graphic


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Legend:
1. Calibration target, position 47 located outside the process path between the
RV transport and the STAT vortexer (VTXST)
2. STAT wash station calibration target
RSH maintenance categories
Maintenance procedures for the RSH (robotic sample handler) are

grouped by category (tab) on the Maintenance screen.
Procedures are available in the following category:
As-needed maintenance description (RSH), page 9-77

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
As-needed maintenance description (RSH)

the RSH (robotic sample handler) during troubleshooting/diagnostics
or during routine operation when problems are observed:
1119 Transport Calibration, page 9-77
6311 RSH Cleaning, page 9-77
1119 Transport Calibration

Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to align the carrier

transport position with the bays and carrier positions.

Ready
6311 RSH Cleaning

Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to clean the tray bays,

priority sections, carrier transport arm, carrier transport guard, and
carrier positioner.

5 minutes 0.1% sodium Stopped, Warming, or
hypochlorite Ready
DI water
Cotton swabs
Lint-free tissue

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
RSH associated maintenance graphics

The following graphic is associated with RSH (robotic sample handler)
maintenance:
6311 RSH Cleaning graphics, page 9-78
6311 RSH Cleaning graphics
View these as-needed maintenance graphics to clean the carrier

transport and/or carrier positioner(s)
Legend:
1. Transport arm
2. Transport guard

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Legend:
1. Carrier positioner
SSH maintenance categories
Maintenance procedures for the SSH (standard sample handler) are

As-needed maintenance description (SSH), page 9-79
As-needed maintenance description (SSH)

the SSH (standard sample handler) during troubleshooting/diagnostics
or during routine operation when problems are observed:
6010 Load Queue Cleaning, page 9-79
6017 Unload Queue Cleaning, page 9-80
6020 Processing Queue Cleaning, page 9-80
6010 Load Queue Cleaning


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to clean the surfaces

of the load queue conveyor belt.

hypochlorite Ready
Lint-free tissue or
gauze
6017 Unload Queue Cleaning


of the unload queue conveyor belt.

hypochlorite Ready
Lint-free tissue or
gauze
6020 Processing Queue Cleaning


of the processing queue conveyor belt.

hypochlorite Ready
Lint-free tissue or
gauze
LAS carousel sample handler maintenance categories (i 2000)
Maintenance procedures for the LAS (laboratory automation system)

carousel sample handler are grouped by category (tab) on the
Maintenance screen.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

As-needed maintenance description (LAS carousel sample handler - i
2000), page 9-81
As-needed maintenance description (LAS carousel sample

handler - i 2000)

the LAS (laboratory automation system) carousel sample handler
during troubleshooting/diagnostics or during routine operation when
problems are observed:
1118 LAS Pipettor Calibration, page 9-81
6022 LAS Carousel Cleaning, page 9-81
1118 LAS Pipettor Calibration
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to allow you to

visually align the i 2000 sample pipettor with the LAS (laboratory
automation system) track.

Minutes variable LAS pipettor Stopped, Warming, or
calibration tool Ready
SH bar code tool
6022 LAS Carousel Cleaning

Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to clean the i 2000

LAS (laboratory automation system) sample carousel.

hypochlorite Ready
LAS carousel

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
SCC maintenance categories
Maintenance procedures for the SCC (system control center) are

Procedures are available for the following category:
As-needed maintenance description (SCC), page 9-82
As-needed maintenance description (SCC)
Perform the 6038 External Decontamination as-needed maintenance

procedure on the SCC (system control center) during routine
operation when problems are observed.
6038 External Decontamination

Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to decontaminate the

following external surfaces:
Supply and pump center (c System)
Supply and waste center (i System)
Sample handler accessories
SCC (system control center)
PM (processing module) external surface
High-concentration waste bottle (c System)
ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory
(i System)
5 minutes Detergent Stopped, Warming, or
0.1% sodium Ready
NOTE: Time above
hypochlorite
reflects the time
required to apply the Lint-free tissue or
appropriate disinfectant gauze
only.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 9 Component replacement
Component replacement
Some system components may need to be replaced due to normal
wear from daily operations.
Your laboratory is responsible for maintaining an adequate supply of
replacement parts. List numbers are provided in the procedures for
guidance only and are subject to change. Contact your Abbott
representative for the most current list numbers.
Component replacement topics include:
c 8000 component replacement, page 9-83
c 16000 component replacement, page 9-162
i 2000/i 2000SR component replacement, page 9-237
SCC component replacement, page 9-274
c 8000 component replacement

Component replacement for the c 8000 includes:
ARCHITECT c 8000 processing center component replacement,
page 9-83
ARCHITECT c 8000 supply and pump components replacement,
page 9-124
ARCHITECT c 8000 processing center component replacement
To replace processing center components, see:

Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85
Replace reagent probes (c 8000), page 9-88
Replace the sample probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-92
Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-95
Replace the lamp or lamp plate (c 8000), page 9-99
Replace a cuvette (c 8000), page 9-104
Replace a cuvette segment (c 8000), page 9-108
Replace the cuvette dry tip (c 8000), page 9-111
Replace the mixer (c 8000), page 9-114
Replace the ICT module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116
Replace the sample carousel clip (c 8000), page 9-122

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Component replacement Section 9
See ARCHITECT c 8000 processing center components, page 9-84, for

component locations when performing replacement procedures.
ARCHITECT c 8000 processing center components
The following illustration shows the locations of the processing center

components. Use this illustration when performing component
replacement procedures.
Figure 9.10: ARCHITECT c 8000 processing center map
Legend:
1. Sample carousel and cover
2. Sample pipettor
3. Reaction carousel
4. Lamp
5. Mixer unit
6. Cuvette washer
7. ICT unit
8. Reagent supply center 2 and cover
9. Reagent 2 pipettor
10. Reagent 2 onboard solution area
12. Reagent 1 pipettor
13. Reagent 1 onboard solution area

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replace the sample probe (c 8000)
NOTE: It is recommended that you record and track the date of

sample probe installation to ensure you do not use the probe for
longer than one year.
Replacing the sample probe consists of the following procedures:
Removal
Prepare for sample probe removal, page 9-86
Remove the sample probe, page 9-86
Replacement
Install the sample probe, page 9-87
Prepare for operation, page 9-88
Verification
Calibrate the sample pipettor, page 9-88
Prerequisite The processing module must be in the Ready status.
Estimated time 20 minutes
required
Tools/materials Slotted screwdriver
required Absorbent towel
Replacement parts LN 01G48-03 - Sample probe
LN 02J51-01 - Reagent/sample probe screw
(optional)




(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Prepare for sample probe removal

Steps Graphic / reference
1. Remove the sample carousel (c System),
page 10-706.
2. Initiate pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161 Probe

Move, page 10-660, to position the sample pipettor
over the sample carousel area.
Remove the sample probe

1. Remove the sample pipettor cover by gently
squeezing the squeeze points [1], to release the
locking tabs, and lifting the cover [2].
2. Place an absorbent towel in the sample carousel

area under the probe tip.
3. Use a slotted screwdriver to slightly loosen the probe

screw [3].
4. Loosen, do not remove, the probe screw [3] by hand

until the probe releases from the sample pipettor.
5. Loosen, do not remove, the screw [4] holding the

sample probe grounding wire [5] in place.
6. Detach the grounding wire.
7. Gently disconnect the tubing [6] from the top of the

probe [7].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the sample probe

1. Attach the tubing [1] to the top of the new sample
probe [2].
NOTE: Do not flare or stretch the tubing. The tubing
should fit firmly on the sample probe. If the tubing is
loose or if the probe has been replaced several times
using the same tubing, it is recommended that you
replace the sample probe tubing.
2. Position the sample probe on the alignment pins [3]

and verify the probe plate [4] is flush with the plate on
the sample pipettor.
3. Remove the probe screw [5] from the old sample

probe and insert it into the new sample probe.
Finger-tighten the screw [5] to secure the probe in
place.
4. Stabilize the pipettor and tighten the screw with the

slotted screwdriver.
5. Attach the new sample probe grounding wire [6] and

tighten the screw [7].
6. Complete pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161

Probe Move, page 10-660, to return the sample
pipettor to the home position.
7. Remove the absorbent towel from the sample

carousel area.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Prepare for operation

1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132
Flush Water Lines, page 9-38.
2. Visually inspect the probe for drips and inspect the

sample probe tubing and connections for leaks.
If you observe drips or leaks, repeat the installation
procedure.
3. Gently replace the pipettor cover [1]. Ensure the

tubing is not pinched or kinked below the pipettor
cover.
4. Press down on the end of the cover over the pipettor

shaft [2] until it snaps into place. The pipettor cover
must be completely seated to ensure correct liquid
level sense operation.
5. Reinstall the sample carousel (c System),

page 10-707.
Verification
Calibrate the sample pipettor

Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-35.
2. Run quality control to verify operation.
Replace reagent probes (c 8000)
Replacing the reagent probe(s) consists of the following procedures:

Removal
Prepare for reagent probe removal, page 9-89
Remove the reagent probe, page 9-90
Replacement
Install the reagent probe, page 9-91
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Calibrate the Reagent pipettor, page 9-92

Prerequisite The processing module must be in the Offline, Stopped,
Warming, or Ready status.
required
Tools required Slotted screwdriver
Absorbent towel
Replacement parts LN 01G47-03 - Reagent probe
LN 02J51-01 - Reagent/sample probe screw
(optional)



Removal
Prepare for reagent probe removal

1. Locate the reagent pipettor.
NOTE: See ARCHITECT c 8000 processing center
components, page 9-84, for pipettor locations.
Access the R1 pipettor from the front of the
system.
Access the R2 pipettor from the back of the
system.
2. Remove the rack and the onboard solutions from the

appropriate onboard solution area.

Move, page 10-660, to position the reagent pipettor
over the onboard solution area.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the reagent probe

1. Remove the reagent pipettor cover by gently
locking tabs, and lifting the pipettor cover [2].
2. Place an absorbent towel under the probe tip.

screw [3].

until the probe releases from the reagent pipettor.

reagent probe grounding wire [5] in place.

probe [7].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the reagent probe

1. Attach the tubing [1] to the top of the new reagent
probe [2].
should fit firmly on the reagent probe. If the tubing is
replace the reagent probe tubing.
2. Position the new reagent probe [2] on the alignment

pins [3] and verify the probe plate [4] is flush with the
plate on the reagent pipettor.
3. Remove the probe screw [5] from the old reagent

probe and insert it into the new reagent probe.
Fingertighten the screw [5] to secure the probe in
place.

5. Attach the new reagent probe grounding wire [6] and


Probe Move, page 10-660, to return the reagent
probe to the home position.
7. Remove the absorbent towel from the onboard

solution area.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


reagent probe tubing and connections for leaks.
procedure.

cover.

5. Replace the rack and onboard solutions to the

Verification
Calibrate the Reagent pipettor

1. Perform the appropriate as-needed maintenance
procedure:
1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36, or
2. Run quality control to verify performance.
Replace the sample probe tubing (c 8000)
Replacing the sample probe tubing consists of the following

procedures:
Removal
Prepare for sample probe tubing removal, page 9-93
Remove the sample probe tubing, page 9-94
Replacement
Install the sample probe tubing, page 9-94
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Verification occurs during preparation for operation. No further

verification is required.
required
Tools/materials Absorbent towel
required
Replacement parts LN 01G48-02 - Sample probe tubing



Removal
Prepare for sample probe tubing removal

page 10-706


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the sample probe tubing


3. Unscrew the tubing from the probe tubing connector

[3]. Ensure the black o-ring inside the tubing
connector stays in place.

probe [5].
Replacement
Install the sample probe tubing

1. Attach the end of the new tubing [1] to the top of the
sample probe [2].
NOTE: Do not flare or stretch the new tubing. The
tubing should fit firmly on the sample probe.
2. Verify the black o-ring is inside the probe tubing

connector [3].
3. Screw the opposite end of the tubing [4] into the

tubing connector [3].


carousel area.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


procedure.

cover.


page 10-707.
Verification

Verification occurs during preparation for operation. No
further verification is required.
Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 8000)
Replacing the reagent probe tubing consists of the following

procedures:
Removal
Prepare for reagent probe tubing removal, page 9-96
Remove the reagent probe tubing, page 9-97
Replacement
Install the reagent probe tubing, page 9-98
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

required
required
Replacement parts LN 01G47-02 - Reagent probe tubing



Removal
Prepare for reagent probe tubing removal

Access the R1 pipettor from the front of the
system.
Access the R2 pipettor from the back of the
system.
2. Remove the rack and the onboard solutions from the


Move, page 10-660, to position the reagent pipettor
over the onboard solution area.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the reagent probe tubing

1. Remove the reagent pipettor cover by gently

probe [4].
4. Gently disconnect the metal connector [5] from the

reagent pipettor tubing [6]. Ensure the protective
sleeve remains on the reagent pipettor tubing.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the reagent probe tubing

1. Attach the end of the new tubing and metal
connector [1] to the reagent pipettor tubing [2]. The
tubing should be positioned as shown, with the metal
connector on the left side and routed over the top of
the loop.
2. Verify the metal connector [3] is inserted in the

reagent pipettor tubing [4] and not just in the
protective sleeve.
3. Attach the other end of the tubing [5] to the reagent

probe [6].
tubing should fit firmly in the reagent probe.


solution area.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


procedure.

cover.

shaft [2] until it snaps into place.The cover must be
completely seated to ensure correct liquid level
sense operation.
5. Replace the rack and onboard solutions in the

Verification

Replace the lamp or lamp plate (c 8000)
Replacing the lamp or lamp plate consists of the following procedures:

Removal
Prepare for removal, page 9-100
Remove the covers, page 9-101
Remove the terminal cable connections, page 9-101
Remove the lamp, page 9-102
Replacement
Install the lamp plate and lamp, page 9-102
Install the terminal cables, page 9-103
Install the processing module cover, page 9-103
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Run quality control, page 9-103

Prerequisite Power off the processing module.
required
NOTE: Time does not include lamp warm up (30
minutes)
Tools/materials Phillips screwdriver
required Gloves
Replacement parts LN 09D45-02 - Lamp

page 8-21.
Removal
Prepare for removal

IMPORTANT: Never remove the lamp or lamp plate

with the processing module powered on.
Power off the processing module by using the main
circuit breaker located at the rear of the module.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the covers

WARNING: Wait at least five minutes after turning the

power off to allow the lamp and the lamp housing to
cool.
NOTE: The lamp can be accessed from the back of

the processing module.
1. Open the rear processing module cover. Locate the
reaction carousel rear cover [1] located between the
reagent 2 supply center [2] and the reaction carousel
[3].
2. Unscrew the thumbscrews [4] securing the cover in

place and remove the cover.
Remove the terminal cable connections

1. Locate the terminal block [1].
2. Remove the transparent cover [2] from the terminal

block by grasping both ends and lifting up.
3. Using the Phillips screwdriver, completely loosen the

two captive screws [3] securing the two lamp cables
[4] on the terminal block.
4. Raise the screws [5] and lower the lamp cables [4]
completely to allow you to disengage the cables from
the bottom of the screws.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the lamp


cool.
1. Completely loosen the top thumbscrew [1] on the
lamp plate [2] in the housing.
2. Lift the lamp plate and loosen the other thumbscrew

[3] to remove the lamp from the plate.
Replacement
Install the lamp plate and lamp

IMPORTANT: Wear gloves when you perform the

following steps. Residual oil on the glass surface of
the lamp shortens the lamp life. The glass surface
may be cleaned with ethanol, if necessary.
1. Insert the replacement lamp [1] fitting the pins [2] into
the pin holes [3] on the lamp plate [4].
2. Verify the filament [5] is perpendicular to the lamp

plate [4].
3. Tighten the thumbscrew [6] on the lamp plate while

the lamp is fully inserted into the pin holes.
4. Insert the lamp assembly into the housing [7],

pressing it against the leaf spring [8], and down into
the housing. Ensure the lamp assembly is properly
seated into the housing.
5. Verify the lamp cables [9] are through the slot behind
the lamp and are not pinched by the lamp plate.
6. Tighten the thumbscrew [10] to secure the lamp in

place.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Install the terminal cables

1. Raise the screws [1] and insert the cables [2] under
the screws.
2. Use the Phillips screwdriver to tighten the two captive

screws [3] securing the two lamp cables [4] on the
terminal block.
3. Wrap excess lamp cables and secure with white

plastic clamp [5].
4. Replace the transparent cover [6] on the terminal

block.
5. Power on the processing module. The system control

center power MUST be on prior to turning on the
processing module to ensure proper initialization.
6. Check for stray light around lamp housing cover.
Install the processing module cover

1. Replace the reaction carousel rear cover.
2. Close the rear processing module cover.

1. Start up the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-13, to change the status of the
processing module and sample handler from
Stopped to Ready.
NOTE: The lamp must warm up 30 minutes prior to
running assays.
2. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003

Change Lamp, page 9-29, to document the lamp
change in the Maintenance log.
Verification
Run quality control

Run quality control to verify performance.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replace a cuvette (c 8000)
Replacing a cuvette consists of the following procedures.

Removal
Remove cuvette segment, page 9-105
Clean replacement cuvette, page 9-105
Remove the individual cuvette, page 9-106
Replacement
Install the individual cuvette, page 9-107
Reinstall the cuvette segment, page 9-108
Verification
Perform carousels diagnostic procedure 3010 Reaction Carousel
Home / Move, page 9-108
required
Tools/materials Detergent A
required Lint-free absorbent towel
Cotton swabs
Slotted screwdriver
Container large enough to accommodate new
cuvettes
Gloves
Replacement parts LN 01G46-02 - Cuvette



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Remove cuvette segment

1. Determine the cuvette number requiring
replacement.
2. Identify the location of the cuvette on the reaction

carousel.
3. Perform carousels diagnostic procedure 3010

Reaction Carousel Home / Move, page 10-665, to
rotate the carousel so that the cuvette to be replaced
is at the front of the module.
4. Use the slotted screwdriver to loosen the two screws

[1] located on the top of the cuvette segment until the
segment can be removed from the reaction carousel.
5. Inspect all cuvettes in the segment and replace if

damaged
6. Set the cuvette segment aside on a lint-free

absorbent towel.
Clean replacement cuvette


following steps. Residual oil from an ungloved hand
may cause imprecise optical reads.
1. Remove the new cuvette from the shipping container
and place it on a lint-free absorbent towel.
2. Wet a cotton swab with Detergent A and clean the

inside and outside of the new cuvette.
3. Fill a clean, residue-free container [1] with enough

Reagent Grade Type II water to completely
submerge the new cuvette [2].
4. Rinse the cuvette in the water to remove the

Detergent A and drain any excess water from the
cuvette.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the individual cuvette

NOTE: Wear gloves when you perform the following

steps. Residual oil from an ungloved hand may cause
imprecise optical reads.
1. Remove the slotted screws [1] from the segment.
2. Gently press down on each tab [2] of the cuvette

retaining cover [3] to separate the cover from the
cuvette segment assembly [4].
3. Grasp the cuvette segment with one hand and gently

grasp the desired cuvette [5] with the other hand.
Push up on the cuvette [5].
4. Grasp the cuvette gently and once a portion of the

cuvette is positioned above the top surface of the
segment, pull it straight out.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the individual cuvette

1. Insert the new cuvette [1] into the top of the cuvette
segment.
2. Gently push the cuvette down while ensuring that it is

guided into the rectangle-shaped depression [2] in
the bottom of the cuvette segment. When the cuvette
is correctly seated, the top of the cuvette is just
below the top surface of the cuvette segment.
3. Slide the cuvette retaining cover onto the cuvette

segment.
4. Verify each tab on the cuvette retaining cover is

inserted into the holes on the top of the cuvette
segment.
5. Position the clips [3] on the back of the cuvette

retaining cover under the back edge of the cuvette
segment [4].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Reinstall the cuvette segment

1. Position the cuvette segment [1] on the reaction
carousel alignment pins [2].
2. Finger-tighten the slotted screws [3] into the

segment.
3. Gently tighten the screws with the slotted

screwdriver.
Verification
Perform carousels diagnostic procedure 3010 Reaction Carousel Home / Move

Perform carousels diagnostic procedure 3010 Reaction
Carousel Home / Move, page 10-665, to verify the
cuvette segment is installed properly.
Replace a cuvette segment (c 8000)
Replacing a cuvette segment consists of the following procedures.

Removal
Clean replacement cuvette segment, page 9-110
Replacement
Install the cuvette segment, page 9-111
Verification
required

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Cotton swabs
Slotted screwdriver
cuvettes
Gloves
Replacement parts LN 01G46-01 - Cuvette segment


Removal

1. Determine the cuvette segment requiring
replacement.
2. Identify the location of the cuvette segment on the

reaction carousel.

rotate the carousel so that the appropriate cuvette
segment is at the front of the module.

[1] located on the top of the cuvette segment until the
segment can be removed from the reaction carousel.
5. Dispose of the cuvette segment.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Clean replacement cuvette segment


1. Remove the new cuvette segment from the shipping
container and place it on a lint-free absorbent towel.

inside and outside of all of the cuvettes in the new
cuvette segment.

submerge the new cuvette segment [2].
4. Rinse the cuvette segment in the water to remove the

cuvettes.
5. Dry the top of the cuvette segment [3], especially the

slotted edges [4], to remove any remaining water.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the cuvette segment

2. Finger-tighten the slotted screws [3] on the segment.
3. Gently tighten the screws with a slotted screwdriver.
Verification

Replace the cuvette dry tip (c 8000)
Replacing the cuvette dry tip consists of the following procedures.

Removal
Remove the cuvette washer assembly, page 9-112
Remove the cuvette dry tip, page 9-113
Replacement
Install the cuvette dry tip and cuvette washer assembly,
page 9-113
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Wash the cuvettes, page 9-114

required
Tools/materials Metric ruler
required Gloves
Replacement parts LN 09D51-02 - Cuvette dry tip


Removal
Remove the cuvette washer assembly

1. Open the rear processing module cover.
2. Remove the cuvette washer cover [1] by unscrewing

the thumbscrew [2].
3. Loosen the black knurled knob [3] to the left of the

cuvette washer until the cuvette washer assembly [4]
can be lifted from the mounting bracket [5].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the cuvette dry tip


interferes with the proper drying function of the tip.
1. Lift the cuvette washer assembly and rotate it so you
can easily access the white cuvette dry tip.
NOTE: The cuvette washer nozzles are attached to
the black nozzle mounting plate. You do not need to
remove any of the screws securing the wash nozzles
to the mounting plate.
2. Remove the cuvette dry tip [1] by pulling it off the

metal nozzle [2].
3. Discard the used tip.
Replacement
Install the cuvette dry tip and cuvette washer assembly


1. Gently install the new cuvette dry tip, taking care to
orient it properly.
NOTE: The cuvette dry tip and the cuvette are both
rectangular in shape. Install the dry tip so it fits into
the cuvette.
2. Position the bottom of the cuvette dry tip 61 0.5

mm from the underside of the cuvette washer
assembly [1].
3. Position the cuvette washer assembly [2] on the

alignment pins [3], and then tighten the black knurled
knob [4].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

1. Initiate Fuses/Motors diagnostic procedure 5142
Wash Station Up/Down, page 10-664 to home the
cuvette washer assembly and reaction carousel.
2. Verify the rectangular orientation and alignment of

the cuvette dry tip with the cuvette.
NOTE: Wear gloves if adjustment to the cuvette dry
tip is required. Residual oil from an ungloved hand
3. Select L1 (down) on the processing module keypad

or the Diagnostic perform window to move the
washer assembly down.
4. Verify the alignment of the cuvette dry tip is correct

and that it moves smoothly into the cuvettes.
5. Select L1 (up) to move the washer assembly up.
6. Select L4 (exit) to end the procedure.
7. Select Done on the Diagnostic perform window to

complete the procedure.
8. Replace the cuvette wash cover [1], and then tighten

the thumbscrew [2].
Verification
Wash the cuvettes

Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6052
Wash Cuvettes, page 9-40.
Replace the mixer (c 8000)
Replacing the mixer consists of the following procedures.

Removal
Remove the mixer, page 9-115
Replacement
Install the mixer, page 9-116
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Perform reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure 3126 Mixer

Vibration Test, page 9-116
required
Tools/materials None
required
Replacement parts LN 09D59-02 - Mixer


Removal
Remove the mixer

2. Locate the appropriate mixer.
3. Unplug the cable [1] by pinching the white connector

[2].
4. Loosen the black thumbscrew [3] on the top of the

mixer assembly.
5. Remove the mixer [4].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the mixer

1. Orient the new mixer assembly [1] so that the flat
side faces away from the mixer arm.
2. Align the positioning pins [2] on the top of the mixer

with the holes on the mixer arm. Tighten the black
thumbscrew [3] until the top of the mixer is flush with
the mixer arm.
3. Attach the cable connector to the white connector [4]

on the bottom of the mixer arm.
NOTE: This connector is keyed and only goes in one
way.
4. Fold the excess cable and fit it into the notch [5].
Verification
Perform reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure 3126 Mixer Vibration Test

Perform reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure
3126 Mixer Vibration Test, page 10-659, to verify mixer
function.
Replace the ICT module or probe (c 8000)
Replacing the ICT module or probe consists of the following

procedures:
Removal
Remove the ICT module and probe, page 9-119
Replacement

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Install the ICT module and probe, page 9-121

Verification
Calibrate ICT assays, page 9-122
required
Tools/materials NA
required
Replacement parts LN 09D63-03 - ICT probe
LN 09D28-03 - ICT module
LN 09F93-02 - ICT o-ring (optional)



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Remove the covers

1. Lift the rear cover on the processing module to
access the ICT module and probe.
2. Locate the ICT unit.
3. Loosen the thumbscrew [1] and lift the cover [2] off
the ICT unit.
4. Loosen the two captive thumbscrews [3] that secure

the black plate [4] in place.
5. Remove the black plate [4].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the ICT module and probe

1. Loosen the thumbscrew [1] on the side of the ICT
holder [2] until the ICT module [3] can be lifted up.
2. Disconnect the black electrical connector [4] from the

side of the module by pulling it straight out.
3. Verify the connector is completely free from the

module.
4. Lift the ICT module [3] until the connectors on the

side of the ICT module clear the ICT holder [2].
IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to the probe, do not
lift the ICT module and probe all the way out of the
ICT holder.
5. Gently unscrew the ICT module [3], rotating it

clockwise, to free it from the top connector [5].
6. Lift the ICT module and probe straight up out of the

ICT holder.
7. Unscrew the ICT probe holder [6] from the ICT

module.
8. Inspect the ports of the ICT module. The black

o-rings [7] MUST be present.
IMPORTANT: Running the system without the black
o-rings could affect patient results.
9. Discard the ICT module if replacing; otherwise, set it

aside for use with the new ICT probe.
10.Remove the ICT probe [8] from the probe holder.
11.Discard the probe if replacing; otherwise set it aside

for use with the new ICT module.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Install the ICT module and probe

1. Remove the ICT module from the box, if replacing the ICT
module.
2. Record the expiration date found on the ICT module box prior
to discarding the box.
It is recommended that you record and track this date to
ensure you do not use the module on the c 8000 System
beyond this date.
Once you install the ICT module on the processing module, it
is warranted for 15,000 samples or two months, whichever
occurs first.
3. Disconnect and discard the plastic tubing attached to both

ends of the ICT module.
4. Inspect the ports on the ICT module. The black o-rings [1]
MUST be present.
IMPORTANT: Running the system without the black o-rings
could affect patient results.
5. Align the ICT module so that the gap [2] between the side
connectors is on top and the label [3] is right-side up.
6. Place the ICT probe [4] into the probe holder [5].
7. Attach the probe holder and probe to the bottom of the ICT
module (finger-tighten only).
IMPORTANT: The o-rings may twist and obstruct the flow
through the ICT module if this connection is overtightened.
8. Insert the ICT module [1] with the probe [2] into the ICT
holder [3] until the connectors on the side of the ICT module
are just above the top of the ICT holder [3].
9. Rotate the ICT module [1] counterclockwise (finger-tighten

only) to reattach the ICT module to the top port [4] and to the
connector [5].
10.Allow the ICT module [1] to seat fully down into the ICT
holder [3] so that the connectors are aligned with the slot [6]
in the ICT holder [3].
11.Gently reconnect the black electrical connector [7] to the ICT

module connectors. Ensure the ICT module is completely
plugged into the connector.
12.Hold down the ICT module while tightening the side

thumbscrew [8] until secure. Do not overtighten. The ICT
module could be damaged.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Flush ICT Module, page 9-41.
2. Inspect the tubing from the ICT module for bubbles.
3. Inspect the ICT probe to ensure it does not drip.

If you observe bubbles or drips, see Processing
module observed problems (c System),
page 10-547.
4. Reattach the black plate [1] by securing it with the

two thumbscrews [2] on the top.
5. Reattach the ICT unit cover [3] and tighten the

thumbscrew [4] to secure.
Verification
Calibrate ICT assays

1. Calibrate ICT assays.
2. Run quality control samples to verify calibration.
Replace the sample carousel clip (c 8000)
Replacing the sample carousel clip consists of the following

procedures.
Removal
Remove the sample carousel clip, page 9-123
Replacement
Replace the sample carousel clip, page 9-124
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Load a sample tube, page 9-124

required
required
Replacement parts LN 04J45-01 - Sample carousel clip

Removal
Remove the sample carousel clip

page 10-706, from the processing module, and then
remove any patient samples.
2. Use the Phillips screwdriver to remove the screw [1]

securing the sample carousel clip [2] in place.
3. Remove and discard the clip.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Replace the sample carousel clip

1. Insert the new sample carousel clip [1] in the sample
carousel using the four square alignment holes [2] on
the bottom of the sample carousel to seat the clip in
position.
NOTE: The sample carousel clip only fits one way in
the sample carousel.
2. Use the Phillips screwdriver to secure the clip to the

bottom of the sample carousel using the new screw
[3] provided.
3. Place the sample carousel on the processing

module, ensuring the alignment holes fit over the
alignment pins.
Verification
Load a sample tube

Load a sample tube in the sample carousel position
where the carousel clip was replaced to verify proper
installation of the clip.
ARCHITECT c 8000 supply and pump components replacement
You may need to replace certain supply and pump components due to
normal wear from daily operations.
The following procedures provide step-by-step instructions on
replacing these components:
Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 8000), page 9-126
Replace check valves (c 8000), page 9-130
Replace the ICT reference solution filter (c 8000), page 9-134
Replace the wash solution filter (c 8000), page 9-136
Replace wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 8000),
page 9-139

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

8000), page 9-148
Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), page 9-155
component), page 9-158
Replace the float switch cable (c System optional component),
page 9-160
See ARCHITECT c 8000 supply and pump center components,
page 9-125, for component locations when performing
ARCHITECT c 8000 supply and pump center components
The following illustration shows the locations of the supply and pump
center components. Use this illustration when performing
maintenance and component replacement procedures.
Figure 9.11: ARCHITECT c 8000 supply and pump center
Legend:
1. ICT reference pump
2. Wash solution pump
3. Bulk solutions
4. Sample, reagent 1 and reagent 2 syringe drives

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
5. ICT aspiration pump

6. Cuvette wash pump
7. Probe wash pump
8. High-concentration waste pump
Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 8000)
Replacing the 1 mL syringes on the ICT reference pump, ICT

aspiration pump, and wash solution pump consists of the following
procedures.
Removal
Locate the 1 mL syringe to be replaced, page 9-127
Remove the plunger shield and the 1 mL syringe, page 9-128
Detach and replace the 1 mL syringe, page 9-128
Replacement
Reinstall the 1 mL syringe and plunger shield, page 9-129
Verification
NOTE: The same procedure is used to replace the 1 mL syringes

in all three pumps.
required
Tools/materials Absorbent towels
required
Replacement parts LN 09D41-02 - 1 mL syringe
NOTE: The same 1 mL syringe is used for the ICT

reference pump, the ICT aspiration pump, and the
wash solution pump.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Locate the 1 mL syringe to be replaced

1. Open the supply center door. Open the pump center
door.
2. Locate the 1 mL syringe to be replaced:

ICT reference pump [1]
Wash solution pump [2]
ICT aspiration pump [3]

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the plunger shield and the 1 mL syringe

1. Remove the clear plunger shield [1] by removing the
two black knobs [2].
2. Pull the 1 mL syringe [3] forward to remove it from

the syringe holder.
Detach and replace the 1 mL syringe

1. Place an absorbent towel under the pump area to
absorb any liquid.
2. Unscrew the syringe assembly [1] from the check

valve [2].
3. Screw the new syringe assembly [1] onto the check

valve [2].
NOTE: Be sure to replace the syringe and plunger
(components of the syringe assembly) as a pair.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Reinstall the 1 mL syringe and plunger shield

1. Reinstall the syringe [1].
2. Verify the plunger flange [2] is below the U-shaped

holder and the bottom of the syringe barrel is in the
groove at the bottom of the syringe holder [3].
3. Reinstall the clear plunger shield [4] and secure it

with the black knobs [5].
4. Remove the absorbent towel from the pump area.

1. Perform the following as-needed maintenance
procedures to remove any air that may be present:
6063 Flush ICT Module, page 9-41, for the ICT
reference and ICT aspiration pumps
2155 Flush Bulk Solutions, page 9-39, for the
wash solution pump
2. Visually check for leaks while performing the flush.

procedure.
Verification


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replace check valves (c 8000)
Replacing the check valves on the ICT reference pump, ICT aspiration
pump, or wash solution pump consists of the following procedures.
Removal
Locate the check valve to be replaced, page 9-131
Remove the check valve tubing, page 9-132
Replacement
Replace the check valve, page 9-132
Reinstall the check valve tubing, page 9-133
Verification
required
required
Replacement parts LN 09D35-02 - ICT Reference or ICT Aspiration
Check Valve
LN 09D34-02 - Wash Solution Check Valve
NOTE: The ICT reference and aspiration pumps use

the same list number. The wash solution pump uses
a different list number. Ensure the correct part is
used.



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Locate the check valve to be replaced

1. Open the supply center and pump center doors.
2. Locate the check valve to be replaced:

ICT reference pump [1]
Wash solution pump [2]
ICT aspiration pump [3]


the syringe holder.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the check valve tubing

1. Place absorbent towels under the pump area to
absorb any liquid.
2. Disconnect the top [1] and side [2] tubing from the
check valve [3].
Replacement
Replace the check valve

1. Unscrew the syringe body [1] from the check valve
[2].
2. Install the new check valve onto the syringe, and

finger-tighten.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Reinstall the check valve tubing

Reattach the top [1] and side [2] tubing to the check
valve [3].

1. Reinstall the 1 mL syringe [1].
2. Verify the syringe plunger flange [2] is below the

U-shaped holder and the bottom of the syringe barrel
is in the groove at the bottom of the syringe holder
[3].
3. Reinstall the clear plunger shield [4] and tighten the

black knobs [5] finger-tight.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

wash solution pump

procedure.

Change ICT Asp Check Valve, page 9-33, to
document the ICT aspiration check valve
replacement in the Maintenance log.
Verification

Replace the ICT reference solution filter (c 8000)
Replacing the ICT reference solution filter consists of the following

procedures:
Removal
Remove the ICT reference solution tubing, page 9-135
Remove the ICT reference solution filter, page 9-135
Replacement
Replace the ICT reference solution filter and tubing, page 9-136
Verification
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2155, page 9-136
required
required
Replacement parts LN 09D43-02 - Reference/wash solution line filter

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Remove the ICT reference solution tubing

The ICT reference solution filter is located at the end
of the tubing in the ICT reference solution bottle [1].
2. Remove the tubing from the ICT reference solution

bottle and set it aside on an absorbent towel.
Remove the ICT reference solution filter

1. Pull the filter [1] from the connector that is attached
to the end of the ICT reference solution tubing [2].
2. Discard the filter into the appropriate waste

receptacle.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Replace the ICT reference solution filter and tubing

1. Insert the new ICT reference filter [1] in the tubing
connector [2].
2. Insert the tubing in the ICT reference solution bottle,

and ensure the tubing reaches the bottom of the
bottle.
Verification

Flush Bulk Solutions, page 9-39.
2. Observe all connections to ensure there are no

leaks.
procedure.
3. Run quality control samples to verify performance.
Replace the wash solution filter (c 8000)
Replacing the wash solution filter consists of the following procedures:

Removal
Remove the tubing, page 9-137
Remove the wash solution filter, page 9-138
Replacement
Replace wash solution filter and tubing, page 9-138
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

required
required
Replacement parts LN 09D43-02 - Reference/wash solution filter

Removal
Remove the tubing

Wash solution filters are located at the end of the
tubing in the alkaline [1] and acid [2] wash solution
bottles.
2. Remove the tubing from the wash solution bottle and

set it aside on an absorbent towel.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the wash solution filter

to the end of the wash solution tubing [2].
2. Discard the filter in the appropriate waste receptacle.
Replacement
Replace wash solution filter and tubing

1. Insert the new filter [1] in the tubing connector [2].
2. Insert the tubing in the appropriate wash solution

bottle, and ensure the tubing reaches the bottom of
the bottle.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Verification


leaks.
procedure.
Replace wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c

8000)
Replacing the wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2
consists of the following procedures.
Removal
Remove the clear outer plunger shield, page 9-141
Disconnect the wash solution syringe block tubing, page 9-142
Remove the clear inner plunger shield and syringe block,
page 9-143
Remove the syringe plunger, page 9-143
Remove the o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2, page 9-144
Replacement
Install the o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2, page 9-145
Install the syringe plunger, page 9-145
Install the syringe block and attach the clear inner plunger shield,
page 9-146
Connect the wash solution syringe block tubing, page 9-146
Install the clear outer plunger shield, page 9-147
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

required
required Slotted screwdriver
10 mm wrench
Cotton swabs
Absorbent towel
Replacement parts LN 09D52-02 - Sample/wash solution syringe o-ring
LN 09D37-02 - Sample/wash solution syringe seal tip
#1
#2



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Remove the clear outer plunger shield

2. Locate the wash solution pump.
3. Loosen and remove the black knobs [1] securing the

clear outer plunger shield [2].
4. Remove the shield.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Disconnect the wash solution syringe block tubing

absorb any liquid.
2. Slide the 1 mL syringes [1] out of their drive block; do

not disconnect them.
3. Unscrew the left-top grey knurled connection [2] from

the top of the syringe block.
NOTE: The tubing labeled 2, coming from the
instrument, connects to the left-top connection [2].
The tubing labeled 3, coming from the instrument,
connects to the right-top connection [3]. Do not
interchange the tubing.
4. Unscrew the right-top grey knurled connection [3].
5. Unscrew the grey knurled connections [4] from the

front of the syringe block [5].
NOTE: The tubing coming from the 1 mL syringe on
the left connects to the left-front connection. The
tubing coming from the 1 mL syringe on the right
connects to the right-front connection. Do not
6. Ensure the black seals remain in the syringe block

when the grey knurled connections are
disconnected.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the clear inner plunger shield and syringe block

1. Remove the clear inner plunger shield [1] by
removing the two Phillips screws [2] securing the
shield.
2. Use the slotted screwdriver to loosen the slotted

screw [3] securing the clear syringe block [4] in
place. The screw is captive and cannot be
completely removed.
3. Pull the syringe block forward to allow the plungers to

clear the syringe drive.
4. Lift the syringe block up to remove it from the

module.
5. Identify the syringe needing the new o-ring and seal

tips.
Remove the syringe plunger

1. Use the 10 mm wrench to loosen the nut [1] securing
the syringe plunger [2] on the bottom of the syringe
block [3].
2. Turn the nut by hand, once loosened, until the

syringe plunger can be removed from the syringe
block.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2

The plunger assembly includes the following parts:
O-ring [1]
IMPORTANT: The o-ring may have remained in the
syringe block when removing the plunger assembly.
Seal tip 2 [2]
Spacer [3]
Seal tip 1 [4]
Spring [5]
Nut [6]
Plunger [7]
Plunger flange [8]
1. Remove the following. Set aside or discard (except
for spacer) if being replaced:
O-ring [1]
Seal tip 2 [2]
Spacer [3] - set aside, do not discard
Seal tip 1 [4]
NOTE: Do not remove the spring.
2. Dry the interior of the syringe barrel with a cotton

swab and dry the plunger completely with an
absorbent towel if liquid is present.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2

1. Install seal tip 1 [1] onto the plunger so that it sits
above the spring, with the open side away from the
spring.
2. Install the spacer [2] so that it fits into the open side
of seal tip 1.
3. Install the seal tip 2 [3] on top of the spacer with the
open side toward the spacer.
4. Install the o-ring [4] so that it fits into the groove of

the seal tip 2. Do not push the o-ring out of
alignment. The o-ring must sit flat against the inside
of the syringe block.
5. Press lightly to push all the components together.
Install the syringe plunger

1. Install the plunger assembly into the syringe block
[1].
2. Tighten the nut [2] holding the plunger assembly into

the syringe block until finger-tight.
NOTE: The nut must be flush with the plunger
assembly. If the nut binds when tightening, do not
apply excessive force. Back the nut out a turn, and
then, while pushing in to apply pressure against the
spring, continue to tighten the nut.
3. Use the 10 mm wrench to further tighten the nut [2]

securing the plunger [3]. Do not overtighten.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Install the syringe block and attach the clear inner plunger shield
1. Ensure a black seal remains in each of the tubing
ports in the syringe block.
2. Hold the syringe block [1] so that the slotted screw

[2] faces you.
3. Align the syringe block to the pins [3] on the syringe

holder, verifying that both plunger flanges [4] are
below the U-shaped holders.
4. Hold the syringe block against the alignment pins

and tighten the screw by hand until finger-tight.
Secure with a slotted screwdriver.
5. Attach the clear inner plunger shield [5] and tighten

the Phillips screws [6].
Connect the wash solution syringe block tubing

1. Connect the grey knurled connection labeled 2 from
the 1 mL syringe to the left-front port [1].
2. Connect the grey knurled connection labeled 2

coming from the instrument to the left-top port [2].

the syringe to the right-front port [3].

the instrument to the right-top port [4].
5. Verify the 1 mL syringe tubing connections did not

loosen during the removal and replacement
procedure.
6. Reinstall the 1 mL syringes [5] into the syringe

holder.
7. Ensure the plunger flange is below the U-shaped

holder and that the bottom of the syringe barrel is in
the groove at the bottom of the syringe holder.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Install the clear outer plunger shield

1. Attach the clear outer plunger shield [1] and tighten
the black knobs [2] until finger-tight.

Flush Water Lines, page 9-38, to remove any air that
may be present.

procedure.

Wash Syringe Maintenance, page 9-31, to document
wash solution o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2
Verification


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2

(c 8000)
Replacing the sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2
Removal
Locate the syringe and remove the plunger shield, page 9-150
Remove the syringe bracket, page 9-150
Remove the syringe block, page 9-151
Replacement
Install the syringe block, page 9-154
Install the syringe bracket and plunger shield, page 9-154
Verification
required

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

10 mm wrench
Cotton swabs
Absorbent towel
#1
#2
LN 09D53-02 - Reagent syringe o-ring
LN 09D39-02 - Reagent syringe seal tip #1
NOTE: The o-rings and seal tips 1 and 2 for the

sample and reagent syringes are different sizes. Be
sure to install the correct part in the appropriate
syringe.



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Locate the syringe and remove the plunger shield

2. Locate the appropriate syringe:

Sample syringe [1]
R1 syringe [2]
R2 syringe [3]
3. Remove the two Phillips screws [4] securing the

shield.
4. Remove the shield. [5]
Remove the syringe bracket

Remove the syringe bracket holding the syringe plunger
to the drive block by removing the two Phillips screws
[1] on the syringe bracket [2].
NOTE: Notice that these screws are shorter than the

screws from the clear plunger shield. Do not
interchange the two sets of screws.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the syringe block

screw [1] securing the syringe block [2] in place. The
screw is captive and cannot be completely removed.
2. Place an absorbent towel under the syringe drive to

absorb any liquid.
3. Disconnect the tubing at the top [3] and side [4] of

the syringe block by unscrewing the knurled
connections.
4. Ensure the black seal remains in the syringe block

once the tubing is disconnected.

block [3].

block.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

O-ring [1]
NOTE: The o-ring may have remained in the syringe
block when removing the plunger assembly.
Seal tip 2 [2]
Spacer [3]
Seal tip 1 [4]
Spring [5]
Nut [6]
Plunger [7]
Plunger flange [8]
O-ring [1]
Seal tip 2 [2]
Seal tip 1 [4]


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement

spring.
of seal tip 1.
3. Install seal tip 2 [3] on top of the spacer, with the


seal tip 2. Do not push the o-ring out of alignment.
The o-ring must sit flat against the inside of the
syringe block.

[1].


securing the plunger [3].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Install the syringe block

[2] faces you.
2. Ensure the black seals remain in place in each port

and reconnect the tubing at the top and side [3] of
the syringe block by screwing the knurled
connections [3].

holder, verifying that the plunger flange is above the
drive block [5]. Move any tubing out of the way.

and tighten the screw [2] by hand until finger-tight.
Secure the screw with a slotted screwdriver.
Install the syringe bracket and plunger shield

1. Attach the syringe bracket [1] to connect the drive
block and syringe plunger.
2. Use the Phillips screwdriver to install the screws [2].

NOTE: Verify the shorter screws are used in the
bracket. Do not use the longer screws for the plunger
shield.
3. Attach the clear plunger shield [3] by tightening the

two (2) Phillips screws [4].
4. Remove the absorbent towel from the syringe drive.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

may be present.

If drips or leaks are observed, repeat the installation
procedure.

Sample Syringe Maintenance, page 9-30, or 6303
Reagent Syringe Maintenance, page 9-32, to
document sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal
tips in the Maintenance log.
NOTE: Only perform this maintenance procedure if
you replaced the o-ring and seal tips in both the R1
and R2 syringes.
Verification

further Verification is required.
Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000)
Replacing the pump poppet valve set on the cuvette wash pump,
probe wash pump, and the high-concentration waste pump consists of
the following procedures.
Removal
Locate the pump poppet valve and clamp the tubing, page 9-157
Remove the pump poppet valve, page 9-157
Replacement
Replace the pump poppet valve, page 9-158
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: The same procedure is used to replace the pump poppet

valve set in all three pumps.
required
Tools/materials Clamp or large hemostats
required Absorbent towels
Replacement parts LN 09D36-02 - Pump poppet valve set
NOTE: The same pump poppet valve set is used for

all three pumps.



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Locate the pump poppet valve and clamp the tubing

2. Locate the appropriate pump:

Cuvette wash pump [1]
Probe wash pump [2]
High-concentration waste pump [3]
3. Clamp the flexible inlet tubing [4] of the pump

containing the poppet valve.
Remove the pump poppet valve

1. Place absorbent towels in the pump area to absorb
any liquid.
2. Unscrew the top or side [1] elbow fitting securing the

tubing to the pump connection.
NOTE: It is recommended that the top and side
poppet valves be replaced at the same time.
3. Remove the poppet valve [3] and o-ring [4] from the
connection [2]. To remove the top poppet valve, it
may be necessary to remove the side connector and
push the top poppet valve up from the bottom.
4. Discard the valve and o-ring.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Replace the pump poppet valve

1. Rinse the new poppet valve and o-ring with Reagent
Grade Type II water.
2. Install the poppet valve [3] and o-ring [4] onto the
connection [2] as illustrated.
3. Screw the top or side [1] elbow fitting to the

connection [2].
4. Finger-tighten the fitting at the pump connection.
5. Release the clamp on the flexible tubing.
6. Remove the absorbent towels from the pump area.

may be present.

procedure.
Verification

further Verification is required.

component)
The high-concentration waste bottle is used to collect the

high-concentration liquid waste from the cuvettes and the ICT unit.
Replacing this component consists of the following procedures.
Removal
Remove the high-concentration waste bottle, page 9-159
Replacement

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replace the high-concentration waste bottle, page 9-160

Verification
Verify waste volume on the Supply status screen, page 9-160
required
required
Replacement parts LN 03E50-26 - High Concentration Waste Bottle


CAUTION: Lifting Hazard. The c System

Removal
Remove the high-concentration waste bottle

1. Disconnect the float switch cable from the
high-concentration waste bottle cap by unscrewing
the locking ring [1] and disconnecting the float switch
cable [2].
2. Unscrew the high-concentration waste bottle from

the cap.
3. Ensure the tubing is not kinked.
4. Carefully remove the tubing from the top of the waste

bottle cap.
5. Discard the old bottle and cap in a biohazardous

waste container.
6. Discard waste in accordance with the appropriate

waste disposal regulations.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Replace the high-concentration waste bottle

1. Insert the tubing [1] into the new cap [2].
2. Position the tubing just above, but not touching, the

float switch [3].
3. Screw the waste bottle onto the cap.
5. Reconnect the float switch cable by inserting the

cable and tightening the locking ring.
6. Ensure the waste bottle is labeled as waste.
Verification
Verify waste volume on the Supply status screen

Verify the correct volume of waste displays on the
Supply status screen.
Replace the float switch cable (c System optional component)
The float switch cable is used to connect the float switch in the
high-concentration waste bottle. Replacing this component consists of
Removal
Disconnect the cable, page 9-161
Replacement
Connect the cable, page 9-162
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

required
required
Replacement parts LN 03E50-31 - High Concentration Float Switch Cable



Removal
Disconnect the cable

cable [2].
2. Disconnect the other end of the float switch cable

from the back of the module using the information in
the previous step.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Connect the cable

1. Connect one end of the replacement cable to the
back of the module by inserting the cable and
NOTE: Both ends of the cable are identical.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the

high-concentration waste bottle by inserting the
Verification

c 16000 component replacement

Component replacement for the c 16000 includes:
ARCHITECT c 16000 processing center component replacement,
page 9-162
ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump components replacement,
page 9-202
ARCHITECT c 16000 processing center component replacement
To replace processing center components, see:

Replace the sample probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-171
Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-174
Replace the lamp or lamp plate (c 16000), page 9-178
Replace a cuvette (c 16000), page 9-183
Replace a cuvette segment (c 16000), page 9-186
Replace the cuvette dry tips (c 16000), page 9-189

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replace the mixer (c 16000), page 9-192

Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000), page 9-194
Replace the sample carousel clip (c 16000), page 9-200
See ARCHITECT c 16000 processing center components, page 9-163, for
ARCHITECT c 16000 processing center components
The following illustration shows the locations of the processing center

components. Use this illustration when performing component
Figure 9.12: ARCHITECT c 16000 processing center map
Legend:
1. Sample carousel and cover
2. Sample pipettor
3. Reaction carousel
4. Lamp
5. Mixer unit
6. Cuvette washer
7. ICT unit
9. Reagent 2 (A and B) pipettor(s)
11. Reagent 1 (A and B) pipettor(s)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replace the sample probe (c 16000)
NOTE: It is recommended that you record and track the date of

sample probe installation to ensure you do not use the probe for
longer than one year.
Replacing the sample probe consists of the following procedures:
Removal
Prepare for sample probe removal, page 9-165
Remove the sample probe, page 9-165
Replacement
Install the sample probe, page 9-166
Verification
Calibrate the sample pipettor, page 9-167
required
Tools/materials Slotted screwdriver
required Absorbent towel
Replacement parts LN 01G48-03 - Sample probe
LN 02J51-01 - Sample probe screw (optional)




(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Prepare for sample probe removal

page 10-706.

Remove the sample probe



screw [3].

until the probe releases from the sample pipettor.

sample probe grounding wire [5] in place.

probe [7].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the sample probe

1. Attach the tubing [1] to the top of the new sample
probe [2].
should fit firmly on the sample probe. If the tubing is
replace the sample probe tubing.
2. Position the sample probe on the alignment pins [3]

and verify the probe plate [4] is flush with the plate on
3. Remove the probe screw [5] from the old sample

probe and insert it into the new sample probe.
Finger-tighten the screw [5] to secure the probe.

5. Attach the new sample probe grounding wire [6] and



carousel area.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


procedure.

cover.


page 10-707.
Verification
Calibrate the sample pipettor

2. Run quality control to verify operation.
Replace reagent probes (c 16000)
Replacing the reagent probe(s) consists of the following procedures:

Removal
Prepare for reagent probe removal, page 9-168
Remove the reagent probe, page 9-169
Replacement
Install the reagent probe, page 9-170
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Calibrate the Reagent pipettor, page 9-171

required
Tools required Slotted screwdriver
Absorbent towel
Replacement parts LN 09D48-02 - Reagent Probe - R1A/R2B (L)
LN 09D49-02 - Reagent Probe - R1B/R2A (r)
LN 09D48-10 - Reagent probe screw (optional)



Removal
Prepare for reagent probe removal

Access the R1A [1] and R1B [2] pipettors from the
front of the system.
Access the R2A [3] and R2B [4] pipettors from the
back of the system.
2. If the reagent pipettor is not over the wash cup,

initiate pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161 Probe
Move, page 10-660, to position the reagent pipettor.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the reagent probe

1. Remove the reagent pipettor cover [1] by loosening
the two screws [2] beneath the pipettor arm while
gently lifting the cover.
NOTE: The screws should only be loosened enough
to allow for cover removal. Ensure the screws remain
captive in the arm.

screw [3].

until the probe releases from the reagent pipettor.

probe [5].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the reagent probe

1. Determine which probe requires replacement and
obtain the correct replacement part:
LN09D48-02 R1A/R2B (L) must be used on the
R1A [1] or R2B [2] pipettor
LN09D49-02 R1B/R2A (r) must be used on the
R1B [3] or R2A [4] pipettor
2. Attach the tubing [5] to the top of the new reagent

probe [6].
should fit firmly on the reagent probe. If the tubing is
replace the reagent probe tubing.
3. Position the new reagent probe [6] on the alignment

pins [7] and verify the probe plate [8] is flush with the
plate on the reagent pipettor.
4. Remove the probe screw [9] from the old reagent

probe and insert it into the new reagent probe.
Finger-tighten the screw [9] to secure the probe in
place.


probe to the home position.

solution area.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


procedure.

cover.
4. Finger-tighten the screws [2] beneath the pipettor

arm to attach the cover. Some gentle movement may
be necessary to align the screws with the cover.
Verification
Calibrate the Reagent pipettor

1. Perform the appropriate as-needed maintenance
procedure:
2. Run quality control to verify performance.
Replace the sample probe tubing (c 16000)
Replacing the sample probe tubing consists of the following

procedures:
Removal
Prepare for sample probe tubing removal, page 9-172
Remove the sample probe tubing, page 9-173
Replacement
Install the sample probe tubing, page 9-173
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

required
required
Replacement parts LN 01G48-02 - Sample probe tubing



Removal
Prepare for sample probe tubing removal

page 10-706


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the sample probe tubing


3. Unscrew the tubing from the probe tubing connector

[3]. Ensure the black o-ring inside the tubing
connector stays in place.

probe [5].
Replacement
Install the sample probe tubing

1. Attach the end of the new tubing [1] to the top of the
sample probe [2].
tubing should fit firmly on the sample probe.
2. Verify the black o-ring is inside the probe tubing

connector [3].
3. Screw the opposite end of the tubing [4] into the

tubing connector [3].


carousel area.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


procedure.

cover.


page 10-707.
Verification

Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 16000)
Replacing the reagent probe tubing consists of the following

procedures:
Removal
Prepare for reagent probe tubing removal, page 9-175
Remove the reagent probe tubing, page 9-176
Replacement
Install the reagent probe tubing, page 9-177
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

required
Replacement parts LN 09D48-05 - Tubing, Joint to R probe, R1 and 2A
LD 09D49-05 - Tubing, Joint to R probe, R1 and 2B
LN 09D48-10 - Reagent probe screw (optional)



Removal
Prepare for reagent probe tubing removal

Access the R1 A and B pipettors from the front of
the system.
Access the R2 A and B pipettors from the back of
the system.
2. If the reagent pipettor is not over the wash cup,

initiate pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161 Probe
Move, page 10-660, to position the reagent pipettor.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the reagent probe tubing

1. Remove the reagent pipettor cover [1] by loosening
the two screws [2] beneath the pipettor arm while
gently lifting the cover.
NOTE: The screws should only be loosened enough
to allow for cover removal. Ensure the screws remain
captive in the arm.

screw [3]. Continue to loosen the probe screw by
hand until the probe is released from the reagent
pipettor arm. Do not completely remove the screw.
4. Gently disconnect the tubing from the top of the

probe [4] and then remove the tubing from the black
routing clips [5].
5. Gently disconnect the tubing from the metal tubing

connector [6].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the reagent probe tubing

1. Attach the end of the new tubing and metal
connector [1] to the reagent pipettor tubing [2].
NOTE: Do not flare or stretch the new tubing.
2. Begin routing the tubing by performing one of the

following:
For reagent pipettor R1B and R2B, route the
tubing through the black routing clips [3] and [4].
Proceed to step 5.
For reagent pipettor R1A and R2A, insert the
tubing in the first black routing clip [3] at the metal
connector. Proceed to step 3.
NOTE: It is important to route the tubing as instructed
to prevent crimping when the pipettor cover is
replaced.
3. Route the tubing to the front end of the reagent arm

and then loop it toward the back of the reagent arm
being careful not to pinch the tubing.
4. Gently loop the tubing toward the front of the reagent

arm and then route it through the second black
routing clip [4].
5. Attach the tubing [5] to the reagent probe [6].

tubing should fit firmly on the reagent probe.
6. Position the probe [6] on the alignment pins [7] so

that the probe plate is flush with the plate on the
reagent pipettor arm.
7. Finger-tighten the screw [8] to hold the probe in

place. Stabilize the pipettor arm and use the
screwdriver to tighten the screw.
8. Complete the pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161

Probe Move, page 10-660 to return the reagent
9. Remove the absorbent towel.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


procedure.

tubing is not pinched or crimped below the pipettor
cover.
4. Finger-tighten the screws [2] beneath the pipettor

arm to attach the cover. Some gentle movement may
be necessary to align the screws with the cover.
Verification

Replace the lamp or lamp plate (c 16000)
Replacing the lamp or lamp plate consists of the following procedures:

Removal
Remove the terminal cable connections, page 9-180
Remove the lamp, page 9-180
Replacement
Install the lamp plate and lamp, page 9-181
Install the terminal cables, page 9-182
Install the processing module cover, page 9-182
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Run quality control, page 9-182

Prerequisite Power off the processing module.
required
NOTE: Time does not include lamp warm up (30
minutes)
required Gloves
Replacement parts LN 09D45-02 - Lamp

page 8-21.
Removal
Prepare for removal

IMPORTANT: Never remove the lamp or lamp plate

with the processing module powered on.
Power off the processing module by using the main
circuit breaker located at the rear of the module.
Remove the covers


cool.
NOTE: The lamp can be accessed from the back of

1. Open the rear processing module cover. Locate the
reaction carousel rear cover [1] located between the
reagent 2 supply center [2] and the reaction carousel
[3].
2. Remove the screws [4] securing the cover in place

and remove the cover.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the terminal cable connections

1. Locate the terminal block [1].
2. Remove the transparent cover [2] from the terminal

block by grasping both ends and lifting up.
3. Using the Phillips screwdriver, completely loosen the

two captive screws [3] securing the two lamp cables
[4] on the terminal block.
4. Raise the screws [5] and lower the lamp cables [4]
completely to allow you to disengage the cables from
the bottom of the screws.
Remove the lamp


cool.
1. Completely loosen the top thumbscrew [1] on the
lamp plate [2] in the housing.
2. Lift the lamp plate and loosen the other thumbscrew

[3] to remove the lamp from the plate.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the lamp plate and lamp


following steps. Residual oil on the glass surface of
the lamp shortens the lamp life. The glass surface
may be cleaned with ethanol, if necessary.
1. Insert the replacement lamp [1] fitting the pins [2] into
the pin holes [3] on the lamp plate [4].
2. Verify the filament [5] is perpendicular to the lamp

plate [4].
3. Tighten the thumbscrew [6] on the lamp plate while

the lamp is fully inserted into the pin holes.
4. Insert the lamp assembly into the housing [7],

pressing it against the leaf spring [8], and down into
the housing. Ensure the lamp assembly is properly
seated into the housing.
5. Verify the lamp cables [9] are through the slot behind
the lamp and are not pinched by the lamp plate.
6. Tighten the thumbscrew [10] to secure the lamp in

place.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Install the terminal cables

1. Raise the screws [1] and insert the cables [2] under
the screws.
2. Use the Phillips screwdriver to tighten the two captive

screws [3] securing the two lamp cables [4] on the
terminal block.
3. Wrap excess lamp cables and secure with white

plastic clamp [5].
4. Replace the transparent cover [6] on the terminal

block.
5. Power on the processing module. The system control

center power MUST be on prior to turning on the
processing module to ensure proper initialization.
6. Check for stray light around lamp housing cover.
Install the processing module cover

1. Replace the reaction carousel rear cover.
2. Close the rear processing module cover.

handler, page 5-13, to change the status of the
processing module and sample handler from
Stopped to Ready.
NOTE: The lamp must warm up 30 minutes prior to
running assays.

Change Lamp, page 9-29, to document the lamp
change in the Maintenance log.
Verification
Run quality control

Run quality control to verify performance.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replace a cuvette (c 16000)
Replacing a cuvette consists of the following procedures.

Removal
Clean replacement cuvette, page 9-184
Remove the individual cuvette pair, page 9-185
Replacement
Install the individual cuvette pair, page 9-185
Reinstall the cuvette segment, page 9-186
Verification
required
Cotton swabs
Slotted screwdriver
cuvettes
Gloves
Replacement parts LN 09D33-03 - Cuvette Pair Replacement Set


is an activity or area where you may be exposed to sharps.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal

1. Determine the cuvette number requiring
replacement.
2. Identify the cuvette segment that contains this

cuvette.

reaction carousel.

rotate the carousel so that the cuvette to be replaced
is at the front of the module.

[1] located on the top of the cuvette segment [2] until
the segment can be removed from the reaction
carousel.
6. Inspect all cuvettes in the segment and replace if

damaged.
7. Set the cuvette segment aside on a lint-free

absorbent towel.
Clean replacement cuvette


1. Remove the new cuvette(s) from the shipping
container and place them on a lint-free absorbent
towel.

inside and outside of the new cuvette(s).

submerge the new cuvette(s) [2].
4. Rinse the cuvette(s) in the water to remove the

cuvette(s).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the individual cuvette pair

NOTE: Wear gloves when you perform the following

steps. Residual oil from an ungloved hand may cause
imprecise optical reads.
1. Grasp the cuvette segment [1] and gently push up on
the desired cuvette pair [2] to remove it from the
segment.
CAUTION: There is a leaf spring [3] between the two
cuvettes. Be careful not to lose this leaf spring since
no replacement spring is provided.
WARNING: The spring is very sharp and should be
handled with care.
2. Once a portion of the cuvette pair is raised above the

top surface of the segment, grasp the cuvette pair
gently and pull straight out.
Replacement
Install the individual cuvette pair

1. Align the new cuvettes so the frosted sides of the
cuvettes are facing each other.
2. Position the leaf spring between the frosted sides of

the two cuvettes. The square end of the leaf spring
[1] must be installed at the top of the cuvette pair [2].
WARNING: The spring is very sharp and should be
handled with care.
3. Holding the spring between the cuvette pair, insert

the cuvettes into the segment.
4. Gently push the cuvette pair down until the top of the
cuvettes are just below the upper surface of the
cuvette segment [3].
5. Inspect the cuvettes to ensure the frosted sides are

not visible and the bottoms are aligned with the other
cuvettes. It may be necessary to press them gently
against the bottom outside edge.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Reinstall the cuvette segment

2. Finger-tighten the slotted screws [3] into the

segment.
3. Gently tighten the screws with the slotted

screwdriver.
Verification

Replace a cuvette segment (c 16000)
Replacing a cuvette segment consists of the following procedures.

Removal
Clean replacement cuvette segment, page 9-188
Replacement
Install the cuvette segment, page 9-189
Verification
required

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Cotton swabs
Slotted screwdriver
cuvettes
Gloves
Replacement parts LN 09D32-03 - Cuvette segment


Removal

1. Determine the cuvette segment requiring
replacement.

reaction carousel.

rotate the carousel so that the appropriate cuvette
segment is at the front of the module.

[1] located on the top of the cuvette segment [2] until
the segment can be removed from the reaction
carousel.
5. Dispose of the cuvette segment.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Clean replacement cuvette segment


1. Remove the new cuvette segment from the shipping
container and place it on a lint-free absorbent towel.

inside and outside of all of the cuvettes in the new
cuvette segment.

submerge the new cuvette segment [2].
4. Rinse the cuvette segment in the water to remove the

cuvettes.
5. Dry the top of the cuvette segment [3], especially the

slotted edges [4], to remove any remaining water.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the cuvette segment

2. Finger-tighten the slotted screws [3] on the segment.
3. Gently tighten the screws with a slotted screwdriver.
Verification

Replace the cuvette dry tips (c 16000)
Replacing the cuvette dry tips consist of the following procedures.

Removal
Remove the cuvette washer assembly, page 9-190
Remove the cuvette dry tips, page 9-191
Replacement
Install the cuvette dry tips and cuvette washer assembly,
page 9-191
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Wash the cuvettes, page 9-192

required
Tools/materials Metric ruler
required Gloves
Replacement parts LN 09D51-02 - Cuvette dry tips


Removal
Remove the cuvette washer assembly

2. Remove the cuvette washer cover [1] by unscrewing

the thumbscrew [2].
3. Loosen the black knurled knob [3] to the left of the

cuvette washer until the cuvette washer assembly [4]
can be lifted from the mounting bracket.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the cuvette dry tips


1. Lift the cuvette washer assembly and rotate it so you
can easily access the white cuvette dry tip.
NOTE: The cuvette washer nozzles are attached to
the black nozzle mounting plate. You do not need to
remove any of the screws securing the wash nozzles
to the mounting plate.
2. Remove the cuvette dry tip(s) [1] by pulling it off the

metal nozzle(s) [2].
3. Discard the used tips.
Replacement
Install the cuvette dry tips and cuvette washer assembly


interferes with the proper drying function of the tips.
1. Gently install the new cuvette dry tips, taking care to
orient them properly.
NOTE: The cuvette dry tips and the cuvettes are both
rectangular in shape. Install the dry tip(s) so they fit
into the cuvettes.
2. Position the bottom of the cuvette dry tips 61 0.5

mm from the underside of the cuvette washer
assembly [1].
3. Position the cuvette washer assembly [2] on the

alignment pins [3], and then tighten the black knurled
knob [4].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

1. Initiate Fuses/Motors diagnostic procedure 5142
Wash Station Up/Down, page 10-664 to home the
cuvette washer assembly and reaction carousel.
2. Verify the rectangular orientation and alignment of

the cuvette dry tips with the cuvettes.
NOTE: Wear gloves if adjustment to the cuvette dry
tips is required. Residual oil from an ungloved hand
interferes with the proper drying function of the tips.
3. Select L1 (down) on the processing module keypad

or the Diagnostic perform window to move the
washer assembly down.
4. Verify the alignment of each cuvette dry tip is correct

and that it moves smoothly into the cuvettes.
5. Select L1 (up) to move the washer assembly up.
6. Select L4 (exit) to end the procedure.
7. Select Done on the Diagnostic perform window to

complete the procedure.
8. Replace the cuvette wash cover [1], and then tighten

the thumbscrew [2].
Verification
Wash the cuvettes

Wash Cuvettes, page 9-40.
Replace the mixer (c 16000)
Replacing the mixer consists of the following procedures.

Removal
Remove the mixer, page 9-193
Replacement
Install the mixer, page 9-194
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Perform reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure 3126 Mixer

Vibration Test, page 9-194
required
required
Replacement parts LN 09D59-02 - Mixer


Removal
Remove the mixer

2. Locate the appropriate mixer.
3. Unplug the cable [1] by pinching the white connector

[2].
4. Loosen the black thumbscrew [3] on the top of the

mixer assembly.
5. Remove the mixer [4].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the mixer

1. Orient the new mixer assembly [1] so that the flat
side faces away from the mixer arm.
2. Align the positioning pins [2] on the top of the mixer

with the holes on the mixer arm. Tighten the black
thumbscrew [3] until the top of the mixer is flush with
the mixer arm.
3. Attach the cable connector to the white connector [4]

on the bottom of the mixer arm.
NOTE: This connector is keyed and only goes in one
way.
4. Fold the excess cable and fit it into the notch [5].
Verification
Perform reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure 3126 Mixer Vibration Test

Perform reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure
3126 Mixer Vibration Test, page 10-659, to verify mixer
function.
Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000)
Replacing the ICT module or probe consists of the following

procedures:
Removal
Remove the ICT module and probe, page 9-197
Replacement

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Install the ICT module and probe, page 9-199

Verification
Calibrate ICT assays, page 9-200
required
Tools/materials NA
required
Replacement parts LN 09D63-03 - ICT probe
LN 09D28-03 - ICT module
LN 09F93-02 - ICT o-ring (optional)



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Remove the covers

1. Lift the rear cover on the processing module to
access the ICT module and probe.
2. Locate the ICT unit.
3. Loosen the thumbscrew [1] and lift the cover [2] off
the ICT unit.
4. Loosen the two captive thumbscrews [3] that secure

the black plate [4] in place.
5. Remove the black plate [4].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the ICT module and probe

1. Loosen the thumbscrew [1] on the side of the ICT
holder [2] until the ICT module [3] can be lifted up.
2. Disconnect the black electrical connector [4] from the

side of the module by pulling it straight out.
3. Verify the connector is completely free from the

module.
4. Lift the ICT module [3] until the connectors on the

side of the ICT module clear the ICT holder [2].
IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to the probe, do not
lift the ICT module and probe all the way out of the
ICT holder.
5. Gently unscrew the ICT module [3], rotating it

clockwise, to free it from the top connector [5].
6. Lift the ICT module and probe straight up out of the

ICT holder.
7. Unscrew the ICT probe holder [6] from the ICT

module.
8. Inspect the ports of the ICT module. The black

o-rings [7] MUST be present.
IMPORTANT: Running the system without the black
o-rings could affect patient results.
9. Discard the ICT module if replacing; otherwise, set it

aside for use with the new ICT probe.
10.Remove the ICT probe [8] from the probe holder.
11.Discard the probe if replacing; otherwise set it aside

for use with the new ICT module.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Install the ICT module and probe

1. Remove the ICT module from the box, if replacing the ICT
module.
2. Record the expiration date found on the ICT module box prior
to discarding the box.
It is recommended that you record and track this date to
ensure you do not use the module on the c System beyond
this date.
Once you install the ICT module on the processing module, it
is warranted for 15,000 samples or two months, whichever
occurs first.
3. Disconnect and discard the plastic tubing attached to both

ends of the ICT module.
4. Inspect the ports on the ICT module. The black o-rings [1]
MUST be present.
IMPORTANT: Running the system without the black o-rings
could affect patient results.
5. Align the ICT module so that the gap [2] between the side
connectors is on top and the label [3] is right-side up.
6. Place the ICT probe [4] into the probe holder [5].
7. Attach the probe holder and probe to the bottom of the ICT
module (finger-tighten only).
IMPORTANT: The o-rings may twist and obstruct the flow
through the ICT module if this connection is overtightened.
8. Insert the ICT module [1] with the probe [2] into the ICT
holder [3] until the connectors on the side of the ICT module
are just above the top of the ICT holder [3].
9. Rotate the ICT module [1] counterclockwise (finger-tighten

only) to reattach the ICT module to the top port [4] and to the
connector [5].
10.Allow the ICT module [1] to seat fully down into the ICT
holder [3] so that the connectors are aligned with the slot [6]
in the ICT holder [3].
11.Gently reconnect the black electrical connector [7] to the ICT

module connectors. Ensure the ICT module is completely
plugged into the connector.
12.Hold down the ICT module while tightening the side

thumbscrew [8] until secure. Do not overtighten. The ICT
module could be damaged.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Flush ICT Module, page 9-41.
2. Inspect the tubing from the ICT module for bubbles.
3. Inspect the ICT probe to ensure it does not drip.

If you observe bubbles or drips, see Processing
module observed problems (c System),
page 10-547.
4. Reattach the black plate [1] by securing it with the

two thumbscrews [2] on the top.
5. Reattach the ICT unit cover [3] and tighten the

thumbscrew [4] to secure.
Verification
Calibrate ICT assays

1. Calibrate ICT assays.
2. Run quality control samples to verify calibration.
Replace the sample carousel clip (c 16000)
Replacing the sample carousel clip consists of the following

procedures.
Removal
Remove the sample carousel clip, page 9-201
Replacement
Replace the sample carousel clip, page 9-202
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Load a sample tube, page 9-202

required
required
Replacement parts LN 04J45-01 - Sample carousel clip

Removal
Remove the sample carousel clip

page 10-706, from the processing module, and then
remove any patient samples.
2. Use the Phillips screwdriver to remove the screw [1]

securing the sample carousel clip [2] in place.
3. Remove and discard the clip.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Replace the sample carousel clip

1. Insert the new sample carousel clip [1] in the sample
carousel using the four square alignment holes [2] on
the bottom of the sample carousel to seat the clip in
position.
NOTE: The sample carousel clip only fits one way in
2. Use the Phillips screwdriver to secure the clip to the

bottom of the sample carousel using the new screw
[3] provided.
3. Place the sample carousel on the processing

module, ensuring the alignment holes fit over the
alignment pins.
Verification
Load a sample tube

Load a sample tube in the sample carousel position
where the carousel clip was replaced to verify proper
installation of the clip.
ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump components replacement
You may need to replace certain supply and pump components due to
Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 16000), page 9-204
Replace check valves (c 16000), page 9-207
Replace the ICT reference solution filter (c 16000), page 9-212
Replace the wash solution filter (c 16000), page 9-214
Replace wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 16000),
page 9-217

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

16000), page 9-224
Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231
component), page 9-234
Replace the float switch cable (c System optional component),
page 9-236
See ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump center components,
page 9-203, for component locations when performing replacement
procedures.
ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump center components
The following illustrations show the location of the supply and pump
center components. Use these illustrations when performing
maintenance and component replacement procedures.
Figure 9.13: ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump center (front

view)
Legend:
1. Sample, reagent 1 and reagent 2 syringe drives
2. Probe wash pumps
3. Bulk solutions
4. Cuvette wash pump
5. Wash solution pump

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 9.14: ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump center (rear view)
Legend:
1. ICT aspiration pump
2. ICT reference solution pump
3. High concentration waste pump
Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 16000)
Replacing the 1 mL syringes on the ICT reference pump, ICT

aspiration pump, and wash solution pump consists of the following
procedures.
Removal
Locate the 1 mL syringe to be replaced, page 9-205
Detach and replace the 1 mL syringe, page 9-206
Replacement
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: The same procedure is used to replace the 1 mL syringes

in all three pumps.
required
required
Replacement parts LN 09D41-02 - 1 mL syringe
NOTE: The same 1 mL syringe is used for the ICT

reference pump, the ICT aspiration pump, and the
wash solution pump.


Removal
Locate the 1 mL syringe to be replaced

1. Locate the 1 mL syringe to be replaced by
Wash solution syringes - Open the pump center
right door on the front of the processing module.
NOTE: See the front view illustration of the supply
and pump center components for wash solution
syringe location, ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and
pump center components, page 9-203.
ICT aspiration or ICT reference pump syringes -
Open the ICT pump center access door on the rear
of the processing module.
NOTE: See the rear view illustration of the supply and
pump center components for ICT aspiration or ICT
reference pump syringe location, ARCHITECT c
16000 supply and pump center components,
page 9-203.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


the syringe holder.
Detach and replace the 1 mL syringe

absorb any liquid.
2. Unscrew the syringe assembly [1] from the check

valve [2].
3. Screw the new syringe assembly [1] onto the check

valve [2].
NOTE: Be sure to replace the syringe and plunger
(components of the syringe assembly) as a pair.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement

1. Reinstall the syringe [1].
2. Verify the plunger flange [2] is below the U-shaped

holder and the bottom of the syringe barrel is in the
groove at the bottom of the syringe holder [3].
3. Reinstall the clear plunger shield [4] and secure it

with the black knobs [5].

wash solution pump

procedure.
Verification

Replace check valves (c 16000)
Replacing the check valves on the ICT reference pump, ICT aspiration
pump, or wash solution pump consists of the following procedures.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Locate the check valve to be replaced, page 9-209
Replacement
Replace the check valve, page 9-210
Verification
required
required
Replacement parts LN 09D35-02 - ICT Reference or ICT Aspiration
Check Valve
LN 09D34-02 - Wash Solution Check Valve
NOTE: The ICT reference and aspiration pumps use

the same list number. The wash solution pump uses
a different list number. Ensure the correct part is
used.



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Locate the check valve to be replaced

1. Locate the check valve to be replaced by performing
one of the following:
Wash solution check valve - Open the pump center
and pump center components for wash solution pump
check valve location, ARCHITECT c 16000 supply
and pump center components, page 9-203.
ICT aspiration or reference pump check valve -
pump center components for ICT aspiration or ICT
reference pump check valve location, ARCHITECT c
16000 supply and pump center components,
page 9-203.


the syringe holder.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

absorb any liquid.
check valve [3].
Replacement
Replace the check valve

1. Unscrew the syringe body [1] from the check valve
[2].
2. Install the new check valve onto the syringe, and

finger-tighten.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Reattach the top [1] and side [2] tubing to the check
valve [3].

2. Verify the syringe plunger flange [2] is below the

[3].


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

wash solution pump

procedure.

Change ICT Asp Check Valve, page 9-33, to
document the ICT aspiration check valve
Verification

Replace the ICT reference solution filter (c 16000)
Replacing the ICT reference solution filter consists of the following

procedures:
Removal
Remove the ICT reference solution tubing, page 9-213
Remove the ICT reference solution filter, page 9-213
Replacement
Replace the ICT reference solution filter and tubing, page 9-214
Verification
required
required
Replacement parts LN 09D43-02 - Reference/wash solution line filter

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Remove the ICT reference solution tubing

The ICT reference solution filter is located at the end
of the tubing in the ICT reference solution bottle [1].
2. Remove the tubing from the ICT reference solution

bottle and set it aside on an absorbent towel.
Remove the ICT reference solution filter

to the end of the ICT reference solution tubing [2].
2. Discard the filter into the appropriate waste

receptacle.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Replace the ICT reference solution filter and tubing

1. Insert the new ICT reference filter [1] in the tubing
connector [2].
2. Insert the tubing in the ICT reference solution bottle,

and ensure the tubing reaches the bottom of the
bottle.
Verification


leaks.
procedure.
Replace the wash solution filter (c 16000)
Replacing the wash solution filter consists of the following procedures:

Removal
Remove the tubing, page 9-215
Remove the wash solution filter, page 9-216
Replacement
Replace wash solution filter and tubing, page 9-216
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

required
required
Replacement parts LN 09D43-02 - Reference/wash solution filter

Removal
Remove the tubing

Wash solution filters are located at the end of the
tubing in the alkaline [1] and acid [2] wash solution
bottles.
2. Remove the tubing from the wash solution bottle and

set it aside on an absorbent towel.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the wash solution filter

to the end of the wash solution tubing [2].
2. Discard the filter in the appropriate waste receptacle.
Replacement
Replace wash solution filter and tubing

1. Insert the new filter [1] in the tubing connector [2].
2. Insert the tubing in the appropriate wash solution

bottle, and ensure the tubing reaches the bottom of
the bottle.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Verification


leaks.
procedure.
Replace wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c

16000)
Replacing the wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2
Removal
Remove the clear outer plunger shield, page 9-219
Disconnect the wash solution syringe block tubing, page 9-219
Remove the clear inner plunger shield and syringe block,
page 9-220
Replacement
Install the syringe block and attach the clear inner plunger shield,
page 9-223
Connect the wash solution syringe block tubing, page 9-223
Install the clear outer plunger shield, page 9-224
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

required
10 mm wrench
Cotton swabs
Absorbent towel
#1
#2



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Remove the clear outer plunger shield

2. Locate the wash solution pump.
3. Loosen and remove the black knobs [1] securing the

clear outer plunger shield [2].
4. Remove the shield.
Disconnect the wash solution syringe block tubing

absorb any liquid.
2. Remove the 1 mL syringes [1] from the drive block;

do not disconnect them.
3. Unscrew the left-top grey knurled connection [2] from

the top of the syringe block. Use the towel to collect
solution dripping from the tubing.
NOTE: The tubing labeled 2, coming from the
instrument, connects to the left-top connection [2].
The tubing labeled 3, coming from the instrument,
connects to the right-top connection [3]. Do not
CAUTION: Do not remove the Phillips [4] screws from
the syringe block. If screws are removed contact your
Area Customer Support.
4. Unscrew the right-top grey knurled connection [3].

Use the towel to collect solution dripping from the
tubing.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the clear inner plunger shield and syringe block

1. Disconnect the tubing [1] connecting the wash
solution syringe block to the four 1 mL syringes from
both sides of the syringe block. Use the towel to
collect solution dripping from the tubing.
2. Remove the clear inner plunger shield [2] by

removing the Phillips screw [3] securing the shield.

screw [4] securing the clear syringe block [5] in
place. The screw is captive and cannot be
completely removed.
4. Pull the syringe block [6] forward to allow the

plungers [7] to clear the syringe drive [8].
NOTE: Some slight repositioning (front to back) may
be required to allow the plungers to clear the drive [9].
5. Lift the syringe block up to remove it from the

module.
NOTE: Do not bend the plungers on removal.
6. Identify the syringe needing the new o-ring and seal

tips.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

block [3].

block.

O-ring [1]
IMPORTANT: The o-ring may have remained in the
syringe block when removing the plunger assembly.
Seal tip 2 [2]
Spacer [3]
Seal tip 1 [4]
Spring [5]
Nut [6]
Plunger [7]
Plunger flange [8]
O-ring [1]
Seal tip 2 [2]
Seal tip 1 [4]


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement

spring.
of seal tip 1.
3. Install the seal tip 2 [3] on top of the spacer with the

the seal tip 2. Do not push the o-ring out of
alignment. The o-ring must sit flat against the inside
of the syringe block.

[1].


securing the plunger [3]. Do not overtighten.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Install the syringe block and attach the clear inner plunger shield
1. Ensure a black seal remains in each of the tubing
ports [1] at the top of the syringe block.

[3] faces you.

holder, verifying that both plunger flanges [5] are
below the U-shaped holders [6].

Secure with a slotted screwdriver.
5. Attach the clear inner plunger shield [7] and tighten

the Phillips screw [8].
Connect the wash solution syringe block tubing

1. Connect the grey knurled connection labeled 2
coming from the instrument to the left-top port [1].

the instrument to the right-top port [2].
3. Connect the 1 mL syringe tubing to the two side

ports [3] on each side of the syringe block. The 1 mL
syringe tubing can be connected to any of the four
ports. Ensure the tubing is not pinched or crimped.
4. Verify the 1 mL syringe tubing connections did not

loosen during the removal and replacement
procedure.
5. Reinstall the 1 mL syringes into the syringe holder.
6. Ensure the plunger flange [4] is below the U-shaped

holder and that the bottom of the syringe barrel is in
the groove at the bottom of the syringe holder.
Ensure the tubing is not pinched or crimped.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Install the clear outer plunger shield

1. Attach the clear outer plunger shield [1] and tighten
the black knobs [2] until finger-tight.

may be present.

procedure.

Wash Syringe Maintenance, page 9-31, to document
wash solution o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2
Verification

Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2

(c 16000)
Replacing the sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Locate the syringe and remove the plunger shield, page 9-226
Remove the syringe bracket, page 9-226
Remove the syringe block, page 9-227
Replacement
Install the syringe block, page 9-230
Install the syringe bracket and plunger shield, page 9-230
Verification
required
10 mm wrench
Cotton swabs
Absorbent towel
#1
#2
LN 09D53-02 - Reagent syringe o-ring
NOTE: The o-rings and seal tips 1 and 2 for the

sample and reagent syringes are different sizes. Be
sure to install the correct part in the appropriate
syringe.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


Removal
Locate the syringe and remove the plunger shield

2. Locate the appropriate syringe:

R1 A and B syringes [1]
Sample syringe [2]
R2 A and B syringes [3]
3. Remove the two Phillips screws [4] securing the

shield.
4. Remove the shield. [5]
Remove the syringe bracket

Remove the syringe bracket holding the syringe plunger
to the drive block by removing the two Phillips screws
[1] on the syringe bracket [2].
NOTE: Notice that these screws are shorter than the

screws from the clear plunger shield. Do not
interchange the two sets of screws.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the syringe block

screw [1] securing the syringe block [2] in place. The
screw is captive and cannot be completely removed.
2. Place an absorbent towel under the syringe drive to

absorb any liquid.
3. Disconnect the tubing at the top [3] and side [4] of

the syringe block by unscrewing the knurled
connections.
4. Ensure the black seal remains in the syringe block

once the tubing is disconnected.

block [3].

block.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

O-ring [1]
NOTE: The o-ring may have remained in the syringe
block when removing the plunger assembly.
Seal tip 2 [2]
Spacer [3]
Seal tip 1 [4]
Spring [5]
Nut [6]
Plunger [7]
Plunger flange [8]
O-ring [1]
Seal tip 2 [2]
Seal tip 1 [4]


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement

spring.
of seal tip 1.
3. Install seal tip 2 [3] on top of the spacer, with the


seal tip 2. Do not push the o-ring out of alignment.
The o-ring must sit flat against the inside of the
syringe block.

[1].


securing the plunger [3].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Install the syringe block

[2] faces you.
2. Ensure the black seals remain in place in each port

and reconnect the tubing at the top and side [3] of
the syringe block by screwing the knurled
connections [3].

holder, verifying that the plunger flange is above the
drive block [5]. Move any tubing out of the way.

Secure the screw with a slotted screwdriver.
Install the syringe bracket and plunger shield

1. Attach the syringe bracket [1] to connect the drive
block and syringe plunger.
2. Use the Phillips screwdriver to install the screws [2].

NOTE: Verify the shorter screws are used in the
bracket. Do not use the longer screws for the plunger
shield.
3. Attach the clear plunger shield [3] by tightening the

two (2) Phillips screws [4].
4. Remove the absorbent towel from the syringe drive.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

may be present.

procedure.

Sample Syringe Maintenance, page 9-30, or 6303
Reagent Syringe Maintenance, page 9-32, to
document sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal
tips replacement in the Maintenance log.
NOTE: Only perform this maintenance procedure if
you replaced the o-ring and seal tips in both the R1
and R2 syringes.
Verification

Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000)
Replacing the pump poppet valve set on the cuvette wash pump,
probe wash pump, and the high-concentration waste pump consists of
Removal
Locate the pump poppet valve and clamp the tubing, page 9-232
Remove the pump poppet valve, page 9-233
Replacement
Replace the pump poppet valve, page 9-233
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: The same procedure is used to replace the pump poppet

valve set in all three pumps.
required
Tools/materials Clamp or large hemostats
required Absorbent towels
Replacement parts LN 09D36-02 - Pump poppet valve set
NOTE: The same pump poppet valve set is used for

all three pumps.


Removal
Locate the pump poppet valve and clamp the tubing

1. Locate the appropriate pump:
Probe wash pumps
Cuvette wash pump
and pump center components for wash pump
location, ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump
center components, page 9-203.
3. Clamp the flexible inlet tubing [1] of the pump

containing the poppet valve.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the pump poppet valve

1. Place absorbent towels in the pump area to absorb
any liquid.
2. Unscrew the top or side [1] elbow fitting securing the

tubing to the pump connection.
NOTE: It is recommended that the top and side
poppet valves be replaced at the same time.
3. Remove the poppet valve [3] and o-ring [4] from the
connection [2]. To remove the top poppet valve, it
may be necessary to remove the side connector and
push the top poppet valve up from the bottom.
4. Discard the valve and o-ring.
Replacement
Replace the pump poppet valve

1. Rinse the new poppet valve and o-ring with Reagent
Grade Type II water.
2. Install the poppet valve [3] and o-ring [4] onto the
connection [2] as illustrated.
3. Screw the top or side [1] elbow fitting to the

connection [2].
4. Finger-tighten the fitting at the pump connection.
5. Release the clamp on the flexible tubing.
6. Remove the absorbent towels from the pump area.

may be present.

procedure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Verification


component)
The high-concentration waste bottle is used to collect the

high-concentration liquid waste from the cuvettes and the ICT unit.
Replacing this component consists of the following procedures.
Removal
Remove the high-concentration waste bottle, page 9-235
Replacement
Replace the high-concentration waste bottle, page 9-235
Verification
required
required
Replacement parts LN 03E50-26 - High Concentration Waste Bottle




(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Remove the high-concentration waste bottle

cable [2].
2. Unscrew the high-concentration waste bottle from

the cap.
4. Carefully remove the tubing from the top of the waste

bottle cap.
5. Discard the old bottle and cap in a biohazardous

waste bottle.
6. Discard waste in accordance with the appropriate

waste disposal regulations.
Replacement
Replace the high-concentration waste bottle

1. Insert the tubing [1] into the new cap [2].
2. Position the tubing just above, but not touching, the

float switch [3].
3. Screw the waste bottle onto the cap.
5. Reconnect the float switch cable by inserting the

6. Ensure the waste bottle is labeled as waste.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Verification

Replace the float switch cable (c System optional component)
The float switch cable is used to connect the float switch in the
high-concentration waste bottle. Replacing this component consists of
Removal
Disconnect the cable, page 9-237
Replacement
Connect the cable, page 9-237
Verification
required
required
Replacement parts LN 03E50-31 - High Concentration Float Switch Cable




(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Disconnect the cable

cable [2].
2. Disconnect the other end of the float switch cable

from the back of the module using the information in
the previous step.
Replacement
Connect the cable

1. Connect one end of the replacement cable to the
back of the module by inserting the cable and
NOTE: Both ends of the cable are identical.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the

high-concentration waste bottle by inserting the
Verification

i 2000/i 2000SR component replacement

Component replacement for ARCHITECT i Systems includes:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR internal components' covers

replacement, page 9-238
i 2000/i 2000SR processing center component replacement, page 9-240
i 2000/i 2000SR supply and waste center component replacement,
page 9-266
ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR internal components' covers replacement
Internal components' covers protect the internal components of the

processing center. You remove covers to:
Access the internal components
Replace worn covers
See the ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR internal components' covers,
page 9-238, for instructions.
ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR internal components' covers
Internal components' covers are located in the following areas.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 9.15: Internal components' covers
Legend:
1. Internal components cover 1
2. Internal components cover 2-3
3. Internal components cover 2-3
8. Internal components cover 8 (i 2000 System)
NOTE: Covers 4, 5, 6, and 7 are not interchangeable between the i

2000 processing module and the i 2000SR processing module.
Pins located on the process path are used to secure covers 1, 4, 5, and 7
on both processing modules. Cover 6 (i 2000SR processing module) is
also secured by pins. To remove the covers, gently pull up where the

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
pin enters the hole on the cover. To replace, match the hole on the
cover with the pin and gently place the cover in place.
Thumbscrews are used to secure covers 2 and 3 on both modules.
Cover 6 (i 2000 processing module) is also secured by a thumbscrew.
To remove, loosen the thumbscrews and gently pull up.
NOTE: The thumbscrews are secured to the cover.

Cover 8 (i 2000 processing module) sits on the sample pipettor. To
remove, gently pull the cover up and off the pipettor.
NOTE: Each cover is labeled with a number on the inside of the cover.
The number corresponds to a black number on the process path.
Internal components cover 8 does not connect to the process path and
does not have a corresponding number on the path.
i 2000/i 2000SR processing center component replacement
You may need to replace certain processing center components due to

Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR),
page 9-240
Replace sample, reagent, or STAT probe tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR),
page 9-244
Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248
2000SR), page 9-255
Replace the waste arm probe/tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-264
Use the processing center map on the i System processing module for
Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i

2000SR)
Replacing the sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probe consists of the

following procedures:
Removal
Remove the probe, page 9-242

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the probe, page 9-243
Verification
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1111, 1112, 1113, or
1117, page 9-244
Prerequisite The processing module must be in the Warming or
Ready status.
required
Tools/materials Absorbent tissue
required #2 Phillips screwdriver (optional)
Replacement parts LN 08C94-42 - Probe



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Prepare for removal

1. Lift the appropriate processing center cover(s) to
access the probe(s).
2. Locate the probe to be replaced on the appropriate

pipettor.
NOTE: See the processing center map on the i
System processing module for pipettor locations (R1,
R2, S, or ST).
3. Verify the probe is over the wash station.

To move the reagent probe over the wash station,
perform modules diagnostic procedure 4080
Module Initialization, page 10-663.
To move the sample or STAT probe over the wash
station, initiate pipettors diagnostic procedure
1160 Pipettor Move, page 10-671.
Remove the probe

1. Place an absorbent tissue under the probe tubing
connection.
2. Loosen the metal fitting on the probe and remove the

probe tubing from the probe [1].
3. Loosen the screw (captive) on top of the probe clamp

until you feel resistance [2].
NOTE: You can use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to
loosen the screw. Loosening the screw beyond the
point of resistance can cause the clip to come apart.
4. Push up on the blue button located under the boom

arm [3].
5. Swing the probe free of the clip. Lift the probe and
remove it from the boom arm [4].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the probe

1. Slide the probe into the boom arm [1].
2. Swing the probe to the probe clip and snap it in place

under the clip [2].
3. Tighten the screw (captive) on top of the probe clamp

[3].
NOTE: A #2 Phillips screwdriver may be used to
tighten the screw. Do not over-tighten as stripping
may result.
4. Connect the probe tubing to the probe and finger

tighten the probe fitting [4].

Pipettor Move, page 10-671, to return the sample or
STAT pipettor to the park position.

Flush Fluids, page 9-69, to remove any air that may
be present.

procedure.
3. Remove the absorbent tissue.
4. Close the processing center cover(s).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Verification
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1111, 1112, 1113, or 1117

Perform the appropriate as-needed maintenance
procedure:
1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing
module), page 9-68
Replace sample, reagent, or STAT probe tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Replacing the sample or reagent probe tubing consists of the following

procedures:
Removal
Remove the probe tubing, page 9-246
Replacement
Install the probe tubing, page 9-247
Verification
Ready status.
required
required
Replacement parts LN 08C94-49 - Tubing, Probe
LN 03M77-49 - Probe Tubing, STAT


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Prepare for removal

1. Lift the appropriate processing center cover(s) to See System startup, pause, and shutdown,
access the probe(s). page 5-3.
See ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR internal
2. Locate the probe tubing to be replaced on the
appropriate pipettor. components' covers replacement, page 9-238.
NOTE: See the processing center map on the i

System processing module for pipettor locations (R1,
R2, S, or ST).
3. Verify the probe is over the wash station.

To move the reagent probe over the wash station,
perform modules diagnostic procedure 4080
Module Initialization, page 10-663.
To move the sample or STAT probe over the wash
station, initiate pipettors diagnostic procedure
1160 Pipettor Move, page 10-671.
4. Access the probe tubing on the sample pipettor by

removing its internal components cover, if present.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the probe tubing

1. Place an absorbent tissue under the probe tubing
connection.
2. Loosen the metal fitting on the probe and remove the

probe tubing from the probe [1].
3. Drain any fluid from the probe tubing onto an

absorbent tissue.
4. Unclip the probe tubing from the tubing routing clips

[2].
5. Place an absorbent tissue near the tubing

connection at the pressure monitor [3].
6. Remove the pressure monitor from the clips on the

pipettor.
7. Disconnect the tubing connection at the pressure

monitor [3].
8. Remove the probe tubing from the module.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the probe tubing

1. Support the boom arm when replacing the tubing to
prevent it from moving.
2. Place the tubing into the routing clips [1].

NOTE: Orient the STAT probe tubing so that the
green band is located near the probe.
3. Connect the probe tubing to the pressure monitor [2].
4. Place the pressure monitor onto the clips on the

pipettor.
5. Connect the opposite end of the probe tubing to the

probe and finger tighten the probe metal fitting [3].

Pipettor Move, page 10-671, to return the sample or
STAT pipettor to the park position.

be present.

procedure.
3. Remove the absorbent tissue.
4. Replace the internal components cover if you

removed it from the sample pipettor.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Verification

Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Your ARCHITECT i System has one of the following wash zone motor
assemblies:
P/N 78326
P/N 96251
To replace the wash zone probe, refer to the instructions for the
appropriate motor assembly.
Replacing the wash zone probe (motor assembly P/N 78326) consists
of the following procedures:
Removal
Remove the wash zone probe, page 9-250
Replacement
Install the wash zone probe, page 9-251
Verification
Perform fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure 2050 WZ Aspiration
Test, page 9-252
Perform calibration curve verification, page 9-252
Ready status.
Estimated time 45 minutes (includes running quality control samples)
required
required
Replacement parts LN 08C94-35 - Probe, WZ


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Prepare for removal

access the wash zone probe.
NOTE: The rear processing center access panel
must be opened to access wash zone 2 probes.
2. Locate the wash zone probe to be replaced on the

appropriate wash zone. [1]
See the processing center map on the i System
processing module for wash zone locations (WZ1 or
WZ2).
3. Remove the appropriate internal components

cover(s), if present.
components' covers replacement, page 9-238.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the wash zone probe

1. Remove the tubing from the wash zone probe by
gently pulling the tubing and sliding it from the probe
and through the hole in the back of the wash zone
motor assembly [1].
2. Rotate the wash zone probe clip clockwise toward

the process path [2].
3. Lift the probe and remove it from the front of the

wash zone motor assembly.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the wash zone probe

1. Slide the probe into the wash zone motor assembly
until it is fully seated. Pull up on the wash zone motor
to raise it if the wash zone manifold interferes with
the insertion of the probe.
2. Lift and rotate the probe clip counterclockwise until

the notch in the clip sits over the wash zone probe
[1].
3. Slide the tubing through the hole in the back of the

wash zone motor assembly and onto the wash zone
probe until it passes the ridge on the probe [2].
NOTE: The tubing should be half way between the
bend in the probe and the ridge.
4. Verify the wash zone probes enter the holes in the

wash zone manifold by pressing down on the wash
zone motor assembly.

1. Replace the appropriate internal components
cover(s), if previously removed.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Verification
Perform fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure 2050 WZ Aspiration Test

Perform fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure 2050 WZ
Aspiration Test, page 10-672.
Perform calibration curve verification

Run all levels of controls to validate the active
calibration curves prior to reporting patient results.
Replacing the wash zone probe (motor assembly P/N 96251) consists
of the following procedures:
Removal
Remove the wash zone probe, page 9-253
Replacement
Install the wash zone probe, page 9-254
Verification
Test, page 9-255
Ready status.
required
required
Replacement parts LN 08C94-35 - Probe, WZ



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Prepare for removal

access the wash zone probe.
must be opened to access wash zone 2 probes.
2. Locate the wash zone probe to be replaced on the

appropriate wash zone. [1]
Refer to the processing center map on the i System
WZ2).

For information on removing the internal component
covers, refer to ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR internal
components' covers, page 9-238.
Remove the wash zone probe

1. Grasp the tab on top of the wash zone clip located at
the front of the wash zone motor assembly. Rotate
the clip counterclockwise, [2] so the notch in the clip
moves away from the wash zone probe [1].
2. Perform one of the following depending on the probe

you are replacing:
Wash zone 1
Remove the wash zone tubing from the tubing
guide, and then lift the probe and the attached
tubing out of the wash zone motor assembly.
Wash zone 2
Lift the probe and attached tubing out of the wash
3. Remove the tubing from the probe by gently pulling

the tubing and sliding it from the probe.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the wash zone probe

1. Push the wash zone tubing onto the wash zone
probe until it passes the ridge on the probe.
bend in the probe and the ridge [2].
2. Slide the probe in the wash zone motor assembly

to raise it if the probes do not fit into the openings on
the wash zone motor assembly.
3. Perform one of the following depending on the probe

you are replacing:
Wash zone 1
Place the tubing in the tubing guide.
Wash zone 2
Check the tubing to ensure it is located on the
right side of the wash zone motor assembly under
the liquid waste arm. Probe 1 should be located
on the right side of the post on top of the wash
4. Grasp the tab on top of the clip and rotate the clip
clockwise toward the probes [1].
NOTE: If the clips do not rotate to their locked
position, ensure the probes are completely seated in


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Verification



2000SR)
Your ARCHITECT i System has one of the following wash zone motor
assemblies:
P/N 78326
P/N 96251
To replace the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor, refer to the
instructions for the appropriate motor assembly.
Replacing the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor (motor
assembly P/N 78326) consists of the following procedures:
Removal
Remove the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor assembly,
page 9-257
Replacement
Install the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor assembly,
page 9-258
Verification
Test, page 9-259

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Ready status.
required
required
Replacement parts LN 08C94-87 - Tubing/Sensor, temp, WZ


Removal
Prepare for removal

access the tubing.
must be opened to access wash zone 2 temperature
tubing/sensors.
2. Locate the wash zone temperature tubing/sensor to

be replaced on the appropriate wash zone (WZ1 or
WZ2) [1].
WZ2).

components' covers replacement, page 9-238.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor assembly

1. Remove the tubing from the wash zone probe by
gently pulling the tubing and sliding it from the probe
and through the hole of the wash zone motor [1].
2. Disconnect the temperature sensor [2].
3. Hold down the vacuum vessel with one hand. With

the other hand, pull up on the tubing near the
connection on the vacuum vessel [3].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor assembly

Wash zone 1:
1. Connect the tubing to the barb fitting on the vacuum
vessel [1].
2. Connect the temperature sensor [2].

Wash zone 2:
vessel [1].
3. Route the tubing from the vacuum vessel under the

liquid waste arm to the back of the wash zone motor
assembly [4].



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Verification


Replacing the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor (motor

assembly P/N 96251) consists of the following procedures:
Removal
Remove the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor assembly,
page 9-261
Replacement
Install the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor assembly,
page 9-262
Verification
Test, page 9-263
Ready status.
required
required
Replacement parts LN 08C94-87 - Tubing/Sensor, temp, WZ


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Prepare for removal

access the tubing.
must be opened to access wash zone 2 temperature
tubing/sensors.
2. Locate the wash zone temperature tubing/sensor to

be replaced on the appropriate wash zone (WZ1 or
WZ2) [1].
Refer to the processing center map on the i System
WZ2).

For information on removing the internal component
covers, refer to ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR internal
components' covers, page 9-238.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor assembly

1. Grasp the tab on top of the wash zone clip located at
the front of the wash zone motor assembly. Rotate
the clip counterclockwise so the notch in the clip
moves away from the wash zone probe [1].
2. Perform one of the following depending on the

tubing/sensor you are replacing:
Wash zone 1
Remove the wash zone tubing from the tubing
guide, and then lift the probe and the attached
tubing out of the wash zone motor assembly.
Wash zone 2
Lift the probe and attached tubing out of the wash
3. Remove the tubing from the probe by gently pulling

the tubing and sliding it from the probe.
4. Disconnect the temperature sensor [2].
5. Hold down the vacuum vessel with one hand. With

the other hand pull up on the tubing near the
connection on the vacuum vessel [3].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor assembly

Wash zone 1:
vessel [1].


to raise it if the probes do not fit into the openings on
5. Place the tubing in the tubing guide.
6. Grasp the tab on top of the clips and rotate clockwise

toward the probes.
NOTE: If the clips do not rotate to their locked
position, ensure the probes are completely seated in

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Install the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor assembly (continued)
Wash zone 2:
vessel [1].
2. Connect the temperature sensor [4]. Route the

tubing from the vacuum vessel under the liquid waste
arm [2] to the right side of the wash zone motor
assembly.

NOTE: The tubing should be halfway between the

until it is fully seated. (Probe 1 should be located on
the right side of the post on top of the wash zone
motor assembly.) If the probes do not fit into the
openings on the wash zone motor assembly, lift the
wash zone motor by pulling it up.
5. Grasp the tab on top of the clip and rotate the clip
clockwise toward the probes.
NOTE: If the clips do not rotate to their locked position
ensure the probes are completely seated in the wash

Verification


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replace the waste arm probe/tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Replacing the waste arm probe/tubing consists of the following

procedures:
Removal
Remove the waste arm probe tubing, page 9-265
Replacement
Install the waste arm probe/tubing, page 9-266
Verification
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2151 Prime Wash
Zones, page 9-266
Ready status.
required
required
Replacement parts LN 08C94-89 - Probe/tubing, waste arm



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Prepare for removal

1. Lift the rear processing center cover to access the
liquid waste arm.
2. Open the rear access panel.
3. Locate the waste arm probe and tubing on the liquid

waste arm [1].
processing module for liquid waste arm location (A).
Remove the waste arm probe tubing

1. If the liquid waste arm has a tubing routing clip,
remove the liquid waste arm tubing from the routing
clip [1].
2. Rotate the waste arm probe clip clockwise [2].
3. Lift the probe and remove it from the front of the

liquid waste arm.
4. Hold down on the vacuum vessel with one hand.

With the other hand, pull up on the waste arm tubing
near the connection on the vacuum vessel [3].
5. Remove the waste arm probe and tubing from the

processing module.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the waste arm probe/tubing

1. Slide the tubing on to the probe until it passes the
ridge on the probe.

vessel [1].
3. Slide the probe into the liquid waste arm until it is

fully seated.
4. Lift and rotate the probe clip counterclockwise until

the notch in the clip sits over the probe [2].
5. Place the tubing in the routing clip [3], if the liquid

waste arm has a clip.
Verification
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2151 Prime Wash Zones

Prime Wash Zones, page 9-69.
2. Watch the vacuum vessel as the procedure runs and

verify liquid is dispensed from the waste arm probe
tubing to the vacuum vessel.
i 2000/i 2000SR supply and waste center component replacement
You may need to replace certain supply and waste center components
due to normal wear from daily operations.
Replace the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR),
page 9-267
Replace the buffer level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-269
Replace the buffer filter (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-272

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
See Supply and waste center (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-98, for component
locations when performing replacement procedures.
Replace the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Replacing the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor consists of the

following procedures:
Removal
Remove the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor, page 9-268
Replacement
Install the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor, page 9-268
Verification
Perform solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure 3410 Level
Sensors Test, page 9-269
Ready status.
required
required
Replacement parts LN 08C94-17 or LN 08C94-27 - Sensor, Level,
Pre-Trigger
LN 08C94-16 or LN 08C94-26 - Sensor, Level,
Trigger

Removal
Prepare for removal

Open the supply and waste center door.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor

1. Slide the pre-trigger/trigger tray out.
NOTE: Use caution when handling the level sensors.
Avoid bending the tubing connected to the cap. Avoid
applying stress on the wiring and connectors.
2. Disconnect the pre-trigger or trigger electrical

connector [1].
3. Use absorbent tissue to catch any spilled liquid and

unscrew the tubing fitting from the level sense tube
[2].
4. Unscrew the level sensor cap [3].
5. Remove the level sensor and wipe the outside of the

assembly with an absorbent tissue.
Replacement
Install the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor

1. Place the level sensor into the container with the
arrow facing towards the front.
2. Tighten the cap [1].

NOTE: When the level sensor is correctly installed,
the electrical connector is on the right and the tubing
is on the left.
3. Connect the pre-trigger or trigger electrical connector

[2] on the processing module.
NOTE: If you are using replacement part LN
08C94-26 or LN 08C94-27 for the first time you must
connect the adapter provided to the pre-trigger or
trigger level sensor cable on the cap prior to
performing this step.
4. Connect the tubing fitting to the level sensor tube [3].
5. Slide the tray into place.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

be present.

procedure.
Verification
Perform solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure 3410 Level Sensors Test

Perform solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure 3410
Level Sensors Test, page 10-677.
Replace the buffer level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Replacing the buffer level sensor consists of the following procedures:

Removal
Remove the wash buffer reservoir, page 9-270
Remove the buffer level sensor, page 9-270
Replacement
Install the buffer level sensor, page 9-271
Install the wash buffer reservoir, page 9-271
Verification
Perform solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure 3410 Level
Sensors Test, page 9-272
Ready status.
required
required
Replacement parts LN 08C94-15 or LN 08C94-25 - Sensor, Level, Buffer

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
CAUTION: Lifting Hazard. The i System wash buffer

reservoir is heavy when full. Use care when handling the
container to reduce the risk of injury.
Removal
Prepare for removal

Remove the wash buffer reservoir

Wash Buffer Unload, page 9-70, if buffer volume is
greater than 10 liters.
2. Grasp the hand holds on the side of the buffer

reservoir and slide it out. Place the reservoir outside
the processing module on the floor.
NOTE: Use caution when handling the level sensors.
Avoid bending the tubing connected to the cap. Avoid
applying stress on the wiring and connectors.
Remove the buffer level sensor

1. Push on the white quick disconnect tab to remove
the tubing [1].
2. Disconnect the level sensor cable [2].
3. Unscrew the cap [3].
4. Remove the level sensor.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the buffer level sensor

1. Place the level sensor into the reservoir and tighten
the cap [1].
2. Snap the white quick disconnect into the tubing [2].
3. Connect the level sensor cable [3] to the electrical

connector on the processing module.
NOTE: If you are using replacement part LN
08C94-25 for the first time you must connect the
adapter provided to the buffer level sensor cable on
the cap prior to performing this step.
Install the wash buffer reservoir

Grasp the hand holds on the side of the buffer reservoir See Consumable inventory management,
and slide the reservoir into the processing module. page 5-24.
NOTE: If you unloaded buffer to allow for the removal

of the buffer reservoir from the processing module,
add wash buffer. Completely fill the wash buffer
reservoir to accurately track wash buffer inventory.

be present.

procedure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Verification
Perform solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure 3410 Level Sensors Test

Perform solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure 3410
Level Sensors Test, page 10-677.
Replace the buffer filter (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Replacing the buffer filter consists of the following procedures:

Removal
Remove the wash buffer reservoir, page 9-273
Remove the buffer filter, page 9-273
Replacement
Install the buffer filter, page 9-274
Install the wash buffer reservoir, page 9-274
Verification
Load wash buffer, page 9-274
Ready status.
required
required
Replacement parts LN 08C94-28 - Filter, Buffer
CAUTION: Lifting Hazard. The i System wash buffer

reservoir is heavy when full. Use care when handling the
container to reduce the risk of injury.
Removal
Prepare for removal


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the wash buffer reservoir

Wash Buffer Unload, page 9-70, if buffer volume is
greater than 10 liters.
2. Grasp the hand holds on the side of the buffer

reservoir and slide it out. Place the reservoir outside
the processing module on the floor.
Remove the buffer filter

1. Press down and out on the buffer filter bracket [1].
2. Remove the filter from the holding feature in the

frame of the supply and waste center.
3. Place an absorbent tissue under the buffer filter quick

disconnects.
4. Disconnect the two grey quick disconnects at either

end of the filter [2].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the buffer filter

1. Connect the buffer filter to the two grey quick
disconnects [1].
2. Place the buffer filter onto the holding feature in the

frame of the supply and waste center.
3. Place the buffer filter bracket over the filter and press
into place, securing the filter to the frame [2].
Install the wash buffer reservoir

Grasp the hand holds on the side of the buffer reservoir
and slide the reservoir into the processing module.

Close the supply and waste center door.
Verification
Load wash buffer

Load wash buffer to verify the buffer filter and tubing See Replenish wash buffer manually and
function properly and that no leaks occur. update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
SCC component replacement

You may need to replace certain SCC (system control center)
components due to normal wear from daily operations.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The procedures that are common to both the c System and the i
System are:
Replace the keyboard, page 9-275
Replace the mouse, page 9-278
Replace the network hub and cables, page 9-281
Replace the printer, page 9-285
Replace the speakers, page 9-288
Replace the touch-screen monitor, page 9-291
See System control center, page 1-8, for component locations when
performing replacement procedures.
Replace the keyboard
Replacing the keyboard consists of the following procedures:

Removal
Remove the keyboard, page 9-277
Replacement
Install the keyboard, page 9-277
Verification
Verify keyboard operation, page 9-278
required
required
Replacement parts LN 07D11-01 - Keyboard - English
LN 07D11-20 - Keyboard - French
LN 07D11-30 - Keyboard - German
LN 07D11-40 - Keyboard - Italian
LN 07D11-50 - Keyboard - Spanish
LN 07D11-60 - Keyboard - Japanese
NOTE: Upgrades to the computer hardware may change the location

of CPU (central processing unit) components.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Power off the SCC

For information about the SCC power off
IMPORTANT: To prevent flooding when your system
procedure, see System startup, pause, and
is connected to an ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic
shutdown, page 5-3.
Reconstitution Module) accessory, do not turn off the
SCC if the ARM is in the process of filling the wash
buffer reservoir.
1. Select Overview from the menu bar, and then select
Snapshot.
2. Select F3 - Shutdown.

simultaneously press the Ctrl+Alt+Delete keys on
the keyboard.
The SCC Confirm Exit prompt displays.
5. Leave the Shutdown Computer option selected, and

then select OK.
6. Wait for the information window to display indicating

it is OK to turn off the power.
7. Press and hold the power switch on the front of the

CPU to turn off power to the SCC.
It may take up to 10 seconds for the SCC to power
off.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the keyboard

Disconnect the keyboard cable from the port on the
back of the CPU [1].
Replacement
Install the keyboard

Connect the keyboard to the port on the back of the
CPU [1].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

1. Power off the processing module(s). For information about the SCC power on
NOTE: You must power off the processing module(s) shutdown, page 5-3.
prior to turning on the power to the SCC (system
control center). If the processing module(s) power is
on, communication is not properly initialized between
2. Press the power switch on the front of the CPU to

turn on the SCC.
3. Wait until the SCC displays the Snapshot screen.
4. Power on the processing module(s).
Verification
Verify keyboard operation

Verify proper keyboard functionality by using the
keyboard to navigate through the screens.
Replace the mouse
Replacing the mouse consists of the following procedures:

Removal
Remove the mouse, page 9-280
Replacement
Install the mouse, page 9-280
Verification
Verify mouse operation, page 9-281
required
required
Replacement parts LN 07D01-99 - Mouse, SCC

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Power off the SCC

shutdown, page 5-3.
buffer reservoir.
Snapshot.

the keyboard.

then select OK.


off.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the mouse

Disconnect the mouse cable from the port in the back of
the CPU (central processing unit) [1].
Replacement
Install the mouse

Connect the mouse cable to the port in the back of the
CPU (central processing unit) [1].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


turn on the SCC.
Verification
Verify mouse operation

Verify proper mouse functionality by using the mouse to
navigate through the screens.
Replace the network hub and cables
Replacing the network hub and cables consists of the following

procedures:
Removal
Remove the network hub, page 9-283
Replacement
Install the network hub, page 9-284
Verification
Verify network hub operation, page 9-285
required

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
required
Replacement parts LN 07D04-01 - Network Hub & Cables, AA
LN 07D04-12 - Network Hub & Cables, AE
LN 07D04-24 - Network Hub & Cables, AX
LN 07D04-36 - Network Hub & Cables, AZ
LN 07D04-48 - Network Hub & Cables, BJ
NOTE: List numbers are specific to geographic

locations. See SCC component list numbers,
page Appendix D-15, for the appropriate list number
for your area.

of network hub components.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Power off the SCC

shutdown, page 5-3.
buffer reservoir.
Snapshot.

the keyboard.

then select OK.


off.
Remove the network hub

1. Power off the network hub if the network hub has a
power button.
2. Unplug the network hub power cord from the wall

outlet or UPS (uninterruptible power supply).
3. Disconnect the communication cables from the

network hub [1].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Install the network hub

1. Plug the new network hub power cord into the
network hub [1].
2. Connect the communication cables into the ports of

the network hub [2].
NOTE: You can connect the cables to any position
(1-8) on the network hub.
3. Plug the network hub into the wall outlet or UPS

(uninterruptible power supply).

2. Power on the network hub if the network hub has a

power button.

turn on the SCC.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Verification
Verify network hub operation

1. Verify the LEDs on the network hub are illuminated
for the positions containing communication cables
[1].
2. Verify the status (Stopped, Warming, or Ready) of

the processing module and the sample handler.
3. Repeat the removal and replacement procedure if

the status remains Offline. An Offline status indicates
the processing module and/or sample handler is not
communicating correctly through the network hub.
Replace the printer
Replacing the printer consists of the following procedures:

Removal
Remove the printer, page 9-287
Replacement
Install the printer, page 9-287
Verification
Verify printer operation, page 9-288
required
required
Replacement parts
NOTE: Multiple printers are available under different
list numbers. The removal and replacement
procedure is the same. If the replacement printer is a
different model from the existing printer, contact your
Area Customer Support to configure the printer after
installation.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Power off the SCC

shutdown, page 5-3.
buffer reservoir.
Snapshot.

the keyboard.

then select OK.


off.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the printer

1. Power off the printer.
NOTE: If the printer is an HP LaserJet 1200, go to
Step 2. (The HP LaserJet 1200 does not have a
power switch. It is powered on when connected to a
power outlet.)
2. Unplug the printer power cord from the wall outlet.
3. Unscrew and disconnect the printer from the port on

the back of the CPU [1].
Replacement
Install the printer

1. Connect the printer cable to the printer.
2. Press the metal tabs toward the connector to secure

the cable to the printer.
NOTE: If the printer is an HP LaserJet 1200, you must
remove a cover on the side of the printer to connect
the printer cable to the printer.
3. Connect the printer power cord to the printer.
4. Connect the printer cable to the port on the back of

the CPU.
5. Secure the cable to the CPU by screwing in the

connector [1].
6. Plug the power cord into the wall outlet.

NOTE: If the SCC (system control center) is
connected to a UPS (uninterruptible power supply),
do not plug the printer into the UPS.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


turn on the SCC.
5. Power on the printer.

NOTE: The HP LaserJet 1200 does not have a power
switch. It is powered on when connected to a power
outlet.
Verification
Verify printer operation

Print a report to verify the printer is functioning properly.
Replace the speakers
Replacing the SCC speakers consists of the following procedures:

Removal
Remove the speakers, page 9-290
Replacement
Install the speakers, page 9-290
Verification

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

required
required
Replacement parts LN 07D05-11 - Speakers

Removal
Power off the SCC

shutdown, page 5-3.
buffer reservoir.
Snapshot.

the keyboard.

then select OK.


off.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the speakers

Disconnect the speaker cable from the port on the back
of the CPU (central processing unit) [1].
Replacement
Install the speakers

1. Press down and out on the back panel of each
speaker [1].
2. Remove the cables located inside.
3. Insert two 1.5 V "C" batteries into each speaker [2].
4. Replace the back panel on each speaker.
5. Connect the cable from the left speaker into the back
of the right speaker (speaker containing power
button) [3].
6. Connect the speaker cable from the right speaker to

the port on the back of the CPU (central processing
unit) [4].
7. Press in the power button on the right speaker.

NOTE: A red power-on light illuminates.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


turn on the SCC.
An audible tone sounds when the speakers are
installed correctly and powered on.
Verification

Replace the touch-screen monitor
Replacing the touch-screen monitor consists of the following

procedures:
Removal
Remove the monitor, page 9-293
Replacement
Install the monitor, page 9-293
Verification
Verify monitor operation, page 9-294
required

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
required
Replacement parts LN 07D03-17 - Monitor 17", Touchscreen

Removal
Power off the SCC

shutdown, page 5-3.
buffer reservoir.
Snapshot.

the keyboard.

then select OK.


off.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the monitor

1. Press the power switch on the front of the monitor to
power off the monitor.
2. Unplug the monitor power cord from the wall outlet or

UPS (uninterruptible power supply).
3. Unscrew and disconnect the monitor cable from the

port on the back of the CPU [1].
4. Unscrew and disconnect the touch-screen cable

from the port on the back of the CPU [2].
Replacement
Install the monitor

1. Connect the monitor cable to the port on the back of
the CPU. Secure the cable to the CPU by screwing in
the connector [1].
2. Connect the touch-screen cable to the port on the

back of the CPU. Secure the cable to the CPU by
screwing in the connector [2].
3. Connect the monitor power cord to the monitor [3].
4. Plug the power cord into the wall outlet or UPS

(uninterruptible power supply).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


turn on the SCC.
3. Press the power switch on the front of the monitor to

turn on the monitor.
Verification
Verify monitor operation

1. Verify the monitor displays the Snapshot screen.
2. Verify proper touch-screen functionality by using

various navigation elements such as an icon, menu
item, and a function bar button.
3. Contact your Area Customer Support if the

touchscreen does not respond to the area you touch.
Your touch-screen monitor may require calibration.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Troubleshooting and diagnostics
Section 10
Introduction
<F=0>
Problems with your ARCHITECT System are characterized by

symptoms. Troubleshooting tools, references, and suggested
techniques are provided to help you trace the symptom(s) to one or
more root causes. You can then perform the corrective actions to
resolve the problem.
Troubleshooting and diagnostic topics include:
Approach to troubleshooting, page 10-2
Provides a general model for troubleshooting your ARCHITECT
System.
Provides a description of the software screen and window
associated with system records of error-related messages
Error codes, page 10-17
Lists possible error codes and their messages, and provides
detailed information on probable causes and corrective actions.
Observed problems, page 10-547
Lists symptoms you may observe and provides detailed
information on probable causes and corrective actions.
System diagnostics, page 10-650
Provides a description of all system diagnostic procedures, the
software screens and windows associated with diagnostic
activities, and step-by-step instructions for performing related
procedures.
Miscellaneous corrective action procedures, page 10-697
Includes procedures that are frequently provided as corrective
actions for resolving error codes and/or observed problems.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Approach to troubleshooting Section 10
Approach to troubleshooting
Troubleshooting consists of implementing a practical, systematic
approach to problem solving. This approach focuses on:
Observing, recognizing, and categorizing symptoms
Identifying the probable cause(s)
Systematically eliminating each potential problem (from most
likely to least likely)
The troubleshooting model that follows describes a five step approach
to defining symptoms, identifying problems, and implementing
solutions. When troubleshooting your ARCHITECT System, you
should also include considerations appropriate to your specific
environment.
1. Observe and recognize symptoms
To properly analyze and correct a problem you must first identify the
symptoms. Symptoms can be, but are not limited to:
Error messages
Observed problems, such as a noise, fluid leak, trend in controls,
and so forth
NOTE: If you are able to resolve the observed problem, no
further action is required.
2. Categorize the symptom(s)
By grouping like symptoms into categories, you automatically

eliminate some problems as probable causes. Categories of symptoms
include:
System, see:
System troubleshooting variables (c System), page 10-4
System troubleshooting variables (i System), page 10-5
Reagents, see:
Reagent troubleshooting variables (c System), page 10-7
Reagent troubleshooting variables (i System), page 10-8
Operator troubleshooting variables, page 10-8
Environmental troubleshooting variables, page 10-9

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 10 Approach to troubleshooting
3. Isolate the root cause and create a plan of action
Based on the probable causes you identify, devise a plan that begins by
addressing the most likely first and progresses to the least likely.
By addressing one probable cause at a time you are able to isolate the
resolution, and then reproduce the solution to a specific problem.
Diagnostic resources and tools include:
Error code and message
ARCHITECT System Operations Manual and/or Help
Section 10 Troubleshooting and diagnostics
Appendix B Verification of ARCHITECT i System assay
claims
Section 4 Performance characteristics and specifications
System logs (Message history and Temporary)
Levey-Jennings graph
Diagnostic procedures
Maintenance logs
Maintenance procedures
Reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a
package insert or reagent application sheet)
4. Resolve the problem
Carefully perform the steps required to solve the problem. Problems

are corrected by:
Making adjustments, such as tightening connections or
removing jams
Calibrating system components or assays
Replacing or repairing system components
Running new controls
5. Verify the resolution worked
Verify the symptoms no longer exist:

Perform the appropriate verification procedure
Check control values, if appropriate

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
If you continue to observe the symptoms, perform the steps to resolve

the next most likely problem. Repeat this process until the problem is
resolved.
System troubleshooting variables (c System)

The system category is a high level group of symptoms that relate to
system performance. Within this category, there are more specific
subcategories or variables. By tracing an error or problem to one of
these variables, you can begin to isolate the probable cause(s).
System troubleshooting variables include:
Fluidic subsystems, page 10-4
Optical subsystem, page 10-4
Hardware, page 10-5
Software, page 10-5
Consumables, page 10-5
Fluidic subsystems
Fluidic subsystems consist of hardware components that control the

precision and accuracy of liquid level sensing, aspiration, and
dispense. Additionally, these components distribute the fluids used to
wash the probes.
Examples Pipettors, probes, pressure monitors, syringes and valves,
tubing, processing module circuit boards, pumps, and ICT
unit
Symptoms Liquid level sense error messages (3000-3999), imprecise
results, and/or erratic results
Optical subsystem
The optical subsystem consists of hardware components and

accessories that control concise and accurate optical readings.
Examples Lamp, heat absorbing filter, lenses, cuvettes, water bath,
optics unit
Symptoms Optical-read error messages (6000-6999) and/or shift in
values

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hardware
Hardware consists of the mechanical components that move

consumables and samples through the system and distribute power
and electrical signals.
Examples Carousels, sensors, circuit boards, and bar code readers
Symptoms Homing failures, jams, step loss, and motor stalls (robotic
and sensor error messages 5000-5999) and/or bar code
reader error messages (4000-4999)
Software
Software consists of computer instructions that interpret system and

assay information, calculate results, and provide the interface for
controlling the system hardware.
Examples System, assay, maintenance, and diagnostic software
Symptoms Software error messages (9000-9999), cannot power on the
SCC
Consumables
Consumables are supplies that are required to run assays.

Examples Sample cups, bulk solutions, reagent cartridges, and
onboard solutions
Symptoms Imprecise results and/or erratic results
System troubleshooting variables (i System)

The system category is a high level group of symptoms that relate to
system performance. Within this category, there are more specific
System troubleshooting variables include:
Fluidic subsystems, page 10-6
Optical subsystem, page 10-6
Hardware, page 10-6
Software, page 10-6
Consumables, page 10-7

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Fluidic subsystems
Fluidic subsystems are the hardware components that control the

precision and accuracy of liquid level sensing, aspiration, and
dispense. Additionally, these components distribute the fluids used to
wash the probes.
Examples Pipettors, probes, LLS (liquid level sense) antennas,
syringes and valves, dispensers, tubing, pumps, processing
module circuit boards, and WAM (wash aspirate monitor)
thermistors
Symptoms Liquid level sense error messages (3000-3999), imprecise
results, and/or erratic results
Optical subsystem
The optical subsystem consists of hardware components that control

concise and accurate optical readings.
Examples CMIA reader, shutter, and reader magnet
Symptoms Optical-read error messages (6000-6999) and/or shift in
values
Hardware
Hardware consists of the mechanical components that move

consumables and samples through the system and distribute power
and electrical signals.
Examples Carousel, sensors, RV (reaction vessel) loader, circuit
boards, and bar code readers
Symptoms Homing failures, jams, step loss, and motor stalls (robotic
and sensor error messages 5000-5999) and/or bar code
reader error messages (4000-4999)
Software
Software consists of computer instructions that interpret system and

assay information, calculate results, and provide the interface for
controlling the system hardware.
Examples System, assay, maintenance, and diagnostic software
Symptoms Software error messages (9000-9999), cannot power on the
SCC

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Consumables
Consumables are supplies that are required to run assays.

Examples Sample cups, bulk solutions, and RVs (reaction vessels)
Symptoms Imprecise results and/or erratic results
Reagent troubleshooting variables (c System)

The reagent category is a high level group of symptoms that relate to
processing results. Within this category, there are more specific
Reagent troubleshooting variables include:
Reagent kits, page 10-7
Controls, page 10-7
Calibrators, page 10-7
Reagent kits
Reagent kits contain the consumables that detect and/or measure

specific analyte presence or concentration in samples.
Examples Reagents, sample diluents, and pretreatments
Symptoms Control(s) out of range and/or trends and shifts in control
and/or patient results
Controls
Controls are samples with known concentrations of analytes that

allow performance monitoring within a clinical range.
Examples Analyte-specific and multiconstituent controls
Symptoms Control out of range, imprecise control results, and/or trends
and shifts in control and/or patient results
Calibrators
Calibrators are samples with known concentrations of analytes used to

create the calibration against which samples are measured.
Examples Analyte-specific and multiconstituent calibrators
Symptoms Shift in control and patient values

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Reagent troubleshooting variables (i System)

The reagent category is a high level group of symptoms that relate to
processing results. Within this category, there are more specific
Reagent troubleshooting variables include:
Reagent kits, page 10-8
Controls, page 10-8
Calibrators, page 10-8
Reagent kits
Reagent kits contain the consumables that detect and/or measure

specific analyte presence or concentration in samples.
Examples Antibody coated microparticles, conjugate, and
assay-specific diluent
Symptoms Control(s) out of range and/or trends and shifts in control
and/or patient results
Controls
Controls are samples with known concentrations of analytes that

allow performance monitoring within a clinical range.
Examples Analyte-specific and multiconstituent controls
Symptoms Control out of range, imprecise control results, and/or trends
and shifts in control and/or patient results
Calibrators
Calibrators are samples with known concentrations of analytes used to

create the calibration against which samples are measured.
Examples Analyte-specific calibrators
Symptoms Shift in control and patient results
Operator troubleshooting variables

The operator category is a group of symptoms that relate to proper
system operation and maintenance. Within this category, the actions

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
of a single operator and/or the actions of multiple operators can result

in a variety of symptoms.
Examples A new user and a trained operator
Symptoms Bubbles in reagents or samples, particulate matter or fibrin
in samples, general error messages (0001-0999), assay
specific error messages (1000-1999), error code messages
generated as a result of improper maintenance or
component replacement
Environmental troubleshooting variables

The environmental category is a high level group of symptoms that
relate to processing results. Within this category, there are more
specific subcategories or variables. By tracing an error or problem to
one of these variables, you can begin to isolate the probable cause(s).
Environmental troubleshooting variables include:
Physical requirements, page 10-9
Electrical requirements, page 10-9
Host interface components, page 10-10
Physical requirements
Physical requirements identify the environmental conditions needed

to ensure consistent system performance.
Examples Room temperature and/or humidity, location, processing
module and sample handler clearances, and water quality
Symptoms Temperature error messages (7000-7999) and/or
inadequate airflow
Electrical requirements
Electrical requirements identify the power requirements needed to

ensure consistent system performance and optical readings.
Examples Power outlet, voltages, and dedicated line
Symptoms Loss of power to the system

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Host interface components
Host interface components enable communication between the

laboratory information system and the system control center.
Examples Ports, cables, and connections
Symptoms Communication error messages (8000-8999)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 10 System logs screen
System logs screen

From the System logs screen you can view (by module) the:
Temporary message log - displays non-critical error-related
messages that you can address, and then delete
Message history log - displays and stores a record of error-related
messages that you use to troubleshoot problems associated with
system performance and/or results reporting
You can also access windows to print the Temporary Message Log and
Message History Log reports, and find a specific message(s) in the
system logs.
Figure 10.1: System logs screen
For descriptions of these fields, see System logs screen field descriptions,

DATE/TIME Chronologically in descending order
M Numerically in ascending order
ERROR CODE Numerically in ascending order

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
System logs screen Section 10
To display this screen, see Access the System logs screen, page 10-12.
Review message logs, page 10-13
Find a specific message, page 10-13
View low level error messages, page 10-14
Delete a temporary message, page 10-15
Access the System logs screen

Perform this procedure to display the System logs screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the System logs screen:
selecting the LIS, ARM, or LAS button.
Select System from the menu bar, and then select System logs.
The System logs screen displays.
Procedures - System logs screen

Procedures that can be performed from the System logs screen and its
Review message logs, page 10-13
View low level error messages, page 10-14
Delete a temporary message, page 10-15

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Review message logs
Perform this procedure to display the System logs screen. From this
screen you can view the Temporary message and Message history logs.
To find specific messages, see Find a specific message, page 10-13.
To view low level messages, see View low level error messages,
page 10-14.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To review message logs:

1. Select System from the menu bar, and then select System logs.
The System logs screen displays.
2. Select the Log selection list button, and then select the desired
log.
To print the Message History Report, see Print the Message History Log
report, page 5-342. To print Temporary Message Log report, see Print a
report, page 5-333.
Find a specific message
Perform this procedure to search for a specific message(s) in the system

logs when necessary for troubleshooting.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To find a specific message:

1. Select F3 - Find on the System logs screen.
The Find options (System logs) window displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: A wildcard search allows you to type a partial entry

character in all fields except position (P).
error codes starting with 123 display. This list could include
1234, 1235, or 1236.

The System logs screen displays with the text "Search results:" in
the title bar.
Find options (System logs) window, page 10-15
View low level error messages
Perform this procedure to view additional error messages when

necessary for troubleshooting.
To find specific error messages, see Find a specific message, page 10-13.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view message details:

1. Select the Log selection list button on the System logs screen,
and then select Message history log.
2. Select F3 - Find.
The Find options window displays.
3. Select the Error level: Low check box.
4. Select Done to display the messages.

The System logs screen displays with the text "Search results:" in
the title bar.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Delete a temporary message
Perform this procedure to delete a temporary message(s) after

correcting the issue that caused the error.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To delete a temporary message:

1. Select the desired message(s) from the table on the System logs
screen or select F2 - Select all.
3. Select OK to delete the message(s).
Windows - System logs screen

Windows you can access from the System logs screen include:
Find options (System logs) window
From the Find options (System logs) window, you can search for
specific item(s) in the logs by entering search criteria in one or more
fields.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 10.2: Find options (System logs) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (System logs) window

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 10 Error codes
Error codes
Error codes are divided into ten sections that reflect the major
categories in which errors may occur:
General error codes (0001-0999), page 10-17
Assay specific error codes (1000-1999), page 10-113
Maintenance error codes (2000-2999), page 10-181
Level sense error codes (3000-3999), page 10-230
Bar code reader error codes (4000-4999), page 10-311
Robotic and sensor error codes (5000-5999), page 10-333
Optics error codes (6000-6999), page 10-411
Temperature error codes (7000-7999), page 10-420
Computer hardware error codes (8000-8999), page 10-440
Software error codes (9000-9999), page 10-477
General error codes (0001-0999)

The general error code category includes error codes between
0001-0999.
If the corrective actions listed under the error code in question do not
resolve the problem, contact your Area Customer Support
representative at:
United States 1-877-4ABBOTT (1-877-422-2688)
International Call your Area Customer Support representative.
NOTE: For corrective actions that involve hazardous activity refer to

Hazards, page 8-1, for precautions you should take to minimize
exposure and prevent personal injury or system damage. Hazard
activities include but are not limited to:
Replacing system probes
Handling reagents, calibrators, controls, and specimens
Removing physical obstructions
Changing the lamp
Removing system waste

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error codes Section 10
Error code: 0102

Unable to perform requested operation, Processing Module not in correct status.
Probable cause Corrective action

Attempted one of the following when the Perform the activity when the processing module
processing module status did not allow the status changes.
activity:
Start up
Reagent scanning
Reagent carousel advance
The first time run was selected for the processing Cycle power to the processing module and/or
module, error code 4103 - "Reagent bar code sample handler, page 5-12.
reader not responding" occurred during the Run
initialization.
Hardware failure: Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
Reagent bar code reader hardware failure.
Error code: 0104

Unable to perform requested operation, Sample Handler not in correct status.

Attempted one of the following when the sample Perform the activity when the sample handler status
handler status did not allow the activity: changes.
Start up
Pause
Error code: 0105

Batch (x) terminated. Final sample is in a carrier and that carrier label cannot be read.
x = Batch name

A non-bar coded batch is in process and 5 or fewer 1. Determine the samples present in the sample
samples remain to be identified. The bar code label carrier that were not processed.
on the sample carrier cannot be read by the sample
ID bar code reader. The system assumes this 2. Place a new batch order for these samples.
carrier contains the last samples for the batch,
therefore the batch is terminated. 3. Place the samples into a different sample carrier.
4. Refer to error code 4204, for corrective action, if

error continues.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0106

Unable to perform installation, a valid ARCHITECT CD is not in the CD drive.

Software upgrade was attempted without the CD 1. Place the ARCHITECT CD into the drive.
installed in the CD drive.
2. Restart the software upgrade procedure.
Error code: 0107

Unable to perform requested operation, Sample Handler or Processing Module not in
correct status.

Attempted one of the following when the Perform a different operation or wait until the
processing module status did not allow the module changes status.
activity:
Selected pause when the status is Stopped.
Selected start up when the status is Running.
Keypad hardware failure.
Error code: 0108

Unload Queue at capacity, remove Sample Carriers.

Unload queue is full of sample carriers. Remove carriers from the unload queue.
Unload queue sensor hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0109

Unable to process test, Processing Module not Running.

User selected stop before processing began. Start up the processing module when the reason for
the stop no longer exists. See Start up the
processing module and/or sample handler,
page 5-13.
Hardware failure. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304
error codes that occurred at the same time as
this message.
2. Look for any error codes that occurred at the

same time as the 0304 error code.
3. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if

you do not find any error codes that occurred at
the same time as the 0304 error code.
4. Perform the corrective action for the specific

error code.
Error code: 0110

Unable to execute command, Processing Module or Sample Handler Stopped.

User selected stop for either the sample handler Start up the processing module and/or sample
or processing module. handler, page 5-13, when the reason for the stop no
longer exists.
Communication or hardware failure. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304
this message.



error code.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0111

Unable to perform requested operation, previously requested operation still in progress.

System is currently performing a requested activity Request the new activity when the current activity is
such as flush, reagent scan, or carousel advance. complete.
Error code: 0112

Unable to process test, Sample Handler Stopped.

User selected stop. Start up the sample handler when the reason for
the stop no longer exists. See Start up the
page 5-13.
Processing module stopped because of a 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 5000
previous hardware failure. category error codes that occurred at the same
time as this message.

you do not find any 5000 category error codes.

error code.
Sample handler keypad hardware failure.
Error code: 0113

Unable to delete assay, at least one module is not in the correct status.

Attempted to delete an assay while the processing Delete the assay when the status for all processing
module(s) are not in the correct status. modules is Stopped, Ready, or Offline.
Error code: 0114

Unable to process test, assay deleted.

Assay deleted, all pending orders for the assay are Reinstall the assay and create new orders for the
sent to exceptions. samples sent to exceptions, if required.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0115

No assay found for reagent kit in position (x).
x = Reagent carousel position

The assay file required for the reagent kit is either Install the correct assay file. See Install or delete an
not installed or it is not the correct version. assay file, page 2-214.
The manually defined reagent name does not Reconfigure the reagent name, see Configure a
match the name, including capitalization, encoded user-defined reagent (photometric - c System),
in the bar code. page 2-93.
Error code: 0116

Invalid order, missing Carrier/Carousel or Position.

Add order was selected when the information in Enter valid data in both the C (carrier/carousel) and
either the carrier/carousel or position data entry box P (position) data entry boxes.
was missing or incorrect.
Error code: 0117

Invalid entry, no assays selected.

Add order was selected when no assay was Select one or more assays.
selected.
Done was selected in the Select assays window Select one or more assays.
with no assays selected.
Error code: 0118

Invalid order, missing Sample ID.

Add order was selected before a sample ID was Enter a sample ID in the SID data entry box.
entered in the sample ID field.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0119

Batch (x) deleted, batch (y) has been initiated.
x = Name of deleted batch
y = Name of overlapping batch

A batch was in process when a carrier was loaded No corrective action is required. Remaining tests
containing a sample that is defined as the start of a from the batch in process are deleted. Batch tests
different batch. in process continue. Tests from the new batch start.
To avoid future occurrences, do not start another
batch until the batch in process terminates.
Error code: 0120

Invalid sample type detected in batch (y). Sample is in C/P (x).
x = Carrier and position of sample
y = Name of batch

When processing a non-bar coded batch, a When processing a non-bar coded batch, do not
sample with a bar code was found for which there place bar coded samples within the batch unless
were no tests ordered. tests are ordered for the sample.
When processing a bar coded batch, a sample When processing a bar coded batch, do not place
with no bar code was found for which there were non-bar coded samples within the batch unless
no tests ordered. tests are ordered for the sample in the position.
There are empty positions in a sample carrier When processing a bar coded batch, do not leave
during a bar coded batch. open positions in the sample carrier.
Error code: 0121

Invalid order, Assay (x), number (y) is no longer installed.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

The assay file for the test to be rerun was deleted. 1. Delete the rerun test order.
2. Reinstall the assay and create new orders for the

tests to be rerun, if required.
The assay file for the test to be rerun was deleted 1. Delete the rerun test order.
and then reinstalled.
2. Reorder the test for rerun.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0122

No Reagent kits found during reagent scan.

Processing module does not have any reagents, Load reagents on the specified processing module,
therefore the status cannot change to Running. and then select run.
Error code: 0123

Unable to fail calibration curve, Processing Module (x) Running.
x = Processing module number (1-4)

Attempted to fail an active calibration curve when 1. Pause the processing module, page 5-14.
the processing module status was Running.
2. Fail the desired calibration curve when the status
is Ready. See Fail a calibration curve, page 6-32.
Error code: 0124

Ending Sample ID cannot be the same as the starting Sample ID.

When creating a bar coded batch order, the same Change either the starting or the ending sample ID
number was entered for both the starting and so they are not the same.
ending sample ID.
Error code: 0125

Invalid rerun request, missing Carrier/Carousel and Position for Sample ID (x).
x = Sample ID

Ordered a rerun for an unlabeled tube without Enter the carrier/carousel and position for the rerun
entering carrier/carousel and position information. sample.
Error code: 0126

Unable to delete order, test is in progress.

Requested deletion of an order when the test is in Delete the desired results when all tests for the
process. sample are complete.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0127

Invalid order, Sample ID previously assigned to Patient ID (x).
x = Patient ID

Entered an order for a sample ID already 1. Verify the patient ID associated with the sample
associated with a different patient ID. ID is correct for all orders.
2. Enter the correct sample ID.

NOTE: Patient ID is optional and is entered on
the Details for sample window.
Error code: 0128

Invalid rerun request, Assay (x), number (y) no longer installed.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

The assay file for the test to be rerun was deleted. 1. Delete the rerun test order.
2. Reinstall the assay and create new orders for the

tests to be rerun, if required.
The assay file for the test to be rerun was deleted 1. Delete the rerun test order.
and then reinstalled.
2. Reorder the test for rerun.
Error code: 0129

The end time (x) is earlier than the start time for the specified date (y).
x = The end time
y = The date of the start time

Specified incorrect date and time in a Find window. Enter a correct date and time.
Error code: 0130

Invalid entry, (x) not within range (y - z).
x = Value entered
y = Minimum range value
z = Maximum range value

Value entered was not within the specified range. Enter a value within the specified range.
NOTE: Some data entry boxes may also be left

blank.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0131

Invalid entry, user input (x) for character (y).
x = User input
y = Number of characters from left in data entry box

Character in the position specified is missing or Enter the correct value for the specified position.
incorrect.
Error code: 0132

Unable to install procedure (x), an equal or higher version already exists.
x = Procedure name

The same or higher version of the procedure is No corrective action required if the request was
already installed. made in error.
To install a lower version, delete the procedure and
then install the desired version. See Install or delete
a maintenance or diagnostic procedure file,
page 2-218.
Error code: 0133

Unable to install (x) procedure, system software version not compatible.
x = Procedure name

The procedure requires a newer version of Upgrade the ARCHITECT System software to the
ARCHITECT System software. appropriate version and reinstall the procedure.
(Contact your Area Customer Support.)
Error code: 0134

Procedure (x) does not exist.
x = Procedure number

Wrong procedure number entered when deleting a Enter a valid number for the procedure you are
procedure. deleting.
Error code: 0135

Unable to install software. Processing Module is not in the correct status.

Processing module status is Running, Scheduled Install the software when the processing module
pause, Initializing, or Scanning. status is Stopped, Offline, Ready, or Warming.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0136

Unable to perform procedure, Module (x) not in the correct status.
x = Module number (0-4)

The specified processing module or sample handler Refer to the Version details for procedure
is not in the correct status to perform the procedure. (diagnostics) window, page 10-656, to determine
the status required for performing the procedure.
Error code: 0137

Unable to perform (x) procedure, insufficient user access.
x = Procedure name

The current user does not have access sufficient to Use a logon with the access required to execute the
execute the selected procedure. procedure.
Error code: 0138

Unable to approve maintenance log, insufficient user access.

The current user does not have access sufficient to Log on with system administrator access. See Log
approve a maintenance month. on (system administrator), page 1-23.
Error code: 0139

Unable to modify approval status for a previously approved maintenance log.

Requested an approval status update for a Select the correct month, and then select F4 -
maintenance month that is already approved. Approve.
Error code: 0140

Unable to approve, no maintenance activity.

Requested an approval status change for a month Select the correct month, and then select F4 -
with no maintenance activity. Approve.
Error code: 0141

Unable to approve current month.

Requested an approval status for the current month Select the correct month, and then select F4 -
or a future month. Approve.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0142

Unable to install software, host transmission is in process.

Results are transferring to the host. Software Install the software when the transmission is
cannot be installed during this process. complete.
Error code: 0143

Unable to process test, no reagent kits eligible on the selected Processing Module.

The required reagent kit is not available on the Verify reagent inventory for the assay. See Verify
selected processing module. All of the reagent kits reagent inventory on a single module, page 5-79.
on the module for the assay are either empty,
expired, or not calibrated.
Error code: 0144

Invalid order, manual dilution factor is inconsistent with previous order for Sample ID (x).
x = Sample ID

A manual dilution was requested for a sample ID 1. Order the test using the same manual dilution.
that already has an order using a different manual
dilution. 2. Assign another sample ID to the new dilution, if a
different manual dilution is required.
Error code: 0145

Missing entry, Level name required.

The control level name is not entered in the Enter a control level name.
required field.
Error code: 0146

Missing entry, Lot no. required.

A control lot number is not entered in the required Enter the control lot number.
field.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0147

Invalid entry, control Level name already exists for this lot.

The entered control level name already exists for Enter a unique control level name.
this lot.
Error code: 0148

Invalid entry, control Lot no. already exists for this assay.

A duplicate lot number was entered. Enter a unique control lot number for the control.
Error code: 0149

Invalid request, unable to delete default control lot.

Attempted to delete the default control lot. 1. Define a new control lot as the default.
2. Delete the desired control lot.
Error code: 0150

Invalid request, select another lot, then specify it as default.

Attempted to deselect the current default control lot. Select another control lot and define it as the default
lot.
Error code: 0151

Missing entry, Expected mean required.

The expected mean value is not entered. Enter the expected mean value.
Error code: 0152

Missing entry, Expected 1 SD required.

The expected 1 SD value is not entered. Enter the expected 1 SD value.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0153

Missing entry, Carrier/Carousel ID required.

Add order was selected when the information in the Enter valid data in the carrier/carousel field.
carrier/carousel field was missing or incorrect.
Error code: 0154

Missing entry, Position required.

Add order was selected when the information in the Enter valid data in the position field.
position field was missing or incorrect.
Error code: 0155

Unable to delete assay (x), it is part of a batch order on the system.
x = Assay name

The assay is part of a batch order with a status of To delete the assay without processing the batch,
Pending. delete the batch and then delete the assay.
To process the batch, delete the assay when the
batch is complete.
Error code: 0156

Invalid entry, bar code SID must be unique.

The specified bar code SID is used for another Enter a unique bar code SID.
control level in the same control lot or for another
control.
Error code: 0157

Invalid entry, day entered must be valid for the month and year specified.

The day of the month entered in the field is not Enter the correct day for the month and year
correct for the month and year specified. specified.
Error code: 0158

Invalid entry, month entered must be in the range (1 - 12).

The month entered is outside the range 1 - 12. Enter a month from 1 - 12.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0159

Invalid entry, year entered must be in range (1800 - 9999).

The year entered is outside the range 1800 - 9999. Enter a year from 1800 - 9999.
Error code: 0160

Invalid entry, hour entered must be within range (0 - 23).

The hour entered is outside the range 0 - 23. Enter an hour from 0 - 23.
Error code: 0161

Invalid entry, minute entered must be within range (0 - 59).

The minutes entered is outside the range 0 - 59. Enter a value for minutes from 0 - 59.
Error code: 0162

System backup canceled, insufficient disk space for (x).
x = File name

There is not enough disk space to perform a backup Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
procedure. provide information specifying the operation you
were attempting to perform when this error
occurred.
Error code: 0164

Invalid request, select at least one restore option.

Done was selected without selecting a restore Select at least one option from the Restore options
option (module calibrations, system configuration, list, and then select Done.
or database). To exit without performing a restore, select Cancel.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0166

Batch (x) deleted. Batch was in process when the SCC was shut down.
x = Batch name

The batch was in process when the SCC was 1. Determine why the SCC was shutdown and
shutdown. All samples with a Scheduled or Running correct the cause.
status go to exceptions.
2. Rerun the tests in exceptions.
3. Order another batch for the remaining samples.
Error code: 0167

Invalid order, Carrier/Carousel and Position required for previously ordered Sample ID (x).
x = Sample ID

The same sample ID was found in one or more Specify the carrier/carousel ID and position for each
carrier/carousel positions and the carrier/carousel aliquot loaded when using multiple aliquots of the
position was not specified for the test order. same sample ID.
Error code: 0168

Invalid entry, end date is earlier than the start date.

The end date entered is earlier than the start date. Enter the correct date range.
Error code: 0169

Procedure not performed on selected day.

Details was selected from a Maintenance log for a Select a date when the procedure was run, and
date when the procedure was not run. then select F5 - Details.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0170

Samples (x) were not processed in batch (y). Unable to read carrier label.
x = Range of Sample IDs that were not processed
y = Batch name

A non-bar coded batch is in process and the bar 1. Determine the samples present in the sample
code label on the sample carrier can not be read by carrier that were not processed.
the sample ID bar code reader. The system
assumes this carrier contains 5 samples for the 2. Place a new batch order for these samples.
batch, increments the sample ID by 5 samples, and
does not process these samples. 3. Place the samples into a different sample carrier.
4. Refer to error code 4204, for corrective action, if

error continues.
Error code: 0171

Invalid shutdown request, at least one module is currently Running.

Shutdown was selected from the Snapshot 1. Pause the sample handler and all processing
screen when the status of at least one module modules with a status of Running. See System
was Running. startup, pause, and shutdown, page 5-3.
2. Shutdown the system when the status of all

modules is Ready.
Shutdown was selected from the Snapshot 1. Wait until the status of the sample handler and
screen when the status of at least one module all processing modules changes to Ready, or
was Scheduled pause. select the sample handler and/or processing
module graphic, and then select Stop.

modules is Ready or Stopped.
Shutdown was selected from the Snapshot 1. Wait until all maintenance procedures are
screen when the status of at least one module complete, or select the sample handler and/or
was Maintenance. processing module graphic, and then select
Stop.

modules is Ready or Stopped.
Shutdown was selected from the Snapshot Shutdown the system when the ARM completes
screen while the ARM (Automatic Reconstitution buffer transfer.
Module) was transferring buffer to the wash
buffer reservoir.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0172

No assay found for reagent kit in section (x).
x = RSH section number

The assay file required for the reagent kit is either Install the correct assay file. See Install or delete an
not installed or it is not the correct version. assay file, page 2-214.
Error code: 0173

System restore canceled, backup version (x) and current software version (y) are
incompatible.
x = Software version when backup was created
y = Current software version

Attempted to restore a backup with a database Select a backup created with the current version of
created with a different system software version system software.
number.
Error code: 0174

Invalid order for Sample ID (x), Assay (y) disabled.
x = Sample ID
y = Assay name

Order was received with an assay that is disabled or 1. Change the availability of the assay when the
patient disabled. reason for disabling the assay is corrected. See
Change the availability of an assay, page 2-109.
2. Reorder the test.
Error code: 0175

Attempted to operate an un-initialized assembly (x).
x = Mechanism name

Hardware failure for mechanism indicated. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any error
codes that occurred at the same time as this
message.

you do not find any error codes.

error code.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0176

Invalid order, no control levels selected.

Add order was selected when no control level was Select one or more control levels.
selected.
Error code: 0177

Invalid order, Sample ID (x) exists for a different type of order (patient, calibrator, control or
batch).
x = Existing Sample ID

The sample ID is already in use for an existing Assign a different sample ID for the order being
calibrator, control, patient, or batch order. created.
Error code: 0178

Unable to process test, Sample ID (x) currently configured as a control bar code SID.
x = Sample ID

A patient order was created using a previously Re-order the test using a unique sample ID.
assigned control bar code SID.
Error code: 0179

Data archive failed, previous archive still in progress.

Another archive was selected before the current Request the new archive when the current archive
archive was complete. is complete.
Error code: 0180

Unable to archive, insufficient disk space.

There is not enough space on the disk to archive Select fewer records to archive or insert a new disk.
the selected records.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0181

Unable to archive, no disk or incorrect disk type detected.

A disk wasn't placed in the CD drive. Place a disk in the CD drive.
An incorrect disk type was used. Use a CD-R disk or non-formatted CD-RW disk.
The disk is inserted upside down. Turn the disk over and insert it in the drive.
Error code: 0182

Unable to archive, no CD drive detected.

Software error Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5
The CD-RW drive is not installed on the SCC. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.
Cables on the CD drive have a poor hardware failure.
connection
CD drive
Power cable
Ribbon cable
Error code: 0183

Unable to archive, CD drive is initializing.

Done was selected before initialization was 1. Select OK on the archive message, and then
complete. wait until initialization is complete.
2. Select Done to continue archiving.
Error code: 0184

Unable to archive, disk is read-only.

A CD-ROM disk was left in the drive. Remove the CD-ROM disk and insert a CD-R or
Example: ARCHITECT System Assay CD-ROM, non-formatted CD-RW disk.
ARCHITECT System Maintenance and
Diagnostic CD-ROM
The archive CD disk was used for procedures Use archive disk for archive only.
other than archive.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0185

Unable to archive, Processing Module is not in the correct status.

Processing module status is Running, Scheduled Perform the archive when the processing module
pause, Initializing, or Scanning. status is Stopped, Offline, or Ready.
Error code: 0186

Unable to archive, archive device is in use.

The archive device is in the process of reading, Archive results when the device is ready.
writing, or initializing.
Error code: 0187

Data archive failed, duplicate archive file name found.

Archive disk is used on multiple SCC systems Verify the ARCHITECT System number matches
which have the same ARCHITECT System the label on the SCC. If the number is not correct,
number. contact your Area Customer Support.
A write error occurred on an earlier archive Use a different disk and archive.
attempt and could not be erased.
An archive was performed before and after a Use a different disk and archive.
restore was performed.
Error code: 0188

Data archive failed, CD tray is open.

After the CD drive was initialized, the CD tray was Close CD tray and start archive procedure.
opened.
Error code: 0189

Data archive failed, no disk found in drive.

A disk wasn't placed in the CD drive. Place a CD-R disk or non-formatted CD-RW disk in
the CD drive.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0190

Data archive failed, incorrect disk type detected.

An incorrect disk type was used. Use a CD-R disk or non-formatted CD-RW disk.
The disk is inserted upside down. Turn the disk over and insert it in the drive.
Error code: 0191

Data archive failed, error reading/writing to disk.

CD disk is dirty. Clean disk. Refer to the CD cover for cleaning and
handling procedures.
CD disk is defective. Use new disk.
CD drive hardware failure.
Error code: 0192

Data archive failed, error verifying archive data on disk.

CD disk is defective. Use new disk.
Error code: 0193

Unable to archive, no archive data found. Refresh screen then select data to archive.

The screen was not refreshed before F8 - Archive Select the refresh button, and then repeat the
was selected. archive procedure. See Archive stored patient
results, page 5-269 or Archive stored control
Error code: 0194

Unable to process test, invalid product type.

Reagent bottles for a STAT test are incorrectly Load the reagent bottles on an ARCHITECT
loaded on an i 2000. System with STAT test capability.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0196

Unable to delete assay (x), pending orders exist for this assay.
x = Assay name

Attempted to delete an assay when pending or Delete the pending orders or wait until the orders
running orders exist for the assay. are complete before trying to delete the assay.
Error code: 0197

Missing entry, formula required.

A valid formula is not entered for a calculated assay. Enter a valid formula for the calculated assay.
Error code: 0198

Unable to delete assay (x), the assay is a constituent of a calculated assay.
x = Assay name

Attempted to delete an assay that is a constituent Delete or edit the calculated assay before deleting
for a calculated assay. the constituent assay.
Error code: 0199

Unable to process test from sample carousel, invalid Processing Module for assay type.

A sample was loaded on the sample carousel with Place the sample on the robotic sample handler to
i System assays ordered. run the i System assays.
Error code: 0200

A two position reagent kit loaded in positions 25 and 1.

Bottles from a two-position reagent kit are loaded in Load the reagents in sequential positions.
positions 25 and 1 (not sequentially).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0201

No bottle found where expected in position (x) on (y) carousel. Print reagent load error
report.
x = Position in which the bottle was missing
y = Location in which the bottle was missing

There is no bottle in the indicated position and Load the correct bottle with the kit in the correct
carousel where expected. position.
Label on a bottle in the indicated position cannot Turn the reagent bottle to expose a different area of
be read. the bar code to the reader.
Error code: 0202

The reagent kit in position (x) has expired or exceeded the stability time.

The indicated reagent is expired or has exceeded Load a new, in-date reagent kit. See Load bar
the onboard stability time. coded reagents (c System), page 5-85, Replace
non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-96, or
Load reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-106.
Error code: 0203

Unable to change configuration, Processing Module is not in the correct status.

The processing module status is Running, Perform required configuration changes when the
Scheduled pause, Initializing, or Scanning. processing module status is Offline, Stopped,
Ready, or Warming.
Error code: 0204

Unable to process test, no Reagent kits available to run test on assigned Processing Module.

The processing module does not have adequate Load the required reagent kit. See Load reagents (i
reagent on board to run the requested test. All of 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-106.
the reagent kits on the module for the assay are
either empty, expired, or not calibrated.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0205

Wrong lot, component or serial number in position (x) on (y) carousel. Print reagent load
error report.
x = Position in which the bottle was detected
y = Location in which the bottle was detected

A bottle with the wrong lot number, component ID, Load the correct bottle for the kit in the correct
or serial number is loaded in the indicated position position.
and carousel.
Error code: 0206

Bottle mismatch in position (x) on (y) carousel, bottle is already part of another Reagent kit.

A bottle in the indicated position is already part of 1. Print the reagent load error report to determine
another reagent kit. the kit causing the error.
2. Load the correct bottles for the reagent kit or

load a new reagent kit.
Error code: 0207

Calibration version mismatch for reagent kit in position (x).

Calibration version for the reagent kit on the 1. Load a reagent kit matching the currently
processing module does not match the currently installed assay version.
installed assay.
NOTE: Deplete the supply of reagents for the old
assay before installing the new assay.
2. Install the new assay file when the current supply

of reagents is depleted. See Install or delete an
assay file, page 2-214.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0208

Reagent Carousel scan error, refer to Reagent status screen for details.

Bottle mismatch, extra bottle is in the carousel, or 1. View the reagent status screen and correct the
the required bottle is missing. indicated problem.
2. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0000

category error codes, if the cause is not obvious.
Reagent bottle not loaded properly. Reseat the reagent bottle.
Label cannot be read on a bottle. Clean the bottle label.
The bar code reader requires calibration. Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure
3210 Reagent Bar Code Calibration, page 10-675.
Error code: 0209

Number of unreleased patient results reached limit. New orders will not be accepted.

The number of unreleased results has reached the Delete or release results, QC, exceptions, or
limit. pending orders before placing new orders.
Error code: 0210

Selected Carrier/Carousel and Position in use by another Sample ID (x), enter an available
C/P.
x = Sample ID

The carrier/carousel and position is in use by Enter a carrier/carousel and position number that is
another sample. not currently in use.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0211

Unable to process test(s), Sample ID (x) does not match scanned sample ID (y).
x = Sample ID ordered
y = Sample ID on sample tube at the bar code reader

A carrier/carousel and position were assigned for 1. See the Order status screen, page 5-150, for
a sample ID, then a different sample was placed carrier/carousel and position assignment.
into this carrier/carousel and position.
2. Place the correct sample tube into the
carrier/carousel position.
Sample ID bar code reader requires calibration. Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure
3220 SH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-689, if you
have a standard sample handler. Perform 3222
RSH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-685, if you
have a robotic sample handler.
Error code: 0212

Run request denied. Solid Waste Container not present.

Waste container was not present in a processing Replace the solid waste container.
module when run was selected.
Error code: 0213

Batch is in process. Remaining unprocessed samples will be added to the batch unless you
manually delete the batch.

A batch was in process when the sample handler If you want the batch to continue, no corrective
was paused or the SCC was shutdown. action is required. When you select run for the
sample handler, batch processing continues.
If you do not want the unprocessed samples
remaining on the sample handler to be added to the
current batch, delete the batch before restarting the
sample handler.
Error code: 0214

Pause Load Queue before pressing reverse key.

User selected reverse while the sample handler Pause the sample handler before pressing the
status is Running. reverse key.
Keypad hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0215

Motor command aborted, operator requested Stop.

Unable to complete motor command, user selected Start up the processing module and/or sample
stop. handler, page 5-13, when the reason for the stop no
longer exists.
Error code: 0216

Unable to process test, operator requested Stop or Processing Queue access door opened.

User selected stop for the sample handler before Start up the sample handler when the reason for
the sample was aspirated. the stop no longer exists. See Start up the
page 5-13
Processing queue access door was opened Close the door and restart the run.
before the sample was aspirated.
Error code: 0217

Unable to process test, specified Processing Module not available.

User specified a test be processed on a specific
module, but the module is unable to process the
test for one of the following reasons:
There are no reagent kits present for the assay. Load reagents for the assay.
All of the reagents kits on the module for the 1. Replace empty or expired reagents.
assay are either empty, expired, or not calibrated.
2. Order a calibration for the assay if a calibration is
not already in process.
The module does not have sufficient supplies to 1. Replace empty or expired supplies.
run the assay.
The module status is not Running. 1. Select run for the processing module.
2. Wait for the processing module status to change

to Running before processing tests.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

STAT protocol percentage set to None in the Select a STAT protocol percentage of Low, Medium,
module configuration screen. or High. See Change the STAT protocol percentage
(i 2000SR), page 2-36.
Processing module stopped because of a 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 5000


error code.
Error code: 0218

Unable to process test, no Processing Modules available.

User specified that the system automatically assign
the test to a module, but none of the modules are
able to process the test for one of the following
reasons:
There are no reagent kits for the assay present Load reagents for the assay.
on any of the modules with a status of Running.
All of the reagents kits for the assay on all the 1. Replace empty or expired reagents.
modules in the Ready or Running status are
either empty, expired, or not calibrated. 2. Order a calibration for the assay if a calibration is
not already in process.
None of the modules with a status of Running 1. Replace empty or expired supplies.
have sufficient supplies to run the assay.
No modules have a status of Running. 1. Select run for a processing module.

to Running before processing tests.
Processing modules are stopped because of a 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 5000


error code.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0219

Run request denied, at least one module must be Running.

Selected run for the sample handler when no Select run for a processing module.
modules have a status of Running.
Error code: 0220

Unable to perform requested operation, Processing Module not in correct status.

The processing module is not in the correct status Establish the correct module status, and then
to perform the requested activity. repeat the activity.
Error code: 0221

Invalid order, selected quality control levels do not all fit onto Carrier/Carousel (x).
x = Carrier/Carousel ID

The number of control levels ordered exceeds the 1. Order fewer control levels for the selected
number of available positions on the carrier/carousel.
carrier/carousel. When requested with one control
order, multiple control levels all must be run in one 2. Create a new order for the remaining control
carrier/carousel. levels on a new carrier/carousel.
Error code: 0222

Invalid entry, serial number (x) already exists.
x = Serial number currently in system

A serial number was entered that already exists in Enter a valid serial number.
the SCC. Example: i201099
Error code: 0223

Invalid password for (x), enter correct password.
x = User logon name

An invalid password was entered for the user who Enter the correct password.
logged on.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0224

Invalid entry, the Sample Handler serial number must be 7 characters.

A sample handler serial number was entered that Enter the sample handler serial number in the
did not contain 7 characters. correct format.
Example: SH01175
Error code: 0225

Invalid entry, date entered must be in range January 1, 1970 to February 5, 2036.

The date entered is outside the range January 1, Enter the correct date within the range January 1,
1970 - February 5, 2036. 1970 - February 5, 2036.
Error code: 0226

Unable to perform Unload, Wash Buffer reservoir empty.

Wash buffer container is already empty. No corrective action is required.
Wash buffer transfer tubing is not properly Reconnect all tubing and repeat as-needed
connected or is crimped. maintenance procedure 2185 Wash Buffer Unload,
page 9-70.
Buffer level sensor connection is loose hardware failure.
Buffer level sensor failed
Error code: 0227

Invalid entry, Manual dilution factor not within range of (2 - 999).

A manual dilution factor less than 2 or greater than Enter a value from 2 - 999.
999 was entered.
Error code: 0228

Invalid request, Manual dilution must be defined before selecting assay(s).

Assays for a patient or control order were selected Define the manual dilution option prior to selecting
before the manual dilution factor was entered. assays for a patient order.
Enter a value in the Sample manual dilution
factor data entry box, and then select the desired
assays from the Assays list.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0229

Unable to perform Automatic Flush for (x), system door open.
x = Inventory item

A door or cover is open on the processing Close the door or cover when the reason for
module. opening no longer exists.
Sensors hardware failure.
Error code: 0230

Duplicate Carrier (x) detected.
x = Carrier ID

Sample carrier cannot be re-used while tests are Wait until tests are complete before re-using a
still in process. sample carrier.
Error code: 0231

Reagent carousel cover has been open for 30 minutes, close cover or remove reagents.

Reagent carousel cover has been open for more Close the reagent carousel cover.
than 30 minutes. Or
Unload reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-108.
Error code: 0232

Override for cover interlocks configured to On, all tests will be sent to exception.

Override for cover interlocks is set to on in the 1. Status message. No corrective action is
module configuration screen. required. All tests become exceptions. The PMT
does not read with covers open.
2. Contact your Area Customer Support, if results

are desired.
Error code: 0233

Unable to delete control, order(s) are pending for this Lot no. and Level.

Attempted to delete a control level when orders are Archive all QC results for the control level before
pending for this level. deleting the level.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0234

Invalid order, starting Sample ID is missing.

The starting sample ID field is empty. Enter a valid starting sample ID.
Error code: 0235

Unable to delete control level, result(s) exist for this Lot no. and Level.

Attempted to delete a control level when orders are 1. Archive stored control results, page 5-284, with
pending or results exist for this level. Delete records after archive check box
selected.
2. Delete all pending orders for the control level.
Error code: 0236

Invalid request, Processing Module not in the correct status for backup or restore.

Attempted to create a backup or restore when the 1. Pause all modules. Pause the sample handler
status of one or more modules is Running. and Pause the processing module, page 5-14.
2. Repeat the backup or restore procedure, when

the processing module status is Ready.
Error code: 0237

Invalid automatic system backup request, Processing Module status must be Stopped or
Ready.

Feature not available at this time. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0238

Invalid order, ending Sample ID is missing.

The ending sample ID field is empty. Enter a valid ending sample ID.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0239

Run request denied, Processing Module hardware failure.

A previous hardware failure is preventing the Run 1. Wait until all tests in process are completed.
initialization. Module status changes to Stopped.
2. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any error
message.


error code.
Error code: 0240

Run request denied, Sample Handler hardware failure.

User selected run after a hardware failure. 1. Wait until the sample handler is Stopped.

message.


error code.
NOTE: If the hardware failure is not corrected
and run is selected again for the sample handler,
no error message is displayed and the sample
handler status does not change to Running.
Error code: 0241

Invalid entry, date of birth must be today's date or earlier.

A birth date later than today's date was entered. Enter a valid birth date.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0242

Bottle mismatch in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y), bottle is part of another
Reagent kit.
x = Reagent carrier position in which the bottle was detected
y = RSH section number

A bottle in the indicated position is already part of Load the correct bottles for the reagent kit or load a
another reagent kit. new reagent kit.
Error code: 0243

Unable to change configuration, (x) not in the correct state.
x = Sample handler or modules.

Attempted to configure settings while the sample 1. Pause the sample handler or Pause the
handler status is Running, or configure assays processing module, page 5-14.
while a processing module status is Running.
2. Perform the required configuration when the
Error code: 0244

Version mismatch for reagent kit in position (x).
x = Reagent carousel position.

The Reagent Configuration Version of the onboard Load the expected kit or assay file.
reagent kit is not the expected value.
NOTE: This error occurs if Clinical Investigation

reagents or assay files are used. Clinical
Investigation reagent bottles contain the text
Investigational Use Only. Clinical Investigation
assay files Cal Version parameter is 0 (zero).
Error code: 0245

Invalid entry. The value for (x) must be less than the value for (y).
x = Field with invalid entry
y = Field with invalid entry

Minimum must be less than the value for maximum. Enter a number for parameter (x) that is less than
parameter (y).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0246

Invalid entry. The value for (x) must be less than or equal to the value for (y).
x = Field with invalid entry
y = Field with invalid entry

Minimum range must be less than or equal to the Enter a value for parameter (x) that is less than or
value for maximum range. equal to parameter (y).
Error code: 0247

Invalid entry. One or more fields are empty. Enter valid data.

One or more data fields are empty. Enter valid data in the empty fields.
Error code: 0248

Input out of range.

The number entered is outside the specified range. Enter a number within the acceptable range.
Error code: 0249

Invalid entry, the Processing Module serial number must be in the correct format.

Processing module serial number entered is not in Enter the processing module serial number in the
the correct format. correct format.
Error code: 0250

The starting Sample ID plus the number of samples exceeds the maximum Sample ID: (x)
allowed.
x = Maximum Sample ID allowed

No orders can be added in a non-bar coded batch Re-enter a valid starting sample ID that is less than
order type for patient orders because the ending the maximum sample ID number allowed. The rule
sample ID number is greater than 999,999,999. is: starting SID + number of samples must be less
than or equal to the maximum sample ID number
allowed.
The maximum sample ID must be less than or
equal to 9 characters.
The maximum number of samples allowed in a
non-bar coded batch is 5000.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0251

Calibration canceled, calibrator detected during a batch run.

A calibrator was identified at the sample ID bar Wait until the batch has finished processing before
code reader when a batch was in process. The running calibrators.
batch continues processing. Or
Terminate the batch in process then run the
calibration, if a calibration is required immediately.
Error code: 0252

Duplicate Sample ID (x) detected in the batch (y), sample is ignored.
x = Sample ID
y = Batch name

In a bar coded batch, a sample was detected with Rerun the ignored sample.
the same sample ID as a sample already in
process.
Error code: 0253

Duplicate Sample ID detected at (x) in batch (y). No batch orders are created.
x = Carrier and Position of sample
y = Batch name

In a non-bar coded batch one of two situations Order and run the batch tests for the sample at the
occurred: carrier and position indicated in the message.
The batch contains the same sample ID as a bar
coded sample detected during the batch.
Two non-bar coded batches have overlapping
sample IDs and neither of the sample IDs have
completed processing.
Error code: 0254

Unable to process control (x), ID is assigned to more than one control for assay (y).
x = Control ID
y = Assay name

The same bar code SID number is assigned to two Delete the ID number for controls that are not used
different levels within the same control lot number. or assign a different ID number to the new controls.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0255

Batch Sample ID (x) not processed, unable to read bar code in C/P: (y).
x = Batch name
y = Carrier and Position

The carrier position number cannot be read by the Place a new batch order for the samples that are
bar code reader. not processed.
Error code: 0256

Invalid entry. The LAS serial number must be 8 characters and in the correct format.

The LAS serial number is entered incorrectly. It Enter the LAS serial number with 8 characters and
must be 8 characters and in the correct format. in the correct format.
Example: LAS00102
Error code: 0257

Invalid order, starting carousel position plus number of calibrators cannot exceed 20.

The number of calibrator levels exceeds the number Create a new order for the calibration.
of available positions on the LAS carousel.
Example: When creating a 2-point Adjust calibration
order, the starting position cannot be position 20.
Error code: 0258

C/P (x) already in use and is ignored in batch (y). An additional position will be added to
batch.
x = Carrier and position of the sample.
y = Batch name

A sample carrier, in which tests were still in process, 1. Create a patient order (single order),
was used to load a sample for a non-bar coded page 5-118, for the sample not included in the
batch. The position is not included in the batch and batch.
an additional position is added to the end of the
batch to complete the defined number of samples. If 2. Delete the additional batch sample result, if
a sample is in the added position, results are generated and not required. See Delete a patient
generated. result, page 5-233.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0259

Invalid entry, SID field must not start with zero in a non-bar coded batch order.

In a non-bar coded batch order the Sample ID was Enter a number (1-9) as the first digit in the SID
started with a zero. data entry box.
Error code: 0260

Invalid entry, Sample ID length cannot exceed 20 characters.

The sample ID in a patient order is greater than 20 Enter a sample ID with 20 characters or less.
characters long.
Error code: 0261

Invalid entry, Sample ID length cannot exceed 9 characters in a non-bar coded batch order.

The sample ID in a non-bar coded batch order is Enter a sample ID with 9 numeric characters or
greater than 9 numeric characters. less.
Error code: 0262

The reagent kit in section (x) has expired.

The indicated reagent is expired. Load a new, in-date reagent kit.
Error code: 0263

A panel with the same name exists on the system. Choose a different panel name.

A panel with the same name exists. Enter a different panel name.
Error code: 0264

A panel name must be defined and a panel type must be selected before a panel can be
configured.

A panel name was not entered and/or a panel type Enter a panel name or select a panel type.
was not selected.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0265

A panel should have at least 2 assays selected.

A panel was configured with less than 2 assays. Select 2 or more assays when configuring a panel.
Error code: 0266

Invalid entry, at least one dilution replicate must be entered.

The number of replicates was not entered for an Enter a number from 1-10 in the replicates field for
automated or manual dilution. an automated or manual dilution.
Error code: 0267

The reagent kit in section (x) has exceeded stability time.

The indicated reagent has exceeded the onboard Load a new, in-date reagent kit.
stability time.
Error code: 0268

Carrier pick attempt failed at bay (x) section (y).
x = Bay number
y = Section number

Carrier is inserted backwards in the tray or priority Reposition the carrier in the tray or priority position.
position.
Carrier is damaged. Rerun the sample in a different carrier.
The insertion sensor is tripped when you dropped Reposition the carrier in the priority section.
a carrier back into the priority bay during removal.
Section carrier detect sensor hardware failure.
Carrier transport flex board
Error code: 0269

The reagent kit in section (x) has expired and exceeded stability time.

The indicated reagent is expired and has exceeded Load a new, in-date reagent kit.
the onboard stability time.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0270

Insufficient consecutive positions available for calibration order. (x) sample positions
required.
x = Number of sample positions required for the calibration order

For carriers:
The number of positions required for the 1. Deselect assays from the calibration order to
calibration order exceeds the maximum number decrease the number of calibrators required for
of positions in five consecutive carriers. the order.
2. Create a new calibration order for the deselected

assays.
The starting carrier ID plus the number of Re-enter a valid starting carrier ID. Start with a
samples for calibration exceeds the range carrier with a lower number.
(C001-C999) for the carrier. Starting carrier ID
cannot be greater then 995.
For carousels:
The number of positions required for the 1. Deselect assays from the calibration order to
calibration order exceeds the number of available decrease the number of calibrators required for
positions on the carousel. the order.
2. Create a new calibration order for the deselected

assays.
Error code: 0271

Invalid entry, missing draw date or draw time.

In the patient demographics field, draw date or draw Enter draw date and draw time or leave both empty.
time is empty.
Error code: 0272

Draw date must be greater than January 1, 1970 and less than the current system time.

A draw date earlier than January 1, 1970 was Enter a draw date greater than January 1, 1970.
entered in the patient demographics field.
A draw date and time was entered with the Enter a draw time that is less than the current
current date but with the time later than the system time.
current time defined for the system.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0273

Priority carrier in bay (x) section (y) was removed before access was granted.
x = Bay number
y = Section number

A priority carrier was removed before the access Restart the RSH. See Start up the processing
indicator was activated. module and/or sample handler, page 5-13.
The insertion sensor is tripped when you dropped Reposition the carrier in the priority section.
a carrier back into the priority bay during removal.
Carrier/tray sensor hardware failure.
Unit detect board

Sensor interface board
Error code: 0274

Tray in bay (x) was removed before access was granted.
x = Bay number

A tray was removed before the access indicator Restart the RSH. See Start up the processing
was activated. module and/or sample handler, page 5-13.
A tray is defective. Replace tray.
Carrier/tray sensor hardware failure.
Sensor interface board
Error code: 0275

Unable to process test, ICT reference solution inventory empty.

ICT Reference Solution bottle is empty. Load a new bottle and update the inventory. See
Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c
System), page 5-33.
NOTE: ICT Reference Solution can only be

loaded when the processing module status is
Stopped, Ready, or Warming.
The supplies screen was not updated when the Update the inventory. See Replace bulk solutions
ICT Reference Solution bottle was replaced. and update inventory (c System), page 5-33.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

ICT Reference Solution bottle was removed from 1. Seat the bottle correctly on the weight platform.
the weight platform during the run.
2. Update the inventory. See Replace bulk solutions
and update inventory (c System), page 5-33.
Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.
Error code: 0276

Invalid selection, a maximum of four constituent assays can be used in the formula.

Selected more than four constituent assays for a Select four or less assays for the calculated assay.
calculated assay.
Error code: 0277

Selected carrier/carousel and position in use by another control order for SID (x). Enter an
available C/P.
x = Sample ID

Carrier/carousel and position is in use by another Enter a carrier/carousel and position number that is
control order. not currently in use.
Error code: 0278

User defined reagent kit in position (x) was unassigned, bar coded cartridge scanned in
same position.
x = Reagent carousel segment and position

A bar coded reagent cartridge is loaded in a 1. If the non-bar coded reagent was moved to a
position in which a non-bar coded reagent was different position, assign the new position. See
manually assigned. Load non-bar coded reagents (c System),
page 5-91.
2. If the non-bar coded reagent is no longer

onboard, no action is required until the reagent is
loaded again. At that time, assign a new position.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0279

Invalid number of cartridges detected for (x) carousel segment (y) during reagent scan.
x = Carousel
y = Segment

Mislabeled reagent segment hardware failure.
Error code: 0280

Reagent kit in position (x) on carousel (y) is missing a required bottle. Print reagent load
error report.
x = Reagent segment and position
y = Reagent carousel

The R1 reagent is onboard but the R2 reagent is Load both the R1 and R2 reagent cartridges.
not loaded, or the R2 reagent is onboard and the
R1 reagent is not loaded. NOTE: For the c 16000 processing module
ensure the R1 and R2 cartridges are both loaded
in either the outer (A-line) or inner (B-line)
carousels.
The R1 or R2 reagent is already linked to a Replace with a new unused cartridge if a reagent
different kit. cartridge was used in a previous reagent kit.
A reagent with a 1D (one-dimensional) bar code Delete the manually configured kit. Delete a reagent
label matches a manually configured reagent kit. kit (c System), page 2-123.
A manually configured reagent kit requires the R1
and R2 reagent to have the same serial number.
Error code: 0281

Reagent kit in location (x) has component(s) loaded in wrong carousel(s).

The reagent cartridge was placed in the wrong Move the reagent cartridge to the correct reagent
reagent supply center. supply center.
For the c 16000 processing module, the ICT Move the ICT diluent cartridge to the outer (A-line)
diluent was placed in the wrong carousel. carousel of the R1 reagent supply center.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0282

Invalid selection, each reagent supply center position must have different solution.

The same onboard solution is selected for more Select a different onboard solution option for each
than one reagent supply center position on the reagent supply center position.
Configure reagents - supplies screen.
Error code: 0283

A control with the same name already exists. Choose a different multiconstituent control
name.

The multiconstituent control name entered is Enter a different control name.
already in use.
Error code: 0284

Unable to add control level, all data not defined for assays. Define data or delete assay.

The manufacturer mean and SD and/or expected Enter values for the manufacturer mean and SD
mean and SD are not defined for one or more and for the expected mean and SD for all assays.
assays.
Error code: 0285

Invalid entry, the RSH serial number must be 8 characters and in the correct format.

The RSH serial number is entered incorrectly. It Enter the RSH serial number with 8 characters and
must be 8 characters and start with RSH. in the correct format.
Example: RSH00103
Error code: 0286

Carrier detected in bay (x) section (y).
x = Bay number
y = Section number

A carrier was placed in a priority section that was Remove the carrier from the priority section.
not available.
Section carrier detect sensor failure hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0287

Invalid batch order, Sample ID (x) already defined for batch (y).
x = Sample ID
y = Batch name

The starting sample ID for the bar coded batch Enter a unique starting sample ID for the batch
matches the starting sample ID of an existing batch order.
on the system.
Error code: 0288

Selected Carrier/Carousel and Position in use by batch (x). Enter an available C/P.
x = Batch name

The starting carrier ID and position for the non-bar Enter a unique starting carrier ID/position for the
coded batch matches the starting carrier ID and batch order.
position for an existing batch on the system.
Error code: 0289

Unable to process test, sample removed from system.

The carrier or tray was removed from the RSH Replace the sample on the RSH and rerun the
before the test or retest was aspirated. exception.
Error code: 0290

Unable to process test, no sample diluent available.

The required sample diluent is not loaded. Load sample diluent(s) (c System), page 5-88.
The required sample diluent is empty. Replace sample diluent(s) (c System), page 5-93.
Error code: 0291

Unable to process test, sample handler not in the correct status.

The sample handler status is not Scheduled pause Start up the sample handler. See Start up the
or Running. processing module and/or sample handler,
page 5-13.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0292

The reagent bottle in position (x) on carousel (y) has an undefined reagent name (z).
z = Scanned reagent name (first 5 digits of the bar code)

A new reagent with a 1D (one-dimensional) bar Configure the new reagent before scanning the 1D
code label was loaded and scanned before the bar code. See Configure a user-defined reagent
new reagent was configured. (photometric - c System), page 2-93.
The reagent name defined for a reagent is not 1. Configure the reagent ensuring the reagent
identical to the first 5 digits of the 1D bar code name is identical to the first five digits of the 1D
label. bar code label. See Configure a user-defined
reagent (photometric - c System), page 2-93.
2. Delete the incorrectly defined reagent, if desired.

See Delete a reagent (c System), page 2-122
The 1D bar code label did not print correctly and Reprint the 1D bar code labels ensuring the first five
the first 5 digits do not match the first 5 digits of digits are identical to the defined reagent name.
the defined reagent name.
Error code: 0293

Carrier detected in section (x).

A carrier was placed in a section that was not Remove the carrier from the section.
available.
Error code: 0294

Carrier pick attempt failed at section (x).

Carrier is inserted backwards in the section. Reposition the carrier in the section.
Carrier is damaged. Use a different carrier.
Rail guide sensor hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0295

Carrier in section (x) was removed before access was granted.

A carrier was removed before the access Restart the RSH. Start up the processing module
indicator was activated. and/or sample handler.
A carrier is not seated in the section. Remove and reseat the carrier. Restart the RSH.
See Start up the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-13.
Error code: 0296

Carrier pick attempt failed at reagent carousel position (x).

Reagent carrier is not seated correctly in the Remove the reagent carrier and perform a startup
reagent carousel. on the RSH.
Error code: 0297

Processing module stopped, RV unloader removed.

RV unloader was removed during initialization or Ensure that the RV unloader is placed in the unload
while the system was running. position.
RV unloader sensor hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0298

Request canceled, Sample Handler failure.

Hardware failure occurred on a sample handler 1. Wait until the sample handler is Stopped.
mechanism during initialization.
message.


error code.
NOTE: If the hardware failure is not corrected
and run is selected again, no error message is
displayed and the module status does not change
to Running.
Error code: 0299

No bottle found in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y).
x = Reagent carrier position in which the bottle was missing

There is no bottle in the indicated reagent carrier Load the correct bottle with the kit in the correct
position where expected. reagent carrier position.
Label on a bottle in the indicated reagent carrier Turn the reagent bottle to expose a different area of
position cannot be read. the bar code to the reader.
Error code: 0300

Run request denied, hardware failure.

Hardware failure on a mechanism. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304
this message.



error code.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0301

Unable to process test, hardware failure.

Hardware failure on an item unique to either a 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304
one-step test or two-step test. error codes that occurred at the same time as
this message.



error code.
Error code: 0302

Unable to process test, hardware failure or the user pressed Stop.

User selected stop. Start up the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-13, when the reason for the stop no
longer exists.
Hardware failure 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304
this message.

you do not find any 0304 error codes.

error code.
Error code: 0303

Unable to process test, hardware failure or inventory item limited.

The processing module status changed to
Scheduled pause before this test arrived at the
module. This happened for one of the following
reasons:
User selected pause. Restart the processing module or sample handler
when the reason for the pause no longer exists.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

An inventory item is limited on the module. Review the Supplies status screen. Add and update
the supplies. See Verify supply and waste inventory,
page 5-32.
NOTE: Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions can

only be loaded when the processing module
status is Stopped, Ready, or Warming. Wash
buffer can be loaded when the processing
module is in any status except Initializing,
Stopped, or Offline.
A hardware failure occurred. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304
this message.



error code.
Error code: 0304

(x) failure.
x = Mechanism name

Hardware failure for the mechanism indicated. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any error
message.


error code.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0305

The One Step assay is disabled due to a hardware failure.

Hardware failure on an item required for processing 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304
a one-step assay. error codes that occurred at the same time as
this message.



error code.
Error code: 0306

The Two Step assay is disabled due to a hardware failure.

a two-step assay. error codes that occurred at the same time as
this message.



error code.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0307

Attempted to operate an un-initialized assembly (x).
x = Mechanism name

Hardware failure for mechanism indicated. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304
this message.



error code.
Error code: 0308

The (x) assay is disabled due to a hardware failure.
x = Assay type

the specified assay type. error codes that occurred at the same time as
this message.



error code.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0310

Unable to process test, sample pipettor failed at sample cup/tube.

Test is not processed due to sample pipettor that 1. Start up the processing module to remove the
is left in the sample cup or tube due to: probe from the sample cup or tube. See Start up
User selected stop for the processing module. the processing module and/or sample handler,
page 5-13.
Or
Damaged pipettor. 2. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve
any hardware failure, if the error continues.
hardware failure.
Error code: 0311

Unable to process test, sample handler component failed.

A sample handler component failed and the sample 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304
could not be delivered to the aspiration location. error codes that occurred at the same time as
this message.



error code.
Error code: 0314

Control point excluded.

User excluded a control point, data is logged to QC Status message. No corrective action is required.
log.
Error code: 0315

Control point excluded by system.

System excluded a control point, data is logged to Status message. No corrective action is required.
QC log.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0350

Unable to process test, lamp failure.

An optics or lamp error occurred before or during 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 6500
processing of this test. category error codes that occurred at the same


error code.
Error code: 0351

Unable to process test, water bath level low or temperature out of range.

Water bath level or temperature error occurred 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any water
while processing the test. bath level or temperature error codes that
occurred at the same time as this message.

you do not find any water bath level or
temperature category error codes.

error code.
Error code: 0352

Unable to process test due to previous processing module error.

The test was not processed due to a previous 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any error
failure on the processing module. codes that occurred at the same time as this
message.


error code.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0353

System is configured to run in exhibition mode.

CPU board is configured for Exhibition Mode. hardware failure.
Error code: 0400

Control point excluded by system, outside (x) standard deviation limit.
x = Standard deviation limit.

Control point excluded. The value is outside the 1. Verify the correct level was run.
system configured standard deviation limit, data is
logged to QC log. 2. See Observed Problems, Controls out of range
(c System), page 10-567 or Controls out of
range (i System), page 10-577, for corrective
action.
3. Rerun the same control level(s) after performing

corrective action.
Error code: 0401

System QC inhibits Assay (x) on Processing Module (y).
x = Assay name
y = Processing module number (1-4)

Error code: 0402

Westgard rule (x) enabled for Assay (y).
x = Name of Westgard rule
y = Assay name

A Westgard rule was enabled for the specified Status message. No corrective action is required.
assay, information is logged to QC log.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0403

Westgard rule (x) disabled for Assay (y).
y = Assay name

A Westgard rule was disabled for the specified Status message. No corrective action is required.
assay, information is logged to QC log.
Error code: 0404

Westgard rule (x) for Assay (y) changed to Failure.
y = Assay name

A Westgard rule was changed from Warning to Status message. No corrective action is required.
Failure for the specified assay, information is logged
to QC log.
Error code: 0405

Westgard rule (x) assay (y) changed to Warning.
y = Assay name

A Westgard rule was changed from Failure to Status message. No corrective action is required.
Warning for the specified assay, information is
logged to QC log.
Error code: 0406

Control configuration, original data.

The control configuration was edited for a defined Status message. No corrective action is required.
control level, information is logged to QC log.
Error code: 0407

Control configuration, current data.

The control configuration was edited for a defined Status message. No corrective action is required.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0408

Control point included.

User included a control point, data is logged to QC Status message. No corrective action is required.
log.
Error code: 0409

Units changed for Assay (x) number (y). Existing QC values will be excluded from the QC
data plot.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

The unit used to report results for the indicated Status message. No corrective action is required.
assay was changed. All QC results for the previous
units will be excluded from the QC data
Levey-Jennings plot. Excluded data is not used
during Westgard analysis.
Error code: 0411

System QC uninhibits Assay (x) on Processing Module (y).
x = Assay name

Error code: 0412

Operator inhibits Assay (x) on Processing Module (y).
x = Assay name

Error code: 0413

Operator uninhibits Assay (x) on Processing Module (y).
x = Assay name


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0414

Westgard Warning (x) received for control.
x = Assay name, control name, control level, Westgard rule symbolic name.

The control received a Westgard Warning flag. 1. Review QC results for specified control.
2. See Observed Problems, Controls out of range

(c System), page 10-567, or Controls out of
action.

corrective action.
Error code: 0415

System QC excludes result, Westgard rule (x) was activated.

Error code: 0416

Westgard Failure (x) received for control.
x = Assay name, control name, control level, Westgard rule symbolic name.

The control received a Westgard failure flag. 1. Review QC results for specified control.
2. See Observed Problems, Controls out of range

action.

corrective action.
Error code: 0418

Lot (x) for control (y) is the default lot.
x = Default control lot number
y = Control name

Control configuration was edited for a defined Status message. No corrective action is required.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0419

Westgard Run Specification changed.

Changed the Westgard time limit definition for a Status message. No corrective action is required.
Run. Action performed by an Abbott Representative
at the request of the customer.
Error code: 0420

Westgard failure auto-exclusion feature enabled.

Changed the Westgard failure auto-exclusion from Status message. No corrective action is required.
FALSE to TRUE. Action performed by an Abbott
Representative at the request of the customer.
Error code: 0421

Westgard failure auto-exclusion feature disabled.

Changed the Westgard failure auto-exclusion from Status message. No corrective action is required.
TRUE to FALSE. Action performed by an Abbott
Error code: 0422

Control result outside (x) standard deviation auto-exclusion feature enabled.
x = Standard Deviation limit

Changed the Westgard Standard Deviation Limit or Status message. No corrective action is required.
changed the statistical accumulation criteria from
FALSE to TRUE. Action performed by an Abbott
Error code: 0423

Control result outside (x) standard deviation auto-exclusion feature disabled.
x = Standard Deviation limit

Changed the Westgard Standard Deviation Limit or Status message. No corrective action is required.
changed the statistical accumulation criteria from
TRUE to FALSE. Action performed by an Abbott

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0424

Reduction of lot or level limits not allowed.

Changed the Westgard control configuration limits Status message. No corrective action is required.
to a smaller size. Action performed by an Abbott
Error code: 0500

Operator requested Stop on Sample Handler.

Unable to complete the motor command because Start up the sample handler when the reason for
user selected stop. the stop no longer exists. See Start up the
page 5-13.
Error code: 0501

Power On Self Test (POST) starting on module (x).
x = Module Number (0-4)

Power on self tests (POST) are starting on the Status message. No corrective action is required.
indicated module.
Error code: 0502

Optics values modified.

The optics values for linearity or normalization were Status message. No corrective action is required.
modified by the user.
Error code: 0503

System Control Center (SCC) shutdown.

System control center shutdown correctly. Status message. No corrective action required.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0504

User (x) logged on.
x = User name

The indicated user successfully logged on the Status message. No corrective action is required.
system control center.
Error code: 0505

Configuration changes take effect next time SCC is started.

Edited serial port configuration. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5, for new
configuration to take effect.
Error code: 0506

Retest rule (x) for Assay number (y) was deleted because an assay required for this rule was
deleted.
x = Name of retest rule
y = Assay number

An assay required for the retest rule was deleted. Reinstall the deleted assay and re-define the rule, if
the retest rule is required.
Error code: 0507

Decimal separator changed from (x) to (y). Make sure your host system, if configured,
supports this number format.
x = Previously used separator
y = New separator

The symbol used as the decimal separator was Status message. No corrective action is required.
changed from the SCC Configuration screen.
NOTE: Data generated prior to this change does

not have the new format. All data generated after
this change uses the new format.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0508

Batch (x) deleted, unreleased results are at the limit.
x = Name of Batch

The number of unreleased results is at the Release or delete unreleased patient results,
maximum. quality controls, and exceptions currently on the
system.
Error code: 0509

Unreleased patient results are at 90 percent of capacity. Release patient results or delete
patient exceptions.

Unreleased results are at 90% of the system Release or delete unreleased patient results,
capacity. quality controls, and exceptions currently on the
system.
Error code: 0510

System backup complete.

The system backup procedure is complete. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0511

Thousands separator changed from (x) to (y). Make sure your host system, if configured,
supports this number format.
x = Previously used separator
y = New separator

The symbol used as the thousands separator was Status message. No corrective action is required.
changed using the SCC Configuration screen.
NOTE: Data generated prior to this change does

not have the new format. All data generated after
this change uses the new format.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0512

System (x) restore complete.
x = Name of backup

The requested restore was complete. Status message.
Contact your Area Customer Support if the backup
data was not restored.
Error code: 0513

User manually failed calibration curve.

User manually failed a calibration curve. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0514

Control (x) excluded by system, outside (y) standard deviation limit.
x = Control name, control level, assay name
y = Standard Deviation limit

Control point excluded. The value is outside the 1. Verify the correct level was run.
system configured standard deviation limit, data is
logged to QC log. 2. See Observed Problems, Controls out of range
action.

corrective action.
Error code: 0515

Control (x) excluded by system, Westgard rule (y) activated.
x = Control name, control level name, assay name
y = Rule name

Auto-exclusion feature is active and a control point Status message. No corrective action is required.
failed the specified Westgard rule. The control point
is not used in statistical analysis.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0516

It will take (x) minutes to pause the modules. Are you sure you want to pause the selected
modules?
x = Number of minutes

User selected pause for a processing module while Select OK to pause the processing module.
test were scheduled or running. Or
Select Cancel if you do not want to pause the
processing module.
Error code: 0517

System time and/or date setting was changed.

The system time, date or daylight savings settings Status message. No corrective action is required.
were changed.
Error code: 0518

Avoid loading calibrators, QC, priority samples or leaving empty spaces in a carrier when
running a non-bar coded batch.

Informational message telling the user to avoid Status message. No corrective action is required.
loading calibrators, controls, priority samples, or
leaving empty spaces in a carrier when running a
non-bar coded batch.
Error code: 0519

Data archive complete.

The requested data archive procedure successfully Status message. No corrective action is required.
completed.
Error code: 0520

System language changed to (x) by user (y).
x = Language
y = User ID

The system language was changed on the system Status message. No corrective action is required.
control center configure screen.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0521

Data archive canceled.

The Cancel button on the progress bar was Status message. No corrective action is required.
selected while archiving data.
Error code: 0522

Retest rule (x) for Assay number (y) was modified because an assay required for this rule was
deleted.
x = Retest rule number
y = Assay number

An assay required for the retest rule was deleted. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0523

For module configuration changes to take effect, the SCC will shutdown.

A change to the module configuration was made. Status message. No corrective action is required.
The system automatically shuts down.
Error code: 0524

Incomplete module configuration, system shutting down.

The Cancel button was selected on the initial 1. Repeat the initial module configuration after
module configuration screen. rebooting the system.
2. Select Done.
Error code: 0525

An automatic screen refresh has been performed.

The screen was automatically refreshed due to a 2 Status message. No corrective action is required.
hour period of inactivity.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0526

Empty tray detected in bay (x).
x = The number of the bay containing the empty tray

An empty tray was loaded in the bay. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Carrier/Tray sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 0527

Number of Unreleased Control Results reached limit. New orders will not be accepted.

The number of unreleased control results has Delete or release QC results, exceptions, or
reached the limit. pending orders.
Error code: 0528

Unreleased Control Results are at 90 percent of capacity. Release Control Results or delete
exceptions.

Unreleased control results are at 90% of the system Delete or release unreleased control results and
capacity. exceptions currently on the system.
Error code: 0529

c System module powered ON.

The user powered on the module or the module Status message. No corrective action is required.
powered on after a power failure.
Error code: 0530

Suspend processing for sample (x).
x = Sample ID

Suspend was selected for a sample that was 1. Select OK to suspend the sample.
pending.
2. Wait until the RSH indicator lights to signal that
the sample is available to remove.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0531

No test orders found for Carrier (x), Position (y).
x = Carrier ID or CRSL
y = Carrier or carousel position

A bar coded tube scanned by the sample handler Place an order for the sample in the carrier.
did not have pending test orders.
Error code: 0532

Suspend request denied, sample not present.

The sample was removed from the system. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0534

Suspend processing for sample (x) on bay (y).
x = Sample ID
y = Bay number

Suspend was selected for a sample in process on 1. Select OK to suspend the sample.
the RSH.
2. Wait until the RSH indicator lights signal that the
sample is available to remove.
Error code: 0535

Number of calibrator tests reached limit. New Calibration orders will not be accepted.

The number of unreleased calibrator results has Delete calibrator exceptions or pending orders, or
reached the limit. wait until in-process calibrations complete.
Error code: 0536

No database found. A new database will be created. Wait for the snapshot screen to display
(up to 20 minutes).

No database exists, a new database will be created. Status message. No corrective action is required.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0537

Improper shutdown on SCC. Discard samples in carrier if carrier is located on RSH carrier
transport.

Main power source to the SCC was interrupted 1. Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier
causing an improper shutdown. transport and carrier positioner(s). If the carrier is
located on the RSH carrier, see Remove sample
carrier(s) from the carrier transport and carrier
positioner(s) (RSH), page 10-708.
2. Determine the cause of the power interruption

and resolve.
Error code: 0538

RSH has gone offline. Discard samples in carrier if carrier is located on carrier transport.

Main power source to the RSH was interrupted 1. Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier
while the module status was Scheduled pause or transport and carrier positioner(s) (RSH),
Running. page 10-708.

and resolve.
3. Power on the processing module and/or sample

handler, page 5-7.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0539

(y) will not be recalculated unless you delete the existing (x) results for this sample prior to
rerunning.
x = Constituent assay names
y = Calculated assay name

One or more of the required constituents are If new constituent results are desired:
present on the system with valid results and the Delete any pending constituent orders for the
calculated assay has been added to an order(s). sample, and then create a new order for the
calculated assay.
OR
Delete existing valid constituent results for this
sample if new constituent results are desired for
the calculation.
Delete results for manually ordered
constituents from either the Results review or
Stored results screen.
Delete results for constituents automatically
ordered by the system from the Results
review, Stored results, or Exception status
screen.
Error code: 0540

Dilution for Assay number (y) was modified or deleted. Retest rule (x) may become invalid.
x = Retest rule number
y = Assay number

An assay dilution used in a retest rule was deleted Review the configured retest rules to determine if a
from the assay parameter file. change to an existing retest rule or a new retest rule
is desired. See View the assay retest rule settings,
page 2-100.
Error code: 0542

Unable to process test, reagent kit is unavailable.

User selected a reagent kit to be unloaded that had Load the required reagent kit.
scheduled tests in process.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0544

Assay (x) number (y) definition has been changed.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

An assay parameter was edited. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0545

Calculated Assay (x) number (y) was created.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

A calculated assay was automatically created Status message. No corrective action is required.
during assay installation.
Error code: 0546

Panel (x) was created.
x = Panel name

A panel name was automatically created during Status message. No corrective action is required.
assay installation.
Error code: 0547

Retest rule for Assay (x) number (y) was created.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

A retest rule was automatically created during Status message. No corrective action is required.
assay installation.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0550

Cuvette washing not completed, hardware failure or user pressed Stop. Promptly perform
the Wash cuvettes procedure.

User selected stop. Restart the run that was in process as soon as the
reason for the stop no longer exists.
Or
Wash Cuvettes, page 9-40, if the run will not be
restarted immediately. The cuvettes should not be
left dirty for extended periods of time.
Hardware failure. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any error
message.


error code.
4. If the run will not be restarted immediately,

perform as-needed maintenance procedure
6052 Wash Cuvettes, page 9-40, as soon as the
instrument is operational. The cuvettes should
not be left dirty for extended periods of time.
Error code: 0551

Units changed for CC Assay (x) number (y). Existing QC values will be excluded from the
QC data plot.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

The unit used to report results for the indicated Status message. No corrective action is required.
assay was changed. All QC results for the previous
units will be excluded from the QC data
Levey-Jennings plot. Excluded data is not used
during Westgard analysis.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0552

Update of c System module CPU firmware complete. Cycle the module power to complete
the update process.

The system has completed the upgrade of the Cycle power to the processing module and/or
c System module CPU firmware that was required sample handler, page 5-12.
during the upgrade of the ARCHITECT System
software.
Error code: 0553

Update of c System module DAQ firmware complete. Cycle the module power to complete
the update process.

The system has completed the upgrade of the Cycle power to the processing module and/or
c System module DAQ firmware that was required sample handler, page 5-12.
during the upgrade of the ARCHITECT System
software.
Error code: 0554

User-defined reagent kit in location (x) was unloaded, new segment type was scanned.

A new reagent supply center segment was scanned Define a new position for the non-bar coded
with fewer positions than the previous segment in reagent. See Load non-bar coded reagents (c
the location. A non-bar coded reagent was System), page 5-91.
assigned to a position that no longer exists.
Error code: 0555

c System CPU firmware update required. Do not perform any module tasks until
completion message appears (up to 20 min).

An upgrade of the c System module CPU firmware Do not perform any activity on the module including
is in process. the following which send commands to the CPU
board:
Pressing any keypad or sample carousel buttons
Opening or removing any carousel covers
Emptying the high-concentration waste bottle
A message displays when the upgrade is complete.
Wait for the message before performing any activity.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0556

c System DAQ firmware update required. Do not perform any module tasks until
completion message appears (up to 20 min).

An upgrade of the c System module DAQ firmware Do not perform any activity on the module including
is in process. the following, which send commands to the DAQ
board:
Pressing any keypad or sample carousel buttons
Opening or removing any carousel covers
Emptying the high-concentration waste bottle
Wait for the message indicating the upgrade is
complete.
Error code: 0600

Unable to install (x) number (y) as correlation assay, primary assay with same or higher
version exists.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Feature not currently available. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0601

Unable to install (x) number (y) as correlation assay, primary assay does not exist.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Feature not currently available. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0602

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, a higher version of the assay is already installed.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Attempted to install an older assay version when a If the older assay version is required:
newer assay version is already installed on the 1. Delete the most recently installed assay version.
system.
2. Install the older assay version. See Install or
delete an assay file, page 2-214.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0603

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, assay with a higher calibration version already
installed.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Attempted to install an older assay version when a If the older assay version is required:
version with a higher calibration version is already 1. Delete the most recently installed assay version.
installed on the system.
Error code: 0604

Unable to install assay, at least one module is not in the correct status.

Attempted to install an assay while the processing Install the assay when the status for all processing
module(s) are not in the correct status. modules is Stopped, Ready, or Offline. See Install
or delete an assay file, page 2-214.
Error code: 0605

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, assay with same version is already installed.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Attempted to install an assay when the same Status message. No corrective action is required.
version is already installed on the system.
Error code: 0606

Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Higher reagent version already installed.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Attempted to install an assay whose reagent If the older assay version is required:
configuration version is less than that of the 1. Delete the most recently installed assay version.
installed assay.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0607

Assay (x) number (y) installation error. The module does not support this assay type.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Attempted to install a stat assay on the i 2000. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0608

Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Invalid module configuration.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Attempted to install an assay not supported by the Configure the system with the appropriate
module configuration. module(s) and reinstall the assay.
Error code: 0609

Primary wavelength cannot be the same as the Secondary wavelength.

The primary wavelength cannot be the same as the Select a different primary or secondary wavelength
secondary wavelength. or select the option of "None" for the secondary
wavelength.
Error code: 0610

Reaction check Read time A or Read time B not defined.

A Reaction check option is selected on the Define a range for both the Read time A and B
Configure assay parameters window - General - settings or select the Reaction check option of
Validity check view, but the Read time A and/or "None".
Read time B is not defined.
Error code: 0611

Invalid R1 or R2 reagent volume. (Range: 20-345 L)

A value outside the limit of 20-345 L is entered for Enter a value between 20-345 L.
the R1 or R2 reagent volume.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0612

Invalid R1 or R2 Water volume. (Range: 45-300 L, or field can be blank)

A value outside the limit of 45-300 L is entered for Enter a value between 45-300 L or leave the field
the R1 or R2 water volume. blank for undiluted reagents.
Error code: 0615

Invalid total dilution volume. Sum of Sample, Diluent, and Water volumes must total
100-360 L.

The combined sample, diluent, and water volume Change the entries in the Sample, Diluent, and/or
defined for a sample or calibrator dilution is less Water volume data entry boxes so the combined
than 100 L or greater than 360 L. volume is 100-360 L.
At least 100 L is required to ensure complete
mixing and 360 L is the volume limit of the cuvette.
Error code: 0616

Diluent volume must be defined if Diluted sample and/or Water volume are defined.

A Diluted sample or Water volume is defined for a Enter a value between 20-345 L for the Diluent
sample or calibrator dilution, but the Diluent volume volume or leave the Diluted sample and Water
is not defined. volume fields blank for undiluted samples.
Error code: 0617

Assay name already exists, enter a different name.

The assay name entered is already used for Enter a unique assay name.
another assay parameter file.
Error code: 0618

Assay number already exists, enter a different assay number.

The assay number entered is already used for Enter a unique assay number.
another assay parameter file.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0619

Undefined dilution selected as Default dilution. Select a different dilution as default.

The dilution option selected as the default does not Select a different dilution option as the default, or
have sample or diluent volumes defined. define the volumes for the selected option.
Error code: 0620

For the selected calculated assay, the retest assays are not used for calculation if original
results exist.

A calculated assay was selected for the retest A retest rule may include a calculated assay and
assay when the retest rule was configured. other assays, but should not include the original
When a calculated assay is ordered as a result of a assay for retest.
retest rule, any existing original results for the Examples:
constituent assays are used to calculate the result. Correct retest rule -
Total PSA to retest to Free PSA and PSA ratio

Incorrect retest rule -
Total PSA to retest to Total PSA, Free PSA and
PSA ratio
Error code: 0621

Invalid Assay Number. Assay Number for user-defined assays must be 2000 - 2999.

A user-defined assay can only be defined with an Enter an assay number between 2000-2999.
assay number between 2000-2999.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0622

Last required read value (x) must be greater than or equal to the last read defined for all read
times.
x = Read point value defined in the last required read field

One of the following read times is defined with a Change the last required read to a read point equal
read point larger than the read point defined for the to or greater than the largest read point defined for
last required read. all the read times.
Main read time
Blank read time
Flex read time
Color correction read time
Reaction check - Read time A
Reaction check - Read time B
Error code: 0623

Reagent name already exists, enter a different name.

The reagent name entered is already used for Enter a unique reagent name.
another reagent.
Error code: 0624

Missing entry, Reagent name required.

The reagent name was not defined for a new Enter a unique reagent name.
reagent configuration.
Error code: 0625

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, reference Photometric assay does not exist.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Attempted to install a sample interference index 1. Install the desired reference photometric assay.
assay before installing the photometric assay that is Example: HILref or AST
used as a reference (for example, HILref or AST).
2. Install the sample interference index assay.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0626

Missing entry, Serial number required.

The serial number was not defined for a new Enter a serial number.
reagent kit configuration.
Error code: 0627

Serial number already exists for this lot number, enter a different Serial number.

The serial number entered is already used for the Enter a unique serial number for the reagent lot.
reagent lot.
Error code: 0628

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, assay name already exists for a different assay.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

An assay parameter file with the same name but a Rename or delete the assay with the same name
different assay number already exists. prior to installing the new assay.
Error code: 0629

Sum of Sample, R1, and R2 volumes must be 160-360 L. If R2 is used, Sample and R1
volume must be greater than 100 L.

The combined sample and reagent volumes Change the Sample (or Diluted sample) volume, R1
defined for a sample or calibrator dilution is less volume, R1 Water volume, R2 volume, and/or R2
than 160 L or greater than 360 L Water volume so the combined volume is 160-360
L.
The combined sample and R1 volumes defined Change the Sample (or Diluted sample) volume, R1
for two reagent assay is less than 100 L. volume, and/or R1 Water volume so the combined
volume is equal to or greater than 100 L.
Error code: 0630

Calibrator set name already exists, enter a different name.

The calibrator name entered is already used for Enter a unique calibrator name.
another calibrator set.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0631

Lot number already exists for a different reagent, enter a unique lot number.

The lot number entered is already used for a Enter a unique lot number for the reagent.
reagent.
Error code: 0632

A sample diluent must be specified when a Diluent volume is defined.

A Diluent volume is defined for a sample or Select the Diluent list button, and then select the
calibrator dilution, but a diluent is not selected. desired sample diluent from the list.
Error code: 0634

Diluted sample volume must be defined if Diluent volume is defined.

A Diluent volume is defined for a sample or Enter a value between 2.0-15.0 L for the Diluted
calibrator dilution, but the Diluted sample volume is sample volume or leave the Diluent volume field
not defined. blank for undiluted samples.
Error code: 0635

Unable to save assay, missing parameter. Verify all assay parameters are defined.

A required parameter is not defined. Verify all required assay parameters are defined.
Error code: 0636

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, reagent name exists for a different reagent or sample
diluent.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

The reagent name defined for the assay being Perform one of the following prior to installing the
installed is used for a different reagent or sample assay:
diluent already defined on the system. The assay Edit the assay to be installed with a unique
installation does not complete. reagent name.
Delete or edit the reagent or sample diluent
already defined on the system.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0637

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, sample diluent name exists for a reagent.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

The sample diluent name defined for the assay Perform one of the following prior to installing the
being installed is used for a reagent already defined assay:
on the system. The assay installation does not Edit the assay to be installed with a unique
complete. sample diluent name.
Delete or edit the reagent already defined on the
system.
Error code: 0638

Missing entry, Lot Number required.

The lot number was not defined for a new reagent Enter a lot number.
kit configuration.
Error code: 0639

Interpretation categories must be defined consecutively starting with the first row.

An interpretation row was skipped when defining Define interpretations consecutively starting with
interpretation names. the first row.
Error code: 0640

Same calibrator selected for more than one level, calibrator concentrations must be the
same.

Entered different concentrations for the same Enter the same concentration for each use of the
calibrator level. calibrator level.
Error code: 0641

Reagent Lot contains non-alphanumeric characters.

The reagent lot entered contains a space or other Remove the space and make sure the reagent lot
non-alphanumeric character. contains only alphanumeric characters.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0642

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, assay is already installed.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Attempted to import an assay when the same assay If the new assay is required:
is already installed on the system. 1. Delete the assay file currently installed. See
Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214.
2. Import the new assay file.
Error code: 0643

Dilution Protocols must be defined in consecutive order starting from the first dilution.

The sample dilution protocols were not defined Define the dilution protocols in the correct order
consecutively. The first and/or second row was left starting from the first row. Do not leave a row empty
undefined. and define a row below it.
Error code: 0644

Sample probe wash type converted to Maximum Wash for Assay (x) number (y).
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

The sample probe wash changed from Optimized No corrective action required.
throughput (c 8000 only) to Maximum wash (c 8000 For more information see Descriptions of import
and c 16000) for an assay file exported and then status messages, page Appendix E-159.
imported between an ARCHITECT c 8000 and
c 16000 System.
Error code: 0645

One or more wavelengths were changed for Assay (x) number (y).
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

A wavelength was changed for an assay file No corrective action required.
exported and then imported between an For more information see Descriptions of import
ARCHITECT c 8000 and c 16000 System. status messages, page Appendix E-159.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0700

Run request denied, Processing Module cover open.

A processing module cover is open. Close all covers, and then select run.
Cover sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 0701

Processing Module Stopped, cover opened.

A processing module cover was opened during a Close the cover and restart the run.
run.
Error code: 0702

Reagent scan canceled, Reagent Carousel Cover opened.

Reagent carousel cover is open. Close the cover and repeat the scan.
Error code: 0703

Request canceled, Reagent Carousel Cover is open.

Reagent carousel cover is open. Close the reagent carousel cover.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0704

Run request denied, Processing Queue access door open module (x), close door and press
Run.

Processing queue access door is open on the Close the processing queue access door.
sample handler.
Sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 0705

Processing Queue access door opened on Processing Module (x).

A processing queue access door was opened 1. Close the processing queue access door.
2. Start up the sample handler if status is Stopped.

See Start up the processing module and/or
sample handler, page 5-13.
Sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 0706

Run request denied, LAS Carousel cover is open. Close cover and press Run.

LAS carousel cover is open. Close the LAS carousel cover and select run.
LAS carousel cover sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 0707

LAS Carousel cover opened.

LAS carousel cover was opened while the LAS 1. Close the LAS carousel cover.
carousel status was Running or Scheduled
pause. 2. Start up the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-13.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0708

Run request denied, RSH cover(s) open. Close cover(s) and press Run.

An RSH cover was open when starting a run. Close the RSH cover and select run.
RSH cover access sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 0709

RSH stopped, cover opened.

An RSH cover(s) was opened while the sample 1. Close the RSH cover.
handler status was Running, Scheduled pause,
or Initializing. 2. Start up the sample handler. See Start up the
page 5-13.
Error code: 0710

Reagent supply center cover is open.

A reagent supply center cover is open: 1. Close the reagent supply center covers.
When attempting to initiate a run.
2. Restart the run or perform another reagent scan.
During a run when the access light on the keypad
is not illuminated.
When attempting a reagent scan.
Error code: 0711

Sample carousel cover is open.

The sample carousel cover is open: 1. Close the sample carousel cover.
When attempting to initiate a run.
2. Restart the run.
During a run when the sample carousel
access indicator (square) is not illuminated.
Sample carousel cover sensor did not detect that 1. Verify the status of the sample carousel access
the cover was closed. indicator button. If the button is not illuminated,
select the button to pause the sample carousel.
2. Open and then firmly close the sample carousel

cover.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0712

Startup request denied, Processing Module cover open.

The processing module cover was open when Close the processing module cover.
start up was selected.
Error code: 0713

Startup request denied, RSH cover(s) open. Close cover(s) and press Startup.

An RSH cover(s) was open when start up was 1. Close the RSH cover.
selected.
2. Start up the sample handler. See Start up the
page 5-13.
Error code: 0714

Startup request denied, LAS Carousel cover is open.

The LAS carousel cover was open when start up Close the LAS carousel cover.
was selected.
Error code: 0800

Unable to perform requested operation, remove carrier(s) from carrier positioner(s).

Carriers are present on the carrier positioner while Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport
attempting to perform a start up for the RSH. and carrier positioner(s) (RSH), page 10-708.
Carriers may be present because a user selected
stop while the RSH was running, power to the
processing module(s) and RSH was interrupted, or
the RSH was stopped due to hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0801

Unable to save edits when orders exist for the selected assay (x).
x = Assay name

Attempted to edit an assay when pending or Delete the pending orders or wait until the orders
running orders exist for the assay. are complete before trying to edit the assay.
Error code: 0802

Carrier in carrier transport arm. Please remove.

The RSH was stopped and a carrier was detected Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport
in the transport arm. and carrier positioner(s) (RSH), page 10-708.
The RSH may be stopped because a user
selected stop while the RSH was running, power
to the processing module(s) and RSH was
interrupted, or the RSH was stopped due to
hardware failure.
Error code: 0803

Unable to delete assay (x), it is being referenced by another assay (y).
x = Assay name of the assay to be deleted
y = Assay name of the assay that is referring to assay to be deleted

The assay to be deleted is referenced in another Perform one of the following to the assay that is
photometric or sample interference assay file. referring to the assay to be deleted:
Delete the assay. See Install or delete an assay
file, page 2-214.
For a photometric assay, select the Use Cal
Factor from the list button, and then select a
different assay.
For a sample interference assay, select the
Reference photometric assay list button, and
then select a different assay.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0804

Unable to delete reagent until all kits are deleted and any assay file defined to use this
reagent is edited.

Reagent kits are defined for the reagent. Delete all reagent kits prior to deleting the reagent.
Contact your Area Customer Support.
The reagent is defined for use in an assay Perform one of the following prior to deleting the
parameter file. reagent:
Change the Reagent parameter in the assay to
use a different reagent.
Delete the assay that uses the reagent. See
Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214.
Error code: 0805

Unable to configure, a reagent is currently assigned to position D1.

A bar coded reagent was scanned or non-bar Unload the reagent in position D1 prior to
coded reagent was assigned in position D1 of configuring an onboard solution into the position.
reagent supply center 1 and/or 2. See Unload bar coded reagents (c System),
page 5-98 or Unload non-bar coded reagents (c
Error code: 0806

Unable to use (x) inventory in position (y), bar coded reagent found in the same location.
x = Inventory item
y = Reagent carousel segment and position

A bar coded reagent was scanned in position D1 of 1. Unload the reagent in position D1. See Unload
the reagent supply center. bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-98.
2. Load expected onboard solution in position D1.

See Replace onboard solutions in the reagent
supply centers and update inventory (c 8000),
page 5-39 or Replace onboard solutions in the
reagent supply centers and update inventory (c
16000), page 5-41.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0808

Unable to perform requested operation, cuvette segment alignment tool was not removed.

The cuvette segment alignment tool was not Remove the cuvette segment alignment tool and
removed after performing a pipettor calibration replace the cuvette segment into the position.
procedure.
Water is present on the slotted edges of a cuvette Dry off the slotted edge of the cuvette segment.
segment.
Cuvette tab is broken. Replace a cuvette segment (c 8000), page 9-108 or
Replace a cuvette segment (c 16000), page 9-186.
Optics trigger sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 0809

Unable to change level, level has not been added.

A multiconstituent control level was not added Add the multiconstituent control level before
before the user tried to create another level. selecting another level.
Error code: 0810

Unable to change lot number, level for current lot has not been added.

Attempted to edit the lot number for a Add the control level for the current lot before trying
multi-constituent control before adding the control to change the lot number.
level.
Error code: 0811

Unable to delete assay (x), it is being referenced by another assay.
x = Assay name of the assay to be deleted

Attempted to delete an assay that is referenced in Delete or edit the assay file that is referencing the
another assay parameter file. assay before deleting the assay.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0812

Unable to delete assay (x), the assay is a constituent of a calculated assay (y).
x = Assay name
y = Calculated assay name

Attempted to delete an assay that is defined as a Delete or edit the calculated assay before deleting
constituent of a calculated assay. the constituent assay.
Error code: 0813

Unable to process test, carrier cannot be transported.

The carrier could not be picked up from either a tray
section or carrier positioner pocket due to:
position.
Carrier transport is not aligned. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1119
Transport Calibration, page 9-77.
Error code: 0815

Unable to process test, carrier ID/position bar code read error at aspiration point.

If error occurs for one carrier:
Carrier bar code label is damaged, wet, or dirty. 1. Clean the carrier bar code label.
2. Use a different carrier, if error continues.

If error occurs for multiple carriers:
Bar code reader window is dirty. Clean the bar code reader window, page 10-697.
Bar code reader hardware failure.
Error code: 0816

Unable to process test, sample suspend requested.

Suspend was selected on the Sample status screen Rerun the sample.
and the sample becomes an exception and is not
processed.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0817

Unable to suspend processing, sample located on sample carousel.

Suspend was selected on the Sample status screen 1. Verify the status of the sample carousel access
for a sample processing on the sample carousel. indicator button.
2. If the button is not illuminated, select the button

to pause the sample carousel or wait until the
sample carousel is finished processing all the
samples before accessing the sample.
Error code: 0818

Unable to suspend processing, sample has not been scanned by the RSH.

Suspend was selected for a sample that was not Wait until the sample is identified before attempting
scanned by the RSH. to suspend the sample.
Error code: 0819

Unable to suspend processing, sample handler not in correct status.

Suspend was selected for a sample when the RSH Sample access is allowed unless the RSH status is
status is not Running or Scheduled pause. Running or Scheduled pause.
Error code: 0820

Unable to suspend processing, batch is in process.

Suspend was selected for a sample when batch Wait until the batch is completed or delete the
was in process. batch.
Error code: 0821

Unable to suspend processing, blank calibrator sample selected.

Suspend was selected for a water blank calibrator Select a different calibrator level located on the
sample. RSH.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0822

Unable to delete calibrator set, calibrator is used by an assay.

The calibrator set is defined for use in an assay Perform one of the following prior to deleting the
parameter file. calibrator set:
Change the Calibrator set parameter in the assay
to use a different calibrator set. See Configure a
photometric assay (c System), page 2-88.
Delete the assay that uses the calibrator set. See
Delete a reagent kit (c System), page 2-123, and
Delete a reagent (c System), page 2-122.
Error code: 0823

Unable to reduce number of calibrator set levels.

Attempted to reduce the number of calibrator set You must perform one of the following prior to
levels for a calibrator when an assay parameter file reducing the number of levels for the calibrator set:
is configured to use the larger number of levels. Edit the assay parameters of any assay using the
calibrator set to use fewer levels of the set. See
Configure a photometric assay (c System),
page 2-88.
Change the Calibrator set parameter in the assay
to use a different calibrator set. See Configure a
photometric assay (c System), page 2-88.
Delete the assay that uses the calibrator set. See
Delete a reagent kit (c System), page 2-123, and
Delete a reagent (c System), page 2-122.
Error code: 0824

You have selected too many results. Select no more than (x) results for each Absorbance
report print request.
x = Maximum number of results

More than 1000 results were selected when Select less than 1000 results when printing an
attempting to print an Absorbance report. Absorbance report and try again.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0825

Unable to perform the selected procedure, another procedure is already in process on the
module.

Attempted to perform a diagnostic procedure or a Wait until the maintenance procedure currently in
new maintenance procedure on a module that process is complete before starting a diagnostic
already has a maintenance procedure in process. procedure or a new maintenance procedure.
Error code: 0826

Unable to perform the selected procedure, a required module is being used by another
procedure already in process.

Attempted to perform a maintenance procedure on Wait until the maintenance procedure currently in
a module that is being used by a maintenance process is complete before starting a new
procedure in process on another module. maintenance procedure.
Error code: 0827

Unable to perform diagnostic procedures while module is in the Maintenance state.

Attempted to perform a diagnostic procedure on a Wait until the maintenance procedure currently in
module that has a maintenance procedure in process is complete before starting a diagnostic
process. procedure.
Error code: 0828

Unable to unload reagent carrier, RSH sections full.

Carriers are loaded in every RSH section. Remove a carrier from an RSH section to make
room to unload the reagent carrier.
Carrier sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 0829

Unable to load reagent carrier, all reagent carousel positions full.

Reagent carriers are loaded in every reagent Unload a reagent carrier for an assay that is no
carousel position. longer required for testing to make room to load the
reagent carrier.
Reagent carrier detect sensor hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0830

Request canceled, RV unloader is not detected.

RV unloader was not detected during Ensure that the RV unloader is placed in the unload
initialization. position.
RV unloader is not seated correctly. Reseat the RV unloader.
RV unloader sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 0831

Unable to perform requested operation, remove carrier from aspiration area.

A carrier is present in the aspiration area while Remove the sample carrier(s) from the carrier
attempting to perform a Startup on the RSH. A transport and aspiration area.
carrier may be present because a user selected
stop while the RSH was running, power to the
processing module and RSH was interrupted, or the
RSH was stopped due to hardware failure.
Error code: 0900

Wrong lot, component or serial number in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y).

A bottle with the wrong lot number, component ID, 1. Print the reagent load error report.
or serial number is loaded in the indicated reagent
carrier position and RSH section. 2. Load the correct bottle for the kit in the correct
position.
Error code: 0901

Calibration version mismatch for reagent kit in section (x).

Calibration version for the reagent kit in the RSH 1. Load a reagent kit matching the currently
section indicated does not match the currently installed assay version.
installed assay.
NOTE: Deplete the supply of reagents for the old
assay before installing the new assay.
2. Install the new assay file when the current supply

of reagents is depleted. See Install or delete an

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0902

Version mismatch for reagent kit in section (x).

The Reagent Configuration Version of the reagent Load the expected kit or assay file.
kit in the RSH section indicated is not the expected
value.
NOTE: This error occurs if Clinical Investigation

reagents or assay files are used. Clinical
Investigation reagent bottles contain the text
Investigational Use Only. Clinical Investigation
assay files Cal Version parameter is 0 (zero).
Error code: 0903

Reagent kit in location (x) has R1 and R2 components loaded on different reagent lines.

A reagent kit with 2 cartridges (R1 and R2) has Load the reagent cartridges for the assay on the
cartridges loaded on different lines (outer and inner) same line in both the R1 and R2 reagent supply
in the R1 and R2 reagent supply centers. centers. Choose one of the following options:
Load the reagent cartridges for the assay on the
outer (A-line) carousel of R1 and R2 reagent
supply centers.
Load the reagent cartridges for the assay on the
inner (B-line) carousel of R1 and R2 reagent
supply centers.
Error code: 0904

Reagent carrier in section (x) is a 500 test kit.

A 500 test reagent kit was loaded on the system. Remove the 500 test reagent kit.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 0905

Unload the two carrier reagent kit in sections (x) before trying to reload.

One reagent carrier of a two carrier kit was Remove both carriers of a two carrier reagent kit
removed from the load/unload area. before reloading the reagent kit on the system.
A two carrier reagent kit's on board stability has Remove both carriers of a two carrier reagent kit
been overridden and one reagent carrier has from the load/unload area and reload them.
been removed from the load/unload area.
Error code: 0906

Reagent packs for Assay (x) loaded on both reagent lines.
x = Assay

Reagent packs for the same assay were found on Load reagent cartridges for the same assay on the
both the outer (A-line) and inner (B-line) carousels same line, either outer (A-line) or inner (B-line), in
for the R1 and R2 reagent supply centers. the R1 and R2 reagent supply centers.
Error code: 0909

Invalid entry. The value for Low Linearity must not be less than 0.

A value less than zero was entered. Enter a value above zero.
Error code: 0910

Invalid entry. The value for High Linearity must be less than (x) for dilution description 1.
x = Assay default High Linearity

A value greater than the assay default High Enter a value lower than the assay default High
Linearity was entered. Linearity.
Assay specific error codes (1000-1999)

The assay specific error code category includes error codes between
1000-1999.
representative at:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Changing the lamp
Error code: 1000

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, Cal 1 or Cal 2 final read is below specifications.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Wrong Cal 1 or Cal 2 used for the assay If other assays are performing without error, place
calibration. fresh Cal 1 and Cal 2 into sample cup ensuring they
are for the correct assay and are placed in the
correct positions.
Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions were loaded in 1. Rinse the floats with DI water, and then dry.
the wrong positions or the tubing assemblies
were switched. 2. Load new bottles of pre-trigger and trigger. See
Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and
update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57.

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger,
page 9-70
Level sensor is not installed correctly. 1. Adjust the level sensor in the pre-trigger or
trigger bottle so the arrow faces toward the front.
When the level sensor is correctly installed, the
electrical connector is on the right and the tubing
is on the left.
2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure

2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69.
Pre-trigger or trigger solution volume is too low. Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Pre-trigger and trigger bottles were replaced Perform the following as-needed maintenance
while processing tests, so air may have been procedures:
aspirated instead of reagent. For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 9-70
Pre-trigger or trigger pumps hardware failure.
Pre-trigger or trigger valves
Pre-trigger or trigger tubing connections are
loose
Motor driver board has a poor connection or
failed
Error code: 1001

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, final read too high for Cal 1.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Wrong calibrator was used or the calibrator was Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or
loaded incorrectly. tubes ensuring they are placed in the correct
positions.
Calibrators are not performing as expected. Open new calibrator bottles.
Reagent is not performing as expected. Load new reagent bottles.
Error code: 1002

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, final read too low for Cal 1.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1003

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, final read too high for Cal 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1004

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, final read too low for Cal 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1005

Result cannot be calculated, final RLU read is outside the specification of the lowest
calibrator.

RLU read is outside the specification for the
ascending curve assay.
If error occurs on one sample:
Normal for some non-reactive samples. 1. Follow the sample handling instructions in the
ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package
insert.
2. Rerun the sample.
3. Source another sample.
4. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample handling error. 1. Follow the sample handling instructions in the
insert.

If error occurs for more than one sample:

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 9-70
is on the left.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Pre-trigger or trigger bottles were replaced while Perform the following as-needed maintenance
processing tests so air may have been aspirated procedures:
instead of reagent. For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69,
page 9-70.

loose
failed
DC driver I/O board in the card cage has a
poor connection or failed
Error code: 1006

Unable to process test, background read failure.

Ambient light level is too high. 1. Move the processing module or block it from
direct sunlight.
2. Ensure all system panels are properly installed.

Optics linearity and/or Normalization values are Update the Configure modules window with the
not entered correctly on the Configure modules correct values from the optics assembly. See
window. Configure modules window (i 2000), page 2-52, or
Configure modules window (i 2000SR), page 2-54.
Pre-trigger or trigger or pumps hardware failure.

loose
Dirty light pipes
CMIA reader

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1007

Unable to process test, activated read failure.

Wrong Cal 1 or Cal 2 is used for the assay If other assays are performing without error, place
correct positions.

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 9-70
is on the left.

Pre-Trigger or Trigger Solution is expired. Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and
processing tests, so air may have been aspirated procedures:
page 9-70
window. Configure modules window (i 2000), page 2-52 or

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Ambient light level is too high. 1. Move the processing module or block it from
direct sunlight.

Pre-trigger or trigger valve hardware failure.
Pre-trigger or trigger pumps

loose
Pre-trigger or trigger level sensor is broken
Dirty light pipes
failed
Error code: 1008

Unable to process test, final read failure.

correct positions.

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 9-70
is on the left.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Pre-Trigger or Trigger Solution is expired. Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and
Pre-trigger and trigger bottles were replaced Perform the following as-needed maintenance
while processing tests, so air may have been procedures:
aspirated instead of reagent. For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69,
page 9-70
window. Configure modules window (i 2000), page 2-52 or
Ambient light level too high. 1. Move the processing module or block it from
direct sunlight.

Pre-trigger and trigger valve hardware failure.
Pre-trigger and trigger pumps

Pre-trigger and trigger tubing connections are
loose
Pre-trigger and trigger level sensor is broken
Dirty light pipes
failed
Error code: 1009

Unable to calculate result, constituent assay (x) number (y) result is not available.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

A constituent result was deleted before other Reorder the constituent assay.
constituents of a calculated result completed.
The constituent result was flagged outside the Rerun the constituent assay with manual or
linear range of the assay. automatic dilution, if available.
One of the constituent results became an Determine the cause of the exception, correct and
exception. rerun the sample.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1050

Unable to calculate result, absorbance collection error.

Lamp is not performing as expected. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003
Change Lamp, page 9-29.
Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced. Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003
Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against
the lamp plate and in the housing.
Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the
screws in terminal block.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1051

Unable to calculate result, absorbance exceeded optical limits.

Sample concentration is too high. Dilute the sample and rerun. For the dilution
protocol, see the reagent manufacturer's
assay-specific documentation (such as a package
Sample is lipemic. Ultra-centrifuge the sample and rerun the
infranatant. For details on sample integrity, see the
reagent manufacturer's assay-specific
documentation (such as a package insert or
the lamp plate and in the housing
Cuvettes are dirty. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6310
Clean cuvettes - manually, page 9-42.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Cuvette washer is not functioning properly. 1. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018
Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles, page 9-27.

6052 Wash Cuvettes, page 9-40, and observe
the cuvette washer nozzles for hanging drops or
leaks.
If drops or leaks are observed for the
high-concentration waste nozzle, replace the
high-concentration waste pump poppet valve.
See Replace the pump poppet valve set (c
8000), page 9-155 or Replace the pump
poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231.
If drops or leaks are observed for any of the
other nozzles, replace the cuvette wash pump
poppet valve. See Replace the pump poppet
valve set (c 8000), page 9-155 or Replace the
pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231.
Cuvette dry tip is damaged. Replace the cuvette dry tip (c 8000), page 9-111 or
Replace the cuvette dry tips (c 16000), page 9-189.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1052

Unable to calculate result, endpoint absorbance reads are unstable.

Debris in the water bath incubator. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2134
Change Water Bath, page 9-38.
Bubbles in the water bath incubator due to the Decrease the incoming DI water pressure to within
pressure of the incoming water. specifications. See c System processing module
water and liquid waste specifications and
Bubbles in the water bath incubator due to a high Contact your Area Customer Support.
gas content of the incoming water.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Dispense system is not performing correctly. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6016
Check Dispense Components, page 9-27.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1053

Unable to calculate result, rate reaction linearity failure.


leaks.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

R2 pipettor is out of alignment. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1122
R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-37.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1054

Unable to calculate result, Reaction check failure.

If error occurs for patient or control samples:
NOTE: View the reaction graph to confirm the

high sample concentration. See View the reaction
graph and absorbance data for a result (c
Sample interferences (e.g., hemolysis, lipemia, Visually inspect the sample for possible interference
etc.). due to hemolysis, icterus, and/or turbidity and
perform one of the following:
Redraw and rerun the sample if interference is
present.
Rerun the sample if no interference is observed.
NOTE: You may use the Sample interference

indices to determine increased interference
levels, or you may view the reaction graph to
confirm abnormal absorbance readings during
the Blank read time (compare to normal result
with this error). See View the reaction graph and
absorbance data for a result (c System),
page 5-230.
High anticoagulant to plasma ratio (i.e., sample Redraw the sample into a sufficiently-filled
tube is improperly filled). anticoagulant tube or use a serum sample.
For specimen collection and handling information,
see the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

If error occurs for calibration samples:
loaded incorrectly tubes ensuring they are placed in the correct
positions.
If error occurs for all samples:
Error code: 1055

Unable to calculate result, Flex read absorbance invalid for calibration.

loaded incorrectly. tubes.
Calibrators or reagents are not performing as Open new calibrators or reagents.
expected.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1056

Unable to calculate result, absorbance below calibration curve lower limit.

Sample concentration is too low. Rerun the sample.
Calibration curve is not optimal. Recalibrate the assay.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the
reagent. reagent using a clean applicator stick for each
bottle.
Reagent probe is damaged. Replace reagent probes (c 8000), page 9-88 or
Replace reagent probes (c 16000), page 9-167.
Reagent is not performing as expected. Open new reagent(s).
hardware failure.
Error code: 1057

Unable to calculate result, the Last required read in reference assay (x) number (y) must be
defined as 5.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

The reference photometric assay selected in the Change the last required read setting in the
sample interference assay file does not have the reference assay to a value of 5.
Last required read setting defined as 5.
Error code: 1100

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation between reference and fit curve too large
for Cal A.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1101

for Cal B
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1102

for Cal C.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1103

for Cal D.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1104

for Cal E.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1105

for Cal F.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1106

for Cal 1.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1107

for Cal 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1108

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, ratio too large for Cal B/Cal A.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1109

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, ratio too small for Cal B/Cal A.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1110

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, Log: Logit slope exceeds maximum parameter.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1111

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, Log: Logit slope is below minimum parameter.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1112

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, RMSE too large.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1113

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, minimum upper curve asymptote exceeded.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1114

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, maximum lower curve asymptote exceeded.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1115

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, minimum lower curve asymptote exceeded.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1116

Unable to calculate result, index formula error, parameter to LOG function.

correct positions.

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 9-70
is on the left.

2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 for i 2000/i 2000SR.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

page 9-70
Pre-trigger or trigger valve hardware failure.
Pre-trigger or trigger pumps

loose
Pre-trigger or trigger level sensor is broken
failed
Error code: 1117

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, intercept out of range.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1118

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, maximum upper curve asymptote exceeded.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1119

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, curve validity check failed.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1120

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit response too low for Cal A.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1121

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit response too low for Cal F.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1122

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit response too low for Cal 1.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1123

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit response too low for Cal 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1124

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, ratio too small for Cal 1/Cal 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1125

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, ratio too large for Cal 1/Cal 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1126

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, ratio too small for Calibrators.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1127

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, ratio too large for Calibrators.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1150

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, insufficient calibrator replicates.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Required number of replicates for a calibrator failed Review exceptions to determine the reason for the
to complete due to an error. failed calibrator replicate(s). Refer to the corrective
action for the specific error.
Error code: 1151

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, convergence error.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Bubbles or foam are on top of the liquid. Remove air bubbles or foam from the surface of the
sample using a clean disposable pipette or
applicator stick.
Reaction mode is incorrectly defined. Select the Reaction mode list button on the
Configure assay parameters window - General -
Reaction Definition view, and then select the
appropriate reaction mode.
expected.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1152

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, maximum curve fit too large.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

expected.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1153

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, Slope is too low.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

ICT module is expired or has exceeded time or Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309
sample warranty (> two months after installation Change ICT Module, page 9-42.
or > 15,000 samples).
ICT module o-rings are missing or are not seated Replace or reseat the o-rings. See Replace the ICT
correctly. module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace
the ICT module or probe (c 16000), page 9-194.
ICT probe is not connected correctly. Finger tighten the probe to the ICT module.
ICT aspiration tubing is not connected correctly. Tighten the tubing connections at the top of the ICT
module and at the top of the 1 mL syringes in the
ICT aspiration pump.
ICT reference solution tubing is not connected Tighten the connections at the top and side of each
correctly. check valve in the ICT reference solution pump.
ICT check valves are not connected correctly. Tighten the connections to the 1 mL syringes in the
ICT reference solution pump and ICT aspiration
pump.
ICT check valves are not functioning. Replace check valves (c 8000), page 9-130 or
Replace check valves (c 16000), page 9-207.
1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration or ICT Reseat the 1 mL syringes.
reference solution pumps are not seated
correctly.
1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration or ICT Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 8000), page 9-126 or
reference solution pumps are leaking. Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 16000), page 9-204.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

ICT module is not performing as expected. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309
Change ICT Module, page 9-42.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1154

Unable to calculate result, convergence error.

The sample absorbance is on the border between Rerun the sample.
two segments of a Spline calibration curve and
the system cannot confirm the correct segment
was used for calculation.
An invalid Spline calibration curve was Recalibrate the assay.
generated.
Error code: 1155

Unable to calculate result, calibration curve allows multiple solutions.

An invalid Spline calibration curve was generated. Recalibrate the assay.
Error code: 1156

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, slope is outside of defined range.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

ICT module o-rings are missing or are not seated Reseat or replace the o-rings. See Replace the ICT
ICT reference solution tubing is not connected Tighten the tubing connections at the top and side
correctly. of each check valve in the ICT reference solution
pump.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

pump.
correctly.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1200

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal A.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1201

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal B.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1202

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal C.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1203

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal D.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1204

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal E.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1205

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal F.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1206

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal A.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1207

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal B.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1208

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal C.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1209

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal D.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1210

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal E.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1211

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal F.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1212

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal 1.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1213

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1214

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal 1.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1215

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1216

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal A.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1217

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal B.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1218

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal C.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1219

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal D.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1220

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal E.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1221

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal F.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1222

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal A.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1223

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal B.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1224

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal C.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1225

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal D.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1226

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal E.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1227

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal F.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1228

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal 1.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1229

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1230

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal 1.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1231

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1232

Result cannot be calculated, final RLU read is outside the specification of the highest
calibrator.

RLU read is outside the specification for the
descending curve assay.
Sample concentration is too high. Dilute the sample and rerun. See the Sample
Dilution Procedures in the ARCHITECT i System
Sample contains an interfering substance. 1. See the Limitations of the Procedure in the
insert.
2. Redraw and rerun the sample if interference is

present.
Sample handling error. 1. Follow the sample handling instructions in the
insert.

If error occurs for more than one sample:

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 9-70
is on the left.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

page 9-70

loose
failed
Error code: 1250

Unable to calculate result, absorbance exceeds highest calibrator.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


leaks.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1251

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, concentration out of range for ICT index.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Wrong index calibrator was used for calibration. Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or
tubes ensuring they are placed in the correct
positions.
Index calibrator is not performing as expected. Open new calibrator bottles.
Index concentration or index range is incorrectly Define the correct Index concentration and Index
defined. range on the Configure assay parameters -
Calibration window.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1300

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range failed for Cal A.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1301

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range failed for Cal B.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1302

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range failed for Cal C.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1303

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range failed for Cal D.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1304

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range failed for Cal E.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1305

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range failed for Cal F.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1306

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range failed for Cal 1.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1307

x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1308

x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1309

x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1310

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range too large Cal A to Cal F.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1311

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range too small Cal A to Cal F.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1312

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL A.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1313

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL B.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1314

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL C.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1315

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL D.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1316

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL E.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1317

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL F.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1318

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL 1.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1319

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1320

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, CV too large for Cal 1.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Calibrator 1 failed the CV specification defined in 1. Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or
the assay settings. tubes.
2. Repeat calibration.
3. See Observed Problems, Sample results

observed problems (c System), page 10-562 or
Sample results observed problems (i System),
page 10-575, for corrective action, if error
continues.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1321

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, CV too large for Cal 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Calibrator 2 failed the CV specification defined in 1. Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or
the assay settings. tubes.

continues.
Error code: 1322

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, CV too large for a Calibrator.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

One of the calibrator replicates (A-F) failed the CV 1. Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or
specification defined in the assay settings. tubes.

continues.
Error code: 1323

Unable to calculate result, constituent assay (x) number (y) result is out of specified range.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

A constituent result was outside of the constituent Status message. No corrective action is required.
range specified in the calculated assay file.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1324

Unable to calculate result, result exceeds numerical limits.

A calculated result cannot be computed because Modify the calculated result formula or constituent
the result exceeds the numerical limit of the assay ranges. See Configure a calculated assay,
software. page 2-84.
Error code: 1350

Unable to calculate result, no absorbance reads within absorbance range.

bottle.
Cuvettes are dirty. Perform 6310 Clean cuvettes - manually,
page 9-42.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


leaks.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1351

Unable to calculate result, insufficient absorbance reads within absorbance range.

bottle.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

page 9-42.

leaks.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1352

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, calibrator deviation too large.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Bubbles in the calibrator sample cup. Remove any bubbles in the sample cup using a
clean applicator stick for each calibrator.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

expected.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1353

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, calibration factor out of range.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Calibrator concentration values are incorrectly Review the Configure assay parameters -
defined. Calibration - Calibrators window for the assay to
verify the correct values for the lot number used.
Refer to the calibrator-specific value sheet for the
correct calibrator values.
Calibrators were onboard too long. Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or
tubes.
expected.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Expected cal factor or expected cal factor Perform the following steps, if it becomes necessary
tolerance% values need to be re-evaluated. to re-evaluate the expected cal factor for your
laboratory:
1. Collect Cal factor values from multiple calibration
curves, or review calibration curve details reports
for recent historical curves. (A thorough study
requires multiple cartridges and multiple reagent
lots.) During this collection period, be sure the
control values run against those Cal factors are
in range and do not display trends or shifts.
2. Average the acceptable Cal factors and enter the

mean in the expected cal factor field on the
Configure assay parameters - Calibration -
Validity checks window.
3. If the average expected cal factor is correct and

the control values have been in range, consider
slightly increasing the expected cal factor
tolerance%.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1354

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, defined Span out of range.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Bubbles in the calibrator sample cup. Remove any bubbles in the sample cup using a
clean applicator stick for each calibrator.
expected.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1355

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, Blank absorbance out of range.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Water quality is below specifications (if the blank Perform daily maintenance procedure 6028 Check
calibrator is defined to use water). DI Water Purity, page 9-22.
Calibrator is not performing as expected (if the Open new calibrator bottles.
blank calibrator is defined to use a zero
concentration calibrator rather than water).
page 9-42.

leaks.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

hardware failure.
Error code: 1356

Unable to calculate calibrator result, insufficient absorbance reads within absorbance range.

Bubbles for foam on the surface of the reagent. Remove the bubbles or foam from the surface of the
reagent using a clean applicator stick for each
bottle.
expected.
page 9-42.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


leaks.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1400

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, inadequate number of replicates.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 1401

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure did not receive results for all calibrator levels.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

No results for all replicates of one or more calibrator Review exceptions to determine the reason for the
levels. failed calibrator replicate(s). Refer to the corrective

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1402

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, calibrators incorrectly loaded.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Wash buffer not correctly prepared. 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure
2185 Wash Buffer Unload, page 9-70.
2. Remove the buffer reservoir and rinse with type II

water.
3. Replace buffer reservoir and load new wash

buffer.
Error code: 1403

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, unable to generate calibration curve.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Unable to converge points on calibration curve.
positions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1404

Unable to calculate result, assay is not calibrated.

No Active calibration currently stored for the assay 1. Run assay calibration before running samples.
and no assay calibration in process. Patients run Always priority load carriers containing
after a failed calibration cannot be calculated if calibrators.
there is no previously stored calibration data.
2. Refer to specific assay calibration report or
calibration detail screen to determine reason for
the failed calibration.
3. Refer to the corrective action for the specific

error code.
Error code: 1405

Calibrator out of order, calibration failed.

Carriers loaded out of order. Load the carriers in sequential order.
In the robotic sample handler priority bay or section,
you must physically place the carriers in the
positions in sequential order. Carriers are
processed in the order they are placed on the
sample handler, not by position number.
The carriers arrived at the aspiration position out Reorder the calibration.
of order due to robotic sample handler routing.
A bar code label was detected in a position in Load the calibrators in the ordered positions
which there was a calibrator order. ensuring there are no bar codes on the calibrator
cups or tubes.
Bar code reader detecting sample cups. Use clean sample cups. Do not write on the sample
cups or use tape or labels on the sample cups.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1406

Calibration canceled, processing interrupted between carriers containing calibrators.

longer exists.
Hardware failure. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304
this message.



error code.
Error code: 1407

Unable to process test, constituent assay (x) number (y) is disabled.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

An assay used for computing a calculated assay The assay should be enabled prior to processing a
was disabled. calculated result which uses the assay as a
constituent.
Error code: 1408

Unable to calculate result, constituent assay (x) number (y) does not support manual
dilution.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

A calculated assay was ordered on a manually Order the calculated assay for a patient sample that
diluted patient sample. The calculated assay has a is undiluted or that uses an automated dilution
constituent assay which does not support a manual protocol.
dilution.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1450

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
provide information about the operation you were
attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Error code: 1451

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, invalid mathematical calculation occurred.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Wrong calibrator was used, or the calibrator was Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or
expected.
Error code: 1452

Unable to calculate result, invalid mathematical calculation occurred.

Sample concentration is too low. Rerun the sample.
Bubbles for foam on the surface of the reagent. Remove the bubbles or foam from the surface of the
bottle.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

hardware failure.
Error code: 1453

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, assay configuration error.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

The combined sample and reagent volume is less Verify the combined volume defined for:
than 160 L at a defined read time. Sample (or Diluted sample)
R1 reagent
R1 water
is greater than or equal to 160 L, if the assay uses
a read point less than 17 for any defined read time.
An assay setting is defined incorrectly. Verify the settings on the Windows - Configuration
screen - Assay settings view, page 2-127.
Error code: 1454

Unable to calculate result, assay configuration error.

The combined sample and reagent volume is less Verify the combined volume defined for:
than 160 L at a defined read time. Sample (or Diluted sample)
R1 reagent
R1 water
is greater than or equal to 160 L, if the assay uses
a read point less than 17 for any defined read time.
An assay setting is defined incorrectly. Verify the settings on the Windows - Configuration
screen - Assay settings view, page 2-127.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1455

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, calibrator out of order.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Calibrator concentration values are incorrectly Review the Configure assay parameters -
defined. Calibration - Calibrators window for the assay to
verify the correct values for the lot number used.
Refer to the calibrator specific value sheet for the
correct calibrator values.
expected.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1456

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, no calibration curve available for adjustment.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

No active full calibration curve currently stored for 1. Create a calibration order, page 6-12, and then
the assay. An adjustment calibration cannot be select Calibration type: Full.
performed if there is no previously stored full
calibration curve. 2. Create an adjustment type calibration order
when the full calibration is complete, if desired.
Error code: 1457

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, calibration curve full interval has expired.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Adjustment calibration order failed because the full 1. Create a calibration order, page 6-12, and then
calibration interval has expired or the full calibration select Calibration type: Full.
failed.
2. Create an adjustment type calibration order
when the full calibration is complete, if desired.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1458

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, did not complete results for all calibrator levels.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 1461

Unable to recalculate result, assay does not exist.

Assay was deleted since the original result was run. Install the assay and create new test orders for the
sample, if required.
Error code: 1462

Unable to edit result, assay does not exist.

Assay was deleted since the original result was Install the assay and create new test orders for the
generated. sample, if required.
Error code: 1463

Unable to recalculate result, a reaction definition assay parameter was edited.

An assay parameter setting was edited making Rerun the sample.
recalculation of the result invalid (ex. Primary
wavelength or Sample volume)
Error code: 1464

Unable to recalculate a result that is a constituent of a calculated result.

The system prevents recalculation of a result used Rerun the sample.
for computing a calculated result.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 1465

Unable to edit a result that is a constituent of a calculated result.

The system prevents editing of a result used for Status message. No corrective action is required.
computing a calculated result.
Error code: 1500

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, correlation coefficient is out of range.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1600

Unable to calculate result, mV reading outside measurable range of ICT Unit.

Black electrical connector for the ICT module is Reseat the connection. See Replace the ICT
loose or not connected. module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace
pump.
pump.
correctly.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

hardware failure.
Error code: 1601

Unable to calculate result, ICT reference solution voltage drift error.

loose or not connected. module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace
pump.
pump.
correctly.
sample warranty (> 2 months after installation or Change ICT Module, page 9-42.
> 15,000 samples).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The ICT Reference Solution is not performing as 1. Replace the ICT Reference Solution bottle. See
expected. Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c
System), page 5-33.

2131 Flush ICT Cup, page 9-38.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1602

Unable to calculate result, ICT reference solution voltage out of range.

pump.
pump.
correctly.
> 15,000 samples).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System), page 5-33.

hardware failure.
Maintenance error codes (2000-2999)

The maintenance error code category includes error codes between
2000-2999.
representative at:

Changing the lamp
Error code: 2000

Solid waste chute full. Install empty waste container, update supplies and press Run.

The solid waste chute is full. This chute is Remove solid waste and update inventory (i 2000/i
designed to hold approximately 50 used RVs 2000SR), page 5-47.
(reaction vessels) while the waste container is
removed for emptying.
Waste chute sensor board #7 hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2001

RV Hopper empty, add RVs, update supplies and press Run.

No RVs (reaction vessels) in the RV Hopper. Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 2000/i
2000SR), page 5-49.
RVs are bridged above the sensor in the RV 1. Stir the RVs in the hopper.
hopper.
2. Pause the processing module, page 5-14, if error
continues. When the status is Ready, remove
RVs from the RV hopper then reload them.
RV Hopper sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 2003

(x) inventory discrepancy, update supplies and press Run.
x =Inventory item

For i System:
Expected inventory does not match the available 1. Check the physical inventory level of the item
inventory. against the reported inventory shown on the
2. Update supplies on the Update supplies window

as required.
Pre-Trigger or Trigger Solution Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and
RVs (reaction vessels) Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 2000/i
2000SR), page 5-49.
Wash buffer Replenish wash buffer manually and update
During manual buffer transfer, not enough buffer Fill the buffer reservoir until the icon shows full.
was transferred to trip the full sensor.
Cables to the pre-trigger, trigger, or wash hardware failure.
buffer level sensors are loose
Level sensor
For c System:
Expected inventory does not match the available 1. Check the physical inventory level of the item
inventory. against the reported inventory shown on the
2. Update supplies on the Update supplies window

as required.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Alkaline Wash Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c
Acid Wash System), page 5-33.
Sensor cable to the weight platform is loose hardware failure.
Weight platform sensor
Error code: 2004

(x) inventory is close to empty, update supplies.
x =Inventory item

For i System:
The indicated inventory item is low.
2000SR), page 5-49.
Solid waste Remove solid waste and update inventory (i 2000/i
2000SR), page 5-47.
hopper.
2. Pause the processing module, page 5-14 if error
For c System:
The indicated inventory item is low.
Alkaline Wash Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c
Acid Wash System), page 5-33.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2006

(x) inventory has exceeded on-board stability, update supplies.
x =Inventory item

Onboard stability for either Pre-Trigger or Trigger Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and
Solution is exceeded. update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57.
NOTE: Pre-trigger and trigger can only be loaded

when the processing module status is Stopped,
Ready, or Warming.
Error code: 2007

Unable to process test, insufficient supplies.

The available inventory for Pre-Trigger and/or Load the required inventory items on the system
Trigger Solution, wash buffer, or RVs (reaction and update inventory.
vessels) is not sufficient to complete the test
order. NOTE: Pre-trigger and trigger can only be loaded
Ready, or Warming. Wash buffer can be loaded
when the processing module is in any status
except Initializing, Stopped, or Offline.
hopper.
Error code: 2008

Unable to process test, Pre-Trigger expired.

Onboard stability for Pre-Trigger Solution is Load a new bottle of pre-trigger. See Replace
exceeded. pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update

Ready, or Warming.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2009

Unable to process test, Trigger expired.

Onboard stability for Trigger Solution is exceeded. Load a new bottle of pre-trigger. See Replace
pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update

Ready, or Warming.
Error code: 2010

Empty reagent kit in position (x).
x =Reagent carousel position

Reagent carousel contains an empty reagent kit in Load a new reagent kit or continue processing
the indicated position. samples with the other reagent kits on the module.
NOTE: Reagents can only be loaded when the

processing module status is Ready.
Error code: 2011

Extra reagent bottle detected in position (x) on (y) carousel. Print reagent load error report.
x = Position in which extra bottle was detected.
(1-25 for i System; A1-D20 for c System)
y = Location in which extra bottle was detected.
(Inner, Middle, or Outer ring for i System; R1 or R2 for c System)

For c System:
The R1 and R2 reagent cartridges onboard are Load R1 and R2 reagent cartridges with the same
not the same lot number. lot number.
For i System:
An extra bottle not belonging to the reagent kit in Load the correct bottle for the kit in the correct
this position was detected by the system. position.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2012

Extra reagent bottle detected in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y).
x = Reagent carrier position in which extra bottle was detected

An extra bottle not belonging to the reagent kit in 1. Print the reagent load error report.
this reagent carrier position was detected by the
system. 2. Load the correct bottle for the kit in the correct
position.
Error code: 2013

Empty reagent kit in section (x).
x =RSH section number

Reagent carrier contains an empty reagent kit in the Load a new reagent kit.
RSH section indicated.
Error code: 2014

Inventory discrepancy between hardware and software, update supplies.

Error code: 2015

Insufficient or expired inventory, update supplies.

Error code: 2017

(x) inventory full, empty the container.
x = Inventory item

The waste container is full or the inventory was not Remove solid waste and update inventory (i 2000/i
updated the last time the container was emptied. 2000SR), page 5-47.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2018

Unable to perform procedure, insufficient supplies on Processing Module (x).
x = Processing module (1-4)

The available inventory for Pre-Trigger and/or Load the required inventory items on the system
Trigger Solution, wash buffer, or RVs (reaction and update inventory.
vessels) is not sufficient to complete the
requested procedure.
hopper.
Error code: 2019

(x) inventory empty, update supplies.
x = Inventory item

For i System:
The indicated inventory item is empty or the
supplies status screen was not updated when the
inventory item was added.
2000SR), page 5-49.
Solid waste Remove solid waste and update inventory (i 2000/i
2000SR), page 5-47.
Pre-trigger or trigger sensor hardware failure.
Wash buffer sensor

RV sensor
For c System:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The indicated inventory item is empty or the Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c
supplies status screen was not updated when the System), page 5-33.
Alkaline Wash
Acid Wash
Weight platform sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 2020

Inventory error, review Supplies status screen.

One or more inventory items are low or empty. Load the required inventory items on the system
and update inventory.

Ready, or Warming. Wash buffer can be loaded
when the processing module is in any status
except Initializing, Stopped, or Offline.
RVs (reaction vessels) are bridged above the 1. Stir the RVs in the hopper.
sensor in the RV hopper.
Error code: 2021

Solid waste pan full. Install empty solid waste container, update supplies and press Run.

The limit has been exceeded for the number of RVs 1. Remove the solid waste and update inventory.
to drop into the solid waste pan while the waste
container has been removed for emptying. 2. After the tests in process have completed,
remove the solid waste container and clean the
solid waste pan.
Error code: 2050

(x) inventory low.
x = Inventory item

The indicated bulk solution inventory is low. Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c
System), page 5-33.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2051

(x) inventory empty, update supplies.
x = Inventory item

The indicated bulk solution is empty. Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c
System), page 5-33.
The supply status was not updated when the Update the inventory of the solution. See Replace
solution was added. bulk solutions and update inventory (c System),
page 5-33.
Weight platform sensor cable has a poor hardware failure.
connection
Weight platform not adjusted properly
Weight platform sensor
Error code: 2054

High concentration waste container is Full.

The high-concentration waste bottle is full. Empty the high-concentration waste bottle (c
System), page 5-45.
The high-concentration waste bottle float switch Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 6307
is dirty. Check/Clean HC Waste Sensor, page 9-34.
Float switch cable has a poor connection. Reseat the float switch cable to the module and to
the high-concentration waste bottle.
Float switch cable failed. Replace the float switch cable (c System optional
component), page 9-160 for the c 8000 processing
module or Replace the float switch cable (c System
optional component), page 9-236 for the c 16000
processing module.
Float switch failed. Replace the high-concentration waste bottle (c
System optional component), page 9-158 for the
c 8000 processing module or Replace the
high-concentration waste bottle (c System optional
module.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2100

Wash Buffer reservoir full, ignored fill request.

Wash buffer container was full when a request to Do not attempt to add wash buffer if wash buffer
fill was made. container is full.
NOTE: Wash buffer can be loaded when the

processing module is in any status except
Initializing, Stopped, or Offline.
Buffer level sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 2101

Wash Buffer transfer canceled, Processing Module stop requested.

Wash buffer transfer canceled because of a 1. Start up the processing module. See Start up the
processing module stop. processing module and/or sample handler,
page 5-13.
2. When processing module status is Ready, load

wash buffer.
Error code: 2102

Unable to prime Wash Buffer transfer pump, transfer canceled.

Wash buffer container is empty. Replenish wash buffer manually and update
NOTE: Wash buffer can be loaded when the

processing module is in any status except
Initializing, Stopped, or Offline.
Wash buffer transfer tubing is not connected. Reconnect the wash buffer transfer tubing to the
quick disconnect fitting.
Buffer level sensor hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2103

Wash Buffer transfer timed out, transfer canceled.

Wash buffer transfer tubing is crimped. Reposition the wash buffer transfer tubing.
Wash buffer transfer tubing is not connected Reconnect the transfer tubing.
properly.
Transfer pump hardware failure.
Error code: 2104

Unable to perform automatic Flush, (x) is low.
x = Inventory item

The indicated inventory item is empty or the
supplies screen was not updated when the

Ready, or Warming.
RVs (reaction vessels) or wash buffer Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 2000/i
2000SR), page 5-49.
Solid Waste Remove solid waste and update inventory (i 2000/i
2000SR), page 5-47.
Pre-trigger or trigger sensor hardware failure.
Wash buffer sensor

RV sensor
Error code: 2200

(x) procedure failed, refer to Activity window for details.
x = Procedure name

A system error message occurred. Refer to corrective action for the error indicated in
the Activity list on the Maintenance Perform or
Diagnostic perform window.
Criteria for acceptance specified in the procedure If there is no error in the Activity list, the criteria for
was not met. acceptance specified in the maintenance or
diagnostic procedure was not met.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2201

(x) procedure canceled by user.
x = Procedure name

User selected Quit while performing a procedure. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 2202

(x) procedure report not available.
x = Procedure name

Requested to print a report for a procedure not Select a different module or perform the procedure
performed on the selected module. for the selected module, and then select print.
Error code: 2300

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, sample carousel cover is closed.

The sample carousel cover was closed during the Repeat as-needed maintenance procedure 1120
procedure. Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-35, and do not
close the sample carousel cover unless instructed
to do so in the procedure.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2301

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, reagent 1 carousel cover is closed.

The reagent carousel cover was closed during Repeat as-needed maintenance procedure 1121
the calibration procedure. R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36, and do not close
the reagent carousel cover unless instructed to do
so in the procedure.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2302

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, reagent 2 carousel cover is closed.

The reagent carousel cover was closed during Repeat as-needed maintenance procedure 1122
the calibration procedure. R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-37, and do not close
the reagent carousel cover unless instructed to do
so in the procedure.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2303

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, sample carousel homing failed.

A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstructions.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2304

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, reagent 1 outer carousel homing failed.

the reagent 1 outer carousel.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2305

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, reagent 1 inner carousel homing failed.

the reagent 1 inner carousel.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2306

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, reagent 2 carousel homing failed.

the reagent 2 carousel.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2307

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor homing error.
x = Pipettor name

A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions.
of the pipettor.
Probe is damaged. Perform the appropriate probe replacement
procedure:
Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85 or
Replace the sample probe (c 16000),
page 9-164.
Replace reagent probes (c 8000), page 9-88 or
hardware failure.
Error code: 2308

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, error while moving Sample carousel.

A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstruction.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2309

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, error while moving Reagent 1 outer
carousel.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2310

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, error while moving Reagent 1 inner
carousel.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2311

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, error while moving Reagent 2 carousel.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2312

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor horizontal movement error.
x = Pipettor name

the pipettor.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2313

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor error while moving down.
x = Pipettor name

A physical interference is preventing the pipettor Look for and remove any physical obstruction.
from moving down.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

procedure:
page 9-164.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2314

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor error while moving up.
x = Pipettor name

A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstruction.
of the pipettor.
procedure:
page 9-164.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2315

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, sample carousel rotation error.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2316

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, reagent 1 outer carousel rotation error.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2317

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, reagent 1 inner carousel rotation error.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2318

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, reagent 2 carousel rotation error.

A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstruction
hardware failure.
Error code: 2319

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, exceeded sample carousel target vertical
range.

Sample carousel is not seated properly. Reseat the sample carousel properly on the
alignment pins.
Sample carousel is not present. Place the sample carousel in position.
of the pipettor.
Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover.
screw is loose.
2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground
wire screw with a slotted screwdriver.
3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover

is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor
shaft.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample probe is dirty. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023
Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Sample probe is damaged. Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85 or
Replace the sample probe (c 16000), page 9-164.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2320

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, exceeded cuvette target vertical range.

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
The cuvette segment alignment tool is not seated Reseat the cuvette segment alignment tool on the
properly. alignment pins.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2321

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, exceeded sample handler target vertical
range.

Carrier calibration tool is not present. Place the carrier calibration tool in the carrier.
Carrier calibration tool is not seated properly. Reseat the carrier calibration tool in the carrier.
of the pipettor.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2322

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, exceeded cuvette target vertical range.
x = Pipettor name

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
Reagent probe is dirty. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2323

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, exceeded outer carousel target vertical
range.

The segment in position A of reagent supply Install a segment with the calibration target into
center 1 is not present or does not have the position A of reagent supply center 1.
calibration target.
The segment in position A of reagent supply Reseat the segment in position A of reagent supply
center 1 is not seated properly. center 1 on the alignment pins.
of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2324

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, exceeded inner carousel target vertical
range.

The segment in position D of reagent supply Install a segment into position D of reagent supply
center 1 is not present. center 1.
The segment in position D of reagent supply Reseat the segment in position D of reagent supply
of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

hardware failure.
Error code: 2325

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, exceeded cuvette target vertical range.

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2326

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, exceeded carousel target vertical range.

calibration target.
of the pipettor.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2327

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, exceeded wash cup target horizontal range.

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2328

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, exceeded cuvette target horizontal range.

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2329

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, exceeded cuvette target horizontal range.
x = Pipettor name

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2330

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, exceeded wash cup target horizontal range.
x = Pipettor name

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2331

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, exceeded cuvette target horizontal range.
x = Pipettor name

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2332

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, exceeded wash cup target horizontal range.
x = Pipettor name

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2333

(x) pipettor calibration failed probe straightness check.
x = Pipettor name

of the pipettor.
procedure:
Or
screw is loose.

shaft.
Probe is dirty. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2334

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, cuvette segment alignment tool not found.
x = Pipettor name

The cuvette segment alignment tool was not Install the cuvette segment alignment tool when
installed. instructed to do so in the procedure.
Water is present on the slotted edges of the Remove the cuvette segment alignment tool and
cuvette segment alignment tool. dry the slotted edges before reinstalling it to repeat
the procedure.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2335

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, sample carousel target not found.

alignment pins.
of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2336

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, cuvette target not found.

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2337

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, cuvette target not found.
x = Pipettor name

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2338

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, outer carousel target not found.

calibration target.
of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2339

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, inner carousel target not found.

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

hardware failure.
Error code: 2340

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, cuvette target not found.

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2341

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, carousel target not found.

calibration target.
of the pipettor.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2342

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, unable to determine target position.

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2343

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, incorrect segment A type found in outer
carousel.

A reagent segment without a calibration target Install a segment with the calibration target into
was detected in position A of reagent supply position A of reagent supply center 1.
center 1.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2344

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, incorrect segment A type found in
carousel.

A reagent segment without a calibration target Install the segment with the calibration target in
was detected in position A of reagent supply position A of reagent supply center 2.
center 2.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2345

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, water bath level low.
x = Pipettor name

DI water system failure. 1. Turn on the water supply.

2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38.
System power was off. Perform daily maintenance procedure 6070 Daily
Maintenance, page 9-22 or as-needed
maintenance procedure 2134 Change Water Bath,
page 9-38.
Module is not level hardware failure.
Level sensor is dirty or failed

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2346

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at sample carousel.

alignment pins.
screw is loose.

shaft.
Water quality is below specifications. Perform daily maintenance procedure 6028 Check
DI Water Purity, page 9-22.
Liquid level sense board (threshold voltage is hardware failure.
out of range)
Liquid level sense cable
Liquid level sense board
Loose connector on SMC board
Error code: 2347

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at wash cup.

screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

out of range)
Error code: 2348

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at cuvette.

screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range)
Error code: 2349

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at sample handler.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range)
Error code: 2350

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at cuvette.
x = Pipettor name

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

out of range)
Error code: 2351

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at wash cup.
x = Pipettor name

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2352

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at outer carousel.

calibration target.
of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range)
Error code: 2353

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at inner carousel.

of the pipettor.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range)
Error code: 2354

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at cuvette.
x = Pipettor name

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

out of range)
Error code: 2355

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at wash cup.
x = Pipettor name

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2356

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at carousel.

calibration target.
of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range)
Error code: 2357

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at sample
carousel.

A physical interference is blocking the movement Remove any obstruction from the area of movement
of the sample pipettor. of the sample pipettor.
Probe is damaged. Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85 or
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2358

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at wash cup.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2359

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at cuvette.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2360

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at sample
handler.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2361

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at cuvette.
x = Pipettor name

of the reagent pipettor. of the reagent pipettor.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Probe is damaged. Replace reagent probes (c 8000), page 9-88 or
hardware failure.
Error code: 2362

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at wash cup.
x = Pipettor name

hardware failure.
Error code: 2363

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at outer
carousel.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2364

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at inner
carousel.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2365

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at cuvette.
x = Pipettor name

hardware failure.
Error code: 2366

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at wash cup.
x = Pipettor name

hardware failure.
Error code: 2367

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at carousel.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2368

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, sample handler target not found.

of the pipettor.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2369

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor is not properly aligned with cuvette
target.
x = Pipettor name

screw is loose.

shaft.
Reagent 2 pipettor requires manual alignment. hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2370

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, reagent 2 outer carousel homing failed.

A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Remove any obstruction from the area of movement
the reagent 2 outer carousel. of the carousel.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2371

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, reagent 2 inner carousel homing failed.

the reagent 2 inner carousel. of the carousel.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2372

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, error while moving Reagent 2 outer
carousel.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2373

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, error while moving Reagent 2 inner
carousel.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2374

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, Reagent 2 inner carousel rotation error.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2375

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, Reagent 2 outer carousel rotation error.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2376

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, exceeded outer carousel target vertical
range.

calibration target.
of the pipettor. of the pipettor.
screw is loose.
3. Replace the pipettor cover ensuring the cover is

seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft.
Reagent probe is damaged. Replace reagent probes (c 16000), page 9-167.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2377

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, exceeded inner carousel target vertical
range.

The segment in position D of reagent supply Install a segment with the calibration target into
center 2 is not present. position D of reagent supply center 2.
screw is loose.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2378

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, outer carousel target not found.

calibration target.
screw is loose.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

hardware failure.
Error code: 2379

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, inner carousel target not found.

screw is loose.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2380

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, incorrect segment A type found in outer
carousel.

A 15-position reagent segment was detected in Install a segment with the calibration target into
position A of reagent supply center 2. position A of reagent supply center 2.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 2381

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at outer carousel.

calibration target.
screw is loose.

out of range)
Error code: 2382

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at inner carousel.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

screw is loose.

out of range)
Error code: 2383

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at outer
carousel.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2384

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at inner
carousel.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Level sense error codes (3000-3999)

The level sense error code category includes error codes between
3000-3999.
representative at:

Changing the lamp
Error code: 3000

Unable to process test, Liquid not found for (x) at (y).
x = Pipettor name
y = Location

For sample pipetting:
A sample cup or tube is not present. Ensure sample cup or tube is present.
Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See
inadequate. Sample volume requirements, page 5-172.
Pipettor probe clip is loose. Tighten the probe clip finger tight.
Liquid level sense and Z cable has a poor Tighten the screw holding the cable to the probe
connection. clip, then perform one of the following
fluidics/wash diagnostic procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
3600 LLS Test, page 10-672, for the sample
pipettor
3610 Sample Handler LLS Test, page 10-661,
for the STAT pipettor

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Probe is out of alignment. Perform one of the following as-needed
maintenance procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR
processing module), page 9-68
Probe is damaged. Perform one of the following replacement
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
Liquid level sense and Z cable hardware failure.
Antenna board or cables have a poor

connection or failed
Liquid level sense board has a poor
connection or failed in:
Slot 10 in the upper card cage
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
Slot 4 (STAT) in the upper card cage
(i 2000SR)
Indexer board has a poor connection or failed
in:
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000SR)
For reagent pipetting:
Reagent bottle is empty. Replace empty reagents.
WZ probe maintenance water bottle was filled Repeat one of the following daily or as-needed
with DI water instead of tap water or saline during maintenance procedures, ensuring the WZ probe
a procedure. maintenance water bottle is 1/2 to 3/4 full of tap
water or saline:
NOTE: Do not use DI water for these procedures:

For i 2000/i 2000SR:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

WZ probe maintenance water bottle was Repeat one of the following daily or as-needed
over-filled with tap water or saline during a maintenance procedures, ensuring the WZ probe
procedure. maintenance water bottle is 1/2 to 3/4 full of tap
water or saline:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Maintenance cleaning bottle was overfilled with Repeat one of the following daily or as-needed
sodium hypochlorite solution during a procedure. maintenance procedures, ensuring the WZ probe
maintenance water bottle is 1/2 to 3/4 full of sodium
hypochlorite solution:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
WZ probe maintenance water bottle was not Repeat one of the following daily or as-needed
loaded or was not loaded in the correct position maintenance procedures, ensuring the WZ probe
during a procedure. maintenance water bottle is 1/2 to 3/4 full of tap
water or saline:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Maintenance cleaning bottle was not loaded or Repeat one of the following daily or as-needed
was not loaded in the correct position during a maintenance procedures, ensuring the WZ probe
procedure. maintenance water bottle is 1/2 to 3/4 full of sodium
hypochlorite solution:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
pipettor
For i 2000/i 2000SR:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Replace the R1 or R2 pipettor probe. See
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240.

Slot 8 (R1) in the upper card cage
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
in:
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
Error code: 3001

Unable to process test, liquid not found for sample pipettor at sample carousel position (x).
x = Sample carousel position

Bubbles or foam are on top of the liquid. Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the
applicator stick.
screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample probe is out of alignment. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1120
Sample probe is damaged or has been in use for Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85 or
greater than one year. Replace the sample probe (c 16000), page 9-164.
out of range)
SMC board has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 3002

Unable to process test, liquid not found for (x) pipettor at position (y).
x = Pipettor name

No reagent cartridge present or the cartridge is Load reagents or replace empty reagents.
empty.
Reagent cartridge is not seated properly. Verify there is nothing preventing the reagent
cartridge from seating against the bottom of the
carousel.
For reagents using the 20 mL (bottle) cartridge in
the adapter, verify the bottle was pressed down
against the bottom of the carousel.
bottle.
screw is loose.

shaft.
Reagent probe is out of alignment. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1121

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Liquid level sense board threshold voltage is hardware failure.
out of range
Liquid level sense cable is defective
Liquid level sense board is defective
Error code: 3003

Unable to process test, liquid not found for (x) pipettor at position (y).
x = Pipettor name

empty.
carousel.
bottle.
screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

out of range
Error code: 3004

Unable to process test, liquid not found for sample pipettor at sample carrier.

applicator stick.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3005

Unable to process test, liquid not found for reagent 1 pipettor.

empty.
carousel.
For reagents using the 20 mL (bottles) cartridge in
bottle.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3006

Unable to process test, liquid not found for reagent 2 pipettor.

empty.
carousel.
bottle.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3050

Unable to process test, Liquid too low for (x) at (y).
x = Pipettor name
y = Location

connection. clip, then perform the following fluidics/wash
diagnostic procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
pipettor
3610 Sample Handler LLS Test, page 10-673,
for the STAT pipettor.
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


connection or failed.
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000SR)
in:
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000SR)
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
3600 LLS Test, page 10-672
For i 2000/i 2000SR:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Replace the R1 or R2 pipettor probe. See
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240.

(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
in:
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
Error code: 3051

Unable to process test, liquid too high for (y) at (x).
x = Pipettor name
y = Location

Too much sample in cup or tube. Load a properly filled sample cup or tube. See
Sample volume requirements, page 5-172.
Probe is dirty. Wipe the exterior of the sample probe with a lint
free tissue dampened with DI water.
Pipettor probe clip loose. Tighten the probe clip finger tight.
For i 2000/i 2000SR:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Pipettor pressure monitor cables have a poor hardware failure.
Pipettor pressure monitor board
Pipettor pressure monitor
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000SR)
in:
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000SR)
Liquid on reagent bottle septum. 1. Verify reagent bottle is not over filled.
2. Place a new septum on all reagent bottles.

Probe is dirty. Wipe the exterior of the probe with a lint free tissue
dampened with DI water.
Pipettor probe clip loose. Tighten the probe clip finger tight.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Pressure monitor cables have a poor hardware failure.
connection
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
in:
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
Error code: 3052

Unable to process test, liquid too low for sample pipettor at sample carousel position (x).

screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

out of range
Error code: 3053

Unable to process test, liquid too low for (x) pipettor at position (y).
x = Pipettor name

empty.
carousel.
screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

out of range
Error code: 3054

Unable to process test, liquid too low for (x) pipettor at position (y).
x = Pipettor name

empty.
carousel.
screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

out of range
Error code: 3055

Unable to process test, liquid too high for sample pipettor at sample carousel position (x).

Too much sample in cup or tube. Load a properly filled sample cup or tube. See
applicator stick.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3056

Unable to process test, liquid too high for (x) pipettor at position (y).
x = Pipettor name

carousel.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3057

Unable to process test, liquid too high for (x) pipettor at position (y).
x = Pipettor name

carousel.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range
Error code: 3058

Unable to process test, liquid too low for sample pipettor at sample carrier.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range
Error code: 3059

Unable to process test, liquid too high for sample pipettor at sample carrier.

Too much sample is in cup or tube. Load a properly filled sample cup or tube. See
applicator stick.
screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

out of range
Error code: 3060

Unable to process test, liquid too high for reagent 1 pipettor.

bottle.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3061

Unable to process test, liquid too high for reagent 2 pipettor.

bottle.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range
Error code: 3100

Liquid contact broken during aspiration for (x) at (y).
x = Pipettor name
y = Location

applicator stick.
Sample cup or tube is tilted in the carrier. Reposition the sample cup or tube in the carrier so
that it is not tilted.
Drop of liquid on the side of the sample cup or Transfer the sample to a new sample cup or tube.
tube.
Drop of liquid on the end of the probe. Tighten probe tubing connections finger tight.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

For i 2000/i 2000SR:
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
Probe tubing is damaged. Perform one of the following replacement
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Replace sample, reagent, or STAT probe
tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-244
Pipettor syringe
Antenna board
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000SR)
in:
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000SR)
reagent. reagent using a clean applicator stick for each bottle
Liquid on the reagent septum. Place a new septum on all reagent bottles.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Drop of liquid on the end of the probe. Tighten probe tubing connections finger tight.
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-244
Pipettor syringe
Antenna board
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
in:
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000/i 2000SR)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3101

Unable to process test, liquid contact broken during aspiration for sample pipettor at
sample carousel position (x).

applicator stick.
Sample cup or tube is tilted in the carousel. Reposition the sample cup or tube in the carousel
so that it is not tilted.
tube.
screw is loose.

shaft.
Sample probe tubing connections are loose or Tighten the tubing connections or replace the
leaking. tubing. See Replace the sample probe tubing (c
8000), page 9-92 or Replace the sample probe
tubing (c 16000), page 9-171.
Sample probe tubing is damaged. Replace the sample probe tubing (c 8000),
page 9-92 or Replace the sample probe tubing (c
16000), page 9-171.
out of range

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3102

Unable to process test, liquid contact broken during aspiration for (x) pipettor at position
(y).
x = Pipettor name

screw is loose.

shaft.
Reagent probe tubing connections are loose or Tighten the tubing connections or replace the
leaking. tubing. See Replace the reagent probe tubing (c
8000), page 9-95 or Replace the reagent probe
tubing (c 16000), page 9-174.
Reagent probe tubing is damaged. Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 8000),
page 9-95 or Replace the reagent probe tubing (c
16000), page 9-174.
out of range

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3103

Unable to process test, liquid contact broken during aspiration for (x) pipettor at position
(y).
x = Pipettor name

screw is loose.

shaft.
tubing (c 16000), page 9-174.
16000), page 9-174.
out of range

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3104

Unable to process test, liquid contact broken during aspiration for sample pipettor at
sample carrier.

sample using a clean disposable pipette applicator
stick.
Sample cup or tube is tilted in the carrier. Reposition the sample cup or tube in the carrier so
that it is not tilted.
tube.
screw is loose.

shaft.
tubing (c 16000), page 9-171.
16000), page 9-171.
out of range

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3105

Unable to process test, liquid contact broken during aspiration for reagent 1 pipettor.

bottle.
screw is loose.

shaft.
tubing (c 16000), page 9-174.
16000), page 9-174.
out of range

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3106

Unable to process test, liquid contact broken during aspiration for reagent 2 pipettor.

bottle.
screw is loose.

shaft.
tubing (c 16000), page 9-174.
16000), page 9-174.
out of range

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3200

Unable to process test, maximum number of LLS errors exceeded for a reagent.

Consecutive liquid level sense, aspiration or 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 3000
movement restriction errors detected for the or 5000 category error codes that occurred at the
indicated pipettor. same time as this message to determine the
specific error with the R1 or R2 pipettor.

you do not find any 3000 or 5000 category error
codes.

error code.
NOTE: After the cause has been corrected and

the system status is Ready, Perform one of the
following to remove the reagent pack LLS error
status:
Scan the reagent carousel(s), page 5-84.
Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and
SSH), page 5-206 or Initiate or resume sample
processing (LAS carousel sample handler - i
2000), page 5-207.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3201

Maximum number of LLS errors exceeded for reagent located in position (x) on carousel (y).
x = Position in which the error occurred (A1 - D20 for c System; 1 - 25 for i System)
y = Location in which the error occurred (R1 or R2 for c System; inner, middle, or outer ring
for i System)

indicated pipettor in the indicated position. same time as this message to determine the
specific error with the R1 or R2 pipettor.

codes.

error code.
NOTE: After the cause has been corrected and

the system status is Ready, perform one of the
following to remove the reagent pack LLS error
status:
Scan the reagent carousel(s), page 5-84.
Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and
SSH), page 5-206 or Initiate or resume sample
processing (LAS carousel sample handler - i
2000), page 5-207.
Error code: 3202

Maximum number of LLS errors exceeded for reagent located in (x) reagent carrier position
in section (y).
x = Reagent carrier position in which the error occurred

indicated reagent carrier position. same time as this message to determine the
specific error with the pipettor.

codes.

error code.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3300

High or low pressure detected on (x).
x = Pipettor name

Bubbles, foam, or fibrin clots in the sample. Remove bubbles, foam, or fibrin clots using a clean
disposable pipette or applicator stick.
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Tubing connections are loose. Tighten tubing connections finger tight.
connection or have failed
Pipettor syringe
Antenna board
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000SR)
in:
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000SR)
bottle.
Liquid on the reagent septum Place a new septum on all reagent bottles.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Tubing connections are loose. Tighten tubing connections finger tight.
Pipettor syringe
Antenna board
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
in:
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
Error code: 3350

Unable to process test, aspiration error for (x) at (y).
x = Pipettor name
y = Location

tube.
Drop of liquid on the end of the probe. Tighten tubing connections finger tight.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

For i 2000/i 2000SR:
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240.
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-244.
Pipettor syringe
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000SR)
in:
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000SR)
bottle.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

For i 2000/i 2000SR:
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240.
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-244
Pipettor syringe
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
in:
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000/i 2000SR)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3351

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), output enable bit value.
x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6),
3 = STAT (slot 4)

Liquid level sense board in the indicated hardware failure.
position in the upper card cage has a poor
Error code: 3352

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), invalid syringe start.
3 = STAT (slot 4)

Cables to the pressure monitor board for the hardware failure.
pipettor indicated have a poor connection or
failed
Liquid level sense board in the indicated
Pressure monitor board for the indicated
pipettor has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 3353

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), pressure discord score.
3 = STAT (slot 4)

tube.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

For i 2000/i 2000SR:
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-244
failed
Pipettor syringe
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000SR)
in:
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000SR)
bottle.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

For i 2000/i 2000SR:
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-244
failed
Pipettor syringe
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
in:
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000/i 2000SR)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3354

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), foam detection failure.
3 = STAT (slot 4)

failed
Error code: 3355

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), incomplete aspiration.
3 = STAT (slot 4)

failed
Error code: 3356

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), clot score.
3 = STAT (slot 4)


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

tube.
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-244
failed
Pipettor syringe
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000SR)
in:
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000SR)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the reagent Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the
bottle.
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-244
failed
Pipettor syringe
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
in:
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000/i 2000SR)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3357

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), shape conform score.
3 = STAT (slot 4)

tube.
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-244

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

failed
Pipettor syringe
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000SR)
in:
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000SR)
Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the reagent Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the
bottle.
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-244
failed
Pipettor syringe
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
in:
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
Error code: 3358

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), back end average pressure.
3 = STAT (slot 4)

failed

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3359

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), front end and back end average pressure
correlation.
3 = STAT (slot 4)

failed
Liquid level sense board in the indicated position
in the upper card cage has a poor connection or
failed
Pressure monitor board for the indicated pipettor
has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 3360

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), communication failure.
3 = STAT (slot 4)

failed

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3361

High pressure detected on liquid level sense board (x).
x = Board number for pipette, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6),
3 = STAT (slot 4)

Probe for the specific pipettor is obstructed. Perform one of the following replacement
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
failed
Error code: 3362

Low pressure detected on liquid level sense board (x).
3 = STAT (slot 4)

failed

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3363

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), invalid detail status code.
x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot
6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)

failed
Error code: 3364

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), output enable bit number.
6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)

failed

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3365

(x) disabled, maximum number of aspiration errors exceeded.
x = Pipettor name

Communication or hardware failure. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
failed
connection or failed (S = slot 10, R1 = slot 8,
R2 = slot 6, STAT = slot 4)
pipettor has a poor connection or failed (S =
slot 10, R1 = slot 8, R2 = slot 6, STAT = slot 4)
Error code: 3375

Unable to process test, aspiration error occurred.

Bubbles, foam, or fibrin clots present in the Remove bubbles or foam using a clean disposable
sample. pipette or applicator stick.
Remove fibrin clots using an applicator stick, or
recentrifuge the sample.
Sample cup or tube not seated properly in sample Ensure sample cup or tube is pushed completely
carrier or sample carousel. down into the sample carrier or sample carousel.
Sample probe is obstructed. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023
16000), page 9-171.
Drop of liquid on the side of the sample cup or Transfer the sample to a new cup or tube.
tube.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Drop of liquid on the end of the probe. Tighten tubing connection finger tight.
PM Sensor defective hardware failure.
PM sensor cable disconnected
PM board defective
Error code: 3376

Unable to process test, dispense error occurred.

Error code: 3377

Unable to process test, wash error occurred.

tubing (c 16000), page 9-171.
16000), page 9-171.
Water source supply was interrupted. 1. Verify the water source supply is functioning.

Air bubbles are present in the water source 1. Check the tubing connections.
supply tubing.
Probe wash pump hardware failure.
Tubing damaged
PM sensor
PM board

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3378

Unable to initialize run, wash error occurred.

tubing (c 16000), page 9-171.
16000), page 9-171.

supply tubing.
Probe wash pump hardware failure.
Tubing damaged
PM sensor
PM board
Error code: 3500

Pressure monitoring failure on liquid level sense board (x).
6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

failed
Error code: 3501

LLS Command timeout on liquid level sense board (x).
6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)

failed
Software error Contact your Area Customer Support. Please

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3502

LLS data read timeout on liquid level sense board (x).
6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)

failed
Error code: 3503

LLS data write timeout on liquid level sense board (x).
6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)

failed

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3504

Pressure Monitoring timeout on liquid level sense board (x).
6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)

failed
Error code: 3505

Pressure Monitoring data read timeout on liquid level sense board (x).
6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)

failed

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3506

Pressure Monitoring data write timeout on liquid level sense board (x).
6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)

failed
Error code: 3507

Invalid timeout bit on liquid level sense board (x).
6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)

failed

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3508

Communication failure on liquid level sense board for (x).
x = Pipettor name

failed
Error code: 3550

Self test failure on liquid level sense board (x).
6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)

Error code: 3551

Self test failure on liquid level sense board (x).
6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3552

No response from liquid level sense board (x).
6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)

Error code: 3553

Invalid address detected on liquid level sense board (x).
6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)

Error code: 3554

Self test timeout on liquid level sense board (x).
6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)

Error code: 3556

Self test failed on liquid level sense board (x).
6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3557

POST failed on Liquid level sense board (x).
6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)

Error code: 3574

PM code invalid at end of dispense.

Communication failure with PM board. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.
Error code: 3575

DI water tank is empty.


Water source supply is restricted. 1. Verify tubing from the water source is not
crimped or blocked.

Incoming DI water pressure is too low. Increase the incoming DI water pressure to within
specifications. See c System processing module

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

supply tubing.
Supply water tubing is disconnected hardware failure.
Incoming On/Off valve failure

Float sensor is disconnected or defective
AC/DC driver board is defective
AC/DC controller board is defective
Error code: 3576

DI water tank, timeout during automatic fill.


crimped or blocked.

specifications. See c System processing module
supply tubing.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3577

DI water tank not filling.


crimped or blocked.

specifications. See Electrical specifications and
supply tubing.

Error code: 3578

DI water tank, timeout during initialization.


crimped or blocked.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

supply tubing.

Error code: 3579

Internal Low concentration waste tank is full.

Drainage or overflow tubing is crimped. Reposition the drainage and overflow tubing so
there are no crimps.
Waste tubing is too high. Adjust the waste tubing so it is less than 4 inches
(100 mm) from the ground.
Drain line is plugged hardware failure.
Float switch is defective
Error code: 3580

PM board not in ready mode.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3581

PM board does not respond.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3582

PM board POST error.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3583

PM board not in ready mode to request PM software version.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3584

PM board does not respond to request for PM software version.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3585

PM board not in ready status during seek.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3586

PM board not in ready status beginning aspiration.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3587

PM board not in ready status ending aspiration.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3588

PM board not in ready status before dispense.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3589

PM board not in ready status at start of dispense.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3590

PM board not in ready status at end of dispense.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3591

PM board not in ready status before wash.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3592

PM board not in ready status at start of wash.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3595

PM board not in ready status at end of wash.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3596

PM board not responding at end of aspiration.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3597

PM board not responding at end of dispense.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3598

PM board not responding at end of wash.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3599

PM code invalid at end of aspiration.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3600

PM code invalid at end of wash.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3601

Invalid data terminator received from Liquid Level Sense board (x).
6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)

Error code: 3602

(x) liquid level sense antenna verification failure.
x = Pipettor name

The liquid level sense antenna indicated in the hardware failure.
message is not responding.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3603

POST passed, Liquid level sense board (x), version (y).
6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
y = Firmware revision

Power on self tests (POST) passed on the indicated Status message. No corrective action is required.
liquid level sense board.
Error code: 3604

PM board not in ready status at beginning of seek.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3700

Unable to process test, (x) wash aspiration error for probe(s) (y).
x = Wash Zone
y = Probe number

Fibrin or clots in the sample. Remove fibrin clots with a clean applicator stick.
If error occurs on multiple samples:
Poor tubing connections to the wash zone Reconnect tubing to the affected probe(s) for the
probes. indicated wash zone.
Temperature sensor connected to wrong probe Reconnect the wash zone tubing/sensor cable to
tubing. the correct probe.
Wash zone probe obstructed. 1. Perform one of the following as-needed
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
6043 WZ Probe Cleaning - Bleach,
page 9-71.
2. Perform one of the following replacement

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i
2000SR), page 9-248.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Wash zone temperature sensor obstructed. Perform one of the following replacement
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Replace the wash zone temperature tubing
and sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-255.
Poor tubing connections to the vacuum vessels. Reseat the tubing connection at the vacuum valve
of the vacuum vessel.
DC driver I/O board in slot 7 in the lower card hardware failure.
cage has a poor connection or failed
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
Wash zone manifold valve failure
If error occurs after daily maintenance:
Processing module status is in the Warming Repeat daily maintenance once the processing
status. module is in the Ready status.
Error code: 3701

(x) disabled, maximum number of wash aspiration errors exceeded.
x = Wash Zone name

Error 3700 occurred shortly before or at the same
time as this message. Determine the specific
probe(s) 1, 2, or 3 experiencing the 3700 error
message.
Poor tubing connections to the wash zone Reconnect tubing to the affected probe(s) for the
probes. indicated wash zone.
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 9-71.

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-248.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Wash zone temperature sensor obstructed. Perform one of the following replacement
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
Wash zone manifold valve failure
Error code: 3702

Wash water supply warning (x), decreased flow detected, (y/z).
x = Wash cup name
y = Measured water flow rate
z = Minimum flow rate

Fluctuation or a slight decrease in water wash flow. No corrective action required.
Error code: 3703

Unable to process test, wash water supply failure (x), (y/z).
x = Wash cup name
y = Measured water flow rate
z = Minimum flow rate

Wash water supply is restricted or requires Contact your Area Customer Support.
adjustment.
Error code: 3840

(x) timeout during rotation.
x = High concentration waste pump name

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3841

(x) homing failure.
x = High concentration waste pump name

hardware failure.
Error code: 3850

(x) timeout while moving to upper limit.
x = Probe wash pump name

hardware failure.
Error code: 3851

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving (x) to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3852

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving (x) to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3853

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving (x) to upper limit.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3854

(x) timeout while moving to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3855

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving (x) to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3856

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while moving (x) to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3857

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving (x) to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3858

Cuvette wash pump timeout while moving to upper limit.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3859

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving Cuvette wash pump
to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3860

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving Cuvette wash pump to
upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3861

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Cuvette wash pump to
upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3862

Cuvette wash pump timeout while moving to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3863

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving Cuvette wash pump
to lower limit.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3864

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while moving Cuvette wash pump to lower
limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3865

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Cuvette wash pump to
lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3866

Cuvette wash pump timeout while homing.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3867

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while homing Cuvette wash pump.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3868

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while homing Cuvette wash pump.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3869

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while homing Cuvette wash pump.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3870

Wash solution pump timeout while moving to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3871

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving Wash solution pump
to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3872

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving Wash solution pump to
upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3873

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Wash solution pump to
upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3874

Wash solution pump timeout while moving to lower limit.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3875

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving Wash solution pump
to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3876

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while moving Wash solution pump to lower
limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3877

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Wash solution pump to
lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3878

Wash solution pump timeout while homing.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3879

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while homing Wash solution pump.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3880

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while homing Wash solution pump.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3881

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while homing Wash solution pump.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3882

High concentration waste pump timeout while moving to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3883

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving High concentration
waste pump to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3884

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving High concentration waste
pump to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3885

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving High concentration waste
pump to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3886

High concentration waste pump timeout while moving to lower limit.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3887

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving High concentration
waste pump to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3888

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while moving High concentration waste
pump to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3889

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving High concentration waste
pump to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3890

High concentration waste pump timeout while homing.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3891

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while homing High concentration
waste pump.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3892

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while homing High concentration waste
pump.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3893

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while homing High concentration
waste pump.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3894

Sample syringe drive timeout during movement.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3895

Sample syringe drive homing failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3896

(x) syringe drive timeout during movement.
x = Syringe drive name

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3897

(x) syringe drive homing failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3898

(x) syringe drive timeout during movement.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3899

(x) syringe drive homing failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3900

The Processing Module is (x), inlet valve cannot be opened for ARM buffer transfer.
x = Processing module status

User manually requested buffer transfer and the See Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i
processing module is not in the correct status for System), page 5-60.
receiving buffer from the ARM.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3901

(x) failed: (y).
x = Type of request
y = Text that describes the failure

The ARM cannot respond to the SCC request to Refer to Observed Problems in this section, for the
transfer buffer to a processing module. text in the last field of the ARM error code:
A to D timeout (ARM), page 10-628
ARM accessory is stopped, page 10-629
ARM decontamination mode aborted,
page 10-629
ARM message not sent, page 10-630
Calibration check failure (ARM), page 10-633
Checksum failure (ARM), page 10-633
Communication timeout (ARM), page 10-634
Concentrated wash buffer empty (ARM),
page 10-635
Decontamination is in process (ARM),
page 10-635
Flood condition (ARM), page 10-636
Buffer quality error indicator - up arrow (high
conductivity) illuminated (ARM), page 10-631
High outlet pressure indicator illuminates (ARM),
page 10-637
Temperature indicator illuminates (ARM),
page 10-646
Invalid ARM error code, page 10-638
Invalid ARM status code, page 10-639
Invalid format of ARM message "message
string", page 10-640
System flush is in process (ARM), page 10-645
Buffer quality error indicator - down arrow (low
Low inlet pressure indicator illuminates (ARM),
page 10-641
Meter handshaking failure (ARM), page 10-642
Motor stall (ARM), page 10-643
Water quality error indicator illuminates (ARM),
page 10-646
SCI (serial communication interface) process
timeout (ARM), page 10-644

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3902

(x): (y)
x = Type of message
y = Text that describes the failure

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The ARM is not able to respond to a request to Refer to Observed Problems in this section, for the
transfer buffer to a processing module, because it is text in the last field of the ARM error code:
not in the correct status. A to D timeout (ARM), page 10-628
ARM decontamination mode aborted,
page 10-629
Concentrated wash buffer empty (ARM),
page 10-635
Decontamination is in process (ARM),
page 10-635
Buffer quality error indicator - up arrow (high
High outlet pressure indicator illuminates (ARM),
page 10-637
Temperature indicator illuminates (ARM),
page 10-646
Invalid format of ARM message "message
string", page 10-640
Buffer quality error indicator - down arrow (low
Low inlet pressure indicator illuminates (ARM),
page 10-641
Water quality error indicator illuminates (ARM),
page 10-646
SCI (serial communication interface) process
timeout (ARM), page 10-644

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 3903

Unable to configure Wash Buffer transfer to automatic, ARM port error.

The ARM RS-232 cable was not connected when Connect the RS-232 cable to the SCC port then
the SCC was configured to automatic wash buffer configure the SCC to automatic wash buffer
transfer. transfer.
Another cable is connected to the port used for Reseat the RS-232 cable connection to the SCC
the ARM RS-232 cable. port and to the ARM.
The SCC hyperterminal program is running. Contact your Area Customer Support.
Error code: 3904

ARM turned off, SCC communication to a Processing Module failed.

Buffer was transferring to a processing module 1. Determine why the communication failed
when communication to the SCC failed. between the SCC and the processing module
and correct the cause.
2. Cycle power to the processing module and/or

3. Power off the ARM (i System), page 5-20.
4. Power on and initialize the ARM (i System),

page 5-20.
Bar code reader error codes (4000-4999)

The bar code reader error code category includes error codes between
4000-4999.
representative at:


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Changing the lamp
Error code: 4000

Unable to read reagent bar code in position (x) on (y) carousel.
x = Position in which the unreadable bar code was detected.
(1-25 for i System; A1-D20 for c System)
y = Location in which the unreadable bar code was detected.

Reagent bottle bar code label is dirty. Clean the label.
Condensation on reagent bottle bar code label. Wipe the label with a clean lint-free tissue.
Reagent bottle bar code label is damaged. Load a new reagent kit.
Bar code reader window is dirty. Clean the bar code reader window, page 10-697, if
error occurs with multiple reagent bottles.
For c System:
1D reagent bar code label has an invalid See 1D reagent bar code label data format,
checksum. page 4-30.
hardware failure.
For i System:
Reagent bar code reader requires calibration. Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure
Reagent bar code reader was not calibrated Repeat bar code readers diagnostic procedure
correctly. 3210 Reagent Bar Code Calibration, page 10-675,
and ensure the bar code calibration tools are not
tilted and the bar codes face the center of the
reagent carousel.
hardware failure.
Error code: 4001

Unable to read reagent 1 bar code in position (x).


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The bar code label on the 20 mL (bottle) cartridge Reposition the 20 mL cartridge in the adapter so it
is not facing the bar code reader. faces the outside of the reagent supply center.
hardware failure.
Error code: 4002

Unable to read reagent 2 bar code in position (x).

hardware failure.
Error code: 4003

Unable to read reagent 1 bar code.

hardware failure.
Error code: 4004

Unable to read reagent 2 bar code.

Reagent bottle bar code is damaged Load a new reagent kit.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

hardware failure.
Error code: 4005

Unable to read segment ID bar code on reagent carousel 1 segment (x).
x= Reagent carousel segment

Segment bar code label is dirty. Clean the label.
Segment bar code label is damaged. Replace the reagent carousel segment.
Communication failure with the reagent bar code Cycle power to the processing module and/or
reader. sample handler, page 5-12.
hardware failure.
Error code: 4006

Unable to read segment ID barcode on reagent carousel 2 segment (x).
x= Reagent carousel segment

Segment bar code has too much condensation. Wipe the label with a clean lint-free tissue.
Segment bar code label is dirty. Clean the label.
Segment bar code label is damaged. Replace the reagent carousel segment.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 4007

User-defined reagent kit in location (x) was unloaded, bar code read error in same position.
x= Reagent carousel segment and position

A bar coded reagent cartridge was detected in a 1. If the non-bar coded reagent was moved to a
position in which a non-bar coded reagent was different position, assign the new position. See
manually assigned. Load non-bar coded reagents (c System),
page 5-91.
2. If the non-bar coded reagent is no longer

onboard, no action is required until the reagent is
loaded again. At that time, assign a new position.
Error code: 4008

Unable to read reagent bar code in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y).
x = Position in which the unreadable bar code was detected

hardware failure.
Error code: 4100

Termination character not received from Reagent bar code reader.

Error code: 4101

Invalid checksum received from Reagent bar code reader.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 4102

Invalid command sent to Reagent bar code reader.

Controller board in slot 14 in the upper card

Error code: 4103

Reagent bar code reader not responding.

Communication failure with the Reagent bar code Cycle power to the processing module and/or
Error code: 4104

Acknowledge command not received from Reagent bar code reader.

Error code: 4105

POST failed, Reagent bar code reader.

Communication failure with the Reagent bar code Cycle power to the processing module and/or
Error code: 4106

POST passed, Reagent Bar code Reader (x).
x = Firmware Version.

Power on self tests (POST) passed on the reagent Status message. No corrective action is required.
bar code reader.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 4200

Unable to read bar code label at Carrier (x) Position (y).
x = Carrier ID
y = Position

If error code 4203 occurred at the same time, the
carrier label cannot be read. If there is no other
error code, the sample label cannot be read.
A cup or tube is not in position. No corrective action is required.
A bar code label is not on the sample tube. Place a bar code label on the sample tube.
Tube is not correctly positioned in the carrier. Place the tube in the carrier so the bar code is
visible through the slot.
Sample tube bar code label is dirty or damaged. Clean the sample bar code label or replace if
damaged.
Sample cup or tube is scratched or dirty. 1. Clean the sample cup or tube.
2. Replace if damaged.
Bar code label does not meet specifications. See Sample bar code label requirements,
page 4-32 for guidelines.
System bar code configuration does not match Edit the bar code configuration as required for the
bar code label. bar code label symbology. See Change the sample
bar code settings for codabar, page 2-28, Change
the sample bar code settings for code 39,
page 2-29, or Change the sample bar code settings
for I 2 of 5, page 2-30.
3220 SH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-689, if you
have a standard sample handler or 3222 RSH Bar
Code Calibration, page 10-685, if you have a
robotic sample handler.
RSH bar code reader or sample load queue hardware failure.
bar code reader

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 4201

Unable to read Carrier ID (x) at Load Queue bar code reader, samples will not be processed.
x = Carrier ID

Carrier ID read at the processing queue bar code
reader but was unable to be read at the load queue
bar code reader.
2. Place carrier on the load queue.

3220 SH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-689.
Load queue SID bar code reader hardware failure.
Error code: 4202

Carrier position numbers detected out of sequence on Carrier (x).
x = Carrier ID

Carrier mis-labeled. Use a different carrier.
Load queue bar code reader requires calibration. 1. Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure
3250 SH Bar Code Reader Test, page 10-689.
2. Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure

3220 SH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-689, if
3250 SH Bar Code Reader Test, page 10-689,
failed.
hardware failure.
Error code: 4203

Unable to read Position number (x) on Carrier at the Load Queue bar code reader.
x = Position


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Load queue SID bar code reader hardware failure.
Error code: 4204

Unable to read Carrier ID at Sample ID bar code reader.


Sample ID bar code reader hardware failure.
Error code: 4205

Unable to read carrier ID (x) at RSH bar code reader.
x = Carrier ID


Bar code reader requires calibration. Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure
3222 RSH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-685.
Sample ID bar code reader hardware failure.
Error code: 4206

Unable to read Carrier ID for carrier in bay (x) section (y).
x = Bay number
y = Section number

Carrier bar code label is wet or dirty. Clean and dry the carrier bar code label.
Carrier bar code is damaged. Use a different carrier.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

If error occurs for more than one carrier:
Bar code reader requires calibration. Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure
3222 RSH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-685.
Error code: 4207

Unable to read Carrier ID for carrier in section (x).

Carrier bar code label is wet or dirty. Clean and dry the carrier bar code label.
Carrier bar code is damaged. Use a different carrier.
If error occurs for more than one carrier:
Error code: 4208

Invalid Sample ID scanned by the Sample ID bar code reader. The Sample ID contains an
invalid character.

The sample ID contains an invalid character. Use valid characters only.
Valid characters are defined by Abbott Laboratories
as A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and the special characters , / >
< ? ; : ] [ \ } { ' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and
<space>.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 4300

Unable to read position number (x) on Carrier at the (y).
x = Position number
y = Bar code reader

Carrier bar code label is damaged or dirty. 1. Clean the carrier bar code label.

Processing queue bar code reader hardware failure.
Error code: 4301

Unable to read Carrier ID at the (x) on module (y).
x = Bar code reader


Processing queue bar code reader. hardware failure.
Error code: 4302

Invalid Carrier ID detected at (x) on module (y).
x = Bar code reader



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 4400

Sample ID bar code reader not responding.

Controller board has a poor connection or hardware failure.
failed (ci System/i System - slot 3 in the upper
card cage, c System - slot 2 in lower card
cage)
RSH bar code reader or sample load queue
bar code reader
Error code: 4401

Invalid checksum received from sample ID bar code reader.

bar code reader
Error code: 4402

Termination character not received from sample ID bar code reader.

bar code reader
Error code: 4403

Sample ID bar code reader not detected.

bar code reader
Controller board has a poor connection or
cage)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 4404

Invalid command sent to sample ID bar code reader.

bar code reader
Error code: 4405

Sample ID bar code reader communication error.

bar code reader
Error code: 4406

Unable to perform read, sample ID bar code reader in use.

bar code reader
Error code: 4407

Invalid configuration for sample ID bar code reader.

bar code reader

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 4408

POST failed, sample ID bar code reader.

Communication failure with the sample ID bar Cycle power to the processing module and/or
code reader. sample handler, page 5-12.
Controller board has a poor connection or hardware failure.
cage)
RSH bar code reader or sample load queue
bar code reader
Error code: 4409

POST passed, sample ID bar code reader, version (x).
x = Firmware version

Power on self tests (POST) passed for the sample Status message. No corrective action is required.
load queue bar code reader or RSH bar code
reader.
Error code: 4410

Timing sequence error detected with RSH bar code reader.

RSH bar code reader calibration was not Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure
performed. 3222 RSH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-685.
RSH bar code reader hardware failure.
Error code: 4411

Invalid checksum received from the bar code reader.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 4412

Invalid command sent to the bar code reader.

Error code: 4413

Bar code reader communication error.

Error code: 4414

Bar code reader not detected.

Controller board has a poor connection or

failed
Error code: 4415

Termination character not received from the bar code reader.

Error code: 4416

Unable to perform read, bar code reader in use.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 4417

Invalid configuration for the bar code reader.

Error code: 4418

Reagent bar code reader communication error.

Error code: 4419

Invalid configuration for reagent bar code reader.

Error code: 4420

Unable to perform read, reagent bar code reader in use.

Error code: 4500

(x) not responding on Processing Module (y).
x = Bar code reader
y = Processing module number (1 - 4)

Communication failure with the bar code reader. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 4501

Processing Queue bar code reader (x) in use.
x = Processing module number (1 - 4)

Communication failure with the processing queue Cycle power to the processing module and/or
bar code reader. sample handler, page 5-12.
Error code: 4502

Invalid reader number (x) requested for Processing Queue bar code reader.
x = Reader number

Error code: 4503

Invalid configuration on Processing Queue bar code reader (x).

Error code: 4504

Processing Queue barcode reader (x) communication error.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 4505

Invalid checksum received from Processing Queue bar code reader (x).

Error code: 4506

Termination character not received from Processing Queue bar code reader (x).

Error code: 4507

Invalid terminator received from Processing Queue bar code reader (x).

Error code: 4508

Processing Queue bar code reader (x) not detected.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 4509

Invalid reader address received from Processing Queue bar code reader (x).

Error code: 4510

Invalid command received from Processing Queue bar code reader (x).

Error code: 4511

Processing Queue bar code reader (x) not responding.

bar code reader sample handler, page 5-12.
Controller board in slot 3 in the upper card hardware failure.
Processing queue bar code reader
Error code: 4520

POST passed, Processing Queue Bar code Reader (x) version (y).
y = Firmware version

Power on self tests (POST) passed on the Status message. No corrective action is required.
processing queue bar code reader.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 4530

POST failed, Processing Queue bar code reader (x).

Processing Queue bar code reader
Error code: 4600

Unable to read carousel ID at Processing Queue bar code reader.

Carousel is not present. Place carousel on the LAS carousel platform.
Carousel ID label is not on the carousel. Apply a carousel ID label to the carousel.
The carousel is not seated correctly. Seat the carousel correctly.
Carousel bar code label is damaged, wet, or dirty. 1. Clean the carousel bar code label or replace the
label if damaged.
2. Place carousel on the LAS carousel platform.
3. Use a different carousel, if error continues.

Processing queue bar code reader (used to read Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure
the LAS carousel) requires calibration. 3225 LAS Crsl Bar Code Calibration, page 10-692.
Processing queue bar code reader. hardware failure.
Error code: 4601

LAS bar code read failed for SID (x).
x - Sample ID

damaged.
Sample tube is not correctly positioned in the Position the tube in the carrier so the bar code is
carrier. visible.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Bar code label does not meet specifications. 1. See Sample bar code label requirements,
page 4-32, for guidelines.
2. Contact your LAS vendor.

Error code: 4602

LAS bar code read mismatched for SID (x).
x = Sample ID ordered

The bar code read by the LAS did not match the
SID data ordered.
The wrong tube is at the aspiration point. 1. Rerun the sample.
2. Contact your LAS vendor.
Error code: 4800

Unable to read Sample ID at sample carousel position (x).

Tube is not correctly positioned in the carousel. Place the tube in the carousel so the bar code is
damaged.
If error occurs with multiple samples:
bar code labels. bar code label symbology. See Change the sample
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 4801

Unable to read Sample ID at sample carousel.

damaged.
If error occurs with multiple samples:
hardware failure.
Error code: 4900

(x) bar code reader Power On Self Test failure.
x = Sample Carousel, Reagent 1, or Reagent 2

Communication failure with bar code reader. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.
Error code: 4901

(x) bar code reader failure (port initialize error).

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 4902

(x) bar code reader failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 4906

(x) bar code reader parity error.

For sample carousel:
damaged.
For Reagent 1 or 2:
For all bar code readers:
hardware failure.
Robotic and sensor error codes (5000-5999)

The robotic and sensor error code category includes error codes
between 5000-5999.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
representative at:

Changing the lamp
Error code: 5000

(x) movement restricted at (y).
x = Pipettor name
y = Location

Stopper not removed from the sample tube. Remove stopper from sample tube.
Sample cup or tube was not properly placed in Ensure sample cup or tube is fully seated into
the carrier. sample carrier and is positioned straight.
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

connection. clip, then perform one of the following fluidics/wash
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
3600 LLS Test, page 10-672 for the sample
pipettor
3610 Sample Handler LLS Test, page 10-673
for the STAT pipettor
Sample carrier is damaged. Use a different carrier.
Indexer board has a poor connection or failed hardware failure.
Liquid level sense and Z cable failure
Pipettor
Reagent bottle cap was not removed. Remove the cap from the reagent bottle, and then
install septum.
Vacuum vessel tubing obstructing probe. Adjust vacuum vessel tubing so the pipettor does
not touch it when washing the probe.
Reagent bottle is not seated correctly in the Reseat the reagent bottle in the carousel.
reagent carousel.
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Liquid level sense board has a poor hardware failure.
Liquid level sense and Z cable
Pipettor
Error code: 5001

Sample Pipettor probe may be in sample cup/tube on Processing Module (x) due to prior
hardware failure.

Sample pipettor failure occurred on the specified 1. Start up the processing module to remove probe
processing module that could possibly leave the from sample cup or tube. Do not perform start up
probe inside the sample cup or tube. on the sample handler at the same time. See
Start up the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-13.
2. Perform a start up on the sample handler when


or 5000 category error codes that occurred at the
same time as this message.

codes.

error code.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5002

Sample pipettor timeout during vertical movement.

of the sample pipettor in the cuvette dispense or
wash cup positions.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5003

Sample pipettor vertical homing failure.

of the sample pipettor.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5004

Sample pipettor timeout during horizontal movement.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5005

Sample pipettor horizontal homing failure.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5006

(x) pipettor timeout during vertical movement.
x = Pipettor name

of the reagent 1 pipettor in the cuvette dispense
or wash cup positions.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5007

(x) pipettor vertical homing failure.
x = Pipettor name

of the reagent 1 pipettor.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5008

(x) pipettor timeout during horizontal movement.
x = Pipettor name

the reagent 1 pipettor.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5009

(x) pipettor horizontal homing failure.
x = Pipettor name

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5010

(x) pipettor timeout during vertical movement.
x = Pipettor name

of the reagent 2 pipettor in the cuvette dispense
or wash cup positions.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5011

(x) pipettor vertical homing failure.
x = Pipettor name

hardware failure.
Error code: 5012

(x) pipettor timeout during horizontal movement.
x = Pipettor name

hardware failure.
Error code: 5013

(x) pipettor horizontal homing failure.
x = Pipettor name

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5014

Sample pipettor movement restricted at sample carousel position (x).

Sample cup or tube was not properly placed in Ensure sample cup or tube is fully seated into the
the carousel. sample carousel and is positioned straight.
Sample carousel cover is not seated properly. Reseat the sample carousel cover.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5015

(x) pipettor movement restricted at (y).
x = Pipettor name

Cap not removed from a reagent cartridge. Remove cap from reagent bottles.
Reagent cartridge and/or adapter is not seated Reseat the reagent cartridge and/or adapter.
correctly.
Empty reagent cartridge. Replace the reagent.
Carousel cover is not seated properly. Reseat the carousel cover.
of the reagent pipettor.
Non-bar coded reagent is not loaded or is not Load the non-bar coded reagent in the correct
loaded in the correct position. assigned position.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5016

(x) pipettor movement restricted at (y).
x = Pipettor name

correctly.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5017

Unable to perform horizontal movement, sample pipettor not in up position.

The sample pipettor was physically pushed down 1. Select the processing module graphic, and
from its vertical home position. then select Stop.
2. Start up the processing module when the status

is Stopped. See Start up the processing module
and/or sample handler, page 5-13.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5018

Sample pipettor movement restricted at sample carrier.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

the carrier. sample carrier and is positioned straight.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5019

Unable to process test, (x) pipettor movement restricted.
x = Pipettor name

correctly.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5020

Unable to process test, (x) pipettor movement restricted.
x = Pipettor name

correctly.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

hardware failure.
Error code: 5021

Sample pipettor movement restricted at LAS.

the carousel. carousel and is positioned straight.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5022

Sample pipettor movement restricted at dilution cuvette position.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5023

Sample pipettor movement restricted.

Sample cup or tube was not properly placed in Ensure sample cup or tube is fully seated into
the carrier or carousel. sample carrier or carousel and is positioned
straight.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5024

Unexpected SMC status after (x) movement.
x = Hardware component

of the pipettor.
Probe is out of alignment. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1120
Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-35, 1121 R1
Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36, or 1122 R2 Pipettor
Calibration, page 9-37.
hardware failure.
Communication failure with SMC board. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5025

Sample Pipettor (vertical) did not stop as expected.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5026

(x) pipettor (vertical) did not stop as expected.
x = Pipettor name

hardware failure.
Error code: 5027

(x) pipettor (vertical) did not stop as expected.
x = Pipettor name

hardware failure.
Error code: 5100

(x) disabled, maximum number of errors exceeded.
x = Name of mechanism taken offline

For vortexer:
Cable for the specified vortexer has a poor hardware failure.
Vortexer in the indicated position
DC Driver I/O board in slot 7 in the lower card

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

For other motors:
Cable for the specified motor has a poor hardware failure.
DC Driver I/O board in slot 7 in the lower card
Error code: 5101

(x) did not disengage from RV.
x = Vortexer number

Vortexer in the specified position
DC Driver I/O board in the card cage has a
Error code: 5102

Unable to process test, failure on (x).
x = Mechanism name

Intermittent failure with the specified mechanism. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 5000

codes.

error code.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5103

(x) did not mix RV for required time.
x = Vortexer number

Error code: 5104

(x) did not reach required speed.
x = Vortexer number

Error code: 5105

(x) did not engage with RV.
x = Vortexer number


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5106

Process path jam was detected and a recovery was successfully performed. Process path may
require servicing.
NOTE: Frequent occurrences of this error code may indicate a pending
hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.

An RV (reaction vessel) was jammed in the A recovery was performed to clear the jammed RV.
process path track. No further action required.
RVs are damaged or have an irregular shape. A recovery was performed to clear the jammed RV.
No further action required.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5151

Reaction carousel timeout during rotation.

the reaction carousel.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5152

Reaction carousel homing failure

the reaction carousel.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5153

Reagent 1 outer carousel timeout during rotation.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5154

Reagent 1 outer carousel homing failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5155

Reagent 1 inner carousel timeout during rotation.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5156

Reagent 1 inner carousel homing failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5157

Reagent 2 carousel timeout during rotation.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5158

Reagent 2 carousel homing failure.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5159

Sample carousel rotation error from (x) to (y).
x = Start position
y = Destination

hardware failure.
Error code: 5160

Sample carousel failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5161

Reagent 1 outer carousel rotation error from (x) to (y).
x = Start position
y = Destination

hardware failure.
Error code: 5162

Reagent 1 outer carousel failure.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5163

Reagent 1 inner carousel rotation error from (x) to (y).
x = Start position
y = Destination

hardware failure.
Error code: 5164

Reagent 1 inner carousel failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5165

Reagent 2 carousel rotation error from (x) to (y).
x = Start position
y = Destination

hardware failure.
Error code: 5166

Reagent 2 carousel failure.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5167

Cuvette tab not detected at cuvette (x).
x = Cuvette #

Water is present on the slotted edges of the Dry off the slotted edge of the cuvette segment.
cuvette segment.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5168

Cuvette tab not detected.

cuvette segment.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5169

Optics trigger sensor auto adjustment value (x) out of range.
x = Trigger value

cuvette segment.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

hardware failure.
Error code: 5170

Sample carousel timeout during rotation.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5171

Sample carousel homing failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5172

Optics trigger sensor auto adjustment error.

cuvette segment.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

hardware failure.
Error code: 5173

Unable to complete reagent scan.

provide information specifying the operation you
occurred.
Error code: 5174

Duplicate reagent bottle detected in position (x) on carousel (y). The bottle will not be used.

Reagent bar code reader requires calibration. Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure
The reagent carousel is slipping and the same Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
bottle was scanned twice. hardware failure.
Error code: 5175

Duplicate reagent bottle detected in position (x) on carousel (y). The bottle will not be
created.
x = Reagent segment and position

A user printed reagent bar code was created with Remove the duplicate bottle and recreate the
the same lot number and serial number as a reagent bar code with a unique serial number.
reagent already scanned on the system.
Error code: 5176

No carrier detected at reagent carousel position (x).
x = Reagent carousel position number


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5177

Carrier detected in reagent carousel position (x).

Error code: 5178

Reagent carrier detect sensor failed.

Error code: 5179

Duplicate reagent bottle detected in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y).

Bar code reader requires calibration. Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure.
Error code: 5180

Unable to load reagent carrier from section (x) due to a previous mechanism failure.

A mechanism failure prevented loading of the Restart the RSH.
reagent carrier.
Error code: 5181

Unable to unload reagent carrier from reagent carousel position (x) due to a previous
mechanism failure.
x = Position number on the reagent carousel

A mechanism failure prevented unloading of the Restart the RSH.
reagent carrier.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5182

Carrier not detected in reagent carousel position (x).
x = Position number on the reagent carousel

Carrier detect sensor
Error code: 5183

Reagent 2 outer carousel failure.

Hardware failure Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.
Error code: 5184

Reagent 2 inner carousel failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5185

Reagent 2 outer carousel rotation error from (x) to (y).
x = Start position
y = Destination

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5186

Reagent 2 inner carousel rotation error from (x) to (y).
x = Start position
y = Destination

hardware failure.
Error code: 5187

Reagent 2 outer carousel homing failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5188

Reagent 2 inner carousel homing failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5189

Reagent 2 outer carousel timeout during rotation.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5190

Reagent 2 inner carousel timeout during rotation.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5200

RV detected below drop point when none was expected.

An RV is jammed at the load point in the RV 1. Remove the RV transport shield.
transport.
2. Remove RV from the RV loader drop point on the
RV transport.
3. Replace the RV transport shield.

handler, page 5-13.
CMIA optics board in slot 12 in the upper card hardware failure.
RV loader drop point sensor is dirty or dusty
RV loader drop point sensor board

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5201

RVs have not been picked up for an extended period of time.

RVs (reaction vessels) are blocking the access 1. Open the RV access door and stir the RVs in the
path to the RV loader wheel. hopper by hand.
2. Wait until all tests in process are complete if the

RVs are still not picked up, and then Pause the
processing module, page 5-14.
3. Remove all RVs from the hopper, when the

4. Inspect the path to the RV loader wheel and

remove any RVs.
5. Place RVs back into the Hopper.

RV loader wheel missing fingers hardware failure.
CMIA optics board in slot 12 in the upper card
Error code: 5202

Drop point sensor on RV Loader failed.

RV loader drop point sensor is dirty or dusty
RV transport drop point sensor board
Error code: 5203

RV Loader Transport assembly depleted of RVs.

There are no RVs (reaction vessels) in the Add reaction vessels to the RV loader hopper.
hopper.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The hopper baffle is not attached to the RV Secure the baffle on the hopper to the RV loader.
loader.
RV loader hardware failure.
RV loader wheel is missing fingers
RV HOP LVL SNSR W104 cable underneath
the hopper has a poor connection
Error code: 5204

RV load verification sensor failure detected.

An RV (reaction vessel) is jammed at the load 1. Remove RV transport shield.
point in the RV transport.
2. Remove all RVs from the RV transport.
3. Replace the RV transport shield.

handler, page 5-13.
RV transport drop point sensor board hardware failure.
CMIA optics board in slot 12 in the upper card

Error code: 5205

RV detected in Process Path when attempting to load a new RV.

Hardware failure: 1. If error is infrequent, it is probably due to an
RV sensor occasional failure to move a clean RV into the
processing path. No corrective action is required.
2. If error is frequent, it is probably due to an

intermittent sensor problem. Contact your Area
Customer Support to resolve any hardware
failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5207

No RV detected at drop point.

RV fell off the orienter wheel before reaching the If this occurs infrequently (three times a day or less)
chute. no corrective action is required.
RV sensor cable has a poor connection
RV sensor
Error code: 5208

Unable to process test, RVs are not available.

RVs (reaction vessels) blocking the access path 1. Open the RV access door and stir the RVs in the
to the RV loader wheel. hopper by hand.
2. Wait until all tests in process are complete if the

RVs are still not picked up, and then Pause the
processing module, page 5-14.
3. Remove all RVs from the hopper, when the

4. Inspect the path to the RV loader wheel and

remove any RVs.
5. Place RVs back into the Hopper.

RV pickers are broken off the RV loader wheel. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.
Error code: 5209

No RV detected in process path after RV load attempt.

RV loader chute is not in position to load RVs. Reseat the RV loader chute into the wash zone
manifold.
RV present sensor hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5210

RV detected in process path when no RV was expected.

RV present sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 5211

An RV could not be loaded in the allotted time.

RV pickup assembly hardware failure.
RV picker sensor
Error code: 5251

Wash Buffer Transfer sensor failed, transfer canceled.

Air sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 5252

Wash buffer level sensor disconnected.

Wash buffer level sensor cable has a poor Reconnect the buffer level sensor.
connection.
Wash buffer level sensor failed. Perform one of the following replacement
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Replace the buffer level sensor (i 2000/i
2000SR), page 9-269
Buffer level sensor cable hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5300

(x) vacuum failure during aspiration.
x = Wash Zone name

Tubing/sensor at probe on one of the wash zones Reseat the wash zone tubing onto each probe one
has a poor connection. at a time.
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 9-71

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-248
Tubing/sensor for one of the wash zones was Perform one of the following replacement
obstructed or failed. procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
and sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-255
Wash zone probe is dirty. Clean the exterior of the probes on the wash zone
indicated in the error message.
Vacuum filter hardware failure.
Vacuum valve
Vacuum vessel drain valve
Vacuum pump
Error code: 5301

Vacuum system failure.

Tubing to vacuum vessel is obstructed hardware failure.
Vacuum tubing
Vacuum vessel drain vessel
Vacuum valve
Vacuum pump
Vacuum filter

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5302

Vacuum initialization failed, vacuum sensor.

Vacuum vessel hardware failure.
Vacuum vessel drain valve

Vacuum valve
Vacuum sensor has a poor connection
Error code: 5303

Vacuum system failure, vacuum too low.

Vacuum low pressure sensor hardware failure.
Vacuum pump
Heater cooler board
Error code: 5304

Vacuum system failure, liquid too high.

External waste tubing is crimped. Reposition the external waste tubing so there are
no crimps.
Liquid waste quick disconnect is not connected. Connect the liquid waste quick disconnect.
Waste pump hardware failure.
Heater cooler board
Error code: 5305

Liquid too high in vacuum accumulator.
NOTE: Processing module will go to paused if

running tests.
Liquid waste is full. Empty liquid waste container.
Liquid waste tubing is not connected at the quick Reconnect the liquid waste container tubing at the
disconnect. quick disconnect.
Liquid waste tubing is crimped or obstructed. Remove any obstructions.
External waste tubing is obstructed. Remove any obstructions.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5306

Run request denied, liquid too high in vacuum accumulator. Wait (x) minute(s) and try
again.

Attempted to run a test when there is still too much Wait the designated amount of time before trying to
liquid in the vacuum accumulator. initiate a run.
Error code: 5307

Liquid waste high pressure condition detected.

Liquid waste is full. Empty liquid waste container.
Liquid waste tubing is not connected at the quick Reconnect the liquid waste container tubing at the
disconnect. quick disconnect.
Liquid waste tubing is crimped or obstructed. Remove any obstructions.
External waste tubing is obstructed. Remove any obstructions.
Error code: 5350

POST failed, Indexer board (x).
x = Board number 0 = slot 11, 1 = slot 9, 2 = slot 7, 3 = slot 5

Communication failure between the processing Cycle power to the processing module and/or
module and the SCC. sample handler, page 5-12.
Indexer board in the indicated position in the hardware failure.
upper card cage has a poor connection or
failed
Error code: 5351

DC Drive I/O board not present.

DC Driver I/O board in the card cage has a hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5352

POST passed, DC Driver I/O board.

Power on self tests (POST) passed on the DC Status message. No corrective action is required.
Driver I/O board.
Error code: 5353

POST failed, DC Driver I/O board.

DC Driver I/O board in the card cage has a hardware failure.
Error code: 5354

Controller board failed.

Module controller board in the upper card cage hardware failure.
Sample handler controller board in slot 3 in the
failed (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Error code: 5355

Controller board register reset failure.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5356

System Stopped, I/O communication error.

longer exists.
Error code: 5357

Digital I/O interrupt failure.

Generic 6000 or 8000 error code. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 6000

codes.

error code.
Error code: 5358

POST passed, Controller board version (x).
x = Version number

Power on self tests (POST) passed on the controller Status message. No corrective action is required.
board.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5359

POST failed, Controller board.

Error code: 5360

Controller board checksum failed.

Error code: 5361

POST passed, Motor Indexer board (x) version (y).
x = Board number
y = Firmware revision

Power on self tests (POST) passed on the Motor Status message. No corrective action is required.
indexer board.
Error code: 5362

False interrupt generated on bit (x).
x = Digital I/O bit number

A false signal is sent to a sensor, the sensor is read This message is used to aid in troubleshooting
and determined to be in the correct state. The electronic noise on the system. No corrective action
message is ignored. is required.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5363

DC Driver I/O board overcurrent failure.

Error code: 5364

POST passed, Sensor Interface Board.

Power on self tests (POST) passed on the Sensor Status message. No corrective action is required.
Interface Board.
Error code: 5365

POST failed, Sensor Interface Board.

Communication failure with Sensor Interface Cycle power to the processing module and/or
Board. sample handler, page 5-12.
Sensor Interface Board hardware failure.
Error code: 5366

Sensor Interface Board not present.

Communication failure with Sensor Interface Cycle power to the processing module and/or
Board. sample handler, page 5-12.
Sensor Interface Board hardware failure.
Error code: 5370

DAQ failure, invalid interrupt.

Communication failure with DAQ board. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5371

Invalid command received by the AC/DC controller board from the CPU board.

Communication failure with CPU board. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.
Error code: 5372

Timeout: AC/DC board busy.

Communication failure with AC/DC board. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.
Error code: 5373

AC/DC controller board failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5374

Communication error between SMC and CPU board.

Communication failure between SMC and CPU Cycle power to the processing module and/or
board. sample handler, page 5-12.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5375

Disk On Chip failure.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5376

System memory check error for main CPU.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5377

DAQ backup memory error.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5378

Communication error between DAQ board and CPU board.

Communication failure between DAQ board and Cycle power to the processing module and/or
CPU board. sample handler, page 5-12.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5379

Communication error between SMC board and CPU board.

Communication failure between SMC board and Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.
Error code: 5380

Communication error between AC/DC board and CPU board.

Communication failure between AC/DC board Cycle power to the processing module and/or
and CPU board. sample handler, page 5-12.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5381

Communication error between PM board and CPU board.

Communication failure between PM board and Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.
Error code: 5382

Initialization error for AC/DC board.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5383

Initialization error for SMC board.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5384

c System CPU floppy disk error.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5385

Initialization error for DAQ board.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5386

Step loss detected for (x).

For pipettors:
of the pipettor.
Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36 or 1122 R2 Pipettor
hardware failure.
For other components:
of the component.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5387

Acknowledge command not received from RSH distribution board.

RSH distribution board hardware failure.
Error code: 5388

Invalid checksum received from RSH distribution board.

Error code: 5389

Termination character not received from RSH distribution board.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5390

Invalid command sent to RSH distribution board.

Error code: 5391

RSH distribution board command timeout.

Error code: 5392

Communication error between SM AC/DC board and CPU board.

Communication failure between the SM AC/DC Cycle power to the processing module and/or
board and CPU board. sample handler, page 5-12.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5393

Initialization error for SM AC/DC board.

Communication failure with the SM AC/DC board. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5400

Load or Unload Transfer assembly or multi-module Load Queue Gate failed to transfer
Sample Carrier.

A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions
of the load or unload queue (load queue gate for found in the load queue, unload queue or load
multi-module systems). queue gate (multi-module only).
Load transfer sensor board failure hardware failure.
Unload transfer sensor board failure

Unload transfer motor failure
Error code: 5402

Unable to move carrier into Unload Queue.

A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions
of the load or unload queue (load queue gate for found in the load queue, unload queue or load
multi-module systems). queue gate (multi-module only).
Unload queue transfer assembly hardware failure.
Micro switch
Error code: 5403

Outer Load Queue or Outer Unload Queue not available.

Hardware failure: 1. If the outer load queue is not working, continue
Outer lane of the load queue or the unload processing samples by placing sample carriers
queue on the inner load queue.
2. If the outer unload queue is not working, remove

sample carriers from the inner unload queue
more frequently to avoid filling the queue with
sample carriers.
3. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve

any hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5404

Solenoid (x) failed.
x = Sample Handler solenoid name or Processing Module solenoid number (32 = RV Load
Diverter Shutter, 36 = RV Unload Diverter, 42 = RV Load Diverter, 34 = STAT RV Diverter)

Selected start up for the i 2000 SSH when the Wait for the processing module status to change to
processing module status has not completed the Stopped before initiating a start up on the i 2000
transition from Offline to Stopped. SSH.
Specified solenoid on sample handler or hardware failure.
processing module
poor connection or failed.
Error code: 5405

Sample Handler (x) failed.
x = Mechanism name

Hardware failure: 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 5000
Sample handler category error codes that occurred at the same


error code.
Error code: 5406

Carrier jammed on Unload Transfer assembly.

A physical interference is blocking the movement 1. Remove carrier from the processing queue at the
of the carrier to the unload queue. unload transfer.
2. Look for and remove any physical obstructions

on the processing queue.
Unload queue sensor failure hardware failure.
Processing module skin alignment

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5407

Sensor (x) blocked by sample carrier.
x = Sensor name

Sample carrier is blocking the sensor. 1. Remove sample carrier from the sample handler
area where the indicated sensor is located.

handler, page 5-13.
Sensor connector cable not connected hardware failure.
Sensor failure
Error code: 5408

Carrier transport not aligned with tray section.

Carrier transport not aligned. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1119
Section align sensor hardware failure.
Carrier transport drive belt slipped

Carrier transport motor
Error code: 5409

Step loss detected on (x) actual (expected), (y).
x = Stepper motor name
y = Actual and expected interrupt counts

For carrier transport motors:
Carrier transport not aligned. Perform one of the following as-needed
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
1119 Transport Calibration, page 9-77
Carrier transport drive belt slipped hardware failure.
Carrier transport X, Z, or Theta motor

Carrier transport pulley assembly
For carrier positioner motors:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Carrier positioner not aligned. 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure
1119 Transport Calibration, page 9-77.
2. After performing 1119 Transport Calibration, you

must also perform the appropriate procedure for
a c System processing module or i 2000SR
processing module:
c System - Perform as-needed maintenance
procedure 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration,
page 9-35.
i 2000SR - Perform as-needed maintenance
procedures1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration,
page 9-65, and 1117 STAT Pipettor
Calibration (i 2000SR processing module),
page 9-68.
Carrier positioner obstruction (c System/i hardware failure.
2000SR)
Carrier positioner align sensor (c System/i
2000SR)
Carrier positioner motor (c System/i 2000SR)
Error code: 5410

Carrier pick attempt failed at positioner pocket (x) module (y).
x = Carrier positioner pocket
y = Processing module number

Error code: 5411

Theta transport alignment error.

Theta transport not aligned. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1119
Carrier transport theta motor hardware failure.
Carrier transport theta home sensor

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5412

No carrier detected in bay (x) section (y).
x = Bay number
y = Section number

Error code: 5413

Transport Z not aligned.

Carrier transport Z home sensor hardware failure.
Carrier transport Z motor
Error code: 5414

Carrier removed from carrier transport arm.

Carrier came off the carrier transport arm due to 1. Remove the carrier from the RSH.
an obstacle in the path.
2. Clear any obstacles.
Error code: 5415

No carrier in carrier transport arm.

Carrier came off the carrier transport arm due to 1. Remove the carrier from the RSH.
an obstacle in the path.
2. Clear any obstacles.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5416

No carrier detected in positioner pocket (x) module (y).
x = Pocket on carrier positioner

Carrier positioner carrier detect sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 5417

(x) sensor failure.
x = sensor

An RSH sensor has failed hardware failure.
Error code: 5418

Interrupt count discrepancy on (x), actual (expected), (y).
y = Actual and expected interrupt counts

Movement of the carrier positioner did not return the Status message. No corrective action is required.
expected interrupt count.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5419

Carrier transport not aligned with carrier positioner.

Carrier transport not aligned. 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure
1119 Transport Calibration, page 9-77.
2. After performing 1119 Transport Calibration, you

must also perform the appropriate procedure for
a c System processing module or i 2000SR
processing module:
c System - Perform as-needed maintenance
procedure 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration,
page 9-35.
i 2000SR - Perform as-needed maintenance
procedures1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration,
page 9-65, and 1117 STAT Pipettor
Calibration (i 2000SR processing module),
page 9-68.
Carrier positioner align sensor failure hardware failure.
Carrier positioner motor failure
Error code: 5420

Carrier pick required multiple attempts at bay (x) section (y).
x = Bay number
y = Section number

position.
Error code: 5421

Carrier pick required multiple attempts at positioner pocket (x) module (y).
x = Carrier positioner pocket


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5422

Solenoid (x) failed to extend.
x = Solenoid name

Specified solenoid or verification sensor on hardware failure.
sample handler or processing module
DC driver I/O board
Error code: 5423

Solenoid (x) failed to retract.
x = Solenoid name

DC driver I/O board
Error code: 5424

Solenoid (x) failed to remain in the last commanded position.

DC driver I/O board
Error code: 5425

Unknown carrier type detected in section (x), remove carrier.

Carrier is inserted too slowly into the section. Select OK to the error message. No further
corrective action is required.
Carrier is not fully inserted in the section. Reposition the carrier in the section or use a
different section.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5426

Carrier pick attempt failed at aspiration area. Remove sample carrier when RSH and
processing Module are Stopped.

Carrier transport is not aligned. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.
Error code: 5427

No carrier detected at aspiration area.

Error code: 5428

No carrier detected in section (x).

Error code: 5429

Carrier pick required multiple attempts at section (x).

Carrier is inserted backwards in the section. Reposition the carrier in the section.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5430

Carrier pick required multiple attempts at aspiration area.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5431

Carrier pick required multiple attempts at reagent carousel position (x).

Reagent carrier is not seated correctly in the Remove the reagent carrier and perform a Startup
reagent carousel. on the RSH.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5435

Sample carrier in aspiration area, remove carrier when modules are in the Stopped status.

A sample carrier is present in the aspiration area. A Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport
user selected stop while the RSH was running or a and aspiration area.
hardware failure occurred.
Error code: 5436

Unable to verify carrier type in section (x), remove carrier.

A carrier is not seated in the section. Remove and reseat the carrier.
Load - Unload board sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 5501

Sample Handler Stopped, hardware failure.

Sample handler stopped because of a previous 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 5000
hardware failure. category error codes that occurred at the same


error code.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5502

(x) blown.
x = Fuse name

Fuse hardware failure.
Error code: 5503

Step loss detected on (x), actual (expected), y.
y = Actual and (expected) steps

Air is in tubing. 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure
2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 , for the affected
dispense pump (wash buffer, pre-trigger, or
trigger).

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 9-70
for the affected dispense pump.
Dispense pump hardware failure.
Tubing crimped or clogged
Error code: 5504

Invalid position for (x).

Communication failure with SMC, CPU, or DAQ Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5505

Keypad communication failure.

Communication failure with keypad or DAQ Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.
Error code: 5506

Water bath level low.

System power was off. Perform daily maintenance procedure 6070 Daily
Maintenance, page 9-22 or as-needed
page 9-38.

Level sensor is dirty or defective
Error code: 5507

Water bath drain time exceeded.

Water bath drain tubing is crimped. Uncrimp the drain tubing.
External drain is obstructed. Clear the obstruction from the external drain.
Level sensor is dirty or defective hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5508

Water bath fill time exceeded.


crimped or blocked.

supply tubing.
Supply water tubing is disconnected

Level sensor is dirty or defective
Error code: 5512

Unexpected sensor status for DI water tank.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5513

DI water tank overflow detected.

Incoming DI water pressure is too high. Decrease the incoming DI water pressure to within
Maintenance is being performed on the DI water Do not operate the system while the DI water
system. system is undergoing cleaning or maintenance.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5514

Degasser pressure high.

Incoming DI water has a high gas content. Contact your Area Customer Support.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5515

Unexpected sensor status after (x) movement.

For pipettors:
of the pipettor.
Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36 or 1122 R2 Pipettor
hardware failure.
For other components:
of the component.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5516

(x) did not stop as expected.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5517

Backplane +12V fuse blown.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5518

Backplane -12V fuse blown.

Error code: 5519


Error code: 5520


Error code: 5600

ICT aspiration pump timeout while moving to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5601

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving ICT aspiration pump
to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5602

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving ICT aspiration pump to
upper limit.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5603

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving ICT aspiration pump to
upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5604

ICT aspiration pump timeout while moving to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5605

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving ICT aspiration pump
to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5606

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while moving ICT aspiration pump to lower
limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5607

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving ICT aspiration pump to
lower limit.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5608

ICT aspiration pump timeout while homing.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5609

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while homing ICT aspiration pump.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5610

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while homing ICT aspiration pump.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5611

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while homing ICT aspiration pump.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5612

ICT reference solution pump timeout during movement.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5613

Unexpected sensor status (not activated) while moving ICT reference solution pump.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5614

ICT unit timeout during vertical movement.

of the ICT unit.
ICT probe is out of alignment hardware failure.
Error code: 5615

ICT unit vertical homing failure.

of the ICT unit.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5616

ICT unit timeout during horizontal movement.

the ICT unit.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5617

ICT unit horizontal homing failure.

the ICT unit.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5618

ICT measurement failure for (x).
x = Analyte

hardware failure.
Error code: 5619

ICT offset adjustment error for (x).
x = Analyte(s)

pump.
ICT check valves are not connected correctly. Tighten the check valve connections to the 1 mL
syringes in the ICT reference solution pump and
1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration or ICT Reseat the 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration
reference solution pumps are not seated pump and the ICT reference solution pump.
correctly.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System), page 5-33.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5620

Unexpected ICT unit vertical home status at ICT reference solution cup.

of the ICT unit.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5621

Unexpected ICT unit horizontal home status at ICT reference solution cup.

of the ICT unit.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5622

Unable to process test, ICT reference solution cup not filling.

The ICT reference solution bottle is empty, but 1. Replace the ICT reference solution bottle. See
the weight platform failed to detect it. Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c
System), page 5-33.

the weight platform failure.
pump.
ICT reference solution tubing is crimped or 1. Inspect the tubing.
damaged.
2. Contact your Area Customer Support if any
damage is observed.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

ICT reference solution pump.
1 mL syringes in the ICT reference solution pump Reseat the 1 mL syringes.
are not seated correctly.
1 mL syringes in the ICT reference solution pump Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 8000), page 9-126 or
are leaking. Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 16000), page 9-204.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5623

Unable to process test, ICT reference solution not aspirated.

A single flush did not remove all air from the ICT Flush the ICT reference solution tubing by
reference solution tubing after you replaced the performing as-needed maintenance procedure
ICT reference bottle. 2131 Flush ICT Cup, page 9-38.
ICT module 0-rings are missing or not seated Replace or reseat the o-rings. See Replace the ICT
ICT probe is damaged. Replace the ICT probe. See Replace the ICT
module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace
ICT reference solution tubing is crimped or 1. Inspect the tubing.
damaged.
2. Contact your Area Customer Support if any
damage is observed.
ICT reference solution pump.
1 mL syringes in the ICT reference solution pump Reseat the 1 mL syringes.
are not seated correctly.
1 mL syringes in the ICT reference solution pump Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 8000), page 9-126 or
are leaking. Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 16000), page 9-204.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5650

Cuvette washer timeout while moving to upper limit.

of the cuvette washer.
Black knob holding cuvette washer is loose. Tighten the black knob.
Dry tip on cuvette washer is out of alignment. Align the cuvette dry tip. See, Replace the cuvette
dry tip (c 8000), page 9-111 or Replace the cuvette
dry tips (c 16000), page 9-189.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5651

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK not activated) while moving Cuvette
washer to upper limit.

dry tips (c 16000), page 9-189.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5652

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving Cuvette washer to upper
limit.

dry tips (c 16000), page 9-189.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5653

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Cuvette washer to upper
limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5654

Unexpected sensor status (only Down OK activated) while moving Cuvette washer to upper
limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5655

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down OK activated) while moving Cuvette washer to
upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5656

Unexpected sensor status (Down and Down OK activated) while moving Cuvette washer to
upper limit.

dry tips (c 16000), page 9-189.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5657

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK activated) while moving Cuvette
washer to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5658

Cuvette washer timeout while moving to lower limit.

dry tips (c 16000), page 9-189.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5659

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK not activated) while moving Cuvette
washer to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5660

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while moving Cuvette washer to lower limit.

dry tips (c 16000), page 9-189.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5661

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving Cuvette washer to lower
limit.

dry tips (c 16000), page 9-189.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5662

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Cuvette washer to lower
limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5663

Unexpected sensor status (Only Down OK activated) while moving Cuvette washer to lower
limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5664

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down OK activated) while moving Cuvette washer to
lower limit.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5665

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK activated) while moving Cuvette
washer to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5666

Unexpected sensor status (Down and Down OK not activated) while moving cuvette washer
to lower limit.

dry tips (c 16000), page 9-189.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5667

Unexpected sensor status (Down activated and Down OK not activated) during Cuvette
washer step down movement.

dry tips (c 16000), page 9-189.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5700

Mixer timeout while moving to upper limit.

A physical interference is blocking the movement 1. Look for and remove any physical obstructions.
of the mixer unit.
2. Replace any bent mixers. See Replace the mixer
(c 8000), page 9-114 or Replace the mixer (c
16000), page 9-192.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5701

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK not activated) while moving Mixer to
upper limit.

of the mixer unit.
16000), page 9-192.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5702

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving Mixer to upper limit.

of the mixer unit.
16000), page 9-192.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5703

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Mixer to upper limit.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5704

Unexpected sensor status (only Down OK activated) while moving Mixer to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5705

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down OK activated) while moving Mixer to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5706

Unexpected sensor status (Down and Down OK activated) while moving Mixer to upper
limit.

of the mixer unit.
16000), page 9-192.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5707

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK activated) while moving Mixer to
upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5708

Busy status: AC/DC board.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5709

Mixer timeout while moving to lower limit.

Bent mixer blade. Replace the mixer. See Replace the mixer (c 8000),
page 9-114 or Replace the mixer (c 16000),
page 9-192.
of the mixer unit.
16000), page 9-192.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5710

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK not activated) while moving Mixer to
lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5711

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while moving Mixer to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5712

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving Mixer to lower limit.

page 9-192.
of the mixer unit.
16000), page 9-192.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5713

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Mixer to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5714

Unexpected sensor status (only Down OK activated) while moving Mixer to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5715

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down OK activated) while moving Mixer to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5716

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK activated) while moving Mixer to
lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5717

Vibration error, (x).
x = Mixer name

hardware failure.
Error code: 5718

Vibration error, (x).
x = Mixer name

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5719

x = Mixer name

page 9-192.
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of 1. Look for and remove any physical obstructions.
the mixer unit.
16000), page 9-192.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5720

(x) homing failure.
x = Mixer name

page 9-192.
of the mixer unit.
16000), page 9-192.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5721

x = Mixer name

page 9-192.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

A physical interference is blocking the rotation of 1. Look for and remove any physical obstructions.
the mixer unit.
16000), page 9-192.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5722

(x) homing failure.
x = Mixer name

page 9-192.
of the mixer unit.
16000), page 9-192.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5900

Step loss detected on (x).
x = Motor name

For RV loader transport motor:
An RV is jammed at the load point in the RV Clear the RV jam at the load point on the RV loader
transport. transport. For the required steps, see observed
problem RV loader jams (i System), page 10-562.
For process path motor:
An RV is jammed in the process path. Clear the RV jam in the process path.
For pipettors:
A physical interference is blocking the up/down Look for and remove any physical obstructions
movement of the pipettor. around the specified pipettor, and if no obstruction
is found, then perform one of the following pipettors
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
1100 Pipettor Test, page 10-670

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

For i 2000/i 2000SR:
An empty sample tube is loaded. Remove the empty sample tube.
For wash zones:
Probes are not inserted into the manifold. If weekly maintenance was recently done, press the
wash zone motor assembly down so the probes are
inserted into the manifold.
For all motors:
of the device.
sample handler, page 5-12
Power to the module fluctuated. Contact your Area Customer Support.
Sensor is dirty or dusty hardware failure.
Sensors have a poor connection or failed

Motor and/or cables have a poor connection or
failed
failed
Fuse
Error code: 5901

Motor command timeout on device (x).
x = Device name

For RV loader transport motor:
An RV is jammed at the load point in the RV Clear the RV jam at the load point on the RV loader
transport. transport. For the required steps, see observed
problem RV loader jams (i System), page 10-562.
For process path motor:
An RV is jammed in the process path. Clear the RV jam in the process path.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Empty reagent bottle. Replace the reagent.
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
(i 2000/i 2000SR)
For all motors:
of the device.
sample handler, page 5-12
Power to the module fluctuated. Contact your Area Customer Support.
Sensor is dirty or dusty hardware failure.
Sensors have a poor connection or failed
Motor and/or cables have a poor connection or
failed
failed
Fuse

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5902

Stepper motor (x) not present.
x = Motor number

Hardware failure: 1. Verify the jumper placement is correct, if the
Communication failure with indexer board indexer board was recently replaced.

any hardware failure, if error continues.
Error code: 5903

Motor command error, device (x) failed to respond.
x = Motor number or indexer number

Motor or indexer board in the specified hardware failure.
position has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 5904

(x) homing failure.
x = Motor name

Homing sensor cable in the indicated position hardware failure.
failed

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5905

Motor (x) is not initialized.
x = Motor name

longer exists.
The specified motor stopped due to a module 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any error
stop. codes that occurred at the same time as this
message.


error code.
Error code: 5906

Automatic Prime failed, affected mechanism disabled.

Prime failed for one of the following: 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 5000
Wash zone category error codes that occurred at the same
Pre-Trigger
Trigger dispense pumps 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if

error code.
Error code: 5907

Automatic Flush failed.

A flush operation failed due to a hardware failure or 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0229,
inventory failure. 0304, or 2104 error codes.

error code.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 5908

Command on motor (x) detected fluid or over travel.
x = Motor number

hardware failure.
Error code: 5909

Stepper motor encoder (x) not present.
x = Stepper Motor Encoder number

Communication failure with indexer board hardware failure.
Error code: 5910

Invalid absolute encoder (x) position value.
x = Encoder name

Absolute encoder or cabling hardware failure.
Optics error codes (6000-6999)

The Optics error code category includes error codes between
6000-6999.
representative at:


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Changing the lamp
Error code: 6000

Zero read detected.

Optics assembly hardware failure.
CMIA optics board
Error code: 6050

Optics check failed, Run initialization canceled.

Optics linearity and/or normalization values are Update the configures module windows with the
not entered correctly on the Configure modules correct values from the optics assembly.
window.
CMIA reader hardware failure.
Error code: 6051

CMIA Optics board not responding.

Error code: 6100

CMIA Optics board failed.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 6101

POST passed, CMIA Optics board.

Power on self tests (POST) passed on the CMIA Status message. No corrective action is required.
optics board.
Error code: 6102

Register read back failure, CMIA Optics board.

CMIA Optics board in slot 12 in the upper card hardware failure.
Error code: 6103

Optics timer interrupt failure, Controller board.

Error code: 6200

POST failed, CMIA Optics board.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 6300

Register reset failure, CMIA Optics board.

Error code: 6500

DAQ board failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 6501

Optics system error, lamp failure.

Water bath level is low. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2134
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 6502

Optics system error, lamp intensity too high.

hardware failure.
Error code: 6503

Optics system error, lamp intensity too low.

hardware failure.
Error code: 6504

Optics system error, transmittance above maximum range.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 6505

Photometer conversion error.

hardware failure.
Error code: 6506

Cuvette integrity check failed on cuvette (x).
x = Cuvette #

Cuvette is dirty. Perform 6310 Clean cuvettes - manually,
page 9-42.
Cuvette is damaged. Replace a cuvette (c 8000), page 9-104, Replace a
cuvette (c 16000), page 9-183, Replace a cuvette
segment (c 8000), page 9-108 or Replace a cuvette
segment (c 16000), page 9-186.
Water or wash solutions are not aspirated or Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018
dispensed correctly into the reaction cuvettes. Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles, page 9-27.
pressure of the incoming water. specifications. See Electrical specifications and
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 6510

Optics system warning, fluctuation detected, monochromatic check.

screws in terminal block
hardware failure.
Error code: 6511

Optics system failure, fluctuation above maximum range, monochromatic check.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 6512

Optics system warning, fluctuation detected, bichromatic check.

Lamp in use for > 3 months. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003

leaks.
R2 probe is damaged. Replace reagent probes (c 8000), page 9-88 or

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Reaction carousel is not aligned with the light hardware failure.
path
Optics assembly incorrectly grounded to
chassis
DC lamp power supply
Error code: 6513

Optics system failure, fluctuation above maximum range, bichromatic check.

Lamp in use for > 3 months. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003

leaks.
R2 probe is damaged. Replace reagent probes (c 8000), page 9-88 or

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Reaction carousel is not aligned with the light hardware failure.
path
Optics assembly incorrectly grounded to
chassis
DC lamp power supply
Error code: 6516

Optics system failure, ADC above maximum range at lamp check.

hardware failure.
Temperature error codes (7000-7999)

The temperature error code category includes error codes between
7000-7999.
representative at:


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Changing the lamp
Error code: 7000

Temperature stability failed, channel (x).
x = Channel number

Specified heater is not able to maintain temperature
within specifications.
x = 28 (For Ambient):
Room temperature is out of specification. Modify room temperature to be within specification.
For Pre-Trigger or Trigger
x = 17 (Pre-Trigger - i 2000/i 2000SR) Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
x = 16 (Trigger - i 2000/i 2000SR) hardware failure.
Hardware failure:
Heater-specific tubing
Heater and/or heater thermistor specific cable
has a poor connection
For Process path:
x = 4 (zone 1) Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
x = 5 (zone 2) hardware failure.
x = 8 (zone 3 )
x = 9 (zone 4)
x = 12 (zone 5)
x = 13 (zone 6)
Hardware failure:
Process path thermistor for the specific heater
zone has a poor connection or failed
Process path heater
x = 7 (For Reagent cooler):

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Refrigerator temperature cable has a poor hardware failure.
connection [i 2000/i 2000SR]
Refrigerator temperature sensor
[i 2000/i 2000SR]
For Wash Zone:
x = 21 (Wash Zone 1 - i 2000/i 2000SR) Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
x = 24 (Wash Zone 2 - i 2000/i 2000SR) hardware failure.
Hardware failure:
Thermistor cable for the specific wash zone
buffer heater has a poor connection
Wash zone buffer heater
For Wash Zone temperature sensor:
Wash Zone 1 temperature sensor (i 2000/i Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
2000SR): hardware failure.
x = 6 (probe 1)
x = 10 (probe 2)
x = 14 (probe 3)
Wash Zone 2 temperature sensor (i 2000/i
2000SR):
x = 18 (probe 1)
x = 22 (probe 2)
x = 26 (probe 3)
Hardware failure:
Wash zone-specific temperature sensor failure
Wash zone tubing sensor
For all channels:
Temperature controller board in the card cage hardware failure.
Error code: 7001

Temperature failed channel (x).
x = Channel number


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

For Pre-Trigger or Trigger:
Hardware failure:
For Process path:
x = 8 (zone 3)
x = 9 (zone 4)
x = 12 (zone 5)
x = 13 (zone 6)
Hardware failure:
Process path heater
[i 2000/i 2000SR]
For Wash Zone:
Hardware failure:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

x = 6 (probe 1)
x = 10 (probe 2 )
x = 14 (probe 3)
2000SR):
x = 18 (probe 1)
x = 22 (probe 2)
x = 26 (probe 3 )
Hardware failure:
For all channels:
Error code: 7002

Channel (x) below minimum temperature.
x = Channel number

Hardware failure:
For Process path:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

x = 8 (zone 3)
x = 9 (zone 4)
x = 12 (zone 5)
x = 13 (zone 6)
Hardware failure:
Process path heater
[i 2000/i 2000SR]
For Wash Zone:
Hardware failure:
x = 6 (probe 1)
x = 10 (probe 2)
x = 14 (probe 3)
2000SR):
x = 18 (probe 1)
x = 22 (probe 2)
x = 26 (probe 3)
Hardware failure:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

For all channels:
Temperature controller board in the upper hardware failure.
card cage has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 7003

Temperature alarm from channel (x), reading (y).
x = Channel number
y = Temperature in thousandths of degrees C

Temporary out of range condition. No corrective action is required. If the out of range
condition continues, error code 7000 occurs.
Error code: 7004

(x) operation canceled, temperature failure.
x = Mechanism name

Hardware failure: 1. Review message logs, page 10-13,for any 7000
Pre-trigger or trigger heater category error codes that occurred at the same
Wash zone heater

error code.
Error code: 7005

Unable to process test, temperature not within range, channel (x).
x = Channel number

Room temperature is out of specification. Modify room temperature to be within
specifications.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Hardware failure:
For Process path:
x = 8 (zone 3)
x = 9 (zone 4)
x = 12 (zone 5)
x = 13 (zone 6)
Hardware failure:
Process path heater
Refrigerator temperature sensor [i 2000/i 2000SR]
For Wash Zone:
Hardware failure:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

x = 6 (probe 1)
x = 10 (probe 2)
x = 14 (probe 3)
2000SR):
x = 18 (probe 1)
x = 22 (probe 2)
x = 26 (probe 3)
Hardware failure:
For all channels:
Error code: 7006

Channel (x) above maximum temperature.
x = Channel number

specifications.
Hardware failure:
For Process path:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

x = 8 (zone 3)
x = 9 (zone 4)
x = 12 (zone 5)
x = 13 (zone 6)
Hardware failure:
Process path heater
[i 2000/i 2000SR]
For Wash Zone:
Hardware failure:
x = 6 (probe 1)
x = 10 (probe 2)
x = 14 (probe 3)
2000SR):
x = 18 (probe 1)
x = 22 (probe 2)
x = 26 (probe 3)
Hardware failure:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

For all channels:
Error code: 7007

Temperature failure channel (x), cannot reach Ready status.
x = Channel number

specifications.
Hardware failure:
For Process path:
x = 8 (zone 3)
x = 9 (zone 4)
x = 12 (zone 5)
x = 13 (zone 6)
Hardware failure:
Process path heater
[i 2000/i 2000SR]
For Wash Zone:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Hardware failure:
x = 6 (probe 1)
x = 10 (probe 2)
x = 14 (probe 3)
2000SR):
x = 18 (probe 1)
x = 22 (probe 2)
x = 26 (probe 3)
Hardware failure:
For all channels:
Error code: 7008

Run request denied, temperature stability failure.

User selected run after a temperature stability 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any error
failure occurred. codes that occurred at the same time as this
message.


error code.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 7100

Acknowledge command not received from Temperature Controller board.

Controller board in the upper card cage has a
Error code: 7102

Invalid response received from Temperature Controller board.

Error code: 7103

Temperature controller mode not correct.

Error code: 7104

Temperature Controller board not responding.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 7106

Invalid Temperature Controller board response.

Error code: 7107

Unable to communicate to Temperature Controller board for channel (x).
x = Channel number

Error code: 7108

Temperature Controller board not initialized.

Power supply
Error code: 7109

Temperature Controller board not communicating.

Error code: 7110

Reagent cooler control error detected.

Reagent cooler hardware failure.
Heater cooler board

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 7200

POST failed, Temperature Controller board.

Error code: 7201

POST passed, Temperature Controller board, version (x).
x = Firmware revision

Power on self tests (POST) passed on the Status message. No corrective action is required.
temperature controller board.
Error code: 7501

Water bath temperature below minimum range.

Water in water bath is not circulating because the Perform daily maintenance procedure 6070 Daily
system was idle for an extended period of time. Maintenance, page 9-22 or as-needed
page 9-38.
System was just powered on. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure
Electrical specifications and requirements,
page 4-19, to verify the temperature returns to
specifications within five minutes.
Water bath is filling after an extended idle time. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure
hardware failure.
Error code: 7502

Water bath temperature above maximum range.

Room temperature is too high. Modify room temperature to be within
specifications.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 7503

Temperature detector failure, water bath temperature exceeded lower detectable limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 7504

Temperature detector failure, water bath temperature exceeded upper detectable limit.

specifications.
hardware failure.
Error code: 7505

Sample carousel temperature below minimum range.

Room temperature is too low. Modify room temperature to be within
specifications.
hardware failure.
Error code: 7506

Sample carousel temperature above maximum range.

Carousel cover is open. Close the carousel cover.
Carousel cover is not installed. Install the carousel cover.
specifications.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 7507

Temperature detector failure, sample carousel temperature exceeded lower detectable limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 7508

Temperature detector failure, sample carousel temperature exceeded upper detectable limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 7509

Reagent 1 supply center temperature below minimum range.

specifications.
hardware failure.
Error code: 7510

Reagent 1 supply center temperature above maximum range.

Numerous reagent cartridges were just loaded 1. Cover the reagent supply center.
into the reagent supply center.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

specifications.
hardware failure.
Error code: 7511

Temperature detector failure, reagent 1 supply center temperature exceeded lower
detectable limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 7512

Temperature detector failure, reagent 1 supply center temperature exceeded upper
detectable limit.

specifications within 5 minutes.
hardware failure.
Error code: 7513

Reagent 2 supply center temperature below minimum range.

specifications.
hardware failure.
Error code: 7514

Reagent 2 supply center temperature above maximum range.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Numerous reagent cartridges were just loaded 1. Cover the reagent supply center.
into the reagent supply center.
specifications.
hardware failure.
Error code: 7515

Temperature detector failure, reagent 2 supply center temperature exceeded lower
detectable limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 7516

Temperature detector failure, reagent 2 supply center temperature exceeded upper
detectable limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 7517

Internal temperature below minimum range.

specifications.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 7518

Internal temperature above maximum range.

specifications.
hardware failure.
Error code: 7519

Temperature detector failure, internal temperature exceeded lower detectable limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 7520

Temperature detector failure, internal temperature exceeded upper detectable limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 7521

Run request denied, water bath temperature is out of range.

Water in water bath is not circulating because the Perform daily maintenance procedure 6070 Daily
system was idle for an extended period of time. Maintenance, page 9-22 or as-needed
page 9-38.
Water bath is filling after an extended idle time. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure
specifications.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Computer hardware error codes (8000-8999)

The computer hardware error code category includes error codes
between 8000-8999.
representative at:

Changing the lamp
Error code: 8000

Power supply AC failed.

User cycled power to the processing module. Restart the Processing module after the module
power is restored.
Power fluctuated. Contact your Area Customer Support.
Please provide information that describes the
failure.
Power supply hardware failure.
Error code: 8001

Power supply over voltage.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8002

Power supply under voltage.

User cycled power to the processing module. Restart the Processing module after the module
power is restored.
Power fluctuated. Contact your Area Customer Support.
Please provide information that describes the
failure.
Error code: 8003

Power supply over temperature.

Error code: 8004

UNICODE data could not be sent to (x).
x = Remote system

Digiboard or External multiport serial adapter hardware failure.
Error code: 8005

Communication error reading data from port (x).
x = Remote system

Digiboard or External multiport serial adapter hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8006

Unable to process tests, Processing Module (x).
x = Description of failure

User cycled power to the processing module. Restart the processing module after the module
power is restored.
Power from the UPS fluctuated. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
provide information specifying the failure
description.
Power Supply hardware failure.
Error code: 8007

Board error (x).
x = Description of failure

Inadequate ventilation underneath instrument. Remove any objects from underneath the
processing module that may be blocking free flow of
air to the card cage.
Card cage filter is dirty. Clean the card cage air filter. (Contact your Area
Customer Support.)
Card cage door is open. Close the card cage door.
Card cage fan hardware failure.
DC Driver I/O board with fault LED lit
Motor driver board
Error code: 8008

Motor driver over temperature.

Inadequate ventilation underneath instrument. Remove any objects from underneath the
Processing module that might be blocking the free
flow of air to the card cage.
Card cage filter is dirty. Clean the card cage air filter. (Contact your Area
Customer Support.)
Card cage fan hardware failure.
DC Driver I/O board with fault LED lit
Motor driver board

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8009

Power board fault condition detected.

Motor driver board hardware failure.
DC driver I/O board

Heater cooler board
Error code: 8010

RSH distribution board CPLD fault condition detected.

Cable from carrier transport board to RSH hardware failure.
distribution board has poor connection or
failed
RSH distribution board
Error code: 8011

RSH load/unload board LED fault condition detected.

LEDs on RSH load/unload board hardware failure.
Error code: 8012

RSH load/unload board sensor fault condition detected.

Sensors on RSH load/unload board hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8050

Unable to open (x) port for (y).
x = Serial port (COM1 - COM10)
y = Remote system

For host:
Cable from LIS to SCC has a poor connection hardware failure.
or failed
Digiboard or External multiport serial adapter
For ARM:
Cable from ARM to SCC has a poor connection hardware failure.
or failed
For LAS:
Cable from LAS to SCC has a poor connection hardware failure.
or failed
Error code: 8053

Failed opening CLI serial port.

Serial port configuration. See Configure serial ports window, page 2-64, for
more information.
LIS cables have a poor connection or failed hardware failure.
Error code: 8054

CLI communication error.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8100

Unable to write (x) file to designated drive.
x = File name

Floppy disk is not in drive. Insert the floppy disk in the floppy drive.
Floppy disk is write protected. Ensure the write protect tab on the floppy disk is in
the correct position.
Floppy disk is not formatted. Format the floppy disk or use a disk that is already
formatted.
Floppy disk is defective. Use a new floppy disk.
Software error If not writing to a floppy disk when this error occurs,
contact your Area Customer Support. Please
Floppy drive hardware failure.
Hard drive
Error code: 8101

Failure in compression of log file.

Floppy disk is not in drive. Insert the floppy disk in the floppy drive.
Floppy disk is not formatted. Format the floppy disk or use a disk that is already
formatted.
Floppy disk is defective or is not blank. Use a new floppy disk.
Error code: 8102

ASCII data could not be sent to (x).
x = Remote system

For host:
or failed
For ARM:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Cable from ARM to SCC has a poor hardware failure.
For LAS:
Cable from LAS to SCC has a poor connection hardware failure.
or failed
Error code: 8103

Field (x) in section (y) truncated for printing.
x = Field name
y = Report section name

The data entered in the data entry box is too long to Print a screen image if a hard copy is required.
print.
Error code: 8104

Print job for (x) canceled by the user.
x = Report name

User cancelled a print job. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 8105

A printer error has occurred.

A printer error occurred. Refer to the printer documentation for assistance.
Error code: 8107

Printer out of paper.

Printer is out of paper. Add paper to the printer.
Printer is offline. Change the printer status to online.
Printer is not connected. Connect the printer cable to the SCC printer port.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8110

Printer status unavailable at this time.

Printer is not available. 1. Verify the printer is plugged in, on, and ready.
2. Verify the cable from the SCC to the printer is

connected.
3. Refer to the printer documentation if printer is

still unavailable.
Error code: 8115

(x) printer not properly installed.
x = Default printer name

Configured printer is not installed properly or does Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
not exist. provide information specifying the operation you
occurred.
Error code: 8150

Invalid Host order, Sample ID (x) already exists.
x = Sample ID

The system received an order from the host and the If this error occurs frequently without obvious
order already exists. The new order from the host is explanation, check the function of the host interface.
ignored by the system.
Error code: 8151

Invalid Host cancel, Sample ID (x) does not exist.
x = Sample ID

The system received a cancellation request from If this error occurs frequently without obvious
the host on a test order and the order does not exist explanation, check the function of the host interface.
in the database. The cancellation request from the
host is ignored by the system.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8152

Orders received for Sample ID (x) did not match the Sample ID sent to the Host.
x = Sample ID

The sample ID returned from the host did not match
the sample ID queried for by the system because:
The host is responding to a previous query, which Increase the host query timeout value. See
has timed out on the system. Configure host interface settings, page 2-6.
The host sent an order not requested by the Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
system. Interface RS-232 Manual for information about
communications.
Error code: 8153

Invalid Host order, no quality control information for Assay (x) number (y).
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

The system received a QC order for an assay from Use the Control configuration screen to configure a
the host but a control is not configured for the assay. control for the requested assay, and then download
The order from the host is ignored by the system. the order from the host. See Configure a new single
analyte control, page 2-176 or Configure a new
multiconstituent control, page 2-179.
Error code: 8154

Invalid Host order for Sample ID (x), specified dilution for Assay number (y) not found.
x = Sample ID
y = Assay number

The system received a test order from the host Order a dilution available for the specified assay.
requesting an undefined dilution. The order from Dilution Name is case sensitive, verify the host
the host is ignored by the system. dilution name is exactly the same as the Dilution
Name in the SCC.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8155

Invalid Host order for Sample ID (x), Assay number (y) not installed.
x = Sample ID
y = Assay number

The system received a test order from the host Install the requested assay. See Install or delete an
requesting an assay that is not installed. assay file, page 2-214.
The assay number is incorrectly defined in the Correct the assay number in the host system.
host.
Error code: 8156

Error detected when parsing record (x) from (y).
x = Record string or field string
y = Remote system

An error was detected when parsing an ASTM
record received. The record may not utilize the
delimiters correctly.
For host:
Incorrectly formatted record or message received Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
from the host. Interface RS-232 Manual.
For ARM:
Error code: 8158

Required data (x) is missing from message received from (y).
x = Component string
y = Remote system

For host:
For ARM:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8159

Incoming frame from (x) is too long. <NAK> has been sent.
x = Remote system

Frame received exceeds ASTM length limit.
For host:
For ARM:
Communication failure. Condition may be temporary, if so, no corrective
action is required. If condition is not temporary,
error code 3901 occurs. Follow the corrective action
for this specific code.
Error code: 8160

Field (x) received from (y) is not repeatable.
x = Field name
y = Remote system

Data field in a record received contains an illegal
repeat delimiter.
For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8161

(x) sent illegal record type (y). The remainder of the message will be ignored.
x = Remote system
y = Record text

Record received is an invalid record type not
defined by the ASTM E1394 Standard.
For host:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

For ARM:
Error code: 8162

(x) sent record (y) which contained an incorrect sequence number.
x = Remote system
y = Record received

Message received contained a record which was
out of sequence.
For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8163

Host sent record (x) for a negative query response.
x = Record received

Record received from the host contains an invalid Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
query response. Interface RS-232 Manual.
Error code: 8165

(x) sent record (y) which contained an improper level transition.
x = Remote system
y = Record received

Message received contained a record which
caused an improper message hierarchy level
transition.
For host:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

For ARM:
Error code: 8166

Invalid ASTM record (x) in test order message.
x = Record name

Test order message received from the host contains Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
an unacceptable ASTM record. Acceptable records Interface RS-232 Manual.
in a test order message: Header, Patient, Test
Order, Comment, and Terminator records.
Error code: 8169

Invalid message sent by (x).
x = Remote system

For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8170

Negative query response for Sample ID (x) received after a host query timeout.
x = Sample ID

Negative query response message contained a SID
which was different than the one contained in the
earlier issued query message.
A query message was never issued to the Host. Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
Interface RS-232 Manual for information about
communications.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8172

Host query time-out exceeded for Sample ID (x).
x = Sample ID

The host did not respond to the query message Increase the host query timeout value. See
within the time period specified in the configuration. Configure host interface settings, page 2-6.
Error code: 8173

Message received from (x) did not end with a terminator record.
x = Remote system

For host:
Host is busy or not responding. 1. Verify the host system is functional.
2. Re-enable host communications. See Configure

host interface settings, page 2-6.
3. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.

from the host. Interface RS-232 Manual for information about the
ASTM protocol.
Hardware failure:
Cable from LIS to SCC has a poor connection Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
or failed hardware failure.
For ARM:
Error code: 8174

Record (x) received from (y) did not terminate in a carriage return.
x = Record string
y = Remote system

For host:
Incorrectly formatted record or message was Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
received from the host. Interface RS-232 Manual.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Cabling was not properly shielded or was too Use shorter or shielded cable.
long.
For ARM:
Error code: 8175

Length of data (x) received from (y) exceeded specified maximum length.
x = Component string
y = Remote system

For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8176

Data field (x) received from (y) must be a numeric value.
x = Data field
y = Remote system

For host:
For ARM:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8177

Data field (x) received from (y) must be an alphanumeric value.
x = Data field
y = Remote system

For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8178

Data field (x) received from (y) must be an alpha value.
x = Data field
y = Remote system

For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8179

Invalid host order for Sample ID (x), Assay number (y) status type does not exist.
x = Sample ID
y = Assay number

The system received a test order from the host for
an assay that is not installed.
The assay is not installed. Install the requested assay. See Install or delete an
The assay number is incorrectly defined in the Correct the assay number in the host system.
host.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8180

Required field (x) was not populated by (y).
x = Field name
y = Remote system

Mandatory ASTM field was blank in the message
received. The remainder of the message is ignored
by the system.
For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8181

Invalid host order, incorrect birth date (y) for Sample ID (x).
x = Sample ID
y = Birth date

The system received an order from the host Correct the birth date in the host system, and then
containing a birth date later than the current date. re-send the order.
Error code: 8182

Unsupported character received from the host in a record. Original: (x), Translated: (y).
x = Input string
y = Output string

Record received from the host containing a Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
character not supported in the ASI Code page. This Interface RS-232 Manual. Acceptable characters
character is translated as the copyright symbol ((c) are defined in the ASI Code page for ARCHITECT
or code 0169). table.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8183

Unsupported character sent to the host in a record. Original: (x), Translated: (y).
x = Input string
y = Output string

Record sent to the host containing a character not Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
supported in the ASI Code page. This character is Interface RS-232 Manual. Acceptable characters
translated as the registered mark ((c) or code are defined in the ASI Code page for ARCHITECT
0174). table.
Error code: 8184

Invalid message type sent by LAS.

The LAS sent out an unknown message type. Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory
Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
your LAS vendor.
Cable from LAS to SCC (COM6, Connector hardware failure.
P4) has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 8185

Invalid <ACK> or <NAK> message length sent by LAS.

The system received an invalid <ACK> or <NAK>
message length by LAS.
LAS sent incorrect message length. Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory
your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8186

Invalid Sample ID length sent by LAS. Sample ID length cannot be zero.

The system received a sample ID from the LAS with Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory
a length of zero. Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
your LAS vendor.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8187

Invalid Sample ID length sent by LAS. Sample ID length cannot be greater than 20
characters.

The system received a sample ID from the LAS with Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory
a length greater than 20 characters. Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8188

Invalid Sample ID sent by the LAS. The Sample ID contains an invalid character.

The system received a sample ID from the LAS Use valid characters only.
containing an invalid character. Valid characters are defined by Abbott Laboratories
< ? ; : ] [ \ } { ' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and
<space>.
Error code: 8189

Invalid message sent by LAS. Message exceeded maximum length.

The system received a message from the LAS that Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory
exceeded the maximum allowable length. Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8190

Invalid SID (x) sent by LAS.
x = Sample ID

The system received an invalid sample ID from the Contact your LAS vendor.
LAS.
Error code: 8191

Invalid message sent by LAS.

System bar code configuration does not match Contact your LAS vendor.
bar code label.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8192

Invalid formatted bar code read: (x) sent by LAS for SID (y).
x = Bar code read data
y = Sample ID

The system received an invalid SID from the LAS Contact your LAS vendor.
bar code reader.
Error code: 8193

Invalid host order, incorrect draw date (x) for Sample ID (y).
x = Sample draw date
y = Sample ID

Host order received containing a draw date later Correct the draw date in the host, then resend the
than the current date. order from the host.
Error code: 8194

Invalid Sample ID sent by the LIS. The Sample ID contains an invalid character.

An invalid character was encoded in a host Use valid characters only.
download or query response. Valid characters are defined by Abbott Laboratories
< ? ; : ] [ \ } { ' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and
<space>.
Error code: 8250

Invalid frame number received from (x). <NAK> has been sent.
x = Remote system

Record received did not contain the frame in
sequence.
For host:
For ARM:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8251

Received <NAK> for outgoing frame from (x).
x = Remote destination name

For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8252

No terminating <CR> in received frame from (x). <NAK> has been sent.
x = Remote system

Frame received did not terminate in a carriage
return.
For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8253

Invalid checksum received in incoming frame from (x). <NAK> has been sent.
x = Remote system

For host:
For ARM:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8254

Restricted character in message text from (x). <NAK> has been sent.
x = Remote system

For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8255

No terminating <LF> in received frame from (x). <NAK> has been sent.
x = Remote system

Frame received did not contain a terminating line
feed.
For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8256

Data field (x) received from (y) must be a printable string.
x = Data field
y = Remote system

For host:
For ARM:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8257

Data field (x) received from (y) must be a valid date.
x = Data field
y = Remote system

For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8258

Record (x) was received in message from (y) prior to a required header record.
x = Record string which was received as the first record of the message
y = Remote system

Message received without the Header record as the
first record of the message.
For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8259

Record received from (x) contained an invalid field (y).
x = Remote system
y = Field name

For host:
For ARM:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8260

(x) sent an unsupported record type (y). The record will be ignored.
x = Remote system
y = Record received

Record received was a valid ASTM format but is not
supported by the system.
For host:
Unsupported record or message received from Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
the host. Interface RS-232 Manual.
For ARM:
Error code: 8261

Negative query received for Sample ID (x), in Carrier/Position (y).
x = Sample ID
y = Carrier or CRSL and Position number

The sample ID has not been entered into the host Enter the sample ID and test order(s) for the sample
computer. ID into the host computer.
There are no ARCHITECT System test orders for Enter the test order(s) for the sample ID into the
the specified sample ID. host computer.
Host computer is not functioning properly. Create a patient order (single order), page 5-118.
SID (sample identification) is truncated. See Sample ID is truncated, page 10-620.
Error code: 8262

Invalid Message ID sent by LAS.

The system received an invalid message ID from Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory
the LAS. Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
your LAS vendor.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8263

Invalid Recovery Type sent by LAS.

The SCC is unable to re-initialize communication 1. Re-initialize communication with the LAS. See
due to LAS message containing Invalid Recovery Verify LAS communications, page 10-714.
Type.
2. Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory
Automation System Interface Manual and/or
contact your LAS vendor, if error continues.
Error code: 8264

Invalid Cyclical Redundancy Check sent by LAS.

The system received an invalid Cyclical Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory
Redundancy Check. Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8265

Invalid message sent by LAS. LAS message length mismatch.

The LAS sent a message to the system that did not Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory
match what the system expected. The message is Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
ignored. your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8266

The <ACK> message sequence number sent by LAS does not match outgoing message
sequence number.

The <ACK> message sequence number sent by the Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory
LAS does not match the outgoing sequence Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
number. The message is ignored. Previous your LAS vendor.
message is resent by the system.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8267

The <NAK> message sequence number sent by LAS does not match outgoing message
sequence number.

The system received a <NAK> sequence number Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory
that did not match the sequence number sent to the Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
LAS. The message is ignored. Previous message is your LAS vendor.
resent by the system.
Error code: 8268

Received <NAK> from LAS for outgoing message.

Not able to interpret message sent from the SCC. Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory
The message is ignored. Previous message is Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
resent by the system. your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8269

Message sequence number sent by LAS is out of order.

The system received a sequence number from the Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory
LAS that does not match the expected sequence Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
number. your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8270

Unexpected <ACK> or <NAK> message sent by LAS.

Unexpected <ACK> or <NAK> message sent by Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory
LAS. The message is ignored. Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8271

Invalid checksum sent by LAS.

The system received an invalid checksum. Contact your LAS vendor.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8272

A message was received from the LAS before the previous message was complete.

A message was received from the LAS that was out Contact your LAS vendor.
of order.
Error code: 8273

The LAS detected an internal error.

The LAS detected an internal error. Contact your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8274

Result for Sample ID (x), Assay Number (y) could not be transmitted to the Host.
x = Sample ID
y = Assay number

Communication failure. Retransmit the result.
Host is not configured for the expected result Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
format. Interface RS-232 Manual.
Error code: 8350

Maximum number of query timeouts exceeded. Host query mode disabled.

Three consecutive timeouts received while
requesting orders from the host. The host port is
disabled after this error.
Host did not respond within the time period Increase host query timeout value. See Configure
configured. host interface settings, page 2-6.
Incorrect baud rate on host port. Reconfigure the host baud rate. See Configure
serial ports window, page 2-64, for more
information.
Cable from LIS to SCC (COM5, Connector P3) hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8351

(x) connection cannot be established because of contention.
x = Remote system

For host:
Both systems request a connection at the same Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
time by sending an <ENQ> and this creates Interface RS-232 Manual.
contention.
For ARM:
Error code: 8353

Maximum retries exceeded for outgoing frame sent to (x).
x = Remote system

Unable to send frame to the remote system,
because the remote system sends a negative
acknowledgment <NAK> for the frame received.
For host:
Checksum is invalid.
Frame is not received in sequence.
For ARM:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8354

(x) connection cannot be established, no response was received.
x = Remote system

For host:


information.
Message response is incorrectly defined for the Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
host. Interface RS-232 Manual for information about the
ASTM protocol.
For ARM:
Error code: 8355

Time out on frame sent to (x).
x = Remote system

System timed out waiting for confirmation that the
remote system received a frame. The connection is
terminated by the system.
For host:


ASTM protocol.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

For ARM:
Error code: 8356

Query for sample ID (x) has been deleted.
x = Sample ID



Host query option was turned off due to a Re-enable the Bidirectional host option in system
previous communication failure or was turned off settings. See Configure host interface settings,
by the user. page 2-6.
information.
ASTM protocol.
Error code: 8357

Unable to transmit results to Host, Host access turned off.

System attempted to transmit approved results but
the host is turned off
Host is not responding or is turned off. Turn on the host interface and re-transmit the data.
Bidirectional host option is turned off. Re-enable the Bidirectional host option in system
settings. See Configure host interface settings,
page 2-6.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8358

Time out on incoming frame from (x).
x = Remote system

System timed out waiting to receive a frame. The
connection is terminated by the system.
For host:


ASTM protocol.
For ARM:
Error code: 8359

Time out exceeded on message sent to LAS.

The LAS did not respond within the designated time
period. The connection is terminated by the system.
LAS response time is too slow. Optimize the LAS response timeout value.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8360

Maximum number of consecutive LAS message timeouts and/or LAS <NAK> messages
exceeded.

The LAS did not respond to the outgoing Re-initialize communication with the LAS. See
message. Verify LAS communications, page 10-714.
Communication failed. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.
The system received an invalid checksum. Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory
your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8361

LAS message communication error.

System is unable to send a message to the LAS.
The LAS did not respond to the outgoing Re-initialize communication with the LAS. See
message. Verify LAS communications, page 10-714.
The SCC is not configured correctly for the LAS Reconfigure the serial port parameter settings. See
settings. Configure serial ports window, page 2-64, for more
information.
LAS response time is too slow. Optimize the LAS response timeout value.
The system received an invalid checksum. Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory
Automation System Interface Manual.
Error code: 8362

Time out on message sent from LAS.

The connection between the SCC and the LAS was
terminated.
LAS not responding. Contact your LAS vendor.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8363

(x) connection cannot be established, remote system is busy.
x = Remote system

System attempted to connect with the remote
system, but the remote system was busy and
responded with a <NAK>.
For host:
Host is busy. Wait for host system to become available.
For ARM:
action is required. If condition is not temporary, a
for this specific error code.
Error code: 8364

The maximum number of connection attempts has been reached for (x).
x = Remote system

Multiple failures while attempting to establish
communication with the remote system.
For host:


information.
ASTM protocol.
For ARM:
action is required. If condition is not temporary, a
for this specific error code.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8457

(x) port disabled.
x = Remote system

The communication port is disabled due to multiple
failures while attempting to establish
communication with the remote system.
For host:


Incorrect baud rate on host port. 1. Reconfigure the host baud rate. See Change the
LIS serial port settings, page 2-31.
2. Re-enable the Bidirectional host option, after

correcting the baud rate. See Configure host
interface settings, page 2-6.
ASTM protocol.
or failed
For ARM:
ARM is busy or not responding Re-enable the Wash buffer transfer option for
automatic buffer transfer, after the ARM is
functional. See Configuration screen - System
settings view, page 2-4.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8458

Unable to accept test orders from Host.

System has reached unreleased result capacity, 1. If configured for host, release patient and QC
regardless if you are connected to a host or not. results.
This includes unreleased patient and QC results,
test orders, and exceptions. 2. Delete or release exceptions or pending orders
below 10% of maximum capacity. (Currently,
maximum capacity is 6,500, therefore 90% =
5,850). Once unreleased patient results, QC
results, and exceptions are released or deleted,
the system accepts test orders from the host.
NOTE: If not configured for a host, this message
should be ignored.
Error code: 8459

Test orders may be downloaded from the Host.

The number of unreleased patient and QC results, No corrective action is required. Test orders from
pending orders, and exceptions was reduced to a the host are accepted if the feature is enabled in the
level that is 10 percent below the maximum system configuration.
capacity.
Error code: 8460

Unable to process backup or restore request, host transfer in process.

Backup or restore selected when data is Wait until all host transfers are complete, or Cancel
transferring to the host. result transmission, page 5-268, before performing
the backup or restore procedure.
Error code: 8462

Negative query response for Sample ID (x), did not match the Sample ID sent to the host.
x = Sample ID

The sample ID returned from the host did not match
the sample ID queried for by the system.
The host sent an order not requested by the Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
system. Interface RS-232 Manual for information about
communications.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8463

Unable to change configuration, host transmission is in process.

Host transmission was in process while attempting Wait until all host transfers are complete, or Cancel
to configure a new processing module. result transmission, page 5-268, before configuring
the new processing module.
Error code: 8464

LAS initialization communication failed.

Communication failure between the SCC and the Re-initialize communication with the LAS. See
LAS. Verify LAS communications, page 10-714.
Serial port settings configured on SCC do not 1. Verify/reconfigure the serial port settings.
match LAS configured settings.
LAS is inoperable. Contact your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8465

Host transmission canceled by the user.

User cancelled result transmission to the host. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 8466

Incoming connection from (x) has been rejected, unreleased result capacity has been
reached on the system.
x = Remote system

The number of unreleased results is at the Release or delete unreleased patient results,
maximum. quality control results, and exceptions currently on
the system.
Error code: 8550

Unable to process test; power supply + 5 V failure.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 8551

Unable to process test; power supply - 15 V failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 8552


hardware failure.
Error code: 8553


hardware failure.
Error code: 8554

Unable to process test; power supply + 11.5 V failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 8555


hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Software error codes (9000-9999)

The software error code category includes error codes between
9000-9999.
representative at:

Changing the lamp
Error code: 9000

Call Abbott. Invalid command.

Error code: 9001

Call Abbott. Parameter (x) out of range.
x = CLI parameter number


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9002

Missing Failure response detected in work hierarchy, child work type (x), Test ID (y).
x = Work order child type
y = Test ID

An operation could not be performed on the
indicated device due to a conflict with another
device.
User selected stop while a module was in This message may occur several times. Start up the
Running status. processing module and/or sample handler,
page 5-13, when the reason for the stop no longer
exists.
Previous hardware failure. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304
this message.



error code.
Error code: 9003

Missing Failure response detected in work hierarchy, child work type (x), not a test or a
work order.
x = Work order child type

device.
exists.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

this message.



error code.
Error code: 9004

Call Abbott. CLI parser error.

Error code: 9005

Call Abbott. Destination module not found.

Error code: 9006

Call Abbott. Software error, CLI Parser error.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9007

Call Abbott. CLI Parser, unknown error.

Error code: 9008

Call Abbott. CLI Parser, stack overflow.

Error code: 9009

Concurrency of (x) exceeded.
x = Mechanism name

device.
exists.
this message.



error code.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9010

(y) preventing (x) from operating.
x = Mechanism experiencing failure
y = Mechanism causing failure

device.
exists.
this message.

you do not find any 0304 error codes.

error code.
Error code: 9011

Previous lockstep operations were not complete when new lockstep operation was
scheduled.

device.
exists.
this message.



error code.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9012

Call Abbott. Unknown / pSOS+ error number (x) received by IT domain.
x = Error message

Error code: 9013

Call Abbott. Invalid bit number (x).
x = Bit number

Error code: 9014

Call Abbott. Invalid module type requested.

Error code: 9015

Call Abbott. Required command argument was not specified.

Error code: 9016

Call Abbott. Request denied, experiment not found.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9017

Call Abbott. TCB Command, memory allocation error.

Error code: 9018

Call Abbott. CLI command, incorrect increment/resolution parameter (x).
x = Parameter number

Error code: 9019

Call Abbott. TCB command, invalid parameter (x).
x = Count variable

Error code: 9020

Call Abbott. An Invalid OMS command sent to motor indexer device (x).
x = Motor or indexer board number

Error code: 9021

Call Abbott. Invalid command for module.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9022

Call Abbott. Invalid liquid level sense command on liquid level sense board (x).
x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)

Error code: 9023

Call Abbott. Invalid liquid level sense board status bit on liquid level sense board (x).

Error code: 9026

Call Abbott. Digital I/O bit (x) interrupt in use.
x = Bit number

Error code: 9027

Microparticle Dispersion Mechanism is active, unable to execute request.

Error code: 9028

Call Abbott. Digital I/O bit (x) interrupt not in use.
x = Bit number


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9029

Call Abbott. A CLI command initiated while the instrument was in a status not permitting
such commands.

Error code: 9030

Call Abbott. Unknown error category number (x) received by IT domain.
x = Error number

Error code: 9031

Call Abbott. Invalid liquid level sense board (x).

Error code: 9032

Call Abbott. Invalid pressure monitor command on liquid level sense board (x).

Error code: 9033

Call Abbott. Invalid command sent to liquid level sense board (x).


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9034

Call Abbott. Sample Handler status does not allow execution of command.

Error code: 9035

Call Abbott. Invalid pressure monitor command on liquid level sense board (x).

Error code: 9037

Invalid Temperature Controller command.

Error code: 9038

Call Abbott. Invalid flow/clog detection channel (x).
x = Channel number

Error code: 9039

Call Abbott. Invalid temperature channel (x).
x = Temperature channel number


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9040

Call Abbott. Mechanism command sent to invalid destination.

Error code: 9041

Missing failure response detected in work hierarchy, child work type (x), parent work type
(y).
x = Child work type
y = Parent work type

Could not perform an operation on the indicated
device due to a conflict with another device.
exists.
this message.



error code.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9042

The lockstep operation detected a timing error.

exists.
this message.



error code.
For STAT assays:
Software error. Repeat the test, see Rerun a test, page 5-231.
Error code: 9043

Call Abbott. Command error, not yet implemented.

Error code: 9044

Call Abbott. Set_module CLI command failed.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9045

The lockstep operation detected a timing failure.

exists.
this message.



error code.
Error code: 9046

Call Abbott. Motor command error on motor indexer device (x), parameter error.
x = Motor number or indexer board number

Error code: 9047

Call Abbott. Motor command sent to motor (x) and it was still processing a previous
command.
x = Motor number


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9048

Call Abbott. Motor mailbox error on motor indexer device (x).
x = Motor number or indexer number

Error code: 9049

Call Abbott. Invalid context used to load the motor data table.

Error code: 9050

Call Abbott. Solenoid task not created, call back cannot be executed.

Error code: 9051

Call Abbott. O/S Error.

Error code: 9052

Call Abbott. O/S ISR Error.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9053

Call Abbott. Software error.

Error code: 9054

File (x) not found.
x = File name

Incorrect information entered when installing an Enter the correct information.
assay file or maintenance or diagnostic
procedure.
Software error, when the error occurs at the Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
beginning of the procedure. provide information about the operation you were
Error code: 9055

Call Abbott. Invalid OMS command sent to motor indexer device (x).
x = Motor number or indexer board number

Error code: 9056

Call Abbott. Invalid DEBUG command parameter.

Error code: 9057

Call Abbott. Run request denied, at least one module must be Running.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9058

The lockstep operation detected a timing error.

exists.
this message.



error code.
Error code: 9059

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), Carrier ID or Position are invalid.
x = Load list name
y = Load list line number

Error code: 9061

Discrepancy during report generation for parameter (x) in report (y).
x = Parameter number
y = Report name


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9062

Read interval of 0 msec. sent to data reduction.

Error code: 9063

Reporting database access error, table (x).
x = Database table write error

For x = generic framework error:
Software error. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.
For x = any other error:
Error code: 9064

Call Abbott. Unable to print report.

provide information specifying the report you were
attempting to print when the error occurred.
Error code: 9065

Unable to print report, field (x) data in (y) not present.
x = Field name
y = Report section name

Requested report is missing information required to Perform the procedure before attempting to print a
generate the report. report.
Error code: 9066

Unable to generate report, error accessing data.

Software reporting error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9068

Call Abbott. Unable to print (x), print job failed.
x = Report name

Error code: 9069

Call Abbott. Unknown error (x) detected in Instrument Control.
x = Error number

Error code: 9070

Call Abbott. Error occurred while attempting Automatic Prime.

Error code: 9071

Run-time error encountered while running (x) procedure.
x = Procedure name

Error code: 9073

Call Abbott. Software error, unable to open database. (No backup database exists)

The database is corrupted. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9074

Call Abbott. Software error, unable to open database. (Backup database exists)

The database is corrupted. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
Error code: 9075

System backup or restore canceled, unknown file access failure for (x).
x = Description of file

Software error: Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
Hard drive is full provide information about the operation you were
File system on hard drive is corrupt
Hard drive hardware failure.
Error code: 9076

Call Abbott. System backup canceled, system file (x) missing.
x = Description of file

Error code: 9077

Unable to communicate to Sample Handler or Processing Module, error (x), (y).
x = Architecture error number
y = String associated with architecture error

For x = 37:
Processing module is powering on. Wait until the power on is complete and the module
status is Stopped.
Ethernet cable has a poor connection. Reconnect the Ethernet cable. See Replace the
network hub and cables, page 9-281.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Network hub is turned off. 1. Turn on the power switch to the network hub.
2. Cycle power to the processing module and to the

sample handler. See Cycle power to the
page 5-12.
Network hub power cord is disconnected. 1. Connect the power cord to the network hub and
plug into a UPS or wall outlet.
2. Cycle power to the processing module and to the

sample handler. See Cycle power to the
page 5-12.
Network hub failure. Replace the network hub. See Replace the network
hub and cables, page 9-281.
Communication failure between the SCC and a Cycle power to the processing module and to the
processing module or sample handler. sample handler. See Cycle power to the processing
module and/or sample handler, page 5-12.
Indexer board has a poor connection or failed. hardware failure.
For x = 82:
status is Stopped.
Sample handler controller board in the upper
For x = any other number:
status is Stopped.
hardware failure. Please provide the error
information displayed in the error message.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9078

Run request denied, Sample Handler must be Ready.

Error code: 9079

Unable to perform procedure, module (x) incorrect module type.
x = Module number

Error code: 9080

Process Path Index response not received when expected. Attempting to initiate response.

Software status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 9081

Data archive failed, error (x).
x = Error message

CD disk is dirty Clean disk. Refer to the CD cover for cleaning and
handling procedures.
CD disk is defective Use a new disk.
Error code: 9082

Call Abbott. Data archive failed, error writing data to hard drive.

The C drive is out of disk space. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
Hardware failure: hardware failure.
Hard drive

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9083

Call Abbott. Unknown c System System Error (x).
x = Error code number/status

CPU board hardware failure.
DAQ board
Error code: 9084

Processing module received an invalid sample order from the SCC.

Error code: 9085

c System CPU software error.

CPU board has a poor connection or failed hardware failure.
Error code: 9086

Connection error between SCC and processing module.

Power is turned off to the module. Power on the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-7.
Processing module is powering on. Wait until power on is complete and processing
module status is Stopped.
Communication failure. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
sample handler, page 5-12, if the module stopped
running as a result of the error.
Network hub is turned off. Turn on the power switch to the network hub.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Network hub power cord is disconnected. Connect the power cord to the network hub and
CPU board has a poor connection or failed hardware failure.
Error code: 9087

Communication error between SCC and processing module.

Power is turned off to the module. Power on the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-7.
Processing module is powering on. Wait until power on is complete and processing
module status is Stopped.
Communication failure. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
Network hub is turned off. Turn on the power switch to the network hub.
Network hub power cord is disconnected. Connect the power cord to the network hub and
hardware failure.
Error code: 9088

Call Abbott. Invalid solenoid number (x).
x = Solenoid number

Error code: 9089

Call Abbott. Invalid DC motor number (x).
x = DC motor number


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9090

Call Abbott. Invalid DC motor speed.

Error code: 9091

Call Abbott. Invalid solenoid duty cycle value.

Error code: 9092

Call Abbott. Software error, unsolicited sample complete received by module (x).
x = ID of the processing module with the software defect

Error code: 9093

Call Abbott. Unknown error exporting assay file (x). Error code (y).
x = Assay number
y = Error code

Error while formatting or writing to the floppy disk. Use a new floppy disk.
Floppy drive hardware failure.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9094

Call Abbott. Unknown assay file.

Error code: 9095

Call Abbott. Reagent bottle timeout, response not received within 30 seconds of run
initialize.

A new reagent supply center segment was loaded Scan the reagent carousel(s), page 5-84, prior to
with fewer positions than the previous segment and initiating the run.
a manual reagent scan was not performed prior to
initiating the run.
Error code: 9096

Error message received from c System (x).
x = Error code number and statuses

Low level informational message displaying the Review message logs, page 10-13, for an error
error number received from the c System code that occurred at the same time as this
processing module. message.
Error code: 9097

Call Abbott. Invalid optical read data received from c System module.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9098

Call Abbott. Unable to calculate result, optical read data not received from c System
module.

Error code: 9099

Call Abbott. Excessive scheduling locksteps detected.

Too many tests ordered for the carrier. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
Error code: 9100

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) Calibration failure, too many calibrators.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9101

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) Calibration failure, unknown math model.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9102

Call Abbott. Calibrator response for lot (x) has a value that is equal to or less than zero.
x = Reagent lot number

Error code: 9103

Call Abbott. Calculation error, divide by zero.

Error code: 9104

Call Abbott. Unable to calculate cutoff/index for Assay (x) number (y).
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9105

Call Abbott. Invalid variable in index formula for Assay (x) number (y).
x = Assay name
y = Assay number


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9107

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, memory allocation error.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9108

Call Abbott. Unable to perform scan, experiment reagent kit(s) exist.

Error code: 9109

Call Abbott. Reference Cal Curve for Assay number (x) with cal version (y) deleted, no assay
exists.
x = Assay number
y = Calibration version

Error code: 9110

Call Abbott. (x) does not exist.
x = Mechanism name


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9112

Call Abbott. Module specified for the experiment reagent kit in position (x) does not exist.

Error code: 9113

Call Abbott. Unable to process calibration, Reference Cal Curve missing.

Error code: 9200

Call Abbott. Duplicate reagent kit size code found in the system file for size code (x).
x = Size code

Error code: 9201

Call Abbott. Error parsing ALD system file for reagent kit size maps.

Error code: 9202

Call Abbott. Parser error, value specified in the parser formula does not exist.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9203

Call Abbott. Unable to create reagent bottles, one of the lists has a zero length.

Error code: 9204

Call Abbott. Invalid bar code in position (x) on (y) carousel.
x = Position in which the invalid bar code was detected.
(1-25 for i System; A1 - D20 for c System)
y = Location in which the invalid bar code was detected.

Error code: 9205

Call Abbott. No pack size exists for a scanned reagent kit with size code (x).
x = Size code on the reagent kit


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9206

Unrecognized bar code version or format in position (x) on (y) carousel.
x = Position in which the unrecognized bar code version was detected.
(1-25 for i System; A1 - D20 for c System)
y = Location in which the unrecognized bar code version was detected.

For c System only:
A reagent cartridge with an invalid ID or Abbott 1. Remove the label from the reagent.
AEROSET (version 1) bar code was loaded.
2. Configure a reagent and reagent kit. See
Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric -
c System), page 2-93, and Configure a
user-defined reagent kit (photometric - c
System), page 2-94.
3. Manually assign a position for the reagent. See

Load non-bar coded reagents (c System),
page 5-91.
A user printed reagent bar code has invalid Recreate the bar code verifying all parameter
information for one of the parameters encoded specifications. See 1D reagent bar code
into the bar code. requirements (c System), page 4-28.
For all systems:
Error code: 9207

Call Abbott. No reagent kits found.

Error code: 9208

Call Abbott. A no assay, load error, mismatch or bad master lot experiment reagent pack
loaded.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9210

Position not defined for detergent B solution in the sample carousel.

Error code: 9211

Position not defined for ICT cleaning fluid in the sample carousel.

Position information was not sent from the SCC 1. Initiate a run (it is not necessary to have any
to the module after cycling power to the module. orders). See Initiating or resuming sample
processing, page 5-205.

to Running.
3. Select the processing module graphic, and

then select F6 - Stop.

to Stopped, and then select F5 - Start-up.
5. Restart the desired procedure.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9212

Position not defined for 0.5 percent acid wash solution in the sample carousel.


to Running.



Error code: 9213

Position not defined for detergent B solution in R1 supply center.

The solution was not configured in an onboard Configure the solution into a position. See Change
solution position for the reagent supply center. the onboard solution options (c 8000), page 2-33 or
Change the onboard solution options (c 16000),
page 2-34
Error code: 9214

Position not defined for 0.5 percent acid wash solution in R1 supply center.

page 2-34.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9215

Position not defined for detergent A solution in R1 supply center.

page 2-34.
Error code: 9216

Position not defined for detergent B solution in R2 supply center.

page 2-34.
Error code: 9217

Position not defined for 0.5 percent acid wash solution in R2 supply center.

page 2-34.
Error code: 9218

Position not defined for detergent A solution in R2 supply center.

page 2-34.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9219

Position not defined for water bath additive in R2 supply center.

Unable to read segment ID bar code on reagent 1. Review message logs for error code 4006.
carousel.
2. Perform the corrective action for this error code.

to Running.



Error code: 9220

Position not defined for detergent A solution in the sample carousel.


to Running.




(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9221

Unrecognized bar code version or format in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y).
x = Reagent carrier position in which the unrecognized bar code version was detected.

Error code: 9222

Call Abbott. Invalid bar code in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y).
x = Reagent carrier position in which the unrecognized bar code version was detected.

Error code: 9223

Reagent kit is unavailable.

Error code: 9300

Call Abbott. Value required for Assay (x) parameter (y) is not specified.
x = Assay name
y = Assay parameter


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9301

Call Abbott. Unable to delete assay (x), the assay is part of a loaded experiment.
x = Assay name

Error code: 9302

Call Abbott. Parameter out of range Assay number (x) status (y).
x = Assay number
y = Assay status

Error code: 9303

Call Abbott. Invalid value in unit formula for assay (x) number (y).
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9304

Assay (x) installation error, system software version not compatible.
x = Assay name

The assay can only be used with a later version of Install required system software. Contact your Area
System software. The software must be upgraded Customer Support.
before the assay can be run.
The assay being imported can only be used with a For Abbott assays install the assay from the
later version of System software. ARCHITECT System Assay CD-ROM. For more
information see Install or delete an assay file,
page 2-214.
For user-defined assays see Configuring
user-defined assays, page 2-83.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9305

Call Abbott. Unable to delete assay, assay number (x) does not exist.
x= Assay number

Error code: 9306

Call Abbott. No assays found.

Error code: 9307

Call Abbott. Calibration Curve specified in experiment already exists for lot number (x).
x = Lot number

Error code: 9308

Call Abbott. Load request denied, load list (x) line (y), dilution protocol not defined for the
assay.
x = Load list name


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9309

Call Abbott. Load request denied, load list (x) line (y), specified assay is not installed.
x = Load list name

Error code: 9310

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. A required reagent does not exist for
bottle type.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9311

Call Abbott. Syntax error detected in system file (x), section (y).
x = File name
y = Section where error occurred

Error code: 9312

Call Abbott. (x) procedure contains invalid inventory usage specification.
x = Procedure name


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9313

Call Abbott. Procedure (x) contains a range error.
x = Procedure name

Error code: 9314

Call Abbott. No procedures found.

Error code: 9315

Call Abbott. Value required for calculated assay (x) number (y), is not specified.
x = Name of the calculated assay
y = Number of the calculated assay

Error code: 9320

Processing module received invalid assay parameters from the SCC, sample volume out of
range.

Error code: 9321

Processing module received invalid assay parameters from the SCC, reagent volume out of
range.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9322

Processing module received invalid assay parameters from the SCC, total sample volume
out of range.

Error code: 9323

Processing module received invalid assay parameters from the SCC, total R1 volume out of
range.

Previous level sense or hardware error. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 3000
or 5000 category error codes that occurred just
prior to this message.
2. Perform the corrective action for the error code.

Error code: 9324

Processing module received invalid assay parameters from the SCC, total R2 volume out of
range.

Previous level sense or hardware error. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 3000
or 5000 category error codes that occurred just
prior to this message.
2. Perform the corrective action for the error code.

Error code: 9325

Call Abbott. Unable to create retest rule (x), dilution(s) do not exist in DAT file.
x = Dilution name


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9326

Call Abbott. Unable to create (x), number of characters cannot exceed (y).
x = Name of the panel or assay
y = Maximum number of characters

Error code: 9327

Call Abbott. Unable to create (x), number (y). Assay number must be in the range 3000 to
3099.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9328

Call Abbott. Parameter specified for (x) was out of range.
x = Name of component which contains the range parameter

Error code: 9400

Call Abbott, Sample Handler Run request denied, experiment exists. Use the run_exp CLI
command.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9401

Unable to delete, specified reagent kit does not exist.

FSR only. (Incorrect data typed when deleting the Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
Buffer Run assay. Must enter SN and lot number provide information about the operation you were
from the Microparticle bottle.) attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Error code: 9402

Unable to execute CLI commands, insufficient access level.

Error code: 9403

Call Abbott. Wash Aspirate integrity compromised when initiating a wash aspirate from a
non-park position.

Error code: 9404

Call Abbott. Toggle ARM transfer failed.

Error code: 9405

Unable to execute CLI command, carrier detected in aspiration area.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9406

Call Abbott. Invalid context used to load the DC motor solenoid data table.

Error code: 9410

Unable to execute CLI command, carrier detected on carrier positioner pocket (y) module
(x).
x = Processing module number
y = Carrier positioner pocket

Error code: 9413

Unable to execute CLI command, carrier pick attempt failed.

Error code: 9414

Unable to execute CLI command, unexpected carrier detected.

Error code: 9418

Unable to execute CLI command, no carrier detected.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9420

Module (x) is offline.
x = Module number

Error code: 9421

Module (x) has been reserved for execution.
x = Module that has been reserved

Error code: 9422

Module (x) is executing a command and is unavailable.
x = Module that is busy executing another command

Error code: 9424

Unable to execute CLI command, carrier verification failure detected.

Error code: 9451

Unable to execute CLI command, invalid device referenced.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9452

Unable to execute CLI command, invalid command received.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9453

Unable to execute CLI command, invalid parameter length.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9454

Unable to execute CLI command, invalid parameter 1 received.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9455

Unable to execute CLI command, invalid device position.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9456

Unable to execute CLI command, device not recognized.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9457

Unable to execute CLI command, unspecified command.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9458

Unable to execute CLI command, module not in correct status.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9459

Unable to execute CLI command, multiple commands.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9460

Unable to execute CLI command, device busy.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9461

Unable to execute CLI command, file error.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9462

Unable to execute CLI command, no sample handler order.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9463

Unable to execute CLI command, sample present on sample handler.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9464

Unable to execute CLI command, incomplete sample order.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9465

(x) error occurred while executing CLI command.
x = Error code number/status

longer exists.
hardware failure.
Error code: 9466

Unable to execute CLI command, carousel not homed.

Error code: 9467

Unable to execute CLI command, PM board communication error.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9468

Unable to execute CLI command, sample pipettor movement restricted.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9469

Unable to execute CLI command, (x) pipettor movement restricted.
x = Pipettor name

hardware failure.
Error code: 9470

Unable to execute CLI command, (x) pipettor movement restricted.
x = Pipettor name

hardware failure.
Error code: 9500

Call Abbott. Error parsing ALD system file for assay modules.

Error code: 9501

Call Abbott. Error parsing ALD system file for assay module configurations.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9502

Call Abbott. Error parsing ALD system file for assay module wedge maps.

Error code: 9505

Call Abbott. Error parsing ALD system file for LLS Error default.

Error code: 9506

Call Abbott. Invalid parameter received by (x).
x = Mechanism name

Error code: 9507

Call Abbott. Motor system file corrupt.

Error code: 9508

Call Abbott. Motor system file not found.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9509

Call Abbott. System file error, NA found in section (x).
x = Keyword section header name

Error code: 9510

Call Abbott. Error parsing system file (x).
x = File name

Error code: 9511

Call Abbott. Module (x) specified in this procedure does not exist in current system
configuration.
x = Module number

Error code: 9512

System backup failed, see Message History log.

Backup failed while attempting to backup one or 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0162,
more individual files. 0237, 9075, or 9076 error codes that occurred at
the same time as this message.

error code.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9513

Call Abbott. Reporting database error.

Error code: 9514

Call Abbott. Duplicate configuration file entry in keyword section (x).
x = Keyword section

Error code: 9515

Call Abbott. System Parameters.ini file not found or corrupt.

Error code: 9516

Call Abbott. Solenoid system file corrupt.

Error code: 9600

Call Abbott. Load request denied, module in load list (x) line (y) not configured for system.
x = Load list name


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9601

Call Abbott. Load request denied, experiment (x) already loaded.
x = Experiment file name

Error code: 9602

Call Abbott. Experiment file error, no load list files found.

Error code: 9603

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), reagent kit not defined in experiment file.
x = Load list name

Error code: 9604

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), calibrator order type is inconsistent with other calibrators.
x = Load list name


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9605

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), first calibrator order missing for calibration.
x = Load list name

Error code: 9606

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), module assignment required when reagent kit specified.
x = Load list name

Error code: 9607

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), selected carrier and position in use by another sample.
x = Load list name

Error code: 9608

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), location not specified for first calibrator.
x = Load list name


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9609

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), specified reagent kit is not valid for assay.
x = Load list name

Error code: 9610

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), missing a required calibrator order.
x = Load list name

Error code: 9611

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), calibrator order type invalid for the assay.
x = Load list name

Error code: 9612

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), module or kit specified inconsistent with other calibrator
orders
x = Load list name


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9614

Call Abbott. Invalid Control order, assay not configured. Load list (x), line number (y).
x = Load list name

Error code: 9615

Call Abbott. Load request denied, load list (x) line (y), illegal kit location.
x = Load list name

Error code: 9616

Call Abbott. Load request denied, illegal kit location (x) in experiment file.
x = Illegal reagent position

Error code: 9617

Call Abbott. Load request denied, load list (x) line (y), specified assay is invalid for module.
x = Load list name


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9618

Call Abbott. Load request denied, load list (x) line (y), number of replicates greater than 5.
x = Load list name

Error code: 9619

Call Abbott. Invalid assay ordered on processing module in load list (x) line (y).
x = Load list name

Error code: 9620

Call Abbott. Specified reagent pack invalid for the module specified in load list (x) line (y).
x = Load list name

Error code: 9621

Call Abbott. Load request denied, load list (x) line (y), number of replicates is 0.
x = Load list name
y = Load list line number.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9700

Call Abbott. Syntax error in file (x).
x = File name

For c System: Edit the normal or extreme range before exporting.
Attempted to export an assay with a negative
value defined for a normal or extreme range.
For i System: Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
Software error. provide information about the operation you were
Error code: 9701

Call Abbott. Syntax error detected in assay file with assay number (x) and status (y).
x = Assay number
y = Assay status

Error code: 9702

Call Abbott. (x) procedure contains a syntax error. Refer to scripting log.
x = Procedure name

Error code: 9703

Syntax error in formula.

Calculated assay formula is incorrect. Correct the formula for the Calculated assay.
Ensure all selected assays are included in the
assay formula.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9800

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error, not a quantitative assay.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9801

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Invalid calibration method specified.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9802

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Invalid calibration validity error
specification.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9803

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Quantitative adjuster level already
exists.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9805

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Duplicate parameter weighting term.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9808

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Invalid interpretation category.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9810

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Duplicate interpretation specification.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9811

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Calibrator adjusters have equal
concentration.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9813

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Invalid default dilution.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9814

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Invalid calibration dilution.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9815

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Incorrect number of calibrator
replicates.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9816

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Units do not match specifications.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9817

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Adjuster conc. does not match
calibrator conc.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9818

Call Abbott. File (x) installation error, checksum failure.
x = File name

For c System: Re-export the assay from the original system and
Attempted to import an assay that was modified use the new file to repeat the import procedure.
or corrupted on the floppy disk.
For i System: Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
Software error. provide information about the operation you were
Error code: 9819

Call Abbott. File (x) installation error, parameter specified in the file was out of range.
x = File name

Linearity parameter (c System) in an imported file Edit the linearity parameters to be within
is out of range. -999,999.0000 to 999,999.000 prior to exporting the
assay file.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9821

Call Abbott. Lot number with a different reagent configuration exists. Cannot install lot (x).
x = Lot number

Error code: 9822

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Assay with different result type already
installed.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9823

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. No adjusters present for calibration type
ADJUST.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9824

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. No calibrators present.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9825

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Not enough bottles in reagent kit.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9826

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Invalid interpretation cutoff type.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9828

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Reagent kit size does not exist.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9830

CPU firmware update failure (TFTP).


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9831

DAQ firmware update failure (TFTP).

Error code: 9832

DAQ firmware update failure (handling main CPU).

Error code: 9833

DAQ firmware update failure (Data file format).

Error code: 9834

Call Abbott. Update of c System module CPU firmware did not complete successfully.

Error code: 9835

Call Abbott. Unable to perform automatic update of c System module CPU, missing file list.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9836

Call Abbott. Update of c System module DAQ firmware did not complete successfully.

Error code: 9837

Call Abbott. Unable to perform automatic update of c System module DAQ, missing file list.

Error code: 9838

Call Abbott. CPU firmware configuration does not match application firmware.

Error code: 9900

Call Abbott. Exception number (x). System shutting down. Error data (y).
x = Software architecture exception number
y = Supplemental exception data provided with some software architecture exceptions

SCC shutdown due to an error or corrupted file. 1. Press ALT + PRINT SCREEN on the keyboard
to obtain a printout of the specific information on
the screen.
2. Power off the SCC, page 5-4.
3. Wait five minutes.
4. Power on the SCC, page 5-3.

handler, page 5-13, when the processing module
status is Stopped.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9901

Call Abbott. User access level error, unable to locate system file. General user and Admin
access only.

Error code: 9902

Call Abbott. The server process is currently not running. Perform a shutdown and restart.

SCC shutdown due to an error. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.
Error code: 9903

Call Abbott. Server process is currently running. Perform a shutdown and restart.

SCC shutdown due to an error. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.
Error code: 9904

Call Abbott. O/S LLS/PM ISR Error.

Error code: 9905

Call Abbott. Invalid sample data received during data processing.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9906

Call Abbott. Fatal Architecture Exception on SCC. The error has been logged. The
application will now shutdown.

SCC shutdown due to an error or corrupted file. 1. Press ALT + PRINT SCREEN on the keyboard
to obtain a printout of the specific information on
the screen.
2. Power off the SCC, page 5-4.
3. Wait five minutes.

handler, page 5-13, when the processing module
status is Stopped.
Error code: 9907

Call Abbott. Invalid solenoid ramp time value.

Error code: 9908

Call Abbott. Invalid solenoid ramp duty cycle value.

Error code: 9909

Call Abbott. Invalid scheduler input detected.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Error code: 9910

Call Abbott. Unable to process test, invalid carrier ID.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 10 Observed problems
Observed problems
Observed problems provides information on problems that may occur
with an ARCHITECT System, ARCHITECT c System, ARCHITECT
i System, and ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module),
and the corrective action steps you can follow to help resolve the
problem.
Observed problem topics include:
Processing module observed problems (c System), page 10-547
Processing module observed problems (i System), page 10-560
Sample results observed problems (c System), page 10-562
Sample results observed problems (i System), page 10-575
Sample handler observed problems, page 10-607
SCC observed problems, page 10-609
Peripheral devices observed problems, page 10-626
If performing the corrective actions do not resolve the problem,
contact your Area Customer Support representative at:
Processing module observed problems (c System)

Observed problems for the c System processing module include:
1 mL wash solution syringe leaks (c System), page 10-548
Assay using the Factor calibration mode is disabled after importing
the assay (c System), page 10-549
Bar coded reagents do not appear on the Reagent status screen after a
reagent scan was performed (c System), page 10-549
Bubbles in ICT module tubing (c System), page 10-550
Bubbles in sample/reagent probe tubing (c System), page 10-551
Bubbles in the sample/reagent syringes (c System), page 10-552
High-concentration waste not aspirated from cuvettes (c System),
page 10-552
ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pump syringes leak
ICT probe leaks (c System), page 10-553

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Observed problems Section 10
Lamp is not on (c System), page 10-553

Liquid around the top of the cuvettes after washing (c System),
page 10-554
Mixer is bent or is making an unexpected noise, page 10-554
No alarm when high-concentration waste is full (c System),
page 10-555
Non-bar coded reagents not recognized (c System), page 10-555
No water in reagent supply center 1 (c System), page 10-556
Reagent probe tubing is discolored or contains precipitate (c System),
page 10-556
Sample/reagent probe is damaged/clogged (c System), page 10-556
Sample/reagent probe tubing leaks (c System), page 10-557
Sample/reagent probe leaks or drips (c System), page 10-557
Sample/reagent solenoid valve leaks (c System), page 10-558
Sample/reagent syringe leaks (c System), page 10-558
Samples are loaded in the sample carousel, but are not processed
Solution/dried solution under bulk solution bottles (c System),
page 10-559
Wash solution is not being used (level not falling over time)
1 mL wash solution syringe leaks (c System)
This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT c System.

Syringe is not tightened at the check valve Tighten the connection.
connection.
Syringe plunger is damaged. Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 8000), page 9-126 or
Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 16000), page 9-204.
Check valve is defective. Replace check valves (c 8000), page 9-130 or
Tubing is crimped or damaged. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay using the Factor calibration mode is disabled after importing the assay
(c System)

The Blank calibrator level is undefined after 1. Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings
importing the assay. - Assay parameters view, page 2-67.
2. Select the assay from the Assays list, and then

The Configure assay parameters window -
General view displays.

Calibration - Calibrators view displays.
4. Select the Blank Calibrator level list button, and

then select the desired option.
5. Enter the concentration for the Blank calibrator

level.
6. Select the Volumes option.

Calibration - Volumes view displays.
7. Enter the volumes for the Blank calibrator level.
8. Select the General option.

General view displays.
9. Select the Assay availability list button, and

then select the Enabled option.
10.Select Done to save your changes.
Bar coded reagents do not appear on the Reagent status screen after a reagent
scan was performed (c System)

Reagent bottle bar code label is damaged. Load a new reagent kit. See Load bar coded
reagents (c System), page 5-85.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

A reagent cartridge with an invalid 1D (one 1. Remove the label from the reagent.
dimensional) reagent bar code was loaded.
2. Configure a reagent and reagent kit. See
Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric -
c System), page 2-93 and Configure a
user-defined reagent kit (photometric - c
System), page 2-94.
3. Assign a position for the reagent. See Load

non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-91.
For information about valid 1D reagent bar codes,
see 1D reagent bar code requirements (c System),
page 4-28.
Bar code label on a 20 mL (bottle) cartridge is not Reposition the 20 mL bottle in the adapter so it
facing the bar code reader. faces the outside of the reagent supply center.
A communication failure occurred with the Cycle power to the processing module and/or
reagent bar code reader. sample handler, page 5-12.
hardware failure.
Bubbles in ICT module tubing (c System)

The ICT reference solution bottle is empty, but 1. Replace the ICT reference solution bottle. See
the weight platform failed to detect it. Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c
System), page 5-33.

the weight platform failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump or in the Reseat the 1 mL syringes.
ICT reference solution pump are not seated
correctly.
1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump or in the Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 8000), page 9-126 or
ICT reference solution pump are leaking. Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 16000), page 9-204.
Solenoid hardware failure.
Bubbles in sample/reagent probe tubing (c System)

Tubing connection to the syringe is loose. 1. Tighten the side and top tubing connections to
the syringe body.

Probe tubing is damaged. Replace the tubing between the probe and the
connector on top of the pipettor. See Replace the
sample probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-92, Replace
the sample probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-171 or
Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 8000),
16000), page 9-174.
Syringe seal(s) and/or o-ring have failed. Replace the syringe o-ring and seal tips. See
Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal
tips 1 and 2 (c 8000), page 9-148 or Replace
sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1
and 2 (c 16000), page 9-224.
Degasser hardware failure.
Solenoid

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Bubbles in the sample/reagent syringes (c System)

Tubing connection to the syringe is loose. 1. Tighten side and top tubing connections to the
syringe body.

and 2 (c 16000), page 9-224.
Degasser hardware failure.
Solenoid
High-concentration waste not aspirated from cuvettes (c System)

Obstruction is present in the high-concentration Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018
waste nozzle. Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles, page 9-27.
High-concentration waste pump poppet valve Repeat Replace the pump poppet valve set (c
was installed incorrectly. 8000), page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet
valve set (c 16000), page 9-231 and ensure the
valve orientation is correct.
High-concentration waste pump poppet valve has Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000),
failed. page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set
(c 16000), page 9-231.
ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pump syringes leak (c System)

ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pump Replace the ICT aspiration or ICT reference
syringes are damaged. solution pump syringes that are damaged. See
Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 8000), page 9-126 or
Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 16000), page 9-204.
ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pump Tighten the connections to the 1 mL syringes in the
syringe connections to the check valve or tubing ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pump.
are loose.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
ICT probe leaks (c System)

ICT probe is not connected correctly. Finger tighten the ICT probe to the ICT module.
ICT probe is damaged. Replace ICT probe. See Replace the ICT module or
probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace the ICT
module or probe (c 16000), page 9-194.
Lamp is not on (c System)

Cable terminals were not securely connected to Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003
the terminal block when the lamp was replaced. Change Lamp, page 9-29, and ensure the lamp
cables are secured by the screws in the terminal
block.
Lamp is out. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Liquid around the top of the cuvettes after washing (c System)


leaks.
R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36 or 1122 R2
Pipettor Calibration, page 9-37.
hardware failure.
Mixer is bent or is making an unexpected noise

Mixer is installed incorrectly or is out of alignment Replace the mixer (c 8000), page 9-114 or Replace
and hitting the side of the cuvette. the mixer (c 16000), page 9-192.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
No alarm when high-concentration waste is full (c System)

Float switch cable has a poor connection. Reconnect the float switch cable to the module and
the high-concentration waste bottle. See Replace
the float switch cable (c System optional
processing module.
Float switch is dirty. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 6307
Check/Clean HC Waste Sensor, page 9-34.
Float switch cable has failed. Replace the float switch cable (c System optional
processing module.
Float switch has failed. Replace the high-concentration waste bottle (c
System optional component), page 9-158 for the
c 8000 processing module or Replace the
high-concentration waste bottle (c System optional
module.
Non-bar coded reagents not recognized (c System)

A position was not assigned for the non-bar coded Assign a position for the reagent. See Load non-bar
reagent. coded reagents (c System), page 5-91.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
No water in reagent supply center 1 (c System)

System DI water source is not functioning. 1. Check the DI water system.

3. Check for water delivery to the reagent supply

center.
Cuvette wash pump poppet valve has failed. Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000),
page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set
(c 16000), page 9-231.
DI water cuvette wash hardware failure.
Cuvette wash pump bellows
Reagent probe tubing is discolored or contains precipitate (c System)

Reagent probe tubing is discolored or contains Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 8000),
precipitate. page 9-95 or Replace the reagent probe tubing (c
16000), page 9-174.
Sample/reagent probe is damaged/clogged (c System)

Particulate matter in the sample is causing Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023
obstruction in the probe. Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Sample or reagent probe is damaged. Replace the damaged probe. See Replace the
sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85, Replace the
sample probe (c 16000), page 9-164, Replace
reagent probes (c 8000), page 9-88 or Replace
reagent probes (c 16000), page 9-167.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample/reagent probe tubing leaks (c System)

Sample or reagent pipettor tubing is damaged or Replace the tubing. See Replace the sample probe
stretched. tubing (c 8000), page 9-92, Replace the sample
probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-171, Replace the
reagent probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-95, or
page 9-174.
Probe is obstructed. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023
Sample/reagent probe leaks or drips (c System)

and 2 (c 16000), page 9-224.
the sample probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-171,
page 9-95, or Replace the reagent probe tubing (c
16000), page 9-174.
the syringe body.

Probe wash poppet valve has failed. Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000),
(c 16000), page 9-231.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample/reagent solenoid valve leaks (c System)

Tubing connection to the solenoid valve is loose. Tighten the tubing connection at the solenoid valve.
Tubing is damaged hardware failure.
Solenoid valve
Sample/reagent syringe leaks (c System)

Tubing connection to the syringe is loose. 1. Tighten side and top tubing connections to the
syringe body.

and 2 (c 16000), page 9-224.
O-ring is not seated correctly or is missing in the Reseat or replace the o-ring. See Replace sample
incoming water line connection at the side of the or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c
syringe. 8000), page 9-148 or Replace sample or reagent
syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 16000),
page 9-224.
Tubing connector is defective. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Samples are loaded in the sample carousel, but are not processed (c System)

Samples were loaded and scanned before orders 1. Verify the status of the sample carousel access
were created for the samples. indicator button. If the button is not illuminated,
2. Open and close the sample carousel cover to

rescan the carousel.
Sample carousel cover sensor did not detect that 1. Verify the status of the sample carousel access
the cover was closed. indicator button. If the button is not illuminated,
2. Open and then firmly close the sample carousel

cover.
No bar code label on the sample tube. Place a bar code label on the sample tube.
damaged.
bar code label. bar code label symbology.
Solution/dried solution under bulk solution bottles (c System)

Solution was spilled by the operator. Clean the spill.
Bulk solution bottle is damaged. Clean the spill, and then replace the bulk solution
bottle. See Replace bulk solutions and update
inventory (c System), page 5-33.
Wash valve failure occurred allowing solution and Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
water to flow back into the bottle. hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Wash solution is not being used (level not falling over time) (c System)

Wash solution filter is obstructed. Replace the wash solution filter (c 8000),
page 9-136 or Replace the wash solution filter (c
16000), page 9-214.
Cuvette washer nozzle is obstructed. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018
Wash solution valve failure hardware failure.
Processing module observed problems (i System)

Observed problems for the i 2000 processing module include:
2050 WZ Aspiration Test failure (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 10-560
Bar code read failure occurs after instrument has been powered off
(i System), page 10-561
Black powder observed in reagent carousel area (i System),
page 10-561
RV loader jams (i System), page 10-562
Wash buffer volume did not update (i System), page 10-562
2050 WZ Aspiration Test failure (i 2000/i 2000SR)
This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT i System.

Poor tubing connections to the wash zone. Reconnect tubing to the affected probe(s) for the
indicated wash zone.
Incorrect tubing/sensor cable connections. Reconnect the wash zone tubing/sensor cable to
the correct probe.
Wash zone probe obstructed. See Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i
2000SR), page 9-248.
Wash zone temperature sensor obstructed. See Replace the wash zone temperature tubing

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Wash zone manifold valve failures
Wash zone dispense pump motor failure
Bar code read failure occurs after instrument has been powered off (i System)

Condensation is present on the inside lens of the Allow the reagent bar code reader to equilibrate to
reagent bar code reader due to temperature proper temperature when the processing module is
fluctuations in the reagent cooler. powered on.
NOTE: Allow 2 hours for the reagent bar code

reader to return to normal and the condensation
to clear before trying to run. Do not try to
disassemble the bar code reader and clean the
lens.
Black powder observed in reagent carousel area (i System)

Wearing of the brass wheel on the outer carousel is Replace the septum if black powder is visible on the
occurring. reagent septum.
If you only observe black powder in the reagent
carousel area no corrective action is required.
Wearing is expected and does not impact hardware
or assay performance.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
RV loader jams (i System)

RVs (reaction vessels) have jammed in the RV 1. Remove the RV from the transport.
loader and process path at the RV insertion point.
NOTE: Use only a cotton swab(s) or plastic
forceps. DO NOT use metal tools, which can
damage the RV loader.
2. Use canned air or vacuum to remove any debris

from the transport.
3. Perform a start up on the processing module.

NOTE: If the RV cannot be removed with the
processing module powered on, then power off
the processing module. Manually rotate the RV
wheel away from the jammed RV, and then follow
steps 1, 2, and 3 above.
hardware failure.
Wash buffer volume did not update (i System)

The wash buffer reservoir was not filled to the top Load wash buffer until the wash buffer reservoir is
sensor when using the ARCHITECT ARM full.
(Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory.
Sample results observed problems (c System)

Sample results observed problems for the c System include:
A#1 Result flag, page 10-563
A#2 Result flag, page 10-565
All ICT results have similar values, Na = 140 / K = 4.0 / Cl = 100
mmol/L (c System), page 10-566
Controls out of range (c System), page 10-567
Depressed concentration - ICT results entire run (c System),
page 10-568
Depressed concentration - ICT results single assay (c System),
page 10-568

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Depressed concentration - K+ results single assay (c System),

page 10-569
Depressed concentration - photometric results entire run (c System),
page 10-569
Depressed concentration - photometric results single assay (c System),
page 10-569
Elevated concentration - ICT results entire run (c System),
page 10-570
Elevated concentration - ICT results single assay (c System),
page 10-570
Elevated concentration - photometric results single assay (c System),
page 10-570
Erratic results, poor precision - ICT results (c System), page 10-571
Erratic results, poor precision - photometric results (c System),
page 10-573
FLEX Result flag, page 10-575
PSHH Result flag, page 10-575
A#1 Result flag

bottle.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

page 9-42.

leaks.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
A#2 Result flag

bottle.
page 9-42.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


leaks.
hardware failure.
All ICT results have similar values, Na = 140 / K = 4.0 / Cl = 100 mmol/L (c System)

ICT probe is not connected correctly. Finger tighten the probe to the ICT Module.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

correctly.
Controls out of range (c System)

Controls are expired or have exceeded open vial Open new controls.
stability. For information on multiconstituent control open vial
stability, see the multiconstituent control package
insert.
Controls were stored improperly. Open new controls.
Controls were improperly reconstituted. If controls require reconstitution verify condition of
diluent, water, or pipettors.
For information on multiconstituent control
reconstitution, see the multiconstituent control
package insert.
A change to the system has occurred: 1. Verify bulk solutions were loaded correctly if new
New bulk solutions were loaded bulk solutions were recently loaded.
Component was replaced 2. Verify components were replaced correctly if

Instrument was calibrated components were recently replaced.
3. Recalibrate the assay.

Wrong control lot was used. 1. Use the correct control lot for the established
control ranges.
2. Establish new control ranges, as required, if a

new lot of control was used.
Scheduled maintenance is due. Perform all required maintenance.
Assay parameter file has changed. 1. Update settings if they are incorrect.
2. If assay file is updated, recalibrate the assay.

Cuvette washer is malfunctioning. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018
For more information on troubleshooting to resolve this problem, see:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Depressed concentration - ICT results single assay (c System),

page 10-568
Depressed concentration - photometric results single assay (c System),
page 10-569
Elevated concentration - ICT results single assay (c System),
page 10-570
Elevated concentration - photometric results single assay (c System),
page 10-570
Erratic results, poor precision - ICT results (c System), page 10-571
Erratic results, poor precision - photometric results (c System),
page 10-573
Depressed concentration - ICT results entire run (c System)

> 15,000 samples).
Depressed concentration - ICT results single assay (c System)

> 15,000 samples).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Depressed concentration - K+ results single assay (c System)

Cuvettes are dirty. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6056
Clean Cuvettes with Detergent, page 9-26.
Depressed concentration - photometric results entire run (c System)

DAQ board hardware failure.
Depressed concentration - photometric results single assay (c System)

Reagent is not performing as expected. 1. Open new reagent(s).
2. Recalibrate the reagent(s), if required.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Water bath temperature is too low. 1. Perform as-needed 3526 Check Water Bath
Temperature, page 9-40.

any hardware failure if temperature is out of
range.
hardware failure.
Elevated concentration - ICT results entire run (c System)

>15,000 samples).
Elevated concentration - ICT results single assay (c System)

>15,000 samples).
hardware failure.
Elevated concentration - photometric results single assay (c System)


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Water bath temperature is too high. 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure
3526 Check Water Bath Temperature,
page 9-40.

any hardware failure if temperature is out of
range.
Sample or reagent carryover from a user-defined Perform sample and reagent carryover studies for
assay occurred. any user-defined assay and create appropriate
SmartWash definitions.
hardware failure.
Erratic results, poor precision - ICT results (c System)

Scheduled maintenance is due. Perform the scheduled maintenance.
Sample contains fibrin clots or particulate matter. 1. Examine samples for fibrin or other large
particles.
2. Remove fibrin clots with a clean applicator stick

or centrifuge samples.
Sample was not collected and/or prepared 1. Follow the specimen collection and handling
correctly. instructions in the reagent manufacturer's
assay-specific documentation (such as a
3. Source another sample if not resolved.

ICT module o-rings are missing or not seated Reseat or replace the o-rings. See Replace the ICT
correctly.
>15,000 samples).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

ICT probe is not connected correctly. Finger tighten the ICT probe to the ICT module.
loose. module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace
Sample or reagent probe is partially obstructed. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023
reagent probes (c 8000), page 9-88, or Replace
ICT Reference Solution is not performing as Replace the ICT reference solution bottle. See
System), page 5-33.
ICT sample diluent is not performing as expected. 1. Open new cartridge of ICT sample diluent.
2. Recalibrate the ICT assays.

ICT aspiration tubing hardware failure.
ICT aspiration pump

Cuvette washer
DAQ board
AC/DC driver board

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Erratic results, poor precision - photometric results (c System)

Scheduled maintenance is due. Perform the scheduled maintenance.
particles.

Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the Remove all bubbles or foam from the sample with a
sample. clean disposable pipette or applicator stick.
correctly. instructions in the reagent manufacturer's
assay-specific documentation (such as a

and 2 (c 16000), page 9-224.
Probe tubing connections are loose or leaking. Tighten the tubing connections or replace the
tubing. See Replace the sample probe tubing (c
8000), page 9-92, Replace the sample probe tubing
(c 16000), page 9-171, Replace the reagent probe
tubing (c 8000), page 9-95, or Replace the reagent
probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-174.
Reagent probe tubing is discolored or contains Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 8000),
precipitate. page 9-95 or Replace the reagent probe tubing (c
16000), page 9-174.
the sample probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-171,
page 9-95, or Replace the reagent probe tubing (c
16000), page 9-174.
the syringe body.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample or reagent probe is partially obstructed. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023
Probe wash pump poppet valve has failed. Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000),
(c 16000), page 9-231.
Debris is in the water bath incubator. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2134
Bubbles are in the water bath incubator due to the Decrease the incoming DI water pressure to within
Bubbles are in the water bath incubator due to a Contact your Area Customer Support.
high gas content.
reagent probes (c 8000), page 9-88, or Replace

leaks.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the Remove all bubbles and foam from the surface of
reagent. the reagent using a clean applicator stick.

Cuvette segment screws are loose. Tighten the cuvette segment screws with a
screwdriver.
Cuvette is damaged. Replace a cuvette (c 8000), page 9-104 or Replace
a cuvette (c 16000), page 9-183.
Mixer malfunction hardware failure.
Cuvette Washer malfunction

Optics
DAQ board
AC/DC driver board
FLEX Result flag

Sample concentration is high. Evaluate the result before reporting.
The sample can be diluted and rerun. For the
dilution protocol, see the reagent manufacturer's
PSHH Result flag

The ICT sample run immediately before this sample Rerun the sample to verify there was no effect from
had a concentration greater than the extreme the previous sample.
range.
Sample results observed problems (i System)

Sample results observed problems for the i System include:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Calibration curves stable for less than 30 days - control drift

Controls out of range (i System), page 10-577
Depressed concentration - entire run, direct assay, with decreased
RLUs (i System), page 10-578
Depressed concentration - entire run, indirect assay, with increased
Elevated concentration - entire run, direct assay, with increased RLUs
Elevated concentration - entire run, indirect assay, with decreased
Elevated concentration - single point, direct assay, with increased
Erratic assay results (i System), page 10-603
Calibration curves stable for less than 30 days - control drift (i System)

Control values for some assays are drifting out of To minimize the frequency of calibration adopt one
the QC range. Under a combination of the following of the following options:
operating conditions microparticles may adhere to
the sides of the reagent bottle:
A microparticle bottle with low testing frequency Remove, on a daily basis, the assay specific
is used. microparticle bottle from the processing module
Or and hand swirl to resuspend the adhered
microparticles. Reposition the bottle.
Reagents are stored onboard.
NOTE: You must be careful when moving and
Or
swirling the bottle so microparticles do not come
The instrument is in continuous run mode. in contact with the septum.
Remove the assay specific reagent pack from the
processing module at the completion of testing.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Controls out of range (i System)

Controls are expired or have exceeded open vial Open new controls.
stability. For information on multiconstituent control open vial
stability, see the multiconstituent control package
insert.
Controls were stored improperly. Open new controls
Controls were improperly reconstituted. If controls require reconstitution verify condition of
diluent, water, or pipettors.
For information on multiconstituent control
reconstitution, see the multiconstituent control
package insert.
A change to the system has occurred: 1. Verify bulk solutions were loaded correctly if new
New bulk solutions were loaded bulk solutions were recently loaded.
Component was replaced 2. Verify components were replaced correctly if
Instrument was calibrated components were recently replaced.
3. Recalibrate the assay.

Wrong control lot was used. 1. Use the correct control lot for the established
control ranges.
2. Establish new control ranges, as required, if a

new lot of control was used.
Scheduled maintenance is due. Perform all required maintenance.
For more information on troubleshooting to resolve this problem, see:

Elevated concentration - single point, direct assay, with increased
Erratic assay results (i System), page 10-603

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Depressed concentration - entire run, direct assay, with decreased RLUs

(i System)

were switched. 2. Load new bottles of pre-trigger and trigger.
Perform one of the following procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution
and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR),
page 5-57.

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 9-70
is on the left.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Trigger solution was used instead of 1. Measure the pH of the prepared wash buffer. If it
Concentrated Wash Buffer. is not within the 7.0 to 7.6 range, go to Step 2.

(i 2000/i 2000SR) to unload any wash buffer
remaining in the buffer reservoir.
3. Remove the buffer reservoir from the system.
4. Rinse buffer reservoir with Reagent Grade Type

II or deionized water.
5. Rinse the float with Reagent Grade Type II or

deionized water and then dry.
6. Replace buffer reservoir, and then load prepared

wash buffer.

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Wash zone manifold is leaking. 1. Check for salt crystals and/or liquid on or around
wash manifold valves and/or fittings.
2. Contact your Area Customer Support if crystals

or liquid are observed.
Pipettor or wash zone manifold tubing Tighten the pipettor and/or wash zone manifold
connections are loose. tubing connections.
Buffer level sensor assembly is cracked or Perform one of the following replacement
leaking. procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-269.
Bubbles are in wash buffer tubing. Perform the following as-needed maintenance
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Wash zone probes are not properly seated in the Reseat the wash zone probes. Refer to one of the
wash zone motor assembly. following replacement procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-248.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Wash zone probes are bent or damaged. Perform one of the following replacement
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-248.
Wash buffer dispense at the wash zones is 1. Perform the following precision diagnostic
inadequate. procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2006 Wash Zone 1 Check, page 10-683
2. Contact your Area Customer Support if

insufficient volume is dispensed.
Probe is obstructed. 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure
2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 and observe that
pipettors dispense liquid and no leaks or bubbles
are observed in tubing.
2. Replace the appropriate probe as required.

Perform one of the following replacement
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240.
Vortexer hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Depressed concentration - entire run, indirect assay, with increased RLUs

(i System)

Trigger Solution was used instead of 1. Measure the pH of the prepared wash buffer. If it




wash buffer.

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Wash zone manifold is leaking. 1. Check for salt crystals and/or liquid on or around
2. Contact your Area Customer Support if crystals

or liquid are observed.
Tubing connections are loose. Tighten the tubing connections.
Tubing is kinked. Contact your Area Customer Support if tubing
needs to be replaced.
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-269
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-248
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-248.
Wash buffer dispense at the wash zones is 1. Perform the following precision diagnostic
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2. Contact your Area Customer Support if

insufficient volume is dispensed.
Depressed concentration - single point, direct assay, with decreased RLUs

(i System)

Reagent was stored incorrectly. Use a reagent kit that was stored under the correct
conditions. See the ARCHITECT assay-specific
package insert.
Bubbles or foam are on surface of reagent. Remove all foam and bubbles from the surface of
the reagent using a clean applicator stick.
Reagent was not properly mixed before loading. Mix the reagent thoroughly before placing septums
on the reagent bottle.
NOTE: If brown microparticle build-up is

observed on the septum, discard reagent.
Reagent is contaminated. Load a new reagent kit.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 5-57

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 9-70
is on the left.





wash buffer.

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Pre-trigger or trigger sensor is cracked. Perform one of the replacement procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Replace the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor
(i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-267
Bubbles are in tubing. Perform the following as-needed maintenance
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 9-70
Pre-trigger or trigger dispense is inadequate. Perform the following precision diagnostic
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2004 Pre-Trigger Check, page 10-683
2005 Trigger Check, page 10-683
Contact your Area Customer Support if insufficient
volume is dispensed.
Wash zone manifold is leaking. Check for salt crystals and/or liquid on or around
Contact your Area Customer Support if crystals or
liquid are observed.
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-269
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-248

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-248
Wash buffer dispense at the wash zones is Perform the following precision diagnostic
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Probe is dirty or partially clogged. 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure
2. Replace the appropriate probe. Perform one of

the following replacement procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
Probe is damaged. Replace the appropriate probe as required. Perform
one of the following replacement procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
Probe is not positioned correctly. Perform the following as-needed maintenance
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the Remove all bubbles or foam from the sample using
sample. a clean disposable pipette or applicator stick.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Pipettor probes are not straight. 1. Perform pipettor diagnostic procedure 1155
Probe Straightness Test, page 10-671.
2. Replace the probe if the probe is not straight.

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
Syringe assembly or valve is leaking. Check for salt crystals and/or liquid around all
syringes and/or valve.
Pipettor aspiration or dispense is insufficient. Perform the following precision diagnostic
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2001 Sample Pipettor Check, page 10-682
2009 STAT Pipettor Check (i 2000SR),
page 10-684
2002 R1 Pipettor Check, page 10-682
R1 or R2 probe is obstructed. 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure
2. Replace the appropriate probe. See Replace

sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i
2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240.
R1 or R2 pipettor probe is not positioned Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1112
correctly. R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-66 or 1113 R2
Pipettor Calibration, page 9-67.
Wash zone manifold is not properly seated on Contact your Area Customer Support.
process path.
CMIA Optics reader hardware failure.
Vortexer

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Depressed concentration - single point, indirect assay, with increased RLUs

(i System)

Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the Remove all bubbles or foam from the sample using
sample. a clean disposable pipette or applicator stick.
Sample cup or tube was not properly placed in Reseat the sample cup or tube.
the sample carrier or LAS carousel.
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
R2 pipettor tubing connections are loose. Tighten all R2 pipettor tubing connections.
R2 pipettor tubing connections are broken. Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i
2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240, if tubing connections
are broken.
R2 pipettor is not positioned correctly. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1113
R2 syringe assembly or valve is leaking. Check for salt crystals and/or liquid on or around
the R2 syringe assembly or valve.
process path.
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 5-57

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 9-70

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

is on the left.





wash buffer.

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Pre-trigger or trigger sensor is cracked. Perform one of the following replacement
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
(i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-267
Bubbles are in pre-trigger or trigger tubing. Perform the following as-needed maintenance
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-269
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-248
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-248
For i 2000/i 2000SR:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Elevated concentration - entire run, direct assay, with increased RLUs (i System)

Trigger Solution was used instead of 1. Measure the pH of the prepared wash buffer. If it




wash buffer.

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Wash buffer dispense is inadequate. Tighten the pipettor and wash zone manifold tubing
connections.
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-269
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-248
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-248
For i 2000/i 2000SR:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Elevated concentration - entire run, indirect assay, with decreased RLUs

(i System)

For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 5-57

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 9-70
is on the left.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007





wash buffer.

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Pipettor or wash zone manifold tubing Tighten the pipettor and/or wash zone manifold
connections are loose. tubing connections.
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-269
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
wash zone motor assembly. following procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-248

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Wash zone probes are bent or damaged. Perform one of the following procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-248
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Probe is obstructed. 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure
2. Replace the appropriate probe as required.

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
Elevated concentration - single point, direct assay, with increased RLUs (i System)

package insert.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Septums were not installed on the reagent 1. Discard the open reagent kit.
bottles.
2. Load new reagents.
3. Ensure septums are properly installed.

For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 5-57.

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 9-70
is on the left.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007





wash buffer.

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
(i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-267
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 9-70

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-269
Wash zone probes are not properly seated in Reseat the wash zone probes. Refer to one of the
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-248
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-248
For i 2000/i 2000SR:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
R2 pipettor tubing connections are loose. Tighten all R2 pipettor tubing connections.
R2 pipettor tubing connections are broken. Replace sample, reagent, or STAT probe tubing (i
2000/i 2000SR), page 9-244, if tubing connections
are broken.
R2 syringe assembly or valve is leaking. Check for salt crystals and/or liquid on or around
the R2 syringe assembly or valve.
process path.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Elevated concentration - single point, indirect assay, with decreased RLUs

(i System)

package insert.
Reagent was not properly mixed before loading. Mix the reagents thoroughly before placing septums

For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 5-57

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 9-70
is on the left.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007





wash buffer.

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Pre-trigger or trigger sensors are cracked. Perform one of the following replacement
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
(i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-267
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 9-70

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Pre-Trigger or trigger dispense is inadequate. Perform the following precision diagnostic
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-269
Wash zone probes are not properly seated in Reseat the wash zone probes. Refer to one of the
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-248
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-248
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Contact your Area Customer if insufficient volume is
dispensed.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Syringe assembly or valve is leaking. Check for salt crystals and/or liquid on or around
the R1 and R2 syringe assembly or valve.
R1 or R2 probe has an obstruction. 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure
2. Replace the appropriate probe. See Replace

sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i
2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240.
process path.
CMIA reader hardware failure.
Vortexer

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Erratic assay results (i System)

package insert for reagent kit storage conditions.
Bubbles or foam are on surface of reagent. Remove all bubbles and foam from the surface of

Septums were not installed on the reagent 1. Discard the open reagent kit.
bottles.
2. Load a new reagent.
3. Ensure septums are properly installed.

For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 5-57

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 9-70
is on the left.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007





wash buffer.

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
(i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-267
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
page 9-70

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-269
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-248
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
2000SR), page 9-248
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
correctly. instructions in the ARCHITECT assay-specific
package insert.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

particles.

Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the Remove all bubbles or foam from the sample with a
sample. clean disposable pipette or applicator stick.
Probe tip is bent or damaged. Replace the appropriate probe as required. Perform
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
Pipettor probes are not straight. 1. Perform pipettor diagnostics procedure 1155
Probe Straightness Test, page 10-671.
2. Replace the probe if the probe is not straight.

procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Water quality is poor. Ensure the water quality is Reagent Grade Type II
water.
Syringe assemblies or valves are leaking. Check for salt crystals and/or liquid around all
syringes or valves.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Wash buffer dispense of pipettors is inadequate. Perform precision diagnostic procedure 2001
Sample Pipettor Check, page 10-682, 2002 R1
Pipettor Check, page 10-682, 2003 R2 Pipettor
Check, page 10-682, or 2009 STAT Pipettor Check
(i 2000SR), page 10-684.
Sample handler observed problems

Observed problems for the sample handlers include:
Power to the processing module(s) and sample handler is interrupted,
page 10-607
Sample handler will not go to Running status, page 10-608
Sample is not automatically re-aspirated after adding or rerunning a
test (RSH), page 10-608
Sample tubes in a carrier are scanned, but are not processed,
page 10-609

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Power to the processing module(s) and sample handler is interrupted
This problem may be observed for any sample handler on an

ARCHITECT System.

Main power source to the processing module(s) For systems with an RSH (robotic sample handler):
and sample handler is interrupted. 1. Perform one of the following procedures:
For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier
transport and carrier positioner(s) (RSH),
page 10-708

and resolve.
3. Perform Power on the processing module and/or

For systems with a SSH (standard sample handler)
or LAS (laboratory automation system) carousel
sample handler.
and resolve.

Sample handler will not go to Running status
This problem may be observed for any sample handler on an

ARCHITECT System.

Run was selected for the sample handler, but a 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any error
hardware failure was not corrected from the last codes that occurred at the same time as this
run. message.


error code.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample is not automatically re-aspirated after adding or rerunning a test (RSH)
This problem may be observed for the RSH (robotic sample handler)
on an ARCHITECT System.

The sample was removed from the RSH. Reinsert the carrier or tray.
The RSH status changed to Ready or Stopped 1. Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and
before adding or rerunning a test. SSH), page 5-206.
2. Reinsert the carrier or tray.

The RSH is not configured to automatically Change the automatic repositioning setting. See
reposition samples for retest. Change automatic repositioning for retest setting
(RSH), page 2-28.
Different patient demographic information was 1. Delete and reorder the test, if the patient
entered when creating the order for additional demographics were entered in error.
tests.
NOTE: Do not enter patient demographic
information when adding tests to a sample. See
Add a test to a patient order, page 5-128.
2. Assign another sample ID to the order, if the

sample is from a different patient.
A different Sample manual dilution factor was 1. Delete and reorder the test using the same
entered when creating the order for additional manual dilution.
tests.
2. Assign another sample ID to the new dilution, if a
different manual dilution is required.
The option to not automatically re-aspirate from Reinsert the carrier or tray.
the sample was selected when the confirmation
message displayed after adding new tests for the
sample.
The same sample ID was found in one or more Specify the carrier/carousel ID and position for each
carrier/carousel positions and the aliquot loaded when using multiple aliquots of the
carrier/carousel position was not specified for the same sample ID.
test order.
The host computer sent an action code with the Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
order that indicated to the SCC to create a new Interface RS-232 Manual.
order instead of adding to an existing order.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample tubes in a carrier are scanned, but are not processed
This problem may be observed for the retest or standard sample

handler on an ARCHITECT System.

No bar code label on the sample tube. Place a bar code label on the sample tube.
damaged.
bar code label. bar code label symbology.
SCC observed problems

Observed problems for the SCC (system control center) include:
"&" character appears as an underline when defining a single analyte
control name, page 10-611
All reagent kits display after performing a search by selecting the R1 or
R2 checkbox on the Find options window, page 10-611
All reagent kits display after performing a search for only kits with the
Extra Bottle status, page 10-612
Bay number and sample carousel position display on the Details for
results windows, page 10-612
Bi-directional host communication is not working, page 10-612
Stopped, page 10-613
Ready, page 10-613
c System processing module status on Snapshot screen is Running, but
tests are not processing, page 10-613
C/P information is not printed on the Rerun list report, page 10-614
Dr Watson error, on tapisrv.exe (file name in middle of message
window), page 10-614
Error code column on the Exception status screen does not sort as
expected, page 10-614
Gray screen displays during an archive, page 10-614

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
icwserver.exe error Message "Address space is full", page 10-615

Intel Active Monitor System Alert! message is displayed, page 10-615
Internet Explorer Script Error displayed when using the online
documentation, page 10-616
Keyboard fails to respond, page 10-617
LAS (laboratory automation system) communication - Unable to
communicate, page 10-617
Maintenance history report prints with 00:00:00 in the Time column,
page 10-617
Maintenance log contains blank spaces for Daily Maintenance items,
page 10-617
Many error messages are displayed, page 10-618
Non-system disk or disk error message displays or NTLDR is missing
message displays, page 10-618
Order Status report does not print all the codes, page 10-618
Progress indicator is blank and the software is not responding,
page 10-619
QC data does not appear on the Levey-Jennings graph and does not
print on the QC Analysis report, page 10-619
Reagent and calibration curve stability expires when daylight savings
time arrives, page 10-619
Result column does not sort as expected, page 10-620
Results did not display or print, page 10-620
Results or exceptions are deleted or released and the result or exception
is not removed from the screen, page 10-620
Sample ID is truncated, page 10-620
SCC does not boot to the Snapshot screen, page 10-621
Shutdown screen displays during concurrent maintenance,
page 10-621
Shutdown screen displays unexpectedly, page 10-621
Slow screen response, page 10-622
Software Architecture Exception 38 displays, page 10-622
Software Architecture Exception 50 displays, page 10-622
Tests remain in Pending Transmission status, page 10-623

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Tests remain in Running status and the module will not go to Stopped
status, page 10-623
Tests remain in Scheduled status, page 10-623
Touchscreen monitor display is blank, page 10-624
Touchscreen monitor fails to respond, page 10-625
Unable to delete results, page 10-625
Unable to find specific patient or QC results, page 10-625
Undefined fields for assay parameters display and print differently,
page 10-625
UPS (uninterruptible power supply) is activated, page 10-626
"&" character appears as an underline when defining a single analyte control

name
This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT System.

Software error. Do not use the "&" character when defining control
names.
All reagent kits display after performing a search by selecting the R1 or R2

checkbox on the Find options window

The R1 or R2 checkbox was selected on the Enter a position in the Position data entry box
Reagent status Find options window without before selecting the R1 or R2 checkboxes on the
entering a position in the Position data entry box. Reagent status Find options window.
The R1 and R2 checkboxes are only functional if a
position is entered, and they determine if the
system searches in one or both carousels when
searching for a specified position.
All reagent kits display after performing a search for only kits with the Extra Bottle
status

The option to find reagent kits with the Extra Bottle Select one other Reagent status checkbox along
status using Reagent status Find options window is with Extra Bottle, and the system correctly finds
not working correctly. reagent kits with either status.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Bay number and sample carousel position display on the Details for results
windows

The original test order was run on the RSH and the No corrective action is required.
retest order was run on the sample carousel.
Bi-directional host communication is not working

Failure occurred with either the host or the SCC 1. Refer to the probable cause and corrective
(system control center). action for the error code observed.
2. Re-enable bi-directional host communications.

See Configure host interface settings, page 2-6.
c System processing module status on Snapshot screen does not go to Stopped
This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT ci System or

c System.

Ethernet cable is not connected or has a poor 1. Verify the Ethernet cable is connected at the
connection. module and at the hub. See Replace the network
hub and cables, page 9-281.
NOTE: If this occurs on an integrated system,

wait until all i 2000SR tests are complete before
cycling the power.
Ethernet hub is turned off. 1. Verify the Ethernet hub is turned on.

cycling the power.

cycling the power.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
c System processing module status on Snapshot screen does not go to Ready

With no tests processing, it may take up to one No corrective action is required.
minute after pause is selected for the c System
processing module to change from Running to
Ready status.
c System processing module status on Snapshot screen is Running, but tests are
not processing


cycling the power.
C/P information is not printed on the Rerun list report

The C/P information does not print on the Rerun list View the C/P information on the Rerun status,
report if you are using the robotic sample handler Order status, or Sample status screen.
with the automatically reposition samples for retest
option selected.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Dr Watson error, on tapisrv.exe (file name in middle of message window)

Modem is not connected. 1. Reseat the RS-232 cable connected from the
modem to P2 connector on the SCC. See
Reseat cables to the SCC, page 10-710.
3. Contact your Area Customer Support, if the

modem will not be used, for instructions to
change pcANYWHERE startup from automatic
to manual.
Modem is not turned on. 1. Turn on the modem.
Error code column on the Exception status screen does not sort as expected

The Error code column sorts by an internal software Sort using a different column or use the Find
error code number rather than by the visible error options window to search for a specific error code.
code number. See Find a specific exception, page 5-296.
Gray screen displays during an archive

Screen timeout is activated while an archive is in No corrective action is required.
process. Allow the archive to complete.
icwserver.exe error Message "Address space is full"

Software error. 1. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.
2. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Intel Active Monitor System Alert! message is displayed
This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT System when using

the SCC Intel Active Monitor software to monitor voltage, fan speeds,
and temperature status of the SCC.

Voltage (x) has gone outside of its
recommended range
x = specific voltage
Vents in the SCC have become blocked, 1. Remove any obstacles preventing adequate
restricting airflow to the fans. airflow around the SCC.
2. Remove dust or foreign objects from vents.

Hardware failure 1. Document the message displayed.
2. Select Close or select View Details and then

Exit. You may continue to operate the system.
3. Create a system software backup, page 2-212.
4. Perform utilities diagnostic procedure 6004

Copy backup software, page 10-693.
5. If this message reoccurs, contact your Area

Customer Support to resolve any hardware
failure.
Fan (x) has stopped or slowed
x = fan 1 or fan 2
An obstacle is preventing the SCC fan from Remove any objects obstructing the fan that prevent
spinning. it from spinning.



Your system has exceeded its recommended
maximum temperature
The SCC fan(s) have slowed or stopped. Remove any objects obstructing the fan that prevent
it from spinning.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The SCC is in a location that is not allowing Ensure there is proper airflow in and around your
optimal airflow. SCC. Ensure your SCC is not located near walls or
in corners. If vents in the SCC become blocked,
airflow to the fans may be restricted.
Room temperature is out of specifications. Modify room temperature to be within
specifications. See Environmental specifications
and requirements, page 4-26.



Internet Explorer Script Error displayed when using the online documentation

The Print button on the Help window was selected, Select No on the Internet Explorer Script Error
and then the Close button was selected before the message.
Print window displayed. Allow the print dialog window to display and
complete the steps for printing prior to closing the
Help window.
Keyboard fails to respond

Keyboard cable is loose or disconnected. 1. Reseat or reconnect the keyboard cable. See
Reseat cables to the SCC, page 10-710.
3. Verify keyboard operation.

Keyboard has failed. Replace the keyboard, page 9-275.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
LAS (laboratory automation system) communication - Unable to communicate

Cable from the LAS to the SCC (COM6, Reseat the P4 cable. See Reseat cables to the
connector P4 has a poor connection). SCC, page 10-710.
LAS is temporarily down. Re-initialize communication. See Verify LAS
communications, page 10-714.
Maintenance history report prints with 00:00:00 in the Time column

A Maintenance History report was printed for a No corrective action is required.
procedure that had not been performed. When the procedure has been performed, print the
report. The time the procedure was performed
appears on the report.
Maintenance log contains blank spaces for Daily Maintenance items

A maintenance procedure was initiated on one day Avoid performing a maintenance procedure if it will
and completed the following day. not complete on the same day.
Many error messages are displayed

Some error conditions can generate a large number 1. Press and hold the Enter key on the keyboard
of error messages. until all messages close.
2. Review recent messages in the Message history

log. See Review message logs, page 10-13.
NOTE: You must review messages to ensure you
do not overlook a different error condition.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Non-system disk or disk error message displays or NTLDR is missing message

displays

A floppy disk is in the floppy drive during the Remove the floppy disk and follow the instructions
powering on of the SCC. on the screen.
Order Status report does not print all the codes

More than three codes are associated with the Review the appropriate window for a listing of all
order. The Order Status report prints up to three codes:
codes for each order. Details for order (Order status/Rerun status)
window - single order view, page 5-159.
Details for order (Order status) window - batch
(bar coded) view, page 5-160.
Details for order (Order status) window - batch
(non-bar coded) view, page 5-161.
Progress indicator is blank and the software is not responding

Results/exceptions were released or deleted and No corrective action is required.
the software did not remove them from the A progress indicator displays until the process is
screen. complete. It may take up to 15 minutes. After the
process is complete, results or exceptions no longer
display on the screen.
Previously released or deleted results/exceptions No corrective action is required.
were selected for release or deletion. A progress indicator displays until the process is
complete. It may take up to 15 minutes. After the
process is complete results or exceptions no longer
display on the screen.
For additional information see Observed problem:
Results or exceptions are deleted or released and
the result or exception is not removed from the
screen, page 10-620.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
QC data does not appear on the Levey-Jennings graph and does not print on the
QC Analysis report

Assay result units were changed. No corrective action is required.
Or To capture all QC data print the QC Analysis
Module serial number was changed. Report, page Appendix A-61 prior to:
Editing or configuring assay result units
Editing or configuring the module serial number
Reagent and calibration curve stability expires when daylight savings time arrives

Reagent and calibration stabilities are not tracked 1. Load a new reagent kit. See Load bar coded
with daylight savings time transitions. reagents (c System), page 5-85 or Replace
non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-96.
2. Create a calibration order, page 6-12, for the

assay.
Result column does not sort as expected

The result column sorts by interpretation. If a result No corrective action is required.
does not have an interpretation, the data in the Do not sort by results if the results do not contain
result column is not consistently sorted. interpretations.
Results did not display or print

When creating an order or adding a test(s) to an Create the order or add the test(s) by selecting both
order, a calculated assay was selected without the constituent assays and the calculated assay.
selecting the constituent assays.
Constituent assay results that were processing Create a new patient order or add the test(s) by
for a calculated assay order met the criteria for a selecting all tests desired for display or print.
retest rule configured to run another assay.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Results or exceptions are deleted or released and the result or exception is not
removed from the screen

The time needed to update the information on the No corrective action is required.
screen is longer than the time needed to delete or Select the Refresh button to update the information
release the results from the database. on the screen.
Sample ID is truncated
This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT System when using

codabar bar code labels that do not contain checksums.
IMPORTANT: When using codabar bar code labels with checksums

disabled, a SID (sample identification) may be truncated. For example,
an actual SID of 123456 is shortened to 1234.
When using variable SID lengths and a SID is truncated, a result(s)
may be attached to an incorrect SID for which an order exists. To
eliminate this:
Enable checksums
Or
Use fixed lengths SIDs
Bar code reader misinterprets bar code label. Place tube in carrier so the bar code fills the width
of the window.
Use labels that meet guidelines. See Sample bar
code label guidelines, page 4-33.
Enable checksums. See Change the sample bar
code settings for codabar, page 2-28.
SCC does not boot to the Snapshot screen

provide information specifying errors that were
received.
The database is corrupt. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Shutdown screen displays during concurrent maintenance


Shutdown screen displays unexpectedly

2. Perform utilities diagnostic procedure 6009 Log

Utilities, page 10-694 to collect system logs.

Slow screen response

Database is close to capacity. Archive results or delete stored results.
Software Architecture Exception 38 displays

Network hub is turned off. 1. Turn on the power switch to the network hub.

Network hub power cord is disconnected. 1. Connect the power cord to the network hub and

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Software Architecture Exception 50 displays

Software error 1. Obtain a screen image of the software error, see
Print a screen image, page 5-345.

Tests remain in Pending Transmission status

Software error 1. Reconfigure the host communication to off. See
Cancel result transmission, page 5-268.

Tests remain in Running status and the module will not go to Stopped status

Communication is lost between the SCC and the Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.
processing module.
Tests remain in Scheduled status

NOTE: Wait until all tests processing are

complete before cycling the power.
c 8000 processing module specific:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

LLS (liquid level sense) error occurred with an Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply
onboard solution. centers and update inventory (c 8000), page 5-39
or Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply
centers and update inventory (c 16000), page 5-41.
i 2000SR processing module specific:
After the sample bar code was read and before all Change the processing module status to Stopped
tests were aspirated, one of the following occurred: to change the test status to Exception.
Processing module was paused 1. Stop the processing module by performing one
LAS became inoperable of the following:
Press the stop key on the processing module
keypad.
Select the processing module graphic on the
Snapshot screen, and then select F6 - Stop.
2. Delete the exceptions, see Delete an exception,

page 5-299.
3. Start up the processing module, seeStart up the

page 5-13.
The message "The location (x) has a bar coded kit. Do you still want to assign this
location?" displays when assigning a location for a non-bar coded reagent.

A bar coded reagent is in the position entered for 1. Locate an empty position.
the non-bar coded reagent.
2. Enter this position for the non-bar coded reagent
A bar coded reagent was removed but the 1. Select OK to allow the system to assign this
reagent carousel was not rescanned to update location for the non-bar coded reagent.
the availability of the position entered.
2. Verify the position is empty.
Touchscreen monitor display is blank

Power was turned off to the monitor. Power on the monitor.
Monitor power cable is unplugged. Plug in the monitor power cable.
Monitor data cable is unplugged. Plug in the monitor data cable. See Reseat cables
to the SCC, page 10-710.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Monitor has failed. Replace the touch-screen monitor, page 9-291
Monitor port failure on CPU hardware failure.
Touchscreen monitor fails to respond

Touch-screen connector is loose or 1. Reseat or reconnect the touch-screen connector.
disconnected. See Reseat cables to the SCC, page 10-710.
3. Verify the touch-screen operation.

Monitor has failed. Replace the touch-screen monitor, page 9-291.
Monitor not calibrated hardware failure.
Unable to delete results

Results are being transmitted to the host. Result No corrective action is required.
status is "Pending Transmission". Wait until transmission is complete, and then delete
the results.
Transmission was requested when the system is 1. Reconfigure the host communication to off. A
configured for host communication but a host message displays.
computer is not connected. Result status is
"Pending Transmission". 2. Select OK to clear results waiting to be sent to
the host, and then delete results.
The host mode is set to collate and not all of the No corrective action is required. Release or delete
results have been released. Result status is the associated SIDs, and then delete the result.
"Pending Collation".
Unable to find specific patient or QC results

The find was performed using time only and the Do not enter multiple dates when searching for a
time range spanned two days. specific time interval.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Undefined fields for assay parameters display and print differently

Undefined fields for assay parameters may display No corrective action is required.
as zero or are blank.
UPS (uninterruptible power supply) is activated

Main power source to the processing module(s) and For system with an RSH (robotic sample handler):
sample handler is interrupted. 1. Stop the sample handler by performing one of
the following:
Press the stop key on the sample handler
keypad.
Select the sample handler graphic on the
Snapshot screen, and then select F6 - Stop.
NOTE: You have a maximum of ten minutes to
stop the RSH before losing backup power from
the UPS.
2. Perform one of the following procedures:

For i 2000/i 2000SR:
Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier
transport and carrier positioner(s) (RSH),
page 10-708

and resolve.

5. For systems with a SSH (standard sample

handler) or LAS (laboratory automation system)
carousel sample handler:
Determine the cause of the power interruption
and resolve.
Perform Power on the processing module
and/or sample handler, page 5-7.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Peripheral devices observed problems

Observed problems for ARCHITECT System peripheral devices are
grouped by:
ARCHITECT ARM observed problems, page 10-626
Printer observed problems, page 10-646
ARCHITECT ARM observed problems
Observed problems for the ARCHITECT ARM include:

A to D timeout (ARM), page 10-628
ARM accessory is not functioning, page 10-628
ARM decontamination mode aborted, page 10-629
illuminated (ARM), page 10-631
illuminated (ARM), page 10-632
Concentrated wash buffer empty (ARM), page 10-635
Decontamination is in process (ARM), page 10-635
High outlet pressure indicator illuminates (ARM), page 10-637
Invalid format of ARM message "message string", page 10-640
Low inlet pressure indicator illuminates (ARM), page 10-641
SCI (serial communication interface) process timeout (ARM),
page 10-644

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Temperature indicator illuminates (ARM), page 10-646
Water quality error indicator illuminates (ARM), page 10-646
A to D timeout (ARM)
This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic

Reconstitution Module) accessory.

A temporary failure to receive data from the A to 1. Power off the ARM (i System), page 5-20.
D converter occurred.
page 5-20.
3. Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i

System), page 5-60.
Hardware failure: 1. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve
Main board any hardware failure.
Sensor board 2. Change the wash buffer transfer option,

page 10-711, to manual while waiting for service
assistance.
3. Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-51, as

required.
4. Replenish wash buffer manually and update

ARM accessory is not functioning


A failure occurred on the ARM and cannot be 1. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve
corrected without a service call. any hardware failure.
2. Change the wash buffer transfer option,

assistance.

required.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
ARM accessory is stopped


The replace buffer key was not pressed after 1. Press replace buffer on the ARM keypad to
replacing a buffer container. bring the ARM to Ready status.

System), page 5-60.
The stop key on the ARM keypad was pressed. Press the stop key, and then the start key on the
ARM keypad.
Keypad any hardware failure.

assistance.

required.

ARM decontamination mode aborted


Decontamination procedure was stopped in 1. Power off the ARM (i System), page 5-20.
mid-cycle.
page 5-20.
3. Flush the ARM, page 10-711.
4. Replace concentrated wash buffer on the ARM (i

System), page 5-55.

System), page 5-60.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
ARM message not sent


SCC cannot connect to the ARM. 1. Reseat cables to the SCC, page 10-710, and to
the ARM.
2. Press the stop key, and then the start key on the
ARM keypad.

page 5-20.

System), page 5-60.
6. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5, if error

continues.
EMF (electromagnetic fields) interference is Move the RS-232 cable so it is not near the power
affecting the RS-232 data cable because it is too cord.
close to the power cord.

assistance.

required.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

illuminated (ARM)


Concentrated wash buffer is contaminated. Replace concentrated wash buffer on the ARM (i
System), page 5-55.
Concentrated wash buffer was received frozen Perform the following steps to mix the buffer:
and not properly mixed before use. 1. Clean and dry a 3 inch (8 cm) magnetic stirrer.
2. Open the concentrated wash buffer container.
3. Place the magnetic stirrer into the concentrated

wash buffer container.
4. Position the container onto the center of a

magnetic stirrer with a top plate dimension of at
least 7 inches by 7 inches (17.7 cm by 17.7 cm).
5. Adjust the mixing speed to the highest possible

setting, and then mix for a minimum of 20
minutes.

Pump any hardware failure.
Conductivity sensor 2. Change the wash buffer transfer option,

Sensor board page 10-711, to manual while waiting for service
assistance.
Pressure sensor
required.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

illuminated (ARM)


AxSYM buffer was placed on ARM instead of 1. Remove the buffer container.
Concentrated Wash Buffer.
Or
Concentrated wash buffer is contaminated.
3. Replace concentrated wash buffer on the ARM (i
System), page 5-55.
Concentrated wash buffer was frozen and not Perform the following steps to mix the buffer:
properly mixed before use. 1. Clean and dry a 3 inch (8 cm) magnetic stirrer.
2. Open the concentrated wash buffer container.
3. Place the magnetic stirrer into the concentrated

wash buffer container.
4. Position the container onto the center of a

magnetic stirrer with a top plate dimension of at
least 7 inches by 7 inches (17.7 cm by 17.7 cm).
5. Adjust the mixing speed to the highest possible

setting, and then mix for a minimum of 20
minutes.

Pump any hardware failure.
Conductivity sensor 2. Change the wash buffer transfer option,

Sensor board page 10-711, to manual while waiting for service
assistance.
Pressure sensor
required.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Calibration check failure (ARM)



assistance.

required.

Checksum failure (ARM)


Handshaking sequence failed between two circuit 1. Power off the ARM (i System), page 5-20.
boards.
page 5-20.

System), page 5-60.

assistance.

required.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Communication timeout (ARM)


ARM accessory is turned off. 1. Power on and initialize the ARM (i System),
page 5-20.

System), page 5-60.
SCC did not receive a response from the ARM. 1. Reseat cables to the SCC, page 10-710, and to
the ARM.
ARM keypad.

page 5-20.

System), page 5-60.

continues.

assistance.

required.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Concentrated wash buffer empty (ARM)


Concentrated wash buffer container has less 1. Replace concentrated wash buffer on the ARM (i
than 100 mL remaining. System), page 5-55.

System), page 5-60.
Wash buffer tubing assembly any hardware failure.

assistance.

required.

Decontamination is in process (ARM)


ARM decontamination procedure is in process. 1. Wait until ARM decontamination is complete.

System), page 5-60.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Flood condition (ARM)
This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT ARM accessory.

Fluid leaked from the concentrated wash buffer 1. Adjust the gravity drain waste tubing to ensure it
container and the gravity drain tube is crimped or is not crimped and allows the waste to drain
not properly positioned. freely.
Shutdown was selected from the SCC (system Perform the following prior to shutting down the
control center) while the ARM was in the process SCC:
of filling the wash buffer reservoir. 1. Select the supply status button on the
Snapshot screen.
2. Verify FILL IN PROGRESS does not display next

to the wash buffer icon.
If FILL IN PROGRESS displays wait until the
process is complete and an update of the
supplies has occurred.
ARM fluidics system has an internal leak. 1. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve
Or any hardware failure.
Hardware failure: 2. Change the wash buffer transfer option,
Flood detector page 10-711, to manual while waiting for service
assistance.
Main board
required.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
High outlet pressure indicator illuminates (ARM)


SCC (system control center) or processing 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any error
module has closed the inlet valve causing the codes that occurred at the same time as this
outgoing wash buffer pressure to exceed 15 psi message.
(103 Kpa).

error code.
Pressure sensor any hardware failure.
Processing module page 10-711, to manual while waiting for service
assistance.

required.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Invalid ARM error code


A communication problem has occurred. 1. Reseat cables to the SCC, page 10-710, and to
the ARM.
ARM keypad.

page 5-20.

System), page 5-60.

continues.

assistance.

required.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Invalid ARM status code


the ARM.
ARM keypad.

page 5-20.

System), page 5-60.

continues.

assistance.

required.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Invalid format of ARM message "message string"


the ARM.
ARM keypad.

page 5-20.

System), page 5-60.

continues.

assistance.

required.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Low inlet pressure indicator illuminates (ARM)


External water supply pressure dropped below 8 Increase external water supply pressure.
psi (55 Kpa) and 2.2 LPM flow rate.
Tubing from the external water supply to the ARM 1. Correct pinch in tubing or replace tubing from
is pinched. external water supply to the ARM.

System), page 5-60.
Pressure sensor any hardware failure.

assistance.

required.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Meter handshaking failure (ARM)


Handshaking sequence failed between two circuit 1. Power off the ARM (i System), page 5-20.
boards.
page 5-20.

System), page 5-60.

assistance.

required.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Motor stall (ARM)


External water supply was turned off. 1. Turn on the external water supply.
3. Disconnect the water inlet tubing. See ARM

connectors (i System), page 1-113, for location
of the tubing connection.
4. Hold the end of the tubing over a sink or

container, and then press the connector at the
end of the tubing until water flows out.
5. Flush the tubing for 2-3 minutes to ensure all air

is cleared from the water system.
6. Release the connector at the end of the tubing,

and then reconnect the tubing to the ARM.

page 5-20.

System), page 5-60.
External water supply is restricted. 1. Correct pinch in tubing or replace tubing from
external water supply to the ARM.

System), page 5-60.
External water supply pressure dropped below 8 Increase external water supply pressure.
psi (55Kpa) and 2.2 LPM flow rate.
Internal tubing from valve block to pump any hardware failure.
Pump 2. Change the wash buffer transfer option,

Stepper motor board page 10-711, to manual while waiting for service
assistance.
Power supply
valve block 3. Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-51, as
required.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
SCI (serial communication interface) process timeout (ARM)


Temporary communication error in the ARM. 1. Power off the ARM (i System), page 5-20.

page 5-20.

System), page 5-60.

assistance.

required.

Sensor cable disconnected (ARM)


Sensor cable on the concentrated wash buffer 1. Reconnect the sensor cable from the
tubing assembly is not properly connected. concentrated wash buffer tubing assembly to the
ARM.

System), page 5-60.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Tubing assembly is not calibrated. 1. Calibrate the ARM level sense, page 10-712.

System), page 5-60.
Wash buffer tubing assembly any hardware failure.

assistance.

required.

System flush is in process (ARM)


ARM flush procedure is in process. 1. Wait until the flush procedure is complete.
2. Press the start key on the ARM keypad to bring

the ARM to Ready status.

System), page 5-60.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Temperature indicator illuminates (ARM)


Temperature of the external water supply is not 1. Adjust the temperature of the external water
within the range 15-37C. supply to be within the range 15-37C.
2. Contact your Area Customer Support if the

temperature of the external water supply is within
the range 15-37C.
Temperature sensor any hardware failure.

assistance.

required.

Water quality error indicator illuminates (ARM)


Water supply does not meet Reagent Grade 1. Correct the water quality or contamination
Type II specification. problem with the external water supply.
Or
2. Flush the ARM, page 10-711.
Tubing from water supply is contaminated.
Or
External water supply is contaminated.
Inlet cell hardware failure.
Valve 1
Valve block
Printer observed problems
Observed printer problems include:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Incomplete comment printed on the Maintenance History Report,

page 10-647
Print window displays behind the Help window, page 10-647
Print is cut off at the bottom of the page when printing from the online
documentation, page 10-648
Print on reports is too light to read, page 10-648
Report will not print, page 10-648
Sample report does not print, page 10-649
Windows printer error displays, page 10-649
Incomplete comment printed on the Maintenance History

Report

The comment was more than 255 characters in Limit the comment length to 255 characters or view
length. the comment on the Details for maintenance log
The Details for maintenance log window allows you window.
to enter 275 characters, but the Maintenance
History Report only prints 255 characters.
Print window displays behind the Help window

The option Print the selected heading and all No corrective action is required. To print:
subtopics was selected on the Print Topics window. 1. Minimize the Help window.
2. Select Print on the Print Window.
3. Select the ARCHITECT System Operations

Manual icon to restore the Help window.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Print is cut off at the bottom of the page when printing from the
online documentation

HTML functionality does not support page breaks. No corrective action is required.
Compare the information on the printout to the
information on the screen.
Print on reports is too light to read

Printer cartridge is empty. Replace printer cartridge.
Printer head is damaged. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.
Report will not print

Report was initiated while a print screen request No corrective action is required.
was printing. Wait until the print screen has printed to avoid
having problems with printed reports.
Printer is out of paper. Add paper to the printer.
Paper tray is open. Close the paper tray.
Printer is disconnected or not powered on. Verify the printer is plugged in, on, and ready.
Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam.
Failed print job is in the printer queue. Select the Printer status icon on the Snapshot
screen, and then delete the failed print job in the
printer queue.
Printer cartridge is damaged or heat stressed. Replace the printer cartridge.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample report does not print

The system is configured to print reports No corrective action is required.
automatically and all tests associated with the Access the Sample status screen to verify the
sample are not complete or not released. status of all tests ordered for the sample. Wait until
all tests are complete or released and the report will
print.
Windows printer error displays

Error occurred with the printer. 1. Select Cancel on the Printers Folder message to
respond to the printer error.
NOTE: Do not select the Retry button.
2. Resolve the printer problem.
3. Reprint the report.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
System diagnostics Section 10
System diagnostics
Diagnostic procedures allow you to check the status of assemblies and
mechanisms in reaction to certain hardware malfunctions on your
ARCHITECT System.
The ARCHITECT System software provides a user-friendly interface for
performing diagnostic activities. The Diagnostic screen displays the
available diagnostic procedures. Once you initiate a procedure,
step-by-step instructions walk you through its completion.
System diagnostics topics include:
Provides a description of the software screens and windows
associated with diagnostic activities and step-by-step
instructions for performing related procedures.
Diagnostic categories and procedure descriptions, page 10-657
Provides a description of all diagnostic procedures.
Diagnostics screen
From the Diagnostics screen you can initiate a diagnostic procedure.
You can also access windows to view information for a procedure prior
to performing it and print the Procedure report.
The procedures display by module and by category (tab). Each tab on
the screen displays the procedures available for the selected module.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 10 System diagnostics
Figure 10.3: Diagnostics screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Diagnostics screen field descriptions,

To display this screen, see Access the Diagnostics screen, page 10-651.
View diagnostic procedure information, page 10-652
Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653
Access the Diagnostics screen
Perform this procedure to display the Diagnostics screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Diagnostics screen:

Select System from the menu bar, and then select Diagnostics.
The Diagnostics screen displays with the Reaction Mechanisms tab
selected.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Procedures - Diagnostics screen
Procedures you can perform from the Diagnostics screen and its
View diagnostic procedure information
Perform this procedure to display the Version details for procedure

(Diagnostics) window. From this window you can view information
for a diagnostic procedure prior to performing it. This information
includes the version number, required module status, and required
user access level.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view diagnostic procedure information:

1. Select the desired Module option on the Diagnostics screen.
The diagnostic procedures for the selected module display on the
Reaction Mechanisms tab.
2. Select a different tab to display the diagnostic procedures for that

category. (optional)
The diagnostic procedures for the selected category display.
3. Select the desired procedure from the DIAGNOSTICS

PROCEDURES box, and then select F6 - Version.
The Version details for procedure window displays.
Version details for procedure (diagnostics) window, page 10-656

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Perform a diagnostic procedure
Perform this procedure to:

Install assays
Install procedures
Verify component replacement procedures
Diagnose hardware malfunctions
NOTE: Before you perform a specific procedure, be sure you are
familiar with the purpose of the procedure and are aware of the
required materials and module statuses.
CAUTION: Moving Parts. Diagnostic procedures may
expose operators to moving parts that can potentially cause
personal injury. Untrained operators should not perform
these procedures.

Module status Procedure dependent
User access level Procedure dependent
Supplies Procedure dependent
To perform a diagnostic procedure:

1. Select the desired Module option on the Diagnostics screen.
The diagnostic procedures for the selected module display on the
Reaction Mechanisms tab.
2. Select a different tab to display the diagnostic procedures for that

category. (optional)
3. Select the desired procedure from the DIAGNOSTICS

PROCEDURES list, and then select F5 - Perform.

The Diagnostic perform window displays. A description of the
procedure displays in the INSTRUCTIONS box.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
5. Select Proceed, and then follow the instructions in the

INSTRUCTIONS box.
You are prompted to enter information if the procedure requires
additional data.
6. Enter the required information in the User input data entry box,
and then select Continue.
7. Select Activity to view the progress of the procedure. (optional)

The activity of the module displays in the Activity list. To return
to the Result list, select Results.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
8. Select Print to print the Procedure report. (optional)
Windows - Diagnostic screen
Windows you can access from the Diagnostic screen include:

Version details for procedure (diagnostics) window, page 10-656
Diagnostic perform window
From the Diagnostic perform window you can initiate a procedure.
NOTE: The display of the Diagnostic perform window is dependent on

the selected module, category, and procedure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 10.4: Diagnostic perform window
For descriptions of these fields, see Diagnostic perform window field

Version details for procedure (diagnostics) window
From the Version details for procedure window you can view
information for diagnostic procedures such as:
Procedure category and name
Current version
Required module status
Required user access level

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Figure 10.5: Version details for procedure window
For descriptions of these fields, see Version details for procedure

(diagnostics) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-133.
Diagnostic categories and procedure descriptions

Diagnostic procedures are grouped by module type, and then by
category. Each category is represented by a tab on the Diagnostics
screen.
Diagnostic categories/procedures by module type include:
Processing module - the type of processing module determines
the categories and related procedures that are available.
c System processing module diagnostic categories, page 10-658
i 2000/i 2000SR System processing module diagnostic categories,
page 10-667
Sample handler - the type of sample handler determines the
categories and related procedures that are available.
RSH diagnostic categories, page 10-684
SSH diagnostic categories, page 10-688
LAS carousel sample handler diagnostic categories (i 2000),
page 10-691

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
c System processing module diagnostic categories
Diagnostic procedures for the c System processing module are grouped

by category (tab) on the Diagnostics screen. Procedures are available in
the following categories:
Reaction mechanism diagnostics description (c System processing
module), page 10-658
Pipettor diagnostics description (c System processing module),
page 10-659
Fluidic/wash diagnostics description (c System processing module),
page 10-660
Bar code reader diagnostics description (c System processing module),
page 10-661
Module diagnostics description (c System processing module),
page 10-662
Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (c System processing modules),
page 10-663
Fuse/motor diagnostics description (c System processing module),
page 10-663
Optic/temperature diagnostics description (c System processing
module), page 10-664
Carousel diagnostics description (c System processing module),
page 10-665
Precision diagnostics description (c System processing module),
page 10-666
Reaction mechanism diagnostics description (c System

processing module)
One reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure, 3126 Mixer Vibration

Test, is available. You may need to perform this procedure when
replacing a reaction mechanism component or diagnosing error
messages or observed problems associated with reaction mechanisms.
To perform this procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure,
page 10-653.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3126 Mixer Vibration Test
Perform this reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure to test the

vibration function of Mixer 1 and 2 at low and high frequencies.

Ready
Pipettor diagnostics description (c System processing module)
You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when

replacing pipettor components or diagnosing error messages or
observed problems associated with pipettors:
1151 Probe Alignment Test, page 10-659
1161 Probe Move, page 10-660
5405 Crash Sensor Test, page 10-660
To perform a procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653.
1151 Probe Alignment Test
Perform this pipettors diagnostic procedure to move the probe to

individual locations, allowing visual observation of the probe position
in the wash cup and carousel positions.

10 minutes Saline Stopped, Warming, or
Sample cups Ready
Reagent cartridges
vary depending on
sample handler
configuration.
Sample carrier
(RSH)
Sample tube (LAS)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
1161 Probe Move
Perform this pipettors diagnostic procedure to move the sample

pipettor to the sample carousel and the reagent pipettors to the
onboard solution areas in preparation for component replacement.

Time variable None Stopped, Warming, or
Ready
5405 Crash Sensor Test
Perform this pipettors diagnostic procedure to test the pipettor probe

crash sensor for all pipettors.

Ready
Fluidic/wash diagnostics description (c System processing

module)

replacing liquid level sense or wash components or diagnosing error
messages or observed problems associated with liquid level sense or
wash components:
3625 Pipettors LLS Test, page 10-661

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3610 Sample Handler LLS Test
Perform this fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure to test the ability of

the sample probe to detect liquid in the sample carrier.

3 minutes Tap water or saline Warming or Ready
Sample cups
vary depending on
sample configuration.
Sample carrier
(RSH)
Sample tube (LAS)
SH bar code tool
(LAS)
3625 Pipettors LLS Test

the sample probe and reagent probes (R1 and R2) to detect liquid in
the wash cups and carousel positions.

5 minutes DI water Stopped, Warming, or
20 mL sample Ready
2-90 mL reagent
cartridges
Bar code reader diagnostics description (c System processing

module)
Laser radiation when open for the c 8000 sample and
reagent carousel covers and the c 16000 sample carousel
cover. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.

replacing a bar code reader or diagnosing error messages or observed
problems associated with bar code readers:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3206 Reagent Bar Code Test, page 10-662

3251 Sample Carousel Bar Code Test, page 10-662
3206 Reagent Bar Code Test
Perform this bar code readers diagnostic procedure to test the ability
of the R1 and R2 reagent supply centers to read reagent cartridge bar
code labels at any position on the R1 and R2 reagent supply centers.

5 minutes Bar coded reagent Stopped, Warming, or
cartridges Ready
3251 Sample Carousel Bar Code Test
Perform this bar code readers diagnostic procedure to test the ability
of the sample carousel bar code reader to read the sample carousel ID
and bar coded sample tubes at any position on the sample carousel.

5 minutes Bar coded sample Stopped, Warming, or
tubes Ready
Module diagnostics description (c System processing module)

diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with
processing module components or the keypad:
3720 Keypad Test, page 10-662
4080 Module Initialization, page 10-663
3720 Keypad Test
Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to test the processing

module keypad function.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: You cannot test the run, carousel advance, and stop keys on
the keypad during this procedure.

Ready
4080 Module Initialization
Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to perform a processing

module initialization.

Ready
Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (c System processing

modules)
One solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure, 3400 Interlock Sensors

replacing solenoids, or diagnosing error messages or observed
problems associated with solenoids and sensors.
page 10-653.
3400 Interlock Sensors Test
Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test all the

interlock sensors: R1 reagent supply center cover, R2 reagent supply
center cover, sample carousel cover, and RSH (robotic sample handler)
covers.

Ready
Fuse/motor diagnostics description (c System processing

module)
Perform the 5142 Wash Station Up/Down, page 10-664 diagnostic

procedure when replacing the cuvette dry tip or diagnosing error
messages or observed problems associated with the wash station
motor.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
5142 Wash Station Up/Down
Perform this fuses/motors diagnostic procedure to check the up and

down function of the cuvette wash assembly and to visually check the
cuvette wash nozzles and dry tip for alignment.

Ready
Optic/temperature diagnostics description (c System

processing module)

replacing optics or temperature components or diagnosing error
messages or observed problems associated with optics or temperature:
1000 Absorbance Reads, page 10-664
1008 Optics Total Test, page 10-664
1010 Cuvette Integrity Test, page 10-665
1000 Absorbance Reads
Perform this optics/temperature diagnostic procedure to take

wavelength reads for a user-defined sample. You can select the number
of read cycles, delay in seconds between read cycles, and the primary
and/or secondary wavelengths.

5 minutes DI water Stopped, Warming, or
Sample Ready
Calibrated pipette
1008 Optics Total Test
Perform this optics/temperature diagnostic procedure to test the

variability in the optics reads throughout a 30 or 33 read test. You can
perform one or all of the following optics tests:
Quick test

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Dark current test

Shutter test
10-30 minutes depending DI water Stopped, Warming, or
on option chosen Calibrated pipette Ready
1010 Cuvette Integrity Test
Perform this optics/temperature diagnostic procedure to verify

cuvettes meet acceptance criteria for sample testing.

Ready
Carousel diagnostics description (c System processing

module)

replacing sample, reagent, or reaction carousel components, or
carousels:
3010 Reaction Carousel Home / Move, page 10-665
3011 Reagent / Sample Carousel Home, page 10-666
3010 Reaction Carousel Home / Move
Perform this carousels diagnostic procedure to test the reaction

carousel movement, home the carousel, and check for step loss.

Ready

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3011 Reagent / Sample Carousel Home
Perform this carousels diagnostic procedure to test R1 and R2 reagent

supply centers and sample carousel movement, home R1 and R2
reagent supply centers and sample carousel, and check for step loss.

Ready
Precision diagnostics description (c System processing

module)

replacing fluidics components or diagnosing error messages or
observed problems associated with precision and accuracy:
2043 Sample Pipettor Check
Perform this precision diagnostic procedure to visually check the

dispensing accuracy of the sample pipettor using a calibrated manual
pipette.

Sample cups Ready
Calibrated pipette
capable of
dispensing 20 L
vary depending on
sample handler
configuration.
Sample carrier
(RSH)
Sample tube (LAS)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2044 R1 Pipettor Check

dispensing accuracy of the R1 pipettor using a calibrated manual
pipette.

10 sample cups Ready
1 large (90 mL)

reagent cartridge
10 small (55 mL) or
large (90 mL)
reagent cartridges,
as appropriate
Calibrated pipette
capable of
dispensing 100 L

dispensing accuracy of the R2 pipettor using a calibrated manual
pipette.

10 sample cups Ready
1 large (90 mL)

reagent cartridge
10 small (55 mL) or
large (90 mL)
reagent cartridges,
as appropriate
Calibrated pipette
capable of
dispensing 100 L
i 2000/i 2000SR System processing module diagnostic categories
Diagnostic procedures for an i System processing module(s) are

grouped by category (tab) on the Diagnostics screen. Procedures are
available for the following categories:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

processing modules), page 10-668
Pipettor diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules),
page 10-670
Fluidic/wash diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing
modules), page 10-671
Syringe/pump diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing
Bar code reader diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing
Module diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules),
page 10-675
Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (i System processing modules),
page 10-677
Optic/temperature diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing
Carousel diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules),
page 10-680

processing modules)

replacing components associated with RVs (reaction vessels) or
diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with RV
mechanisms:
3115 Vortexer Test, page 10-669
3125 Hopper Level Sensor Test, page 10-669
3150 Diverter Test, page 10-669
5220 RV Sensors Test, page 10-669
8000 Unload RVs, page 10-670
8010 Reverse RV Loader Wheel, page 10-670

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3115 Vortexer Test
Perform this reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure to test

vortexer function.

Ready
3125 Hopper Level Sensor Test
Perform this reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure to test RV

hopper level sensors.

Ready
3150 Diverter Test
Perform this reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure to test the

wash zone, RV unloader, RV load, RV load shutter, and STAT (i 2000SR)
diverter sensors.

1 minute None Warming or Ready
5220 RV Sensors Test
Perform this reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure to test each

RV loader sensor function. You load one RV (reaction vessel) and it
passes through each of the RV loader sensors. The system tests each
sensor with and without an RV in its path. The system tests the
following RV loader sensors: RV load diverter, RV drop point sensor,
RV load point sensor, process path insertion point sensor, RV hopper
level sensor, RV load diverter shutter sensor, and STAT diverter sensor
(i 2000SR).

Ready

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
8000 Unload RVs
Perform this reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure to remove

fluid from the RVs (reaction vessels) in the outer process path track
and unload them.

Ready
8010 Reverse RV Loader Wheel
Perform this reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure to reverse the

RV loader wheel to allow removal of a jammed RV.

Ready
Pipettor diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing

modules)

replacing pipettor components or diagnosing error messages or
observed problems associated with pipettors:
1100 Pipettor Test, page 10-670
1155 Probe Straightness Test, page 10-671
1160 Pipettor Move, page 10-671
5400 Crash Sensor Test, page 10-671
page 10-653.
1100 Pipettor Test
Perform this pipettors diagnostic procedure to test pipettor movement

and check for motor step loss.

Ready

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
1155 Probe Straightness Test
Perform this pipettors diagnostic procedure to check probe

straightness of the R1, R2, sample, and STAT (i 2000SR) pipettors.

2-5 minutes Cotton swab Stopped, Warming, or
1160 Pipettor Move
Perform this pipettors diagnostic procedure to move the sample or

STAT (i 2000SR) pipettor to the wash station in preparation for
component replacement.
Required module
Estimated time Materials needed
status
Ready
5400 Crash Sensor Test
Perform this pipettors diagnostic procedure to test the pipettor probe

crash sensor for the sample, R1, R2, or STAT (i 2000SR) pipettors.

Ready
Fluidic/wash diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR

processing modules)

replacing liquid level sense or wash zone components, or diagnosing
error messages or observed problems associated with liquid level sense
or wash zones:
1170 Wash Station Test, page 10-672
2050 WZ Aspiration Test, page 10-672
3800 Pressure Monitoring Test, page 10-673

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
6037 WZ Probe Straightness, page 10-673

1170 Wash Station Test
Perform this fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure to test the R1 and R2

wash station function.

Ready
2050 WZ Aspiration Test
Perform this fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure to test wash zone

aspiration. The wash zone dispenses and aspirates buffer from 15 RVs
(reaction vessels)-5 RVs per wash aspiration position.

3600 LLS Test

the probe to detect liquid for the following locations: RV2, RV24,
RV48 (i 2000SR), and the reagent carousel outer, middle, or inner ring.

6 minutes WZ Probe Warming or Ready
maintenance water
bottle
Tap water

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3610 Sample Handler LLS Test

the sample or STAT (i 2000SR) probe to detect liquid in the sample
carrier, LAS sample carousel, or from a sample cup on the LAS track.

3 minutes Sample cup Warming or Ready
Sample tube
Tap water or saline
vary depending on
sample handler
configuration.
Sample carrier
(RSH/SSH)
LAS sample
carousel (i 2000)
3800 Pressure Monitoring Test
Perform this fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure to test the operation

of the pressure monitoring boards and transducers for the sample, R1,
R2, or STAT (i 2000SR) pipettors.

30 minutes per pipettor Required materials Warming or Ready
depend on the pipettor
tested and may
include:
WZ probe
maintenance water
bottle
Sample carrier
Sample tube
Tap water
6037 WZ Probe Straightness
Perform this fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure to visually check the

straightness of the wash zone probes.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: You should run diagnostic procedure 2050 WZ Aspiration Test

after completing this test.

Ready
Syringe/pump diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR

processing modules)
One syringe/pump diagnostic procedure, 2110 Syringes and Pumps

replacing a syringe or pump component or diagnosing error messages
or observed problems associated with syringes or pumps.
page 10-653.
2110 Syringes and Pumps Test
Perform this syringes/pumps diagnostic procedure to test operation of

all pumps, syringes, and their sensors.

1 minute None Warming or Ready
Bar code reader diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR

processing modules)
exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam. Use of
controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.

replacing the reagent bar code reader or diagnosing error messages or
observed problems associated with the bar code reader:
3200 Reagent Bar Code Reader Test, page 10-675
3210 Reagent Bar Code Calibration, page 10-675

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3200 Reagent Bar Code Reader Test
Perform this bar code readers diagnostic procedure to test the reagent
bar code reader.
NOTE: Only the first 20 characters of each bar code display.

5 minutes Bar code calibration Stopped, Warming, or
tool Ready
3210 Reagent Bar Code Calibration
Perform this bar code readers diagnostic procedure to calibrate

positions for reagent bottles.

5 minutes Bar code calibration Stopped, Warming, or
tool (2) Ready
Module diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing

modules)

preparing for a long-term shutdown or diagnosing error messages or
observed problems associated with the vacuum or keypad:
2135 Long Term Shutdown, page 10-675
3175 Vacuum System Test, page 10-676
4080 Module Initialization, page 10-676
2135 Long Term Shutdown
Perform this modules diagnostic procedure in preparation for long

term shutdown of the ARCHITECT System. This procedure flushers all

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
pumps and fluidic lines with buffer, air, deionized water, and then air,
and removes all RVs (reaction vessels).

19 minutes Wash buffer Warming or Ready
reservoir
Wash buffer transfer
tubing
Deionized water
3175 Vacuum System Test
Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to test the operation of the

vacuum system, vacuum vessels, and drain valves.

5 - 13 minutes depending None Warming or Ready
on option chosen
3700 Keypad Test
Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to test the processing

module keypad function.
NOTE: You cannot test the run, carousel advance, and stop keys on
the keypad during this procedure.

Ready
4080 Module Initialization
Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to perform a processing

module initialization.

Ready

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (i System processing

modules)

replacing solenoids and sensors or diagnosing error messages or
observed problems associated with solenoids or sensors:
3400 Interlock Sensors Test, page 10-677
3410 Level Sensors Test, page 10-677
5131 WZ, Wash Station, Valve Test, page 10-677
5132 Syringe/Vacuum/PT/T Valve Test, page 10-678
5133 Other Valves & Diverter Test, page 10-678
3400 Interlock Sensors Test
Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test all

interlock sensors: front and rear processing center covers, right and
left processing queue access doors (SSH), LAS carousel cover (LAS), RSH
covers (RSH), reagent carousel cover, and waste chute sensor.

Ready
3410 Level Sensors Test
Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test wash

buffer, pre-trigger, and trigger level sensors.

Ready
5131 WZ, Wash Station, Valve Test
Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test wash zone

1 and 2 valves, and R1 and R2 wash station valves.

Ready

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
5132 Syringe/Vacuum/PT/T Valve Test
Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test the syringe

valves, wash zone vacuum/drain valves, and pre-trigger/trigger valves.

Ready
5133 Other Valves & Diverter Test
Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test the

following solenoids and valves:
Wash station vacuum/drain valve
Wash zone diverter
RV unload solenoid
RV load diverter
Air sensor
STAT diverter (i 2000SR)
Ready

modules)

replacing fuses or motors or diagnosing error messages or observed
problems associated with fuses or motors:
5100 PP & Carousel Motor Tests, page 10-679
5110 Pipettor & Syringe Motor Tests, page 10-679
5120 Pump Motor Tests, page 10-679
5700 Fuse Status, page 10-679

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
5100 PP & Carousel Motor Tests
Perform this fuses/motors diagnostic procedure to home the process

path, outer carousel, inner carousel, middle carousel, wash zone 1,
wash zone 2, shutter, RV loader wheel, and RV loader transport
motors.

Ready
5110 Pipettor & Syringe Motor Tests
Perform this fuses/motors diagnostic procedure to home the sample

pipettor theta and Z, R1 pipettor theta and Z, R2 pipettor theta and Z,
STAT pipettor theta and Z (i 2000SR), sample syringe, R1 syringe, R2
syringe, and STAT syringe (i 2000SR) motors.

Ready
5120 Pump Motor Tests
Perform this fuses/motors diagnostic procedure to home the

pre-trigger, trigger, R1 wash station, R2 wash station, wash zone 1,
wash zone 2, sample pipettor, R1 pipettor, R2 pipettor, and STAT
pipettor pump (i 2000SR) motors.

Ready
5700 Fuse Status
Perform this fuses/motors diagnostic procedure to display the status of

+5, +12, and -12 volt fuses.

Ready

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Optic/temperature diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR

processing modules)

replacing optics or temperature components or diagnosing error
messages or observed problems associated with optics or temperature:
1020 Optics Background, page 10-680
1030 Shutter, page 10-680
1020 Optics Background
Perform this optics/temperature diagnostic procedure to determine

the optics background reading. The system takes three readings; first
with no RV (reaction vessel), second with an empty RV, and third with
Pre-Trigger Solution in the RV.
NOTE: The system does not use normalization and linearity

parameters during this procedure. Raw counts must be between 3 RLU
- 500 RLU.

1030 Shutter
Perform this optics/temperature diagnostic procedure to verify correct

shutter operation.

Ready
Carousel diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing

modules)
One carousels diagnostic procedure, 3000 Reagent Carousel Test, is

available. You may need to perform this procedure when replacing the
reagent carousel or diagnosing error messages or observed problems
associated with the reagent carousel.
page 10-653.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3000 Reagent Carousel Test
Perform this carousels diagnostic procedure to test the reagent inner

and outer carousel movement and check for step loss.

Ready

modules)

replacing fluidics components or diagnosing error messages or
observed problems associated with precision and accuracy:
2009 STAT Pipettor Check (i 2000SR), page 10-684

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2001 Sample Pipettor Check

dispensing precision and accuracy of the sample pipettor.

10 minutes Saline Warming or Ready
Calibrated manual
pipettor (capable of
pipetting 50 L)
vary depending on
sample handler
configuration.
Sample cup
(RSH/SSH)
Sample carrier
(RSH/SSH)
LAS sample
carousel (i 2000)
Sample tube
(i 2000SR LAS)

dispensing precision and accuracy of the R1 pipettor.

Calibrated manual
pipetting 50 L)

dispensing precision and accuracy of the R2 pipettor.

Calibrated manual
pipetting 50 L)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2004 Pre-Trigger Check

dispensing precision and accuracy of Pre-Trigger Solution.

Calibrated manual
pipetting 100 L)
2005 Trigger Check

dispensing precision and accuracy of Trigger Solution.

Calibrated manual
pipetting 300 L)
2006 Wash Zone 1 Check

dispensing precision and accuracy of the wash zone 1 manifold.

Calibrated manual
pipetting 400 L)
2007 Wash Zone 2 Check

dispensing precision and accuracy of the wash zone 2 manifold.

Calibrated manual
pipetting 400 L)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2009 STAT Pipettor Check (i 2000SR)
Perform this precision diagnostic procedure to measure the dispensing

precision and accuracy of the STAT pipettor.

Calibrated manual
pipetting 50 L)
vary depending on
sample handler
configuration.
Sample cup (RSH)
Sample carrier
(RSH)
Sample tube
(i 2000SR LAS)
RSH diagnostic categories
Diagnostic procedures for the RSH (robotic sample handler) are

Bar code reader diagnostics description (RSH), page 10-684
Module diagnostics description (RSH), page 10-685
Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (RSH), page 10-687
Fuse/motor diagnostics description (RSH), page 10-687
Bar code reader diagnostics description (RSH)

radiation exposure.

replacing RSH (robotic sample handler) bar code readers or diagnosing
error messages or observed problems associated with bar code readers:
3222 RSH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-685

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3252 RSH Bar Code Reader Test, page 10-685

3222 RSH Bar Code Calibration

positions for sample ID bar codes.

5 minutes Sample carrier Warming or Ready
Load queue bar
code tool
3252 RSH Bar Code Reader Test
Perform this bar code readers diagnostic procedure to test the sample
bar code reader.

SH bar code tool or
bar coded tube
Module diagnostics description (RSH)

replacing RSH (robotic sample handler) components or diagnosing
error messages or observed problems associated with the sample
handler:
3317 RSH Test, page 10-686
4090 Sample Handler Initialization, page 10-686
5507 RSH Indicator Lights Test, page 10-686

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3317 RSH Test

RSH (robotic sample handler) and bar code reader.

5 minutes Sample carrier (up Warming or Ready
to 67)
Bar coded sample
tube (optional)
Saline (c System)
3710 Keypad Test
Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to test RSH (robotic sample

handler) keypad function.

Ready
4090 Sample Handler Initialization
Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to perform a sample

handler initialization.

Ready
5507 RSH Indicator Lights Test
Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to test the RSH (robotic

sample handler) indicator lights.

Ready

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (RSH)
You may need to perform the following procedures when replacing

RSH (robotic sample handler) sensors or diagnosing error messages or
observed problems associated with sensors.
3323 RSH Section Test, page 10-687
3401 Section/Bay Sensors Test, page 10-687
5506 RSH Sensor Test, page 10-687
3323 RSH Section Test
Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test the ability

of the RSH (robotic sample handler) carrier transport to pick up a
carrier from a specific location and return it to that location.

5 minutes Sample carrier Stopped, Warming, or
Ready
3401 Section/Bay Sensors Test
Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test the

carrier/tray sensors for priority and routine bays.

5 minutes Sample carriers Stopped, Warming, or
Sample trays Ready
5506 RSH Sensor Test
Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test the carrier

transport and carrier positioner sensors.

Ready
Fuse/motor diagnostics description (RSH)
One fuses/motors diagnostic procedure, 5501 RSH Motor Tests, is

available. You may need to perform this procedure when replacing

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
sample handler motors or diagnosing error messages or observed

problems associated with sample handler motors.
page 10-653.
5501 RSH Motor Tests
Perform this fuses/motors diagnostic procedure to home the following

motors: carrier transport X, carrier transport theta, carrier transport Z,
and carrier positioner.

Ready
SSH diagnostic categories
Diagnostic procedures for the SSH (standard sample handler) are

Bar code reader diagnostics description (SSH), page 10-688
Module diagnostics description (SSH), page 10-689
Fuse/motor diagnostics description (SSH), page 10-690
Bar code reader diagnostics description (SSH)

radiation exposure.

replacing SSH (standard sample handler) bar code readers or
diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with bar
code readers:
3220 SH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-689
3250 SH Bar Code Reader Test, page 10-689

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3220 SH Bar Code Calibration

positions for sample ID bar codes.

3250 SH Bar Code Reader Test
Perform this bar code readers diagnostic procedure to test load queue
and processing queue bar code readers. The bar code reader checks the
bar code width and compares the beginning of the bar code label
against the calibration point.

SH bar code tool or
bar coded tube
(optional)
Module diagnostics description (SSH)

replacing SSH (standard sample handler) components or diagnosing
error messages or observed problems associated with the sample
handler:
3315 Sample Handler Test, page 10-689
4090 Sample Handler Initialization, page 10-690
3315 Sample Handler Test

SSH (standard sample handler) and bar code readers. Two options are
available:
Verify Calibration and Cycle Carriers - tests the load queue and
processing queue bar code readers, verifies the calibration of the
load queue bar code reader, and cycles carriers to test the
operation of the SSH.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Cycle Carriers - cycles carriers to test the operation of the SSH.

Verify Calibration and Sample carrier Stopped, Warming, or
Cycle Carriers: 5 minutes SH bar code tool or Ready
bar coded sample
tubes
Cycle Carriers: 2 minutes Sample carrier Stopped, Warming or
Ready
3710 Keypad Test
Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to test SSH (standard

sample handler) keypad function.

Ready


Ready
Fuse/motor diagnostics description (SSH)
One fuses/motors diagnostic procedure, 5500 SH Motor Tests, is

available for the SSH (standard sample handler). You may need to
perform this procedure when replacing sample handler motors or
sample handler motors.
page 10-653.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
5500 SH Motor Tests
Perform this fuses/motors diagnostic procedure to home the following

motors: load queue, load transfer, unload transfer, unload queue,
processing queue, and star wheel.

Ready
LAS carousel sample handler diagnostic categories (i 2000)
Diagnostic procedures for the LAS (laboratory automated system)

carousel sample handler are grouped by category (tab) on the
Diagnostics screen. Procedures are available in the following
categories:
Bar code reader diagnostics description (LAS carousel sample handler -
i 2000), page 10-691
i 2000), page 10-692
Bar code reader diagnostics description (LAS carousel sample

handler - i 2000)
radiation exposure.

replacing the LAS carousel sample handler bar code reader or
diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with the
bar code reader:
3225 LAS Crsl Bar Code Calibration, page 10-692
3255 LAS Crsl Bar Code Test, page 10-692

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3225 LAS Crsl Bar Code Calibration
Perform this bar code readers diagnostic procedure to calibrate the

i 2000 processing queue bar code reader to the LAS carousel.

5 minutes LAS sample Warming or Ready
carousel
SH bar code tool
3255 LAS Crsl Bar Code Test
Perform this bar code readers procedure to test the processing queue
bar code reader's ability to read the i 2000 LAS sample carousel ID and
bar code tubes.

5 minutes LAS sample Warming or Ready
carousel
SH bar code tool or
bar coded tube

i 2000)
One modules diagnostic procedure, 4090 Sample Handler

Initialization, is available. You may need to perform this procedure
when diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with
the sample handler.
page 10-653.


Ready

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
SCC diagnostic categories
Diagnostic procedures for the SCC (system control center) display on

the Utilities tab on the Diagnostics screen.
installing assays and procedures or diagnosing error messages or
observed problems:
6004 Copy backup software, page 10-693
6008 Controller Configuration, page 10-694
6009 Log Utilities, page 10-694
6029 Assay Information, page 10-694
6114 Install/Delete Assays, page 10-695
6115 Install/Delete Procedures, page 10-695
6116 Update 6115 Procedure, page 10-695
6500 MAC Hardware Address, page 10-696
6004 Copy backup software
Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to copy a system software

backup to a CD or to replace a backup on your SCC (system control
center) with one on a CD.
NOTE: Performing this procedure does not backup the system

software. To backup system information, see Create a system software
backup, page 2-212.

Time variable Blank or appendable Stopped, Warming, or
CDR/CDRW or a CD Ready
containing a backup

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
6008 Controller Configuration
Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to configure the processing

module and sample handler controller board after you replace the
board or upgrade your software.

Ready
6009 Log Utilities
Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to retrieve current logs,

copy the database to CD, or copy archived logs to CD.

Time variable Materials vary Stopped, Warming, or
depending on the Ready
option selected.
Required materials
may include:
CD-R (compact disk
recordable) or
Unformatted
CD-RW (compact
disk read/write)
One or more floppy
disks
6029 Assay Information
Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to print:

A complete list of all assays installed on the ARCHITECT System
to verify the most current assay version is in use. The list
contains the assay number, assay name, and version.
Immunoassay calibrator bar code labels (i 2000SR LAS)
A ranges of numeric SID bar code labels
2 minutes Bar code labels may Stopped, Warming, or
be required depending Ready
on option selected.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
6114 Install/Delete Assays
NOTE: Requires system administrator logon.

Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to install all or selected
assays. You also use this procedure to delete selected assays.

2 minutes ARCHITECT c System Stopped, Warming, or
CD-ROM Ready
or
ARCHITECT i System
CD-ROM
6115 Install/Delete Procedures

Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to install all or selected
maintenance and diagnostic procedures. You also use this procedure
to delete selected maintenance and diagnostic procedures.

2 minutes ARCHITECT System Stopped, Warming, or
Maintenance and Ready
Diagnostic CD-ROM
6116 Update 6115 Procedure

Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to install an updated
version of diagnostic procedure 6115 Install/Delete Procedures, when
required.

2 minutes ARCHITECT System Stopped, Warming, or
Maintenance and Ready
Diagnostic CD-ROM

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
6500 MAC Hardware Address
Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to determine the MAC

(media access control) address of the secondary network interface card
installed in an SCC (system control center).

< 1 minute None Stopped, Warming, or
Ready

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 10 Miscellaneous corrective action procedures
Miscellaneous corrective action procedures

Corrective action procedures are:
A series of steps recommended to resolve a probable cause(s)
associated with an error message or observed problem
Common to more than one error code or observed problem
Miscellaneous corrective action procedures topics include:
Processing module corrective action procedures, page 10-697
Sample handler corrective action procedure, page 10-708
SCC corrective action procedure, page 10-710
ARM corrective action procedures, page 10-710
LAS corrective action procedure, page 10-714
Processing module corrective action procedures

Procedures that are often recommended as corrective actions for
resolving error messages and/or observed problems associated with the
processing module(s) include:
Clean the bar code reader window, page 10-697
Enable or disable the ICT module (c System), page 10-700
Evaluate the check valve (c System), page 10-701
Remove the sample carousel (c System), page 10-706
Reinstall the sample carousel (c System), page 10-707
Clean the bar code reader window
Perform this procedure to clean the bar code reader window when
suggested by the corrective action of an error code. This procedure
includes the steps to clean the bar code reader window in the:
RSH (robotic sample handler)
Sample carousel (c System)
Reagent supply center(s) (c System)
Reagent carousel (i System)
Prerequisite NA

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Miscellaneous corrective action procedures Section 10

Supplies Soft, lint-free tissue or lens paper
Deionized water


Laser radiation when open for all processing modules
except the c 16000 reagent carousels. Use of controls or
adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
To clean the bar code reader window:

1. Open the processing module cover(s) (not required for RSH).
2. Access the bar code reader window.
For the... Perform the following...

RSH Open the first cover on the left side of the RSH.
Sample carousel Remove the sample carousel (c System), page 10-706.
(c System)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Reagent supply a. Remove the reagent carousel cover.
center(s)
(c System) b. Remove the outer segment located at the front of the
c. Select the R1 or R2 carousel advance button to move

the empty position to the back of the reagent supply
center where the bar code reader window is located.
Reagent carousel a. Use the #2 screwdriver to remove the three
(i System) non-captive screws that hold the reagent carousel
cover in place.
NOTE: Use caution when removing screws; they are not

secured to the carousel cover.
b. Remove the reagent carousel cover by using the

handle and lifting the cover up and out of the module.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the other parts when

removing the cover.
c. Remove reagent kits located on the left side of the

reagent carousel to allow access to the bar code
reader window.
3. Locate the bar code reader window on the desired processing

module and/or RSH.
4. Gently wipe the bar code reader window with a moistened

lint-free tissue.
5. Dry the bar code reader(s) window with a lint-free tissue.
6. Prepare for operation.

RSH Close the RSH cover.
Sample carousel Reinstall the sample carousel (c System), page 10-707
(c System)
Reagent supply a. Select the R1 or R2 carousel advance button to move
center(s) the empty position to the front of the reagent supply
(c System) center.
b. Replace the outer segment.
c. Replace the carousel cover.

Reagent carousel a. Reload any reagent kits that were removed.
(i System)
b. Install the reagent carousel cover, and then tighten the
three non-captive screws.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
7. Close the processing module cover(s), if opened.

To verify the bar code reader is functioning properly, perform one of
the following bar code readers diagnostic procedures:
3252 RSH Bar Code Reader Test, page 10-685
3251 Sample Carousel Bar Code Test, page 10-662
3206 Reagent Bar Code Test, page 10-662,
3200 Reagent Bar Code Reader Test, page 10-675,
Reagent hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-84
Enable or disable the ICT module (c System)
Perform this procedure to enable or disable the ICT module. You

disable the module to prevent the system from processing
potentiometric assays when a performance issue occurs. After you
resolve the issue you enable the module to allow the system to process
the assays.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To enable or disable the ICT module:

The Configure modules window displays.
3. Select the desired ICT Module Installed option.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Configure modules window (c System), page 2-50
Evaluate the check valve (c System)
Evaluating the check valve consists of the following procedures:

Removal
Locate the check valve to be evaluated (c 8000), page 10-702
Locate the check valve to be evaluated (c 16000), page 10-702
Replacement
Evaluate the check valve, page 10-704
Verification
Time required 15 minutes
Tools required Container large enough to accommodate the
syringes with check valves installed
DI water
Absorbent towel
Replacement parts NA



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Removal
Locate the check valve to be evaluated (c 8000)

Steps Graphic / Reference
Locate the check valve to be evaluated:
ICT reference pump
Wash solution pump
ICT aspiration pump
NOTE: See ARCHITECT c 8000 supply and pump

center components, page 9-125.
Locate the check valve to be evaluated (c 16000)

1. Locate the check valve to be replaced by performing
one of the following:
Wash solution check valve - Open the pump center
and pump center components for wash solution pump
check valve location, ARCHITECT c 16000 supply
and pump center components, page 9-203.
ICT aspiration or reference pump check valve -
pump center components for ICT aspiration or
reference solution pump check valve location,
ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump center
components, page 9-203.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


the syringe holder.

absorb any liquid.
check valve [3].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Replacement
Evaluate the check valve

1. Place the check valve end [1] into a container of
Reagent Grade Type ll water [2].
2. Pull and push the plunger [3] several times to cycle

water through the valve.
3. Place a finger over the side port [4] while you pull the
plunger. If you can draw water into the syringe, the
check valve must be replaced. See Replace check
valves (c 8000), page 9-130 or Replace check valves
(c 16000), page 9-207.
4. Place a finger over the top port [5] while you push the
plunger. If you can push water out of the syringe, the
check valve must be replaced. See Replace check
valves (c 8000), page 9-130 or Replace check valves
(c 16000), page 9-207.
5. Reinstall the check valve tubing, page 10-704, if the

check valve does not need to be replaced.

1. Reattach the top [1] and side [2] tubing to the check
valve [3].

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

2. Verify that the syringe plunger flange [2] is below the

[3].


wash solution pump.
2. Check for leaks while performing the flush. If drips or

leaks are observed, see Processing module
observed problems (c System), page 10-547.
Verification


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Remove the sample carousel (c System)
Perform this procedure to remove the sample carousel to perform a

maintenance procedure or troubleshoot a problem with the processing
module.
Prerequisite NA
Supplies NA

To remove the sample carousel:

1. Verify that the sample carousel access indicator light (square) is
illuminated.
2. Remove the sample carousel cover by pulling the lever and

lifting the cover. [1]
3. Carefully lift the sample carousel straight up from the sample

carousel platform.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
IMPORTANT: When transporting the sample carousel, avoid

splashing sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes.
To reinstall the carousel, see Reinstall the sample carousel (c System),
page 10-707.
Reinstall the sample carousel (c System)
Perform this procedure to reinstall the sample carousel.

Prerequisite NA
Supplies NA

To reinstall the sample carousel:
IMPORTANT: When transporting the sample carousel, avoid

splashing sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes.
1. Place the sample carousel on the carousel platform.
2. Align the carousel by rotating it until it is seated on the

alignment pins.
NOTE: When the sample carousel is correctly aligned on the

carousel platform you cannot manually turn the carousel.
3. Replace the sample carousel cover by pulling the lever [1],

aligning the tab [2], and then releasing the lever.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample handler corrective action procedure

A procedure that may be recommended as a corrective action for
resolving error messages and observed problems associated with the
RSH (robotic sample handler) is Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier
transport and carrier positioner(s) (RSH), page 10-708.
Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport and carrier positioner(s)
(RSH)
Perform this procedure to remove sample carrier(s) from the RSH

(robotic sample handler) carrier transport and carrier positioner(s)
after power is interrupted to the processing module(s).
Prerequisite NA
Module status Offline
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

To remove sample carrier(s) from the RSH (robotic sample handler)

carrier transport and carrier positioner(s):
1. Lift the RSH bay covers and observe the carrier transport and
carrier positioner(s) for the presence of a sample carrier(s).
NOTE: If there are no carrier(s) on the carrier transport or

positioner(s), no further action is required.
2. Remove the carrier(s) carefully by lifting them up and out of

their location.
IMPORTANT: When removing or transporting sample carriers,

avoid splashing sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes.
3. Close the RSH bay covers.

To resume processing:
If a UPS (uninterruptible power supply) was powering the system
and the RSH was stopped prior to the loss of power, no further
action is required.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
If power was lost prior to stopping the RSH the samples in the
sample carrier on the carrier transport and the surrounding area
may have been contaminated by sample splashing as the RSH
carrier transport motor loses power. Discard all sample cups
and/or tubes in this carrier. Perform as-needed maintenance
procedures 6311 RSH Cleaning, page 9-77, to decontaminate the
carrier transport and 6038 External Decontamination, page 9-82,
to clean the sample carrier.
SCC corrective action procedure

A procedure that is often recommended as a corrective action for
SCC (system control center) is Reseat cables to the SCC, page 10-710.
Reseat cables to the SCC
Perform this procedure to reseat the cables to the SCC (system control
center) when communication timeout errors occur and/or when
suggested by the corrective action of an error code.
Prerequisite Power off the SCC, page 5-4
Module status NA
Supplies NA
To reseat cables to the SCC:

1. Locate the desired cable(s) on the Network hub and CPU back
panel, page 1-10.
2. Disconnect, and then reconnect the cable(s).
NOTE: Do not proceed to the next step until the system control
center displays the Snapshot screen.
4. Power on the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-7.
ARM corrective action procedures

Procedures that are often recommended as corrective actions for

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory

include:
Change the wash buffer transfer option, page 10-711
Flush the ARM, page 10-711
Calibrate the ARM level sense, page 10-712
Change the wash buffer transfer option
Perform this procedure to change the wash buffer transfer option from
automatic to manual when troubleshooting an ARCHITECT ARM
(Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory failure or as instructed
by the corrective action of an error code or observed problem. After
you resolve the problem, change the wash buffer transfer option back
to automatic.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the wash buffer transfer option:

3. Select the desired Wash buffer transfer option.
Flush the ARM
Perform this procedure to flush the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic

Reconstitution Module) accessory when poor inlet water quality is
indicated on the ARM keypad.
page 5-28
Module status All except Offline and Stopped

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Supplies NA
To flush the ARM:

1. Verify the ARM is in Ready status. If not, press the stop key on
the ARM keypad followed by the start key.
2. Select F2 - Update Supplies on the Supply status screen.

3. Select the Add Buffer check box.
4. Select Done to initiate buffer transfer.

NOTE: The ARM automatically flushes once you initiate buffer

transfer.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 until buffer is successfully transferred to

ARM keypad (i System), page 1-111
Supply status screen and views, page 5-24
Calibrate the ARM level sense
Perform this procedure to calibrate the level sense of the ARCHITECT

ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory when you install a
new tubing assembly or there is too much buffer in the cubitainer
when empty is indicated on the ARM keypad.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To calibrate the ARM level sense:

1. Press the stop key on the ARM keypad.
2. Disconnect the sensor cable. [1]

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
3. Disconnect the tubing. [2]
4. Remove the tubing assembly [3] from the concentrated wash

buffer cubitainer and place it in the tubing assembly holder. [4]
5. Remove the wash buffer cubitainer [5] from the ARM.
6. Remove the tubing assembly from the tubing assembly holder.
7. Reconnect the sensor cable.
8. Hold the tubing assembly in a vertical position, and then press

the replace buffer key.
The amber replace buffer indicator beneath the replace buffer
key flashes.
NOTE: If the tubing assembly is not held vertically the ARM

level sense calibration will not be accurate.
9. Disconnect the sensor cable while the indicator continues to

flash.
10. Replace the wash buffer cubitainer.
11. Place the wash buffer tubing assembly in the concentrated wash
buffer, and then twist the fitting to tighten.
12. Reconnect the sensor cable [1] and supply tubing quick
disconnect fitting [2] to the ARM.
To transfer concentrated wash buffer to the processing module, see
Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR),
page 5-52.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
ARM keypad (i System), page 1-111
LAS corrective action procedure

A procedure that is often recommended as a corrective action for
LAS (laboratory automated system) is Verify LAS communications,
page 10-714.
Verify LAS communications
Perform this procedure to change the standard LAS (laboratory

automation system) timeout settings and re-initialize communications
when you are setting up the LAS or when one of the following error
codes occurs:
8263- Invalid recovery type sent by the LAS
8359- Time out exceeded on message sent to LAS
8360- Maximum number of consecutive LAS message timeouts
and/or LAS <NAK> messages exceeded
8361- LAS message communication error
8464- LAS initialization communication failed
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To verify LAS communications:

3. Select the Send communications message to LAS check box to

send a re-initialize communications message to the LAS.
4. Select Done to send a communications message to the LAS.

5. Select OK to save your changes and send a communications

message to the LAS.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Printed report examples
Introduction
The following printed reports are generated by the ARCHITECT

System:
Absorbance Data Report (c System), page Appendix A-3
A-19
page Appendix A-25
Cal Curve Summary Report, page Appendix A-37
Exception Details Report, page Appendix A-39
Exception Status Report, page Appendix A-42
Maintenance History Report, page Appendix A-47
Message History Log Report, page Appendix A-49
Order Status Report, page Appendix A-53
QC Result Details Report, page Appendix A-64
QC Results List Report, page Appendix A-67
Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Appendix A-1

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Printed report examples
Appendix A
Rerun List Report, page Appendix A-75

Result Details Report, page Appendix A-77
Sample Status Report, page Appendix A-84
Temporary Message Log Report, page Appendix A-86
Appendix A-2 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Absorbance Data Report (c System)
Absorbance Data Report (c System)

Use this report to troubleshoot assay results.
Legend:
1. Report title:
Shows the name of the report.
2. Operator ID:
Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the report was printed.
3. System serial number:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Absorbance Data Report (c System) Appendix A
Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System.

4. Assay:
Shows the name of the assay.
5. Sample ID:
Shows the bar code number or ID assigned to the sample.
6. Assay number:
Shows the number defined for the assay.
7. Name:
Shows the name of the patient or control.
8. Module:
Shows the module number on which the assay was run.
9. Serial no.:
Shows the serial number of the module on which the assay was run.
10. C / P:
Shows the carrier or carousel (CRSL) ID and position for the sample.
11. Result:
Shows the value and (where applicable) interpretation of the result.
12. Units:
Shows the units for the result.
13. Flags:
Shows the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result
flags, page 5-225.
14. Code:
Shows the code(s) to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of
15. Cuvette:
Shows the number of the cuvette used to process the result.
16. Primary wavelength and Secondary wavelength:
Shows the primary and secondary wavelengths used to measure the assay
concentration.
17. Point (column):
Shows the read points 1 through 33.
18. Primary (column):
Shows the absorbance readings for each read point at the primary
wavelength.
19. Secondary (column):
Shows the absorbance readings for each read point at the secondary
wavelength.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Absorbance Data Report (c System)
20. Primary - Secondary (column):

Shows the difference in absorbance of the primary wavelength minus the
secondary wavelength.
21. F---F:
Indicates the photometric points included in the flex read time window for the
assay.
22. M-----M:
Indicates the photometric points included in the main read time window for
the assay.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay Parameter Report (c System) Appendix A
Assay Parameter Report (c System)

Use this report as a hardcopy record of your configured assay
parameters.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Assay Parameter Report (c System)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:
4. Name:
5. Assay type:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Shows the assay processing protocol type defined for the assay.
Options are:
Photometric
Potentiometric
Sample Interference Index
6. Assay number:
NOTE: If you modify an assay parameter in an Abbott assay that affects

result measurement, calculation, or validity checks an asterisk displays next
to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott
released version.
7. Assay availability:
Shows the availability of the assay for ordering.
Options are:
Enabled
Disabled
Patient Disabled
8. Assay version:
Shows the version number of the assay.
9. Cal version:
Shows the calibration version of the assay.
10. Reaction mode:
Shows the mathematical model used to determine the concentration of the
assay in the sample.
Options are:
End up
End down
Rate up
Rate down
11. Main read time:
Shows the starting (1-33) and ending (1-33) photometric points for the main
read time.
12. Primary wavelength:
Shows the primary wavelength used to measure the assay concentration.
13. Flex read time:
Shows the starting (1-33) and ending (1-33) photometric read points for the
flex read time.
14. Secondary wavelength:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Shows the secondary wavelength used to measure the assay concentration.

15. Color correction read time:
Shows the starting (1-33) and ending (1-33) photometric points for the color
correction read time.
16. Last read required:
Shows the last read (1-33) required for test calculation so the result can be
calculated sooner than the entire ten minute protocol.
17. Blank read time:
Shows the starting (1-33) and ending (1-33) photometric points for the blank
read time.
18. Absorbance range:
Shows the upper and lower limit of absorbance within which all reads for a
sample should measure. If any read is outside the absorbance limits during
main or flex time reads, the data is not used to calculate the result.
19. Sample blank type:
Shows the type of sample blank configured for the assay.
Options are:
None
Self
20. Blank assay:
This feature is not available at this time.
21. Reagent:
Shows the reagent used for the assay.
22. R1 reagent volume:
Shows the R1 reagent volume the module dispenses into the cuvette.
23. R2 reagent volume:
Shows the R2 reagent volume the module dispenses into the cuvette.
24. R1 water volume:
Shows the volume of water the module dispenses along with the R1 reagent
when concentrated reagents are used.
25. R2 water volume:
Shows the volume of water the module dispenses along with the R2 reagent
when concentrated reagents are used.
26. R1 dispense mode:
Shows the reagent pipetting profile the system uses to aspirate and
dispense R1 reagents.
27. R2 dispense mode:
dispense R2 reagents.
28. Diluent name:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Shows the sample diluent the module uses for the assay.
29. Diluent dispense mode:
dispense sample diluent reagents.
30. Dilution name (column):
Shows the name(s) of the dilutions defined for the assay.
31. Sample volume (column):
Shows the volume of the sample to be aspirated from the sample cup or
tube for the dilution.
32. Diluted sample volume (column):
Shows the volume of diluted sample to be aspirated from the cuvette for the
dilution.
33. Diluent volume (column):
Shows the volume of the diluent to be aspirated from the cuvette for the
dilution.
34. Water volume (column):
Shows the volume of water to be dispensed along with the diluent when
concentrated diluents are used for the dilution.
35. Dilution factor (column):
Shows the sample dilutions the system calculated based on the volumes
you specified.
36. Reaction check type:
Shows the reaction check type defined for the assay.
Options are:
End Subtraction
End Ratio
Rate Subtraction
Rate Ratio
None
37. Read time A range:
Shows the starting (1-33) and ending (1-33) photometric points for read time
A.
38. Read time B range:
Shows the starting (1-33) and ending (1-33) photometric points for read time
B.
39. Calculation limit:
Shows the lower and upper limits for the acceptable range for the calculated
results of the comparison of the two read times.
40. Minimum absorbance:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Shows the minimum acceptable absorbance variation (0 - 3.2) allowed for

absorbance readings within the main read time.
41. Rate linearity %:
Shows the allowable percent variation in the change in absorbance
measured during the first three reads as compared to the last three reads in
the main and flex read time.
42. Maximum absorbance variation:
Shows the maximum acceptable absorbance variation (0 - 3.2) allowed for
absorbance readings within the main read time.
43. Calibration method:
Shows the calibration method defined for the assay.
Options are:
Abs
Factor
Linear
Logit 4
Spline
Use Cal Factor / Blank
44. Use cal factor from:
Shows the assay to be referenced for calibration information to be used for
result calculation.
45. Factor:
Shows the factor used to calculate the concentration of a result for the
assay.
46. Full interval hours:
Shows the amount of time, in hours, that the full calibration curve is valid.
47. Adjustment interval hours:
Shows the amount of time, in hours, that the adjustment calibration curve is
valid.
48. Adjustment type:
Shows the type of adjustment calibration defined for the assay.
Options are:
None
Blank
1 Point
2 Point
49. Adjustment level:
Shows the calibrator level(s) used for the 1-point or 2-point adjustment
calibration.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
50. Expected cal factor:

Shows the expected target value for the cal factor assay when the system
calculates the calibration curve.
51. Default ordering type:
Shows the default calibration ordering type for the assay if the Calibration
type: Adjust type is defined.
52. Expected cal factor tolerance %:
Shows the percent tolerance from the expected target value for the Cal
factor that is allowed when the system calculates the calibration curve.
53. Blank absorbance range:
Shows the upper and lower limits for the acceptable blank absorbance range
if a data check is desired.
54. Span:
Shows the calibrator level used to perform the calibration data check.
55. Span absorbance range:
Shows the upper and lower limits for the acceptable absorbance range if a
span check is desired.
56. Maximum curve fit:
Shows the maximum limit of the sum of the absolute values of the difference
between the approximated absorbance of the calculated calibration curve
and the measured absorbance.
57. Calibrator set name:
Shows the name defined for the calibrator set.
58. Replicates:
Shows the number of calibrator replicates the system uses when calculating
the calibration curve.
59. Cal level (column):
Shows the name configured for each calibrator level for the assay.
60. Concentration (column):
Shows the concentration value configured for each calibrator level for the
assay.
61. Sample volume (column):
Shows the sample volume configured for each calibrator level for the assay.
62. Diluted sample volume (column):
Shows the diluted sample volume configured for each calibrator level for the
assay.
63. Diluent volume (column):
Shows the diluent volume configured for each calibrator level for the assay.
64. Water volume (column):
Shows the water volume configured for each calibrator level for the assay.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
65. Smart wash:

Shows the SmartWash parameters configured for the assay.
66. Linearity range:
Shows the linearity range defined for the assay.
67. Flag range specifications:
Shows the age and gender-specific normal and extreme flags specified for
the assay.
68. Interpretation Parameters:
Shows the interpretation parameters defined for the assay.
69. Result concentration units:
Shows the result concentration units configured for the assay.
70. Correlation factor:
Shows the correlation factor configured if the result required calculation to
match another system.
71. Result decimal places:
Shows the number of digits specified to the right of the decimal for the result
concentration units.
72. Intercept:
Shows the intercept configured if the result requires a calculation to match
another system.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Assay Parameter Report (i System)
Assay Parameter Report (i System)

Use this report as a hardcopy record of your configured assay
parameters.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay Parameter Report (i System) Appendix A
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:
4. Name:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Assay Parameter Report (i System)
5. Assay type:
Shows the assay processing protocol type defined for the assay.
Options are:
Two step 18 - 4
One step 25
Two step 4 - 4
One step 11
6. Assay number:
7. Pretreatment option:
Shows the pretreatment option the system uses in the assay protocol.
8. Assay version:
Shows the version number of the assay.
9. Assay availability:
Shows the availability of the assay for ordering.
Options are:
Enabled
Disabled
Patient Disabled
10. Cal version:
Shows the calibration version of the assay.
11. Assay status:
Shows the assay status defined for the assay.
Options are:
Primary
Correlation
12. Type:
Shows the assay type defined for the assay.
Options are:
Full
Adjust
Index
Shows the calibration method defined for the assay.
Options are:
Point to Point
Linear Regression

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay Parameter Report (i System) Appendix A
4PLC X
4PLC Y
Cutoff
14. Adjustment method:
Shows the adjustment method defined for the assay.
Options are:
Linear Transformation
Parameter adjustment
Ratio techniques (Ratio A, Ratio AB, Adjustment)
Curve shape
15. Replicates:
Shows the number of calibrator replicates the system uses when calculating
the calibration curve.
16. Standard concentrations (column):
Shows the concentrations for the standard calibrators (A - F) defined for the
assay.
17. Adjustors (column):
Shows the concentrations for the adjustor calibrators defined for the assay.
18. Manual dilution:
Shows the availability of using the manual dilution option for the assay.
19. Default dilution:
Shows the default dilution configured for the assay.
21. Dilution ranges:
Show the dilution names and ranges specified for the assay.
22. Flag range specifications:
Shows the age and gender-specific normal and extreme flags specified for
the assay.
23. Interpretation parameters:
Shows the interpretation parameters defined for the assay.
25. Result decimal places:
Shows the number of digits specified to the right of the decimal for the result
concentration units.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Cal Curve Details Report - Potentiometric (c System)
Cal Curve Details Report - Potentiometric

(c System)
Use this report as a hardcopy record of your assay calibration details.
You can configure this report to print automatically. See Configure
report settings, page 2-7.
Legend:
1. Report title:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Cal Curve Details Report - Potentiometric (c System) Appendix A
2. Operator ID:
4. Assay name:
5. Assay number:
Shows the number assigned to the assay.
6. Reagent lot:
Shows the lot number of the reagent.
7. Expiration date:
Shows the expiration date of the reagent kit used for the calibration.
8. Serial no.:
Shows the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the calibration curve.
9. Cal status:
Shows the status of the calibration.
10. Module/Serial no.:
Shows the module and serial number on which the assay was calibrated.
11. Cal date:
Shows the date the calibration completed.
12. Cal time:
Shows the time the calibration completed.
13. Cal type:
Shows the type of calibration performed.
14. Operator ID:
Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the order was placed.
15. Calibrator lot:
Shows the lot number of the calibrator used to calibrate the assay.
16. Curve expiration date / time:
Shows the expiration date and time for the full and/or adjust calibration
curve.
17. Lot expiration:
Shows the expiration date of the calibrator lot number used to calibrate the
assay.
18. Cal ID (column):
Shows the name for each calibrator.
19. Concentration / Units (column):
Shows the concentration and units for the result.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Cal Curve Details Report - Potentiometric (c System)
20. Cal mV (column):

Shows the median millivolt value for each calibrator level.
21. Slope (column):
Shows the percent response of the ICT (integrated chip technology) module
for the low and high calibrators.
22. Rep. 1 mV (column):
Shows the millivolt value for replicate 1.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c System) Appendix A
Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c System)

Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c System)

4. Assay name:
5. Assay number:
6. Reagent lot:
7. Expiration date:
8. Serial no.:
9. Cal status:
11. Cal date:
12. Cal time:
Shows the mathematical procedure used to analyze the data.
14. Operator ID:
15. Cal type:
16. Curve expiration date / time:
curve.
17. Calibrator lot:
18. Lot expiration:
Shows the expiration date of the calibrator lot.
Shows the concentration value for each level of calibrator as defined in the
assay parameters.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c System) Appendix A
21. Cal absorbance (column):

Shows the median absorbance value for the calibrator levels.
22. Cal factor (column):
Shows the calibration factor for the calibrator levels.
23. Rep. 1 absorbance (column):
Shows the absorbance value for replicate 1.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor/Blank (c System)
Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor/Blank

(c System)
Legend:
1. Report title:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor/Blank (c System) Appendix A
2. Operator ID:
4. Assay name:
5. Assay number:
6. Reagent lot:
7. Expiration date:
8. Serial no.:
9. Cal status:
11. Cal date:
12. Cal time:
Shows the mathematical procedure used to analyze the data.
14. Operator ID:
15. Cal type:
16. Curve expiration date/time:
curve.
17. Calibrator lot:
18. Lot expiration:
Shows the expiration date of the calibrator lot.
19. Reference assay:
Shows the name of the assay from which the calibration data is referenced
when the calibration method is Use Cal factor / Blank.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor/Blank (c System)

assay parameters.
22. Cal absorbance (column):
Shows the median absorbance value for the calibrator levels.
23. Cal factor (column):
Shows the calibration factor for the calibrator levels.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i System) Appendix A
Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i System)

Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i System)
4. Assay name:
5. Assay number:
6. Reagent lot:
7. Expiration date:
8. Serial no.:
9. Cal status:
11. Cal date:
12. Cal time:
13. Cal type:
14. Operator ID:
15. Calibrator lot:
16. Expiration date:
assay.
17. Cal 1 ratio and Cal 2 ratio:
Shows the ratios for the calibration adjustment.
19. Mean RLU (column):
Shows the mean RLU (relative light unit) for the calibrator replicates.
20. Rep. 1 RLU (column):

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i System) Appendix A
Shows the RLU value for replicate 1.

assay parameters.
23. Ref. Cal RLU (column):
Shows the reference (master cal) data read from the 2-D bar code label.
24. Fit curve RLU:
Shows the fit curve RLU data for each concentration.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System)
Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System)

Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System) Appendix A

4. Assay name:
5. Assay number:
6. Reagent lot:
7. Expiration date:
8. Serial no.:
9. Cal status:
11. Cal date:
Shows the date the calibration was completed.
12. Cal time:
Shows the time the calibration was completed.
13. Cal type:
14. Operator ID:
15. Calibrator lot:
assay.
assay parameters.
19. Fit curve RLU (column):
Shows the fit curve RLU (relative light unit) data for each concentration.
Shows the mean RLU data for the calibrator replicates.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System)

Shows the RLU values for replicate 1.
Shows the RLU values for replicate 2.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i System) Appendix A
Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i System)

Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i System)

4. Assay name:
5. Assay number:
6. Reagent lot:
7. Expiration date:
8. Serial no.:
9. Cal status:
11. Cal date:
12. Cal time:
13. Cal type:
14. Operator ID:
15. Calibrator lot:
assay.
Shows the mean RLU (relative light unit) for the calibrator replicates.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i System) Appendix A


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Cal Curve Summary Report
Cal Curve Summary Report

Use this report to quickly identify reagent lots with an expired
calibration or no calibration.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Cal Curve Summary Report Appendix A

4. Module (column):
Shows the module on which the reagent lot was calibrated.
5. Assay (column):
6. Reagent lot (column):
7. Cal status (column):
Shows the calibration status of the reagent lot.
8. Cal date / time (column):
Shows the date and time the reagent lot was calibrated.
9. Cal expiration date / time (column):
Shows the date and time the calibration curve expires for the reagent lot.
(c System)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Exception Details Report
Exception Details Report

Use this report to troubleshoot your system.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Exception Details Report Appendix A

4. Name:
Shows the name of the patient, control, or calibrator.
5. Sample ID:
6. Assay:
7. Patient ID:
Shows the ID assigned to the patient.
8. Assay number:
9. Draw date / time:
Shows the date and time the sample was drawn.
Shows the module and serial number on which the exception was
generated. This field is blank when the test cannot be assigned to or
processed on a module.
11. Sample comment:
Shows the comment entered for the test.
12. Cal. lot:
Shows the calibrator lot number for the calibration used to calculate the
result.
13. Cal. date / time:
Shows the calibration date and time for the reagent lot used to calculate the
result.
14. Reagent master lot:
Shows the reagent master lot for the calibration used to calculate the result.
15. Serial no.:
16. Date completed:
Shows the date the exception completed.
17. Location:
Shows the location associated with the patient.
18. Time completed:
Shows the time the exception completed.
19. Doctor:
Shows the name of the patient's doctor.
20. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Exception Details Report
21. C / P (column):
Shows the sample location for one of the following:
Carrier ID and position (P) (RSH/SSH)
CRSL - Shown if the sample was pipetted from the sample carousel
(c System)
LAS - Shown if the sample was pipetted from the LAS track
LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000)
22. Dilution (column):
Shows the dilution used for the test.
23. Code (column):
24. Abs. (column):
Shows the absorbance value for the test.
25. Cuvette (column):
Shows the number of the cuvette used to process the exception.
26. Error code / Description (column):
Shows the error code number and description.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Exception Status Report Appendix A
Exception Status Report

Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Exception Status Report

4. C / P (column):
(c System)
5. SID (column):
6. Name (column):
Shows the name of the patient, control, or calibrator for the order.
7. Assay (column):
8. Module (column):
Shows the module that generated the test exception. This field is blank
when the test cannot be assigned to or processed on a module.
9. Error code (column):
Shows the numeric error code for the exception and the message text that
describes the error that occurred.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Levey - Jennings Report Appendix A
Levey - Jennings Report

Use this report as a hardcopy record of QC data.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Levey - Jennings Report

4. Assay Name:
5. Module:
Shows the module number on which the controls were run.
6. Control Name:
Shows the name of the control.
7. Module Serial Number:
Shows the serial number of the module on which the controls were run.
8. Control Level:
Shows the level of the control.
9. Date Range:
Shows the date range selected for the Levey - Jennings report.
10. Control Lot Number:
Shows the lot number of the control.
11. Control Expiration Date:
Shows the expiration date of the control.
12. Calculation Type:
Shows the calculation type, which includes cumulative data for both the
module and the system.
13. Date / Time (column):
Shows the date and time for each control result.
14. Results (column):
Shows the results for each control. Results with an asterisk are excluded
from the calculations.
15. Reagent Lot Number:
Shows the lot number for the reagent kit used to run the control.
16. Flags:
Shows the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of quality
17. 2SD:
Shows 2 SD (standard deviation) for the control data.
18. 1SD:
Shows 1 SD (standard deviation) for the control data.
19. Mean:
Shows the mean for the control data.
20. EXPECTED:
Shows the expected mean and standard deviation configured.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Levey - Jennings Report Appendix A
21. MANUFACTURER:
Shows the manufacturer's mean and standard deviation configured.
22. MODULE CUMULATIVE:
Shows the module cumulative data for the control run on the specified
module.
23. SYSTEM CUMULATIVE:
Shows the system cumulative data for the control run on the system. This
data is the same as the module cumulative data when there is only one
module.
24. MODULE DATA FOR DATE RANGE:
Shows the module data calculated for the specified module and date range.
25. SYSTEM DATA FOR DATE RANGE:
Shows the system data calculated for the date range. This data is the same
as the module data for date range when there is only one module.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Maintenance History Report
Maintenance History Report

Use this report as a hardcopy record of the maintenance performed on
your system.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Module no.:
Shows the module on which the maintenance procedure was performed.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Maintenance History Report Appendix A
3. Approval status:
Shows the status of approval for the maintenance log.
4. Serial no.:
Shows the serial number of the module on which the maintenance
procedure was performed.
5. Approval date:
Shows the date of approval for the maintenance log.
6. Operator ID:
Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the procedure was performed.
7. Approved by:
Shows the ID of the operator who approved the maintenance log.
8. Category:
Shows the maintenance category of the procedure.
9. Procedure:
Shows the name of the maintenance procedure.
10. Date (column):
Shows the date the maintenance procedure was performed.
11. Time (column):
Shows the time the maintenance procedure was performed.
12. Operator ID (column):
13. Status (column):
Shows the status of the maintenance procedure.
14. Comments:
Shows the comments entered for the maintenance procedure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Message History Log Report
Message History Log Report

Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Message History Log Report Appendix A

4. Date (column):
Shows the date the error/message was generated.
5. Time (column):
Shows the time the error/message was generated.
6. Module (column):
Shows the module that generated the error/message.
7. Error code / Message text (column):

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Order List Report
Order List Report

Use this report to aid in loading samples.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Order List Report Appendix A

4. C / P (column):
(c System)
NOTE: This field is blank for pending orders that have not been assigned a
carrier or carousel position.
5. SID (column):
6. Name (column):
Shows the name of the patient, control, or calibrator for the order.
7. Code (column):
Shows the code(s) to indicate a sample processing condition(s). See
Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153.
NOTE: Only sample processing codes (M and S) will print.

8. Minimum sample volume (column):
Shows the minimum sample cup volume required to process the test.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Order Status Report
Order Status Report

Use this report to check the status of an order.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Order Status Report Appendix A

4. C / P (column):
(c System)
NOTE: This field is blank for pending orders that have not been assigned a
carrier or carousel position.
5. SID (column):
6. Name (column):
Shows the name of the patient, control and level, or calibrator for the order.
7. Assay (column):
8. Status (column):
Shows the current status of the test ordered.
9. Time (column):
Shows the time the test with a status of Running will complete (in 24 hour
format).
10. Code (column):

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Patient Report
Patient Report
Use this report as a hardcopy patient record.
Legend:
1. Report header:
Shows the configured report header information.
2. Name:
Shows the name of the patient.
3. Gender:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Patient Report Appendix A
Shows the gender of the patient.

4. Patient ID:
5. Birthdate:
Shows the patient's birthdate.
6. Sample ID:
8. Location:
9. Doctor:
10. Assay (column):
11. Result (column):
12. Units (column):
13. Flags (column):
flags, page 5-225.
14. Range (column):
Shows the normal / therapeutic range of the assay, if configured.
15. Date Completed / Time completed:
Shows the date and time the result completed.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Procedure Report, Basic
Procedure Report, Basic

Use this report as a hardcopy record of a maintenance or diagnostic
procedure performed on your system. You can configure this report to
print automatically. See Configure report settings, page 2-7.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Procedure:
Shows the name of the procedure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Procedure Report, Basic Appendix A
3. Procedure version:
Shows the version of the procedure.
4. Date:
Shows the date the procedure was performed.
5. Module no.:
Shows the number of the module on which the procedure was performed.
6. Time:
Shows the time when the procedure was performed.
7. Serial no.:
Shows the serial number of the module on which the procedure was
performed.
8. Status:
Shows the status of the procedure.
9. Operator ID:
10. Results:
Shows the results of the procedure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Procedure Report, Columnar
Procedure Report, Columnar

Use this report as a hardcopy record of a maintenance or diagnostic
procedure performed on your system. You can configure this report to
print automatically. See Configure report settings, page 2-7.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Procedure:
Shows the name of the procedure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Procedure Report, Columnar Appendix A
3. Procedure version:
Shows the version of the procedure.
4. Date:
Shows the date the procedure was performed.
5. Module no.:
Shows the number of the module on which the procedure was performed.
6. Time:
Shows the time when the procedure was performed.
7. Serial no.:
Shows the serial number of the module on which the procedure was
performed.
8. Status:
Shows the status of the procedure.
9. Operator ID:
10. Results:
Shows the results of the procedure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A QC Analysis Report
QC Analysis Report
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
QC Analysis Report Appendix A

4. Assay Name:
5. Module:
Shows the module number on which the controls were run.
6. Control Name:
8. Control Level:
9. Date Range:
Shows the date range selected for the QC report.
11. Control Expiration Date:
Shows the expiration date of the control.
12. Calculation Type:
Shows the calculation type, which includes cumulative data for both the
module and the system.
Shows the date and time for each control result.
14. Results (column):
Shows the results for each control. Results with an asterisk are excluded
from the calculations.
15. Units (column):
Shows the units for each control result.
16. Reagent Lot Number:
Shows the lot number for the reagent kit used to run the control.
17. Operator ID:
18. Flags:
19. Code (column):
20. EXPECTED:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A QC Analysis Report

21. MANUFACTURER:
Shows the manufacturer's mean and standard deviation configured.
22. MODULE CUMULATIVE:
Shows the module cumulative data for the control run on the specified
module.
23. SYSTEM CUMULATIVE:
Shows the system cumulative data for the control run on the system. This
data is the same as the module cumulative data when there is only one
module.
24. MODULE DATA FOR DATE RANGE:
Shows the module data calculated for the specified module and date range.
25. SYSTEM DATA FOR DATE RANGE:
Shows the system data calculated for the date range. This data is the same
as the module data for date range when there is only one module.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
QC Result Details Report Appendix A
QC Result Details Report

Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A QC Result Details Report

4. Control name:
Shows the name and level of the control.
5. Assay:
6. Sample ID:
7. Assay number:
8. Control lot number:
9. Module / Serial no.:
Shows the module and serial number on which the assay was run.
10. Control comment:
Shows the comment entered for the control.
11. Cal. lot:
result.
12. Cal. date / time:
result.
14. Serial no.:
15. Date completed:
Shows the date the control completed.
16. Time completed:
Shows the time the control completed.
17. Operator ID:
18. C / P (column):
(c System)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
QC Result Details Report Appendix A

Shows the value of the control result.
20. Units (column):
Shows the units for the control result.
21. Range (column):
Shows the range configured for the control.
23. Flags (column):
24. Code (column):
25. mV (column):
Shows the millivolt value for the control result.
26. Cuvette (column):
Shows the number of the cuvette used to process the control.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A QC Results List Report
QC Results List Report

Use this report to troubleshoot your system and as a hardcopy record
of QC results.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
QC Results List Report Appendix A

4. C / P (column):
(c System)
5. Module (column):
Shows the module that generated the control result.
6. SID (column):
7. Control name (column):
Shows the name and level for the control.
8. Assay (column):
9. Result (column):
Shows the value of the control result.
10. Flags (column):
11. Code (column):
Shows the date and time the control result was completed.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A QC Summary Report
QC Summary Report
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
QC Summary Report Appendix A

4. Start Date:
Shows the Start Date entered in the QC summary review screen.
5. End Date:
Shows the End Date entered in the QC summary review screen.
6. Control Name:
7. Module:
Shows the module that generated the control result(s).
Shows the lot number of the control
10. Assay:
11. Level:
12. N:
Shows the number of samples for that control level within the specified date
range.
13. Actual:
Shows the Mean, SD, and %CV for that control level within the specified
date range.
14. Expected:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Reagent Load Error Report
Reagent Load Error Report

Use this report to troubleshoot reagent load errors.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Reagent Load Error Report Appendix A

4. Module:
Shows the number of the module in which the reagent is located.
5. Reagent status:
Shows the status of the reagent kit.
6. Assays:
7. Location (column):
Shows the position in which you loaded the reagent bottle/cartridge.
8. Serial number / Onboard (column):
Shows the serial number of the reagent bottle/cartridge loaded on board the
reagent carousel(s).
9. Serial number / Expected (column):
Shows the serial number of the reagent bottle/cartridge expected to be
loaded on the reagent carousel(s).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Reagent Status Report (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Reagent Status Report (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Use this report to quickly identify empty reagent kits.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Reagent Status Report (i 2000/i 2000SR) Appendix A

4. M / P (column):
Shows the module and position in which the reagent kit is located.
5. Assay (column):
6. Cal status (column)
Shows the status of the calibration for the reagent lot.
7. Reagent lot (column):
Shows the lot number of the reagent kit.
8. Remaining tests (column):
Shows an estimated number of tests remaining for the reagent kit
(c System).
Shows the number of tests remaining for the reagent kit (i System).
9. Reagent status (column):
Shows the status of the reagent kit.
10. Exp. date (column):
Shows the date on which the reagent kit expires.
11. Stability (column):
Shows the number of onboard stability days/hours remaining for the reagent
kit.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Rerun List Report
Rerun List Report

Use this report to find samples that have reruns ordered.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Rerun List Report Appendix A

4. *C / P (column):
(c System)
5. SID (column):
6. Name (column):
Shows the name of the patient or control.
7. Assay (column):
8. Code (column):

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Result Details Report
Result Details Report

Use this report to troubleshoot your system. Up to three result details
print per page.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Result Details Report Appendix A

4. Name:
5. Sample ID:
6. Assay:
7. Patient ID:
8. Assay number:
10. Module / Serial no.:
Shows the module and serial number on which the test was run.
11. Sample comment:
Shows the comment entered for the test.
12. Cal. lot:
result.
13. Cal. date/time:
result.
15. Serial no.:
16. Date completed:
Shows the date the result completed.
17. Location:
18. Time completed:
Shows the time the result completed.
19. Doctor:
20. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Result Details Report
21. C / P (column):
(c System)
23. Units (column):
24. Range (column):
Shows the normal / therapeutic range for the assay, if configured.
26. Flags (column):
flags, page 5-225.
27. Code (column):
28. RLU (column):
Shows the RLU (relative light unit) value for the result.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Results List Report Appendix A
Results List Report

Use this report as a hardcopy record of the results generated by your
system. You can configure this report to print automatically. See
Configure report settings, page 2-7.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Results List Report
4. C / P (column):
(c System)
5. Module (column):
Shows the module that generated the test result.
6. SID (column):
7. Name (column):
Shows the name of the patient associated with the result.
8. Assay (column):
9. Result (column):
10. Flags (column):
flags, page 5-225.
11. Code (column):
Shows the date and time the test result was completed.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample Report Appendix A
Sample Report
Use this report as a hardcopy sample record. If you add a test to an
existing order, the system generates a separate sample report for that
test unless the original order is still pending.
Legend:
1. Report header:
Shows the configured report header information.
2. Name:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Sample Report
3. Gender:
Shows the gender of the patient.
4. Patient ID:
5. Birthdate:
Shows the birthdate of the patient.
6. Sample ID:
8. Location:
9. Doctor:
10. Assay:
11. Result:
12. Units:
13. Flags:
flags, page 5-225.
14. Range:
Shows the normal / therapeutic range for the assay, if configured.
15. Date Completed / Time completed:
Shows the date and time the result completed.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample Status Report Appendix A
Sample Status Report

Use this report to check the status of a sample or as a hardcopy record
of the results generated by your system.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Sample Status Report

4. Sample ID:
5. C / P:
Shows the carrier or carousel (CRSL) ID and position for the sample.
6. Name:
7. Bay (column):
Displays the bay in which you loaded the sample. (RSH)
8. Assay (column):
9. Status / Result (column):
Displays the:
Status - current status of the test, see Descriptions of test statuses,
page 5-152
Time the order will complete (in 24- hour format), for all
samples with a status of Running
Result - value, unit, and (where applicable) interpretation of
result
Date and time the result was completed
10. Flags (column):
flags, page 5-225.
11. Code (column):

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Temporary Message Log Report Appendix A
Temporary Message Log Report

Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A Temporary Message Log Report

4. Date (column):
Shows the date the temporary message occurred.
5. Time (column):
Shows the time the temporary message occurred.
6. Module (column):
Shows the module that generated the temporary message.
7. Error code / Message text (column):

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix B Verification of i System assay claims
Introduction
You can verify the ARCHITECT i System assay claims by performing

verification protocols. These protocols are categorized into method
groups. You can find the method group number for an assay under
QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES/VERIFICATION of the ASSAY
CLAIMS section in the ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package
insert.
Method groups for verification protocols
Method Group Number
Protocol Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6

Analytical sensitivity Method 1 Method 1 N/A Method 2 N/A Method 1
Functional sensitivity N/A N/A N/A N/A Method 1 N/A
Precision Method 1 Method 1 Method 1 Method 1 Method 1 Method 1
Reportable range / Method 1 Method 2 Method 1 Method 1 N/A Method 3
calibration verification
Automated dilution Method 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
verification
Methods comparison Method 1 Method 1 Method 1 Method 1 N/A Method 1
(correlation)
Methods comparison N/A N/A N/A Method 2 Method 2 N/A
(concordance)
Analytical specificity Method 1 Method 1 Method 1 Method 1 N/A Method 1
Reference range Method 1 Method 1 Method 1 N/A N/A Method 1
Verification of i System assay claims topics include:

Analytical sensitivity - method 1 (limit of detection), page Appendix
B-3
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 (limit of quantitation),
page Appendix B-6
Functional sensitivity - method 1 (serial dilution), page Appendix
B-11
Precision - method 1, page Appendix B-14
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1, page Appendix
B-16
Reportable range/calibration verification- method 2, page Appendix
B-22
Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Appendix B-1

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Verification of i System assay claims
Appendix B
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 3, page Appendix

B-28
Automated dilution verification - method 1, page Appendix B-34
Methods comparison - method 1 (correlation), page Appendix B-37
Methods comparison - method 2 (concordance), page Appendix B-39
Analytical specificity - method 1, page Appendix B-43
Reference range - method 1, page Appendix B-44
Appendix B-2 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix B Analytical sensitivity - method 1 (limit of detection)
Analytical sensitivity - method 1 (limit of

detection)
This method uses the LOD (limit of detection) at a 95% confidence
level to determine assay sensitivity on an ARCHITECT i System.
A worksheet and example are provided:
Analytical sensitivity - method 1 data sheet, page Appendix B-4
Analytical sensitivity - method 1 data sheet example, page Appendix
B-5
Procedure
1. Run MasterCheck Level 0 (zero conc.) in replicates of 10.
2. Run MasterCheck Level 1 in replicates of 4.
NOTE: If MasterCheck is not available, substitute other

appropriate material.
Data evaluation
1. Calculate the mean and standard deviation for the MasterCheck
Level 0 (zero conc.) replicates and the mean for the MasterCheck
Level 1 replicates.
2. Determine the sensitivity using the following formula:
NOTE: The concentration of MasterCheck Level 1 changes with

each lot. Therefore, insert the concentration listed on the data
sheet for that particular lot.
Analytical sensitivity = __________

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Analytical sensitivity - method 1 (limit of detection) Appendix B
Analytical sensitivity - method 1 data sheet

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix B Analytical sensitivity - method 1 (limit of detection)
Analytical sensitivity - method 1 data sheet example

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 (limit of quantitation) Appendix B
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 (limit of

quantitation)
This method uses the LOQ (limit of quantitation), the concentration
value of the last dilution at which the observed values still fall inside
the tolerance limits established for MasterCheck Level 1, to determine
assay sensitivity on an ARCHITECT i System.
Worksheets and examples are provided:
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 data sheet, page Appendix B-7
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 graph, page Appendix B-8
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 data sheet example, page Appendix
B-9
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 graph example, page Appendix
B-10
Procedure
1. Prepare the following serial dilutions of MasterCheck Level 1
with MasterCheck Level 0.
1:2, 1:4, 1:8, 1:16, 1:32, and so forth until the expected value is
well below the claimed value.

Dilution Volume of Level 1 Volume of Level 0 Expected Value

1 Level 1 _____ L 0 L Label Value
2 1:2 400 L 400 L Label Value/2
3 1:4 400 L of Dilution 2 400 L Label Value/4
2. Run the serial dilutions and the undiluted MasterCheck Level 1

in replicates of 4.
Data evaluation
1. Calculate the mean for each level.
2. Determine the tolerance limits acceptable to your laboratory.

Your laboratory is responsible for determining acceptable
tolerance limits.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix B Analytical sensitivity - method 2 (limit of quantitation)
3. Calculate the tolerance limit ranges, and then record the upper
and lower tolerance limits on the data sheet.
4. Plot the assayed value mean versus the expected value on the
graph, and then the tolerance limits.
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 data sheet

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 graph

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix B Analytical sensitivity - method 2 (limit of quantitation)
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 data sheet example

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 graph example

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix B Functional sensitivity - method 1 (serial dilution)
Functional sensitivity - method 1 (serial

dilution)
This method uses serial dilution of positive samples and comparison
of performance to a reference method to determine the sensitivity of a
qualitative assay on an ARCHITECT i System. If an assay has
comparable sensitivity the dilution factor should be equivalent or
better than the reference method.
Functional sensitivity - method 1 serial dilution data sheet,
page Appendix B-12
Functional sensitivity - method 1 serial dilution data sheet example,
page Appendix B-13
Procedure
1. Prepare the following serial dilutions of 5 or more positive
samples (mid to high-range) with a known negative sample:
1:2, 1:4, 1:8, 1:16, 1:32 (and so forth until the sample is
nonreactive)
NOTE: The positive and negative samples should be serum or

plasma of the same anticoagulant type.
2. Run 2 replicates of the undiluted sample and each dilution for

each method.
Data evaluation
1. Average the 2 replicates for each sample.
2. Determine the highest dilution at which the sample was reactive

for each method.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Functional sensitivity - method 1 (serial dilution) Appendix B
Functional sensitivity - method 1 serial dilution data sheet

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix B Functional sensitivity - method 1 (serial dilution)
Functional sensitivity - method 1 serial dilution data sheet

example

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Precision - method 1 Appendix B
Precision - method 1
This method uses the calculation of mean values to determine assay
precision on an ARCHITECT i System. Precision indicates how well the
assay or system provides the same result when a given sample is tested
repeatedly.
Within-run and total precision is used to evaluate the performance of
an assay or system. Within-run precision provides a "best case"
estimate of the expected performance since there is minimal
opportunity for conditions to change during the course of the run.
Total precision is the most realistic assessment of the performance
because it includes variables such as different operators and laboratory
conditions.
Precision data for assays on the ARCHITECT i System is found under
the SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS section in the
ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert.
A worksheet is provided:
Precision - method 1 data sheet, page Appendix B-14
Procedure
1. Determine the material to use (Abbott control material,
commercial control material, or patient pool).
2. Run the material in duplicate, twice a day.
NOTE: The runs should be at least two hours apart.

Data evaluation
1. Calculate the mean values for both runs.
2. Perform the appropriate calculation to determine the precision.

See the SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS section of
the ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert.
Precision - method 1 data sheet

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix B Precision - method 1

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 Appendix B
Reportable range/calibration verification -

method 1
This method uses the measurement of samples throughout the
reportable range to determine the reportable range/calibration
verification for an assay on an ARCHITECT i System. The terms
reportable range and calibration verification are interchangeable and
use the same protocol.
When MasterCheck is available for an i System this method uses the
measurement of MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3. If MasterCheck is not
available, substitute other appropriate material.
If the value exceeds the assay range, method 1 uses an 8:10 dilution of
MasterCheck Level 3. If MasterCheck is not available, substitute
Calibrator F when available.
NOTE: By adding MasterCheck Level 4 to the run you can perform

this procedure concurrently with the automated dilution verification
procedure.
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 data sheet,
page Appendix B-18
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 graph,
page Appendix B-19
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 - data sheet
example, page Appendix B-20
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 graph example,
page Appendix B-21
Procedure
1. Determine the number of replicates (up to 3) to run.
2. Run MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3 as unknown samples.

If the value of MasterCheck Level 3 exceeds the assay range,
make an 8:10 dilution of MasterCheck Level 3 using eight parts
MasterCheck Level 3 to two parts MasterCheck Level 0.

3. Use the appropriate analytical sensitivity method for the specific

assay to determine the limit of detection.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix B Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1
Data evaluation
tolerance limits.
3. Average the replicates for each level if you ran more than one
replicate.
4. Plot the assayed MasterCheck value on the Y-axis of the graph

versus the expected MasterCheck value on the X-axis.
If the value of MasterCheck Level 3 exceeds the calibrator range,
plot the calculated value of the 8:10 dilution of MasterCheck
Level 3.
5. Plot the lower tolerance limit on the Y-axis versus the expected
values of MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3 on the X-axis.
6. Plot the upper tolerance limit on the Y-axis versus the expected
7. Connect the points for each of the three lines.

If the line formed by connecting the points for the assayed
MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3 values falls between the upper
and lower tolerance limits, the reportable range is verified.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 data

sheet

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 graph

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 - data

sheet example

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

example

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Reportable range/calibration verification- method 2 Appendix B
Reportable range/calibration verification-

method 2
If the value exceeds the assay range, method 2 uses an 9:10 dilution of
MasterCheck Level 3.
page Appendix B-24
page Appendix B-25
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 2 data sheet
page Appendix B-26
Procedure

If the value of MasterCheck Level 3 exceeds the assay range,
make a 9:10 dilution of MasterCheck Level 3 using nine parts
MasterCheck Level 3 to one part MasterCheck Level 0.


Data evaluation
tolerance limits.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix B Reportable range/calibration verification- method 2
replicate.

plot the calculated value of the 9:10 dilution of MasterCheck
Level 3.


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

sheet

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

sheet example

example

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Reportable range/calibration verification -

method 3
page Appendix B-30
page Appendix B-31
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 3 data sheet
page Appendix B-32
Procedure


Data evaluation
tolerance limits.
replicate.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007



(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

sheet

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

sheet example

example

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Automated dilution verification - method 1 Appendix B
Automated dilution verification - method 1

This method uses the calculation of a mean value to verify the
automated dilution for an assay on an ARCHITECT i System.
NOTE: By adding MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3 to the run you can

perform this procedure concurrently with the reportable range
procedure.
Automated dilution verification - method 1 data sheet,
page Appendix B-35
Automated dilution verification - method 1 data sheet example,
page Appendix B-35
Procedure
2. Run MasterCheck Level 4 using the automated dilution protocol.

3. Perform the following steps if the value of MasterCheck Level 4

exceeds the assay range:
a. Prepare the desired manual dilution of MasterCheck Level 4
(for example, 8:10) using MasterCheck Level 0.
b. Run the diluted MasterCheck Level 4 with the automated

dilution protocol in replicates of up to 3.
Data evaluation
tolerance limits.
2. Calculate the tolerance limit ranges. Record the upper and lower
tolerance limits on the data sheet.
3. If more than one replicate was run, average the results obtained.
evaluate the calculated value of the manual dilution for
MasterCheck Level 4.
4. If the assayed MasterCheck Level 4 value falls between the upper

and lower tolerance limits, the automated dilution for this assay
is verified.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix B Automated dilution verification - method 1
Automated dilution verification - method 1 data sheet
Automated dilution verification - method 1 data sheet

example

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Automated dilution verification - method 1 Appendix B

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix B Methods comparison - method 1 (correlation)
Methods comparison - method 1 (correlation)

This method uses correlation to determine the method comparison
between your existing assay method and the ARCHITECT i System
assay method.
A worksheet is provided:
Methods comparison - method 1 correlation data sheet,
page Appendix B-38
Procedure
1. Determine the number of samples to run ensuring adequate
distribution throughout the assay range.
2. Run the samples.
3. Record the sample values using the X column for your existing
method and the Y column for the ARCHITECT i System method
values.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Methods comparison - method 1 (correlation) Appendix B
Methods comparison - method 1 correlation data sheet

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix B Methods comparison - method 2 (concordance)
Methods comparison - method 2 (concordance)

This method uses concordance to determine the method comparison
between your existing assay method and the ARCHITECT i System.
Concordance is a study used to compare the agreement between two
methods when assessing the distribution of values in specific
concentration ranges (for example, at a cut-off value).
Methods comparison - method 2 concordance data sheet,
page Appendix B-40
Methods comparison - method 2 concordance calculation sheet,
page Appendix B-41
Methods comparison - method 2 concordance calculation sheet
Procedure
1. Determine the number of samples to run ensuring adequate
distribution throughout the assay range.
2. Run the samples.
3. Record the sample values using the X column for your existing
method and the Y column for the ARCHITECT i System method
values.
4. Determine the concordance using the following formula.

% Concordance = (total true positives and true negatives)/total
samples x 100
5. Determine the specificity, correct true negative results, using the

following formula. (optional)
% Specificity = true negatives/(total true negatives and false
positives) x 100
6. Determine the sensitivity, correct true positive results, using the

following formula. (optional)
% Sensitivity = true positives/(total true positives and false
negatives) x 100
Where:
True negative = Negative by both reference and test method
True positive = Positive by both reference and test method

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Methods comparison - method 2 (concordance) Appendix B
False negative = Negative by test method; positive by reference method

False positive = Positive by test method; negative by reference method
Methods comparison - method 2 concordance data sheet

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix B Methods comparison - method 2 (concordance)
Methods comparison - method 2 concordance calculation

sheet
Methods comparison - method 2 concordance calculation

sheet example

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Methods comparison - method 2 (concordance) Appendix B

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix B Analytical specificity - method 1
Analytical specificity - method 1

See the ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert for the
description of the procedure used and the results for specificity and
interferences studies.
Procedures in NCCLS Document EP-7, Vol. 6, No. 13 were followed.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Reference range - method 1 Appendix B
Reference range - method 1

Initially use the reference range for the specific ARCHITECT i assay as
stated in the assay-specific package insert.
NOTE: Your laboratory is responsible for determining the appropriate

reference range(s).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix C Math models
Introduction
Data reduction/calibration methods use various math models to

analyze a set of given data and calculate results. These math models
may range in complexity from simple subtraction to polynomial
equations.
Math model topics include:
c System data reduction methods, page Appendix C-2
i System data reduction methods, page Appendix C-13
i System adjustment methods, page Appendix C-19
Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Appendix C-1

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
c System data reduction methods Appendix C
c System data reduction methods

The ARCHITECT c System uses photometric and potentiometric
technology to measure analyte concentrations in samples. Data
reduction/calibration methods are specific to the technology type.
c System data reduction methods topics include:
Photometric data reduction methods, page Appendix C-2
Potentiometric data reduction method, page Appendix C-8
Photometric data reduction methods

Photometric data reduction/calibration methods analyze photometric
read data to calculate results.
Photometric data reduction methods include:
Absorbance method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-2
Factor method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-2
Linear method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-3
Logit-4 method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-5
Spline method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-6
Use factor and blank method (photometric - c System),
page Appendix C-7
Absorbance method (photometric - c System)
The absorbance data reduction method uses the comparison between

the absorbance of the sample and the absorbance of water to calculate
results. For end-point assays the data is expressed as absorbance and
for rate assays the data is expressed as the rate of absorbance
change/minute.
Factor method (photometric - c System)
The Factor data reduction method uses a reagent blank and a fixed cal
factor value to calculate results. This method is applicable to assays for
which the reaction is linear and stable across all reagent lots. It is ideal
for measuring enzyme activity in a sample at a predictable and steady
rate that can be determined for the chromophore, wavelengths, and
instrument in use.
The enzyme activity or sample concentration is calculated using the
following equation:
Appendix C-2 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
Appendix C c System data reduction methods
X = (A-Ablk) x Factor
Where:
X = Activity or concentration of the sample (unknown)
A = Absorbance or absorbance change of the unknown
Ablk = Absorbance or absorbance change of the reagent blank
Factor = Calibration factor
Linear method (photometric - c System)
The linear data reduction method uses a reagent blank and one to six
calibrators to generate a point-to-point calibration curve. The slope is
calculated for each segment of the curve between the calibrator levels.
Figure Appendix C.1: Linear calibration curve - six calibrators
Legend:
blk Concentration of the reagent blank
C1 to C6 Concentration of calibrator
Ablk Absorbance or absorbance change of the reagent blank
Ac1 to Ac6 Absorbance or absorbance change of the calibrator
The absorbance or absorbance change measured for the sample

determines which of the following equations are used to calculate the
sample concentration.
When A Ac1

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
X = F1 (A - Ablk) + blk
When Ac1 < A Ac2

X = F2 (A - Ac1) + C1
When Ac2 < A Ac3

X = F3 (A - Ac2) + C2
When Ac3 < A Ac4

X = F4 (A - Ac3) + C3
When Ac4 < A Ac5

X = F5 (A - Ac4) + C4
When Ac5 < A

X = F6 (A - Ac5) + C5
Where:
A = Absorbance or absorbance change of the sample
(unknown)
Ac1 to Ac6 = Absorbance or absorbance change of the calibrator
Ablk = Absorbance or absorbance change of the reagent blank
X = Concentration of the sample (unknown)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
C1 to C6 = Concentration of calibrator
blk = Concentration of the reagent blank
F1 to F6 = Cal factor (1 / slope)
Logit-4 method (photometric - c System)
The Logit-4 data reduction method uses a reagent blank and three to
six calibrators to generate a calibration curve. This method is
applicable to assays for which the absorbance or absorbance change
increases as the calibrator concentration increases.
Figure Appendix C.2: Logit-4 calibration curve - three to six

calibrators
Legend:
C1 to C(n) Concentration of calibrator
X Concentration of unknown sample
Ac1 to Ac(n) Absorbance or absorbance change of the calibrator
A Absorbance or absorbance change of the unknown sample
The equation used in the approximation is:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
Where:
(unknown)
Kc, a, b = Constants of the approximation expression
Ablk = Approximate value of the absorbance or absorbance
change of the reagent blank
X = Concentration of sample (unknown)
ln = Natural log
When the concentration is close to 0, the Logit-4 calibration curve

converges asymptotically toward the absorbance or absorbance
change of the reagent blank as the concentration approaches 0. This
convergence may not show on the graph if the scale is too large.
The approximation expression is simple and the constant is
determined through approximation by non-linear regression.
Therefore, the curve may not always pass through the absorbance (or
absorbance change) data points of the calibrator.
It is possible to set a parameter to detect an error if the SD (standard
deviation) of the absorbance or absorbance change of the calibrators
exceeds the user-specified value.
Spline method (photometric - c System)
The spline data reduction method uses a reagent blank and three to six
calibrators to generate a calibration curve. The concentration axis of
the calibration curve graph is divided into multiple sections with the
divisions corresponding to the concentrations of the calibrators. Each
section of the curve is interpolated using a polynomial expression so
that the adjoining sections are connected smoothly.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
Figure Appendix C.3: Spline calibration curve - three to six calibrators
Legend:
C1 to C(n) Concentration of calibrator
Ac1 to Ac(n) Absorbance or absorbance change of the calibrator
The polynomial equation used is:
Where:
(unknown)
a(n), b(n), = Constants of the approximation expression
c(n), d(n)
X = Concentration of sample (unknown)
Use factor and blank method (photometric - c System)
The use factor and blank data reduction method uses the factor and
reagent blank of a calibration curve generated for another assay

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
(reference assay) to calculate results. This method is used when two or

more assays use the same reagents. The reference assay is defined in
the assay parameter file.
Figure Appendix C.4: Use factor and blank - linear calibration curve
Legend:
Ac1' Absorbance or absorbance change of the calibrator used for
the reference test
Ablk' Absorbance or absorbance change of the reagent blank for
the reference test
C1' Concentration of the calibrator used for the reference test
The equation used is:
Potentiometric data reduction method

The potentiometric data reduction method analyzes electrical
potential data to calculate electrolyte results.
There are three components to the potentiometric method:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
Electromotive force measurement (potentiometric - c System),

page Appendix C-9
Slope calculation (potentiometric - c System), page Appendix C-10
Sample measurement (potentiometric - c System), page Appendix
C-11
Electromotive force measurement (potentiometric - c System)
The electromotive force measurement uses the difference (potential

difference) between the electromotive force of an unknown sample
and the electromotive force of the ICT Reference Solution, measured
immediately after the sample, to determine electrolyte concentration.
Figure Appendix C.5: Electromotive force calculation
Where:
Ei = Potential difference between the sample and ICT
Reference Solution for each electrode
= Potential of each electrode (i), in contact with ICT

Reference Solution
Es,i = Potential of each electrode (i), in contact with the

sample
i = Ion of interest (Na+, K+, and Cl-)
EMF = Electromotive force expressed in millivolts

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
Slope calculation (potentiometric - c System)
The slope calculation uses the differences (potential differences)

between the electromotive forces of two calibrators and the
electromotive force of the ICT Reference Solution and compares them
to the calibrator concentrations to generate a calibration curve. Two
graphs are generated:
Calibration graph showing the relationship of the ion electrolyte
concentration to the electromotive force
Electrode response curve during calibration
Figure Appendix C.6: Relationship between ion electrolyte

concentration and electromotive force
Where:
S = Slope (mV/decade) of each electrode
CL, CH = Concentration of the Low and High Calibrators
CN = Concentration of ICT Reference Solution
EL, EH = Difference in potential of each electrode between the
ICT Reference Solution and the calibrator
Ci = Concentration of the specific ion of interest

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
Figure Appendix C.7: Electrode (mV) response curve during

calibration
Where:
CL, CH = Concentration of the Low and High Calibrators
EL, EH = Difference in potential of each electrode between the
ICT Reference Solution and the calibrator
Ci = Concentration of the specific ion of interest
Sample measurement (potentiometric - c System)
The sample measurement uses the following data to determine the

electrolyte (ICT) concentration in an unknown sample:
The difference between the electromotive forces of the unknown
sample and the ICT Reference Solution
The difference between the electromotive forces of the low
calibrator and the ICT Reference Solution
The slope of the specific ICT electrode
The following equation is used:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
Figure Appendix C.8: Electrode (mV) response curve during sample

measurement
Where:
Ci = Concentration of the specific ion of interest in the
sample
CL = Concentration of the ion of interest in the Low Calibrator
(This is the baseline for sample calculations.)
S = Slope of the ICT electrode of interest
Ei = Difference in electrode potential when exposed to the
sample and ICT Reference Solution
EL = Difference in the ICT electrode potential when exposed
to ICT Reference Solution and the Low Calibrator
during calibration

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
Appendix C i System data reduction methods
i System data reduction methods

The ARCHITECT i System uses CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle
immunoassay) technology to measure analyte concentrations in
samples. Data reduction/calibration methods are specific to this type
of technology.
i System data reduction methods topics include:
Point to point method (i System), page Appendix C-13
Linear regression method (i System), page Appendix C-13
4PLC methods (i System), page Appendix C-15
Cutoff assay method (i System), page Appendix C-17
Point to point method (i System)

The point to point data reduction method uses the average RLU
(relative light unit) value obtained for each calibrator compared to the
calibrator concentration to generate a calibration curve. A straight line
is used to connect each point and the slope is calculated for each line
segment. Concentrations of unknown samples are calculated from the
line segment that brackets the sample RLU values.
Figure Appendix C.9: Point to point calibration method
For example, if a sample has an RLU value between the RLU values for
Calibrator B and Calibrator C, the unknown sample concentration is
calculated using the following equation:
Linear regression method (i System)

The linear regression data reduction method uses the linear
relationship between the RLU (relative light unit) value and the

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
i System data reduction methods Appendix C
concentration of the analyte in the sample as follows to generate a

calibration curve:
The intercept in this case is the RLU value at concentration zero. The
slope defines how much the concentration increases when the RLU
value increases.
Figure Appendix C.10: Linear regression calibration method
The unknown specimen concentration is calculated using the

following equation:
Slope and intercept are obtained from the calibration. The parameters
are determined by minimizing the sum of squares of the difference
between the observed and predicted (by the regression equation)
values for all calibrators as shown in the following formulas:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
Where:
= Standard deviation associated with a calibrator
= Observed calibrator concentration
= Observed calibrator RLU value
4PLC methods (i System)

4PLC (four-parameter logistic curve fit or four-parameter logistic
calibration) data reduction methods use the difference between the
predicted and observed calibrator concentration or signal to generate a
calibration curve.
4PLC is calculated as follows:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
The four parameters (P1 through P4) control the shape of the curve.
Depending on the data generated a 4PLC curve can be either
sigmoidal (S-shaped) or have no second bend at all.
The four parameters are used as follows:
Defines the signal at an infinite concentration
Defines the maximum theoretical range of the RLU (relative

light unit) value from concentration zero to infinity
Defines the concentration that yields a signal midway

between the highest and the lowest possible signal
Determines if the curve is S-shaped. The curve is S-shaped

when P4>1.
These parameters are calculated to find the P values that result in a

curve with the lowest sum of squares.
There are two types of 4PLC curve fit methods:

4PLC with x residual minimization (x weighted)
4PLC with y residual minimization (y weighted)
4PLC with x residual minimization (x-weighted) method (i System)
The 4PLC (four-parameter logistic curve fit) with x-residual

minimization data reduction method uses the difference between the
predicted and observed calibrator concentration to generate a
calibration curve. The four parameters are computed to result in the
lowest possible sum of squares using the following equation:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
Where:
= Observed calibrator concentration
= Predicted calibrator concentration
4PLC with y residual minimization (y-weighted) method (i System)
The 4PLC (four-parameter logistic curve fit) with y-residual

minimization data reduction method uses the difference between the
predicted and observed calibrator signals to generate a calibration
curve. The four parameters are computed to result in the lowest
possible sum of squares using the following equation:
Where:
= Observed calibrator signal (RLU)
= Predicted calibrator signal (RLU)
Cutoff assay method (i System)

The cutoff assay data reduction method uses a one or two point
calibration to determine the point (cutoff) where reactive and
non-reactive samples are differentiated. Cutoff formulas can use
addition, subtraction, and multiplication and it is possible to add
constants. Once the cutoff is determined the unknown sample RLU
(relative light unit) value is divided by the cutoff to determine the
cutoff ratio (index).
For more information on the methods, see:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
One-point qualitative (index formula) method (i System),

page Appendix C-18
Two-point qualitative (index formula) method (i System),
page Appendix C-18
One-point qualitative (index formula) method (i System)
The one point qualitative data reduction method uses one calibrator
in the index formula. Depending on the cutoff formula, the calibrator
can be either reactive or non-reactive for the assay.
The following is an example of a one-point cutoff formula where a and
b are assay-specific constants:
Cutoff = a x Calibrator Signal + b
Two-point qualitative (index formula) method (i System)
The two point qualitative data reduction method uses two calibrators
in the index formula. Depending on the cutoff formula, the calibrators
for the assay can be:
Both reactive
Both non-reactive
One reactive and the other non-reactive
The following is an example of a two-point cutoff formula where a
and b are assay-specific constants:
Cutoff = a x Calibrator 1 Signal + Calibrator 2 Signal - b

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
Appendix C i System adjustment methods
i System adjustment methods

Adjustment methods allow you to run two calibrator levels instead of
six to calibrate an assay. The two calibrator levels (adjusters) are used
to adjust the master calibration curve stored in the reagent bar code to
reflect the actual RLU (relative light unit) values measured on your
system.
The ARCHITECT i System offers the following methods of calibration
adjustment:
Ratio technique method (i System), page Appendix C-19
Linear transformation method (i System), page Appendix C-20
Parameter method (i System), page Appendix C-21
Curve shape method (i System), page Appendix C-21
Ratio technique method (i System)

The ratio technique adjustment method compares the RLU (relative
light unit) value of the calibrators to the corresponding calibrator
values from the master calibration curve. This technique is used when
the lower end of the calibration curve has different characteristics
than the rest of the curve, but the general behavior of the curve is still
proportional and linear.
Ratios are calculated for calibrator 1 and calibrator 2 using the
following formulas:
Where:
Calibrator1 = RLU (value) measured for Calibrator 1
Master1 = RLU (value) stored in the reagent bar code for the
calibrator corresponding to Calibrator 1
Where:
Calibrator2 = RLU (value) measured for Calibrator 2
Master2 = RLU (value) stored in the reagent bar code for the
calibrator corresponding to Calibrator 2

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
i System adjustment methods Appendix C
Two types of ratio techniques, A and AB, are used depending on which
master calibrator level(s) is multiplied by ratio 1 and ratio 2.
The ratio A technique adjustment method produces an estimate of
RLU values by multiplying the RLU (relative light unit) value stored in
the reagent bar code for:
Calibrator A by ratio 1
Calibrator B through F by ratio 2
The ratio AB technique adjustment method produces an estimate of
RLU values by multiplying the RLU (relative light unit) value stored in
the reagent bar code for:
Calibrators A and B by ratio 1
Calibrators C through F by ratio 2
The estimated instrument specific RLU values are used to generate the
calibration curve.
Linear transformation method (i System)

The linear transformation adjustment method assumes a linear
relationship between the calibrator RLU (relative light unit) values
generated by the system and the master calibration information stored
in the reagent bar code.
The following is an example where the slope and intercept that
describe the linear relationship are based on the RLU values of
calibrator 1 and calibrator 2 generated by the system and their
corresponding values stored in the reagent bar code.
The slope is calculated as follows:
The intercept is calculated as follows:
The instrument RLU values for the six calibrators in the master
calibration can be estimated as follows:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
Appendix C i System adjustment methods
The resulting estimated instrument RLU values for the six calibrators
are then used to generate the calibration curve using the appropriate
calibration curve model.
Parameter method (i System)

The parameter adjustment method uses the RLU (relative light unit)
values stored in the reagent bar code for calibrators A through F to
determine the 4PLC (four parameter logistic curve) parameters of the
master calibration. Calibrator 1 and calibrator 2 adjusters are then
used to provide an instrument specific calibration curve based on the
parameters.
The following equation is used to calculate the residual sum of squares
for the parameter adjustment method:
Where:
= Population average parameter
= System specific parameter
= Standard deviation parameter
= Predicted calibrator signal
= Observed calibrator signal
= Standard deviation of calibrator signal
Curve shape method (i System)

The curve shape adjustment method uses the RLU (relative light unit)
values stored in the reagent bar code for calibrators A through F to
determine the 4PLC (four parameter logistic curve) parameters of the
master calibration. Calibrator 1 and calibrator 2 adjusters are then

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
i System adjustment methods Appendix C
used to provide an instrument-specific calibration curve based on the

shape of the curve.
The following equation is used to calculate the residual sum of squares
for the curve shape adjustment method:
Where:
= Population average shape parameter
= System specific shape parameter
= Standard deviation shape parameter
= Predicted calibrator signal
= Observed calibrator signal
= Standard deviation of calibrator signal

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix D List numbers
ARCHITECT System
List numbers are unique identifiers that are used when ordering
products. These numbers are provided for guidance only and are
subject to change. Contact your Abbott representative for the most
current list numbers.
List numbers topics include:
Consumable list numbers (c System), page Appendix D-2
Consumable list numbers (i System), page Appendix D-3
Accessory kit list numbers (c 8000), page Appendix D-4
Accessory kit list numbers (c 16000), page Appendix D-7
Accessory kit list number (i System), page Appendix D-10
Additional accessory list numbers, page Appendix D-12
Electronic media list numbers, page Appendix D-13
Manual list numbers, page Appendix D-14
SCC component list numbers, page Appendix D-15
Sample handler kit list numbers, page Appendix D-17
Processing module list numbers, page Appendix D-18
Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Appendix D-1

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Consumable list numbers (c System) Appendix D
Consumable list numbers (c System)

ARCHITECT c System. Contact your Abbott representative to order the
following consumables.
ARCHITECT c System consumables
Item Quantity List Number
Acid Wash Solution 2 x 500 mL 06K01-20
Alkaline Wash Solution 2 x 500 mL 09D31-20
ICT Reference Solution 2x2L 01E49-20
ICT Cleaning Fluid 10 x 12 mL 01E50-20
ICT module 1 09D28-03
Detergent A 2 x 500 mL 01J72-20
Detergent B 4 x 250 mL 02J94-20
Water Bath Additive 2 x 500 mL 09D29-20
Sample Cups 1000/box 07C14-01
Small Cartridge, Natural (55 mL) 20/bag 03E20-20
Small Cartridge, White (55 mL) 20/bag 03E21-20
Large Cartridge, Natural (90 mL) 20/bag 03E22-20
Large Cartridge, White (90 mL) 20/bag 03E23-20
20 mL Truncated, Clear 20/bag 04J67-20
20 mL Truncated, Opaque 20/bag 04J66-20
Container Caps 20/bag 03E24-20
Appendix D-2 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Appendix D Consumable list numbers (i System)
Consumable list numbers (i System)

ARCHITECT i System. Contact your Abbott representative to order the
following consumables.
ARCHITECT i System consumables
Concentrated Wash Buffer:
Concentrated Wash Buffer (1 L bottle) 4 x 975 mL 06C54-55
Concentrated Wash Buffer, ARCHITECT ARM (10 L 1 x 9.75 L 06C54-85
cubitainer)
Multi-Assay Manual Diluent 1 x 100 mL 07D82-50
Pre-Trigger Solution 4 x 975 mL, 06E23-65
9000 tests/btl
Trigger Solution 4 x 975 mL, 06C55-60
3000 tests/btl
Reaction Vessels 2000/box 07C15-01
Replacement Caps 100/box 04D19-01
Septums 200/box 04D18-02
Sample Cups 1000/box 07C14-01

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Accessory kit list numbers (c 8000) Appendix D
Accessory kit list numbers (c 8000)

There are three accessory kits for the ARCHITECT c 8000 System:
Accessory kit 1 (c 8000) - LN 01G09-01, page Appendix D-4 -
contains items used for the installation of the system, items used
to perform maintenance and troubleshooting procedures, and
some spare accessories for as-needed component replacement.
Accessory kit 2 (c 8000 and c 16000) - LN 02K10-01,
page Appendix D-6 - contains some consumable items used
during installation of the system and while you perform any
required validation studies, and two calibration tools used for
some maintenance procedures.
Customer maintenance kit (c 8000) - LN 02J53-01, page Appendix
D-6 - contains all accessories required to perform scheduled
maintenance for one year.
Your Abbott representative orders the accessory kits for you. Contact
your Abbott representative to order individual items.
For other accessories such as sample carriers, carrier trays, and cuvette
segments see Additional accessory list numbers, page Appendix D-12.
Accessory kit 1 (c 8000) - LN 01G09-01
Installation components
Power Cable - UL and IEC Plug 1 02J54-01
Waste and Water Tubing Kit 1 NA
High Concentration Waste Tubing Kit 1 NA
ICT Probe 1 09D63-03
ICT Probe Holder 1 NA
Reagent Probe 1 01G47-03
Reagent Probe Tubing 1 01G47-02
Sample Probe 1 01G48-03
Sample Probe Tubing 1 01G48-02
c 8000 (R1)/c 16000 (R1 and R2) Large Cartridge, Segment A (Target) 1 04J30-01
c 8000 (R1)/c 16000 (R1 and R2) Large Cartridge, Segment A, B, C 2 04J33-01
c 8000 (R1)/c 16000 (R1 and R2) Segment D (Target) 1 04J32-01
R2, Small Cartridge, Segment A (target) 1 04J29-01
R2, Large Cartridge, Segment B, C, and D 1 04J31-01
R2, Small Cartridge, Segment B, C, and D 2 01G52-01
Maintenance components

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Appendix D Accessory kit list numbers (c 8000)
Accessory kit 1 (c 8000) - LN 01G09-01 (continued)

Phillips Screwdriver 1 NA
Slotted Screwdriver 1 NA
10 mm Wrench 1 NA
c 8000 Cuvette Segment Alignment Tool 1 02J93-01
Nozzle, Cleaning Wire 10 09D50-02
Container, Parts case 1 NA
Accessories
20 mL Reagent Cartridge Adapter 10 09D22-11
Small Reagent Cartridge Adapter 20 09D22-06
Spare components
1 mL Syringe 6 09D41-02
Cuvette Dry Tip 1 NA
Cuvette Pair Replacement Set 2 01G46-02
Cuvette Wiper 1 09D42-02
ICT O-ring 5 09F93-02
ICT Reference Solution Check Valve 1 09D35-02
Mixer 1 09D59-02
Sample Probe Tubing, Joint to Syringe 1 NA
R1 Tubing, Joint to Syringe 1 NA
R2 Tubing, Joint to Syringe 1 NA
Reagent Probe 1 01G47-03
Reagent Probe Tubing 1 01G47-02
Reagent Syringe O-ring 4 09D53-02
Reagent Syringe Seal Tip # 1 2 09D39-02
Reagent/Sample Probe Screw 5 02J51-01
Reference/Wash Solution Line Filter 3 09D43-02
Sample/Wash Solution Syringe O-ring 2 09D52-02
Sample/Wash Solution Syringe Seal Tip #1 1 09D37-02
Syringe Incoming Water Line Seal 5 NA
Source Lamp 1 09D45-02
Wash Solution Check Valve 1 09D34-02

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Accessory kit 2 (c 8000 and c 16000) - LN 02K10-01

Large Cartridge, Natural (90 mL) 1 bag of 20 03E22-20
Small Cartridge, Natural (55 mL) 1 bag of 20 03E20-20
20 mL Truncated, Clear 1 bag of 20 04J67-20
Container Caps 1 bag of 20 03E24-20
Sample Cups 1 box of 1000 07C14-01
Customer maintenance kit (c 8000) - LN 02J53-01


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Accessory kit list numbers (c 16000)

There are three accessory kits for the ARCHITECT c 16000 System:
Accessory kit 1 (c 16000) - LN 08L71-01, page Appendix D-7 -
contains items used for the installation of the system, items used
to perform maintenance and troubleshooting procedures, and
some spare accessories for as-needed component replacement.
Accessory kit 2 (c 8000 and c 16000) - LN 02K10-01,
page Appendix D-9 - contains some consumable items used
during installation of the system and while you perform any
required validation studies, and two calibration tools used for
some maintenance procedures.
Customer maintenance kit (c 16000) - LN 08L72-01, page Appendix
D-9 - contains all accessories required to perform scheduled
maintenance for one year.
Your Abbott representative orders the accessory kits for you. Contact
your Abbott representative to order individual items.
For other accessories such as sample carriers, carrier trays, and cuvette
segments see Additional accessory list numbers, page Appendix D-12.
Accessory kit 1 (c 16000) - LN 08L71-01
Installation components
Power Cable - UL and IEC Plug 1 02J54-01
Waste and Water Tubing Kit 1 NA
High Concentration Waste Tubing Kit 1 NA
ICT Probe 1 09D63-03
ICT Probe Holder 1 NA
Reagent Probe - R1A/R2B (L) 1 09D48-02
Reagent Probe - R1B/R2A(r) 1 09D49-02
Tubing, Joint to R Probe, R1 & 2A 2 09D48-05
Tubing, Joint to R Probe, R1 & 2B 2 09D49-05
c 8000 (R1)/c 16000 (R1 and R2) Large Cartridge, Segment A (Target) 1 04J30-01
c 8000 (R1)/c 16000 (R1 and R2) Large Cartridge, Segment A, B, C 2 04J33-01
c 8000 (R1)/c 16000 (R1 and R2) Segment D (Target) 1 04J32-01
c 8000 (R1)/c 16000 (R1 and R2) Small Cartridge, Segment A, B, C 3 01G51-01
Maintenance components

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Accessory kit 1 (c 16000) - LN 08L71-01 (continued)

Phillips Screwdriver 1 NA
Slotted Screwdriver 1 NA
10 mm Wrench 1 NA
c 16000 Cuvette Segment Alignment Tool 1 08L73-01
Nozzle Cleaning Wire 10 09D50-02
Container, Parts case 1 NA
Accessories
20 mL Reagent Cartridge Adapter 20 09D22-11
Small Reagent Cartridge Adapter 30 09D22-06
Spare components
Cuvette Dry Tip 2 09D51-02
Cuvette Pair Replacement Set 2 09D33-03
Cuvette Wiper 1 09D42-02
ICT O-ring 5 09F93-02
Mixer 1 09D59-02
Pipettor Arm Cover Screw 3 09D46-20
Reagent Probe R1A/R2B 1 09D48-02
Reagent Probe R1B/R2A 1 09D49-02
Reagent Probe Screw 3 09D48-10
Tubing, Joint to R Probe, R1 & 2A 2 09D48-05
Tubing, Joint to R Probe, R1 & 2B 2 09D49-05
Reference/Wash Solution Line Filter 3 09D43-02
Sample Probe Tubing, Joint to Syringe 1 NA
Probe Screw, c 8000 (Reagent and Sample)/c 16000 (Sample) 5 02J51-01
Syringe Incoming Water Line Seal 5 NA
Wash Solution Check Valve 1 09D34-02

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Accessory kit 2 (c 8000 and c 16000) - LN 02K10-01

Large Cartridge, Natural (90 mL) 1 bag of 20 03E22-20
Small Cartridge, Natural (55 mL) 1 bag of 20 03E20-20
20 mL Truncated, Clear 1 bag of 20 04J67-20
Container Caps 1 bag of 20 03E24-20
Sample Cups 1 box of 1000 07C14-01
Customer maintenance kit (c 16000) - LN 08L72-01


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Accessory kit list number (i System) Appendix D
Accessory kit list number (i System)

The ARCHITECT i System accessory kit contains items used for the
installation of the system, items used to perform maintenance and
troubleshooting procedures, and some spare accessories for as-needed
component replacement. Your Abbott representative orders the
accessory kits for you. Contact your Abbott representative to order
individual items.
For other accessories such as an external thermometer, sample carriers,
and carrier trays see Additional accessory list numbers, page Appendix
D-12.
NOTE: Accessories for an i 2000SR processing module may contain

common items labeled as ARCHITECT i 2000. These parts are
interchangeable and you may use them on an i 2000SR.
ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR accessory kits - LN 08C94-01 (i 2000) and LN 03M77-01 (i
2000SR)
i 2000 and i 2000SR components - LN 08C94-01 and LN 03M77-01
Bag, Biohazard 12 NA
Bleach Preparation Container 1 08C94-63
External Waste Tubing 1 NA
Filter, Buffer 1 08C94-28
Filter, Card Cage/Supply 2 08C94-07
Filter, Processing Center 1 08C94-14
Maintenance Kit:
Bar Code Calibration Tool 2 06E67-01
Carrier Calibration Tool 1 05E13-01
Flashlight 1 NA
Fuse Kit 2 NA
Grease 1 NA
Lens Paper 1 NA
Maintenance Cleaning Bottle 1 02G16-99
Optics Cap 1 NA
WZ Probe Maintenance Water Bottle 1 06E68-01
Screwdriver #1 Phillips 1 NA
Screwdriver #2 Phillips 1 NA
SH Bar Code Tool 2 06E69-01
Thermistor Removal Wrench 1 NA

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Appendix D Accessory kit list number (i System)
ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR accessory kits - LN 08C94-01 (i 2000) and LN 03M77-01 (i

2000SR) (continued)
Valve Removal Tool 1 NA
Power cord kit 1 NA
Probe, Wash Zone 3 08C94-35
Probe (Sample/Reagent) 2 08C94-42
Probe/Tubing, Waste Arm 1 08C94-89
Sensor, Level, Buffer 1 08C94-25
Sensor, Level, Trigger 1 08C94-26
Sensor, Level, Pre-Trigger 1 08C94-27
Tubing, Probe 2 08C94-49
Tubing/Sensor, Temp, WZ 3 08C94-87
Tubing, Wash Buffer Transfer 1 08C94-21
Wash Buffer Preparation Container 2 08C94-56
Wash Buffer Reservoir 1 NA
i 2000 components - LN 08C94-01
Internal component cover 1 1 06E27-10
Internal component cover 2 & 3 1 06E27-20
Internal component cover 4 (i 2000 accessory kit only) 1 06E27-30
i 2000SR components - LN 03M77-01
STAT Probe Tubing (i 2000SR accessory kit only) 1 03M77-49
Internal component cover 1 1 06E27-10
Internal component cover 2 & 3 1 06E27-20
Internal component cover 4 (i 2000SR accessory kit only) 1 02J63-04

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Additional accessory list numbers Appendix D
Additional accessory list numbers

Additional accessories are products not included in an accessory kit.
These products are used during routine processing, in maintenance
procedures, and for component replacement. Contact your Abbott
representative to order the following accessories.
Additional accessories
Alternate c System Reagent Supply Center Segments:
c 8000 (R1)/c 16000 (R1 and R2) Small Cartridge, Segment A, B, C 1 01G51-01
R2, large cartridge, segments B, C, and D 1 04J31-01
R2, small cartridge, segments B, C, and D 1 01G52-01
Cuvette Segment (c 8000) 1 01G46-01
Cuvette Segment (c 16000) 1 09D32-03
Cuvette Dry Tip (c 8000 and c 16000) 2 09D51-02
LAS Sample Carousel ID Labels (i 2000) 1 sheet 08C96-25
LAS Sample Carousels (i 2000) 2 08C96-07
Pump Poppet Valve Set (c System) 1 09D36-02
RSH Sample Carrier Trays 2 04J49-01
Sample Carousel (c System) 1 02J50-01
Sample Carousel Clip (c System) 1 04J45-01
Sample Carriers 10 05E15-01
Thermometer, External (i System) 1 08C94-88
Carrier Calibration Tool 1 05E13-01
Bar code Calibration Tool 1 06E67-01

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Appendix D Electronic media list numbers
Electronic media list numbers

Some products are distributed on electronic media such as assay files,
maintenance and diagnostic procedure files, and online
documentation. Contact your Abbott representative to order the
following electronic media.
Electronic media
Item List Number
ASIST software diskettes 06D02
Assay disk, ARCHITECT c System:
Assay disk (Conventional Units) 08G98
Assay disk (SI Units) 04J62
Assay CD-ROM, ARCHITECT i System:
Assay CD-ROM - WW (excluding US) 06E59
Assay CD-ROM - US 06E58
Assay CD-ROM - Japan only 05F94
Assay CD-ROM - WW (excluding US) Addition A 03K52
Assay CD-ROM - US Addition A 03K50
Assay CD-ROM - WW (excluding US) Addition B 03K53
Assay CD-ROM - US Addition B 03K51
Assay CD-ROM - WW (excluding US) Addition C 08K30
Assay CD-ROM - WW (excluding US) Addition D 07K32
Assay CD-ROM - US Addition D 07K33
Computer Based Training, ARCHITECT System 03E48
Host/Instrument Interface Data Disk 06D03
Operations Manual, ARCHITECT System 06E28
Operations Manual, ARCHITECT System (with c 16000) 08L43
System Software CD-ROM, ARCHITECT System 05F48

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Manual list numbers Appendix D
Manual list numbers

Support documentation is available in printed format. Contact your
Abbott representative to order the following manuals.
Manuals
Item List Number
Abbott Standard Interface RS232 Manual, ARCHITECT System 06F71
Laboratory Automated System Standard Interface Manual, ARCHITECT i System 05M71
Package Insert Manual, AEROSET and ARCHITECT System 04J69

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Appendix D SCC component list numbers
SCC component list numbers

The following products are required and optional SCC (system control
center) components. Contact your Abbott representative to order the
following components.
SCC components
Item List Number
Required
CPU 07D01-04
SCC Serial Expansion (External Multiport Serial Adapter) 07D01-40
Keyboard:
English Keyboard 07D11-01
French Keyboard 07D11-20
German Keyboard 07D11-30
Italian Keyboard 07D11-40
Spanish Keyboard 07D11-50
Japanese Keyboard 07D11-60
Monitor - 15" 07D03-15
Mouse 07D01-99
Network HUB:
Network Hub & Cables, (DEL08-AA) [US, Canada, Japan, Korea, Taiwan, Latin 07D04-01
America
Network Hub & Cables, (DEL08-AE) [UK, Ireland, Hong Kong, Singapore, Malaysia, 07D04-12
Thailand, Philippines, Indonesia, Vietnam]
Network Hub & Cables, (DEL08-AX) [Central Europe, Israel, Algeria, Austria, Belgium, 07D04-24
Finland, France, Germany, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Spain, Sweden]
Network Hub & Cables, (DEL08-AZ) [Australia, New Zealand, China] 07D04-36
Network Hub & Cables, (DEL08-BJ) [India, South Africa] 07D04-48
Optional
Bar Code Scanner 07D09-02
ARCHITECT and AxSYM Bar Code Scanner User's Guide 02K93
Component Stand 09D19-01
Modem (110V) 07D07-11
Printer:
Printer (110V) 07D08-11
Printer (220V) 07D08-22
Speakers 07D05-11
UPS for SCC only:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
SCC component list numbers Appendix D
SCC components (continued)

Item List Number
UPS 110V 07D06-11
UPS 220V 07D06-22

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Appendix D Sample handler kit list numbers
Sample handler kit list numbers

Depending on your system configuration different sample handler kits
are available. Your Abbott representative orders the appropriate kit for
you.
To order accessories within these kits, see Additional accessory list
numbers, page Appendix D-12.
Sample handler kits
Item List Number
Sample Handler, RSH (robotic sample handler):
i 2000SR Standalone Base RSH Kit (includes 60 carriers, 6 RSH trays) 02J47-10
i 2000SR Add on Kit RSH (includes 60 carriers, 8 RSH trays) 02J47-20
c 8000 Standalone Base RSH Kit (includes 60 carriers, 8 RSH trays) + Control Boards 02J47-50
(PCBs)
c 16000 Standalone Base RSH Kit (includes 60 carriers, 8 RSH trays) + Control Boards 02J47-60
(PCBs)
c 8000 Add on Kit RSH (includes 60 carriers, 10 RSH trays) 02J47-40
c 16000 Add on Kit RSH (includes 60 carriers, 10 RSH trays) 02J47-70
c 8000/c 16000 Standalone Card Cage + Cables 02J47-55
Sample Handler, SSH (standard sample handler):
Base SH Kit (includes 30 carriers) 08C90-01
Single Module SH Kit 08C90-11
Single to Multi-module SH Upgrade 08C91-01
Multi-module Original 08C92-01
Sample Handler, i 2000 LAS (Laboratory Automation System):
LAS General Kit (includes 2 LAS sample carousels, 1 sheet of carousel ID labels, 1 08C96-01
pipettor calibration tool, 1 carousel calibration tool)
LAS General Upgrade Kit (includes 2 LAS sample carousels, 1 sheet of carousel ID 08C96-23
labels, 1 pipettor calibration tool, 1 carousel calibration tool)
Sample Handler, c System LAS (Laboratory Automation System):
c 8000 LAS Standard Kit 07L18-01
c 8000 LAS Upgrade Kit 07L20-01
NOTE: Other items in these kits are used to build the sample handler.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Processing module list numbers Appendix D
Processing module list numbers

Depending on your system configuration different processing modules
and optional components are available. Your Abbott representative
orders the appropriate products for you.
Processing modules
Item List Number
i 2000 processing module 08C89
i 2000SR processing module 03M74
i 2000SR processing module (refurbished) 03M74-98
c 8000 processing module 01G06
c 8000 Skins Kit 01G06-02
c 16000 processing module 03L77-01
c 16000 Skins Kit 08L41-01
High Concentration Waste Bottle 03E50-26
High Concentration Float Switch Cable 03E50-31
External Waste Pump:
i System 08C94-99
c 8000 09D61-02
ARCHITECT ARM (Automated Reconstitution Module) accessory 08C95-88

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix E Descriptions of screen elements
Introduction
Screen elements are items on each screen that allow you to interact
with the system software. Screen elements can be any of the following:
Icons, which allow you to display a menu
Menus, which allow you to display a screen
Buttons, which allow you to initiate a command such as:
Display another screen or window
Add items to a list
Refresh the data on the screen or window
Confirm that you want to save the changes you have
entered
Delete items from the system
Display help for a screen, window, or error message
Data entry boxes, which allow you to enter text
List buttons, which allow you to display a list so you can select
an item
Options, which allow you to select one item from the displayed
choices
Check boxes, which allow you to select one or more items from
the displayed choices
Descriptions of screen elements topics include:
Icons and menus, page Appendix E-2
Shows each icon and its related menu items, and describes what
each icon and menu displays.
Buttons, page Appendix E-6
Shows each button and provides a description of what the
button does.
Field descriptions, page Appendix E-15
Describes each field found on the user interface screens and
windows.
Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Appendix E-1

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Descriptions of screen elements
Icons and menus Appendix E
Icons and menus

Icons and menus allow you to display screens. Also, icons blink to
inform you that a condition requires your attention.
Overview icon
The Overview icon provides access to overall system monitoring data. When
you select it, a menu displays the following options:
Snapshot Select to navigate to the Snapshot screen, which displays
system status information.
Sample status - Select to navigate to the Sample status screen, which
allows you to:
View all unreleased tests for a sample regardless of test status
Rerun patient results
Release completed patient results
Suspend a bay or section on the RSH to allow immediate access to a
sample in process
Operations manual - Select to access the online ARCHITECT System
Operations Manual.
Orders icon
The Orders icon provides access to test ordering functions and illuminates to
notify you that new orders have been downloaded by the host computer but
have not been viewed.
When you select the Orders icon, a menu displays the following options.
Order status - Select to navigate to the Order status screen, which displays
information on the patient, control, and calibration orders currently
managed by the ARCHITECT System. An indicator next to this menu item
displays when new orders have been downloaded by the host computer
but have not been viewed.
Patient order - Select to navigate to the Patient order screens and views,
which allows you to enter a patient order.
Control order - Select to navigate to the Control order screen and views,
which allows you to enter single analyte or multiconstituent control orders.
Calibration order - Select to navigate to the Calibration order screen, which
allows you to enter a calibration order.
Appendix E-2 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix E Icons and menus
Results icon
The Results icon provides access to patient results and illuminates to notify
you results have completed and are awaiting review prior to release.
When you select the Results icon, a menu displays the following options.
Results review - Select to navigate to the Results review screen, which
displays information on the completed patient results awaiting review and
release. An indicator next to this menu item displays to notify you results
have completed. From this screen you can select the patient results to
rerun.
Stored results - Select to navigate to the Stored results screen, which
allows you to:
View patient results that have been reviewed and released
Retransmit patient results to the host computer
Archive patient results

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Icons and menus Appendix E
QC-Cal icon
The QC-Cal icon provides access to QC results, QC graphs, and calibration
results. The icon illuminates to notify you that QC samples have completed
and are awaiting review prior to release, or that a calibration is within 1 hour
of expiration or has an Expired or Failed status.
When you select the QC-Cal icon, a menu displays the following options:
QC result review - Select to navigate to the QC result review screen, which
displays information on completed QC results awaiting review and
release. An indicator next to this menu item displays to notify you QC
results have completed. From this screen you can select the QC results to
rerun.
QC summary - Select to navigate to the QC summary review screen,
which provides a summary of QC data for all assay control levels. You can
select and review individual control level QC data details and the
associated Levey-Jennings graph. From this screen you can also print the
QC analysis, QC summary, and Levey-Jennings reports.
Levey-Jennings graph - Select to view and manipulate QC data. From this
screen you can also print the Levey-Jennings report.
Calibration status - Select to navigate to the Calibration status screen,
which provides a summary list of the calibration status of each assay and
reagent lot loaded on the system. You can select and review individual
calibration curves. An indicator next to this menu item displays to notify
you when a calibration is within 1 hour of expiration or has an Expired or
Failed status.
Calibration history - Select to navigate to the Calibration history screen,
which provides a summary list of the calibration status for current and
previously performed calibrations. You can select, review, and archive
individual calibration curves.
Stored QC results - Select to navigate to the Stored QC results screen,
which allows you to:
View QC results that have been reviewed and released
Retransmit QC results to the host computer
Archive QC results
QC reports - Select to navigate to the QC reports screen, which allows you
to print the QC analysis, QC summary, and Levey-Jennings reports.
Exceptions icon
The Exceptions icon provides access to patient, QC, and calibration result
exceptions and illuminates to notify you of new order exceptions.
When you select the Exceptions icon, a menu displays the following options:
Exception status - Select to navigate to the Exception status screen, which
provides a summary listing of the exceptions that have occurred. An
indicator next to this menu item displays to notify you there are new
exceptions. From this screen you can select the patient and QC exception
results to rerun.
Rerun status - Select to navigate to the Rerun status screen, which
provides a listing of the orders scheduled to be rerun.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix E Icons and menus
Reagents icon
The Reagents icon provides access to reagent inventory management
functions and illuminates to notify you that a reagent kit has a status other
than OK, Mixing (i System), or Overridden.
When you select the Reagents icon, a menu displays the following options:
Reagent status - Select to navigate to the Reagent status screens, which
provides a summary and listing of the current inventory status of the
onboard reagents, and allows you to request a scan of the current reagent
kits for a selected processing module. An indicator next to this menu item
displays to notify you that a reagent kit has a status other than OK, Mixing
(i System), Overridden, or Low Alert.
Reagent history - Select to navigate to the Reagent history screen, which
provides a historical summary listing of the reagent kits that have been
scanned by the reagent bar code reader.
Supplies icon
The Supplies icon provides access to supply inventory management
functions and illuminates to notify you that an inventory item has a status
other than OK.
When you select the Supplies icon, a menu displays the following option:
Supply status - Select to navigate to the Supply status screen and views,
which provides inventory information for the onboard supplies for each
processing module. An indicator next to this menu item displays to notify
you that an inventory item has a status other than OK. From this screen
you can update the status for each item.
System icon
The System icon provides access to system diagnostics, maintenance, and
configuration functions and illuminates to notify you that an in-process
maintenance procedure requires user interaction or that a new message has
been entered into the Temporary message log.
When you select the System icon, a menu displays the following options:
Maintenance - Select to navigate to the Maintenance screen, which allows
you to perform system maintenance procedures. An indicator next to this
menu item displays when an in-process maintenance procedure requires
user input or is complete.
Diagnostics - Select to navigate to the Diagnostics screen, which allows
you to perform system diagnostic procedures.
System logs - Select to navigate to the System logs screen, which allows
you to review the Temporary message log and Message history log. An
indicator next to this menu item displays when a new message has been
entered into the Temporary message log.
Configuration - Select to navigate to the System configuration, which
allows you to configure system, assay, and QC-Cal parameters.
Utilities - Select to navigate to the Software installation and backup, which
allows you to perform system software maintenance tasks.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Buttons Appendix E
Buttons
Each screen, window, and message has buttons. Buttons allow you to
display other screens or windows, add, edit, or delete information
from the system, print reports, or toggle between two views of a screen
or window.
Activity
Allows you to toggle from the Result list to the Activity list
during maintenance and diagnostic procedures.
Add
Saves the information you enter and updates the
corresponding list or table. Also clears data from the window
so you can add the next new item.
Add kit (c System)
Allows you to configure a new reagent kit.
This button is unavailable until you select a lot.
Add level
Allows you to add the control level information you define.
Once added, the new control level displays in the Level list.
This button is unavailable until you select a lot.
Add rule
Displays the Add / edit assay retest rules window.
In this window you can configure or edit retest rules for the
assay you selected.
Cancel
Cancels your selections or entries and displays the screen
or window you were previously viewing.
Carousel (c System)
Allows you to order a sample to be run on the carousel.
Carrier
Allows you to order a sample to be run on the carrier.
Close window
Allows you to close the Maintenance Perform window of an
in-process procedure so you can perform a maintenance
procedure on another module or access other screens and
windows.
Continue
Allows you to continue to the next step of a maintenance or
diagnostic procedure.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix E Buttons
Define data
Displays the Define data window allowing you to enter
expected values for multiconstituent controls.
This button is unavailable until you select an assay(s).
Delete assay
Allows you to delete an assay(s) for a multiconstituent
control.
This button is unavailable until you select an assay(s).
Delete kit (c System)
Allows you to delete a reagent kit.
This button is unavailable until you select a reagent kit.
Delete level
Allows you to delete the control level(s) you selected.
This button is unavailable until you select a control level.
Delete rule
Allows you to delete the retest rule(s) you selected.
This button is unavailable until you select a retest rule.
Delete
Allows you to delete the item(s) you selected.
Deselect all
Allows you to deselect all items in a list.
This button toggles between Deselect all and Select all.
Details view (c System)
Displays the details window(s) for QC and patient results.
This window displays information for a test run using a
photometric assay (c System).
Done
Accepts or saves your selections or entries and displays the
screen or window you were previously viewing.
Edit result
Displays an edit result window allowing the system
administrator to edit the result.
The result flag EDIT displays for the result to indicate it was
edited by the system administrator.
This button is available only for photometric or
potentiometric test results.
Edit rule
Displays the Add / edit assay retest rules window allowing
you to edit a retest rule to create a new one.
This button is unavailable until you select a retest rule.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Buttons Appendix E
Edit
Allows you to edit the item(s) you selected.
Error ?
Displays help for the probable cause and corrective action
for the error.
Export
Initiates the process of exporting an assay file.
F1 - Exit
Displays the Snapshot screen.
F2 - Add order
Saves the order information and clears data from the screen
so that you can add the next order.
F2 - Batch details
Displays the Details for batch window allowing you to name
the batch and add comments for the current batch order.
This button is available only when the order type is batch.
F2 - Log on
Displays the Log on window allowing you to log on to the
system.
F2 - Maint. Log
Displays the Maintenance log screen.
This button toggles between F2 - Maint. Log and F2 - To do.
F2 - Print
Displays the Print options window allowing you to select the
report you want to print.
F2 - QC selection
Displays the QC selection window allowing you to select the
data to display on the Levey-Jennings graph screen.
F2 - Sample details
Displays the Details for sample window allowing you to
enter patient demographic information and comments for
the current sample.
This button is available only when the order type is single.
F2 - Select all / F2 - Deselect all
Allows you to select or deselect all items in a list or table.
This button toggles between Select all and Deselect all.
F2 - To do
Displays the Maintenance screen with the To do tab
selected.
This button toggles between F2 - To do and F2 - Maint. Log.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix E Buttons
F2 - Update supplies
Displays the Windows - Supply status screen allowing you
to update the inventory for the supplies.
F3 - Add order
Saves the order information and clears data from the screen
so that you can add the next order.
F3 - Find
Displays a find options window allowing you to search for
specific data.
F3 - Import (c System)
Displays the Import assay window allowing the system
administrator to import a clinical chemistry assay parameter
file(s).
F3 - Install
Scans the CD and initiates the system software installation
program.
This button is available only if your log on is system
administrator, CSC, or FSE.
F3 - Print
F3 - Shutdown
Displays a message asking you to confirm that you want to
shut down the system.
F4 - Approve
Displays the Approve maintenance log window allowing the
system administrator to approve the maintenance log.
This button is unavailable for the months when no
procedures were performed.
F4 - Create backup
Displays the Create backup window allowing you to initiate a
system backup.
F4 - Export (c System)
Displays the Export assay window allowing you to export a
clinical chemistry assay parameter file(s) to a floppy disk.
F4 - Print
F4 - Scan
Allows you to request a scan of the reagent carousel(s) for a
selected module for the assay(s) you selected.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Buttons Appendix E
F5 - Assay options
Displays an assay options window allowing you to select or
enter assay-specific data for the assay(s) you selected.
F5 - Delete
delete the selected item(s).
F5 - Details
DIsplays the details window allowing you to view detailed
information for the item(s) you selected.
F5 - Perform
Displays the Maintenance perform window or Diagnostic
perform window for the selected procedure.
F5 - Print
F5 - Start-up
start-up the system.
F6 - Assign location (c System)
Displays the assign location window allowing you to select a
specific location for the reagent.
F6 - Configure
Displays the configuration window allowing you to configure
the information for the selected item(s).
F6 - Delete
F6 - Rerun
Displays a rerun options window allowing you to schedule
the selected tests to be rerun, the module on which you
want to rerun them, and the dilutions for the assay.
F6 - Suspend
suspend the selected bay or section to access the sample
you selected.
F6 - Stop
stop the selected module.
F6 - Transmit to host
Allows you to transmit the selected result(s) to the LIS.
This button is unavailable until bidirectional host
communication is configured to On or On with query.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix E Buttons
F6 - Version
Displays the Version details for procedure (maintenance)
window, or the Version details for procedure (diagnostics)
window.
This button is unavailable until you select a maintenance
item from one of the categories.
F7 - Delete
F7 - Details
Displays the details window allowing you to view detailed
information for the item(s) you selected.
F7 - Pause
pause the selected module.
F8 - Archive
Displays the Archive results window, page 5-277 so that you
can save the selected results or calibration curves to a
floppy disk.
This button is unavailable until you select a result or
calibration curve.
F8 - Release
Releases the selected test results.
NOTE: On the Sample status screen this button is not

available if any of the selected items are exceptions (red
text) or are already released (blue text).
F8 - Reset (c System)
reset the volume and onboard stability for the non-bar
coded reagent kit you selected.
F8 - Run
initialize the selected module to running status.
F8 - Transmit to host
Allows you to transmit the selected result(s) to the host
(LIS).
This button is unavailable until bidirectional host
communication is configured to On or On with query.
Fail Curve
Displays a message asking that you confirm you are failing
the selected curve so that it can no longer be used to
calculate results.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Buttons Appendix E
Formula tool
Allows the system administrator to enter a formula when
creating a calculated assay.
Buttons on the formula tool provide the following functions:
/ = Divide
* = Multiply
+ = Add
- = Subtract
= Backspace
= Calculate square root
exp = Perform an exponential calculation
Graph scroll buttons
Allows you to scroll left and right one page at a time.
Graph view (c System)
Displays the reaction graph and absorbance data for QC
and patient results.
Help
Provides access to context-sensitive help for the active SCC
screen, window, or error message.
Import (c System)
Initiates the process of importing an assay file.
L1
Corresponds to the processing module keypad L1 key.
When you are instructed to select this button during a
maintenance or diagnostic procedure, you can select either
the screen button or the keypad button.
L2
L3
L4

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix E Buttons
Left scroll arrow

Allows you to move left one grid square at a time to select a
procedure.
Line scroll down arrow
Allows you to scroll down one line at a time.
Line scroll up arrow

Allows you to scroll up one line at a time.
List
Displays a list of items from which to choose. You can select
one of the items from the list or press the Esc key on the
keyboard to exit.
This button is unavailable (gray background) if there are no
items in a list.
Next
Allows you to display the next item when you have selected
more than one.
OK
Allows you to acknowledge a displayed message and
displays the screen or window you were previously viewing.
Page scroll down
Allows you to move the cursor down one page (view) at a
time.
Page scroll up
Allows you to move the cursor up one page (view) at a time.
Point details scroll buttons

Allows you to scroll left or right one point at a time.
Previous
Allows you to display the previous item when you have
selected more than one.
Print
Allows you to print the results of the procedure you
selected.
Proceed
Allows you to continue to the next step of the maintenance
or diagnostic procedure.
Quit
Cancels your selection and displays the screen or window
you were previously viewing.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Buttons Appendix E
Recalc (c System)
Allows you to recalculate results based on a new active
calibration curve.
Refresh
Allows you to refresh the screen to see any new items that
may be available.
Rescale (c System)
Allows you to adjust the Y axis scale for the reaction graph
based on the range provided.
Results
Allows you to toggle from the Activity list to the Result list
during maintenance and diagnostic procedures.
Right arrow
Allows you to move right one grid square at a time to select
a procedure.
Select all
Allows you to select all items in a list.
This button toggles between Select all and Deselect all.
Select assays
Displays the Select assay window, page 2-172 allowing you
to select one or more assays from the list.
Unload (c System)
Notifies the system that the selected non-bar coded reagent
kit is no longer in the selected position.
Update
Allows you to update the screen to view data for the
selected date range.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix E Field descriptions
Field descriptions
Field descriptions explain the kinds of information you can enter,
select, or view.
Field description topics include:
Overview icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-15
Orders icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-21
Results icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-41
QC-Cal icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-63
Exceptions icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-97
Reagents icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-109
Supplies icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-118
System icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-121
Overview icon screens and windows

The Overview icon allows you to access the menu items Snapshot,
Sample status, and Operations manual.
Overview icon screens and windows topics include:
Snapshot screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-15
Log on window field descriptions, page Appendix E-19
Sample status screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-19
Find options (Sample status) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-21
Snapshot screen field descriptions
To see a description of the function bar buttons on this screen, see

Buttons, page Appendix E-6.
Field descriptions are listed from left to right, top to bottom of the
screen or window.
Operator
Displays the ID of the operator who is logged on.
Date
Displays the current system date.
Time
Displays the current system time.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Field descriptions Appendix E
Sample handler graphic

Displays the status of the sample handler graphic.
The sample handler graphic is not displayed on an i 2000SR
LAS.
Processing module graphic (c System)
Displays the module number in an integrated system and
the current status of the module.
Processing module graphic (i System)

Displays the module number in a multi-module/integrated
system and the current status of the module.
Order status button

Displays the number of tests currently processing for the
module you selected.
When you select the Order status button, the Order status
screen, page 5-150 displays.
Reagent status button

Displays the total number of reagent kits on the module you
selected. If you select the Reagent status button, the
Reagent status screens, page 5-61 displays. A caution
symbol displays if any kit has a status other than OK, Mixing
(i System), or Overridden.
Once you resolve the problem(s), the caution symbol no
longer displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Calibration status button

Displays the status of the calibration curves for the c System
module.
When you select the Calibration status button, the
Calibration status screen, page 6-15 displays.
OK displays if all calibration curves for the onboard reagents
have an Active or Overridden status.
A caution symbol displays if any calibration curve for the
onboard reagents is within 1 hour of expiration or has an
Expired or Failed status.
Once you resolve the problem(s), the caution symbol no
longer displays.
Supply status button (c System)
Displays the status of bulk and onboard solutions and liquid
waste for the processing module. If you select the Supply
status button, the Supply status screen - c System view,
page 5-24 displays.
For bulk and onboard solutions, OK displays if all liquids
have inventory of 20% volume or more.
For bulk and onboard solutions, a caution symbol displays if
liquid inventory is either empty or the volume is less than
20%.
For onboard solutions in the sample carousel, OK displays if
the sample carousel contains adequate volume.
For onboard solutions in the sample carousel, a caution
symbol displays if the sample carousel does not contain
adequate volume.
Once you replenish the solution(s), the caution symbol no
longer displays.
For liquid waste, OK displays until the waste is full. A
caution symbol displays when the waste is full.
Once you empty the waste, the caution symbol no longer
displays.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Supply status button (i System)

Displays the status of bulk solutions, solid waste, and RVs
(reaction vessels) for the processing module. If you select
the Supply status button, the Supply status screen - i 2000/i
2000SR view, page 5-27 displays.
For bulk solutions, OK displays if all liquids have inventory of
20% volume or more.
For bulk solutions, a caution symbol displays if liquid
inventory is either empty or the volume is less than 20%.
Once you replenish the solution, the caution symbol no
longer displays.
For solid waste, OK displays until the waste inventory is at
80%. A caution symbol displays when the waste is 80% or
more.
Once you empty the waste, the caution symbol no longer
displays.
For RVs, OK displays until inventory is at 20%. A caution
symbol displays when inventory is below 20%.
Once you add RVs, the caution symbol no longer displays.
Reruns status button
Displays the number of tests waiting to be rerun. The tests
may have been ordered manually or automatically. After the
system software schedules the tests, the button no longer
displays.
When you select the Reruns status button, the Rerun status
Exceptions status button
Displays the number of exceptions for review.
When you select the Exceptions status button, the
Exception status screen, page 5-293 displays.
Printer status button
Displays only if a printer is available.
When you select the Printer status button, the Printer
window, page 5-347 displays.
The Printer status button displays a caution symbol if an
alert condition exists.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
LIS status button

Displays only when the LIS (host) is enabled. The number of
results pending transmission to the host display below the
button.
When you select the LIS status button, the System logs
The button displays a caution symbol when a
communication problem exists with the LIS.
ARM status button
Displays only when the system is configured with the
ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module
accessory).
When you select the ARM status button, the System logs
The button displays a caution symbol when a problem exists
with the ARM.
LAS status button
Displays only when the system is configured for the LAS
sample handler.
When you select the LAS status button, the System logs
The button displays a caution symbol when a
communication problem exists with the LAS.
Log on window field descriptions
To see a description of all buttons on this screen or window, see

screen or window.
User name Password
Allows you to enter your operator ID, up Displays if you type ADMIN in the User
to 12 alphanumeric characters, or type name field and allows you to enter the
ADMIN to log on as an administrator. system administrator password.
NOTE: General operators are not

required to enter a password.
Sample status screen field descriptions


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
screen or window.
SID and Name C / P and BAY or SECTION
Displays the sample ID, which can be Displays one of the following sample
one of the following: locations:
The bar code number or ID assigned Carrier ID (C) and position (P)
to the patient sample (RSH/SSH)
The SID of the first sample in the Bay number (RSH)
batch CRSL (c System sample carousel)
The control name and level LAS (laboratory automation system)
The calibrator name and level LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P)
Displays the first 15 characters of the (i 2000)
name, which can be one of the
following: NOTE: For pending orders when you
have not manually assigned a carrier
The patient's name for patient orders
or carousel position, this field is
The batch name for batch orders blank.
The control name and level for
control orders
The calibrator name and level for
calibration orders
ASSAY and CODES STATUS/RESULT
Displays the: Displays the:
Assay - name of the test requested Status - current status (Pending,
for processing and displays: Scheduled, or Running) of the test
Black if the test has a status of displays black. See Descriptions of
Pending, Scheduled, or Running test statuses, page 5-152
Green if the test is completed but Date and time (estimated time of
not released completion) - displays black
Blue if the test is completed and Result - value, unit, and (where
released applicable) interpretation of result
and displays:
Red if the test is an exception
Green if the test is completed but
Codes - up to four single character not released
codes to indicate processing
condition(s) and displays: Blue if the test is completed and
released
Green if the test is completed but
not released Date and time (time of completion)
and displays:
Blue if the test is completed and
released Green if the test is completed but
not released
Descriptions of processing codes,
page 5-153 Blue if the test is completed and
released
Error code and message (where
applicable) - displays red

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Find options (Sample status) window field descriptions

screen or window.
Name SID
Allows you to enter the patient or Allows you to enter the sample ID you
control name you want to search for. want to search for. You can enter up to
This field supports a wildcard (*) 20 alphanumeric characters.
search. This field supports a wildcard (*)
search.
C P
Allows you to enter one of the following: Allows you to enter the position number
Carrier ID (RSH/SSH) you want to search on.
CRSL (c System sample carousel) This field is not displayed on an i
2000SR LAS.
LAS for samples aspirated from the
LAS track
LAS carousel ID (i 2000)
This field supports a wildcard (*)
search.
This field is not displayed on an i
2000SR LAS.
Bay or Section PID
Allows you to enter the bay or section Allows you to enter the patient ID you
number you want to search for. (RSH) want to search for.
search.
Orders icon screens and windows

The Order icon allows you to access the menu items Order status,
Patient order, Control order, and Calibration order.
Orders icon screens and windows topics include:
Patient order screen - Single patient view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-22
Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-24
Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-25

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay options (Patient order) window - Manual dilution view field

descriptions, page Appendix E-26
Assay options (Patient order) window - Automated dilution view field
Details for sample window field descriptions, page Appendix E-28
Details for batch window field descriptions, page Appendix E-29
Control order screen - Single analyte view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-29
Control order screen - Single analyte view field descriptions (i 2000SR
LAS), page Appendix E-31
Control order screen - Multiconstituent view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-32
Control order screen - Multiconstituent view field descriptions (i
2000SR LAS), page Appendix E-33
Assay options (Control order) window - Manual dilution view field
Assay options (Control order) window - Automated dilution view field
Order status screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-35
Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-36
Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window - Single order
view field descriptions, page Appendix E-37
Details for order (Order status) window - Batch (bar coded) view field
Details for order (Order status) window - Batch (non-bar coded) view
field descriptions, page Appendix E-40
Patient order screen - Single patient view field descriptions


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
screen or window.
Order type Sampling priority
Allows you to specify whether you want Allows you to indicate the priority of the
to create a single patient or batch sample on the Order List Report,
order. page Appendix A-51. If you select the
STAT option, an S code displays on the
NOTE: Batch ordering is not Order List report. You MUST priority
available on the sample carousel (c load the samples with the S code to
System) or if your system is process these samples first.
configured with an LAS (laboratory
automation system).
C/P C
Allows you to select the carrier or Displays when you select the carrier
carousel button to specify whether to button. Allows you to enter the ID for
run the sample on the sample carrier or the carrier or LAS carousel (i 2000) in
the sample carousel (c System). which you place the sample for
This field is not displayed on an i processing. (Optional when using bar
2000SR LAS. coded samples.)
2000SR LAS.
P SID
Allows you to enter the position for the Allows you to enter the sample ID. You
sample carrier or carousel in which you can enter up to 20 alphanumeric
place the sample for processing. characters, which are defined by Abbott
(Optional when using bar coded Laboratories as A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and
samples). the special characters , / > < ? ; : ] [ \ } {
' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and
<space>.
IMPORTANT: Contact your host

system vendor to verify that your
host computer handles special
characters (if used in sample IDs) as
characters rather than functions.
Some computers may interpret
special characters as a line return,
line feed, delimiter, or wildcard.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Panels (list) Assays (list)

Lists the panels available on the Lists the assays available on the
system. When you select a panel, all system. You must select at least one
assays in that panel are selected. assay before you can create an order
using the F3 - Add order button.
NOTE: If you deselect an assay from
the panel, the panel name is
deselected.
Sample manual dilution factor: 1:
Allows you to specify a manual dilution
factor for a sample.
The system uses the dilution factor to
automatically calculate the sample
concentration and report the result.
NOTE: The entry range that is

allowed for a manual dilution factor is
2 - 999.
Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view field descriptions

screen or window.
Order type Starting SID
Allows you to specify whether you want Allows you to enter the starting sample
to create a single patient or batch ID of the batch to be processed. You
order. can enter up to 20 alphanumeric
characters, which are defined by Abbott
NOTE: Batch ordering is not Laboratories as A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and
available on the sample carousel (c the special characters , / > < ? ; : ] [ \ } {
System) or if your system is ' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and
configured with an LAS (laboratory <space>.
automation system).
system vendor to verify your host
computer handles special characters
(if used in sample IDs) as characters
rather than functions. Some
computers may interpret special
characters as a line return, line feed,
delimiter, or wildcard.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Ending SID Panels (list)

Allows you to enter the ending sample Lists the panels available on the
ID of the batch to be processed. You system. When you select a panel, all
can enter up to 20 alphanumeric assays in that panel are selected.
characters, which are defined by Abbott
Laboratories as A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and NOTE: If you deselect an assay from
the special characters , / > < ? ; : ] [ \ } { the panel, the panel name is
' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and deselected.
<space>.

system vendor to verify your host
computer handles special characters
(if used in sample IDs) as characters
rather than functions. Some
computers may interpret special
characters as a line return, line feed,
delimiter, or wildcard.
Assays (list) Sample manual dilution factor: 1:
Lists the assays available on the Allows you to specify a manual dilution
system. You must select at least one factor for a sample.
assay before you can create an order The system uses the dilution factor to
using the F3 - Add order button. automatically calculate the sample

2 - 999.
Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view field descriptions

screen or window.
Order type Starting C
Allows you to specify whether you want Allows you to enter the starting carrier
to create a single patient or batch ID.
order.
NOTE: Batch ordering is not

available on the sample carousel (c
System) or if your system is
configured with an LAS (laboratory
automation system).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
P Starting SID
Allows you to enter the starting carrier Allows you to enter the starting sample
position for the sample. ID of the batch to be processed. You
can enter up to nine numeric
characters.
Number of samples Sample manual dilution factor: 1:
Allows you to enter the number of Allows you to specify a manual dilution
samples to be tested as part of this factor for a sample.
batch. The system uses the dilution factor to

2 - 999.
Panels (list) Assays (list)
Lists the panels available on the Lists the assays available on the
system. When you select a panel, all system. You must select at least one
assays in that panel are selected. assay before you can create an order
using the F3 - Add order button.
deselected.
Assay options (Patient order) window - Manual dilution view field descriptions

screen or window.
C/P Assay
Displays one of the following sample Displays the name of the assay(s) you
locations: ordered.
Carrier ID (C) and position (P)
(RSH/SSH)
CRSL (c System sample carousel)
LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P)
(i 2000)
NOTE: For pending orders when you

blank.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
SID Name
Displays the sample ID. Displays the patient's name if entered
on the Details for sample window,
page 5-133
Module selection (i System) Module (i System)
Allows you to select a processing Displays a check box for each
module other than the default module processing module if you select manual
when you have a multi-module (i as the Module selection option.
System). If you select Manual, a check
box displays for each processing
module.
Dilution protocols / number of
replicates
Allows you to enter the number of
replicates for the specified manual
dilution factor when you desire more
than one replicate.
Assay options (Patient order) window - Automated dilution view field descriptions

screen or window.
C/P Assay
locations: ordered.
(RSH/SSH)
(i 2000)

blank.
SID Name
Displays the sample ID. Displays the patient's name if entered
on the Details for sample window,
page 5-133.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

when you have a multi-module (i as the Module selection option.
System). If you select Manual, a check
module.
replicates
Allows you to select an automated
dilution and number of replicates.
Details for sample window field descriptions

screen or window.
SID PID
Displays the sample identification Allows you to enter a patient ID
number that you entered on the Patient number. You can enter up to 20
order screens and views, page 5-113. alphanumeric characters.
NOTE: When you enter a PID, enter

only details that you know to be
accurate. If you do not know the
information, leave this field empty.
Never edit information entered
previously in a field. If you make
edits, the software recognizes the
PID as a different and unique patient.
Last name First name
Allows you to enter a patient's last Allows you to enter a patient's first
name. You can enter up to 20 name. You can enter up to 20
alphanumeric characters. alphanumeric characters.
M. Date of birth
Allows you to enter the patient's middle Allows you to enter the month, year,
name. You can enter up to 12 and the day of the patient's birth. This
alphanumeric characters. information provides an age-specific
reference range if you have configured
the assay to provide reference ranges.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Gender Draw date

Allows you to select a gender. Allows you to enter the date the sample
This information provides a was drawn.
gender-specific reference range if you
have configured the assay to provide
reference ranges.
Time Location
Allows you to enter the time the sample Allows you to enter the location
was drawn. associated with the patient. You can
enter up to 20 alphanumeric
characters.
Doctor Comment
Allows you to enter the name of the Allows you to enter a comment for the
patient's doctor. You can enter up to 20 sample. You can enter up to 50
alphanumeric characters. characters.
Details for batch window field descriptions

screen or window.
Batch name Comment
Displays the name of the batch. The Allows you to enter a comment for the
default name is BATCHXX:XX:XX, samples in the batch. You can enter up
where XX:XX:XX represents a to 50 characters. The comment
timestamp. The timestamp is based on displays for all samples in the batch
when the patient order batch screen order.
was entered, or the time after the
previous order was added. The name
can be edited to contain up to 20
alphanumeric characters. The name
displays for all samples in the batch
order.
Control order screen - Single analyte view field descriptions


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
screen or window.
to create a single analyte or sample on the Order List Report,
multiconstituent control order. page Appendix A-51. If you select the
STAT option, an S code prints on the
Order List report. You MUST priority
load the samples with the S code to
process these samples first.
C/P Starting C
carousel button to specify whether to button. Allows you to enter the starting
run the sample on the sample carrier or ID for the carrier or LAS carousel (i
the sample carousel (c System). 2000) in which you place the first
control for processing.
NOTE: All control levels selected

must fit on one carrier/carousel.
Starting P Assays (list)
Displays the position (P) in which you Lists the assays available on the
place the first control for processing. system. You must first select an assay
(Optional when using bar coded to display the control level(s) and lot
samples). number(s) configured for that assay.
NOTE: All control levels selected

must fit on one carrier/carousel.
Sample manual dilution factor: 1: Lot (list)
Allows you to select a manual dilution Displays a list of control lots configured
for the sample. You must then enter the for the assay. The default lot displays
manual dilution factor. when you select the assay.

2 - 999.
Levels
Required field that allows you to select
user-configured control levels for the
selected assay. You can select one or
more levels to process. Based on the
assay selected, up to six levels of
controls are supported.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Control order screen - Single analyte view field descriptions (i 2000SR LAS)

screen or window.
STAT option, an S code prints on the
SID Sample manual dilution factor: 1:
Allows you to enter the sample ID. You Allows you to select a manual dilution
can enter up to 20 alphanumeric for the sample. You must then enter the
characters, which are defined by Abbott manual dilution factor.
Laboratories as A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and The system uses the dilution factor to
the special characters , / > < ? ; : ] [ \ } { automatically calculate the sample
' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and concentration and report the result.
<space>.
IMPORTANT: Contact your host allowed for a manual dilution factor is
system vendor to verify that your 2 - 999.
Assays (list) Lot (list)
Lists the assays available on the Displays a list of control lots configured
system. You must first select an assay for the assay. The default lot displays
to display the control level(s) and lot when you select the assay.
number(s) configured for that assay.
Levels
Required field that allows you to select
user-configured control levels for the
selected assay. You can select one or
more levels to process. Based on the
assay selected, up to six levels of
controls are supported.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Control order screen - Multiconstituent view field descriptions

screen or window.
C/P Starting C
carousel button to specify whether to button. Allows you to enter the starting
run the sample on the sample carrier or ID for the carrier or LAS carousel (i
the sample carousel (c System). 2000) in which you place the first
control for processing.
Starting P Sample manual dilution factor: 1:
Displays the position (P) in which you Allows you to select a manual dilution
place the first control for processing. for the sample. You must then enter the
manual dilution factor.

2 - 999.
Control (list) Lot (list)
Displays a list of the multiconstituent Displays a list of lot numbers
control names configured on the configured for the control. The default
system. lot displays when you select the control.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Levels Panels (list)

Allows you to select the Lists the QC panels available on the
user-configured control levels for the system. When you select a panel, all
control. assays in that panel are selected.
Based on the control you select, up to
three levels are supported.
Assays (list) deselected.
Lists the assays configured for the
control level on the system. You must
select at least one assay before you
can create an order using the F2 - Add
order button.
Control order screen - Multiconstituent view field descriptions (i 2000SR LAS)

screen or window.
SID Sample manual dilution factor: 1:
Allows you to enter the sample ID. You Allows you to select a manual dilution
can enter up to 20 alphanumeric for the sample. You must then enter the
characters, which are defined by Abbott manual dilution factor.
Laboratories as A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and The system uses the dilution factor to
the special characters , / > < ? ; : ] [ \ } { automatically calculate the sample
' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and concentration and report the result.
<space>.
IMPORTANT: Contact your host allowed for a manual dilution factor is
system vendor to verify that your 2 - 999.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Control (list) Lot (list)

Displays a list of the multiconstituent Displays a list of lot numbers
control names configured on the configured for the control. The default
system. lot displays when you select the control.
Levels Panels (list)
Allows you to select the Lists the QC panels available on the
user-configured control levels for the system. When you select a panel, all
control. assays in that panel are selected.
Based on the control you select, up to
three levels are supported.
Assays (list) deselected.
Lists the assays configured for the
control level on the system. You must
select at least one assay before you
can create an order using the F2 - Add
order button.
Assay options (Control order) window - Manual dilution view field descriptions

screen or window.
C/P Assay
locations: ordered.
(RSH/SSH)
(i 2000)

or carousel position, this field is blank
Control name Control level
Displays the name of the control you Displays the control level you selected
selected on the Control order screen. on the Control order screen.
Control lot Module selection (i System)
Displays the control lot number you Allows you to select a processing
selected on the Control order screen. module other than the default module
when you have a multi-module i
System. If you select Manual, a check
module.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Module (i System) Dilution protocols / number of

Displays a check box for each replicates
processing module if you select manual Allows you to enter the number of
as the Module selection option. replicates for the dilution when more
than one replicate is desired.
Assay options (Control order) window - Automated dilution view field descriptions

screen or window.
C/P Assay
locations: ordered.
(RSH/SSH)
(i 2000)

Displays the name of the control you Displays the control level you selected
selected on the Control order screen. on the Control order screen.
Control lot Module selection (i System)
Displays the control lot number you Allows you to select a processing
selected on the Control order screen. module other than the default module
module.
processing module if you select manual Allows you to select an automated
as the Module selection option. dilution and number of replicates.
Order status screen field descriptions


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
screen or window.
C/P SID
Displays one of the following sample Displays the sample ID, which can be
locations: one of the following:
Carrier ID (C) and position (P) The bar code number or ID assigned
(RSH/SSH) to the patient sample
CRSL (c System sample carousel) The SID of the first sample in the
LAS (laboratory automation system) batch
LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) The control name and level
(i 2000) The calibrator name and level

NAME ASSAY
Displays the first 15 characters of the Displays the name of the test you
name, which can be one of the ordered.
following:
The batch name for batch orders
control orders
calibration orders
STATUS TIME
Displays the current status of the assay Displays the time the order will
you ordered. See Descriptions of test complete (in 24 hour format). Time
statuses, page 5-152. information displays for all samples
CODE with a status of Running.
Displays up to four single character

codes to indicate a processing
condition(s). See Descriptions of
Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window field descriptions


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
screen or window.
Module Name
Allows you to select the module in a Allows you to enter the patient or
multi-module/integrated system to control name you want to search for.
search on. This field supports a wildcard (*)
search.
SID C
Allows you to enter the sample ID you Allows you to enter one of the following:
want to search for. You can enter up to Carrier ID (RSH/SSH)
20 alphanumeric characters.
search. LAS for samples aspirated from the
LAS track
search.
2000SR LAS.
P Bay or Section
Allows you to enter the position number Allows you to enter the bay or section
you want to search on. number you want to search for. (RSH)
2000SR LAS.
PID Assay
Allows you to enter the patient ID you Allows you to search for a specific
want to search for. assay ordered.
This field supports a wildcard (*) This field supports a wildcard (*)
search. search.
Time from / to
Allows you to enter a time range you
want to search for.
Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window - Single order view field
descriptions


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
screen or window.
C/P Bay or Section
Displays one of the following sample Displays the number of the bay or
locations: section in which the sample is located.
Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH)
(RSH/SSH)
LAS (laboratory automation system)
(i 2000)

SID Date of birth
Displays the sample ID. Displays the date of birth for the
patient.
Name Gender
Displays the name, which can be one Displays the gender of the patient.
of the following:
The batch name for batch orders
control orders
calibration orders
PID Draw date/time
Displays the assigned patient ID, if Displays the date and time the sample
entered on the Details for sample was drawn.
window, page 5-133 or sent by the (For patient samples only)
host.
(For patient samples only)
Assay Dilution
Displays the name of the assay you Displays the dilution requested for the
ordered. assay.
Assay number Status
Displays the number defined for the Displays the status of the order. See
assay. Descriptions of test statuses,
page 5-152.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Codes Time to completion

Displays the codes that indicate Displays the time and date the test will
processing conditions. See complete.
Descriptions of processing codes,
page 5-153.
Operator ID Location
Displays the ID of the operator logged Displays the location associated with
on when the test was ordered. the patient.
Doctor Reference assay
Displays the name of the patient's Displays the photometric reference
doctor. assay. (For sample interference index
Comment assays only - c System)
Allows you to enter a comment for the

order. You can enter up to 50
characters.
Details for order (Order status) window - Batch (bar coded) view field descriptions

screen or window.
Starting C / P Starting SID
Displays the starting carrier (C) and Displays the sample ID of the first
position (P) for the first sample in the sample in the batch.
batch.
Ending SID Name
Displays the sample ID of the last Displays the name of the batch.
sample in the batch.
Samples scanned Assay info (table)
Displays the number of samples in the Displays the assay(s) and dilution(s)
batch order scanned by the sample ordered for the batch.
handler. Assay
Dilution

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Status Operator ID
Displays the status of the batch order. Displays the ID of the operator logged
See Descriptions of test statuses, on when the test was ordered.
page 5-152.
Comment
batch. You can enter up to 50
characters.
NOTE: If the status is Pending, the

comment is applied to all orders
within the batch. If the status is In
Process, a comment cannot be
entered for batch orders and must be
entered for each individual sample.
If you entered a comment on the
Details for batch window, page 5-133,
the comment displays here.
Details for order (Order status) window - Batch (non-bar coded) view field
descriptions

screen or window.
Starting C / P Starting SID
Displays the starting carrier (C) and Displays the sample ID of the first
position (P) for the first sample in the sample in the batch.
batch.
Number of samples Name
Displays the number of samples to be Displays the name of the batch.
processed in the batch.
Samples scanned Assay info (table)
Displays the number of samples in the Displays the assay(s) and dilution(s)
batch order scanned by the sample ordered for the batch.
handler. Assay
Dilution

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Status Operator ID
Displays the status of the batch order. Displays the ID that of the operator
See Descriptions of test statuses, logged on when the test was ordered.
page 5-152.
Comment
batch. You can enter up to 50
characters.
NOTE: If the status is Pending, the

comment is applied to all orders
within the batch. If the status is In
Process, a comment cannot be
entered for batch orders and must be
entered for each individual sample.
If you entered a comment on the
Details for batch window,
page 5-133, the comment displays
here.
Results icon screens and windows

The Results icon allows you to access the menu items Results review
and Stored results.
Results icon screens and windows topics include:
Results review screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-42
Find options (Results review) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-43
Details for result (Results review) window - Calculated view field
Details for result (Results review) window - Data view (c System) field
Details for result (Results review) window - Photometric - graph view
(c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-47
Details for result (Results review) window - Sample interference index
view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-48
Details for result (Results review) window (i System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-50
Rerun options window field descriptions, page Appendix E-51
Stored results screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-52

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Find options (Stored results) window field descriptions,

page Appendix E-53
Details for result (Stored results) window - Calculated view field
Details for result (Stored results) window - Data view (c System) field
Details for result (Stored results) window - Photometric - graph view (c
System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-58
Details for result (Stored results) window - Sample interference index
Details for result (Stored results) window (i System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-61
Archive results window field descriptions, page Appendix E-62
Results review screen field descriptions

screen or window.
C/P SID
Displays one of the following sample Displays the sample ID.
locations:
(RSH/SSH)
(i 2000)
NAME ASSAY
Displays the name of the patient. Displays the name of the assay.
RESULT FLAG
Displays the value, unit, and (where Displays the flags associated with the
applicable) interpretation of the result. result. See Descriptions of patient
CODE result flags, page 5-225.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Find options (Results review) window field descriptions

screen or window.
Module Name
multi-module system to search on. control name you want to search for.
search.
C P

2000SR LAS.
LAS track
search.
2000SR LAS.
Bay or Section SID
Allows you to enter the bay or section Allows you to enter the sample ID you
number you want to search for. (RSH) want to search for. You can enter up to
This field supports a wildcard (*) search
PID Assay
search. search.
Reagent lot Results with option
Allows you to search by the reagent lot Allows you to search for results with
number. flags or interpretations.
search.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Date from / to Time from / to

Allows you to enter a date range you Allows you to enter a time range you
want to search for. want to search for.
NOTE: Do not enter multiple dates NOTE: Do not enter multiple dates
when searching for a specific time when searching for a specific time
interval. interval.
Operator ID
Allows you to search for the operator ID
logged on to the system at the time the
order was placed.
search.
Details for result (Results review) window - Calculated view field descriptions

screen or window.
C/P Module / Serial No.
Displays one of the following sample Displays the module number and
locations: system serial number.
(RSH/SSH)
(i 2000)
Name Gender
Displays the name of the patient or Displays the gender of the patient.
batch.
SID Date of birth
patient.
PID Bay or Section
Displays the assigned patient ID, if Displays the bay or section in which
entered on the Details for sample you loaded the sample. (RSH)
window, page 5-133 or sent by the
host.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay Constituent assays (table)

Displays the assay that was processed. Displays the names, results, and flags
for the constituent assays used to
determine the calculated result.
Module (M)
Assay
Result
Flags
Assay number Result
Displays the number defined for the Displays the value, unit, and (where
assay. applicable) interpretation of the result.
Normal range Flags
Displays the normal / therapeutic range Displays the flags associated with the
of the assay. result. See Descriptions of patient
Codes Status
Displays up to four single character Displays the status of the result as
codes to indicate a processing follows:
condition(s). See Descriptions of Complete - Results have completed
processing codes, page 5-153. processing
Time completed Operator ID
Displays the date and time the result Displays the ID of the operator logged
was completed. on when the order was placed.
Doctor Location
Displays the name of the patient's Displays the location associated with
doctor. the patient.
Draw date / time Comment
Displays the date and time the sample Allows you to enter a comment for the
was drawn. result. You can enter up to 50
characters.
Details for result (Results review) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
screen or window.
Displays one of the following sample Displays the module number and serial
locations: number of the module on which the
Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH) assay was run.
Name Gender
batch.
SID Date of birth
patient.
PID Bay
Displays the assigned patient ID, if Displays the bay in which you loaded
entered on the Details for sample the sample. (RSH)
host.
Assay Assay number
Displays the assay that was processed. Displays the number defined for the
assay.
Result Absorbance
Displays the value, unit, and (where Displays the response value used in
applicable) interpretation of the result. calculating the result.
mV (ICT only)
absorbance (photometric assays
only)
NOTE: This field does not display for

sample interference index assays.
Normal range Cuvette
Displays the normal / therapeutic range Displays the number of the cuvette
of the assay. used to process results.
Dilution Flags
Displays the dilution used for this test. Displays the flags associated with the
result. See Descriptions of patient
Codes Status
processing codes, page 5-153. processing

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

was completed. on when the order was placed.
Reagent lot Doctor
Displays the reagent lot used to Displays the name of the patient's
process the sample and generate the doctor.
result.
Reagent S / N Location
Displays the serial number of the Displays the location associated with
reagent used to obtain the result. the patient.
Time of cal Draw date / time
Displays the date and time the reagent Displays the date and time the sample
lot calibration was completed. was drawn.
Comment
result. You can enter up to 50
characters.
Details for result (Results review) window - Photometric - graph view (c System)
field descriptions

screen or window.
Name Gender
batch.
SID Date of birth
patient.
PID Bay
host.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
POINT (table) Wavelength

Displays the read points and Displays the wavelength and reaction
absorbance readings. type.
Point - Displays the read points 1
through 33.
Primary - Displays the absorbance
readings for each read point at the
primary wavelength.
Secondary - Displays the
absorbance readings for each read
point at the secondary wavelength.
PRIM - SEC - Displays the difference
of the primary wavelength minus the
secondary wavelength absorbance.
NOTE: If no absorbance data is

available, no information displays in
this table.
Graph Y axis scale
Indicates the type of absorbance data Allows you to specify the absorbance
that displays on the graph. axis range to view on the graph. When
you edit these fields, the Rescale
button becomes available.
Assay Flags
Displays the name of the assay that Displays the flags associated with the
was processed. result. See Descriptions of patient
Result Cuvette
Displays the value, unit, and (where Displays the number of the cuvette
applicable) interpretation of the result. used to process results.
Details for result (Results review) window - Sample interference index view (c
System) field descriptions

screen or window.
C/P Module / Serial No.:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Name Gender
batch.
SID Date of birth
patient.
PID Bay
host.
Assay Assay number
assay.
Result Normal range
Displays the value, unit, and (where Displays the normal range configured
applicable) interpretation of the result. for the assay.
Cuvette Dilution
Displays the number of the cuvette Displays the dilution used for this test.
used to process results.
Flags Codes
Displays the flags associated with the Displays up to four single character
result. See Descriptions of patient codes to indicate a processing
result flags, page 5-225. condition(s). See Descriptions of
Status Time completed
Displays the status of the result as Displays the date and time the result
follows: was completed.
Complete - Results have completed
processing
Operator ID Reagent lot
Displays the ID of the operator logged Displays the reagent lot used to
on when the order was placed. process the sample and generate the
result.
Doctor Reagent S / N
Displays the name of the patient's Displays the serial number of the
doctor. reagent used to obtain the result.
Location Reference assay
Displays the location associated with Displays the photometric reference
the patient. assay.
characters.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Details for result (Results review) window (i System) field descriptions

screen or window.
Carrier ID (C) and position (P) assay was run.
(RSH/SSH)
(i 2000)
Name Gender
batch.
SID Date of birth
patient.
PID Bay or Section
host.
Assay Assay number
assay.
Result RLU
Displays the value, unit, and (where Displays the response value in RLUs
applicable) interpretation of the result. (relative light units) used to calculate
the result.
Normal range Dilution
Displays the normal range configured Displays the dilution used for this test.
for the assay.
Flags Codes

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

processing
on when the order was placed. process the sample and generate the
result.
Location Time of cal
Displays the location associated with Displays the date and time the reagent
the patient. lot calibration was completed.
characters.
Rerun options window field descriptions

screen or window.
C/P C
Allows you to select the carrier or Allows you to enter the RSH/SSH
carousel button to specify whether to carrier ID or i 2000 LAS carousel ID (C)
rerun the sample on the sample carrier in which the sample will be rerun. The
or the sample carousel (c System). default carrier or carousel ID and
This field is not displayed on an i position are the same location as the
2000SR LAS. original order.
NOTE: If the original order did not

have a carrier or carousel ID (C) and
position (P) manually assigned,
these fields are blank.
P SID
Allows you to enter the position (P) in Displays the identifier for the sample or
which you place the sample for rerun. control being rerun.
Assay Name
Displays the name of the assay to be Displays the name of the patient or
used for rerun. control.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Result Module selection (i System)

Displays the value, unit, and (where Allows you to select a processing
applicable) interpretation of the result. module other than the default module
module. Selecting multiple modules
results in processing being performed
on each module.
processing module if you select manual Displays the dilution at which the
as the Module selection option. original order was run. Allows you to
select an automated dilution and
number of replicates.
If the original order was a manual
dilution, only Number of replicates is
available. The rerun must use the
original manual dilution. To use a
different dilution protocol, you must
generate a new order.
If the original order was undiluted or an
automated dilution, you can select a
dilution protocol and replicates.
Stored results screen field descriptions

screen or window.
C/P SID
Displays one of the following sample Displays the sample ID.
locations:
(RSH/SSH)
(i 2000)
NAME ASSAY
Displays the name of the patient. Displays the name of the assay.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
RESULT FLAG
Displays the value, unit, and (where Displays the flags associated with the
applicable) interpretation of the stored stored result. See Descriptions of
result. patient result flags, page 5-225.
CODE
Find options (Stored results) window field descriptions

screen or window.
Module Name
multi-module system to search on. control name you want to search for.
search.
C P

2000SR LAS.
LAS track
search.
2000SR LAS.
Bay or Section SID
search.
PID Assay
search. search.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

number. flags or interpretations.
search.
interval. interval.
Operator ID Status
Allows you to search for the operator ID Allows you to search by result status.
logged on to the system at the time the See Descriptions of test statuses,
order was placed. page 5-152.
search.
Details for result (Stored results) window - Calculated view field descriptions

screen or window.
Displays one of the following sample Displays the module number and
(RSH/SSH)
(i 2000)
Name Gender
Displays the name of the patient. Displays the gender of the patient.
SID Date of birth
patient.
PID Bay or Section
host.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay Constituent assays (table)

Displays the name of the assay that Displays the following information for
was processed. the constituent assays used to
Module (M)
Assay
Result
Flags
Assay number Result
Displays the number defined for the Displays the value, unit, and (where
assay. applicable) interpretation of the result.
Normal range Flags
Displays the normal / therapeutic range Displays the flags associated with the
for the assay. result. See Descriptions of patient
Codes Status
processing codes, page 5-153. and are not pending transmission to
the host (when connected to a host
computer).
Pending transmission - Results have
completed and are pending
transmission to the host (when
connected to a host computer).
Pending collation - Results have
been selected for release to the host
and, depending on the collation
option setting:
all results associated with the SID
have not completed or have not
been selected for release.
OR
on a particular processing module
was completed. on when the test completed.
Doctor Location
Displays the name of the patient's Displays the location associated with
doctor. the patient.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Displays the date and time the sample Displays the comment entered for the
was drawn. result.
Details for result (Stored results) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions

screen or window.
Displays one of the following sample Displays the module number and the
locations: serial number on which the assay was
Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH) run.
Name Gender
SID Date of birth
patient.
PID Bay
host.
Assay Assay number
Displays the name of the assay that Displays the number defined for the
was processed. assay.
Result Absorbance
Displays the value, unit, and (where Displays the response value used in
applicable) interpretation of the result. calculating the result.
mV (ICT only)
only)

Normal range Cuvette
Displays the normal / therapeutic range Displays the number of the cuvette
for the assay. used to process results.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Dilution Flags
Codes Status
computer).
option setting:
OR
was completed. on when the test completed.
Reagent lot Doctor
Displays the master lot number of the Displays the name of the patient's
reagent used to process the sample doctor.
and generate the result.
reagent used to obtain the result. the patient.
lot calibration was calibrated. was drawn.
Comment
Displays the comment entered for the
result.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Details for result (Stored results) window - Photometric - graph view (c System)
field descriptions

screen or window.
Name Gender
SID Date of birth
patient.
PID Bay
host.
Displays the following information. Displays the wavelength and reaction
Point - Displays the read points 1 type.
through 33.
primary wavelength.

this table.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Graph Y axis scale

Assay Flags
processed. result. See Descriptions of patient
Result Cuvette
Displays the value, unit, and (where Displays the number of the cuvette
applicable) interpretation of the result. used to process results.
Details for result (Stored results) window - Sample interference index view (c

screen or window.
Name Gender
SID Date of birth
patient.
PID Bay
host.
Assay Assay number
processed. assay.
Result Normal range
Displays the value, unit, and (where Displays the normal / therapeutic range
applicable) interpretation of the result. for the assay.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Cuvette Dilution
Displays the number of the cuvette Displays the dilution used for this test.
used to process results.
Flags Codes
and are not pending transmission to
computer).
option setting:
OR
Displays the ID of the operator logged Displays the master lot number of the
on when the test completed. reagent used to process the sample
Location Reference assay
Displays the location associated with Displays the photometric reference
the patient. assay.
was drawn. result.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Details for result (Stored results) window (i System) field descriptions

screen or window.
Carrier ID (C) and position (P) run.
(RSH/SSH)
(i 2000)
Name Gender
SID Date of birth
patient.
PID Bay or Section
Displays the assigned patient ID if Displays the bay or section in which
host.
Assay Assay number
processed. assay.
Result RLU
Displays the value, unit, and (where Displays the response value in RLUs
applicable) interpretation of the result. (relative light units) used to calculate
the result.
Normal range Dilution
Displays the normal / therapeutic range Displays the dilution used for this test.
for the assay.
Flags Codes

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

computer).
option setting:
OR
Displays the ID of the operator logged Displays the master lot number of the
on when the test completed. reagent used to process the sample
the patient. lot calibration was completed.
was drawn. result.
Archive results window field descriptions


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
screen or window.
INSTRUCTIONS (box) Archive name
Displays the step-by-step instructions Displays the name the system uses to
you must perform. archive the file. You cannot change the
name. The naming convention displays
in the format xxxxx\yyyyyyyy.Pzz,
where:
xxxxx represents the ARCHITECT
System number
yyyyyyyy represents that day's date
Pzz represents the archive number
The patient archive identifier (.Pzz)
starts at 01 and increments for each
patient archive created on each new
day.
Number of results selected Space required
Displays the number of results you Displays the approximate amount of
selected for the archive from the Stored space needed on the CD to perform the
results screen, page 5-262. archive.
Space available Delete records after archive
Displays the amount of space available Allows you to delete the result records
on the CD currently in the CD drive. If after you archive them.
the correct CD is not recognized, an Default: Delete records after archive.
information message displays in this
field. See Descriptions of archive
QC-Cal icon screens and windows

The QC-Cal icon allows you to access the menu items QC result
review, QC summary, Levey-Jennings graph, Calibration status,
Calibration history, Stored QC results, and QC reports.
QC-Cal icon screens and windows topics include:
QC result review screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-65
Find options (QC result review) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-66
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Data view (c
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Photometric - graph

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i System) field

Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Calculated view
Rerun options (QC result review) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-72
Levey-Jennings graph screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-73
QC selection window field descriptions, page Appendix E-74
Point detail window field descriptions, page Appendix E-75
Calibration order screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-76
Assay options (Calibration order) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-76
Calibration status screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-77
Find options (Calibration status and Calibration history) window
Calibration curve window - Linear assay view (c System) field
Calibration curve window - Use cal factor / blank assay view (c
Calibration curve window - Adjust assay view (i System) field
Calibration curve window - Index assay view (i System) field
Calibration curve window - Full assay view (i System) field
Calibration history screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-85
Archive calibration curves window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-85
Stored QC results screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-86
Find options (Stored QC results) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-87
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Data view (c

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Photometric - graph

Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i System) field
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Calculated field
Archive QC results window field descriptions, page Appendix E-93
QC reports screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-94
QC summary review screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-95
Find options (QC summary review) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-95
Details for QC summary window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-96
QC result review screen field descriptions

screen or window.
M C/P
Displays the number of the module that Displays one of the following sample
processed the control. locations:
NOTE: Calculated assay results are
(RSH/SSH)
assigned to module 5.
(i 2000)
SID CONTROL NAME
Displays the sample ID. Displays the name of the control that
processed.
LEVEL ASSAY
Displays the level of the control that Displays the name of the assay.
was processed.
RESULT FLAG
Displays the value and units of the Displays the flags associated with the
result. result. See Descriptions of quality

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Find options (QC result review) window field descriptions

screen or window.
Module Control name
Allows you to select the module in a Allows you to enter the control name
multi-module system to search on. you want to search for.
search.
Control lot SID
Allows you to enter the lot number of Allows you to enter the sample ID you
the control you want to search for. want to search for. You can enter up to
This field supports a wildcard (*) 20 alphanumeric characters.
search. This field supports a wildcard (*)
search.
C P
Allows you to enter one of the following: Allows you to enter the position (P)
Carrier ID (RSH/SSH) number you want to search on.
2000SR LAS.
LAS track
search.
2000SR LAS.
Bay or Section Assay
Allows you to enter the bay or section Allows you to search for a specific
number you want to search for. (RSH) assay ordered.
search.
number. flags.
search.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

interval. interval.
Operator ID
Allows you to search for the operator ID
logged on to the system at the time the
order was placed.
search.
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Data view (c System) field
descriptions

screen or window.
SID C/P
Displays the sample ID. Displays one of the following sample
locations:
Control name Control lot
Displays the name of the control. Displays the lot number for the control.
Cuvette Control level
Displays the number of the cuvette Displays the level that was run for the
used to process results. control.
Bay Assay
Displays the bay in which you loaded Displays the name of the assay that
the sample. (RSH) processed.
Assay number Result
Displays the number defined for the Displays the value and unit of the
assay. result.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Absorbance Control range

Displays the response value used in Displays the control range configured
calculating the result. when you created the control during
mV (ICT only) QC configuration.

only)

Dilution Flags
Displays the dilution value used for this Displays the flags associated with the
control. result. See Descriptions of patient
Codes Status
condition(s). See Descriptions of Complete - Results have completed.
Module / Serial No. Time completed
Displays the module number and the Displays the date and time the control
serial number on which the assay was was processed.
run.
Operator ID Time of cal
Displays the ID of the operator logged Displays the date and time the reagent
on when the control completed. lot calibration was completed.
Reagent lot Reagent S / N
Displays the reagent lot used to Displays the serial number of the
process the control and generate the reagent used to obtain the result.
result.
Comment
characters.
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Photometric - graph view (c


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
screen or window.
SID C/P
locations:
Control level Bay
Displays the level that was run for the Displays the bay in which you loaded
control. the sample. (RSH)
Displays the following information. Displays the wavelength and reaction
Point - Displays the read points 1 type.
through 33.
primary wavelength.

this table.
Graph Y axis scale
Assay Flags
Result Cuvette
Displays the value and unit of the Displays the number of the cuvette
result. used to process results.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i System) field descriptions

screen or window.
SID C/P
locations:
(RSH/SSH)
(i 2000)
Control level Bay or Section
Displays the level that was run for the Displays the bay or section in which
control. you loaded the sample. (RSH)
Assay Assay number
processed. assay.
Result RLU
Displays the value and unit of the Displays the response value in RLUs
result. (relative light units) used to calculate
the result.
Control range Dilution
Displays the control range configured Displays the dilution used for this test.
when you created the control during
QC configuration.
Flags Codes
Status Module / Serial No.
Displays the status of the result asDisplays the module number and the
follows: serial number on which the assay was
Complete - Results have completed run.
processing
Displays the date and time the control Displays the ID of the operator logged
was processed. on when the control completed.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Time of cal Reagent lot

Displays the date and time the reagent Displays the reagent lot used to
lot calibration was completed. process the control and generate the
result.
Reagent S / N Comment
Displays the serial number of the Allows you to enter a comment for the
reagent used to obtain the result. result. You can enter up to 50
characters.
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Calculated view field descriptions

screen or window.
SID C/P
locations:
(RSH/SSH)
(i 2000)
Module / Serial No. Control level
Displays the module number and the Displays the level that was run for the
serial number on which the assay was control.
run.
Bay Assay
Constituent assays (table) Assay number
Displays the following information for Displays the number defined for the
the constituent assays used to assay.
Module (M)
Assay
Result
Flags

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Result Control range

Displays the value and unit of the Displays the control range configured
result. when you created the control during
QC configuration.
Flags Codes
Displays the status of the result as Displays the date and time the control
follows: was processed.
processing
Operator ID Comment
Displays the ID of the operator logged Allows you to enter a comment for the
on when the control completed. result. You can enter up to 50
characters.
Rerun options (QC result review) window field descriptions

screen or window.
C/P C
Allows you to select the carrier or Allows you to enter the RSH/SSH
carousel button to specify whether to carrier ID or i 2000 LAS carousel ID (C)
rerun the sample on the sample carrier in which the sample will be rerun. The
or the sample carousel (c System). default carrier or carousel ID and
position are the same location as the
original order.
NOTE: If the original order did not

have a carrier or carousel ID (C) and
position (P) manually assigned,
these fields are blank.
P Control name
Allows you to enter the position (P) in Displays the name of the control.
which the sample will be placed for
rerun.
Assay Control level
Displays the name of the assay you Displays the name of the level for the
requested for the control. control.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Result Control lot

Displays the value and unit of the Displays the lot number for the control.
result.
when you have a multi-module i as the Module selection option.
module. Selecting multiple modules
results in processing being performed
on each module.
replicates
Displays the dilution at which the
original order was run. Allows you to
select an automated dilution and
number of replicates.
If the original order was a manual
dilution, only Number of replicates is
available. The rerun must use the
original manual dilution. To use a
different dilution protocol, you must
generate a new order.
Levey-Jennings graph screen field descriptions

screen or window.
Assay Control lot
Displays the name of the assay. Displays the lot number for the control.
Comparison type Control
Displays the source of the mean used Displays the name of the control
to compare to the expected mean. selected.
Exp. date Module
Displays the expiration date of the Displays the number of the module
control lot selected. used to process the control(s).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Status Statistics (fields)

Displays the current status of the assay Displays the following statistical data
on the selected module. elements related to a specific level of
control:
Level
Mean
SD
N
Comparison mean
Visible data range
See Levey-Jennings graph statistical
data elements, page 5-313.
Date range Date
Displays the date range used for the Displays the date for the selected point
calculation. on the graph.
Value
Displays the value of the selected point
on the graph.
QC selection window field descriptions

screen or window.
Module Date range for calculations / to
Allows you to select a processing Allows you to enter the date range of
module other than the default module. the data to display.

Comparison type Assay (list)
Allows you to select the source of the Allows you to select one assay to
mean used to compare to the expected include in the Levey-Jennings graph.
control mean.
Options are:
None
Manufacturers
Module cumulative
System cumulative

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Control name (list) Control lot (list)

Allows you to select one control name Allows you to select one control lot to
to include in the Levey-Jennings graph. include in the Levey-Jennings graph.
Control level The system uses the configured default
lot number if you do not make another
Allows you to select one or more levels selection.
to include in the Levey-Jennings graph.
Point detail window field descriptions

screen or window.
Point value Point SD
Displays the value and units of the Displays the point value's standard
control point selected. deviation from the mean.
Mean 1 SD
Displays the expected mean of the Displays the +/- 1 standard deviation of
control data selected. the control data selected.
2 SD 3 SD
Displays the +/- 2 standard deviation of Displays the +/- 3 standard deviation of
the control data selected. the control data selected.
Time completed Flags
Displays the date and time the control Displays the flags associated with the
result completed. result. See Descriptions of patient
on when the control completed. process the control and generate the
result.
Codes Include / Exclude
Displays up to four single character Allows you to include the point again or
codes to indicate a processing exclude it.
processing codes, page 5-153. NOTE: You must enter a comment
before the point is included again or
excluded.
Westgard re-evaluation Comment
Allows you to re-evaluate a selected Allows you to enter a comment for the
control result after including or control point. You can enter up to 50
excluding the point. characters.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Calibration order screen field descriptions

screen or window.
C/P Starting C
Allows you to specify whether to run the Displays when you select the carrier
sample on the sample carrier or the button. Allows you to enter the starting
sample carousel (c System). ID for the carrier or LAS carousel (i
2000) in which you place the first
NOTE: This field is not displayed on control for processing.
an i 2000SR LAS.
2000SR LAS.
NOTE: The system automatically

increments the correct number of
positions required for the calibration
for up to five consecutive carriers.
Starting P Assays (list)
Displays the starting carousel position Lists the assays installed on the
(P) in which the calibrator will be placed system. If you select the carousel
for processing. button, only c System assays display.
NOTE: This field is not displayed on

an i 2000SR LAS.
Assay options (Calibration order) window field descriptions

screen or window.
Assay Calibrator name
Displays the name of the assay to be Displays the name of the calibrator set
processed. used to calibrate the assay.
Lot Expiration date
Allows you to enter the calibrator lot Allows you to enter the calibrator
number. expiration date.
Calibration type Number of levels
Displays the calibration type for the Displays the number of levels defined
assay selected. (i System) for the assay.
Allows you to select the calibration type
if configured for the assay. (c System)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

when you have a multi-module i as the Module selection option.
module.
Calibration status screen field descriptions

screen or window.
M ASSAY
Displays the module on which the Displays the name of the assay.
calibration was ordered and processed
for the reagent lot.
REAGENT LOT CAL DATE / TIME
Displays the lot number of the reagent. Displays the date and time of the last
calibration.
CAL STATUS EXP DATE / TIME
Displays the calibration status for the Displays the date and time the
reagent lot. See Calibration statuses, calibration curve expires. (c System)
page 6-18.
Find options (Calibration status and Calibration history) window field descriptions

screen or window.
Module Assay
Allows you to select the module on Allows you to search by assay name.
which you want to search. This field supports a wildcard (*)
search.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Reagent lot Curves with an expiration less than

Allows you to search by reagent lot Allows you to enter an expiration time
number. interval from 1-24 hours for a c System
This field supports a wildcard (*) calibration curve(s).
search.
Status
Allows you to search by calibration
Descriptions of calibration statuses,
page 6-17.
Calibration curve window - Linear assay view (c System) field descriptions

screen or window.
Assay Assay number
Displays the lot number of the reagent Displays the serial number of the
kit used to calibrate the assay. reagent used to obtain the calibration
curve.
Expiration date Calibration status
Displays the expiration date of the Displays the current Descriptions of
reagent lot number used for calibration. calibration statuses, page 6-17 of the
assay.
Cal date / time Cal method
Displays the date and time the Displays the mathematical procedure
calibration completed. used to analyze the data.
Calibration type Calibrator lot
Displays the calibration type for this Displays the lot number of the calibrator
assay. used to calibrate the assay.
Expiration date Module / Serial No.
Displays the expiration date of the Displays the module number and the
calibrator lot used to calibrate the serial number on which the assay was
assay. run.
Operator ID Error code
Displays the ID of the operator logged Displays the calibration error code and
on when the calibration was performed. message text, if any.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Curve expiration date / time Override curve expiration date

Displays the expiration date and time Allows you to override the calibration
for the full and adjust (assay specific) curve expiration date if the calibration
calibration curve. If the curve is expired, expiration override is configured On.
the date/time displays in red.
CAL ID CONC / UNITS
Displays the name of the calibrator. Displays the concentration value for
each level of calibrator defined in the
assay parameters.
CAL / ABSORBANCE CAL FACTOR
Displays the median absorbance value Displays the calibration factor for the
for the calibrator level. calibration level(s).
REP 1 REP 2
Displays the absorbance value or mV Displays the absorbance value or mV
value for replicate 1. value for replicate 2.
REP 3
Displays the absorbance value or mV
value for replicate 3.
Calibration curve window - Use cal factor / blank assay view (c System) field
descriptions

screen or window.
Assay Assay number
curve.
Displays the expiration date of the Displays the current calibration
reagent lot number used for calibration. Descriptions of calibration statuses,
page 6-17 of the assay.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

assay. run.
on when the last calibration was message text, if any.
performed.
Curve expiration date / time Reference assay
Displays the expiration date and time Displays the name of the assay from
for the full and adjust (assay specific) which the calibration data is referenced
calibration curve. If the curve is expired, when the calibration method is Use Cal
the date and time displays in red. factor/Blank.
CAL ID CONC / UNITS
Displays the name of the calibrator. Displays the concentration value for
each level of calibrator defined in the
assay parameters.
CAL / ABSORBANCE CAL FACTOR
Displays the median absorbance value Displays the calibration factor for the
for the calibrator level. calibration level(s).
REP 1 REP 2
REP 3
Displays the absorbance value or mV
value for replicate 3.

descriptions

screen or window.
Assay Assay number
curve.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Displays the expiration date of the Displays the current Descriptions of
reagent lot number used for calibration. calibration statuses, page 6-17 of the
assay.
Cal date / time Calibration type
Displays the date and time the Displays the calibration type for this
calibration completed. assay.
Calibrator lot Expiration date
Displays the lot number of the calibrator Displays the expiration date of the
used to calibrate the assay. calibrator lot used to calibrate the
assay.
Module / Serial No. Operator ID
Displays the module number and the Displays the ID of the operator logged
serial number on which the assay was on when the last calibration was
run. performed.
Error code Curve expiration date / time
Displays the calibration error code and Displays the expiration date and time
message text, if any. for the calibration curve. If the curve is
expired, the date and time displays in
red.
Override curve expiration date CAL ID
Allows you to override the calibration Displays the name of the calibrator.
curve expiration date if the calibration
expiration override is configured On.
CONC / UNITS CAL / mV
Displays the concentration value for Displays the median millivolt value for
each level of calibrator defined in the each calibrator level.
assay parameters.
CAL / SLOPE REP 1
Displays the percent response of the Displays the absorbance value or mV
ICT (integrated chip technology) value for replicate 1.
module for the low and high calibrators.
REP 2 REP 3
Calibration curve window - Adjust assay view (i System) field descriptions


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
screen or window.
Assay Assay number
curve.
assay. run.
performed.
Cal 1 ratio Cal 2 ratio
Displays the calibration 1 adjustment Displays the calibration 2 adjustment
ratio. ratio.
CAL ID MEAN RLU
Displays the name of the calibrator. Displays the mean of the calibrator
replicates RLU (relative light units).
REP 1 RLU REP 2 RLU
Displays the RLU value for replicate 1. Displays the RLU value for replicate 2.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
CONC / UNITS REF CAL RLU

Displays the concentration value for Displays the reference (master cal)
each level of calibrator defined in the data read from the 2-D reagent bar
assay parameters. code label on the microparticle bottle.
NOTE: The displayed concentration

is the default unit.
FIT CURVE RLU
Displays the fit curve RLU data for each
calibrator.
Calibration curve window - Index assay view (i System) field descriptions

screen or window.
Assay Assay number
curve.
assay. run.
performed.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
CAL ID MEAN RLU

Displays the mean of the calibrator
Displays the name of the calibrator. replicates RLU (relative light units).
REP 1 RLU REP 2 RLU

REP 3 RLU
Displays the RLU value for replicate 3.
Calibration curve window - Full assay view (i System) field descriptions

screen or window.
Assay Assay number
curve.
assay. run.
performed.
CAL ID CONC / UNITS
Displays the concentration value for
Displays the name of the calibrator. each level of calibrator defined in the
assay parameters.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
FIT CURVE RLU MEAN RLU

Displays the fit curve RLU (relative light Displays the mean of the calibrator
units) data for each calibrator. replicates.
REP 1 RLU REP 2 RLU
Calibration history screen field descriptions

screen or window.
M ASSAY
Displays the module on which the Displays the name of the assay.
calibration was ordered and processed
for the reagent lot.
REAGENT LOT CAL DATE / TIME
Displays the lot number of the reagent. Displays the date and time of the last
calibration.
CAL STATUS EXP DATE / TIME
Displays the calibration status for the Displays the date and time the
reagent lot. See Calibration statuses, calibration curve expires (c System).
page 6-18.
Archive calibration curves window field descriptions


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
screen or window.
in the format xxxxx\yyyyyyyy.Czz,
where:
System number
Czz represents the archive number
The calibration curve archive identifier
(.Czz) starts at 01 and increments for
each calibration curve archive created
on each new day.
selected for the archive from the space needed on the CD to perform the
Calibration history screen, page 6-25. archive.
Space available Delete inactive curves after archive
Displays the amount of space available Allows you to delete the inactive curves
the correct CD is not recognized, an Default: Delete inactive curves after
information message displays in this archive.
Stored QC results screen field descriptions

screen or window.
M C/P
Displays the number of the module that Displays one of the following sample
processed the control. locations:
(RSH/SSH)
(i 2000)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
SID CONTROL NAME

Displays the sample ID. Displays the name of the control that
processed.
LEVEL ASSAY
Displays the level of the control that Displays the name of the assay.
processed.
RESULT FLAG
Displays the value and units of the Displays the flags associated with the
stored result. result. See Descriptions of quality
Find options (Stored QC results) window field descriptions

screen or window.
Module Control name
Allows you to select the module in a Allows you to enter the control name
multi-module system to search on. you want to search for.
search.
C P
Allows you to enter one of the following: Allows you to enter the position (P)
Carrier ID (RSH/SSH) number you want to search on.

2000SR LAS.
LAS track
search.
2000SR LAS.
SID Control lot
Allows you to enter the sample ID. You Allows you to enter the lot number of
can enter up to 20 alphanumeric the control you want to search for.
characters. This field supports a wildcard (*)
This field supports a wildcard (*) search.
search.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay Reagent lot

Allows you to search for a specific Allows you to search by the reagent lot
assay ordered. number.
search. search.
Results with option Date from / to
Allows you to search for results with Allows you to enter a date range you
flags. want to search for.
NOTE: Do not enter multiple dates

when searching for a specific time
interval.
Time from / to Operator ID
Allows you to enter a time range you Allows you to search for the operator ID
want to search for. logged on to the system at the time the
NOTE: Do not enter multiple dates control order was placed.
when searching for a specific time This field supports a wildcard (*)
interval. search.
Status
Allows you to search by result status.
See Descriptions of test statuses,
page 5-152.
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Data view (c System) field
descriptions

screen or window.
SID C/P
locations:
Cuvette Control level
Displays the number of the cuvette Displays the name of the level for the
used to process results. control result.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Bay Assay
Assay number Result
Displays the number defined for the Displays the value and units of the
assay. control result.
Absorbance Control range
Displays the response value used in Displays the control range configured
calculating the result. when you created the control during
mV (ICT only) QC configuration.

only)

Dilution Flags
Codes Status
computer).
Module / Serial No. Time completed
Displays the module number and the Displays the date and time the control
serial number on which the assay was completed.
run.
Operator ID Time of cal
Displays the ID of the operator logged Displays the date and time the reagent
on when the last calibration was lot calibration was completed.
performed.
process the control and generate the reagent used to obtain the QC result.
result.
Comment
Displays the comment entered for the
QC result.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Photometric - graph view (c


screen or window.
SID C/P
locations:
Control level Bay
Displays the name of the level for the Displays the bay in which you loaded
control result. the sample. (RSH)
Displays the wavelength and reaction
type.
this table.
POINT - Displays the read points 1
through 33.
PRIMARY- Displays the absorbance
primary wavelength.
SECONDARY - Displays the
Graph Y axis scale
Assay Flags

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Result Cuvette
Displays the value and units of the Displays the number of the cuvette
control result. used to process results.
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i System) field descriptions

screen or window.
SID C/P
locations:
(RSH/SSH)
(i 2000)
Control level Bay or Section
Displays the name of the level for the Displays the bay or section in which
control result. you loaded the sample. (RSH)
Assay Assay number
Result RLU
Displays the value and units of the Displays the response value in RLUs
control result. (relative light units) used to calculate
the result.
Control range Dilution
Displays the control range configured Displays the dilution used for this test.
when you created the control during
QC configuration.
Flags Codes

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Status Module / Serial No.

Displays the status of the result as Displays the module number and the
follows: serial number on which the assay was
Complete - Results have completed run.
computer).
Displays the date and time the control Displays the ID of the operator logged
was processed. on when the control completed.
Time of cal Reagent lot
Displays the date and time the reagent Displays the reagent lot used to
lot calibration completed. process the control and generate the
result.
Reagent S / N Comment
Displays the serial number of the Displays the comment entered for the
reagent used to obtain the result. QC result.
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Calculated field descriptions

screen or window.
SID C/P
locations:
(RSH/SSH)
(i 2000)
Module / Serial No. Control level
Displays the module number and the Displays the level that was run for the
serial number on which the assay was control.
run.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Bay Assay
Constituent assays (table) Assay number
Displays the following information for Displays the number defined for the
the constituent assays used to assay.
Module (M)
Assay
Result
Flags
Result Control range
Displays the value and unit of the Displays the control range configured
result. when you created the control during
QC configuration.
Flags Codes
Displays the status of the result as Displays the date and time the control
follows: was processed.
computer).
Operator ID Comment
Displays the ID of the operator logged Displays the comment entered for the
on when the control completed. QC result.
Archive QC results window field descriptions


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
screen or window.
in the format xxxxx\yyyyyyyy.Qzz,
where:
System number
Qzz represents the archive number
The QC archive identifier (.Qzz) starts
at 01 and increments for each QC
archive created on each new day.
selected for the archive from the Stored space needed on the CD to perform the
results screen, page 5-262. archive.
Space available Delete records after archive
Displays the amount of space available Allows you to delete the result records
the correct CD is not recognized, an Default: Delete records after archive.
information message displays in this
QC reports screen field descriptions

screen or window.
Module Date from / to
Allows you to select a processing Allows you to enter the date range to
module to be used for the report. be used for the report.

Controls
Allows you to select the control(s) to
include in the report.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
QC summary review screen field descriptions

screen or window.
Date range M
Displays the date range used for the Displays the number of the module that
calculation. processed the control.

Assay CONTROL NAME/LOT
Displays the name of the assay. Displays the name and lot number of
the control.
Level N
Displays the name of the control level. Displays the number of control points
within the specified date range.
ACTUAL MEAN ACTUAL SD
Displays the calculated mean of the QC Displays the calculated standard
data. deviation of the QC data.
% CV EXPECTED MEAN
Displays the calculated percent Displays the expected mean configured
coefficient of variation of the QC data. for the control level.
EXPECTED SD
Displays the expected standard
deviation configured for the control
level.
Find options (QC summary review) window field descriptions

screen or window.
Allows you to enter the control name Allows you to enter the lot number of
you want to search for. the control you want to search for.
search. search.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Level SID
Allows you to search for a specific Allows you to enter the sample ID you
control. want to search for. You can enter up to
search.
Assay Results with
Allows you to search for a specific Allows you to search for results with
assay ordered. Flags.
search.
Details for QC summary window field descriptions

screen or window.
Assay Control lot
Displays the name of the assay. Displays the lot number of the control.
Displays the name of the control. Displays the name of the control level.
Date range Module/Serial No.
Displays the date range entered for the Displays the module number and the
QC summary. serial number on which the assay was
run.
Expected Manufacturer
Displays the expected mean and Displays the manufacturer's mean and
standard deviation configured. standard deviation configured.
Actual data for date range System data for date range
Displays the data calculated for the Displays the data calculated for the
specified module and date range. specified date range for all processing
modules in a multi-module i System.
This data is the same as the actual
data for date range for other system
configurations.
Module cumulative System cumulative
Displays the cumulative data calculated Displays the cumulative data calculated
for the specified module. for all processing modules in a
multi-module i System. This data is the
same as the module cumulative data
for other system configurations.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Exceptions icon screens and windows

The Exceptions icon allows you to access the menu items Exception
status and Rerun status.
Exceptions icon screens and windows topics include:
Exception status screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-97
Find options (Exception status) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-98
Details for exceptions window - Data view (c System) field
Details for exceptions window - Photometric - graph view (c System)
Details for exceptions window (i System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-102
Details for exceptions window - Calculated view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-103
Details for exceptions window - Control view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-104
Details for exceptions window - Calculated control view field
Details for exceptions window - Calibrator view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-107
Rerun status screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-108
Exception status screen field descriptions

screen or window.
C/P SID
CRSL (c System sample carousel) The control name and level for
LAS (laboratory automation system) control orders
LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) The calibrator name and level for
(i 2000) calibration orders

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NAME ASSAY
Displays the name or PID, which can Displays the name of the assay
be one of the following: requested for processing.
The patient's name for patient
samples
control orders
calibration orders
M ERROR CODE
Displays the number of the module that Displays the numeric error code for the
generated the exception. This field is exception and the error code text that
blank when the test cannot be assigned describes the error that occurred.
to or processed on a module.

Find options (Exception status) window field descriptions

screen or window.
Module Name
Allows you to select the module in a Allows you to enter the patient, control,
multi-module system to search on. or calibrator name you want to search
for.
search.
C P

2000SR LAS.
LAS track
search.
2000SR LAS.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Bay or Section SID

This field supports a wildcard (*) search
Assay Error code
Allows you to search for a specific Allows you to enter the error code you
assay. want to search for.
search.
Status
Allows you to search by the following
statuses:
Pending transmission
Pending collation
See Descriptions of test statuses,
page 5-152.
Details for exceptions window - Data view (c System) field descriptions

screen or window.
locations: serial number of the module that
Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH) processed the exception.
Name Gender
SID Date of birth
patient.
PID Bay
host.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay Assay number

processed. assay.
Dilution Absorbance
Displays the dilution used for the test. Displays the response value used in
calculating the result.
mV (ICT only)
only)

Codes Cuvette
Displays up to four single character Displays the number of the cuvette
codes to indicate a processing used to process the exception.
processing codes, page 5-153. NOTE: The cuvette number does not
display if the test was not dispensed.
Error code Time completed
Displays the exception error code Displays the date and time the test
number and text. exception occurred.
on when the test was ordered. process the test and generate the
exception.
doctor. reagent used when the exception
occurred.
the patient. lot calibration completed.
characters.
Details for exceptions window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field

descriptions


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
screen or window.
Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH) processed the exception.
Name Gender
SID Date of birth
patient.
PID Bay
Displays the patient ID. Displays the bay in which you loaded
the sample. (RSH)
Displays the wavelength and reaction
type.
this table.
Displays the following information:
Point - Displays the read points 1
through 33.
primary wavelength.
Graph Y axis scale

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay Codes
Displays the name of the assay that Displays up to four single character
processed. codes to indicate a processing
Cuvette condition(s). See Descriptions of
Displays the number of the cuvette
used to process the exception.
NOTE: The cuvette number does not

display if the test was not dispensed.
Details for exceptions window (i System) field descriptions

screen or window.
Carrier ID (C) and position (P) processed the exception.
(RSH/SSH)
(i 2000)
Name Gender
SID Date of birth
patient.
PID Bay or Section
host.
Assay Assay number
processed. assay.
Dilution RLU
Displays the dilution used for the test. Displays the response value in RLUs
(relative light units) used to calculate
the result.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Codes Error code

Displays up to four single character Displays the exception error code
codes to indicate a processing number and text.
Displays the date and time the test was Displays the ID of the operator logged
ordered. on when the test was ordered.
Reagent lot Doctor
Displays the reagent lot used to Displays the name of the patient's
process the test and generate the doctor.
exception
reagent used when the exception the patient.
occurred.
lot calibration completed. was drawn.
Comment
characters.
Details for exceptions window - Calculated view field descriptions

screen or window.
(RSH/SSH)
(i 2000)
Name Gender

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
SID Date of birth

patient.
PID Bay or Section
host.
Constituent assays (table) Assay
Displays the following for the Displays the name of the assay that
constituent assays used to determine processed.
the calculated result.
Module (M)
Assay
Result
Flags
Assay number Codes
Displays the number defined for the Displays up to four single character
assay. codes to indicate a processing
Error code Time completed
Displays the exception error code Displays the date and time the test
number and text. exception occurred.
Operator ID Doctor
Displays the ID of the operator logged Displays the name of the patient's
on when the test was ordered. doctor.
Location Draw date / time
Displays the location associated with Displays the date and time the sample
the patient. was drawn.
Comment
characters.
Details for exceptions window - Control view field descriptions


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
screen or window.
(RSH/SSH)
(i 2000)
Name Lot
Displays the name of the patient. Displays the control lot run.
SID Level
Displays the sample ID. Displays the name of the control level.
Displays the bay or section in which Displays the name of the assay that
you loaded the sample. (RSH) processed.
Assay number Dilution
Displays the number defined for the Displays the dilution used for the test.
assay.
RLU Codes
Displays the response value used in Displays up to four single character
calculating the result: codes to indicate a processing
RLU (i System) condition(s). See Descriptions of
Absorbance (photometric)
mV - (ICT)

Result Error code
This field is blank for control Displays the exception error code
exceptions. number and text.
Displays the date and time the test Displays the ID of the operator logged
exception occurred. on when the test was ordered.
Reagent lot Doctor
Displays the reagent lot used to This field is blank for control
process the control and generate the exceptions.
exception

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Displays the serial number of the This field is blank for control
reagent used when the exception exceptions.
occurred.
Displays the date and time the reagent This field is blank for control
lot calibration completed. exceptions.
Comment
characters.
Details for exceptions window - Calculated control view field descriptions

screen or window.
locations: system serial number that processed
Carrier ID (C) and position (P) the exception.
(RSH/SSH)
(i 2000)
Name Lot
Displays the name of the patient. Displays the control lot run.
SID Level
Displays the sample ID. Displays the name of the control level.
Bay Constituent assays (table)
Displays the bay in which you loaded Displays the following for the
the sample. (RSH) constituent assays used to determine
the calculated result.
Module (M)
Assay
Result
Flags
Assay Assay number
processed. assay.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Codes Error code

Displays up to four single character Displays the exception error code
codes to indicate a processing number and text.
exception occurred. on when the test was ordered.
Comment
characters.
Details for exceptions window - Calibrator view field descriptions

screen or window.
(RSH/SSH)
(i 2000)
Name Lot
Displays the name and level of the This field is blank for calibrator
calibrator. exceptions.
SID Type
Displays the sample ID. Displays the type of calibration run.
Displays the bay or section in which Displays the name of the assay that
you loaded the sample. (RSH) processed.
Assay number Dilution
Displays the number defined for the Displays the dilution used for the test.
assay.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
RLU Codes
Displays the response value used in Displays up to four single character
calculating the result: codes to indicate a processing
RLU (i System) condition(s). See Descriptions of
Absorbance (photometric)
mV - (ICT)

Result Error code
Displays a blank field as the system is Displays the exception error code
unable calculate the result due to the number and text.
exception error.
exception occurred. on when the calibration was ordered.
process the test and generate the reagent used when the exception
exception occurred.
Time of cal Comment
Displays the date and time the reagent Allows you to enter a comment for the
lot calibration was completed. result. You can enter up to
approximately 50 characters.
Rerun status screen field descriptions

screen or window.
C/P SID
CRSL (c System sample carousel) The control name and level for
LAS (laboratory automation system) control orders

(i 2000)


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NAME ASSAY
Displays the name or PID, which can Displays the name of the assay.
be one of the following:
The patient's name for patient
samples
control orders
STATUS TIME
Displays the current status of the assay Displays the time the order will
you ordered. See Descriptions of test complete (in 24 hour format). Time
statuses, page 5-152. information displays for all samples
CODE with a status of Running.
Reagents icon screens and windows

The Reagents icon allows you to access the menu items Reagent status
and Reagent history.
Reagents icon screens and windows topics include:
Reagent status screen - c System field descriptions, page Appendix
E-110
Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR field descriptions,
page Appendix E-111
Reagent status screen - View all view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-112
Details for reagent (Reagent status) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-113
Assign location window (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix
E-114
Find options (Reagent status) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-115
Find options (Reagent status - View all) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-115
Reagent history screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-116
Details for reagent (history) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-117

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Reagent status screen - c System field descriptions

screen or window.
Module R1 carousel graphic
Allows you to select an individual Displays the R1 supply center
module or all modules to view reagent segments and positions. Positions may
status information. be colored as follows:
White - No reagent is loaded in the
position
Teal - Reagent with an OK status
loaded in the position
Gold - Reagent with a Low Alert or
Overridden status loaded in the
position
Red - Reagent with an error
condition that requires your attention
R2 carousel graphic R1, R2
Displays the R2 supply center Displays the reagent supply center
segments and positions. Positions may position of a specific R1 and R2
be colored as follows: reagent.
position
position
ASSAY CAL STATUS
Displays the name of the assay using Displays the calibration status for the
the reagent kit. assay using the reagent kit. See
page 6-17.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
REMAINING TESTS REAGENT STATUS

Displays an estimated number of tests Displays the status of the reagent kit.
remaining in the reagent kit. See Descriptions of reagent statuses,
page 5-69.
NOTE: When you load a new bar
For statuses other than OK,
coded reagent and it is scanned, the
Overridden, and Low Alert text in the
system calculates the number of
list associated with the reagent kit
remaining tests in the cartridge using
displays red. In addition, the caution
the maximum cartridge capacity
symbol displays on the Reagent status
instead of the actual fill volume. The
button on the processing module
remaining tests number updates
graphic on the Snapshot screen,
when the system aspirates the
page 1-18. See Descriptions of reagent
reagent and a liquid level sense
occurs.
Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR field descriptions

screen or window.
Module Reagent carousel graphic
Allows you to select an individual Displays the reagent carousel
module or all modules to view reagent positions. Positions may be colored as
status information. follows:
position
position
P ASSAY
Displays the carousel position of a Displays the calibration status for the
specific reagent. Some assays require assay using the reagent kit. See
two adjacent carousel positions. Descriptions of calibration statuses,
page 6-17.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
CAL STATUS REMAINING TESTS

Displays the calibration status for the Displays the number of tests remaining
assay using the reagent kit. See in the reagent kit.
page 6-17.
REAGENT STATUS
Displays the status of the reagent kit.
For statuses other than OK,
Overridden, and Low Alert text in the
list associated with the reagent kit
displays red. In addition, the caution
symbol displays on the Reagent status
button on the processing module
graphic on the Snapshot screen,
page 1-18. See Descriptions of reagent
Reagent status screen - View all view field descriptions

screen or window.
Module M/P
Allows you to select an individual Displays the module and position of a
module or all modules to view reagent specific reagent kit.
status information.
ASSAY CAL STATUS
Displays the name of the assay using Displays the calibration status for the
the reagent kit. assay using the reagent kit.
REAGENT LOT REMAINING TESTS
Displays the reagent lot number. Displays an estimated number of tests
remaining in the reagent kit (c System).

system calculates an estimated
number of tests remaining in the
cartridge using the maximum
cartridge capacity instead of the
actual fill volume. This number
updates when the system aspirates
the reagent and a liquid level sense
occurs. (c System)
Displays the number of tests remaining
in the reagent kit (i System).

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
REAGENT STATUS EXP. DATE

Displays the status of the reagent kit. Displays the date the reagent expires. If
For statuses other than OK, Mixing (i you override the expiration, Overridden
System), and Overridden, text in the list displays.
associated with the reagent kit displays
red. In addition, the caution symbol
displays on the reagent status button
on the processing module graphic on
the Snapshot screen, page 1-18. See
Descriptions of reagent statuses,
page 5-69.
STABILITY
Displays the number of onboard
stability days remaining for the reagent
kit. If the time remaining is less than 24
hours, <1 displays. (c System)
Details for reagent (Reagent status) window field descriptions

screen or window.
Reagent lot number Reagent status
Displays the lot number for the reagent Displays the status for each reagent kit.
kit. See Descriptions of reagent statuses,
page 5-69.
Expiration date Remaining tests
Displays the expiration date of the Displays an estimated number of tests
reagent kit. remaining in the reagent kit (c System).

occurs. (c System)

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Onboard stability: Assay info (table)

Displays the number of hours Displays the following information for
remaining for stability tracking. (c each assay using the selected reagent
System) kit:
Displays the number of days remaining Module
for stability tracking. (i System) Assay / Number
Component info (table) Assay Version
Displays the following information for Cal Status
each bottle / cartridge in the reagent
kit:
Position
S/N
Remaining Tests (c System)
Control No. (i System)
Assign location window (c System) field descriptions

screen or window.
Reagent kits (table) Lot number
Displays non-bar coded reagent and Displays the lot number for the reagent
sample diluent kits currently configured kit.
on the system and their locations if they
have already been assigned a location.
R1 / R2 - Displays the location of the
reagent kit
Reagent - Displays the name of the
reagent kit
Serial number Expiration date
Displays the serial number for the Displays the expiration date for the
reagent kit. reagent kit.
R1 / R2 cartridge size Select location
Displays the size of the cartridge the Allows you to select the location in:
reagent kit is using for R1 and R2. Reagent supply center 1 - To load
the cartridge, and then to enter the
NOTE: If the kit is an R1 cartridge
position in which you will load the
only, R2 cartridge size does not
cartridge.
display.
Reagent supply center 2- To load the
cartridge, and then to enter the
position in which you will load the
cartridge.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Find options (Reagent status) window field descriptions

screen or window.
P Assay
Allows you to search on the position in Allows you to search by assay name.
which the reagent is loaded.
NOTE: For c System processing

modules, if a carousel position is not
selected the search includes the R1
and R2 reagent carousels.
Carousel (c System) Reagent status
Allows you to search for the reagent kit Allows you to search for the reagent kit
by its specific carousel location. by its status. See Descriptions of
reagent statuses, page 5-69.
NOTE: You must enter a position
before the R1 and R2 checkboxes
become available.
Cal status
Allows you to search for the reagent kit
by its calibration status. See
page 6-17.
Find options (Reagent status - View all) window field descriptions
NOTE: The same Find options window displays from both the Reagent
status screen - View all view and the Reagent history screen.
screen or window.
Module P
Allows you to search by module to Allows you to search on the position in
locate the reagent kit. which the reagent is loaded.
NOTE: For c System processing

modules, if a carousel position is not
selected the search includes the R1
and R2 reagent carousels.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay Carousel (c System)

Allows you to search by assay name. Allows you to search for the reagent kit
by its specific carousel location.
NOTE: You must enter a position

before the R1 and R2 checkboxes
become available.
S/N Control no. (i System)
Allows you to search by the serial Allows you to search by the control
number of the reagent kit. number of the reagent kit.
Reagent lot Reagent status
Allows you to search by the reagent lot Allows you to search for the reagent kit
number for the reagent kit. by its status. See Descriptions of
Cal status reagent statuses, page 5-69.
Allows you to search for the reagent kit
by its calibration status. See
page 6-17.
Reagent history screen field descriptions

screen or window.
M/P ASSAY
Displays the module and position of a Displays the name of the assay using
specific reagent kit. the reagent kit.
CAL STATUS REAGENT LOT
Displays the calibration status for the Displays the reagent lot number.
assay using the reagent kit. See
page 6-17.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
REMAINING TESTS REAGENT STATUS

Displays an estimated number of tests Displays the status of the reagent kit.
remaining in the reagent kit (c System). For statuses other than OK, Mixing (i
System), and Overridden, text in the list
associated with the reagent kit displays
red. In addition, the caution symbol
displays on the reagent status button
on the processing module graphic on
the Snapshot screen. See Descriptions
occurs. (c System)
EXP. DATE STABILITY
Displays the date the reagent expires. If Displays the number of onboard
the user overrides the expiration, stability days remaining for the reagent
Overridden displays. kit. If the time remaining is less than 24
hours, <1 displays (c System).
Details for reagent (history) window field descriptions

screen or window.
Reagent lot number Reagent status
Displays the lot number for the reagent Displays the status for each reagent kit.
kit. See Descriptions of reagent statuses,
page 5-69.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Expiration date Remaining tests

Displays the expiration date of the Displays an estimated number of tests
reagent kit. remaining in the reagent kit (c System).

occurs. (c System)
Onboard stability Assay info (table)
Displays the number of hours Displays the following information for
remaining for stability tracking. (c each assay using the selected reagent
System) kit:
Displays the number of days remaining Module
for stability tracking. (i System) Assay / Number
Component info (table) Assay version
Displays following information for each Cal status
bottle / cartridge in the reagent kit:
Position
S/N
Remaining Tests (c System)
Control no. (i System)
Supplies icon screens and windows

The Supplies status icon allows you to access the menu item Supply
status.
Supplies icon screens and windows topics include:
Supply status screen - c System view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-119
Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-119
Update supplies window - c System view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-120
Update supplies window - i 2000/i 2000SR view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-121

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Supply status screen - c System view field descriptions

screen or window.
Module ICT reference
Allows you to select a module to view Displays the volume remaining in mL
supply status information. and % for the supply of ICT (integrated
chip technology) reference solution
onboard. When approximately 400 mL
(20%) remains, the arrow changes from
gray to red.
NOTE: If the system is configured

with no ICT module installed, the ICT
reference solutions icon is grayed
out.
Alkaline wash Acid wash
Displays the volume remaining in mL Displays the volume remaining in mL
and % for the supply of alkaline wash and % for the supply of acid wash
solution onboard. When approximately solution onboard. When approximately
100 mL (20%) remains, the arrow 100 mL (20%) remains, the arrow
changes from gray to red. changes from gray to red.
Reagent supply center 1 Reagent supply center 2
Displays the position and onboard Displays the position and onboard
solution name as configured for solution name as configured for
reagent supply center 1. reagent supply center 2.
Sample carousel Waste icon
Displays the sample carousel position Displays the high-concentration waste
for the wash solutions and the onboard bottle status.
status.
NOTE: If the system is configured
Cup icon status:
with no high-concentration waste
Clear - OK bottle installed, the waste icon is
Red - Empty grayed out.
Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view field descriptions


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
screen or window.
Module Solid waste
Allows you to select a module to view Displays the amount of available space
supply status information. in the container measured in number of
RVs (reaction vessels) and %
remaining. When approximately 20%
remains the arrow changes from gray
to red.
RVs remaining Wash buffer
Displays the approximate number of Displays the amount of wash buffer
RVs remaining on the system. Each remaining on the system measured in
icon represents 50 RVs. When liters. When approximately 20% (5
approximately 20% (240 RVs) remains liters) remains, the arrow changes from
the arrow changes from gray to red. gray to red.
Trigger Pre-Trigger
Displays the amount of trigger Displays the amount of pre-trigger
remaining on the system measured in remaining on the system measured in
milliliters. When approximately 20% milliliters. When approximately 20%
(195 mL) remains, the arrow changes (195 mL) remains, the arrow changes
from gray to red. from gray to red.
NOTE: Stability displays the number NOTE: Stability displays the number
of days remaining for onboard of days remaining for onboard
stability of the trigger solution. When stability of the pre-trigger solution.
the stability reaches zero days, When the stability reaches zero
EXPIRED displays next to the name. days, EXPIRED displays next to the
If trigger solution is configured for name. If pre-trigger solution is
expiration override, OVERRIDDEN configured for expiration override,
displays next to the name. OVERRIDDEN displays next to the
name.
Update supplies window - c System view field descriptions


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
screen or window.
Bulk solutions Reagent supply centers (R1 / R2)
Select the following bulk solution to Select the following onboard solutions
indicate that you loaded a new bottle in to indicate that you loaded a new
the supply center: cartridge in reagent supply centers R1
ICT reference and R2:
Alkaline wash 0.5% Acid wash

Acid wash Detergent A
Sample carousel 10% Detergent B
Select the following wash solutions to

indicate that you loaded a new sample
cup/tube with wash solution:
0.5% Acid wash
Detergent A
Update supplies window - i 2000/i 2000SR view field descriptions

screen or window.
Solid waste RVs added
Select the check box to indicate that Allows you to enter the number of RVs
you emptied the solid waste container. (reaction vessels) you added. Select
500 (one bag), 1000 (two bags), or
Other (partial bag) as appropriate. If
you added a partial bag, you must also
enter the estimated number of RVs you
added.
Wash buffer Trigger
Select to load buffer into the 25 L wash Select to indicate you loaded a new
buffer reservoir. bottle of trigger solution.
Pre-Trigger
Select to indicate you loaded a new
bottle of pre-trigger solution.
System icon screens and windows

The System icon allows you to access the menu items Maintenance,
Diagnostics, System logs, Configuration, and Utilities.
System icon screens and windows topics include:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Maintenance screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-127

Maintenance Perform window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-128
Version details for procedure (maintenance) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-129
Details for maintenance item window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-129
Maintenance log screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-130
Approve maintenance log window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-130
Details for maintenance log screen field descriptions, page Appendix
E-131
Diagnostics screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-131
Diagnostic perform window field descriptions, page Appendix E-132
Version details for procedure (diagnostics) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-133
System logs screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-133
Find options (System logs) window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-134
Configuration screen - System settings view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-134
Configure sample ordering window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-135
Details for sample ordering window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-136
Configure host - release mode window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-137
Details for host - release mode window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-139
Configure reports printing window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-140
Details for reports printing window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-140
Configure reagents - supplies window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-141

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Details for reagents - supplies window field descriptions,

page Appendix E-143
Configure password window field descriptions, page Appendix E-144
Details for password window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-144
Configure system control center window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-145
Details for system control center window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-146
Configure modules window (c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-147
Details for modules window (c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-148
Configure modules window (i 2000) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-148
Details for modules window (i 2000) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-149
Configure modules window (i 2000SR) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-149
Details for modules window (i 2000SR) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-150
Configure sample handler window (RSH) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-151
Details for sample handler window (RSH) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-151
Details for sample handler window (SSH) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-152
Configure sample handler window (LAS - standard) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-152
Details for sample handler window (LAS - standard) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-152
Details for sample handler window (LAS - Hitachi) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-153
Configure bar codes window field descriptions, page Appendix E-153
Details for bar codes window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-155

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Configure serial ports window field descriptions, page Appendix

E-156
Details for serial ports window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-157
Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view field
Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view field
Import assay window field descriptions, page Appendix E-158
Export assay window field descriptions, page Appendix E-160
Configure assay parameters window - General view (i System) field
Details for assay parameters window - General view (i System) field
Configure assay parameters window - General view (calculated) field
Details for assay parameters window - General view (calculated) field
view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix
E-165
E-168
(photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-169
E-171
Configure assay parameters window - General - ICT view field
Details for assay parameters window - General - ICT view field

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System) field

Details for assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System)
E-184
E-185
Configure assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System) field
Details for assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System) field
Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System)
Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1 probe view (c System) field
Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view (c System) field

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Add / edit SmartWash window - Cuvette view (c System) field

Details for assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System)
Configure assay parameters window - Results view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-193
Configure results parameters window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-194
Details for assay parameters window - Results view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-195
Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view field
Details for assay parameters window - Interpretation view field
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - User-defined assay
Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - User-defined assay
Configure result units window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-199
Details for result units window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-200
Configure panel definitions window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-200
Details for panel definition window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-201
Configure assay retest rules window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-201
Add / edit assay retest rules window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-202
Details for assay retest rules window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-204

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Configuration screen - QC-Cal settings view field descriptions,

page Appendix E-205
Configure single analyte window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-206
Details for single analyte window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-206
Configure multiconstituent control window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-207
Define data window field descriptions, page Appendix E-208
Details for multiconstituent control window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-209
Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-210
Details for multiconstituent bar code SID window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-211
Configure Westgard window field descriptions, page Appendix E-211
Details for Westgard window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-211
Configure calibrator set window (c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-212
Details for calibrator set window (c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-212
Utilities screen - Software install view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-212
Utilities screen - Backup software view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-213
Create backup window field descriptions, page Appendix E-213
Print options window field descriptions, page Appendix E-213
Printer window field descriptions, page Appendix E-214
Maintenance screen field descriptions


(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
screen or window.
Module MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES (box)
Allows you to select the module on Displays a list of procedures you can
which you want to perform perform for the selected module and
maintenance. category.
Categories
Displays the following categories for
maintenance procedures that can be
performed on a selected module:
To do
Daily
Weekly
Monthly
Quarterly
As needed
In process
See Maintenance categories and
procedure descriptions, page 9-20.
Maintenance Perform window field descriptions

screen or window.
Category Procedure
Displays the category of the Displays the name of the maintenance
maintenance procedure you selected. procedure you selected.
Operator ID Module
Displays the name of the operator who Displays the module on which the
is currently logged on to the system. maintenance procedure will be
performed on.
Status INSTRUCTIONS (box)
Displays the status of the maintenance Displays the instructions for each step
procedure. See Maintenance statuses, of the maintenance procedure.
page 9-20.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
User Input Keypad

Allows you to select the Proceed button Displays buttons specific to the
to continue the procedure. procedure. These buttons correspond
to the L1 - L4 keys on the processing
NOTE: Input field buttons change module keypad. You can select the
depending on the procedure. keys on the SCC (system control
center) or the processing module
keypad.
Result Activity
Displays the results of the procedure. Displays the activity of the module
while performing the procedure. When
you select Activity, the Results window
toggles to the Activity window.
Version details for procedure (maintenance) window field descriptions

screen or window.
Procedure name Current version
Displays the name of the procedure. Displays the current version of the
maintenance procedure you selected.
Category Status to perform procedure
Displays the category of the Displays the status the module must be
maintenance procedure. in for you to perform the procedure.
User access level See Maintenance statuses, page 9-20.
Displays the user access level required

to perform the procedure.
Details for maintenance item window field descriptions


ABBOTT ARCHITECT C16000c8000i2000i2000srci8200ci16200

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

ABBOTT ARCHITECT C16000c8000i2000i2000srci8200ci16200

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

ARCHITECT

Abbott Laboratories 1998, 2007 Abbott Laboratories

Read me first. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Read me-1

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-1

Access the online operations manual . . . . . System documentation-27

Table of contents-2 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

SCC standard components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-3

Lamp (c 8000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42

Table of contents-4 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

Sample and STAT pipettors (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-5

Sample handlers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-115

Table of contents-6 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

Trigger solution (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-144

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-7

Configure a QC run definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Table of contents-8 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

Change the onboard solution options (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-9

Configuration screen - Assay settings view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65

Table of contents-10 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

View the default dilution setting (photometric - c System)2-101

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-11

Details for assay parameters window - General view (i System) . . . .

Table of contents-12 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-13

Configure a new single analyte control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176

Table of contents-14 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

Software installation and backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-209

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-15

SmartWash feature (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Table of contents-16 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

SCC clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-17

Sample bar code label placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

Table of contents-18 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

Access the Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view . . . . . . . 5-29

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-19

Windows - Reagent status screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

Table of contents-20 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

Patient order screens and views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-21

View the status of ordered tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154

Table of contents-22 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

Load samples and initiate sample processing (sample carousel - c

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-23

Add a comment to a patient result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-229

Table of contents-24 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

Rerun status screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-257

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-25

Windows - Stored QC results screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-286

Table of contents-26 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

Display the value for a Levey-Jennings point . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-318

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-27

Calibration procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Table of contents-28 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

views (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-29

Physical hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Table of contents-30 Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

6019 Check ICT Components graphic (c 8000). . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44